ShellGallery 55

A Gallery of Document Shells
for
°
Scientific WorkPlace
R
and
°
Scientific Word
R
Version 5
A Gallery of Document Shells
for
°
Scientific WorkPlace
R
and
°
Scientific Word
R
Version 5
Susan Bagby
George Pearson
MacKichan Software, Inc.
c
°2003 by MacKichan Software, Inc. All rights reserved. No part of this book may be repro-
duced, stored in a retrieval system, or transcribed, in any form or by any means—electronic,
mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise—without the prior written permission of the
publisher, MacKichan Software, Inc., Poulsbo, Washington. Information in this document is sub-
ject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of the publisher.
The software described in this document is furnished under a license agreement and may be used
or copied only in accordance with the terms of the agreement. It is against the law to copy the
software on any medium except as specifically allowed in the agreement.
Printed in the United States of America
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Trademarks
Scientific WorkPlace, Scientific Word, Scientific Notebook, and EasyMath are registered
trademarks of MacKichan Software, Inc. EasyMath is the sophisticated parsing and translating
system included in Scientific WorkPlace, Scientific Word, and Scientific Notebook that al-
lows the user to work in standard mathematical notation, request computations from the under-
lying computational system (MuPAD in this version) based on the implied commands embedded
in the mathematical syntax or via menu, and receive the response in typeset standard notation or
graphic form in the current document. MuPAD is a registered trademark of SciFace GmbH. Acro-
bat is the registered trademark of Adobe Systems, Inc. TEX is a trademark of the American Math-
ematical Society. TrueTEX is a registered trademark of Richard J. Kinch. PDFTEX is the copyright
of Hàn Thế Thành and is available under the GNU public license. Windows is a registered trade-
mark of Microsoft Corporation. MathType is a trademark of Design Science, Inc. ImageStream
Graphics Filters and ImageStream are registered trademarks of Inso Kansas City Corporation:
ImageStream Graphic Filters
Copyright 1991-1999
Inso Kansas City Corporation
All Rights Reserved
All other brand and product names are trademarks of their respective companies. The spelling
portion of this product utilizes the Proximity Linguistic Technology. Words are checked against
one or more of the following Proximity Linguibase° R
products:
Number Proximity
Linguibase Name Publisher of Words Copyright
American English Merriam-Webster, Inc. 144,000 1997
British English William Collins Sons & Co. Ltd. 80,000 1997
Catalan Lluis de Yzaguirre i Maura 484,000 1993
Danish IDE a.s 169,000 1990
Dutch Van Dale Lexicografie bv 223,000 1996
Finnish IDE a.s 191,000 1991
French Hachette 288,909 1997
French Canadian Hachette 288,909 1997
German Bertelsmann Lexikon Verlag 500,000 1999
German (Swiss) Bertelsmann Lexikon Verlag 500,000 1999
Italian William Collins Sons & Co. Ltd. 185,000 1997
Norwegian (Bokmal) IDE a.s 150,000 1990
Norwegian (Nynorsk) IDE a.s 145,000 1992
Polish MorphoLogic, Inc. 1997
Portuguese (Brazilian) William Collins Sons & Co. Ltd. 210,000 1990
Portuguese (Continental) William Collins Sons & Co. Ltd. 218,000 1990
Russian Russicon 1997
Spanish William Collins Sons & Co. Ltd. 215,000 1997
Swedish IDE a.s 900,000 1990
This document was produced with Scientific WorkPlace.

Authors: Susan Bagby and George Pearson
Editorial Assistant: John MacKendrick
Compositor: MacKichan Software Inc.
Printing and Binding: Malloy Lithographing, Inc.
Contents
What’s New xix
About This Manual xix
Typesetting Basics xx
Producing Documents with Typesetting xx
Producing Documents without Typesetting xxi
Understanding the Differences in the Final Product xxi
Getting Help xxii

Online Help xxii
Supplemental Technical Documents xxiii
Obtaining Technical Support xxiii
Additional Information xxiv
1 Using Document Shells 1
Understanding Document Shells 1

LATEX Document Classes 2
LATEX Class Options 2
Other Document Classes 6
LATEX Packages 7
Choosing a Document Shell 7

vi Contents
Part I Gallery of Shell Documents 9
2 Article Shells 11
A Simple MIT Press Article 12
AASTeX Journal 14
Academic Press Journals 16
Academic Press Journals - Modified 18
American Chemical Society 20
American Statistical Association Proceedings 22
AMS Journal Article 24
AMS Proceedings Article 26
An Astronomy-Astrophysics Journal 28
Annals of Statistics-Draft 30
ASAE Transactions 32
ASME Meeting 34
Astronomy & Astrophysics 36
Balkema 37
DECUS Proceedings 39
Elbert Walker’s Article 41
Elsevier CRC One-column 43
Elsevier CRC Two-column 45
Elsevier IFAC Proceedings 47
Elsevier Preprint 49
Geophysics Journal 51
Harold O. Fried’s Article 53
IEEE Transactions for Conferences 55

Contents vii
IEEE Transactions for Journals 56
IEICE Transactions 57
International Journal of Forecasting - Draft 58
Japanese Journal of Applied Physics 60
JEEP - A General Purpose Vehicle 62
JEEP - Double-spaced Except for Quotes 64
Journal of International Economics North-Holland 66
Journal of Low Temperature Physics 68
Journal of Progress in Surface Science 70
Kluwer Journal 72
Linear Algebra and its Applications 74
Mathematical Reviews Template 76
Mathematics Magazine Article 78
Modified Article for Short Texts 80
Monthly Notices of the Royal Astronomical Society 82
REVTeX 4 84
Science Magazine 86
SIAM Journal 88
SIAM Proceedings in Applied Mathematics 90
SIAM-ACM Preprint 92
Similar to AIP 94
Similar to AIP - Modified 96
Similar to Bulletin of the American Mathematical Society 98
Similar to MAA Monthly before 1992 100
Similar to North-Holland Journals 102

viii Contents
Similar to Sequential Analysis Journal 104
Society for Computer Simulation 106
SPIE Proceedings 108
SPIE Proceedings - Modified 110
SPIE Proceedings (new) 112
Springer-Verlag Heidelberg Journal 114
Squeezed States and Uncertainty Relations 116
Standard LATEX Article (Chicago) 118
Standard LATEX Article (Harvard) 120
Standard LATEX Article (hyperref) 122
Statistics and Decisions 123
TU Wien 125
TU Wien Article (new) 127
World Scientific Proceedings 9.00x6.00 129
World Scientific Proceedings 9.75x6.50 (updated) 131
3 Author Packages for AMS Shells 137
Contemporary Mathematics (Proceedings) 138
Generic Journal 140
Mathematics of Computation 142
4 Book Shells 145

Contents ix
AMS Book or Monograph 146
ETP (Electronic Technical Publishing) 150
Linda Gilbert Book 154
Springer-Verlag Conference 158
Springer-Verlag Heidelberg LLNCS 162
Springer-Verlag Heidelberg Physics Monograph 166
Springer-Verlag Multi-authored 170
Springer-Verlag Single-authored 174
World Scientific Book 9.00x6.00 178
5 Exam and Syllabus Shells 187

Assignment 188
Bolton Institute 189
Class Announcement 190
Class Handout 191
SW Exam #1 - 8.5 x 11 Page 192
SW Exam #1 - 8.5 x 14 Page 193
SW Exam #2 194
SW Exam #3 195
Syllabus 196
6 Other Document Shells 197

Assorted - Basic Assignment 198
Assorted - Math Scratchpad 199
Book - SW Book #1 200

x Contents
Fax - SW Fax #1 224
Fax - SW Fax #2 225
Fax - SW Fax #3 226
Letter - Informal 227
Letter - Similar to TeXbook Example 228
Letter - SW Letter #1 229
Memo - SW Memo #1 235
Memo - SW Memo Special for Inventions 240
Press Release - SW Press Release #1 241
Report - JEEP Report 243
Report - SW Report #1 246

Contents xi
Report - TU Wien Report 256
Report - TU Wien Report (new) 259
Resume - SW Resume #1 262
Resume -SW Resume #2 263
Slides - SW Slides 264
7 Standard LATEX Shells 267

Standard LATEX Article and Blank Standard LATEX Article Shells 268
Standard LATEX Book 270
Standard LATEX Conference Proceedings 274
Standard LATEX Report 276
8 Style Editor Shells 279

Article 280
Article - LATEX-like Article 282
Article - Sans serif 284
Book - CalcLabs Book 286
Book - Fred Szabo’s Book 288
Book - Jonathan Lewin’s Book 292
Book - LATEX-like Book 294
Book - Stewart Calculus 298
Book - User’s Guide 300
Book #1 302
xii Contents
Exam #1 306
Exam Builder Shell 307
Exam Builder with Title Page 308
Fax #1 310
General - Scientific Word Readme 311
General - Simple WYSIWYG 313
Letter #1 315
Letter #2 316
Letter #3 317
Letter #4 318
Memo #1 319
Play 320
Press Release 322
QCA Workbook 323
Report #1 325
Resume #1 328
Slides - Jim’s Landscape 329
Slides A 330
Slides B 332
Slides C 334
Slides D 336
Slides QCA 338
Thesis - Harvard Thesis 340
Thesis - Harvard Thesis Modified by Philippe Laval 344
Thesis - LSU Thesis 348

Contents xiii
Thesis #1 352
9 Thesis Shells 355

Air Force Institute of Technology 356
Georgia Institute of Technology 360
Massachusetts Institute of Technology 364
Northwestern University 366
Similar to New Mexico State University 370
Similar to North Dakota State University 374
Similar to University of Miami 378
Similar to University of Utah 382
University of Arizona 386
University of California 390
University of Georgia 394
University of New Mexico 398
University of New South Wales 402
University of Pittsburgh 406
University of Washington 409
Part II Gallery of BibTEX Bibliography Styles 413
10 Using BibTEX with SWP or SW 415

Understanding BibTEX Databases 415
Understanding BibTEX Bibliography Styles 416
Selecting a BibTEX Bibliography Style 417
11 BibTEX Bibliography Styles 419

xiv Contents
aaai-named.bst 420
aabbrv.bst 422
aalpha.bst 423
abbrv.bst 424
achemso.bst 425
achemsol.bst 426
acm.bst 427
address.bst 428
address-html.bst 431
adfathesis.bst 433
agsm.bst 434
alpha.bst 435
alphahtml.bst 436
alphahtmldate.bst 438
alphahtmldater.bst 439
amsalpha.bst 440
amsplain.bst 441
annotate.bst 442
annotation.bst 443
anotit.bst 444
apa.bst 445
apacite.bst 446
apalike.bst 447
apalike2.bst 448
aplain.bst 449
Contents xv
apsr.bst 450
asaetr.bst 451
astron.bst 452
aunsnot.bst 453
aunsrt.bst 454
authordate1.bst 455
authordate2.bst 456
authordate3.bst 457
authordate4.bst 458
bbs.bst 459
bibtoref.bst 460
birthday.bst 461
cbe.bst 463
cea.bst 464
cell.bst 466
chicago.bst 468
dtk.bst 469
econometrica.bst 470
email.bst 471
email-html.bst 473
finplain.bst 475
gerabbrv.bst 476
geralpha.bst 477
gerapali.bst 478
gerplain.bst 479
xvi Contents
gerunsrt.bst 480
humanbio.bst 481
humannat.bst 482
ieee.bst 483
ieeepes.bst 484
ieeetr.bst 485
imac.bst 486
inlinebib.bst 487
is-abbrv.bst 489
is-alpha.bst 490
is-plain.bst 491
is-unsrt.bst 492
jas99.bst 493
jbact.bst 494
jcc.bst 495
jkthesis.bst 496
jmb.bst 497
jmr.bst 499
jpc.bst 500
jphysicsB.bst 501
jtb.bst 502
jthcarsu.bst 503
jurabib.bst 504
jureco.bst 505
kluwer.bst 506
Contents xvii
letter.bst 507
mbplain.bst 509
mslapa.bst 510
named.bst 511
nar.bst 512
nature.bst 513
nederlands.bst 514
newapa.bst 515
oxford-en.bst 516
oxford-in.bst 518
oxford-se.bst 520
pccp.bst 522
phaip.bst 523
phapalik.bst 524
phcpc.bst 525
phiaea.bst 526
phjcp.bst 527
phnf.bst 528
phnflet.bst 529
phone.bst 530
phpf.bst 532
phppcf.bst 533
phreport.bst 534
phrmp.bst 535
plabbrv.bst 536
xviii Contents
plain.bst 537
plainhtml.bst 538
plainhtmldate.bst 540
plainhtmldater.bst 541
plalpha.bst 542
plplain.bst 543
plunsrt.bst 544
revcompchem.bst 545
siam.bst 546
siamproc.bst 547
smfalpha.bst 548
smfplain.bst 549
sweabbrv.bst 550
swealpha.bst 551
sweplain.bst 552
thesnumb.bst 553
unsrt.bst 554
Index 555
What’s New
A Gallery of Document Shells adds to the suite of manuals for MacKichan Software
products. Along with Typesetting Documents in Scientific WorkPlace and Scientific
Word, this online manual is a response to the many users who have requested more
information about LATEX typesetting in Scientific WorkPlace (SWP) and Scientific
Word (SW).
About This Manual

The primary goal of this manual is to help you choose document shells that are appro-
priate for your typesetting purposes. The manual explains the key characteristics of the
shells provided with the program. It contains brief discussions and illustrations of type-
set documents created with each shell, except those created with Scientific Notebook
(SNB), which are intended for direct printing instead of typesetting. A secondary goal
is to help you choose appropriate styles for automatically created BibTEX bibliographies
and citations. The manual explains and illustrates the characteristics of each available
BibTEX bibliography style.
This manual doesn’t apply to SNB or to the Scientific Viewer, which don’t support
typesetting. The manual excludes any discussion of shells not intended to produce a
typeset document.
We assume that you have successfully installed SWP or SW and that you have
a working knowledge of the program. You can find additional information about the
program in these accompanying manuals:
• Getting Started with Scientific WorkPlace, Scientific Word, and Scientific Notebook.
• Creating Documents with Scientific WorkPlace and Scientific Word.
• Doing Mathematics with Scientific WorkPlace and Scientific Notebook
We also assume you are familiar with basic TEX, the extraordinary mathematics type-
setting program and language designed by Donald Knuth. Also useful is knowledge of
LATEX, a set of macros designed by Leslie Lamport to enhance TEX with document-
structuring features such as tables of contents, chapters and sections, lists, and bibli-
ographies. An understanding of BibTEX, the public domain program created by Oren
Patashnik to create and format bibliographies and the citations that refer to them. is help-
ful as well. The Windows implementation of TEX and LATEX that is supplied with the
program is TrueTEX, a product of TrueTEX Software. The version of TrueTEX shipped
with SWP and SW includes PDFTEX support.
xx What’s New
The manual includes information about TEX and LATEX, document classes, LATEX
packages, typesetting options, BibTEX bibliography styles, and document shells. While
a good understanding of TEX, LATEX , and BibTEX will help you better understand how
these often complex elements interact, a thorough discussion of those programs is be-
yond our scope here. If you need additional information, we suggest you refer to these
excellent sources: The TEXbook by Donald E. Knuth; LATEX, A Document Preparation
System by Leslie Lamport; The LATEX Companion by Michel Goossens, Frank Mittel-
bach, and Alexander Samarin; and A Guide to LATEX: Document Preparation for Begin-
ners and Advanced Users by Helmut Kopka and Patrick W. Daly.
Typesetting Basics
Even if you have a basic understanding of the program, it’s important to review how
typesetting works and why the appearance of your printed document is so noticeably
different when you typeset and when you don’t. You can find basic information in
more detail in the online Help and in Creating Documents with Scientific WorkPlace
and Scientific Word. Version 5 adds the capability to produce typeset PDF files.
Producing Documents with Typesetting

Throughout our documentation, we refer to the processes that involve LATEX typesetting
as typeset compile, typeset preview, and typeset print, and to those that involve PDFTEX
typesetting as typeset compile PDF, typeset preview PDF, and typeset print PDF. (The
processes are similar; general statements about typesetting refer to both sets of pro-
cesses.) These processes are available as commands on the Typeset menu and as buttons
on the Typeset toolbar.
When you typeset your document with LATEX (using the Preview or Print commands
on the Typeset menu), the compilation yields a device independent, or DVI, file, which
is a finely typeset version of your document. The DVI file may contain automatically
generated document elements such as cross-references, tables of contents, and numbers
for equations. The compilation may also result in other generated files, such as table of
contents files or bibliography files, that are required by the DVI file. The program then
sends the DVI file to the typeset previewer or to the printer. Consequently, the docu-
ment you see on the typeset preview screen or in print may have a noticeably different
appearance from the document you see as you work in the document window.
When you typeset your document with PDFLATEX (using the Preview PDFor Print
PDF commands on the Typeset menu), the compilation yields a PDF file that contains
your typeset document embedded with all necessary fonts and graphics. As with the
DVI file, the PDF file may contain automatically generated document elements such as
tables of contents and numbers for equations. If your document includes the hyperref
package, any cross-references in the document are changed to hyperlinks. The program
sends the PDF file to the PDF reader installed on your system or the printer. The PDF file
has an almost identical appearance to the DVI file but may have a noticeably different
appearance from what you see as you work in the document window.
The typeset appearance of your document depends on typesetting specifications from
several different sources, all set initially by the shell you use to create your document:
Typesetting Basics xxi
• The typesetting specifications, a collection of TEX and LATEX instructions related to

typesetting document elements, including those represented by the tags on the Tag
toolbar in the program window.
• Any LATEX packages or options specified for the document or the shell.
• Any additional TEX or LATEX commands that appear in the document preamble or
body.
• The BibTEX style chosen for the document, if any.
These specifications don’t affect the appearance of your document if you don’t typeset
it.
The chapters that follow explain how to modify some of these specifications from
within the program. However, we advise against attempts at extensive modification of
the specifications if you aren’t extremely familiar with TEX and LATEX. See Typesetting
Documents in Scientific WorkPlace and Scientific Word for more information.
Producing Documents without Typesetting

With Version 3 and higher of SWP and SW, you can produce your documents either
with or without typesetting. In our documentation, we refer to the processes that don’t
involve typesetting as preview and print. These commands are available on the File
menu and the Standard toolbar.
When you produce your document without typesetting it, the program sends the
document directly to a non-LATEX previewer or to the printer using many of the same
routines with which it displays the document in the document window. Consequently,
what you see in the preview window or in print is similar to what you see as you work
on your document in the document window. (The program doesn’t reflect the page setup
specifications or the print options in the document window.)
The non-typeset appearance of your document depends on three sets of specifica-
tions, again all set initially by the document shell:
• The style, a collection of the specifications for the appearance of each tag in the
document window and in print
• The page setup specifications
• The print options
The online Help and Creating Documents with Scientific WorkPlace and Scientific Word
provide information about modifying these specifications from within the program. These
three sets of specifications don’t affect the typeset appearance of your document, al-
though the style determines how the document appears on the screen when you’re work-
ing on it.
Understanding the Differences in the Final Product

Each time you produce your document in SWP or SW, you can choose whether or not
to typeset it. The results differ noticeably.
xxii What’s New
If you typeset, the program uses LATEX or PDFLATEX to compile the document and
generate any specified automatic elements such as front matter items (tables of con-
tents or lists of figures and tables), cross-references, footnotes and margin notes, auto-
matically numbered equations, indexes, and bibliographies. LATEX and PDF LATEX also
provide hyphenation, kerning, ligatures, sophisticated paragraph and line breaking, and
other automatic formatting features.
If you don’t typeset, the program produces the document using many of the same
routines it uses to display the document in the document window. No document elements
are automatically generated, and the printed results are similar to what you see as you
work on the document.
Getting Help
In addition to the information available in the manuals supplied with your software,
you can get information about the program from the online Help system, the library of
reference materials about mathematics and science, and, if you have an Internet connec-
tion, the MacKichan Software website. If these resources don’t contain the information
you need, technical support is available. We also regularly make additional information
available on our unmoderated discussion forum and email list. You can find an errata
sheet for this book, as well as all other manuals published by MacKichan Software, Inc.,
at this URL:
http://www.mackichan.com/techtalk/errata.html
Online Help
Without leaving the program, you can search the online Help system to find basic and
advanced information about all available commands and operations, including those re-
lated to numeric, symbolic, and graphic computations. In particular, you can find ad-
ditional material regarding TEX, LATEX, LATEX packages, and other related topics. If
you save copies of the Help documents in SWP, you can interact with the mathematics
they contain, experimenting with or reworking the included examples. In addition, two
programs—the Style Editor and the Document Manager—have their own online Help
systems.
I To get help from the Help menu

Choose To
Contents See a list of online information
Search... Find a Help topic
Index Access the online index to General Information,
Computing Techniques, or the Reference Library
MacKichan Software Open the link to the MacKichan Software website
Website
Register... Register your software and obtain a license
System Features... See a list of available features; change the serial
number for your installation
License Information Obtain information about registering your system
About... Obtain information about your installation
I To go directly to the Help Contents, press F1.

Getting Help xxiii
Supplemental Technical Documents

We urge you to explore the supplemental technical documents supplied with the pro-
gram. You can use the program to open, view, and print the documents. In particular,
we urge you to read the following documents:
• In the Help\general directory, the document 50techref.tex, which con-
tains technical information on the features in Version 5.
• In the Play directory, the sample documents, which demonstrate the use of compu-
tation in SWP.
• In the SWSamples directory,
• The sample documents, which illustrate the use of LATEX packages in SWP and
SW.
• The file OptionsPackagesLaTeX.tex, which describes and contains links
to information about the options, packages, and other TEX-related items provided
with the program.
• The file BibTeXBibliographyStyles.tex, which lists and describes the
BibTEX style (.bst) files installed with the program.
Obtaining Technical Support

If you can’t find the answer to your questions in the manuals or the online Help, you can
obtain technical support from our website at
http://www.mackichan.com/techtalk/knowledgebase.html
or at our Web-based Technical Support forum at
http://www.mackichan.com/techtalk/UserForums.htm
You can also contact our Technical Support staff by email, telephone, or fax. We urge
you to submit questions by email whenever possible in case our technical staff needs to
obtain your file to diagnose and solve the problem.
When you contact us by email or fax, please provide complete information about
the problem you’re trying to solve. We must be able to reproduce the problem exactly
from your instructions. When you contact us by telephone, you should be sitting at your
computer with the program running. Please provide the following information any time
you contact Technical Support:
• The MacKichan Software product you have installed.
• The version and build numbers of your installation (see Help / About).
• The serial number of your installation (see Help / System Features).
• The version of the Windows system you’re using.
• The type of hardware you’re using, including network hardware.
• What happened and what you were doing when the problem occurred.
• The exact wording of any messages that appeared on your computer screen.
xxiv What’s New
I To contact technical support

• Contact Technical Support by email, fax, or telephone between 8 A . M . and 5 P. M .
Pacific Time:
Internet email address: support@mackichan.com
Fax: 360-394-6039
Telephone: 360-394-6033
Toll-free telephone: 877-SCI-WORD (877-724-9673)
Additional Information
You can learn more on our website, which we update regularly to provide the latest
technical information about the program. The site also houses links to other TEX and
LATEX resources. We maintain an unmoderated discussion forum and an unmoderated
email list so our users can share information, discuss common problems, and contribute
technical tips and solutions. You can link to these valuable resources from our home
page at http://www.mackichan.com.
Using Document Shells
Every SWP and SW document is created from a template called a document shell. Each
shell carries several sets of specifications that determine its fundamental structure and
appearance. Those specifications, and the structure and appearance they define, extend
to each new document you create with a given shell.
The program includes over 150 document shells that you can use to create books,
exams, articles, reports, letters, theses, faxes, and other documents. The shells have the
extension .shl and are in the Shells directory of your program installation.
Although many are similar, no two shells are exactly alike. Each is designed with a
structure and components common to a certain kind of document, such as a book, report,
article, or thesis. From shell to shell, the structure and components differ, depending on
the purpose and anticipated content of the document and, in many cases, the typeset-
ting requirements of the publisher. Choosing a shell carefully is an important step in
developing your documents.
For much more information about working with document shells, refer to Typesetting
Documents in Scientific WorkPlace and Scientific Word and Creating Documents with
Scientific WorkPlace and Scientific Word.
Understanding Document Shells

Each shell is associated with several sets of specifications. One set consists of page setup
specifications, print options, and a style file with a .cst extension. These specification
determine the appearance of your document when you preview or print it without type-
setting or when you display it in the document window. However, these specifications
have no effect on the typeset appearance of your document.
The other set—the typesetting specifications—determine the document class and
fundamental structure of the shell and may also specify one or more LATEX packages
that provide a particular typesetting capability. The typesetting specifications govern all
aspects of the typeset appearance of the shell and of any documents created with the
shell. Typesetting specifications govern type face; type size; margins; page size; line
spacing; location and appearance of headers and footers; paragraph layout and inden-
tion; appearance and placement of section headings; page breaks; automatic generation
of cross-references, table of contents, and other document elements; and other typo-
graphic details too numerous to mention. Most of the specifications are contained in
LATEX formatting files with extensions of .cls, .clo, and .sty, although others may be
contained in your document. LATEX and PDFLATEX typeset your document based on this
large collection of specifications.
2 Chapter 1 Using Document Shells
Note Before Version 3.5, we held to convention, using the word style to refer to the
typesetting specifications. However, convention has changed. In newer versions of
LATEX, the document style has been renamed the document class. We now use the word
style to refer to the .cst file and not to the typesetting specifications.
When you open a new document, you select a document shell. The program opens
a new document and copies the shell into it, along with the shell’s typesetting specifi-
cations, style, page setup, and print options. Until you change it in some way, the new
document is identical to the shell. It has the same class and structure, uses the same
LATEX packages, and produces the same appearance, with and without typesetting.
LATEX Document Classes

The document class named in the typesetting specifications determines the basic struc-
ture of the shell and of any documents you create with it. The class specifies the kind
of document to be produced and defines its general structure as a book, report, article,
or other kind of document. The class also determines the elements, environments, and
constructs allowed in the document. Document class files have an extension of .cls.
About half of the shells provided with SWP and SW have standard LATEX base
classes; they are created with book.cls, report.cls, or article.cls. Al-
though many of the other shells produce similar kinds of documents, they have differ-
ent, more specialized base classes, as with the shells that produce articles formatted for
a specific journal or theses formatted to meet the requirements of a particular university.
The rest of the shells have the base class sebase; they were developed with the Style
Editor. The program doesn’t include a shell document for the standard LATEX letter class.
LATEX Class Options

Although the document class defines a shell document in broad typesetting terms, LATEX
and PDFLATEX need additional typesetting instructions to format a document completely.
Some of these instructions come from document class options, a collection of formatting
instructions that define typesetting in more detail. The options can control body text font
size, page orientation, number of text columns, print quality, page size, and many other
aspects of document design and typesetting.
The tables below show the default settings for article.cls, book.cls, and
report.cls, the three base document classes used for most document shells in SWP
and SW. The shell descriptions in this manual note any option settings that differ from
the defaults. Accompanying the shell descriptions are page layout diagrams, which re-
flect the class option default settings. The notes keyed to the diagrams provide informa-
tion about the size of the margins, headers, footers, text area, and margin notes, if any.
Most measurements are given in points; a point is 72 1
inch.
If your document uses different settings, these page layouts may not apply. For
example, if a document specifies a4 paper instead of 8.5x11 or two columns instead of
one, the margins will differ from those shown in the layout diagrams. You may want
to add the layout package to your document to generate a new layout diagram. For
more information, refer to Typesetting Documents in Scientific WorkPlace and Scientific
Word.
These class option defaults are in effect for document shells created with arti-
cle.cls, book.cls, and report.cls, unless otherwise noted in the shell:
Class Option Defaults for Shells Created with Article.cls
Category Default Options
Body text point size 10 pt 11 pt, 12 pt
Paper size 8.5x11 a4, a5, b5, Legal size, Executive size
Orientation Portrait Landscape
Print side One side Both sides
Quality Final Draft
Title page Title area on page 1 Title page
Columns One Two
Equation numbering On right On left
Displayed equations Centered Flush left
Bibliography style Closed Open
Babel language English U.S. See package documentation.
Class Option Defaults for Shells Created with Book.cls

Print side Both sides One side
Quality Final Draft
Title page Title page No title page
Columns One Two
Start chapter on left No Yes
Open bibliography style Closed Open
Class Option Defaults for Shells Created with Report.cls

Print side One side Both sides
Quality Final Draft
Title page Title page No title page
Columns One Two
Start chapter on left No Yes
Open bibliography style Closed Open
Default page layout for article.cls

Default page layout for book.cls

Default page layout for report.cls
Other Document Classes

If you’re using a shell based on a customized document class, the default categories and
the corresponding options may differ. You can learn which document class options are in
effect for a particular shell from the Options and Packages command on the Typeset
menu, and you can view the page layout for the shell with the layout package.
Choosing a Document Shell 7
LATEX Packages
The document class options establish a basic set of LATEX typesetting instructions. LATEX
packages—sets of additional typesetting instructions—extend typesetting instructions
by enabling some specific LATEX behavior or customizing some aspect of the document
appearance or production, such as the creation of an index, the special formatting of
footnotes, the content and design of headers and footers, the style of numbered lists,
or the generation of a list of symbols. Just as document classes have options, many
packages have options with which you can customize document behavior still further.
The options differ from package to package.
When you install the program, you automatically install those LATEX packages that
are included with the standard LATEX distribution. The packages are installed in the
base, required, and AMS subdirectories of the TCITeX\TeX\LaTeX directory.
Also, the TCITeX\TeX\LaTeX\contrib directory of your installation includes a
collection of packages that are particularly useful with SWP and SW. Most packages
have an .sty file extension. Typesetting Documents in Scientific WorkPlace and Scien-
tific Word describes the packages available with the program, and you can find links to
additional and often extensive information about the packages in the online Help system.
You can add packages to your document in addition to those packages that have been
specified for the shell. Documents created with most document shells—that is, docu-
ments in most document classes—can accept additional packages. The order in which
the packages are specified can, on occasion, affect LATEX behavior. The documentation
notes when package order is significant.
Choosing a Document Shell

Every SWP and SW document begins with a document shell. Choosing a shell care-
fully can save you time and frustration, especially if you expect to create a complex
document. Keep your typesetting needs in mind as you look for an appropriate shell.
The program includes a large collection of shells for creating new documents in
several categories. The categories are reflected in the shell directories:
• Articles—short documents intended for publication in scholarly journals or confer-
ence proceedings.
• Author Packages for AMS—articles intended for publication in journals or confer-
ence proceedings published by the American Mathematical Society (AMS).
• Books—large documents intended for publication as a separate volume.
• Exams and Syllabi—short documents intended for use in the classroom.
• Other Documents—miscellaneous document types including faxes, letters, memos,
overhead transparencies, slides, and some books and reports, usually developed for
earlier releases of the program.
• Scientific Notebook—documents created with SNB. Documents created with these
shells are intended for printing without benefit of typesetting. These shells don’t
appear in this manual.
• Standard LaTeX—documents created with the LATEX base document classes with-
out the addition of any packages.
• Style Editor—documents created with shells developed using the Style Editor.
• Theses—documents that fulfill thesis formatting requirements at several universities.
Make sure the shell you choose produces the type of document you want to create.
Don’t attempt to write a book using a letter shell or an article using a report shell. Make
sure that the shell contains the tags appropriate for your work. If you need theorem
environments, for example, choose a shell that has theorem and theorem-like item tags.
If you are unsure of your typesetting requirements, we urge you to choose the standard
LATEX shell for the type of document you need. Standard LATEX shells provide the greatest
flexibility and portability. You can achieve almost any typesetting effect by beginning
with a standard shell and adding LATEX packages as necessary.
Important We strongly recommend that you begin all new documents using one of
the standard LATEX shells, unless you have a compelling reason (such as publisher’s
instructions) to do otherwise.
In the following chapters, we provide information about the shells included with the
program. For each shell, we note the document class and any packages used by the
shell. We indicate whether the class and packages use option defaults or other settings.
We also note when no class or package options are available from within the program.
We include special information and brief instructions necessary for working with the
shell, as well as cautions where necessary. You may find additional information in the
document shell itself. Finally, we include pictures of representative pages from a typeset
document created with the shell. (Note that a given sample document may not be the
same as the document you see when you open the shell.)
We have excluded one category of documents from the manual—those created with
SNB shells. Because the SNB shells are designed for printing without typesetting, we
don’t describe them here, nor do we provide illustrations of typeset sample documents
for those shells. Documents created with SNB shells are similar in the document win-
dow and in print. Typesetting SNB documents may produce unexpected results because
LATEX or PDFLATEX may number sections and equations automatically, insert front mat-
ter, change the spacing, and otherwise attempt to change the formatting of the document.
If you want to take advantage of typesetting for your SWP or SW document, choose a
shell designed for typesetting instead of an SNB shell.
We encourage you to examine the shell samples in this manual carefully and take
note of the features they illustrate. Notice details such as the absence or presence of
headers and footers, the placement of page numbers and footnotes, the size of the mar-
gins, the appearance and placement of the headings, the extent of the front matter, the
use of single or double columns, and the use of single or double spacing.
When you find a shell that looks appropriate, open and print a new document with
the shell to see if it meets your requirements. The closer the shell fits your requirements,
the easier your typesetting tasks will be.
I To open a new document with a document shell
1. On the Standard toolbar, click the New button or, from the File menu, choose
New to open the New dialog box.
2. From the Shell Directories list in the New dialog box, choose the kind of document
you want.
3. From the Shell Files list, select the shell you want and choose OK.
Article Shells
Most article shells are based on the typesetting specifications set in the base document
class article.cls, although some customized article shells use other .cls files.
Generally, most article shells have front matter consisting of title and author information,
a date, and an abstract. Some include tables of contents. Most shells include tags for up
to five heading levels in the body of the article. Chapter headings are reserved for book
and report shells. Some but not all articles contain tags for theorem environments. The
back matter for most article shells includes appendices and bibliographies. Indices are
reserved for books and reports.
See page 2 for information about base document class defaults and page 4 for page
layout diagrams for the base document classes.
12 Chapter 2 Article Shells
A Simple MIT Press Article
Document class base file: article.cls

Options and Packages Defaults
Document class options Body text 12 pt
Packages:
mitpress None
The shell produces documents similar to those created with the standard LATEX article shell (see page 268) but
differs in the design of the front matter. The shell prints the title in bold type, left justifies the title and author
information, and omits the date.
and a short line below.

A long line above may depend on your margins
sin 2 µ + cos2 µ = 1
The Title of an Article as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing
for mathematical displays, regardless of the margins.
Dr. Author Jones R¯
At this Address 1.2 Mathematics in section heads ® ln J@J
Mathematics can app ear in section heads. Note that mathematics in
section heads may cause difficulties in typesetting styles with running
headers or table of contents entries.
1.3 Theorems, Lemmata, and O ther Theorem-like
Abstract
Environments
This article illustrates many features of a mathematics article,
but we do not explain the spurious appearance of the formula A numb er of theorem-like environments is available. T he follow ing
(∇ × F ) · k = z + 1 in this abstract. lemma is a well-known fact on differentiation of asym ptotic expansions
of analytic functions.
1 Sample M athematics and Text
Lemma 1 Let f (z) be an analytic function in C + . If f (z) admits the
This short sample docum ent illustrates the typeset appearance of in-line representation µ ¶
and displayed mathematics in documents. It also illustrates five levels of a1 1
section headings and three kinds of lists. Finally, the document includes f (z) = a 0 + +o ,
z z
entries for a manual bibliography and an appendix.
for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ " = {z ∈ C + : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then
1.1 In-line and Displayed Mathematics
P∞ a1 = − lim z 2f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" . (2)
The expression i=1 a i is in-line mathematics, while the numbered equa-
tion Pro of. Change z for 1=z. T hen Γ " → Γ" = {z ∈ C − : z ∈ Γ " } and
∞
X
ai (1)
i=1
f (1=z) = a 0 + a 1 z + o (z) . (3)
is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 1.
Fix z ∈ Γ " , and let C r (z) = {¸ ∈ C − : |¸ − z| = r} b e a circle with
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset of
radius r = |z| sin "=2. It follows from (3) that
H , T a nonexpansive P self map of C. Suppose that as n → ∞, a n;k → 0
∞ +
for eachPk, and ° n = k=0 (an;k+1 − a n;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C,
Z Z
(¸ − z0 ) m d¸
X1
1 f (¸) d¸ 1
A nx = k=0 a n;k T x converges weakly to a fixed point of T [1].
∞ k
2 = am + R(z), (4)
2¼i C H (z) (¸ − z) 2¼i C H (z) (¸ − z) 2
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays.1 The m=0
spacing above and below a display depends on whether the lines above
where for the remainder R(z) we have
or below are short or long, as shown in the following examples.
A short line above: |R(z)| ≤ r −1 max o (|z|) = r −1 max |¸| · O (|z| + r)
x2 + y 2 = z 2 ¸∈C H (z) ¸∈C H (z)
|z| + r 1 + sin "

· O (|z| + r) = · O (|z|) .
1 A
LT EX au tom atically selects t he spacing d epen ding on th e s urroun ding line =
len gths. r sin "
1 2
A Simple MIT Press Article 13
Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2 , and hence by the Cauchy ∗ Third level bullet item.
theorem (4) implies · Fourth and final level bullet item.
d
f (1=z) = a 1 + R(z) → a 1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 , Description List Each description list item has a lead-in followed by
dz the item. Double-click the lead-in box to enter or customize the
that implies (2) by substituting 1=z back for z. text of the lead-in.
2 Section Headings Bunyip Mythical beast of Australian Aboriginal legends.
Use the Section tag for ma jor sections, such as the one just above. Four
additional heading levels are available, as described below. 4 About the B ibliography
2.1 Subsection Heading Following the text of this article is a short manual bibliography. This
sample bibliography has no relationship to the previous text, but it shows
This text app ears under a subsection heading. sample citations such as [4], [5] and [6]. You can also have multiple
2.1.1 Subsubsection Heading citations appear together. Here is an example: [2, 3, 4].
This text app ears under a subsubsection heading. References
Subsubsubsection Heading This text appears under a subsubsub-
[1] N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2, John W iley
section heading.
and Sons, New York, 1963.
Subsubsubsubsection Heading This text appears under a sub- [2] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behavior
subsubsubsection heading. in fluid hydrogen at rocket chamber pressures”, Int. J. Heat Mass
Transfer, 1998a, 41, 3537-3550
3 Lists [3] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under sup ercritical
Bullet, numbered and description list environments are available. Lists, conditions”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, in print
which can extend four levels deep, look like this: [4] Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular Theory
of Gases and Liquids, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., 1964
1. Numbered list item 1. [5] Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E., Molecular ther-
modynamics for fluid-phase equilibrium, Prentice -Hall, Inc., 1986
2. Numbered list item 2.
[6] Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Prop erties of
Gases and Liquids, 4th Edition, M cGraw-Hill Book Company, 1987
(a) A numbered list item under a list item.
The typeset appearance for this level is often different from
the screen appearance. The typeset appearance often uses
A An App endix
parentheses around the level indicator. Because appendices may contain material that is supplementary rather
(b) Another numbered list item under a list item. than integral to the main text , many styles use a different numb ering
system for equations that appear in the appendices.
i. Third level numbered list item under a list item.
√
A. Fourth and final level of numbered list items allowed. − b ± b 2 − 4ac
(5)
2a
• Bullet item 1.
The quadratic equation shown as equation 5 is used to demonstrate how
• Bullet item 2. equations are numbered in the appendix.
— Second level bullet item.
3 4
AASTeX Journal
Document class base file: aastex.cls

Document class options Body text 12 pt, preprint
Packages:
amsfonts None
The shell produces documents that use the AASTeX typesetting specification, used for manuscript preparation
for the Astrophysical Journal; Astrophysical Journal, Letters; Astrophysical Journal, Supplement; and Astronomical
Journal.
—2—
Not to appear in Nonlearned J., 45. 1.1. In-line and Displayed Mathematics
P∞
The Title of an Article The expression i=1 ai is in-line mathematics, while the numbered equation
∞
X
1;2;3 1
S. Djorgovski and Ivan R. King ai (1)
i=1
Astronomy Department, University of California, Berkeley, CA 94720
C. D. Biemesderfer 4;5
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset of H, T a non-
National Optical Astronomy Observatories, Tucson, AZ 85719 expansive self map of C . Suppose that as n → ∞, an;k → 0 for each k, and ° n =
P∞ + P∞ k
k=0 (an;k+1 − an;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C, A n x = k=0 an;k T x converges weakly to
aastex-help@aas.org
a fixed point of T (1).
and
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays. 1 The spacing above and
R. J. Hanisch5 below a display depends on whether the lines above or below are short or long, as shown in
the following examples.
Space Telescope Science Institute, Baltimore, MD 21218
A short line above:
ABSTRACT x2 + y 2 = z 2
This article illustrates many features of a mathematics article, but we do not
explain the spurious appearance of the formula (∇×F )·k = z +1 in this abstract.
sin2 µ + cos2 µ = 1
Subject headings: globular clusters: general – globular clusters: individual(NGC
6397, NGC 6624, NGC 7078, Terzan 8) as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for mathematical
displays, regardless of the margins.
1. Sample Mathematics and Text R¯

1.2. Mathematics in section heads ® ln tdt
This short sample document illustrates the typeset appearance of in-line and displayed
mathematics in documents. It also illustrates five levels of section headings and three kinds Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note that mathematics in section heads may
of lists. Finally, the document includes entries for a manual bibliography and an appendix. cause difficulties in typesetting styles with running headers or table of contents entries.
1
Visiting Astronomer, Cerro Tololo Inter-American Observatory. CTIO is operated by AURA, Inc. under
contract to the National Science Foundation. 1.3. Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environments
2 Society of Fellows, Harvard University.
A number of theorem-like environments is available. The following lemma is a well-
3
present address: Center for Astrophysics, 60 Garden Street, Cambridge, MA 02138 known fact on differentiation of asymptotic expansions of analytic functions.
4
Visiting Programmer, Space Telescope Science Institute
5 1 A
Patron, Alonso’s Bar and Grill LT EX automatically selects the spacing depending on the surrounding line lengths.
AASTeX Journal 15
—3— —4—
Lemma 1 Let f (z) be an analytic function in C+ . If f (z) admits the representation 2.1.1. Subsubsection Heading
µ ¶
a1 1 This text appears under a subsubsection heading.
f (z) = a0 + +o ,
z z
for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ " = {z ∈ C + : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then Subsubsubsection Heading This text appears under a subsubsubsection heading.
a1 = − lim z 2 f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ". (2)
Subsubsubsubsection Heading This text appears under a subsubsubsubsection
Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ" → Γ" = {z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ" } and heading.
f (1=z) = a0 + a1z + o (z) . (3)
Fix z ∈ Γ", and let Cr (z) = {¸ ∈ C− : |¸ − z| = r} be a circle with radius r = |z| sin "=2. It 3. Lists
follows from (3) that
Bullet, numbered and description list environments are available. Lists, which can
Z Z
(¸ − z0)m d¸
1
X extend four levels deep, look like this:
1 f (¸) d¸ 1
2 = am 2 + R(z), (4)
2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z) m=0
2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z)
|R(z)| ≤ r −1 max o (|z|) = r−1 max |¸| · O (|z| + r)
¸∈CH (z) ¸∈CH (z) (a) A numbered list item under a list item.
|z| + r 1 + sin " The typeset appearance for this level is often different from the screen appearance.
= · O (|z| + r) = · O (|z|) .
r sin " The typeset appearance often uses parentheses around the level indicator.
Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2, and hence by the Cauchy theorem (4) implies (b) Another numbered list item under a list item.
d
f (1=z) = a1 + R(z) → a1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2, A. Fourth and final level of numbered list items allowed.
dz
that implies (2) by substituting 1=z back for z.
• Bullet item 1.
• Bullet item 2.
2. Section Headings
Use the Section tag for major sections, such as the one just above. Four additional ∗ Third level bullet item.
heading levels are available, as described below. · Fourth and final level bullet item.
Description List Each description list item has a lead-in followed by the item. Double-click
2.1. Subsection Heading the lead-in box to enter or customize the text of the lead-in.
This text appears under a subsection heading. Bunyip Mythical beast of Australian Aboriginal legends.
—5—
4. About the Bibliography
Following the text of this article is a short manual bibliography. This sample bibliogra-
phy has no relationship to the previous text, but it shows sample citations such as (4), (5)
and (6). You can also have multiple citations appear together. Here is an example: (2; 3; 4).
REFERENCES
N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2, John Wiley and Sons, New York,
1963.
Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behavior in fluid hydrogen at rocket
chamber pressures”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, 1998a, 41, 3537-3550
Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical conditions”, Int. J. Heat
Mass Transfer, in print
Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular Theory of Gases and Liquids,
John Wiley and Sons, Inc., 1964
Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E., Molecular thermodynamics for fluid-
phase equilibrium, Prentice -Hall, Inc., 1986
Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Properties of Gases and Liquids, 4th
Edition, McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1987
A. An Appendix
Because appendices may contain material that is supplementary rather than integral to
the main text , many styles use a different numbering system for equations that appear in
the appendices. √
−b ± b2 − 4ac
(A1)
2a
The quadratic equation shown as equation A1 is used to demonstrate how equations are
numbered in the appendix.
This preprint was prepared with the AAS LATEX macros v5.2.
Academic Press Journals
Document class base file: apjrnl.cls

Document class options None
Packages:
amsfonts None
The shell provides typesetting specifications for articles intended for 37 scholarly journals published by Aca-
demic Press. The journals are listed in the shell and the applicable journal is selected as a document class option.
Selecting the journal Metabolic Engineering creates two-column text, not shown in the example that follows.
Front matter fields include title, author, address, date, and abstract. The shell uses fields in the body of the
document for keywords and subject classification, if required by the selected journal. See the shell for additional
information.
A short line above:

x 2 + y 2 = z2
The Title of an Article and a short line below.
Dr. Author Jones1
At this Address sin 2 µ + cos 2 µ = 1
E-mail: author1@university1.edu
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for
and
mathematical displays, regardless of the margins.
Dr. Author Second and Dr. Author Third 2 R¯
At this Address 1.2. Mathematics in section heads ®
ln tdt
author2@university2.edu
Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note that mathematics in section
heads may cause difficulties in typesetting styles with running headers or table of
Version: Today’s date contents entries.
This article illustrates many features of a mathematics article, but we do not explain 1.3. Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environments
the spurious appearance of the formula (∇ × F ) • k = z + 1 in this abstract.
A number of theorem-like environments is available. The following lemma is a
Key Words: keywords: text should be lower case except as necessary for well-known fact on differentiation of asymptotic expansions of analytic functions.
meaning. Lemma 1. Let f (z) be an analytic function i n C + . If f (z) admits the repre-
Insert header for classifications: Use only if your journal has a subject classi- sentation µ ¶
fication requirement a1 1
f (z) = a 0 + +o ,
z z
1. SAMPLE MATHEMATICS AND TEXT for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ" = {z ∈ C + : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then
This short sample document illustrates the typeset appearance of in-line and a 1 = − lim z 2 f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ ". (2)
displayed mathematics in documents. It also illustrates five levels of section head-
ings and three kinds of lists. Finally, the document includes entries for a manual Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ" → Γ" = {z ∈ C − : z ∈ Γ" } and
bibliography and an appendix.
f (1=z) = a 0 + a 1 z + o (z) . (3)
1.1. In-line and Displayed Mathematics
Fix z ∈ Γ" , and let Cr (z) = {¸ ∈ C − : |¸ − z| = r} be a circle with radius
P∞
The expression i=1 a i is in-line mathematics, while the numbered equation
r = |z| sin "=2. It follows from (3) that
Z X
1 Z m
∞
X 1 f (¸) d¸ 1 (¸ − z0 ) d¸
ai (1) 2 = am 2 + R (z), (4)
i=1
2¼i C H(z ) (¸ − z) m=0
2¼i C H(z) (¸ − z)
is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 1. where for the remainder R(z) we have
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset of H , T a
nonexpansive self map of C. Suppose that as n → ∞, an;k → 0 for each k, and |R(z)| ≤ r−1 max o (|z|) = r− 1 max |¸| · O (|z| + r )
P∞ P∞ ¸∈C H(z) ¸∈C H(z)
+ k
°n = k=0 (an;k+1 − a n;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C, An x = k= 0 a n;k T x |z| + r 1 + sin "
converges weakly to a fixed point of T [1]. = · O (|z| + r) = · O (|z|) .
r sin "
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays. 3 The spacing
above and below a display depends on whether the lines above or below are short Therefore R (z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2 , and hence by the Cauchy theorem (4)
or long, as shown in the following examples. implies
1
First author thanks. d
2
Example of two authors at the same location. f (1=z) = a 1 + R(z) → a 1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2 ,
3L
AT X automatically selects the spacing depending on the surrounding line lengths.
E
dz
1 2
Academic Press Journals 17
2. SECTION HEADINGS 4. ABOUT THE BIBLIOGRAPHY
Use the Section tag f or ma jor sections, such as the one just above. Four addi- Following the text of this article is a short manual bibliography. This sample
tional heading levels are available, as described below. bibliography has no relationship to the previous text, but it shows sample citations
such as [4], [5] and [6]. You can also have multiple citations appear together. Here
2.1. Subsection Heading is an example: [2, 3, 4].
This text appears under a subsection heading. APPENDIX A: TITLE OF THE APPENDIX
2.1.1. Subsubsection Heading The appendix should not contain material that is essential to the main text, but
rather it should contain text that is helpful to a reader seeking further clarification.
This text appears under a subsubsection heading.
It can also contain explanations and elaborations that are too long for footnotes.
The appendix or appendices should not be a depository for odds and ends that the
Subsubsubsection Headi ng This text appears under a subsubsubsection head-
author was unable to work into the body of his text.
ing.
Equations are sometimes numbered differently in an appendix, but his may not
always be true. √
Subsubsubsubsection Heading This text appears under a subsubsubsub- −b ± b2 − 4ac
section heading. (5)
2a
The quadratic equation shown as equation 5 is used to see how equations are num-
3. LISTS bered in the appendix.
Bullet, numbered and description list environments are available. Lists, which
can extend four levels deep, look like this: REFERENCES
1. Numbered list item 1. [1] N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2, John Wiley and Sons,
New York, 1963.
[2] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behavior in fluid hy-
(a) A numbered list item under a list item. drogen at rocket chamber pressures”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, 1998a, 41,
The typeset appearance for this level is often different from the screen 3537-3550
appearance. The typeset appearance often uses parentheses around the
[3] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical conditions”,
level indicator.
Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, in print
(b) Another numbered list item under a list item.
[4] Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular Theory of Gases
i. Third level numbered list item under a list item. and Liquids, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., 1964
A. Fourth and final level of numbered list items allowed.
[5] Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E., Molecular thermodynamics
• Bullet item 1. for fluid-phase equilibrium, Prentice -Hall, Inc., 1986
• Bullet item 2. [6] Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Properties of Gases and
Liquids, 4th Edition, McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1987
∗ Third level bullet item.
· Fourth and final level bullet item.
Description List Each description list item has a lead-in followed by the item.
Double-click the lead-in box to enter or customize the text of the lead-in.
Bunyip Mythical beast of Australian Aboriginal legends.
3 4
Academic Press Journals - Modified
Document class base file: apjrnl.cls

Document class options Digital Signal Processing
Packages:
amsfonts None
The shell provides typesetting specifications for articles intended for six scholarly journals published by Aca-
demic Press. The journals are listed in the shell and the applicable journal is selected as a document class option.
Four of the journals produce double-column output. The format for one of the double-column journals, Journal of
Colloid and Interface Science, is shown in the sample pages shown below. The journal Digital Signal Processing,
has been selected as the default and is shown in the sample pages shown on the next page.
Front matter fields include title, author, address, date, and abstract. All author names appear in a single field.
The shell uses an unusual method of entering author addresses. Fields in the body of the document hold keywords
and subject classification, if required by the selected journal. See the shell for additional information.
where for the remainder R(z) we have · Fourth and final level bullet item.
Description List Each description list item has a lead-in
The Title of an Article |R(z)| ≤ r− 1 max o (|z|) = r −1 max |¸| · O (|z| + r)
¸∈C H(z) ¸∈C H(z) followed by the item. Double-click the lead-in box to
|z| + r 1 + sin " enter or customize the text of the lead-in.
Dr. Author Jones∗, Dr. Author Second† and Dr. Author Third∗ = · O (|z| + r) = · O (|z|) . Bunyip Mythical beast of Australian Aboriginal legends.
r sin "
∗ Uni versity A, Department A, Remainder of Address , † University B, Department B, Remainder of Address
E-mail: firstauthor@univa.edu, secondauthor@univb.edu, thirdauthor@univa.edu Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 , and hence by the 4. ABOUT THE BIBLIOGRAPHY
Cauchy theorem (4) implies
Following the text of this article is a short manual bib-
Version: Today’s date
d liography. This sample bibliography has no relationship
f (1=z) = a 1 + R(z) → a1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 ,
This article illustrates many features of a mathematics ar- as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illus- dz to the previous text, but it shows sample citations such
as (4), (5) and (6). You can also have multiple citations
ticle, but we do not explain the spurious appearance of the trate the spacing for mathematical displays, regardless of that implies (2) by substituting 1=z back for z.
appear together. Here is an example: (2, 3, 4).
formula (∇ × F ) • k = z + 1 in this abstract. the margins.
2. SECTION HEADINGS APPENDIX A: TITLE OF THE APPENDIX
Key Words: keywords: text should be lower case ex- R¯
cept as necessary for meaning. 1.2. Mathematics in section heads ®
ln tdt
Use the Section tag for maj or sections, such as the one
Insert header for classifications: Use only if your jour- The appendix should not contain material that is es-
Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note that just above. Four additional heading levels are available, as
sential to the main text, but rather it should contain text
nal has a subject classification requirement mathematics in section heads may cause difficulties in described below.
that is helpful to a reader seeking further clarification. It
typesetting styles with running headers or table of con- can also contain explanations and elaborations that are too
1. SAMPLE MATHEMATICS AND TEXT tents entries. 2.1. Subsection Heading long for fo otnotes. The appendix or appendices should not
This text appears under a subsection heading. be a depository for odds and ends that the author was un-
This short sample document illustrates the typeset ap-
1.3. Theorems, Lemmata, and Other able to work into the body of his text.
pearance of in-line and displayed mathematics in docu-
Theorem-like Environments 2.1.1. Subsubsection Heading Equations are sometimes numbered differently in an
ments. It also illustrates five levels of section headings and
appendix, but his may not always be true.
three kinds of lists. Finally, the document includes entries A number of theorem-like environments is available. This text appears under a subsubsection heading. √
for a manual bibliography and an appendix. The following lemma is a well-known fact on differentia- −b ± b 2 − 4ac
(5)
tion of asymptotic expansions of analytic functions. Subsubsubsection Heading This text appears under a 2a
1.1. In-line and Displayed Mathematics subsubsubsection heading. The quadratic equation shown as equation 5 is used to see
P∞ Lemma 1. Let f (z) be an analytic function in C+ . If
i= 1 a i is in-line mathematics, while
The expression how equations are numbered in the appendix.
f (z) admits the representation
the numbered equation Subsubsubsubsection Heading This text appears
µ ¶ under a subsubsubsubsection heading.
∞
X a1 1 REFERENCES
ai (1) f (z) = a 0 + +o ,
z z
i=1 3. LISTS (1) N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v.
for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ" = 2, John Wiley and Sons, New York, 1963.
is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 1. Bullet, numbered and description list environments are
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded {z ∈ C+ : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then (2) Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop
available. Lists, which can extend four levels deep, look
convex subset of H , T a nonexpansive self map of C. like this: behavior in fluid hydrogen at rocket chamber pres-
Suppose that as n → ∞, a n;k → 0 for each k, and a 1 = − lim z 2 f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" . (2) sures”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, 1998a, 41, 3537-
P∞ + 1. Numbered list item 1.
°n = P k=0 (a n;k+1 − a n;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C, 2. Numbered list item 2. 3550
Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ" → Γ" =
A n x = k=0 a n;k T k x converges weakly to a fixed point of
∞
{z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ "} and (a) A numbered list item under a list item. (3) Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under
T (1). The typeset appearance for this level is often supercritical conditions”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer,
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical dis-
f (1=z) = a 0 + a 1 z + o (z) . (3) different from the screen appearance. The type- in print
plays. 1 The spacing above and below a display depends set appearance often uses parentheses around
on whether the lines above or below are short or long, as Fix z ∈ Γ" , and let Cr (z) = {¸ ∈ C − : |¸ − z| = r} be a the level indicator. (4) Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molec-
shown in the following examples. circle with radius r = |z| sin "=2. It follows from (3) that (b) Another numbered list item under a list item. ular Theory of Gases and Liquids, John Wiley and
A short line above: i. Third level numbered list item under a list Sons, Inc., 1964
Z
x2 + y 2 = z2 1 f (¸) d¸ item. (5) Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo,
= A. Fourth and final level of numbered list
2¼ i C H(z) (¸ − z)
2
E., Molecular thermodynamics for fluid-phase equilib-
and a short line below. items allowed.
Z rium, Prentice -Hall, Inc., 1986
(¸ − z0 )m d¸
1
X
A long line above may depend on your margins 1 • Bullet item 1.
am 2
+ R(z), (4)
2¼i C H(z) (¸ − z) • Bullet item 2. (6) Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E.,
sin 2 µ + cos 2 µ = 1 m=0
— Second level bullet item. The Properties of Gases and Liquids, 4th Edition,
1 A
L TEX automatically selects the spacing depending on the surrounding line lengths. ∗ Third level bullet item. McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1987
1 2
Academic Press Journals - Modified 19
R¯
1.2. Mathematics in section heads ®
ln tdt
The Title of an Article Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note that mathematics in section
Dr. Author Jones∗, Dr. Author Second† and Dr. Author Third∗ contents entries.
∗ University A, Department A, Remainder of Address , † University B,
Department B, Remainder of Address 1.3. Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environments
E-mail: firstauthor@univa.edu, secondauthor@univb.edu, thirdauthor@univa.edu
well-known fact on differentiation of asymptotic expansions of analytic functions.
Version: Today’s date
Lemma 1. Let f (z) be an analytic function i n C + . If f (z) admits the repre-
This article illustrates many features of a mathematics article, but we do not explain sentation µ ¶
the spurious appearance of the formula (∇ × F ) • k = z + 1 in this abstract.
a1 1
f (z) = a 0 + +o ,
z z
Key Words: keywords: text should be lower case except as necessary for for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ" = {z ∈ C + : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then
meaning.
Insert header for classifications: Use only if your journal has a subject classi- a 1 = − lim z 2 f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ ". (2)
fication requirement
Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ" → Γ" = {z ∈ C − : z ∈ Γ" } and
1. SAMPLE MATHEMATICS AND TEXT
f (1=z) = a 0 + a 1 z + o (z) . (3)
This short sample document illustrates the typeset appearance of in-line and
displayed mathematics in documents. It also illustrates five levels of section head- Fix z ∈ Γ" , and let Cr (z) = {¸ ∈ C − : |¸ − z| = r} be a circle with radius
ings and three kinds of lists. Finally, the document includes entries for a manual r = |z| sin "=2. It follows from (3) that
bibliography and an appendix. Z Z
(¸ − z0 ) m d¸
1
X
1 f (¸) d¸ 1
2
= am 2
+ R (z), (4)
1.1. In-line and Displayed Mathematics 2¼i C H(z ) (¸ − z) m=0
2¼i C H(z) (¸ − z)
P
The expression ∞ i=1 a i is in-line mathematics, while the numbered equation where for the remainder R(z) we have
∞
X
ai (1) |R(z)| ≤ r−1 max o (|z|) = r− 1 max |¸| · O (|z| + r )
¸∈C H(z) ¸∈C H(z)
i=1
|z| + r 1 + sin "
is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 1. = · O (|z| + r) = · O (|z|) .
r sin "
nonexpansive self map of C. Suppose that as n → ∞, an;k → 0 for each k, and Therefore R (z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2 , and hence by the Cauchy theorem (4)
P∞ + P∞ k
°n = k=0 (an;k+1 − a n;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C, An x = k= 0 a n;k T x
implies
converges weakly to a fixed point of T [1].
d
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays. 1 The spacing f (1=z) = a 1 + R(z) → a 1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2 ,
above and below a display depends on whether the lines above or below are short dz
or long, as shown in the following examples. that implies (2) by substituting 1=z back for z.
A short line above:
x 2 + y 2 = z2 2. SECTION HEADINGS
A long line above may depend on your margins Use the Section tag f or ma jor sections, such as the one just above. Four addi-
tional heading levels are available, as described below.
sin 2 µ + cos 2 µ = 1
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for 2.1. Subsection Heading
mathematical displays, regardless of the margins. This text appears under a subsection heading.
1L
AT
EX automatically selects the spacing depending on the surrounding line lengths.
1 2
2.1.1. Subsubsection Heading The quadratic equation shown as equation 5 is used to see how equations are num-
bered in the appendix.
REFERENCES
Subsubsubsection Headi ng This text appears under a subsubsubsection head-
ing. [1] N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2, John Wiley and Sons,
New York, 1963.
Subsubsubsubsection Heading This text appears under a subsubsubsub-
section heading. [2] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behavior in fluid hy-
drogen at rocket chamber pressures”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, 1998a, 41,
3. LISTS 3537-3550
can extend four levels deep, look like this:
1. Numbered list item 1. [4] Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular Theory of Gases
2. Numbered list item 2. and Liquids, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., 1964
The typeset appearance for this level is often different from the screen [5] Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E., Molecular thermodynamics
appearance. The typeset appearance often uses parentheses around the for fluid-phase equilibrium, Prentice -Hall, Inc., 1986
level indicator.
[6] Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Properties of Gases and
• Bullet item 1.
• Bullet item 2.
4. ABOUT THE BIBLIOGRAPHY
Following the text of this article is a short manual bibliography. This sample
bibliography has no relationship to the previous text, but it shows sample citations
is an example: [2, 3, 4].
APPENDIX A: TITLE OF THE APPENDIX
The appendix should not contain material that is essential to the main text, but
rather it should contain text that is helpful to a reader seeking further clarification.
It can also contain explanations and elaborations that are too long for footnotes.
The appendix or appendices should not be a depository for odds and ends that the
author was unable to work into the body of his text.
Equations are sometimes numbered differently in an appendix, but his may not
always be true. √
−b ± b2 − 4ac
(5)
2a
3 4
American Chemical Society

Document class options Standard
Packages:
achemso Standard
This shell uses the achemso package to provide a BibTEX style appropriate for the journals of The American
Chemical Society. The package is not an official package of the Society.

The Title of an Article as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for

1.2 Mathematics in section heads ®
ln tdt
At this Address
July 20, 2004 heads may cause difficulties in typesetting styles with running headers or table
of contents entries.
Abstract 1.3 Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Envi-

This article illustrates many features of a mathematics article, but we ronments
do not explain the spurious appearance of the formula (∇ × F) · k = z + 1
in this abstract. A number of theorem-like environments is available. The following lemma is
a well-known fact on differentiation of asymptotic expansions of analytic func-
tions.
1 Sample Mathematics and Text Lemma 1 Let f (z) be an analytic function in C+ . If f (z) admits the repre-
This short sample document illustrates the typeset appearance of in-line and sentation µ ¶
a1 1
displayed mathematics in documents. It also illustrates five levels of section f (z) = a 0 + +o ,
z z
headings and three kinds of lists. Finally, the document includes entries for a
manual bibliography and an appendix. for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ" = {z ∈ C + : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then
a 1 = − lim z 2 f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" . (2)
P∞ Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ " → Γ" = {z ∈ C − : z ∈ Γ" } and
The expression i= 1 ai is in-line mathematics, while the numbered equation
f (1=z) = a 0 + a 1 z + o (z) . (3)
∞
X Fix z ∈ Γ" , and let Cr (z) = {¸ ∈ C − : |¸ − z| = r} be a circle with radius
ai (1)
i=1
Z X1 Z m
is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 1. 1 f (¸) d¸ 1 (¸ − z0 ) d¸
= am + R(z), (4)
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset of H , T a 2¼i C H(z) (¸ − z)2 2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z)2
m=0
nonexpansive self map of C. Suppose that as n → ∞, a n;k → 0 for each k, and
P∞ P∞ where for the remainder R(z) we have
° n = k=0 (a n;k+1 − a n;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C , An x = k=0 a n;k T k x
+
converges weakly to a fixed point of T .1 |R (z)| ≤ r −1 max o (|z|) = r −1 max |¸| · O (|z| + r)
¸∈ CH (z) ¸∈ CH (z)
above and below a display depends on whether the lines above or below are |z| + r 1 + sin "
= · O (|z| + r) = · O (|z|) .
short or long, as shown in the following examples. r sin "
A short line above: Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 , and hence by the Cauchy theorem (4)
x2 + y 2 = z 2 implies
d
1L
AT f (1=z) = a 1 + R(z) → a1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 ,
EX automatically selects the spacing depending on the surrounding line lengths. dz
1 2
American Chemical Society 21
2 Section Headings 4 About the Bibliography

Use the Section tag for major sections, such as the one just above. Four addi- Following the text of this article is a short manual bibliography. This sample
tional heading levels are available, as described below. bibliography has no relationship to the previous text, but it shows sample ci-
tations such as, 4 5 and. 6 You can also have multiple citations appear together.
2.1 Subsection Heading Here is an example:. 2—4
This text appears under a subsection heading.
2.1.1 Subsubsection Heading

Subsubsubsection Heading This text appears under a subsubsubsection

heading.
Subsubsubsubsection Heading This text appears under a subsubsub-

subsection heading.
3 Lists

The typeset appearance for this level is often different from the screen
appearance. The typeset appearance often uses parentheses around
the level indicator.
• Bullet item 1.
• Bullet item 2.

3 4
References
1. N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2, John Wiley and Sons,
New York, 1963.
2. Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behavior in fluid
hydrogen at rocket chamber pressures”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, 1998a,
41, 3537-3550
3. Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical condi-
tions”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, in print
4. Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular Theory of Gases
and Liquids, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., 1964
5. Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E., Molecular thermody-

namics for fluid-phase equilibrium, Prentice -Hall, Inc., 1986
6. Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Properties of Gases
and Liquids, 4th Edition, McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1987
A An Appendix
Because appendices may contain material that is supplementary rather than
integral to the main text , many styles use a different numbering system for
equations that appear in the appendices.
√
−b ± b2 − 4ac
(5)
2a
The quadratic equation shown as equation 5 is used to demonstrate how equa-
tions are numbered in the appendix.
5
American Statistical Association Proceedings

Packages:
sw20asap None
The front matter includes a field for key words.
Fix z ∈ Γ ", and let Cr (z) = {¸ ∈ C − : Subsubsubsubsection Heading

The Title of an Article |¸ − z| = r} be a circle with radius r = This text appears under a subsubsubsubsec-
Dr. Author Jones |z| sin "=2. It follows from (3) that tion heading.
At this Address
Z 3. Lists
1 f (¸) d¸
KEY WORDS sample mathematics, sample lines above or below are short or long, as 2 = Bullet, numbered and description list en-
text shown in the following examples.
2¼i (¸ − z)
CH (z)
1 Z m
vironments are available. Lists, which can
A short line above: X 1 (¸ − z0) d¸
Abstract am + R(z), (4) extend four levels deep, look like this:
x2 + y2 = z 2 m=0
2¼i CH(z) (¸ − z)2
This article illustrates many features of 1. Numbered list item 1.
a mathematics article, but we do not explain and a short line below. where for the remainder R(z) we have
the spurious appearance of the formula (∇ × A long line above may depend on your 2. Numbered list item 2.
F ) · k = z + 1 in this abstract. margins |R(z)| ≤ r−1 max o (|z|)
¸∈CH (z) (a) A numbered list item under a list
1. Sample Mathematics and Text sin2 µ + cos2 µ = 1
= r −1
max |¸| · O (|z| + r) item.
as will a long line below. This line is long ¸∈CH (z)
This short sample document illustrates The typeset appearance for this
the typeset appearance of in-line and dis- enough to illustrate the spacing for mathe- |z| + r
= · O (|z| + r) level is often different from the
played mathematics in documents. It also matical displays, regardless of the margins. r
1 + sin " screen appearance. The typeset
illustrates five levels of section headings and 1.2 R Mathematics in section heads = · O (|z|) . appearance often uses parentheses
three kinds of lists. Finally, the document in- ¯
ln tdt sin "
® around the level indicator.
cludes entries for a manual bibliography and Mathematics can appear in section Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2 , and (b) Another numbered list item under
an appendix. heads. Note that mathematics in section hence by the Cauchy theorem (4) implies a list item.
1.1 In-line and Displayed Mathemat- heads may cause difficulties in typesetting
ics styles with running headers or table of con- i. Third level numbered list item
P∞ d under a list item.
The expression i=1 ai is in-line mathe- tents entries. f (1=z) = a1 + R(z) → a1 ,
dz A. Fourth and final level of
matics, while the numbered equation 1.3 Theorems, Lemmata, and Other
as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2, numbered list items al-
∞
Theorem-like Environments
X lowed.
ai (1) A number of theorem-like environments that implies (2) by substituting 1=z back for
i=1 is available. The following lemma is a well- z. • Bullet item 1.
known fact on differentiation of asymptotic
is displayed and automatically numbered as 2. Section Headings
expansions of analytic functions. • Bullet item 2.
equation 1. Use the Section tag for major sections,
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed Lemma 1 Let f (z) be an analytic function such as the one just above. Four additional ◦ Second level bullet item.
bounded convex subset of H, T a nonex- in C +. If f (z) admits the representation heading levels are available, as described be-
pansive self map of C. Suppose that as µ ¶ Third level bullet item.
a1 1 low.
n → ∞, an;k → 0 for each k, and ° n = f (z) = a 0 + +o , ∗ Fourth and final level bul-
P∞ + z z 2.1 Subsection Heading
− an;k ) → 0. Then for each x
k=0 (an;k+1 P let item.
k This text appears under a subsection
in C , An x = ∞ k=0 a n;kT x converges weakly for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ" =
to a fixed point of T [1]. {z ∈ C+ : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then heading. Description List Each description list
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern Subsubsection Heading This text appears item has a lead-in followed by the item.
*
mathematical displays. The spacing above a1 = − lim z 2f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ ". (2) under a subsubsection heading. Double-click the lead-in box to enter or
and below a display depends on whether the customize the text of the lead-in.
{z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ "} and Subsubsubsection Heading This text
* A Bunyip Mythical beast of Australian Abo-
LT
EX automatically selects the spacing depend- appears under a subsubsubsection heading.
ing on the surrounding line lengths. f (1=z) = a0 + a1 z + o (z) . (3) riginal legends.
American Statistical Association Proceedings 23

Following the text of this article is a
short manual bibliography. This sample bib-
liography has no relationship to the previous
text, but it shows sample citations such as
[4], [5] and [6]. You can also have multiple
citations appear together. Here is an exam-
ple: [2, 3, 4].
REFERENCES
N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional
Analysis, v. 2, John Wiley and Sons,
New York, 1963.
Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid
oxygen drop behavior in fluid hydrogen
at rocket chamber pressures”, Int. J.
Heat Mass Transfer, 1998a, 41, 3537-
3550
Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis num-
ber under supercritical conditions”, Int.
J. Heat Mass Transfer, in print
Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R.
B., Molecular Theory of Gases and Liq-
uids, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., 1964
Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de
Azevedo, E., Molecular thermodynam-
ics for fluid-phase equilibrium, Prentice
-Hall, Inc., 1986
Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B.
E., The Properties of Gases and Liquids,
4th Edition, McGraw-Hill Book Com-
pany, 1987
A An Appendix
Because appendices may contain mate-
rial that is supplementary rather than inte-
gral to the main text , many styles use a dif-
ferent numbering system for equations that
appear in the appendices.
√
−b ± b2 − 4ac
(5)
2a
The quadratic equation shown as equation
5 is used to demonstrate how equations are
AMS Journal Article
Document class base file: amsart.cls

Packages:
None
The shell is an AMS-LATEX typesetting specification intended for the preparation of articles to appear in AMS
journals. The extensive front matter includes fields for full and short title, address, email address, URL address,
thanks, dedication, and key words.
2 DR. AUTHOR JO NE S
R¯
1.2. Mathematics in section heads ® ln tdt. M athematics can appear in sec-
tion heads. Note that mathematics in section heads may cause difficulties in type-
setting styles with running headers or table of contents entries.
THE TITLE OF AN ARTICLE
1.3. Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environments. A num-
DR. AUTHOR JONES ber of theorem-like environments is available. The following lemma is a well-known
fact on differentiation of asymptotic expansions of analytic functions.
Dedicated to the memory of S. Bach.
Lemma 1. Let f (z) be an analytic function in C +. If f (z) admits the represen-
tation µ ¶
Abstract. This article illustrates many features of a mathematics article, but
we do not explain the spurious appearance of the formula (∇ × F ) · k = z + 1 a1 1
f (z) = a 0 + +o ,
in this abstract.The Full z z
for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ " = {z ∈ C+ : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then
(1.2) a 1 = − lim z 2 f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" .
1. Sample Mathematics and Text
Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ " → Γ" = {z ∈ C − : z ∈ Γ" } and
displayed mathematics in documents. It also illustrates five levels of section head- (1.3) f (1=z) = a 0 + a 1 z + o (z) .
ings and three kinds of lists. Finally, the document includes entries for a manual Fix z ∈ Γ" , and let C r (z) = {¸ ∈ C− : |¸ − z| = r} be a circle with radius
bibliography and an appendix. r = |z| sin "=2. It follows from (1.3) that
P∞ Z Z
1.1. In-line and Displayed Mathematics. The expression i= 1 a i is in-line (¸ − z0 )m d¸
1
X
1 f (¸) d¸ 1
mathematics, while the numbered equation (1.4) = am + R(z),
2¼i C H( z) (¸ − z)2 m= 0
2¼i C H(z ) (¸ − z)2
∞
X
(1.1) ai where for the remainder R (z) we have
i=1
|R(z)| ≤ r −1 max o (|z|) = r −1 max |¸| · O (|z| + r)
is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 1.1. ¸∈C H(z) ¸∈C H(z )
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset of H , T a |z| + r 1 + sin "
nonexpansive self map of C. Suppose that as n → ∞, an;k → 0 for each k, and = · O (|z| + r) = · O (|z|) .
P∞ P∞ r sin "
°n = k
k=0 (an;k+1 − a n;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C, An x = k=0 a n;k T x
+
converges weakly to a fixed point of T [1]. Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 , and hence by the Cauchy theorem (1.4)
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays. 1 The spacing above implies
and below a display depends on whether the lines above or below are short or long,
as shown in the following examples. d
f (1=z) = a 1 + R (z) → a1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 ,
A short line above: dz
x2 + y 2 = z2 that implies (1.2) by substituting 1=z back for z. ¤
A long line above may depend on your margins 2. Section Headings
sin2 µ + cos2 µ = 1 Use the Section tag for major sections, such as the one just above. Four addi-
2.1. Subsection Heading. This text appears under a subsection heading.
1991 Mathematics Subject Classification. Primary 05C38, 15A15; Secondary 05A15, 15A18.
2.1.1. Subsubsection Heading. This text appears under a subsubsection heading.
Key words and phrases. Keyword one, keyword two, keyword three.
Thanks to Mother. Subsubsubsection Heading. This text appears under a subsubsubsection heading.
This paper is in final form and no version of it will be submitted for publication anywhere. Subsubsubsubsection Heading. This text appears under a subsubsubsubsection head-
1LAT X automatically selects the spacing depending on the surrounding line lengths. ing.
E
1
AMS Journal Article 25
SHORT TITLE 3 4 DR. AUTHOR JO NE S
3. Lists over afterwards, it occurred to her that she ought to have wondered
at this, but at the time it all seemed quite natural); but when
the Rabbit actually took a watch out of its waistcoat-pocket, and
looked at it, and then hurried on, Alice started to her feet, for it
(1) Numbered list item 1. flashed across her mind that she had never before seen a rabbit with
(2) Numbered list item 2. either a waistcoat-pocket, or a watch to take out of it, and burning
(a) A numbered list item under a list item. with curiosity, she ran across the field after it, and fortunately was
The typeset appearance for this level is often different from the screen just in time to see it pop down a large rabbit-hole under the hedge.
appearance. The typeset appearance often uses parentheses around In another moment down went Alice after it, never once consid-
the level indicator. ering how in the world she was to get out again.
(i) Third level numbered list item under a list item. 5. About the Bibliography
(A) Fourth and final level of numbered list items allowed. Following the text of this article is a short manual bibliography. This sample
• Bullet item 1. bibliography has no relationship to the previous text, but it shows sample citations
• Bullet item 2. such as [4], [5] and [6]. You can also have multiple citations appear together. Here
— Second level bullet item. is an example: [2, 3, 4].
· Fourth and final level bullet item. References
Description List: Each description list item has a lead-in followed by the [1] N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2, John Wiley and Sons, New York, 1963.
item. Double-click the lead-in box to enter or customize the text of the [2] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behavior in fluid hydrogen at rocket
lead-in.
[3] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical conditions”, Int. J. Heat
Bunyip: Mythical beast of Australian Aboriginal legends. Mass Transfer, in print
[4] Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular Theory of Gases and Liquids, John
4. Tags Wiley and Sons, Inc., 1964
[5] Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E., Molecular thermodynamics for fluid-phase
You can apply the logical markup tag Emphasized. equilibrium, Prentice -Hall, Inc., 1986
You can apply the visual markup tags Bold, Italics, Roman, Sans Serif, Slanted, [6] Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Properties of Gases and Liquids, 4th
Small Caps, and Typewriter.
You can apply the special, mathematics only, tags BLACKBOARD BOLD, Appendix A. An Appendix
CALLIGRAP HIC, and fraktur. Note that blackboard bold and calligraphic are
correct only when applied to uppercase letters A through Z. Because appendices may contain material that is supplementary rather than in-
You can apply the size tags tiny, scriptsize, footnotesize, small, normalsize, large, tegral to the main text , many styles use a different numbering system for equations
that appear in the appendices.
Large, LARGE, huge and Huge . √
−b ± b 2 − 4ac
The Long Quotation tag is used for quotations of more than one paragraph. (A.1)
Following is the beginning of Alice’s Adventures in W onderland by Lewis Carroll: 2a
The quadratic equation shown as equation A.1 is used to demonstrate how equations
Alice was beginning to get very tired of sitting by her sister on the
are numbered in the appendix.
bank, and of having nothing to do: once or twice she had peeped
into the book her sister was reading, but it had no pictures or At this Address
conversations in it, ’and what is the use of a book,’ thought Alice E-mail address: ajones@oneuniv.edu
URL: http://www.authorone.oneuniv.edu
’without pictures or conversation?’
So she was considering in her own mind (as well as she could,
for the hot day made her feel very sleepy and stupid), whether the
pleasure of making a daisy-chain would be worth the trouble of
getting up and picking the daisies, when suddenly a White Rabbit
with pink eyes ran close by her.
There was nothing so very remarkable in that; nor did Alice
think it so very much out of the way to hear the Rabbit say to
itself, ’Oh dear! Oh dear! I shall be late!’ (when she thought it
AMS Proceedings Article
Document class base file: amsproc.cls

Packages:
None
The shell is an AMS-LATEX typesetting specification intended for the preparation of articles to appear in AMS
proceedings. The extensive front matter includes fields for full and short title, address, email address, URL address,
thanks, dedication, and key words.
2 DR. AUTHOR JO NE S
R¯
1.2. Mathematics in section heads ® ln tdt. Mathematics can appear in
section heads. Note that mathematics in section heads may cause difficulties in
typesetting styles with running headers or table of contents entries.
1.3. Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environments. A
The Title of an Article number of theorem-like environments is available. The following lemma is a well-
known fact on differentiation of asymptotic expansions of analytic functions.
Dr. Author Jones
Lemma 1. Let f (z) be an analytic function in C+ . If f (z) admits the repre-
sentation µ ¶
Dedicated to the memory of S. Bach. a1 1
f (z) = a 0 + +o ,
z z
Abstract. This article illustrates many features of a mathematics article, but for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ " = {z ∈ C+ : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then
we do not explain the spurious appearance of the formula (∇ × F ) · k = z + 1
in this abstract. (1.2) a 1 = − lim z 2 f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" .
(1.3) f (1=z) = a 0 + a 1 z + o (z) .
Fix z ∈ Γ" , and let C r (z) = {¸ ∈ C− : |¸ − z| = r} be a circle with radius
This short sample document illustrates the typeset appearance of in-line and r = |z| sin "=2. It follows from (1.3) that
displayed mathematics in documents. It also illustrates five levels of section head- Z Z
(¸ − z0 )m d¸
X1
ings and three kinds of lists. Finally, the document includes entries for a manual 1 f (¸) d¸ 1
(1.4) = am + R(z),
bibliography and an appendix. 2¼i C H( z) (¸ − z)2 m= 0
2¼i C H(z ) (¸ − z)2
P∞
1.1. In-line and Displayed Mathematics. The expression i=1 a i is in- where for the remainder R (z) we have
line mathematics, while the numbered equation
X∞ ¸∈C H(z) ¸∈C H(z )
(1.1) ai |z| + r 1 + sin "
i=1 = · O (|z| + r) = · O (|z|) .
r sin "
is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 1.1.
Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 , and hence by the Cauchy theorem (1.4)
implies
nonexpansive self map of C. Suppose that as n → ∞, an;k → 0 for each k, and
P∞ P∞ k
°n = k=0 (an;k+1 − a n;k )
+
→ 0. Then for each x in C, An x = k=0 a n;k T x d
converges weakly to a fixed point of T [1]. f (1=z) = a 1 + R (z) → a1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 ,
dz
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays.1 The spacing that implies (1.2) by substituting 1=z back for z. ¤
above and below a display depends on whether the lines above or below are short
or long, as shown in the following examples. 2. Section Headings
A short line above:
x2 + y 2 = z2 Use the Section tag for ma jor sections, such as the one just above. Four addi-
A long line above may depend on your margins 2.1. Subsection Heading. This text appears under a subsection heading.
2
sin µ + cos µ = 1
2 2.1.1. Subsubsection Heading. This text appears under a subsubsection head-
ing.
1991 Mathematics Subject Classification. Primary 05C38, 15A15; Secondary 05A15, 15A18. Subsubsubsection Heading. This text appears under a subsubsubsection head-
Thanks to Mother.
ing.
This paper is in final form and no version of it will be submitted for publication anywhere. Subsubsubsubsection Heading. This text appears under a subsubsubsubsection head-
1LAT X automatically selects the spacing depending on the surrounding line lengths.
E ing.
1
AMS Proceedings Article 27
SHORT TITLE 3 4 DR. AUTHOR JO NE S
3. Lists over afterwards, it occurred to her that she ought to have wondered
at this, but at the time it all seemed quite natural); but when
the Rabbit actually took a watch out of its waistcoat-pocket, and
looked at it, and then hurried on, Alice started to her feet, for it
(1) Numbered list item 1. flashed across her mind that she had never before seen a rabbit with
(2) Numbered list item 2. either a waistcoat-pocket, or a watch to take out of it, and burning
(a) A numbered list item under a list item. with curiosity, she ran across the field after it, and fortunately was
The typeset appearance for this level is often different from the screen just in time to see it pop down a large rabbit-hole under the hedge.
appearance. The typeset appearance often uses parentheses around In another moment down went Alice after it, never once con-
the level indicator. sidering how in the world she was to get out again.
(i) Third level numbered list item under a list item. 5. About the Bibliography
(A) Fourth and final level of numbered list items allowed. Following the text of this article is a short manual bibliography. This sample
• Bullet item 1. bibliography has no relationship to the previous text, but it shows sample citations
• Bullet item 2. such as [4], [5] and [6]. You can also have multiple citations appear together. Here
— Second level bullet item. is an example: [2, 3, 4].
· Fourth and final level bullet item. References
Description List: Each description list item has a lead-in followed by the [1] N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2, John Wiley and Sons, New York, 1963.
item. Double-click the lead-in box to enter or customize the text of the [2] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behavior in fluid hydrogen at rocket
lead-in.
Bunyip: Mythical beast of Australian Aboriginal legends. Mass Transfer, in print
4. Tags Wiley and Sons, Inc., 1964
You can apply the logical markup tag Emphasized. equilibrium, Prentice -Hall, Inc., 1986
You can apply the visual markup tags Bold, Italics, Roman, Sans Serif, Slanted, [6] Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Properties of Gases and Liquids, 4th
You can apply the special, mathematics only, tags BLACKBOARD BOLD, Appendix A. An Appendix
CALLIGRAP HIC, and fraktur. Note that blackboard bold and calligraphic are
correct only when applied to uppercase letters A through Z. Because appendices may contain material that is supplementary rather than in-
You can apply the size tags tiny, scriptsize, footnotesize, small , normalsize, large, tegral to the main text , many styles use a different numbering system for equations
Large, LARGE, huge and Huge . √
−b ± b 2 − 4ac
The Long Quotation tag is used for quotations of more than one paragraph. (A.1)
Following is the beginning of Alice’s Adventures in W onderland by Lewis Carroll: 2a
Alice was beginning to get very tired of sitting by her sister on the
bank, and of having nothing to do: once or twice she had peeped
into the book her sister was reading, but it had no pictures or At this Address
conversations in it, ’and what is the use of a book,’ thought Alice E-mail address: ajones@nowhere.edu
URL: http://www.nowhere.edu
’without pictures or conversation?’
So she was considering in her own mind (as well as she could,
for the hot day made her feel very sleepy and stupid), whether the
pleasure of making a daisy-chain would be worth the trouble of
getting up and picking the daisies, when suddenly a White Rabbit
with pink eyes ran close by her.
There was nothing so very remarkable in that; nor did Alice
think it so very much out of the way to hear the Rabbit say to
itself, ’Oh dear! Oh dear! I shall be late!’ (when she thought it
An Astronomy-Astrophysics Journal

Packages:
sw20asas None
The shell produces documents whose characteristics are similar to those found in astronomy and astrophysics
journals.
The Title of an Article
Dr. Author Jones Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays.1 The spacing above and
At this Address below a display depends on whether the lines above or below are short or long, as shown in

Received: ; Accepted:
A short line above:
x2 + y2 = z 2
Abstract
This article illustrates many features of a mathematics article, but we do not explain
the spurious appearance of the formula (∇ × F) · k = z + 1 in this abstract.
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for mathematical
1. Sample Mathematics and Text displays, regardless of the margins.

R¯
This short sample document illustrates the typeset appearance of in-line and displayed math- 1.2 Mathematics in section heads ®
ln J@J
ematics in documents. It also illustrates five levels of section headings and three kinds of
Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note that mathematics in section heads may
lists. Finally, the document includes entries for a manual bibliography and an appendix.
cause difficulties in typesetting styles with running headers or table of contents entries.
1.1 In-line and Displayed Mathematics 1.3 Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environments
P∞ A number of theorem-like environments is available. The following lemma is a well-known

The expression i=1 ai is in-line mathematics, while the numbered equation
∞ fact on differentiation of asymptotic expansions of analytic functions.

X
ai (1)
i=1
Lemma 1 Let f (z) be an analytic function in C+ . If f (z) admits the representation
µ ¶
is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 1. a1 1
f (z) = a0 + +o ,
z z
expansive self map of C. Suppose that as n → ∞, an;k → 0 for each k, and ° n =
P∞ P∞ a1 = − lim z 2f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ". (2)
+ k
k=0 (an;k+1 − an;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C, An x = k=0 an;k T x converges weakly to
1 LATEX automatically selects the spacing depending on the surrounding line lengths.
a fixed point of T (1).
1 2
An Astronomy-Astrophysics Journal 29
Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ" → Γ" = {z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ" } and Subsubsubsection Heading This text appears under a subsubsubsection heading.
f (1=z) = a0 + a1 z + o (z) . (3) Subsubsubsubsection Heading This text appears under a subsubsubsubsection head-
ing.
Fix z ∈ Γ", and let Cr (z) = {¸ ∈ C − : |¸ − z| = r} be a circle with radius r = |z| sin "=2. It
follows from (3) that 3. Lists

Z Z
(¸ − z0 )m d¸
1
X
1 f (¸) d¸ 1
2 = am 2 + R(z), (4) Bullet, numbered and description list environments are available. Lists, which can extend
2¼i Cr (z) (¸ − z) m=0
2¼i C r (z) (¸ − z)
four levels deep, look like this:
|R(z)| ≤ r −1
max o (|z|) = r −1
max |¸| · O (|z| + r)
¸∈Cr (z) ¸∈Cr (z)
|z| + r 1 + sin "
= · O (|z| + r) = · O (|z|).
r sin "
Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2, and hence by the Cauchy theorem (4) implies The typeset appearance for this level is often different from the screen appearance.
The typeset appearance often uses parentheses around the level indicator.
d
f (1=z) = a1 + R(z) → a1, as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 , (b) Another numbered list item under a list item.
dz
that implies (2) by substituting 1=z back for z. i. Third level numbered list item under a list item.

2. Section Headings
• Bullet item 1.
Use the Section tag for major sections, such as the one just above. Four additional heading
• Bullet item 2.
levels are available, as described below.

2.1 Subsection Heading
This text appears under a subsubsection heading. Double-click the lead-in box to enter or customize the text of the lead-in.
3 4
Following the text of this article is a short manual bibliography. This sample bibliography
has no relationship to the previous text, but it shows sample citations such as (4), (5) and
(6). You can also have multiple citations appear together. Here is an example: (2, 3, 4).
REFERENCES
N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2, John Wiley and Sons, New
York, 1963.
Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behavior in fluid hydrogen at
rocket chamber pressures”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, 1998a, 41, 3537-3550
Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical conditions”, Int. J.
Heat Mass Transfer, in print
Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E., Molecular thermodynamics for
fluid-phase equilibrium, Prentice -Hall, Inc., 1986
Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Properties of Gases and Liquids,
4th Edition, McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1987
A An Appendix
Because appendices may contain material that is supplementary rather than integral to the
main text , many styles use a different numbering system for equations that appear in the
appendices.
√
−b ± b2 − 4ac
(5)
2a
The quadratic equation shown as equation 5 is used to demonstrate how equations are
5
Annals of Statistics-Draft

Packages:
sw20dft1 None
The shell is intended for preparing drafts of papers to be submitted to the Annals of Statistics. The shell produces
documents with wide margins and double spacing so that referees and editors have room to write comments; it
doesn’t produce camera-ready documents. The front matter includes fields for a running title, primary and secondary
classes, and key words.
kinds of lists. Finally, the document includes entries for a manual bibliography and
an appendix.
The Title of an Article 1.1 In-line and Displayed Mathematics
P∞
(Running Title: A Simple Article) The expression i=1 ai is in-line mathematics, while the numbered equation
X
∞
by ai (1)
i=1
* is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 1.

Dr. Author Jones
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset of H, T a
At this Address
P∞ + P∞ k
°n = k=0 (a n;k+1 − a n;k) → 0. Then for each x in C, An x = k=0 an;k T x con-
verges weakly to a fixed point of T [1].

Abstract
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays.1 The spacing above
This article illustrates many features of a mathematics article, but we do not explain and below a display depends on whether the lines above or below are short or long,
the spurious appearance of the formula (∇ × F ) · k = z + 1 in this abstract. as shown in the following examples.
A short line above:

1 Sample Mathematics and Text
x2 + y 2 = z 2
mathematics in documents. It also illustrates five levels of section headings and three
Key Words and Phrases: Key, Words
AMS 1991 Subject Classifications. Primary: 123; Secondary: 456.
* sin2 µ + cos2 µ = 1
Supported by NSF grant # 123456
1 A
LT EX automatically selects the spacing depending on the surrounding line lengths.
1 2
Annals of Statistics-Draft 31
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for math- Fix z ∈ Γ ", and let Cr (z) = {¸ ∈ C − : |¸ − z| = r} be a circle with radius r =
ematical displays, regardless of the margins. |z| sin "=2. It follows from (3) that
Z 1
X Z m
R¯ 1 f (¸) d¸ 1 (¸ − z0) d¸
1.2 Mathematics in section heads ln tdt 2 = am 2 + R(z), (4)
® 2¼i Cr (z) (¸ − z) m=0
2¼i Cr (z) (¸ − z)
Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note that mathematics in section heads where for the remainder R(z) we have
may cause difficulties in typesetting styles with running headers or table of contents
|R(z)| ≤ r−1 max o (|z|) = r−1 max |¸| · O (|z| + r)
¸∈Cr (z) ¸∈Cr (z)
entries.
|z| + r 1 + sin "
= · O (|z| + r) = · O (|z|) .
r sin "
1.3 Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environments
Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2 , and hence by the Cauchy theorem (4)
A number of theorem-like environments is available. The following lemma is a well- implies

d
f (1=z) = a1 + R(z) → a 1, as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2,
Lemma 1 Let f (z) be an analytic function in C +. If f (z) admits the representation dz
µ ¶ that implies (2) by substituting 1=z back for z.

a1 1
f (z) = a 0 + +o ,
z z
2 Section Headings
Use the Section tag for major sections, such as the one just above. Four additional
a1 = − lim z2f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ". (2)
heading levels are available, as described below.
Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ " → Γ" = {z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ"} and
f (1=z) = a0 + a1z + o (z) . (3)
3 4
You can apply the special, mathematics only, tags BLACKBOARD BOLD, CALLIGRAPHIC, drogen at rocket chamber pressures”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, 1998a, 41,
and fraktur. Note that blackboard bold and calligraphic are correct only when applied 3537-3550
to uppercase letters A through Z.

Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical conditions”,
Following is a group of paragraphs marked as Short Quote. This environment is
appropriate for a short quotation or a sequence of short quotations.
Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular Theory of Gases
The buck stops here. Harry Truman
I am not a crook. Richard Nixon

Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E., Molecular thermodynamics
They misunderestimated me. George W. Bush
for fluid-phase equilibrium, Prentice -Hall, Inc., 1986
5 About the Bibliography Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Properties of Gases and

Following the text of this article is a short manual bibliography. This sample bibli-
ography has no relationship to the previous text, but it shows sample citations such A An Appendix
as [4], [5] and [6]. You can also have multiple citations appear together. Here is an
Because appendices may contain material that is supplementary rather than integral
example: [2, 3, 4].
to the main text , many styles use a different numbering system for equations that
References appear in the appendices.

√
−b ± b2 − 4ac
(5)
N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2, John Wiley and Sons, 2a
The quadratic equation shown as equation 5 is used to demonstrate how equations

New York, 1963.
Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behavior in fluid hy-
7 8
ASAE Transactions
Document class base file: asaetr.cls

Packages:
None
This shell produces documents appropriate for submission to the ASAE Transactions. A special macro (drop)
defined for the shell typesets a large character at the beginning of a paragraph, with subsequent text wrapped around
the character. The macro is best used in SWP and SW as an encapsulated TeX field so the drop letter can be viewed.
See the shell for detailed information. Note that more material fits on double-column pages than on single-column
pages.
Therefore R(z ) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"= 2, and hence by the A. Fourth and final level of numbered list
Cauchy theorem (4) implies items allowed.
The Title of an Article∗ d • Bullet item 1.

f (1=z) = a1 + R(z) → a1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 ,
dz
• Bullet item 2.
Dr. Author Jones† J. D. McCauley ‡ that implies (2) by substituting 1=z back for z.
Student Member
ASAE
Information About This Shell ∗ Third level bullet item.
The Date The shell document contains detailed information about us- · Fourth and final level bullet item.
ing various features including the front matter and the sec-
tion headings. In particular, the document includes a caution Description List Each description list item has a lead-in
Abstract A long line above may depend on your margins about using fourth-level headings. Additional information in- followed by the item. Double-click the lead-in box to
2 2 cludes helpful hints about using certain packages to simplify enter or customize the text of the lead-in.
This article illustrates many features of a mathematics ar- sin µ + cos µ = 1
ticle, but we do not explain the spurious appearance of the working with figures and tables. Captions should be placed
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illus- under figures. Tables can contain footnotes if the minipage Bunyip Mythical beast of Australian Aboriginal legends.
formula (∇ × F ) · k = z + 1 in this abstract.
trate the spacing for mathematical displays, regardless of the environment is used.
margins.
Tags
Sample Mathematics and Text R¯
ln tdt Section Headings ou can apply the logical markup tag Emphas ized.
T
his short sample document illustrates the typeset ap-
pearance of in-line and displayed mathematics in doc-
uments. It also illustrates five levels of section head-
Mathematics in section heads
M
®
athematics can appear in section heads. Note that
mathematics in section heads may cause difficulties
in typesetting styles with running headers or table U
se the Section tag for major sections, such as the
one just above. Four additional heading levels are
available, as described below.
Y You can apply the visual markup tags Bold, Ital-
ics, Roman, Sans Serif, Slanted, Small Caps, and
Typewriter.
ings and three kinds of lists. Finally, the document includes You can apply the special, mathematics only, tags
entries for a manual bibliography and an appendix. BLACKBOARD BOLD, CALLI GRAP HI C, and fraktur.
Subsection Heading Note that blackboard bold and calligraphic are correct only
Theorems, Lemmata, and Other This text appears under a subsection heading. when applied to uppercase letters A through Z.
In-line and Displayed Mathematics Theorem-like Environments
P∞ You can apply the size tags tiny, scr ipt size, footnotesize, small,
i=1 ai is in-line mathematics, while
T
he expression number of theorem-like environments is available. Subsubsection Heading
LARGE , huge and
the numbered equation
X∞
ai
i=1
(1)
A
tions.
The following lemma is a well-known fact on differ-
entiation of asymptotic expansions of analytic func-
Subsubsubsection Heading.
This text appears under a subsubsubsection heading.
normalsize,
Huge .
large, Large,
Following is a group of paragraphs marked as Short Quote.

is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 1. Lemma 1 Let f (z) be an analytic function in C+ . If f (z) This environment is appropriate for a short quotation or a
Subsubsubsubsection Heading This text appears un- sequence of short quotations.
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded con- admits the representation
µ ¶ der a subsubsubsubsection heading.
vex subset of H, T a nonexpansive self map of C. Sup- a 1
f (z) = a 0 + 1 + o , The buck stops here. Harry Truman
pose that as n → ∞, a n;k → 0 for each k, and ° n = z z
P∞ +
(an;k+1 − a n;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C, An x = z Lists Ask not what your country can do for you; ask what
Pk=0
∞ k
for → ∞ inside a cone Γ" =
k=0 a n;k T x converges weakly to a fixed point of T [1]. {z ∈ C + : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then you can do for your country. John F. Kennedy
ullet, numbered and description list environments are
1
plays. The spacing above and below a display depends on
whether the lines above or below are short or long, as shown
in the following examples.
Proof.
a 1 = − lim z 2 f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ".
Change z for 1=z.

{z ∈ C − : z ∈ Γ"} and
Then Γ" → Γ" =
(2)
B available. Lists, which can extend four levels deep,
look like this:

It’s no exaggeration to say the undecideds could go
one way or another. George Bush
A short line above: I did not have sexual relations with that woman,
f (1=z) = a0 + a 1z + o (z) . (3) Miss Lewinsky. Bill Clinton
x2 + y2 = z2 Fix z ∈ Γ" , and let Cr (z ) = {¸ ∈ C − : |¸ − z | = r} be a They misunderestimated me. George W. Bush
and a short line below. circle with radius r = |z| sin "=2. It follows from (3) that (a) A numbered list item under a list item.
Z X Z
(¸ − z 0)m d¸
1
∗ 1 f (¸) d¸ 1 The typeset appearance for this level is often differ- The Long Quotation tag is used for quotations of more
Written for presentation as the 1992 International Winter- = am +R(z ), than one paragraph. Following is the beginning of Alice’s
Meeting of ASAE. 2¼i CH(z) (¸ − z )2 2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z )2 ent from the screen appearance. The typeset ap-
m=0
† Adventures in Wonderland by Lewis Carroll:
Anomous employee of MacKichan Software, Inc. (4) pearance often uses parentheses around the level
‡ USDA Fellow, Department of Agricultural Engineering, Pur-
where for the remainder R(z) we have indicator.
due University. Formerly, Graduate Assistant—Research, De- Alice was beginning to get very tired of sitting
partment of Agricultural Engineering, Texas A&M University. |R(z)| ≤ r −1 max o (|z|) = r −1 max |¸| · O (|z| + r) (b) Another numbered list item under a list item.
by her sister on the bank, and of having nothing
(unknown@tamu.edu). ¸∈CH (z) ¸∈CH (z)
1A
L TEX automatically selects the spacing depending on the sur- |z| + r 1 + sin " i. Third level numbered list item under a list to do: once or twice she had peeped into the book
rounding line lengths. = · O (|z| + r) = · O (|z |) . item. her sister was reading, but it had no pictures or
r sin "
1 2
ASAE Transactions 33
conversations in it, ’and what is the use of a book,’ Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop be-
thought Alice ’without pictures or conversation?’ havior in fluid hydrogen at rocket chamber pressures”,
So she was considering in her own mind (as well Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, 1998a, 41, 3537-3550
as she could, for the hot day made her feel very Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under su-
sleepy and stupid), whether the pleasure of making percritical conditions”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, in
a daisy-chain would be worth the trouble of getting print
up and picking the daisies, when suddenly a White
Rabbit with pink eyes ran close by her. Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular
Theory of Gases and Liquids, John Wiley and Sons, Inc.,
There was nothing so very remarkable in that;
1964
nor did Alice think it so very much out of the way to
hear the Rabbit say to itself, ’Oh dear! Oh dear! I Lamport, L.,LaTeX: A Document Preparation System,
shall be late!’ (when she thought it over afterwards, Addison—Wesley Pub. Co., 1986
it occurred to her that she ought to have wondered Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E., Molecu-
at this, but at the time it all seemed quite natural); lar thermodynamics for fluid-phase equilibrium, Prentice
but when the Rabbit actually took a watch out of its -Hall, Inc., 1986
waistcoat-pocket, and looked at it, and then hurried
Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Prop-
on, Alice started to her feet, for it flashed across her
erties of Gases and Liquids, 4th Edition, McGraw- Hill
mind that she had never before seen a rabbit with
Book Company, 1987
either a waistcoat-pocket, or a watch to take out of
it, and burning with curiosity, she ran across the
field after it, and fortunately was just in time to see An Appendix
it pop down a large rabbit-hole under the hedge. Because appendices may contain material that is supplemen-
In another moment down went Alice after it, tary rather than integral to the main text , many styles use a
never once considering how in the world she was different numbering system for equations that appear in the
to get out again. appendices.
√
−b ± b2 − 4ac
(5)
2a
About the Bibliography The quadratic equation shown as equation 5 is used to
ollowing the text of this article is a short manual bib- demonstrate how equations are numbered in the appendix.
F liography. This sample bibliography has no relation-

ship to the previous text, but it shows sample citations
such as [4], [6] and [7]. You can also have multiple citations
appear together. Here is an example: [2, 3, 4].
BibTEX automatically generates the “References” section
of your paper from an external database. Style files govern
to appearance of your “References” section. In principle, you
could change a paper, which met the requirements of one
professional society, to that of another by simply changing the
style file that you use. The style file asaetr.bst (for ASAE) is
currently being developed. Other style files exist for IEEE,
ACM, APA, etc.
To use BibTEX, you normally process your file with LATEX,
then with BibTEX, then twice more with LATEX. The BibTEX
style file, which is unfinished, comes close to the citation style
used by ASAE. You may have to edit some entries by hand.
To do this, edit the *.bbl file after you have processed the
file with BibTEX. See Appendix B in [5] (Lamport, 1986) for
more information about BibTEX.
References
N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Funct ional Analysis, v. 2, John
Wiley and Sons, New York, 1963.
3
ASME Meeting

Packages:
sw20asme None
The shell produces documents similar to those in ASME Meeting publications. Documents have narrow margins
to accommodate two wide columns. The front matter includes a field for a short form of the author’s name.
Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environments Section Headings

Use the Section tag for major sections, such as the
A number of theorem-like environments is available.
one just above. Four additional heading levels are avail-
The following lemma is a well-known fact on differen-
able, as described below.
tiation of asymptotic expansions of analytic functions.
Lemma 1 Let f (z) be an analytic function in C+ . If Subsection Heading
The Title of an Article f (z) admits the representation
µ ¶ This text appears under a subsection heading.
a1 1
Dr. Author Jones f (z) = a0 + +o ,
z z Subsubsection Heading This text appears under a sub-
At this Address
for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ" = subsection heading.
{z ∈ C+ : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then
Subsubsubsection Heading This text appears un-
a1 = − lim z 2f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ". (2)
der a subsubsubsection heading.
{z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ "} and Subsubsubsubsection Heading This text ap-
P∞ k
Abstract C, An x = k=0 an;k T x converges weakly to a fixed
pears under a subsubsubsubsection heading.
f (1=z) = a0 + a 1z + o (z) . (3)
This article illustrates many features of a mathemat- point of T [1].
Lists
ics article, but we do not explain the spurious appear- Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical Fix z ∈ Γ ", and let Cr (z) = {¸ ∈ C− : |¸ − z| = r} be
ance of the formula (∇× F) ·k = z + 1 in this abstract. displays.1 The spacing above and below a display de- Bullet, numbered and description list environments
a circle with radius r = |z| sin "=2. It follows from (3)
pends on whether the lines above or below are short or are available. Lists, which can extend four levels deep,
that
Sample Mathematics and Text long, as shown in the following examples. Z look like this:
This short sample document illustrates the type- 1 f (¸) d¸
A short line above: =
set appearance of in-line and displayed mathematics 2¼i Cr(z) (¸ − z)2 1. Numbered list item 1.
x2 + y 2 = z 2 Z
(¸ − z0 )m d¸
in documents. It also illustrates five levels of section X 1
1 2. Numbered list item 2.
headings and three kinds of lists. Finally, the docu- am + R(z), (4)
2¼i Cr (z) (¸ − z)2
ment includes entries for a manual bibliography and and a short line below. m=0
an appendix. A long line above may depend on your margins where for the remainder R(z) we have
The typeset appearance for this level is often
sin2 µ + cos2 µ = 1 |R(z)| ≤ r−1 max o (|z|) different from the screen appearance. The
In-line and Displayed Mathematics ¸∈Cr (z) typeset appearance often uses parentheses
P∞ = r−1 max |¸| · O (|z| + r) around the level indicator.
The expression i=1 ai is in-line mathematics, while as will a long line below. This line is long enough to il- ¸∈Cr (z)
the numbered equation lustrate the spacing for mathematical displays, regard- |z| + r (b) Another numbered list item under a list item.
less of the margins. = · O (|z| + r)
∞
r i. Third level numbered list item under a
X 1 + sin "
ai (1) R¯ = · O (|z|) . list item.
i=1 Mathematics in section heads ® ln tdt sin "
A. Fourth and final level of numbered
Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note that Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2 , and hence by list items allowed.
is displayed and automatically numbered as equation the Cauchy theorem (4) implies
1. mathematics in section heads may cause difficulties in
typesetting styles with running headers or table of con- • Bullet item 1.
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded
tents entries. d
convex subset of H , T a nonexpansive self map of C. f (1=z) = a1 + R(z) → a1, as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 , • Bullet item 2.
dz
SupposeP∞that as n → ∞,+ an;k → 0 for each k, and
1L
AT
EX automatically selects the spacing depending on the
°n = k=0 (an;k+1 − a n;k) → 0. Then for each x in surrounding line lengths. that implies (2) by substituting 1=z back for z. — Second level bullet item.
1 Jones 2 Jones
ASME Meeting 35
∗ Third level bullet item. An Appendix
· Fourth and final level bullet item. Because appendices may contain material that is
supplementary rather than integral to the main text ,
many styles use a different numbering system for equa-
Description List Each description list item has a
tions that appear in the appendices.
lead-in followed by the item. Double-click the
√
lead-in box to enter or customize the text of the −b ± b2 − 4ac
lead-in. (5)
2a
Bunyip Mythical beast of Australian Aboriginal leg- The quadratic equation shown as equation 5 is used to
ends. demonstrate how equations are numbered in the ap-
pendix.
About the Bibliography

Following the text of this article is a short manual
bibliography. This sample bibliography has no relation-
ship to the previous text, but it shows sample citations
such as [4], [5] and [6]. You can also have multiple ci-
tations appear together. Here is an example: [2, 3, 4].
References
N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis,
v. 2, John Wiley and Sons, New York, 1963.
Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen

drop behavior in fluid hydrogen at rocket chamber pres-
sures”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, 1998a, 41, 3537-
3550
Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number un-

der supercritical conditions”, Int. J. Heat Mass Trans-
fer, in print
Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B.,

Molecular Theory of Gases and Liquids, John Wiley
and Sons, Inc., 1964
Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E.,

Molecular thermodynamics for fluid-phase equilibrium,
Prentice -Hall, Inc., 1986
Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The

Properties of Gases and Liquids, 4th Edition, McGraw-
Hill Book Company, 1987
3 Jones
Astronomy & Astrophysics
Document class base file: aa.cls

Packages:
None
This shell produces documents using the typesetting specifications created for the journal Astronomy & Astro-
physics. Text appears in two columns.
Astronomy & Astrophysics manuscript no. swp0007 July 22, 2004 2 Running author, or delete: Running title, or delete
(DOI: will be inserted by hand later)
Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ" → Γ" = (a) A numbered list item under a list item.
{z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ "} and The typeset appearance for this level is often dif-
ferent from the screen appearance. The typeset ap-
f (1=z) = a0 + a1 z + o (z) . (3) pearance often uses parentheses around the level
indicator.
Fix z ∈ Γ " , and let Cr (z) = {¸ ∈ C − : |¸ − z| = r} be a (b) Another numbered list item under a list item.
circle with radius r = |z| sin "=2. It follows from (3) that
The Title of an Article i. Third level numbered list item under a list
Z item.
1 f (¸) d¸
Article subtitle 2 = A. Fourth and final level of numbered list
2¼i C H( z) (¸ − z) items allowed.
1
X Z m
Dr. Author Jones1 and Ann Other2; ? 1 (¸ − z 0 ) d¸
am 2 + R(z), (4) — Bullet item 1.
m=0
2¼i C H(z ) (¸ − z) — Bullet item 2.
1
Institute for Astronomy (IfA), University of Vienna, Türkenschanzstrasse 17, A-1180 Vienna — Second level bullet item.
e-mail: wuchterl@amok.ast.univie.ac.at
2
• Third level bullet item.
University of Alexandria, Department of Geography, ...
|R(z)| ≤ r −1 max o (|z|) = r−1 max |¸| · O (|z| + r) · Fourth and final level bullet item.
e-mail: c.ptolemy@hipparch.uheaven.space ?? ¸∈CH (z) ¸∈CH (z)
|z| + r 1 + sin " Description List Each description list item has a lead-in
Received September 15, 1996; accepted March 16, 1997 = · O (|z| + r ) = · O (|z|) . followed by the item. Double-click the lead-in box to
r sin "
enter or customize the text of the lead-in.
Abstract. This article illustrates many features of a mathematics article, but we do not explain the spurious Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2 , and hence by Bunyip Mythical beast of Australian Aboriginal legends.
appearance of the formula (∇ × F) · k = z + 1 in this abstract. the Cauchy theorem (4) implies
Key words. giant planet formation — · -mechanism — stability of gas spheres 4. About the Bibliography
d
f (1=z) = a1 + R(z) → a1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 , Following the text of this article is a short manual bibli-
dz ography. This sample bibliography has no relationship to
1. Sample Mathematics and Text A short line above:
that implies (2) by substituting 1=z back for z. the previous text, but it shows sample citations such as
2 2 2
This short sample document illustrates the typeset ap- x +y =z 4, 5 and 6. You can also have multiple citations appear
pearance of in-line and displayed mathematics in docu- and a short line below. together. Here is an example: 2, 3, 4.
ments. It also illustrates five levels of section headings and 2. Section Headings
three kinds of lists. Finally, the document includes entries Use the Section tag for major sections, such as the one References
sin µ + cos2 µ = 1
2
for a manual bibliography and an appendix. just above. Four additional heading levels are available,
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illus- N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2, John
as described below. Wiley and Sons, New York, 1963.
trate the spacing for mathematical displays, regardless of
1.1. In-line and Displayed Mathematics the margins.
Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behav-
P∞ ior in fluid hydrogen at rocket chamber pressures”, Int. J.
The expression i=1 ai is in-line mathematics, while the 2.1. Subsection Heading
Heat Mass Transfer, 1998a, 41, 3537-3550
numbered equation R¯ Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under super-
∞
1.2. Mathematics in section heads ® ln J@J This text appears under a subsection heading.
X critical conditions”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, in print
ai (1) Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note that math- Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Mol ecular
i=1 ematics in section heads may cause difficulties in type- 2.1.1. Subsubsection Heading Theory of Gases and Liquids, John Wiley and Sons, Inc.,
setting styles with running headers or table of contents 1964
is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 1. This text appears under a subsubsection heading. Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E., Molecular
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded entries.
thermodynamics for fluid-phase equilibrium, Prentice -
convex subset of H , T a nonexpansive self map of C. Hall, Inc., 1986
Subsubsubsection Heading This text appears under a sub-
Suppose that as n → ∞, an;k → 0 for each k, and 1.3. Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Properties
P∞ + subsubsection heading.
of Gases and Liquids, 4th Edition, McGraw-Hill Book
°n = P k=0 (an;k+ 1 − an;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C, Environments (Subsubsubsubsection head:)Subsubsubsubsection
∞ k Company, 1987
An x = k=0 an;k T x converges weakly to a fixed point Heading
of T 1. A number of theorem-like environments is available. The
following lem ma is a well-known fact on differentiation of This text appears under a subsubsubsubsection head-
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical ing. Appendix A: An Appendix
displays.1 The spacing above and below a display depends asymptotic expansions of analytic functions.
Because appendices may contain material that is supple-
on whether the lines above or below are short or long, as Lemma 1. Let f (z) be an analytic function in C+ . If mentary rather than integral to the main text , many
shown in the following examples. f (z) admits the representation 3. Lists
µ ¶ styles use a different numbering system for equations that
a1 1 Bullet, numbered and description list environments are appear in the appendices.
Send offprint requests to: G. Wuchterl f (z) = a0 + +o , √
?
Just to show the usage of the elements in the author field z z available. Lists, which can extend four levels deep, look
−b ± b2 − 4ac
?? like this: (A.1)
The university of heaven temporarily does not accept e- for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ" = 2a
mails {z ∈ C+ : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then
1 A
L TEX automatically selects the spacing depending on the 1. Numbered list item 1. The quadratic equation shown as equation A.1 is used to
surrounding line lengths. a1 = − lim z 2 f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" . (2) 2. Numbered list item 2. demonstrate how equations are numbered in the appendix.
Balkema 37
Balkema

Packages:
sw20balk None
The shell produces documents that are similar to those used by Balkema.
The Title of an Article Fix z ∈ Γ ", and let Cr (z) = {¸ ∈ C − : |¸ − z| = r} 2. Numbered list item 2.
be a circle with radius r = |z| sin "=2. It follows
Dr. Author Jones from (3) that (a) A numbered list item under a list item.
At this Address
The typeset appearance for this level is
Z often different from the screen appear-
1 f (¸) d¸
2 = ance. The typeset appearance often uses
2¼i CH (z ) (¸ − z) parentheses around the level indicator.
Z
(¸ − z0)m d¸
X 1
1 (b) Another numbered list item under a list
am + R(z), (4) item.
m=0
2¼i CH(z ) (¸ − z)2
i. Third level numbered list item un-
where for the remainder R(z) we have der a list item.
A. Fourth and final level of num-
|R(z)| ≤ r−1 max o (|z|) bered list items allowed.
¸∈CH (z )
= r−1 max |¸| · O (|z| + r) • Bullet item 1.

¸∈CH (z )
ABSTRACT: This article illustrates many features of a mathematics article, but we do not explain the • Bullet item 2.
spurious appearance of the formula (∇ × F ) · k = z + 1 in this abstract. |z| + r
= · O (|z| + r)
r — Second level bullet item.
1 + sin "
1 Sample Mathematics and Text A long line above may depend on your margins = · O (|z|) . ∗ Third level bullet item.
sin " · Fourth and final level bullet item.
This short sample document illustrates the typeset sin2 µ + cos2 µ = 1
appearance of in-line and displayed mathematics in Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2, and hence
Description List Each description list item has
documents. It also illustrates five levels of section as will a long line below. This line is long enough by the Cauchy theorem (4) implies a lead-in followed by the item. Double-click
headings and three kinds of lists. Finally, the doc- to illustrate the spacing for mathematical displays, the lead-in box to enter or customize the text
ument includes entries for a manual bibliography regardless of the margins. of the lead-in.
and an appendix. d
f (1=z) = a1 + R(z) → a1, as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 ,
R¯ dz Bunyip Mythical beast of Australian Aboriginal
1.1 In-line and Displayed Mathematics 1.2 Mathematics in section heads ® ln tdt legends.
P∞ that implies (2) by substituting 1=z back for z.
The expression i=1 ai is in-line mathematics, while Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note
that mathematics in section heads may cause dif- 3.1 Tags
the numbered equation ficulties in typesetting styles with running headers 2 Section Headings
or table of contents entries. You can apply the logical markup tag Emphasized.
∞
X You can apply the visual markup tags Bold,
Use the Section tag for major sections, such as the
ai (1) one just above. Four additional heading levels are Italics, Roman, Sans Serif, Slanted, Small Caps,
i=1 1.3 Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like available, as described below. and Typewriter.
Environments You can apply the special, mathematics only,
is displayed and automatically numbered as equa- tags BLACKBOARD BOLD, C ALLIGRAPHIC,
A number of theorem-like environments is avail- and fraktur. Note that blackboard bold and calli-
tion 1. 2.1 Subsection Heading
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded able. The following lemma is a well-known fact on graphic are correct only when applied to uppercase
differentiation of asymptotic expansions of analytic This text appears under a subsection heading.
convex subset of H, T a nonexpansive self map of letters A through Z.
C. Suppose that as n → ∞, an;k → 0 for each functions. You can apply the size tags tiny, scriptsize, footnote-
P∞ 2.1.1 Subsubsection Heading This text appears
large, Large, LARGE,
+
k, and ° n = k=0 (a Pn;k+1 − an;k ) → 0. Then for Lemma 1 Let f (z) be an analytic function in C+ . size, small, normalsize,
k under a subsubsection heading.
each x in C , Anx = ∞ k=0 an;k T x converges weakly
to a fixed point of T [1].
If f (z) admits the representation
µ ¶ Subsubsubsection Heading This text appears
huge and Huge.
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathe- a1 1 Following is a group of paragraphs marked as
f (z) = a0 + +o , under a subsubsubsection heading. Short Quote. This environment is appropriate for
matical displays.1 The spacing above and below
a display depends on whether the lines above or z z a short quotation or a sequence of short quotations.
below are short or long, as shown in the following Subsubsubsubsection Heading This text
examples. for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ" = appears under a subsubsubsubsection heading. The buck stops here. Harry Truman
A short line above: {z ∈ C+ : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then
Ask not what your country can do for
you; ask what you can do for your coun-
x +y =z
2 2 2 a 1 = − lim z f (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" .
2 0
(2) 3 Lists
try. John F. Kennedy
Bullet, numbered and description list environments I am not a crook. Richard Nixon
and a short line below. Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ" → Γ " = are available. Lists, which can extend four levels
{z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ" } and It’s no exaggeration to say the undecid-
1 A
L TEX automatically selects the spacing depending on deep, look like this: eds could go one way or another. George
the surrounding line lengths.
H. W. Bush
f (1=z) = a0 + a1z + o (z) . (3) 1. Numbered list item 1.
1 2
I did not have sexual relations with that 4 About the Bibliography
woman, Miss Lewinsky. Bill Clinton
They misunderestimated me. George Following the text of this article is a short man-
W. Bush ual bibliography. This sample bibliography has no
relationship to the previous text, but it shows sam-
ple citations such as [4], [5] and [6]. You can also
The Long Quotation tag is used for quotations
of more than one paragraph. Following is the be- have multiple citations appear together. Here is an
example: [2, 3, 4].
ginning of Alice’s Adventures in Wonderland by
Lewis Carroll:
REFERENCES
Alice was beginning to get very tired
of sitting by her sister on the bank, and N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis,
of having nothing to do: once or twice v. 2, John Wiley and Sons, New York, 1963.
she had peeped into the book her sis- Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxy-
ter was reading, but it had no pictures gen drop behavior in fluid hydrogen at rocket
or conversations in it, ‘and what is the chamber pressures”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer,
use of a book,’ thought Alice ‘without 1998a, 41, 3537-3550
pictures or conversation?’ Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number un-
So she was considering in her own der supercritical conditions”, Int. J. Heat Mass
mind (as well as she could, for the hot Transfer, in print
day made her feel very sleepy and stupid), Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B.,
whether the pleasure of making a daisy- Molecular Theory of Gases and Liquids, John
chain would be worth the trouble of get- Wiley and Sons, Inc., 1964
ting up and picking the daisies, when Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E.,
suddenly a White Rabbit with pink eyes Molecular thermodynamics for fluid-phase equi-
ran close by her. librium, Prentice -Hall, Inc., 1986
There was nothing so very remark- Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E.,
able in that; nor did Alice think it so The Properties of Gases and Liquids, 4th Edi-
very much out of the way to hear the tion, McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1987
Rabbit say to itself, ‘Oh dear! Oh dear!
I shall be late!’ (when she thought it
over afterwards, it occurred to her that A An Appendix
she ought to have wondered at this, but
at the time it all seemed quite natural); Because appendices may contain material that is
but when the Rabbit actually took a supplementary rather than integral to the main
watch out of its waistcoat-pocket, and text , many styles use a different numbering sys-
looked at it, and then hurried on, Alice tem for equations that appear in the appendices.
started to her feet, for it flashed across √
her mind that she had never before seen −b ± b2 − 4ac
a rabbit with either a waistcoat-pocket, (5)
2a
or a watch to take out of it, and burn-
ing with curiosity, she ran across the The quadratic equation shown as equation 5 is used
field after it, and fortunately was just in to demonstrate how equations are numbered in the
time to see it pop down a large rabbit- appendix.
hole under the hedge.
In another moment down went Alice
after it, never once considering how in
the world she was to get out again.
Use the Verbatim tag when you want LATEX to

preserve spacing, perhaps when including a frag-
ment from a program such as:
#include <iostream>
void main(void
{
cout << "Hello World.";
}
3
DECUS Proceedings 39
DECUS Proceedings
Document class base file: deproc.cls

Packages:
deproc
The shell uses the LATEX implementation of a special formatting package to produce documents that meet the
requirements for conference papers appearing in the DECUS Proceedings. A knowledge of TEX and LATEX may be
helpful in using this shell.
Therefore R (z ) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"= 2 , and hence by the Tags

The Title of an Article Cauchy theorem (4) implies
You can apply the logical markup tag Emphasized.
d You can apply the visual markup tags Bold, Ital-
Dr. Author Jones f (1=z ) = a 1 + R (z ) → a 1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"= 2 , ics, Roman, Sans Serif, Slanted, Small Caps, and
At this Address dz
Typewriter.
You can apply the special, mathematics only, tags
BLACKBOARD BOLD, CALLIGRAPHIC, and fraktur.
Section Headings Note that blackboard bold and calligraphic are correct
Abstract
only when applied to uppercase letters A through Z.
Use the Section tag for major sections, such as the one
This article illustrates many features of a mathematics article, but we do not You can apply the size tags tiny, scriptsize, footnotesize,
just above. Four additional heading levels are available,
explain the spurious appearance of the formula (∇× F )·k = z +1 in this abstract.
as described below. small , normalsize, large, Large, LARGE, huge
Subsection Heading and Huge .
Following is a group of paragraphs marked as Short
R¯
Sample Mathematics and Text Mathematics in section heads ®
ln tdt This text appears under a subsection heading. Quote. This environment is appropriate for a short quo-
tation or a sequence of short quotations.
This short sample document illustrates the typeset appear- Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note that math-
Subsubsection Heading
ance of in-line and displayed mathematics in documents. ematics in section heads may cause difficulties in typeset- The buck stops here. Harry Truman
It also illustrates five levels of section headings and three ting styles with running headers or table of contents en- This text appears under a subsubsection heading.
Ask not what your country can do for you; ask
kinds of lists. Finally, the document includes entries for a tries.
what you can do for your country. John F.
manual bibliography and an appendix. Subsubsubsection Heading This text appears under
Kennedy
Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like En- a subsubsubsection heading.
vironments I am not a cro ok. Richard Nixon
In-line and Displayed Mathematics
P∞ Subsubsubsubsection Heading This text ap- It’s no exaggeration to say the undecideds could
A number of theorem-like environments is available. The
The expression i= 1 a i is in-line mathematics, while the pears under a subsubsubsubsection heading. go one way or another. George H. W. Bush
numbered equation following lemma is a well-known fact on differentiation of
X∞ asymptotic expansions of analytic functions. I did not have sexual relations with that woman,
ai (1) Lists Miss Lewinsky. Bill Clinton
i =1 Lemma 1 Let f (z ) be an analytic function in C+ . If They misunderestimated me. George W. Bush
f (z ) admits the representation Bullet, numbered and description list environments are
available. Lists, which can extend four levels deep, look
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded µ ¶ The Long Quotation tag is used for quotations of more
a1 1 like this: than one paragraph. Following is the beginning of Alice’s
convex subset of H , T a nonexpansive self map of C . f (z ) = a0 + +o ,
Suppose that as n → ∞, an;k → 0 for each k , and z z 1. Numbered list item 1. Adventures in Wonderland by Lewis Carroll:
P∞ +
°n = P k =0 (a n;k +1 − a n;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C , for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ" = 2. Numbered list item 2.
∞ Alice was beginning to get very tired of sitting
An x = k =0 an;k T k x converges weakly to a fixed point of {z ∈ C+ : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then by her sister on the bank, and of having noth-
T [1]. (a) A numbered list item under a list item.
ing to do: once or twice she had peeped into
Two sets of LaTEX parameters govern mathematical a1 = − lim z 2 f 0 (z ) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" . (2) The typeset appearance for this level is often dif-
the bo ok her sister was reading, but it had no
displays.1 The spacing above and below a display depends ferent from the screen appearance. The typeset
pictures or conversations in it, ‘and what is the
on whether the lines above or below are short or long, as Proof. Change z for 1 =z . Then Γ" → Γ" = appearance often uses parentheses around the
use of a book,’ thought Alice ‘without pictures or
shown in the following examples. {z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ" } and level indicator.
conversation?’
A short line above: (b) Another numbered list item under a list item.
f (1 =z ) = a 0 + a 1 z + o (z ) . (3) So she was considering in her own mind (as
i. Third level numbered list item under a list well as she could, for the hot day made her feel
x2 + y2 = z 2
Fix z ∈ Γ " , and let C r (z ) = { ¸ ∈ C− : |¸ − z | = r } be a item. very sleepy and stupid), whether the pleasure of
and a short line below. circle with radius r = |z | sin "=2. It follows from (3) that A. Fourth and final level of numbered list making a daisy-chain would be worth the trouble
A long line above may depend on your margins items allowed. of getting up and picking the daisies, when sud-
Z
1 f ( ¸) d¸ denly a White Rabbit with pink eyes ran close by
= • Bullet item 1.
sin 2 µ + cos 2 µ = 1 2¼i C H (z ) (¸ − z )
2 her.
1 Z m
• Bullet item 2. There was nothing so very remarkable in that;
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illus- X 1 (¸ − z0 ) d¸ nor did Alice think it so very much out of the
am + R( z), (4) ◦ Second level bullet item.
trate the spacing for mathematical displays, regardless of 2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z )2 way to hear the Rabbit say to itself, ‘Oh dear!
m=0
the margins. Third level bullet item. Oh dear! I shall be late!’ (when she thought it
where for the remainder R ( z) we have ∗ Fourth and final level bullet item. over afterwards, it occurred to her that she ought
to have wondered at this, but at the time it all
|R (z )| ≤ r −1 max o (|z |) = r −1 max |¸| · O (|z | + r) Description List Each description list item has a lead-in
seemed quite natural); but when the Rabbit actu-
¸∈ CH (z) ¸ ∈CH (z) followed by the item. Double-click the lead-in box to
ally took a watch out of its waistcoat-pocket, and
| z| + r 1 + sin " enter or customize the text of the lead-in.
1L
aT EX automatically selects the spacing depending on the sur- = · O (|z | + r ) = · O (|z |) . looked at it, and then hurried on, Alice started
rounding line lengths. r sin " Bunyip Mythical beast of Australian Aboriginal legends. to her feet, for it flashed across her mind that
1 2
she had never before seen a rabbit with either a About the Bibliography
waistcoat-pocket, or a watch to take out of it, and
burning with curiosity, she ran across the field af- Following the text of this article is a short manual bib-
ter it, and fortunately was just in time to see it liography. This sample bibliography has no relationship
pop down a large rabbit-hole under the hedge. to the previous text, but it shows sample citations such
In another moment down went Alice after it, as [4], [5] and [6]. You can also have multiple citations
never once considering how in the world she was appear together. Here is an example: [2, 3, 4].
to get out again.
References
Use the Verbatim tag when you want LaTEX to pre-
serve spacing, perhaps when including a fragment from a [1] N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v.
program such as: 2, John Wiley and Sons, New York, 1963.
#include <iostream> [2] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop
void main(void behavior in fluid hydrogen at rocket chamber pres-
{ sures”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, 1998a, 41, 3537-
cout << "Hello World."; 3550
}
[3] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under
supercritical conditions”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer,
Excerpt From Original DECUS Do cumentation
in print
The DECUS Proceedings, like the conference proceedings [4] Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molec-
of many other organizations, is rushed to publication as ular Theory of Gases and Liquids, John Wiley and
quickly as possible so that the material will reach the con- Sons, Inc., 1964
ference participants and other interested readers before its
value is diminished by time. Reproducing author-prepared [5] Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E.,
copy eliminates the considerable bother and expense of Molecular thermodynamics for fluid-phase equilibrium,
typesetting, proofreading and corrections. The published Prentice -Hall, Inc., 1986
document should be compact, uniform in appearance, and
readable, regardless of the kind or quality of printing de- [6] Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The
vice available to the author. For these reasons, instruc- Properties of Gases and Liquids, 4th Edition, McGraw-
tions to authors have heretofore assumed that nothing Hill Book Company, 1987
more elaborate is available than an ordinary typewriter
or dot matrix printer. An Appendix
To enforce uniformity, the author is provided with
“model paper”, on which are printed (in non-reproducing Because appendices may contain material that is supple-
ink) column and page borders, alignment marks, and in- mentary rather than integral to the main text , many styles
structions for placement of title, author, and the other use a different numbering system for equations that appear
parts of a proceedings article. The dimensions of the model in the appendices.
paper are almost always larger than those of the published √
Proceedings – this permits more text to be packed onto −b ± b 2 − 4 ac
(5)
each page, and also improves its appearance or “quality” 2a
when photographically reduced, smoothing out the rough The quadratic equation shown as equation 5 is used to
edges of letters and symbols generated by a typewriter, demonstrate how equations are numbered in the appendix.
dot-matrix printer or other “low-resolution” device.
Within the past few years, advances in laser-printer
technology have made good-quality output accessible to a
growing number of users, through a widening selection of
low-cost output systems based on print engines with 300
dot-per-inch resolution and (relatively) easy-to-use inter-
faces. Such devices have been attached to most kinds of
DEC computers, and drivers now exist to print the out-
put from such programs as Scribe, TEX and Troff. Most
low-end laser printers cannot use paper wider than 8 1=200 ,
however, so even if both a good composition program and
output printer had been available, until now an author
would have been discouraged from using them for mechan-
ical reasons.
3
Elbert Walker’s Article 41
Elbert Walker’s Article

Packages:
sw20elba None
This shell produces documents using the typesetting specifications created for Elbert Walker.

as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for math-
Dr. Author Jones ematical displays, regardless of the margins.
At this Address R¯
1.2 Mathematics in section heads ® ln J@J
The Date
Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note that mathematics in section heads
Abstract entries.
This article illustrates many features of a mathematics article, but we do
not explain the spurious appearance of the formula (∇ × F) · k = z + 1 in this 1.3 Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environ-
abstract. ments
1 Sample Mathematics and Text known fact on differentiation of asymptotic expansions of analytic functions.
This short sample document illustrates the typeset appearance of in-line and displayed Lemma 1 Let f (z) be an analytic function in C +. If f (z) admits the representation
mathematics in documents. It also illustrates five levels of section headings and three µ ¶
kinds of lists. Finally, the document includes entries for a manual bibliography and a1 1
f (z) = a0 + +o ,
an appendix. z z

P∞ a1 = − lim z 2f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ". (2)
∞
X Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ " → Γ" = {z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ"} and
ai (1)
i=1 f (1=z) = a0 + a1 z + o (z) . (3)
is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 1. Fix z ∈ Γ" , and let Cr (z) = {¸ ∈ C− : |¸ − z| = r} be a circle with radius r =
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset of H, T a |z| sin "=2. It follows from (3) that
nonexpansive
P self map of C . Suppose that as n → ∞, an;k → P 0 for each k, and
°n = ∞ k Z Z
k=0 (an;k +1 − an;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C, An x = k =0 a n;kT x con-
+ ∞ 1 m
1 f (¸) d¸ X 1 (¸ − z0 ) d¸
verges weakly to a fixed point of T [1]. = am + R(z), (4)
1
2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z)2 m=0 2¼i C H(z) (¸ − z)2
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays. The spacing above
and below a display depends on whether the lines above or below are short or long, where for the remainder R(z) we have
as shown in the following examples.
A short line above: |R(z)| ≤ r−1 max o (|z|) = r −1 max |¸| · O (|z| + r)
¸∈CH (z ) ¸∈CH (z )
x2 + y2 = z 2
|z| + r 1 + sin "
1 A
LT
EX automatically selects the spacing depending on the surrounding line lengths. = · O (|z| + r) = · O (|z|).
r sin "
1 2
Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2, and hence by the Cauchy theorem (4) • Bullet item 1.
implies
• Bullet item 2.
d
f (1=z) = a1 + R(z) → a1, as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 , — Second level bullet item.
dz
that implies (2) by substituting 1=z back for z. ∗ Third level bullet item.
2 Section Headings Description List Each description list item has a lead-in followed by the item.
Use the Section tag for major sections, such as the one just above. Four additional Double-click the lead-in box to enter or customize the text of the lead-in.
heading levels are available, as described below. Bunyip Mythical beast of Australian Aboriginal legends.

4 Tags
2.1.1 Subsubsection Heading You can apply the visual markup tags Bold, Italics, Roman, Sans Serif, Slanted,
This text appears under a subsubsection heading. You can apply the special, mathematics only, tags BLACKBOARD BOLD, fraktur,
and C ALLIG RAPHIC. Note that blackboard bold and calligraphic are correct only
Subsubsubsection Heading This text appears under a subsubsubsection heading. when applied to uppercase letters A through Z.
You can apply the size tags tiny, scriptsize, footnotesize, small, normalsize, large ,
Subsubsubsubsection Heading This text appears under a subsubsubsubsec-
tion heading.
Large , LARGE, huge and Huge.
Following is a group of paragraphs marked as Short Quote. This environment is
3 Lists
Bullet, numbered and description list environments are available. Lists, which can Ask not what your country can do for you; ask what you can do for your
extend four levels deep, look like this: country. John F. Kennedy
1. Numbered list item 1. I am not a crook. Richard Nixon

It’s no exaggeration to say the undecideds could go one way or another.
2. Numbered list item 2. George H. W. Bush
(a) A numbered list item under a list item. I did not have sexual relations with that woman, Miss Lewinsky. Bill
Clinton
appearance. The typeset appearance often uses parentheses around the They misunderestimated me. George W. Bush
level indicator.
Use the Verbatim tag when you want LATEX to preserve spacing, perhaps when
including a fragment from a program such as:
3 4
#include <iostream> // < > is used for standard libraries.

void main(void) // "main" method always called first.
{
cout << "Hello World."; // Send to output stream.
}
5 About the Bibliography

ography has no relationship to the previous text, but it shows sample citations such
example: [2, 3, 4].
References
[1] N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2, John Wiley and Sons,
New York, 1963.
[2] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behavior in fluid hydrogen
at rocket chamber pressures”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, 1998a, 41, 3537-3550
[4] Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular Theory of Gases and
Liquids, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., 1964

A An Appendix
appear in the appendices. √
−b ± b2 − 4ac
(5)
2a
5
Elsevier CRC One-column 43
Elsevier CRC One-column

Document class options 12 pt, displayed equations flush left, two-sided output
Packages:
espcrc1
This shell produces documents using typesetting specifications created for Elsevier Science. The specifications
produce one-column, camera-ready copy with wide outside margins.
1 2

Dr. Author Jonesa ∗ , R. de Maasa† , X.-Y. Wangb and A. Sheffielda‡ R
1.2. Mathematics in section heads ®¯ ln tdt
a
Mathematics and Computer Science Division, Elsevier Science Publishers B.V., Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note that mathematics in section heads may
P.O. Box 103, 1000 AC Amsterdam, The Netherlands cause difficulties in typesetting styles with running headers or table of contents entries.
b 1.3. Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environments
Economics Department, University of Winchester,
2 Finch Road, Winchester, Hampshire P3L T19, United Kingdom A number of theorem-like environments is available. The following lemma is a well-
This article illustrates many features of a mathematics article, but we do not explain
the spurious appearance of the formula (∇ × F ) · k = z + 1 in this abstract. Lemma 1 Let f (z) be an analytic function in C+ . If f (z) admits the representation
µ ¶
1. Sample Mathematics and Text a1 1
f (z) = a0 + +o ,
z z
mathematics in documents. It also illustrates five levels of section headings and three for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ" = {z ∈ C+ : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then
kinds of lists. Finally, the document includes entries for a manual bibliography and an
appendix. a1 = − lim z2f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" . (2)
1.1. In-line and P
Displayed Mathematics Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ" → Γ" = {z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ"} and
The expression ∞ i=1 ai is in-line mathematics, while the numbered equation
∞
X f (1=z) = a0 + a1z + o (z) . (3)
ai (1)
i=1 Fix z ∈ Γ" , and let Cr (z) = {¸ ∈ C− : |¸ − z| = r} be a circle with radius r = |z| sin "=2.
It follows from (3) that
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset of H, T a non- Z Z
(¸ − z0)m d¸
1
X
self map of C. Suppose that as n → ∞, an;k 1 f (¸) d¸ 1
expansive
P∞ P∞→ 0 fork each k, and ° n = 2 = am 2 + R(z), (4)
+
k=0 (an;k+1 − an;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C , A nx = k=0 an;k T x converges weakly
2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z) m=0
2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z)
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays.4 The spacing above and where for the remainder R(z) we have
below a display depends on whether the lines above or below are short or long, as shown
in the following examples. ¸∈CH (z) ¸∈CH (z)
A short line above: |z| + r 1 + sin "
= · O (|z| + r) = · O (|z|) .
x2 + y2 = z2 r sin "
∗
Footnotes should appear on the first page only to indicate your present address (if different from your Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2, and hence by the Cauchy theorem (4) implies
normal address), research grant, sponsoring agency, etc. These are obtained with the \thanks command.
†
For following authors with the same address use the \addressmark command.
‡To reuse an addressmark later on, label the address with an optional argument to the \address d
f (1=z) = a1 + R(z) → a1, as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 ,
command, e.g. \address[MCSD], and repeat the label as the optional argument to the \addressmark dz
command, e.g. \addressmark[MCSD].
4 A
L TEX automatically selects the spacing depending on the surrounding line lengths. that implies (2) by substituting 1=z back for z.
3 4
2. Section Headings 4. About the Bibliography

Use the Section tag for major sections, such as the one just above. Four additional Following the text of this article is a short manual bibliography. This sample bibliogra-
heading levels are available, as described below. phy has no relationship to the previous text, but it shows sample citations such as [4], [5]
and [6]. You can also have multiple citations appear together. Here is an example: [2—4].
2.1. Subsection Heading
This text appears under a subsection heading. REFERENCES
2.1.1. Subsubsection Heading 1. N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2, John Wiley and Sons, New
This text appears under a subsubsection heading. York, 1963.
Subsubsubsection Heading 2. Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behavior in fluid hydrogen at
This text appears under a subsubsubsection heading. 3. Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical conditions”, Int.
Subsubsubsubsection Heading J. Heat Mass Transfer, in print
4. Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular Theory of Gases and
This text appears under a subsubsubsubsection heading. Liquids, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., 1964
5. Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E., Molecular thermodynamics for
3. Lists fluid-phase equilibrium, Prentice -Hall, Inc., 1986
Bullet, numbered and description list environments are available. Lists, which can 6. Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Properties of Gases and Liquids,
extend four levels deep, look like this: 4th Edition, McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1987
1. Numbered list item 1. A. An Appendix
2. Numbered list item 2. Because appendices may contain material that is supplementary rather than integral to
the main text , many styles use a different numbering system for equations that appear
(a) A numbered list item under a list item. in the appendices.
The typeset appearance for this level is often different from the screen ap- √
−b ± b2 − 4ac
pearance. The typeset appearance often uses parentheses around the level (5)
2a
indicator.
• Bullet item 1.
• Bullet item 2.

Description List Each description list item has a lead-in followed by the item. Double-
click the lead-in box to enter or customize the text of the lead-in.

Elsevier CRC Two-column 45
Elsevier CRC Two-column

Document class options displayed equations flush left, two-sided output
Packages:
espcrc2
This shell produces documents using typesetting specifications created for Elsevier Science. The specifications
produce two-column, camera-ready copy with wide outside margins.
1
2
for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ" = Subsubsubsection Heading

The Title of an Article {z ∈ C+ : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then This text appears under a subsubsubsection
Dr. Author Jonesa ∗ , R. de Maasa †, X.-Y. Wang b and A. Sheffielda ‡ heading.
a1 = −limz 2f 0 (z), z → ∞, z ∈ Γ". (2)
a
Mathematics and Computer Science Division, Elsevier Science Publishers B.V., Subsubsubsubsection Heading
P.O. Box 103, 1000 AC Amsterdam, The Netherlands Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ" → Γ" =
{z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ"} and This text appears under a subsubsubsubsection
b Economics Department, University of Winchester,
heading.
2 Finch Road, Winchester, Hampshire P3L T19, United Kingdom f (1=z) = a0 + a1z + o(z) . (3)
3. Lists
Fix z ∈ Γ" , and let Cr (z) = {¸ ∈ C− : |¸ − z| =
r} be a circle with radius r = |z| sin "=2. It follows Bullet, numbered and description list environ-
1. Sample Mathematics and Text a display depends on whether the lines above or from (3) that ments are available. Lists, which can extend four
below are short or long, as shown in the following levels deep, look like this:
This short sample document illustrates the Z
examples. 1 f (¸) d¸
typeset appearance of in-line and displayed math- A short line above: 2 1. Numbered list item 1.
ematics in documents. It also illustrates five lev-
2¼i CH(z) (¸ − z)
els of section headings and three kinds of lists. 1
X Z m 2. Numbered list item 2.
x2 + y 2 = z 2 1 (¸ − z0) d¸
Finally, the document includes entries for a man- = am + R(z), (4)
m=0
2¼i CH(z) (¸ − z)2
ual bibliography and an appendix. and a short line below. (a) A numbered list item under a list item.
1.1. In-line andPDisplayed Mathematics A long line above may depend on your margins where for the remainder R(z) we have The typeset appearance for this level
is often different from the screen ap-
The expression ∞ i=1 ai is in-line mathematics, sin µ + cos µ = 1
2 2
while the numbered equation |R(z)| ≤ r −1
max o (|z|) pearance. The typeset appearance of-
¸∈CH(z)
∞ ten uses parentheses around the level
X as will a long line below. This line is long enough = r−1 max |¸| · O(|z| + r)
ai (1) ¸∈CH(z)
indicator.
to illustrate the spacing for mathematical dis-
i=1 plays, regardless of the margins. |z| + r (b) Another numbered list item under a
is displayed and automatically numbered as equa- = · O (|z| + r) list item.
R¯ r
tion 1. 1.2. Mathematics in section heads ® ln tdt
1 + sin " i. Third level numbered list item un-
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note = · O (|z|) .
sin" der a list item.
bounded convex subset of H, T a nonexpansive that mathematics in section heads may cause dif-
self map of C. Suppose that as n → ∞, an;k → 0 ficulties in typesetting styles with running head- Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2, and A. Fourth and final level of num-
P∞ + ers or table of contents entries.
P∞ − an;k ) → 0.
for each k , and ° n = k=0 (an;k+1 hence by the Cauchy theorem (4) implies bered list items allowed.
Then for each x in C, A n x = k=0 an;k T k x con-
1.3. Theorems, Lemmata, and Other
verges weakly to a fixed point of T [1]. • Bullet item 1.
Theorem-like Environments d
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathe-
A number of theorem-like environments is f (1=z) = a1+R(z) → a1, as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2,
matical displays.4 The spacing above and below dz • Bullet item 2.
available. The f ollowing lemma is a well-known
∗ Footnotes should appear on the first page only to indi- fact on differentiation of asymptotic expansions that implies (2) by substituting 1=z back for z. — Second level bullet item.
cate your present address (if different from your normal of analytic functions.
address), research grant, sponsoring agency, etc. T hese
are obtained with the \thanks command. 2. Section Headings ∗ Third level bullet item.
†
For following authors with the same address use the Lemma 1 Let f (z) be an analytic function in · Fourth and final level bullet
\addressmark command. C + . If f (z) admits the representation Use the Section tag for major sections, such as
item.
‡ To reuse an addressmark later on, label the address
µ ¶ the one just above. Four additional heading levels
with an optional argument to the \address command,
a1 1 are available, as described below.
e.g. \address[MCSD], and repeat the label as the op- f (z) = a0 + +o , Description List Each description list item has
tional argument to the \addressmark command, e.g. z z
\addressmark[MCSD]. 2.1. Subsection Heading a lead-in followed by the item. Double-click
4LATEX automatically selects the spacing depending on the surrounding line lengths. This text appears under a subsection heading. the lead-in box to enter or customize the
text of the lead-in.
2.1.1. Subsubsection Heading
This text appears under a subsubsection head- Bunyip Mythical beast of Australian Aboriginal
ing. legends.

Following the text of this article is a short man-
ual bibliography. This sample bibliography has
no relationship to the previous text, but it shows
sample citations such as [4], [5] and [6]. You
can also have multiple citations appear together.
Here is an example: [2—4].
REFERENCES
1. N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional
Analysis, v. 2, John Wiley and Sons, New
York, 1963.
2. Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid
oxygen drop behavior in fluid hydrogen at
rocket chamber pressures”, Int. J. Heat Mass
Transfer, 1998a, 41, 3537-3550
3. Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis num-
ber under supercritical conditions”, Int. J.
4. Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R.
B., Molecular Theory of Gases and Liquids,
5. Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de
Azevedo, E., Molecular thermodynamics for
fluid-phase equilibrium, Prentice -Hall, Inc.,
1986
6. Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B.
E., The Properties of Gases and Liquids, 4th
A. An Appendix
Because appendices may contain material that
is supplementary rather than integral to the main
text , many styles use a different numbering sys-
tem for equations that appear in the appendices.
√
−b ± b 2 − 4ac
(5)
2a
The quadratic equation shown as equation 5 is
used to demonstrate how equations are numbered
in the appendix.
Elsevier IFAC Proceedings 47
Elsevier IFAC Proceedings
Document class base file: ifacmtg.cls

Document class options A4 paper
Packages:
None
This shell produces documents using the typesetting specifications created for the conference proceedings of the
International Federation of Automatic Control.
1.3 Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like 2.1.1. Subsu bsection Heading This text appears
Environments under a subsubsection heading.
A number of theorem-like environments is avail-

able. The following lemma is a well-known fact 2.1.1.1. Subsubsubsection Heading This text
on differentiation of asymptotic expansions of an- appears under a subsubsubsection heading.
alytic functions.
2.1.1.1.1. Subsubsubsubsection Heading This
Lemma 1. Let f (z) be an analytic function in
text appears under a subsubsubsubsection head-
THE TITLE OF AN ARTICLE C +. If f (z) admits the representation
µ ¶ ing.
a1 1
Dr. Author Jones f (z) = a0 + +o ,
z z
for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ" = 3. LISTS
Dr. Author Second and Dr. Author Third {z ∈ C+ : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then
Bullet, numbered and description list environ-
a1 = − lim z 2 f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" . (2) ments are available. Lists, which can extend four
At this Address levels deep, look like this:
author2@university2.edu PROOF. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ " → Γ " = (1) Numbered list item 1.
{z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ " } and (2) Numbered list item 2.
f (1=z) = a0 + a1 z + o (z) . (3) (a) A numbered list item under a list item.
The typeset appearance for this level
Abstract: This article illustrates many features of a mathematics article, but we Fix z ∈ Γ ", and let Cr (z) = {¸ ∈ C − : |¸ − z| = is often different from the screen appear-
do not explain the spurious appearance of the formula (∇ × F ) • k = z + 1 in this r} be a circle with radius r = |z| sin "=2. It follows ance. The typeset appearance often uses
abstract. from (3) that parentheses around the level indicator.
Z (b) Another numbered list item under a list
Keywords: Elsevier LATEX sample document 1 f (¸) d¸
= item.
2¼i C H (z ) (¸ − z) 2
Z (i) Third level numbered list item un-
X1 m
1 (¸ − z0 ) d¸ der a list item.
am + R(z), (4)
2¼i C H(z) (¸ − z)2 (A) Fourth and final level of num-
m=0
1. SAMPLE MATHEMATICS AND TEXT bered list items allowed.
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern m athemat- where for the remainder R (z) we have
ical displays. 1 The spacing above and below a • Bullet item 1.
This short sample document illustrates the type- display depends on whether the lines above or • Bullet item 2.
below are short or long, as shown in the following |R(z)| ≤ r −1 max o (|z|)
set appearance of in-line and displayed mathemat- ¸∈ CH( z) · Second level bullet item.
ics in documents. It also illustrates five levels of examples. Third level bullet item.
= r −1 max |¸| · O (|z| + r )
section headings and three kinds of lists. Finally, ¸∈ CH( z) Fourth and final level bullet
A short line above:
the document includes entries for a manual bibli- |z| + r item.
x2 + y 2 = z 2 = · O (|z| + r)
ography and an appendix. r Description List Each description list item has
1 + sin " a lead-in followed by the item. Double-click the
and a short line below. = · O (|z|) .
sin " lead-in box to enter or customize the tex t of the
A long line above may depend on your margins lead-in.
Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2 , and
sin2 µ + cos2 µ = 1 hence by the Cauchy theorem (4) implies Bunyip Mythical beast of Australian Aboriginal
1.1 In-line and Displayed Mathematics legends.
as will a long line below. This line is long enough
P∞ to illustrate the spacing for mathematical dis- d
The expression i= 1 ai is in-line mathematics, f (1=z) = a1 +R (z) → a1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 ,
while the numbered equation plays, regardless of the margins. dz 4. ABOUT THE BIBLIOGRAPHY
that im plies (2) by substituting 1=z back for z.
∞
X Following the text of this article is a short manual
ai (1) bibliography. This sam ple bibliography has no
i= 1
R¯
ln tdt 2. SECTION HEADINGS relationship to the previous text, but it shows
sample citations such as , and . You can also
is displayed and automatically numbered as equa-
Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note Use the Section tag for ma jor sections, such as the have multiple citations appear together. Here is
tion 1.
that mathematics in section heads may cause dif- one just above. Four additional heading levels are an example: ; ; .
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded ficulties in typesetting styles with running headers available, as described below.
convex subset of H, T a nonexpansive self map or table of contents entries.
of C . Suppose that as n → ∞, an;k → 0 for each Appendix A. TITLE OF THE APPENDIX
P∞ +
k, and ° n = P∞− an;k ) → 0. Then
k=0 (an;k+1 2.1 Subsection Heading
for each x in C, A n x = k=0 an;k T k x converges 1 LATEX automatically selects the spacing depending on The appendix should not contain material that is
weakly to a fixed point of T . the surrounding line lengths. This text appears under a subsection heading. essential to the main text, but rather it should
contain text that is helpful to a reader seeking

further clarification. It can also contain expla-
nations and elaborations that are too long for
footnotes. The appendix or appendices should not
be a depository for odds and ends that the author
was unable to work into the body of his text.
Equations are sometimes numbered differently in
an appendix, but his may not always be true.
√
−b ± b 2 − 4ac
(A.1)
2a
The quadratic equation shown as equation A.1 is
used to see how equations are numbered in the
appendix.
(Chapter head:)*
Bibliography
N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis,
v. 2, John Wiley and Sons, New York, 1963.
Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxy-
gen drop behavior in fluid hydrogen at rocket
chamber pressures”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer,
1998a, 41, 3537-3550
Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number
under supercritical conditions”, Int. J. Heat
Hirshf elder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B.,
Molecular Theory of Gases and Liquids, John
Wiley and Sons, Inc., 1964
Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo,
E., Molecular thermodynamics for fluid-phase
equilibrium, Prentice -Hall, Inc., 1986
Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B.
Elsevier Preprint 49
Elsevier Preprint
Document class base file: elsart.cls

Packages:
amsmath Standard
The shell produces documents with a layout that meets the preprint typesetting specifications for articles pub-
lished in Elsevier Science’s journals. Instead of using SWP or SW front matter, the shell uses a frontmatter
environment in a TEX field at the beginning of the document. The theorem environments are non-standard and de-
fined by the typesetting specification files instead of in the document preamble. Note that using copy and paste
techniques to move theorem-like environments between this shell and others requires re-tagging the environments.

above and below a display depends on whether the lines above or below are
The Title of an Article short or long, as shown in the following examples.
A short line above:

x2 + y2 = z 2
Dr. Author Jones and a short line below.
Me Too A long line above may depend on your margins
At this Address sin2 µ + cos2 µ = 1
Abstract
This article illustrates many features of a mathematics article, but we do not explain R¯
the spurious appearance of the formula (∇ × F ) · k = z + 1 in this abstract. 1.2 Mathematics in section heads ® ln tdt
Key words: Elsevier LaTeX sample document Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note that mathematics in section
heads may cause difficulties in typesetting styles with running headers or table

displayed mathematics in documents. It also illustrates five levels of section A number of theorem-like environments is available. The following lemma
headings and three kinds of lists. Finally, the document includes entries for a is a well-known fact on differentiation of asymptotic expansions of analytic
manual bibliography and an appendix. functions.
Lemma 1 Let f (z) be an analytic function in C+ . If f (z) admits the repre-

1.1 In-line and Displayed Mathematics sentation µ ¶
a1 1
f (z) = a0 + +o ,
z z
P∞
The expression i=1 a i is in-line mathematics, while the numbered equation for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ" = {z ∈ C+ : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then
∞
X a1 = − lim z 2f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" . (2)
ai (1)
i=1
is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 1. PROOF. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ" → Γ " = {z ∈ C − : z ∈ Γ" } and
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset of H, T a f (1=z) = a0 + a 1z + o (z) . (3)
P + P∞ k
°n = ∞ k=0 (an;k+1 − an;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C, An x = k=0 an;k T x
1
LATEX automatically selects the spacing depending on the surrounding line
converges weakly to a fixed point of T [1]. lengths.
Preprint submitted to Elsevier Science 22 July 2004 2

Fix z ∈ Γ" , and let Cr (z) = {¸ ∈ C − : |¸ − z| = r} be a circle with radius 3 Lists

Z Z m
1 f (¸) d¸ 1
X 1 (¸ − z0) d¸ Bullet, numbered and description list environments are available. Lists, which
= am + R(z), (4)
2¼i CH ( z) (¸ − z)2 m=0 2¼i CH (z ) (¸ − z)2 can extend four levels deep, look like this:
where for the remainder R(z) we have (1) Numbered list item 1.
(2) Numbered list item 2.
|R(z)| ≤ r −1
max o (|z|) = r−1
max |¸| · O (|z| + r) The typeset appearance for this level is often different from the
¸∈CH (z) ¸∈CH (z )
screen appearance. The typeset appearance often uses parentheses
|z| + r 1 + sin "
= · O (|z| + r) = · O (|z|) . around the level indicator.
r sin "
Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2, and hence by the Cauchy theorem (i) Third level numbered list item under a list item.
(4) implies (A) Fourth and final level of numbered list items allowed.
• Bullet item 1.
d • Bullet item 2.
f (1=z) = a1 + R(z) → a1, as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 ,
dz · Second level bullet item.
that implies (2) by substituting 1=z back for z. Third level bullet item.
Fourth and final level bullet item.
Description List Each description list item has a lead-in followed by the
2 Section Headings
item. Double-click the lead-in box to enter or customize the text of the
lead-in.
Use the Section tag for major sections, such as the one just above. Four addi- Bunyip Mythical beast of Australian Aboriginal legends.

bibliography has no relationship to the previous text, but it shows sample
citations such as [4], [5] and [6]. You can also have multiple citations appear
together. Here is an example: [2—4].

References
2.1.1.1 Subsubsubsection Heading This text appears under a subsub-

subsection heading. [1] N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2, John Wiley and Sons,
New York, 1963.
(Subsubsubsubsection head:)Subsubsubsubsection Heading
This text appears under a subsubsubsubsection heading. at rocket chamber pressures”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, 1998a, 41, 3537-3550
3 4
A An Appendix

√
−b ± b2 − 4ac
(A.1)
2a
The quadratic equation shown as equation A.1 is used to demonstrate how
equations are numbered in the appendix.
5
Geophysics Journal 51
Geophysics Journal

Packages:
geophysics None
This shell produces documents that meet the Geophysics Journal typesetting specifications. The shell uses the
default class options, except that 12 pt has been selected for the body text font size. Some headings are centered.

expansive self map of C. Suppose that as n → ∞, a n;k → 0 for each k, and
P∞ P∞
° n = k =0 (a n;k+1 − a n;k) → 0. Then for each x in C , Anx = k=0 an;k T kx con-
+
The Title of an Article verges weakly to a fixed point of T (1).

Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays. 1 The spacing above
Dr. Author Jones and below a display depends on whether the lines above or below are short or long,
At this Address as shown in the following examples.
A short line above:
The Date
x2 + y 2 = z 2

Abstract
not explain the spurious appearance of the formula (∇ × F) · k = z + 1 in this sin2 µ + cos2 µ = 1
abstract.
SAMPLE MATHEMATICS AND TEXT ematical displays, regardless of the margins.
R¯
This short sample document illustrates the typeset appearance of in-line and dis- Mathematics in section heads ® ln tdt
played mathematics in documents. It also illustrates five levels of section headings and
three kinds of lists. Finally, the document includes entries for a manual bibliography
and an appendix.
entries.

Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environments
P∞
∞
X
ai (1) well-known fact on differentiation of asymptotic expansions of analytic functions.
i=1 1L
AT
1 2
Lemma 1 Let f (z) be an analytic function in C +. If f (z) admits the representation Subsection Heading
µ ¶
a1 1
f (z) = a0 + +o , This text appears under a subsection heading.
z z

Subsubsection Heading.–
a1 = − lim z 2 f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ". (2) This text appears under a subsubsection heading.
Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ " → Γ " = {z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ"} and Subsubsubsection Heading This text appears under a subsubsubsection heading.
f (1=z) = a0 + a1z + o (z) . (3)

Subsubsubsubsection Heading This text appears under a subsubsubsubsec-
Fix z ∈ Γ ", and let Cr (z) = {¸ ∈ C − : |¸ − z| = r} be a circle with radius r = tion heading.
|z| sin "=2. It follows from (3) that

LISTS
Z Z
(¸ − z0)m d¸
1
X
1 f (¸) d¸ 1
2 = am 2 + R(z), (4)
2¼i CH (z ) (¸ − z) m=0
2¼i CH (z ) (¸ − z) Bullet, numbered and description list environments are available. Lists, which can
where for the remainder R(z) we have extend four levels deep, look like this:
|R(z)| ≤ r −1
max o (|z|) = r −1
max |¸| · O (|z| + r) 1. Numbered list item 1.
¸∈CH (z) ¸∈CH (z )
|z| + r 1 + sin " 2. Numbered list item 2.
= · O (|z| + r) = · O (|z|) .
r sin "
Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 , and hence by the Cauchy theorem (4) (a) A numbered list item under a list item.
implies The typeset appearance for this level is often different from the screen
d
f (1=z) = a1 + R(z) → a1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2, level indicator.
dz
that implies (2) by substituting 1=z back for z. (b) Another numbered list item under a list item.

SECTION HEADINGS
heading levels are available, as described below. • Bullet item 1.
3 4
• Bullet item 2. [5] Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E., Molecular thermodynamics for
[6] Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Properties of Gases and Liquids,
AN APPENDIX
Double-click the lead-in box to enter or customize the text of the lead-in. Because appendices may contain material that is supplementary rather than inte-
gral to the main text , many styles use a different numbering system for equations
ABOUT THE BIBLIOGRAPHY √
−b ± b2 − 4ac
(5)
2a
such as (4), (5) and (6). You can also have multiple citations appear together. Here
is an example: (2; 3; 4).
REFERENCES
[1] N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2, John Wiley and Sons, New
York, 1963.
[2] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behavior in fluid hydrogen at
[3] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical conditions”, Int.
5 6
Harold O. Fried’s Article 53
Harold O. Fried’s Article

Packages:
sw20fra None
This shell produces documents using typesetting specification created for Harold O. Fried and Betty Daniel. The
title page containing the abstract is single-spaced; the body of the article is double-spaced.

Dr. Author Jones The Title of an Article
At this Address
The Date
This short sample document illustrates the typeset appearance of in-line and displayed math-
Abstract
This article illustrates many features of a mathematics article, but we do not explain ematics in documents. It also illustrates five levels of section headings and three kinds of
the spurious appearance of the formula (∇ × F) · k = z + 1 in this abstract.
lists. Finally, the document includes entries for a manual bibliography and an appendix.

P∞
∞
X
ai (1)
i=1
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset of H, T a nonexpansive self

P∞ +
map of C . Suppose that as n → ∞, an;k → 0 for each k, and ° n = k=0 (an;k+1 − an;k ) → 0.
P∞ k
Then for each x in C, Anx = k=0 an;k T x converges weakly to a fixed point of T [1].
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays. 1 The spacing above and
below a display depends on whether the lines above or below are short or long, as shown in
A short line above:
x2 + y 2 = z 2

1 L
AT
1
The Title of an Article The Title of an Article
A long line above may depend on your margins where for the remainder R(z) we have
sin2 µ + cos2 µ = 1 |R(z)| ≤ r−1 max o (|z|) = r−1 max |¸| · O (|z| + r)
¸∈CH (z ) ¸∈CH (z )
|z| + r 1 + sin "
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for mathematical = · O (|z| + r) = · O (|z|) .
r sin "
Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2, and hence by the Cauchy theorem (4) implies
R¯
ln J@J
d
Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note that mathematics in section heads may f (1=z) = a1 + R(z) → a 1, as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2,
dz
cause difficulties in typesetting styles with running headers or table of contents entries. that implies (2) by substituting 1=z back for z.

2 Section Headings
A number of theorem-like environments is available. The following lemma is a well-known
µ ¶
a1 1 2.1 Subsection Heading
f (z) = a 0 + +o ,
z z
for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ " = {z ∈ C + : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then This text appears under a subsection heading.
a1 = − lim z2f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ". (2)
Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ" → Γ" = {z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ" } and

f (1=z) = a0 + a1z + o (z) . (3)

Subsubsubsection Heading This text appears under a subsubsubsection heading.
Fix z ∈ Γ", and let Cr (z) = {¸ ∈ C− : |¸ − z| = r} be a circle with radius r = |z| sin "=2. It
follows from (3) that Subsubsubsubsection Heading This text appears under a subsubsubsubsection head-
Z 1
X Z m ing.
1 f (¸) d¸ 1 (¸ − z0) d¸
2 = am 2 + R(z), (4)
2¼i CH (z ) (¸ − z) m=0
2¼i CH (z ) (¸ − z)
2 3
The Title of an Article The Title of an Article
References Appendix A
[1] N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2, John Wiley and Sons, New York,
1963.
A An Appendix
rocket chamber pressures”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, 1998a, 41, 3537-3550 Because appendices may contain material that is supplementary rather than integral to the
[3] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical conditions”, Int. J.
Heat Mass Transfer, in print main text , many styles use a different numbering system for equations that appear in the
[4] Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular Theory of Gases and Liquids, appendices.
John Wiley and Sons, Inc., 1964 √
−b ± b2 − 4ac
[5] Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E., Molecular thermodynamics for fluid- (1)
2a
[6] Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Properties of Gases and Liquids, The quadratic equation shown as equation 1 is used to demonstrate how equations are
6 7
IEEE Transactions for Conferences 55
IEEE Transactions for Conferences
Document class base file: IEEEtran.cls

Document class options Two-column output
Packages:
None
This shell produces documents appropriate for submission to conference proceedings published by the Institute
of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc.
The shell uses front matter elements and author information from a TeX field at the beginning of the document.
The maketitle command and the abstract are also moved to TeX fields at the beginning of the document. The
shell contains more detailed information.

II. S E CT ION H EADING S [5] Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E., Molecular thermody-
namics for ?uid-phase equilibrium, Prentice -Hall, Inc., 1986
Use the Section tag for major sections, such as the one [6] Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Properties of Gases
just above. Four additional heading levels are available, as and Liquids, 4th Edition, McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1987
(Invited Paper) described below.
A PPENDIX
Michael Shell Homer Simpson James Kirk A. Subsection Heading Because appendices may contain material that is supple-
School of Electrical and Twentieth Century Fox and Montgomery Scott mentary rather than integral to the main text , many styles use
Computer Engineering Springfield, USA Starfleet Academy This text appears under a subsection heading.
1) Subsubsection Heading: This text appears under a sub- a different numbering system for equations that appear in the
Georgia Institute of Technology Email: homer@thesimpsons.com San Francisco, California 96678-2391
subsection heading. appendices. √
Atlanta, Georgia 30332–0250 Telephone: (800) 555–1212 −b ± b 2 − 4ac
Email: mshell@ece.gatech.edu a) Subsubsubsection Heading: This text appears under a (5)
Fax: (888) 555–1212 2a
subsubsubsection heading.
(Subsubsubsubsection head:)Subsubsubsubsection Heading The quadratic equation shown as equation 5 is used to demon-
This text appears under a subsubsubsubsection heading. strate how equations are numbered in the appendix.
R¯
Abstract— This article illustrates many features of a mathe- B. Mathematics in section heads ®
ln tdt II I. L ISTS
matics article, but we do not explain the spurious appearance of Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note that math-
the formula (∇ × F ) · k = z + 1 in this abstract. Bullet, numbered and description list environments are
ematics in section heads may cause difficulties in typesetting available. Lists, which can extend four levels deep, look like
styles with running headers or table of contents entries. this:
I. S AMPL E MATHEMATICS AND T EXT
C. Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environ- 1) Numbered list item 1.
This short sample document illustrates the typeset appear- 2) Numbered list item 2.
ments
ance of in-line and displayed mathematics in documents. It
A number of theorem-like environments is available. The a) A numbered list item under a list item.
also illustrates five levels of section headings and three kinds
following lemma is a well-known fact on differentiation of The typeset appearance for this level is often
of lists. Finally, the document includes entries for a manual
asymptotic expansions of analytic functions. different from the screen appearance. The typeset
Lemma 1: Let f (z) be an analytic function in C+. If f (z ) appearance often uses parentheses around the level
admits the representation indicator.
A. In-line and Displayed Mathematics
P µ ¶ b) Another numbered list item under a list item.
The expression i∞=1 ai is in-line mathematics, while the a1 1
f ( z) = a 0 + +o , i) Third level numbered list item under a list item.
numbered equation z z
A) Fourth and final level of numbered list items
X∞ for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ" =
ai (1) allowed.
{ z ∈ C+ : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then
i =1 • Bullet item 1.
a 1 = − lim z 2 f 0 ( z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ " . (2) • Bullet item 2.
is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 1. Proof: Change z for 1=z. Then Γ" → Γ" = – Second level bullet item.
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex { z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ "} and
subset of H , T a nonexpansive self map of C. Suppose ∗ Third level bullet item.
that as n → ∞, an;k → 0 for each k, and ° n = f (1 =z) = a0 + a1 z + o (z ) . (3) · Fourth and final level bullet item.
P ∞
Pk∞=0 (a n;k +1 − an;k )+ → 0 . Then for each x in C , An x = Fix z ∈ Γ ", and let C r (z ) = {¸ ∈ C− : |¸ − z | = r} be a Description
Each List
description list item has a lead-in followed by
k
k =0 an;k T x converges weakly to a fixed point of T [1]. circle with radius r = |z | sin "=2 . It follows from (3) that the item. Double-click the lead-in box to enter or
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical dis- Z customize the text of the lead-in.
plays. 1 The spacing above and below a display depends on 1 f (¸ ) d¸ BunyipMythical beast of Australian Aboriginal legends.
=
whether the lines above or below are short or long, as shown 2¼ i C H(z ) ( ¸ − z) 2
in the following examples. 1 Z m
IV. A BOUT THE B IBLIOGRAPHY
X 1 (¸ − z0 ) d¸
A short line above: am + R (z) , (4) Following the text of this article is a short manual bibli-
2 ¼i C H(z) (¸ − z )2
m=0 ography. This sample bibliography has no relationship to the
x 2 + y 2 = z2 where for the remainder R(z ) we have previous text, but it shows sample citations such as [4], [5]
and [6]. You can also have multiple citations appear together.
and a short line below. |R(z )| ≤ r −1 max o (|z |) = r −1 max |¸| · O (|z | + r) Here is an example: [2], [3], [4].
¸ ∈CH (z) ¸ ∈C H(z)
|z | + r 1 + sin " R EFERENCES
= · O (|z| + r ) = · O (|z |) .
sin 2 µ + cos 2 µ = 1 r sin "
[1] N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2, John Wiley and
Therefore R( z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2 , and hence by the Sons, New York, 1963.
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to Cauchy theorem (4) implies [2] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated ?uid oxygen drop behavior in ?uid
illustrate the spacing for mathematical displays, regardless of hydrogen at rocket chamber pressures”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, 1998a,
the margins. 41, 3537-3550
d [3] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical
f (1 =z ) = a1 + R (z) → a 1 , as z → ∞ , z ∈ Γ"=2 , conditions”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, in print
1A
LTEX automatically selects the spacing depending on the surrounding line
dz [4] Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular Theory of
lengths. that implies (2) by substituting 1=z back for z. Gases and Liquids, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., 1964
IEEE Transactions for Journals
Document class base file: IEEEtran.cls

Document class options Two-column output
Packages:
None
This shell produces documents appropriate for submission to many journals published by the Institute of Elec-
trical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. The shell creates key words with a special macro that appears at the beginning
of the body of your documents; replace the text in the key words environment with your key words.
The shell also uses two special commands (markboth and setcounter), which are placed in TEX fields.
The commands set the text for the page header and the beginning page number. Revise or omit the contents of these
fields as necessary. The shell contains more detailed information.
1 2

a) Subsubsubsection Heading: This text appears under a
subsubsubsection heading.
Dr. Author Jones This text appears under a subsubsubsubsection heading.
II I. L ISTS
Bullet, numbered and description list environments are
Abstract— This article illustrates many features of a mathe- C. Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environ- available. Lists, which can extend four levels deep, look like
matics article, but we do not explain the spurious appearance of ments this:
the formula (∇ × F ) · k = z + 1 in this abstract. 1) Numbered list item 1.
A number of theorem-like environments is available. The 2) Numbered list item 2.
Index Terms— Style file, LATEX, IEEE Transactions. following lemma is a well-known fact on differentiation of
a) A numbered list item under a list item.
asymptotic expansions of analytic functions.
The typeset appearance for this level is often
I. S AMPL E MATHEMATICS AND T EXT Lemma 1: Let f (z) be an analytic function in C+. If f (z )
different from the screen appearance. The typeset
admits the representation
This short sample document illustrates the typeset appear- appearance often uses parentheses around the level
µ ¶
ance of in-line and displayed mathematics in documents. It a1 1 indicator.
f ( z) = a 0 + +o , b) Another numbered list item under a list item.
also illustrates five levels of section headings and three kinds z z
of lists. Finally, the document includes entries for a manual i) Third level numbered list item under a list item.
for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ" =
bibliography and an appendix. A) Fourth and final level of numbered list items
{ z ∈ C+ : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then
allowed.
a 1 = − lim z 2 f 0 ( z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ " . (2) • Bullet item 1.
A. In-line and Displayed Mathematics Proof: Change z for 1=z. Then Γ" → Γ" = • Bullet item 2.
P∞
The expression i =1 ai is in-line mathematics, while the { z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ "} and – Second level bullet item.
numbered equation ∗ Third level bullet item.
∞ f (1 =z) = a0 + a1 z + o (z ) . (3)
X · Fourth and final level bullet item.
ai (1)
Fix z ∈ Γ ", and let C r (z ) = {¸ ∈ C− : |¸ − z | = r} be a Description
Each List
description list item has a lead-in followed by
i =1
circle with radius r = |z | sin "=2 . It follows from (3) that the item. Double-click the lead-in box to enter or
is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 1. Z customize the text of the lead-in.
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex 1 f (¸ ) d¸ BunyipMythical beast of Australian Aboriginal legends.
=
subset of H , T a nonexpansive self map of C. Suppose 2¼ i C H(z ) ( ¸ − z) 2
that as n → ∞, an;k → 0 for each k, and ° n = Z m
IV. A BOUT THE B IBLIOGRAPHY
P∞ X 1
1 (¸ − z0 ) d¸
+
Following the text of this article is a short manual bibli-
P∞=0 (a n;k +1
k − an;k ) → 0 . Then for each x in C , An x = am
2 ¼i C H(z) (¸ − z )2
+ R (z) , (4)
k ography. This sample bibliography has no relationship to the
k =0 an;k T x converges weakly to a fixed point of T [1]. m=0
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical dis- previous text, but it shows sample citations such as [4], [5]
where for the remainder R(z ) we have
plays. 1 The spacing above and below a display depends on and [6]. You can also have multiple citations appear together.
whether the lines above or below are short or long, as shown |R(z )| ≤ r −1 max o (|z |) = r −1 max |¸| · O (|z | + r) Here is an example: [2], [3], [4].
¸ ∈CH (z) ¸ ∈C H(z)
in the following examples. R EFERENCES
A short line above: |z | + r 1 + sin "
= · O (|z| + r ) = · O (|z |) . [1] N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2, John Wiley and
r sin "
Sons, New York, 1963.
x 2 + y 2 = z2 [2] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated ?uid oxygen drop behavior in ?uid
Therefore R( z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2 , and hence by the
and a short line below. Cauchy theorem (4) implies 41, 3537-3550
A long line above may depend on your margins [3] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical
conditions”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, in print
d [4] Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular Theory of
sin 2 µ + cos 2 µ = 1 f (1 =z ) = a1 + R (z) → a 1 , as z → ∞ , z ∈ Γ"=2 ,
dz Gases and Liquids, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., 1964
[5] Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E., Molecular thermody-
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to that implies (2) by substituting 1=z back for z. namics for ?uid-phase equilibrium, Prentice -Hall, Inc., 1986
illustrate the spacing for mathematical displays, regardless of [6] Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Properties of Gases
the margins. II . S ECTION H EADI NGS
A PPE NDIX
R¯ Use the Section tag for major sections, such as the one
just above. Four additional heading levels are available, as Because appendices may contain material that is supple-
B. Mathematics in section heads ®
ln tdt
described below. mentary rather than integral to the main text , many styles use
Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note that math- a different numbering system for equations that appear in the
ematics in section heads may cause difficulties in typesetting appendices. √
styles with running headers or table of contents entries. A. Subsection Heading − b ± b2 − 4ac
(5)
This text appears under a subsection heading. 2a
At this Address
1L
AT X automatically selects the spacing depending on the surrounding line 1) Subsubsection Heading: This text appears under a sub- The quadratic equation shown as equation 5 is used to demon-
E
lengths. subsection heading. strate how equations are numbered in the appendix.
IEICE Transactions 57
IEICE Transactions
Document class base file: ieice.cls

Packages:
None
This shell document produces double-column documents appropriate for English-language articles in the IEICE
Transactions, a publication of The Institute of Electronics, Information and Communication Engineers. The front
matter contains many special items used by the typesetting specifications, including notes on the title, a designation
of where to break the line of authors’ names, authors’ affiliations, engineering field, volume and number of the
journal, and designation of a special issue of the journal. Summary and key words fields appear at the beginning of
the body of the document. See the shell for more information.
IEICE TRANS. COMMUN., VOL.E83 —B, NO.4 JANUARY 19 99 IEICE T RANS. COMMUN., VOL.E83—B, NO.4 JANUARY 1999
1 2
PAPER Special Issue on LATEX 2 Class File of IEICE Transactions where for the remainder R (z) we have A. Fourth and final level of numbered
The Title of an Article∗∗ |R(z)| ≤ r− 1 max o (|z|)
list items allowed.
¸∈C H (z) • Bullet item 1.
= r −1
max |¸| · O (|z| + r ) • Bullet item 2.
¸∈C H (z)
|z| + r
First NAME† , = · O (|z| + r)
Second NAME††, Members, r ∗ Third level bullet item.
1 + sin "
Third NAME† , = · O (|z|) . · Fourth and final level bullet item.
Fourth NAME†††∗ , Nonmembers, sin "
Fifth NAME† , Student Membe r, and Sixth NAME† , Associate Membe r Description List Each description list item has a
Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2 , and hence by lead-in followed by the item. Double-click the lead-
the Cauchy theorem (4) implies in box to enter or customize the text of the lead-in.
Bunyip Mythical beast of Australian Aboriginal leg-
SUMMARY A summary of this article. A long line above may depend on your margins
key words: LATEX 2 class file d ends.
sin2 µ + cos 2 µ = 1 f (1=z) = a1 + R(z) → a1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 ,
dz
1. Sample Mathematics and Text 4. About the Bibliography
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to that im plies (2) by substituting 1=z back for z.
illustrate the spacing for mathematical displays, regard-
This short sample document illustrates the typeset ap- Following the text of this article is a short manual bibli-
less of the margins. 2. Section Headings
pearance of in-line and displayed mathem atics in docu- ography. This sample bibliography has no relationship
ments. It also illustrates five levels of section headings R¯ to the previous text, but it shows sample citations such
ln tdt Use the Section tag for major sections, such as the one
and three kinds of lists. Finally, the document includes as [4], [5] and [6]. You can also have multiple citations
entries for a manual bibliography and an appendix. just above. Four additional heading levels are available, appear together. Here is an example: [2]—[4].
Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note that as described below.
mathematics in section heads may cause difficulties in
1.1 In-line and Displayed Mathematics References
typesetting styles with running headers or table of con- 2.1 Subsection Heading
P ∞ tents entries. [1] N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2, John
The expression i=1 ai is in-line mathematics, while Wiley and Sons, New York, 1963.
the numbered equation This text appears under a subsection heading.
1.3 Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like [2] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop be-
∞ Environments havior in flui d hydrogen at rocket chamber pressures”, Int.
X 2.1.1 Subsubsection Heading J. Heat Mass Transfer, 1998a, 41, 3537-3550
ai (1)
[3] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under super-
i=1 A number of theorem-like environments is available.
This text appears under a subsubsection heading. critical conditions”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, in print
The following lemma is a well-known fact on differenti- [4] Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular
is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 1. ation of asymptotic expansions of analytic functions. (1) Subsubsubsection Heading Theory of Gases and Liquids, John Wiley and Sons, Inc.,
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded 1964
convex subset of H , T a nonexpansive self map of C. Lemma 1: Let f (z) be an analytic function in C +. This text appears under a subsubsubsection heading. [5] Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E., Molec-
Suppose that as n → ∞, an;k → 0 for each k, and If f (z) admits the representation ular thermodynamics for fluid-phase equilibrium, Prentice
P∞ + µ ¶ ((1).1) Subsubsubsubsection Heading -Hall, Inc., 1986
° n = k= 0P (an;k+ 1 − an;k ) → 0. Then for each x in a1 1
C, A n x =
∞ k f (z) = a0 + +o [6] Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Prop-
k=0 an;k T x converges weakly to a fixed
, This text appears under a subsubsubsubsection head-
z z erties of Gases and Liquids, 4th Edition, McGraw-Hill Book
point of T [1]. ing. Company, 1987
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathemati- for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ" =
cal displays.∗∗∗ The spacing above and below a display {z ∈ C+ : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then 3. Lists
depends on whether the lines above or below are short Appendix A: An Appendix
or long, as shown in the following examples. a1 = − lim z 2 f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" . (2)
Bullet, numbered and description list environments are
A short line above: Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ " → Γ" = available. Lists, which can extend four levels deep, look Because appendices may contain material that is sup-
{z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ "} and like this: plementary rather than integral to the main text , m any
x2 + y 2 = z 2 styles use a different numbering system for equations
f (1=z) = a0 + a1 z + o (z) . (3) 1. Numbered list item 1. that appear in the appendices.
and a short line below. 2. Numbered list item 2. √
Manuscript received November 25, 1999. Fix z ∈ Γ" , and let C r (z) = {¸ ∈ C− : |¸ − z| = r} be −b ± b2 − 4ac
a. A numbered list item under a list item. (A· 1)
Manuscript revised April 28, 2000. a circle with radius r = |z| sin "=2. It follows from (3) 2a
† The typeset appearance for this level is of-
The authors are with the Faculty ... that
†† ten different from the screen appearance. The The quadratic equation shown as equation A· 1 is used
The author is with the Faculty ... Z
†††
The author is with the Faculty ... 1 f (¸) d¸ typeset appearance often uses parentheses to demonstrate how equations are numbered in the ap-
∗ = around the level indicator.
Presently, author is with ???. 2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z)2 pendix.
∗∗ b. Another numbered list item under a list item.
This document was created using Scientific Word/Scientific Z
X1 m
WorkPlace by MacKichan Software, Inc. 1 (¸ − z0 ) d¸
∗∗∗ A
L TEX automatically selects the spacing depending on am + R(z), (4) i. Third level numbered list item under a
m=0
2¼i C H (z) (¸ − z)2
the surrounding line lengths. list item.
International Journal of Forecasting - Draft

Packages:
sw20dft2 None
This shell produces draft documents suitable for submitting to the International Journal of Forecasting. It has
large margins and double spacing throughout so that referees and editors have room to write comments. The front
matter includes specification of a running title, AMS classification (both primary and secondary), and key words.
Documents produced with this shell are not camera-ready.
The Title of an A rticle

A bstract
by
Dr. Author Jones∗
explain the spurious appearance of the formula (∇ × F ) · k = z + 1 in this abstract.
At this Address
K ey Word s an d P hr ases: K ey, Words

∗
Su pp or ted by NSF grant # 123456 AM S 19 91 Sub ject Cla ssifica tion s. Pr im ary: 123; Seco nd ary : 456.
1 3
International Journal of Forecasting - Draft 59
1 Sam ple Mathem atics and Text Pro of. C hange z for 1=z. Then Γ " → Γ" = {z ∈ C − : z ∈ Γ " } and
This short sample document illustrates the types et appearance of in-line and displayed f (1=z) = a0 + a1 z + o (z ) . (3)
Fix z ∈ Γ" , and let C r (z ) = {¸ ∈ C − : |¸ − z | = r} be a circle with radius r =
kinds of lists. Finally, the document includes entries for a manual bibliography and
|z| s in " =2. It follows from (3) that
an appendix.
Z 1
X Z m
1 f (¸) d¸ 1 (¸ − z 0 ) d¸
2 = am 2 + R(z ), (4)
2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z ) m=0
2¼i C H (z ) (¸ − z)
1.1 In-line and Displayed Mathem atics
P∞
∞
X |R(z)| ≤ r−1 max o (|z|) = r −1 max |¸| · O (|z| + r)
¸∈C H (z) ¸ ∈CH (z )
ai (1)
i=1 |z| + r 1 + s in "
= · O (|z| + r ) = · O (|z |) .
r sin "
Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2 , and hence by the C auchy theorem (4)
implies
nonexpans ive self map of C . Suppose that as n → ∞, an;k → 0 for each k, and
P∞ P∞
a n;kT k x con-
+
°n = k=0 (a n;k +1 − a n;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C , An x = k =0
d
f (1=z) = a 1 + R(z ) → a 1, as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" =2 ,
verges weakly to a fixed point of T [1]. dz
Two sets of LAT 3

EX parameters govern mathematical displays. The spacing above that implies (2) by substituting 1=z back for z.
and below a display depends on whether the lines ab ove or below are s hort or long,
2 Section Headings
as show n in the following examples.
A short line ab ove: Use the Section tag for major sections, such as the one just above. Four additional
x2 + y2 = z 2 heading levels are available, as describ ed b elow.

3 A
LT EX a ut om atically selects the spacin g dep endin g on th e su rround in g lin e lengths.
4 6
(b) Another numbered list item under a list item. Refere nces

N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2, John Wiley and Sons,
A. Fourth and final level of numbered list items allowed. New York , 1963.
• Bullet item 1. Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxy gen drop behav ior in fluid hy-
drogen at rocket chamber pressures”, Int. J. Heat M ass Transfer, 1998a, 41,
• Bullet item 2.
3537-3550
Int. J. Heat M ass Transfer, in print
Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F . and Bird, R. B., Molecular T heory of Gases
Description List Each description list item has a lead-in followed by the item. and Liquids, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., 1964
P rausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E ., Molecular thermodynamics
Bunyip M ythical beast of Australian Aboriginal legends. for fluid-phase equilibrium, P rentice -Hall, Inc., 1986
4 Ab out the Bibliogr aphy Reid, R . C., P rausnitz, J. M. and P olling, B. E ., The Properties of Gases and
L iquids, 4th Edition, M cGraw-Hill Book C ompany, 1987

ography has no relationship to the previous text, but it shows sample citations such A A n App endix
example: [2, 3, 4].
to the main text , many sty les use a different numbering system for equations that
8 9
Japanese Journal of Applied Physics
Document class base file: jjap.cls

Packages:
amsmath Standard
graphicx Standard
The shell uses special front matter fields to designate the institute of the author and the key words for the
document. Also, it uses a special macro for the appendix—\appendix{Section name}—instead of the usual
\appendix macro. The section name uses the normal section tag.

A Sample Japanese Journal of Applied Physics Article pearance of in-line and displayed mathematics in docu-
A.U. Thor ments. It also illustrates five levels of section headings
Department of Physics, University of Someplace and three kinds of lists. Finally, the document includes
(Received Month date, year; accepted for publication month date, year) entries for a manual bibliography and an appendix.
We study the effects of warm water on the local penguin population. The major finding is that it is extremely
difficult to induce penguins to drink warm water. The success factor is approximately −A −i¼ − 1. 1.1 In-line and Displayed Mathematics
P∞
The expression i=1 ai is in-line mathematics, while
KEYWORDS: particle acceleration, electron acceleration, high-energy electron, laser acceleration, superposed laser
∞
X
ai (1)
i=1

convex subset of H , T a nonexpansive self map of C .
SupposeP∞that as n → ∞, +an;k → 0 for each k , and
°n = k=0P (an;k+1 − an;k ) → 0. Then for each x in
C , An x = ∞ k
k=0 an;k T x converges weakly to a fixed
point of T .1 )
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical
displays. * The spacing above and below a display de-
pends on whether the lines above or below are short or
long, as shown in the following examples.
A short line above:
x 2 + y 2 = z2
sin2 µ + cos 2 µ = 1
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illus-
trate the spacing for mathematical displays, regardless of
the margins.
R¯
1.2 Mathematics in section heads ® ln tdt
Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note that
mathematics in section heads may cause difficulties in
typesetting styles with running headers or table of con-
tents entries.
1.3 Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like En-

vironments
The following lemma is a well-known fact on differentia-
tion of asymptotic expansions of analytic functions.
Lemma 1 Let f (z) be an analytic function in C+ . If
f (z) admits the representation
µ ¶
a1 1
f (z) = a0 + +o ,
z z
{z ∈ C+ : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then
a1 = − lim z 2 f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ ". (2)
Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ" → Γ " =
{z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ " } and
f (1=z) = a0 + a1 z + o (z) . (3)
∗L
AT EX automatically selects the spacing depending on the sur-
rounding line lengths.
1 2
Japanese Journal of Applied Physics 61
Fix z ∈ Γ" , and let C r (z) = {¸ ∈ C− : |¸ − z| = r} be a 4. About the Bibliography

circle with radius r = |z| sin "=2. It follows from (3) that Following the text of this article is a short manual bib-
Z liography. This sample bibliography has no relationship
1 f (¸) d¸
2
= to the previous text, but it shows sample citations such
2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z) as,4)5) and. 6) You can also have multiple citations ap-
1
X Z m pear together. Here is an example:.2—4)
1 (¸ − z0 ) d¸
am 2 + R(z), (4)
m=0
2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z)
|R(z)| ≤ r −1 max o (|z|) = r −1 max |¸| · O (|z| + r )
¸∈C H(z ) ¸∈C H(z )
|z| + r 1 + sin "

= · O (|z| + r) = · O (|z|) .
r sin "
Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 , and hence by
the Cauchy theorem (4) implies
d
f (1=z) = a1 + R(z) → a1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2 ,
dz
2. Section Headings
Use the Section tag for major sections, such as the one
just above. Four additional heading levels are available,
as described below.

2.1.1 Su bsubsection Heading
Subsubsubsection Heading This text appears un-
der a subsubsubsection heading.
Subsubsubsubsection Heading This text appears un-
der a subsubsubsubsection heading.
3. Lists
Bullet, numbered and description list environments
are available. Lists, which can extend four levels deep,
look like this:
a. A numbered list item under a list item.
The typeset appearance for this level is often dif-
ferent from the screen appearance. The type-
set appearance often uses parentheses around the
level indicator.
b. Another numbered list item under a list item.
A. Fourth and final level of numbered list items
allowed.
• Bullet item 1.
• Bullet item 2.
Description List Each description list item has a lead-
in followed by the item. D ouble-click the lead-in box
to enter or customize the text of the lead-in.
ends.
3 4
References
1) N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2, John
2) Harstad, K.and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behavior
in fluid hydrogen at rocket chamber pressures”, Int. J. Heat
Mass Transfer, 1998a, 41, 3537-3550
3) Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under super-
critical conditions”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, in print
4) Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular
Theory of Gases and Liquids, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., 1964
5) Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E., Molecu-
lar thermodynamics for fluid-phase equilibrium, Prentice -Hall,
Inc., 1986
6) Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Prop-
erties of Gases and Liquids, 4th Edition, McGraw-Hill Book
Company, 1987
Appendix: Appendix
Because appendices may contain material that is sup-
plementary rather than integral to the main text , many
styles use a different numbering system for equations
√
−b ± b2 − 4ac
(A.1)
2a
The quadratic equation shown as equation A.1 is used
to demonstrate how equations are numbered in the ap-
pendix.
5
JEEP - A General Purpose Vehicle

Packages:
amsmath Standard
jeep None
The shell produces general-purpose documents, as the name implies, using a 12-pt font. Headings appear at the
left side of the page.
T wo sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays. 1 The spacing

above and below a display dep ends on whether the lines above or below are short
or long, as s hown in the follow ing examples.
The Title of an Article A short line above:
x2 + y 2 = z 2
D r. A uthor Jones and a short line below.

A long line ab ove may depend on your margins
At this Ad dress
July 22, 2004
as w ill a long line b elow. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for
Abstract
R¯
This article illustrates many features of a ma thematics article, but w e 1.2. Mathem atics in section he ads ® ln tdt
do not expla in the sp urious appearance of the formula (∇ × F ) · k = z + 1
in this abstract.
contents entries.
1. Sam ple M athema tics and Text
1.3. Theor em s, Lem mata, and Other Theor em -like Envir onments
This short sample document illustrates the typeset app earance of in-line and dis-
played mathematics in documents. It also illustrates five levels of section headings A number of theorem-like env ironm ents is available. The following lemma is a
and three kinds of lists. Finally, the document includes entries for a manual bib- well-known fact on differentiation of asymptotic expansions of analytic functions.
liography and an appendix.
Lemma 1. Let f (z ) be an analy tic function in C + . If f (z ) admits the represen-
1.1. In-line and D isplayed Mathematics tation µ ¶
a1 1
P∞ f (z) = a 0 + +o ,
The expression i=1 a i is in-line mathematics, while the numb ered eq uation
z z
∞ for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ" = {z ∈ C + : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then
X
ai (1)
i=1
a 1 = − lim z 2 f 0 (z ) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ " . (2)
is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 1. Proof. C hange z for 1=z . Then Γ " → Γ " = {z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ " } and
Let H be a Hilb ert space, C b e a closed bounded convex subset of H , T a
nonexpansive self map of C . Suppose that as n → ∞, an;k → 0 forPeach k , and f (1=z) = a0 + a1 z + o (z) . (3)
P∞ + ∞ k
°n = k=0 (a n;k +1 − a n;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C , A nx = k=0 a n;k T x 1 A
LT EX aut oma tically selects the spacin g dep end in g on th e su rround ing lin e lengths.
converges weak ly to a fixed point of T [1].
1
JEEP - A General Purpose Vehicle 63
Fix z ∈ Γ " , and let Cr (z) = {¸ ∈ C − : |¸ − z| = r} b e a circle with radius 3. Lists

r = |z | sin "=2. It follows from (3) that
Bullet, numb ered and description list env ironm ents are available. Lists, which
Z Z
(¸ − z 0 )m d¸
1
X
1 f (¸) d¸ 1 can extend four levels deep, look like this:
2 = am + R(z), (4)
2¼ i CH (z ) (¸ − z ) m=0
2¼ i CH (z ) (¸ − z)
2
where for the remainder R(z) we have 2. Numbered list item 2.
|R(z)| ≤ r −1 max o (|z|) = r −1 max |¸| · O (|z | + r) 1. A numbered list item under a list item.
¸∈C H ( z) ¸∈CH (z )
|z| + r 1 + sin " T he typeset appearance for this level is often diff er ent from the screen
= · O (|z| + r) = · O (|z |) . appearance. The typeset app earance often uses parentheses around the
r s in "
level indicator.
Therefore R(z ) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2, and hence by the C auchy theorem (4)
2. Another numbered list item under a list item.
implies
1. Third level numbered lis t item under a list item.
d
f (1=z) = a1 + R(z ) → a 1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2 , 1. Fourth and final level of numbered list items allowed.
dz
that implies (2) by substituting 1=z back for z. • Bullet item 1.
• Bullet item 2.
2. Section H eadings
heading levels are available, as described below. ∗ Third level bullet item.
D escription List Each descr iption list item has a lead-in followed by the item.
This text appears under a subsection heading. Double-click the lead-in box to enter or customize the text of the lead-in.
2.1.1. Subsubsection Heading Bunyip M ythical beast of Australian Aboriginal legends.

4. Ab out the B ibliography
Subsubsubsection Heading T his tex t appears under a subsubsubsection head- Following the text of this article is a short manual bibliography. This sample
ing. bibliography has no relationship to the previous text, but it shows sample citations
Subsubsubsubse ction He ading This text appears under a subsubsubsub- is an example: [2, 3, 4].
section heading.
References
New York, 1963.
[2] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid ox ygen drop behavior in fluid hy-
drogen at ro cket chamber pressures”, Int. J. H eat Mass Transfer, 1998a, 41,
3537-3550
[3] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical condi-
[4] Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular T heory of Gase s
[5] Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R . and de Azevedo, E., Molecular thermodynam-

ics for fluid-phase equilibrium, P rentice -Hall, Inc., 1986
[6] Reid, R . C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Prop erties of Gases and
Liq uids, 4th Edition, McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1987
A. A n App endix
Because appendices may contain material that is supplementary rather than inte-
gral t o the main text , many styles use a different numbering sy stem for equations
√
−b ± b 2 − 4ac
(5)
2a
The quadratic equation show n as eq uation 5 is used to demonstrate how equations
are numb ered in the appendix.
JEEP - Double-spaced Except for Quotes

Packages:
amsmath Standard
jeep None
sw20jar2 None
The information in documents produced with this shell is double-spaced, except for quotes. The shell uses a
12-pt font. Headings appear at the left side of the page.
1.1. In-line and D isplayed Mathematics
P∞
The expression i=1 ai is in-line mathematics, while the numb ered eq uation
The Title of an Article ∞

X
ai (1.1)
i=1
D r. A uthor Jones
At this Ad dress
Let H be a Hilb ert space, C b e a closed bounded convex subset of H , T a
July 22, 2004 nonexpansive self map of C . Suppose that as n → ∞, an;k → 0 for each k , and
P∞ P∞
°n = k=0 (a n;k +1 − a n;k ) + → 0. Then for each x in C , A nx = k=0 an;k T k x
Abstract converges weak ly to a fixed point of T [1].
This article illustrates many features of a ma thematics article, but w e T wo sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays. 1 The spacing
do not expla in the sp urious appearance of the formula (∇ × F ) · k = z + 1 above and below a display dep ends on whether the lines above or below are short
in this abstract. or long, as s hown in the follow ing examples.
A short line above:

1. Sam ple M athema tics and Text x2 + y 2 = z 2
This short sample document illustrates the typeset app earance of in-line and dis-
played mathematics in documents. It also illustrates five levels of section headings 1 A
LT EX aut oma tically selects the spacin g dep end in g on th e su rround ing lin e lengths.
and three kinds of lists. Finally, the document includes entries for a manual bib-
liography and an appendix.
1 2
JEEP - Double-spaced Except for Quotes 65
A long line ab ove may depend on your margins for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ" = {z ∈ C + : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then
sin2 µ + cos2 µ = 1 a 1 = − lim z 2 f 0 (z ) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ " . (1.2)
as w ill a long line b elow. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for Proof. C hange z for 1=z . Then Γ " → Γ " = {z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ " } and

f (1=z) = a0 + a1 z + o (z) . (1.3)
R¯
1.2. Mathem atics in section he ads ®
ln tdt
Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note that mathematics in section Fix z ∈ Γ " , and let Cr (z) = {¸ ∈ C − : |¸ − z| = r} b e a circle with radius
r = |z | sin "=2. It follows from (1.3) that

contents entries. Z Z m
1 f (¸) d¸ X1
1 (¸ − z 0 ) d¸
= am + R(z), (1.4)
2¼ i CH (z ) (¸ − z ) 2 m=0
2¼ i CH (z ) (¸ − z) 2
1.3. Theor em s, Lem mata, and Other Theor em -like Envir onments

A number of theorem-like env ironm ents is available. The following lemma is a

|R(z)| ≤ r −1 max o (|z|) = r −1 max |¸| · O (|z | + r)
¸∈C H ( z) ¸∈CH (z )
Lem ma 1. Let f (z ) be an analy tic function in C + . If f (z ) admits the represen- |z| + r 1 + sin "
= · O (|z| + r) = · O (|z |) .
r s in "
tation
µ ¶
a1 1
f (z) = a 0 + +o , Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2 , and hence by the Cauchy theorem (1.4)
z z
implies
3 4
T he Quotation tag is used for quot ations of more than one paragraph. Fol- [2] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid ox ygen drop behavior in fluid hy-
lowing is the beginning of Alice’s Adventures in Wonderland by Lewis Carroll: drogen at ro cket chamber pressures”, Int. J. H eat Mass Transfer, 1998a, 41,
3537-3550
There was nothing so very remarkable in that; nor did Alice think it
so very much out of the way to hear the Rabbit say to itself, ’Oh dear! [3] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical condi-
Oh dear! I shall be late!’ (when she thought it over afterwards, it
occurred to her that she ought to have wondered at this, but at the tions”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, in print
time it all seemed q uite natural); but when the R abbit actually took
a watch out of its waistcoat-pocket, and looked at it, and then hurried
[4] Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular T heory of Gase s
on, Alice started to her feet, for it flashed across her mind that she had
never before seen a rabbit with either a waistcoat-pocket, or a watch
to take out of it, and burning with curiosity, she ran across the field
after it, and fortunately was just in time to see it pop down a large
rabbit-hole under the hedge. [5] Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R . and de Azevedo, E., Molecular thermodynam-
ics for fluid-phase equilibrium, P rentice -Hall, Inc., 1986

4. Ab out the B ibliography
[6] Reid, R . C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Prop erties of Gases and
Following the text of this article is a short manual bibliography. This sample Liq uids, 4th Edition, McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1987
such as [4], [5] and [6]. You can also have multiple citations appear together. Here A. A n App endix

Because appendices may contain material that is supplementary rather than inte-
gral t o the main text , many styles use a different numbering sy stem for equations
References
√
−b ± b 2 − 4ac
New York, 1963. (A.1)
2a
7 8
Journal of International Economics North-Holland

Document class options Draft
Packages:
sw20nhej None
endnotes None
The shell includes front matter fields for key words and for a classification as determined by the Journal of
Economic Literature.

T he Title of an Article 2
D r. Au thor Jones ∗
R e ce iv e d 1 A p ril 1 99 9 ; rec e iv e d in re vise d for m 25 D ec e m b er 19 9 9; a c ce p te d 3 0 Feb ru ar y 20 0 0

Tw o sets of LATEX p ar am eters govern math emat ical d isplays. 1 The s pacin g
Ab s tract ab ove and b elow a d isplay d epen ds on wh ether the lines ab ove or b elow are short
This article illu strates many features of a m athe matic s artic le , but we do not ex plain or lon g, as shown in the f ollowing exam p les.
the spurious appearanc e of the form ula (∇ × F ) · k = z + 1 in thi s a bstract. A sh ort line ab ove:
K e y w o rd s : I n fl a t io n s ta b iliz a tion ; D eva lu at ion ra te s; P o lic y u n ce rt a inty ; S u p p ly- sid e e ff e c t s x2 + y2 = z2
J E L c l a s si fi c a t io n : F 3; F4
an d a short line b elow .
A lon g lin e above may d epen d o n you r m argin s

1. Sa m ple M ath ematics an d Text
Th is short sample docu ment illust rat es the typ eset ap p ea rance o f in -line an d sin2 µ + cos2 µ = 1
displayed math em atics in d ocuments. It also illus trates five levels of section h ead -
as w ill a lon g lin e b elow . T his line is long enoug h to illu strate the spa cing for
in gs and three kin ds of lists. Finally, the document includes entr ies for a m anual
m athem atical d isp lays, regardless of the mar gins.
bibliography an d an ap p en dix.
R¯
1 .2. M athema tics in section h eads ®
ln tdt
1 .1. In-line and Dis play ed M ath em atics
P∞ Mathematics can ap p ear in section heads. Not e that ma thema tics in s ect ion
Th e expres sion i=1 a i is in-lin e mathematics, wh ile the nu mbered equation
hea ds may cause difficulties in typ esettin g styles with run ning h ead er s or t ab le of
∞
X
ai (1) content s entr ies.
i=1
1 .3. T heorems , Lemm ata, and Other Theorem -like En vironm ents
is d isp layed and automat ically numb er ed as equa tion 1.
Let H be a Hilb ert sp ace, C b e a closed b ou nd ed convex su bset of H , T a A numb er o f theo rem- like envir on m ents is availab le. T he follow ing lem ma is a
nonexpans ive self map of C . Sup p ose t hat as n → ∞ , a n;k → 0 for each k, an d well- know n fact o n d iff erentiation of asym pt otic exp an sion s of an alytic fun ction s.
P∞ + P∞ k
°n = k = 0 (a n ;k +1 − a n ;k ) → 0. T hen for each x in C , A n x = k =0 a n ;k T x
Lem ma 1 Let f ( z) be an analytic functio n in C + . If f (z ) ad mits t he repres en-
converges w eakly to a fi xed point o f T 1.
tation
∗
At t his A ddress µ ¶
a1 1
f (z ) = a 0 + +o ,
z z
Journal of International Economics North-Holland 67
T he Title of an Article 3 T he Title of an Article 4
for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ " = {z ∈ C + : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then 2. Sectio n H eadi ng s
Use t he S ection tag for major sections , such as th e one just ab ove. Fo ur
a 1 = − lim z 2 f 0 (z ) , z → ∞ , z ∈ Γ " . (2)
ad dition al h ead in g levels are available, as d es crib ed b elow.
Pr oof. C hange z for 1=z . T hen Γ " → Γ " = {z ∈ C − : z ∈ Γ " } and

2 .1. S ubsection Heading
f (1=z ) = a 0 + a 1 z + o (z) . (3) Th is text ap pea rs un der a sub section heading.
Fix z ∈ Γ " , and let C r (z ) = { ¸ ∈ C − : |¸ − z | = r} b e a circle with radius 2.1.1. Subsubsect io n Head ing
r = |z| sin "=2. It follows from (3) that Th is text ap pea rs un der a sub sub section heading.
Z Z
( ¸ − z0 ) m d ¸
1
X
1 f (¸ ) d¸ 1
= am + R(z ), (4) Su bsu bsu bsectio n H ead ing T his text app ears un der a sub sub sub section head-
2 ¼i CH(z) (¸ − z ) 2 2¼i C H (z ) (¸ − z )2
m= 0
in g.
wh ere for the r em aind er R( z) we h ave

Su bsu bsu bsu bsectio n Heading T his text ap p ears und er a sub sub sub sub -
|R(z )| ≤ r − 1 max o (|z |) = r −1 max |¸| · O (|z | + r) section heading .
¸ ∈C H (z) ¸ ∈C H (z )
|z | + r 1 + sin "
= · O (|z| + r ) = · O (|z|) .
r sin " 3. Lists
Th erefor e R (z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ " = 2 , and h ence by t he Cauchy t heo rem (4)

Bullet, numb ered and des cr ip tion list environ ments are available. Lists , wh ich
im plies can extend four levels d eep, look like th is:
d 1. N umb ered list it em 1.

f (1=z) = a 1 + R (z) → a 1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ " =2 ,
dz
2. N umb ered list it em 2.
that im p lies (2) by s ubs tituting 1 =z back for z .
(a) A num ber ed list item und er a list item.
T he Title of an Article 5 T he Title of an Article 6
T he typ eset app ear an ce for this level is often different from th e screen References
app earan ce. Th e typ eset app earance oft en us es parentheses aro un d
N. Du nfo rd a nd J. S chwartz, Funct ional Analy sis, v. 2, Joh n W iley an d So ns, New
th e level ind icator.
York, 1963.
(b) An oth er nu mb ered lis t item u nder a lis t item .
Har stad, K. an d B ellan , J., “Isolat ed flu id oxyg en dro p b ehavior in fl uid hydr ogen
i. T hird level nu mb ered lis t item u nd er a list item. at rocket ch amb er pr es sur es ”, Int. J. Heat M ass Trans fer, 1998a, 41, 3537-3550
A. Fou rth a nd fin al level of num b er ed list items a llow ed . Har stad, K. and Bellan , J., “Th e Lew is numb er un der s up ercritical con dition s”,
Int . J. Heat Mas s Tran sfer, in print

• Bu llet item 1.
Hir shfelder, J . O., Cur tis, C . F . and B ir d, R . B., M olecular Theory of Gas es and
• Bu llet item 2.
Liquids , Joh n W iley an d So ns, In c., 1964
— S econd level b ullet item. Prausn it z, J., L ichtenthaler, R . and de Azevedo, E., M olecular th erm odyn am ics
for flu id -p hase equ ilibrium, Pr entice -Hall, Inc., 1986
∗ T hird level b ullet item .
R eid , R . C., Prausn itz, J. M . and Polling , B. E., T he Prop erties of Gases an d
· Fou rth a nd fin al level bullet item .
Liquids, 4th Ed ition, McG raw -Hill Book C om p any, 19 87
Des cr ipti on List Each d escription list item has a lead- in followed by t he it em .
A An App endix
D oub le- click the lea d-in b ox to enter or customize th e text of the lead- in .
B unyip M ythical beast of A ustralian Ab original legen ds. Because app end ices may contain material that is sup plemen tar y rather than
int egra l to the main text , m any styles us e a d ifferent nu mbering sys tem for equa-
4. Ab ou t th e B ib liogr ap hy tion s th at app ear in the app end ices .
√
Following the text of th is article is a s hort manu al bibliography. Th is s amp le −b ± b 2 − 4a c
(5)
2a
bibliography has n o relationsh ip to th e p revious text, but it sh ow s s amp le citatio ns
such as 4 , 5 a nd 6. You can also h ave multip le citat ions app ear togeth er. Here is Th e qu ad ratic equa tion s how n as equ at ion 5 is us ed to dem ons trate h ow equatio ns
an example: 2, 3, 4 .
ar e num b ered in th e app endix.
Journal of Low Temperature Physics
Document class base file: jltp.cls

Packages:
amsmath Standard
The shell places all front matter in TEX fields at the beginning of the body of the document. The shell also
includes a field for a running header.
D r. A uth or Jones
A short line above:

x 2 + y2 = z2
and a short line b elow.
The Title of an Article A long lin e above may dep end on your m argins
Dr. Author Jones
as w ill a long line b elow. This line is lo ng enoug h to ill ustrate the spacing
At t hi s Addre ss fo r ma thematica l disp lays, regardless of the margins.
R¯
1.2. Mathema tics in section heads ® ln tdt
explain the spurious appearance of the formula (∇ × F ) · k = z + 1 in this Mathematics can appea r in section heads. Note that mathematics in
abstract. sectio n heads may cause difficulties in typesetting styles with running head-
PACS numbers: 05.70 Ln, 05.70 Jk, 64. ers or tab le of contents entries.
1. Sample Mathematics and Text 1.3. Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like
Environments
This sho rt sample docum ent illustrates the typ eset appearance of in-
line and displayed mathematics in documents. It also illustrates five levels A number of theo rem-like environments is available. The following
of section head ings and three kinds of lists. Finally, the document includes lemma is a well-know n fact on differentiation of asym ptotic expansion s o f
entri es for a manual bibl iography and an app endix. ana lytic functions.
Lemma 1 Let f (z) be an analytic function in C + . If f (z) admits the

1.1. In-line and Displayed Mathema tics representation µ ¶
P∞ a 1
f (z) = a 0 + 1 + o ,
The expression i=1 a i is in -lin e mathema tics, while the numbered z z
equation
∞
X for z → ∞ in side a con e Γ " = {z ∈ C + : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then
ai (1)
i=1 a 1 = − lim z 2 f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ " . (2)
is displayed and a utomatically numbered as equation 1.
Let H b e a Hilb ert spa ce, C be a closed b ounded convex sub set o f Proof. Cha nge z for 1=z . Then Γ" → Γ " = {z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ " } and
H , T a non expansive self map o f C . Suppose that as n → ∞, a n;k → 0
P∞ f (1=z) = a 0 + a 1 z + o (z) . (3)
fo r each k, and ° n = k=0 (a n;k+1 − an;k )
+
→ 0 . Th en for each x in C,
P k
Anx = ∞ k =0 a n;k T x converges weakly to a fixed p oint o f T .
1
Fix z ∈ Γ " , a nd let Cr (z ) = {¸ ∈ C− : |¸ − z| = r} b e a circle with radius
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern m athematical d isplays.1 The spa c- r = |z| sin "=2. It follows from (3) tha t
ing ab ove and b elow a display depends o n w hether the lines ab ove or below
Z Z
(¸ − z0 )m d¸
are short or lo ng, as show n in the following examples. X1
1 f (¸) d¸ 1
= am + R(z), (4)
1 A
L TEX au to matically selects the spacing d epending o n the surrou nding line lengths. 2¼i CH (z ) (¸ − z) 2 m=0
2¼i C H (z ) (¸ − z) 2
Journal of Low Temperature Physics 69
Th e Ti tle of an A rticle D r. A uth or Jones
where for the remainder R(z) we have 2. Numb ered list item 2.
|R(z)| ≤ r −1
max o (|z|) = r −1
max |¸| · O (|z| + r) (a) A numbered list item under a list item.
¸∈C H (z ) ¸∈C H ( z )
The typeset appearance for this level is often d ifferent from the
|z | + r 1 + sin "
= · O (|z| + r) = · O (|z|) . screen appearance. The typeset appearance often uses parenthe-
r sin " ses aroun d the level indicator.
Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞ , z ∈ Γ "=2 , an d h ence by the C auchy theo rem (b) Ano ther numbered list item un der a list item.
(4) im plies i. Third level numb ered l ist item under a list item.
d A. Fourth an d final level of numbered list items allow ed.
f (1=z) = a 1 + R(z) → a 1 , as z → ∞ , z ∈ Γ "=2 ,
dz
• Bullet item 1.
that implies (2) by substituting 1 =z back for z.
• Bullet item 2.
2. Section Hea dings — Second level bullet item.

Use the Section tag for ma jo r sections, such as the one just ab ove. Four
addition al hea ding levels are available, as describ ed b elow. · Fourth an d final level bullet item.
item. Double-click the lead-in box to enter o r customize the text o f
2.1. Subsection Heading the lead-in.
This text appears u nder a subsection heading. Bunyip Mythical bea st of Australian Ab original legend s.
2.1.1. Subsubsection Heading 4. About the Bibliography

This text appears u nder a subsu bsection heading. Fo llowing the text of this article is a short manual biblio graphy. This
sample bib liography ha s no relationship to the previous text, but it shows
Subsubsubsection Heading This text app ears und er a subsubsubsection sample citations such as 4 , 5 and 6 . You can al so have multiple citations
heading. app ear togeth er. Here is an example: 2—4 .
Subsubsubsubsection Heading T his text ap pea rs under a subsubsub-

subsectio n h eading. REFERENCES
1. N. Dunf ord and J. Schw ar tz, Fu nction al An al ys is, v. 2, John Wiley and Sons,
New York, 1963.
3. Lists 2. Hars tad , K. and B ellan, J ., “Isolat ed flu id oxygen d rop b eh avior in flu id hydrogen
at rocket cham ber pres sures ”, Int. J. Heat M ass Transfer, 1998a, 4 1, 3 537-3550
Bul let, numbered and description list environments are avai lable. Lists, 3. Hars tad , K. and Bellan, J., “T he L ewis nu mb er und er su percr itical cond itions ”,
which can extend four levels deep, loo k like this: Int . J. H eat M as s Trans fer, in pr int
4. Hirs hfelder, J. O ., C urtis, C . F. an d Bird , R . B., M olecul ar Theory of Gases and
1. Numb ered list item 1. Liquids , Jo h n W iley an d Sons, Inc., 1964
Th e Ti tle of an A rticle
5. Prau snitz, J., Lichtent haler, R . a nd de Azevedo, E., M olecular ther m odynam ics
for flu id -p hase equilibrium, Pr entice -Hall, Inc., 1986
6. Reid, R . C ., Praus nitz, J. M . and Pollin g, B . E., T he Pr op erties of Gases an d
Liquids, 4th Edition, M cG raw -Hill Book C omp any, 1987
Appendix A. An Appendix
Because a ppendices may contain material th at is supplementary rather
than integral to the main text , many styles use a different numbering system
fo r equa tio ns that appear in the app end ices.
√
−b ± b2 − 4ac
(A.1)
2a
The quadratic equation shown as equation A.1 is u sed to dem onstrate how
equation s are numbered in the app endix.
Journal of Progress in Surface Science

Packages:
None
Rather than using additional packages, the shell includes extra instructions in the document preamble to control
the formatting.
R¯
1.2 Mathem atics in section heads ®
ln tdt
M ath ematics can app ear in section heads. Note that mat hematics in section h ead s ma y ca use difficulties
in typeset tin g styles w it h r unn in g headers or table of contents entries.
1.3 Theorem s, Lem mata, and O ther The orem -like Environments
Dr. Author Jones
A num ber of theorem-like environm ent s is availab le. T he follow in g lemma is a well-kn own fact on
At this Address
d iff erentiatio n of asympt otic exp an sion s of a nalytic fun ction s.
The Date
Lem m a 1 Le t f (z ) be an a nalytic function in C+ . I f f (z) ad mits t he re pres entation
µ ¶
a1 1
Abstrac t f (z ) = a 0 + +o ,
z z
This article illu strates m any features of a m athematics article, but we do no t expl ain the spurious
for z → ∞ inside a con e Γ " = {z ∈ C + : 0 < " ≤ ar g z ≤ ¼ − " } then
app earance of the formula (∇ × F ) · k = z + 1 in this a bstract.
a 1 = − lim z 2 f 0 (z ) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ " . (2)
1 Sample Mathematics and Text P ro of. Ch an ge z for 1=z . Th en Γ " → Γ " = {z ∈ C − : z ∈ Γ " } and
T his sho rt sample document illus trates the typ eset app earan ce of in- lin e a nd disp layed mathematics
f (1=z ) = a 0 + a 1 z + o (z ) . (3)
in docu ments. It als o illus trates five levels of s ection hea dings a nd thr ee kind s of lists. Finally, the
d o cument in clu des ent ries fo r a m anu al b ib liogr ap hy a nd a n app end ix. F ix z ∈ Γ " , an d let C r (z ) = {¸ ∈ C − : |¸ − z | = r } b e a cir cle w it h radius r = |z| sin "=2. It follow s
fr om (3) th at
Z Z
(¸ − z 0 ) m d¸
1
X
1.1 In-line and D isplaye d Mathematics 1 f (¸) d¸ 1
= am + R(z ), (4)
2¼ i CH (z) (¸ − z )
2 2¼i CH(z) (¸ − z )
2
P∞ m =0
T he expression i= 1 a i is in-line math emat ics, wh ile th e num b ered equation w here for th e rem ain der R(z ) w e have
∞
X
ai (1) |R(z )| ≤ r − 1 max o (|z|) = r − 1 max |¸| · O (|z| + r )
i=1 ¸∈C H (z ) ¸∈ C H (z )
|z | + r 1 + s in "
is displayed an d au tom atically nu mb ered as equ ation 1 . = · O (|z | + r) = · O (|z |) .
r sin "
L et H b e a Hilb ert s pace, C b e a closed b ou nded con vex subset of H , T a no nexpansive self ma p of
P∞ + T herefore R(z ) → 0 as z → ∞ , z ∈ Γ "=2 , an d h ence by the Cauchy th eorem (4) imp lies
C . Sup pose that as n → ∞, a n ;k → 0 for each k, an d ° n = k = 0 (a n; k+ 1 − a n; k ) → 0. T hen fo r each
P∞ k
x in C , A n x = k = 0 a n ;k T x co nverges wea kly to a fi xed p oint of T [1]. d
f (1=z) = a 1 + R(z ) → a 1, as z → ∞ , z ∈ Γ " =2 ,
T wo sets of LAT 1
EX p arameters govern m athem atical d isplays. T he spacin g ab ove and b elow a d is play dz
d epen ds on w heth er th e lin es ab ove or b elow ar e sh ort or long , as sh ow n in the follow in g examp les . th at implies (2) by su bstitu ting 1=z b ack for z .
A short line ab ove:

x2 + y 2 = z 2 2 Sec tion Headings
and a sh or t line b elow .
Us e th e Section tag for major section s, such a s the one just ab ove. Four add it ional h ead in g levels are
A long line ab ove m ay dep end on your m ar gins
available, as descr ib ed below .
sin2 µ + co s2 µ = 1
as w ill a long line b elo w. T his line is long enough to illus trate the sp acing for math emat ica l d isplays,
T his text app ears u nd er a su bsection heading.
r eg ardless of the m argins .
1 LATEX au tomatically selects the spacin g dep ending on th e s urrou ndin g lin e lengths .
1 2
Journal of Progress in Surface Science 71
2.1.1 Su bsu bsectio n Heading References

T his text app ears u nd er a su bsu bsection hea ding. [1] N. Du nford an d J. S chw art z, Fun ctional Analys is, v. 2, John W iley and Sons , New York, 1963.
2.1.1 .1 Su bsu bsu bsection Heading T his t ext app ear s u nder a su bsu bsu bsection h ead in g. [2] Ha rstad, K. and Bellan, J ., “Is olated fluid oxygen d rop b eh avior in flu id hyd ro gen at rocket ch amb er
pres sur es ”, I nt. J. Heat M ass Trans fer, 1998a, 41, 3537-3550
2 .1.1 .1 .1 Su bsu bsu bsu bsection Heading T his text app ears un der a sub sub sub sub section head-
[3] Ha rstad, K. an d Bellan , J., “ T he Lewis nu mb er un der su percr itica l conditions”, Int . J. Heat M as s
ing .
Tra nsfer, in p rint
[4] Hirshfelder , J. O., Cu rtis, C . F . and B ird , R . B ., M olec ular T heo ry o f Gases and Liqu ids , John W iley
3 Lists
a nd So ns, In c., 1964
B ullet , numb er ed and descr ip tion list envir on ments are availab le. Lists, w hich can ext en d fou r levels
[5] Prausn itz, J., Lichtenth aler, R . and de A zeved o, E., M olecular th erm odyn am ics for fl uid-phase
d eep , look like th is :
equilib rium , Prentice -Hall, Inc., 1986
1. Nu mbered lis t item 1.
[6] R eid , R . C., Praus nitz, J . M . and Pollin g, B . E., Th e Prop erties of G as es a nd Liquids, 4t h Ed it ion,
2. Nu mbered lis t item 2. M cGr aw -Hill B ook C omp any, 1987
(a ) A nu mb ered list item u nder a lis t item .
Th e typ eset a pp earance for this level is often d ifferent fr om t he screen app ea rance. T he
A An A ppendix
typeset app earance often u ses p ar entheses arou nd the level ind ica tor. B ecau se app endices may contain m ateria l that is s upp lement ary rat her th an integr al to th e main text ,
(b) Ano ther num b ered list item un der a list item. ma ny s ty les use a different nu mb ering system for equa tion s th at app ear in t he app end ices.
√
i. Th ird level numbered list item und er a list item . −b ± b 2 − 4ac
(5)
2a
A. Fou rth and fin al level of number ed list items allow ed .
T he qu ad rat ic equ ation sh ow n as equation 5 is u sed t o d em on strate how equ ations are nu mb ered in the
• Bullet item 1 . app end ix.
• Bullet item 2 .
— Second level bu llet item.
∗ Th ird level bullet item .
· Fou rth and fin al level bullet item.
D escrip tion List Ea ch d es cription lis t item h as a lead- in follo wed by the item. D ou ble-click th e lead -in
box to enter or cus tom ize t he text of th e lead -in.
Bu nyip Mythical b east of Au stralia n Ab origin al legend s.

Fo llow in g the t ext of this article is a sh ort m anu al b ibliograp hy. Th is sample bibliography ha s no
r elation ship to the p reviou s text, but it sh ows sample citations su ch as [4], [5] an d [6]. You can also
h ave m ultiple citat io ns app ear togeth er. Her e is an examp le: [2, 3, 4 ].
3 4
Kluwer Journal
Document class base file: kluwer.cls

Packages:
None
The shell produces documents suitable for journal submissions to Kluwer Academic Publishers. The front matter
is not used, instead encapsulated TeX fields at the beginning of the document provide the front matter elements. The
default paper size is A4. See the shell for additional information.
2 Dr. Author Jones
A Sample Document ∗ A long line above may depend on your margins
Dr. AuthorJones
Author’s Affiliation as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the
spacing for mathematical displays, regardless of the margins.
April 15, 2003
R¯
Abstract. This article illustrates many features of a m athematics article, but we 1.2. Mathematics in section heads ® ln tdt
do not explain the spurious appearance of the formula (∇ × F ) · k = z + 1 in this
abstract.
Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note that mathematics in
What can’t be done with TeX isn’t worth section heads may cause difficulties in typesetting styles with running
doing.
1.3. Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like

Environments
A number of theorem-like environments is available. The following
This short sample document illustrates the typeset appearance of in- lemma is a well-known fact on differentiation of asymptotic expansions
line and displayed mathematics in documents. It also illustrates five of analytic functions.
levels of section headings and three kinds of lists. Finally, the document
includes entries for a manual bibliography and an appendix. LEMMA 1. Let f (z) be an analytic function in C+ . If f (z) admits
the representation
1.1. In-line and Displayed Mathematics µ ¶
a1 1
P∞ f (z) = a0 + +o ,
The expression i=1 a i is in-line mathematics, while the numbered z z
equation
∞
X for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ" = {z ∈ C+ : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then
ai (1)
i=1 a1 = − lim z2f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" . (2)
is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 1. Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ" → Γ" = {z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ" } and
f (1=z) = a0 + a1 z + o (z) . (3)
H, T a nonexpansive self map of C. Suppose that as n → ∞, an;k → 0
P
for eachPk, and ° n = ∞ k=0 (an;k+1 − an;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C,
+
Fix z ∈ Γ", and let Cr (z) = {¸ ∈ C− : |¸ − z| = r} be a circle with
Anx = ∞ k
k=0 an;k T x converges weakly to a fixed point of T (?). radius r = |z| sin "=2. It follows from (3) that
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays.1 The
Z Z
spacing above and below a display depends on whether the lines above 1 f (¸) d¸ 1
X 1 (¸ − z0 )m d¸
or below are short or long, as shown in the following examples. = am + R(z), (4)
2¼i CH(z) (¸ − z)2 m=0 2¼i CH(z) (¸ − z)2
A short line above:
x2 + y2 = z2 where for the remainder R(z) we have
∗
Footnote to the title with the ‘thanks’ command. ¸∈CH (z) ¸∈CH (z)
1 A
L TEX automatically selects the spacing depending on the surrounding line |z| + r 1 + sin "
= · O (|z| + r) = · O (|z|) .
lengths. r sin "
c 2003 Kluwer Academic Publishers. Printed in the Netherlands.
°
swp0004.tex; 9/07/2003; 15:53; p.1 swp0004.tex; 9/07/2003; 15:53; p.2

Kluwer Journal 73
A Sample Document 3 4 Dr. Author Jones
Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2, and hence by the Cauchy A) Fourth and final level of numbered list items allowed.
theorem (4) implies
− Bullet item 1.
d
f (1=z) = a1 + R(z) → a1, as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2 ,
dz − Bullet item 2.
that implies (2) by substituting 1=z back for z. • Second level bullet item.
+ Fourth and final level bullet item.
2. Section Headings
Description List Each description list item has a lead-in followed by
Use the Section tag for major sections, such as the one just above. Four the item. Double-click the lead-in box to enter or customize the
additional heading levels are available, as described below. text of the lead-in.
2.1. Subsection Heading Bunyip Mythical beast of Australian Aboriginal legends.
2.1.1. Subsubsection Heading Appendix

A. An Appendix
2.1.1.1. Subsubsubsection Heading This text appears under a subsub-
subsection heading. Because appendices may contain material that is supplementary rather
than integral to the main text , many styles use a different numbering
Subsubsubsubsection Heading This text appears under a subsubsub- system for equations that appear in the appendices.
subsection heading. √
−b ± b2 − 4ac
(5)
2a
3. Lists
The quadratic equation shown as equation 5 is used to demonstrate
how equations are numbered in the appendix.
Bullet, numbered and description list environments are available. Lists,
which can extend four levels deep, look like this:
1. Numbered list item 1. Acknowledgements
2. Numbered list item 2. And this is an acknowledgements section with a heading that was pro-
duced by the \acknowledgements command. Thank you all for helping
a) A numbered list item under a list item. me writing this LATEX sample file.
The typeset appearance for this level is often different from the
screen appearance. The typeset appearance often uses paren-
theses around the level indicator. References
b) Another numbered list item under a list item.
Brown, J. S. and R. R. Burton. Diagnostic Models for Procedural Bugs in Basic
i) Third level numbered list item under a list item. Mathematical Skills. Cognitive Science, 2(2):155—192, 1978.
swp0004.tex; 9/07/2003; 15:53; p.3 swp0004.tex; 9/07/2003; 15:53; p.4
A Sample Document 5
Buchanan, B. G. and E. H. Shortliffe. Rule-Based Expert Systems: The MYCIN
Experiments of the Stanford Heuristic Programming Project. Addison-Wesley
Publishing Company, 1984.
Bunt, H. C. Modular Incremental Modelling of Belief and Intention. In Proceedings
of the Second Int ernational W orkshop on User Modeling, 1990.
Cahour, B. Competence Modelling in Consultation Dialogs. In L. Berlinguet
and D. Berthelette, editors, Proceedings of the Int ernational Congress, Work
With Dispay Units’ 89, Montreal, Canada, September 1990. North Holland,
Amsterdam.
Cahour, B. La Modélisation de l’Interlocuteur: Elaboration du Modèle et Effets au
Cours de Dialogues de Consultation. PhD thesis, Université Paris 8, France,
1991. Cognitive psychology PhD.
Carberry, S. M. Modeling the User’s Plans and Goals. Computational Linguistics,
14(3):23—37, September 1988.
Carbonell, J. R . AI in CAI: An Artificial Intelligence Approach to Computer-Aided
Instruction. IEEE Transactions on Man-Machine Systems, 11:190—202, 1970.
Carr, B. and I. Goldstein. Overlays: A Theory of Modelling for Computed Aided
Instruction. AI Memo 406, 1977.
Cawsey, A. Planning Interactive Explanations. International Journal of Man-
Machine Studies, in press.
Chandrasekaran, B. and William Swartout. Explanations in Knowledge Systems:
The Role of Explicit Representation of Design Knowledge. IEEE Expert, 6(3):47—
50, June 1991.
Chapp el, H. and B. Cahour. User Modeling for M ulti-Modal Co-Operative Dialogue
with KBS. Deliverable D3, Esprit Project P2474, 1991.
Chin, D. N. Intelligent Agents as a Basis for Natural Language Interfaces. PhD
thesis, University of California at Berkeley, 1987.
Chin, D. N. KNOM E: M odeling What the User Knows in UC. In Alfred Kobsa
and Wolfgang Wahlster, editors, User Models in Dialog Systems. Springer-Verlag,
Symb olic Computation Series, Berlin Heidelberg New York Tokyo, 1989.
Cohen, R. and M. Jones. Incorporating User Models into Expert Systems for Educa-
tional Diagnosis. In Alfred Kobsa and Wolfgang Wahlster, editors, User Models
in Dialog Systems, pages 35 — 51. Springer-Verlag, Symbolic Computation Series,
Berlin Heidelberg New York Tokyo, 1989.
Falzon, P. Les Dialogues de Diagnostic: L’évaluation des Connaissances de
l’Interlocuteur. Technical Report 747, INRIA, Rocquencourt, France, 1987.
Finin, T. W., A. K. Joshi, and B. L. Webber. Natural Language Interactions with
Artificial Experts. Proceedings of the IEEE, 74(7), July 1986.
swp0004.tex; 9/07/2003; 15:53; p.5

Linear Algebra and its Applications

Document class options Offset for two-sided printing
Packages:
laa None
The front matter contains fields for the author’s affiliation and for the name of the submitting editor.
The Title of an Article spacing above and below a display depends on whether the lines above or
below are short or long, as shown in the following examples.
Dr. Author Jones A short line above:
At this Address x2 + y 2 = z 2
Submitted by submitting editor’s name
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing
ABSTRACT for mathematical displays, regardless of the margins.
not explain the spurious appearance of the formula (∇ × F) · k = z + 1 in this R¯
ln tdt
abstract.
section heads may cause difficulties in typesetting styles with running head-
ers or table of contents entries.
1.3. Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environments
This short sample document illustrates the typeset appearance of in- A number of theorem-like environments is available. The following
line and displayed mathematics in documents. It also illustrates five levels lemma is a well-known fact on differentiation of asymptotic expansions
of section headings and three kinds of lists. Finally, the document includes of analytic functions.
Lemma 1.1. Let f (z ) be an analytic function in C+ . If f (z ) admits
1.1. In-line and Displayed Mathematics the representation µ ¶
P∞ a1 1
The expression i =1 ai is in-line mathematics, while the numbered
f (z ) = a0 + +o ,
z z
equation
X∞
for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ " = { z ∈ C+ : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then
ai (1.1)
i =1 a1 = − lim z 2 f 0 (z ) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" . (1.2)
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset of H , Proof. Change z for 1=z . Then Γ " → Γ" = {z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ" } and
T a nonexpansive self map of C . Suppose that as n → ∞, an;k → 0 for
P∞ + f (1=z ) = a 0 + a 1 z + o (z ) . (1.3)
each k ,Pand ° n = k =0 (a n;k +1 − a n;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C ,
k
An x = ∞ k =0 a n;k T x converges weakly to a fixed point of T [1]. Fix z ∈ Γ" , and let C r (z ) = {¸ ∈ C − : |¸ − z | = r } be a circle with radius
Two sets of LaTeX parameters govern mathematical displays.∗ The r = |z| sin "= 2. It follows from (1.3) that
∗
LaTeX automatically selects the spacing depending on the surrounding line lengths. Z Z
1
X m
1 f (¸ ) d¸ 1 (¸ − z0 ) d¸
LINEAR ALGEBRA AND ITS APPLICATIONS 203—204:1—66 (1994) 1 = am + R (z ), (1.4)
2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z )
2
m =0
2 ¼i CH (z)
2
(¸ − z )
°c Elsevier Science Inc., 1994
655 Avenue of the Americas, New York, NY 10010 0024-3795/94/$6.00
Linear Algebra and its Applications 75
3 4
where for the remainder R (z ) we have (b) Another numbered list item under a list item.
|R(z )| ≤ r−1
max o (|z |) = r −1
max |¸ | · O (|z| + r ) i. Third level numbered list item under a list item.
¸∈C H( z) ¸∈C H( z)
|z | + r 1 + sin "
= · O (|z | + r ) = · O (|z |) .
r sin " • Bullet item 1.
Therefore R(z ) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2 , and hence by the Cauchy theorem • Bullet item 2.
(1.4) implies
d
f (1 =z ) = a1 + R(z ) → a 1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 , ∗ Third level bullet item.
dz
that implies (1.2) by substituting 1 =z back for z . · Fourth and final level bullet item.
2. Section Headings item. Double-click the lead-in box to enter or customize the text of
the lead-in.
Use the Section tag for major sections, such as the one just above. Four Bunyip Mythical beast of Australian Aboriginal legends.
additional heading levels are available, as described below.

Following the text of this article is a short manual bibliography. This
2.1.1. Subsubsection Heading This text appears under a subsubsec-
sample bibliography has no relationship to the previous text, but it shows
tion heading.
sample citations such as [4], [5] and [6]. You can also have multiple citations
Subsubsubsection Heading This text appears under a subsubsubsec- appear together. Here is an example: [2, 3, 4].
tion heading.
Subsubsubsubsection Heading
REFERENCES
This text appears under a subsubsubsubsection heading.
1 N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2, John Wiley and Sons,
3. Lists New York, 1963.
2 Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behavior in fluid
Bullet, numbered and description list environments are available. Lists, 41, 3537-3550
which can extend four levels deep, look like this: 3 Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical condi-
1. Numbered list item 1. 4 Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular Theory of Gases
2. Numbered list item 2. and Liquids, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., 1964
5 Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E., Molecular thermodynam-
(a) A numbered list item under a list item. ics for fluid-phase equilibrium, Prentice -Hall, Inc., 1986
The typeset appearance for this level is often different from the 6 Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Properties of Gases and
screen appearance. The typeset appearance often uses paren- Liquids, 4th Edition, McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1987
theses around the level indicator.
A. An Appendix
Because appendices may contain material that is supplementary rather

than integral to the main text , many styles use a different numbering
system for equations that appear in the appendices.
√
− b ± b2 − 4ac
(A.1)
2a
The quadratic equation shown as equation A.1 is used to demonstrate how
Mathematical Reviews Template

Packages:
review None
amsmath Standard
graphicx Standard
The shell is intended for electronic submission of reviews to the Mathematical Reviews. The front matter is
empty, replaced by fields in the template. The fields provide space to submit the reviewer’s name and address, the
author’s name and a short title for the article, several numbers required by the Mathematical Reviews, the text of the
review, and remarks.
This is a review text file submitted electronically to MR. heads may cause difficulties in typesetting styles with running headers or table
Reviewer: A. A. Smith of contents entries.
Reviewer number: 021338 The shell feature five levels of headings: section through subsubsubsubsec-
tion. Tags figure prominently in the use of the shell. You can apply the log-
Address:
Math Dept. ical markup tag Emphasized. You can apply the visual markup tags Bold,
University of Michigan Italics, Roman, Sans Serif, Slanted, Small Caps, and Typewriter. You can
Ann Arbor, MI 48109 apply the special, mathematics only, tags fraktur; BLACKBOARD BOLD, and
smith@umich.edu CALLIGRAPHIC. Note that blackboard bold and calligraphic are correct
Author: Jones, J. J., Brown, B. B. only when applied to uppercase letters A through Z. You can apply the size
Short title: Group theory LARGE
tags tiny, scr iptsize, footnotesize, small, normalsize, large, Large, ,
Control number: 1 717 347 huge and Huge.
Primary classification: 20-01 This is a Body Math paragraph. Each time you press the Enter key, Scientific
Secondary classification(s): 20B30 20C30 20C32 WorkPlace switches to mathematics mode. This is convenient for carrying out
Review text: “scratchpad” computations.
Following is a group of paragraphs marked as Body Quote. This environment
is appropriate for a short quotation or a sequence of short quotations.
The article discusses in-line and displayed mathematics in Scientific WorkPlace
P∞
and Scientific Word. The expression i =1 a i is in-line mathematics, while the The buck stops here. Harry Truman
numbered equation
X∞ Ask not what your country can do for you; ask what you can do for
ai (1) your country. John F Kennedy
i =1
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset of H , T a It’s no exaggeration to say the undecideds could go one way or an-
nonexpansive self map of C . Suppose that as n → ∞, a n;k → 0 for each k , and other. George Bush
P P∞ k
°n = ∞ k =0 (a n;k +1 − a n;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C , An x =
+
k =0 a n;k T x
List Environments
converges weakly to a fixed point of T .
You can create numbered, bulleted, and description lists using the tag popup
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays. The spacing
at the bottom left of the screen.
short or long, as shown in the following examples. 1. List item 1
A short line above:
x2 + y 2 = z 2 2. List item 2
and a short line below. (a) A list item under a list item.
A long line above may depend on your margins The typeset style for this level is different than the screen style. The
screen shows a lower case alphabetic character followed by a period
while the typeset style uses a lower case alphabetic character sur-
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for rounded by parentheses.
mathematical displays, regardless of the margins. (b) Just another list item under a list item.
i. Third level list item under a list item.
1 2
Mathematical Reviews Template 77
A. Fourth and final level of list items allowed.
• Bullet item 1
• Bullet item 2

· Fourth (and final) level bullet item.
3
Mathematics Magazine Article

Packages:
amsmath Standard
The front matter of the shell is empty. Instead of using fields in the front matter, the shell creates title information
at the beginning of the body of the document. The information is right justified, with spacing provided by commands
in TEX fields.
Author 2
The Title of an Article A long line above may depend on your margins
Dr. Author Jones1 mathematical displays, regardless of the margins.
At this Address
City, State 12345-6789 R¯
ln J@J
1 Sample Mathematics and Text may cause difficulties in typesetting styles with running headers or table of contents
entries.
This short sample document illustrates the typeset appearance of in-line and dis-
played mathematics in documents. It also illustrates five levels of section headings 1.3 Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environments
and three kinds of lists. Finally, the document includes entries for a manual bibli-
ography and an appendix. A number of theorem-like environments is available. The following lemma is a well-

Lemma 1 Let f (z) be an analytic function in C+ . If f (z) admits the representa-
P∞ tion µ ¶
The expression i=1 ai is in-line mathematics, while the numbered equation a1 1
f (z) = a0 + +o ,
∞
X z z
ai (1) for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ " = {z ∈ C+ : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then
i=1
is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 1. a1 = − lim z2f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" . (2)

P P∞ k
°n = ∞ +
k=0 (an;k+1 − an;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C, Anx = k=0 an;kT x f (1=z) = a0 + a1z + o (z) . (3)
Fix z ∈ Γ" , and let Cr (z) = {¸ ∈ C− : |¸ − z | = r} be a circle with radius
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays.2 The spacing above r = |z | sin "=2. It follows from (3) that
and below a display depends on whether the lines above or below are short or long, Z Z
(¸ − z0 )m d¸
1
1 f (¸) d¸ X 1
as shown in the following examples. = am + R(z), (4)
2¼i CH (z ) (¸ − z)2 m=0 2¼i CH (z ) (¸ − z)2
A short line above:
x2 + y2 = z2
and a short line below. |R(z)| ≤ r−1 max o (|z|) = r−1 max |¸| · O (|z| + r)
¸ ∈CH (z ) ¸∈CH (z )
|z | + r
1
Supported by the National Science Foundation. 1 + sin"
2A
LT EX automatically selects the spacing depending on the surrounding line lengths. = · O (|z| + r) = · O (|z|) .
r sin "
Mathematics Magazine Article 79
Author 3 Author 4
Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 , and hence by the Cauchy theorem (4) (a) A numbered list item under a list item.
implies The typeset appearance for this level is often different from the screen
d level indicator.
f (1=z) = a1 + R(z) → a1, as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2,
dz
2 Section Headings
• Bullet item 1.
heading levels are available, as described below. • Bullet item 2.

2.1 Subsection Heading ∗ Third level bullet item.
2.1.1 Subsubsection Heading Double-click the lead-in box to enter or customize the text of the lead-in.
This text appears under a subsubsection heading. Bunyip Mythical beast of Australian Aboriginal legends.
Subsubsubsection Heading This text appears under a subsubsubsection head- 4 About the Bibliography
ing.
Subsubsubsubsection Heading This text appears under a subsubsubsub- ography has no relationship to the previous text, but it shows sample citations such
section heading. as [4], [5] and [6]. You can also have multiple citations appear together. Here is an
example: [2, 3, 4].
3 Lists
References
extend four levels deep, look like this: [1] N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2, John Wiley and Sons,
New York, 1963.
1. Numbered list item 1. [2] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behavior in fluid hydrogen
Author 5

A An Appendix
−b ± b2 − 4ac
(5)
2a
Modified Article for Short Texts
Document class base file: csart.cls

Packages:
csart None
The shell doesn’t include a tag for an appendix.

The Title of an Article fact on differentiation of asymptotic expansions of analytic functions.
Lemma 1Let f (z ) be an analytic function in C+. If f (z ) admits the representation

Dr. Author Jones µ ¶
At this Address a1 1
f (z) = a 0 + +o ,
z z
The Date for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ" = {z ∈ C+ : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − " } then
a 1 = − lim z 2 f 0 (z ) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ " . (2)

Abstract
This article illustrates many features of a mathematics article, but we do not explain the Proof. Change z for 1=z . Then Γ" → Γ" = {z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ" } and
spurious appearance of the formula (∇ × F ) · k = z + 1 in this abstract.
f (1=z ) = a 0 + a 1 z + o ( z) . (3)
1 Sample Mathematics and Text Fix z ∈ Γ" , and let C r (z ) = { ¸ ∈ C− : |¸ − z | = r} be a circle with radius r = |z | sin "=2.
Z Z
(¸ − z 0 )m d¸
1
X
mathematics in documents. It also illustrates five levels of section headings and three 1 f (¸ ) d¸ 1
= am + R (z ), (4)
kinds of lists. Finally, the document includes entries for a manual bibliography and an 2¼i C H(z ) (¸ − z)
2 2¼i CH (z ) ( ¸ − z)
2
m=0
appendix.
where for the remainder R (z ) we have
P∞ |R (z )| ≤ r−1 max o (|z |) = r−1 max |¸| · O (|z | + r )
The expression i =1 ai is in-line mathematics, while the numbered equation ¸∈C H (z ) ¸∈CH (z )
∞
X |z | + r 1 + sin "
= · O (|z | + r ) = · O (|z|) .
ai (1) r sin "
i =1
Therefore R (z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2 , and hence by the Cauchy theorem (4) implies
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset of H , T a non- d
f (1 =z ) = a1 + R( z) → a 1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2 ,
expansive self map of C . Suppose that as n → ∞, a n;k → P
P 0 for each k , and ° n = dz
∞ + ∞ k
k =0 ( a n;k +1 − a n;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C , An x = k =0 a n;k T x converges that implies (2) by substituting 1=z back for z.
weakly to a fixed point of T [1].
A 1
Two sets of L TEX parameters govern mathematical displays. The spacing above and
below a display depends on whether the lines above or below are short or long, as shown 2 Section Headings
in the f ollowing examples.
A short line above:
x2 + y 2 = z 2
and a short line below. 2.1 Subsection Heading
displays, regardless of the margins. This text appears under a subsubsection heading.
R¯
1.2 Mathematics in section heads ® ln J@J 2.1.1.1 Subsubsubsection Heading This text appears under a subsubsubsection
heading.
cause difficulties in typesetting styles with running headers or table of contents entries. 2.1.1.1.1 Subsubsubsubsection Heading This text appears under a subsub-
1L
AT
EX automatically selects the spacing depending on the surrounding line lengths. subsubsection heading.
1 2
Modified Article for Short Texts 81
3 Lists
Bullet, numbered and description list environments are available. Lists, which can extend
1.Numbered list item 1.
2.Numbered list item 2.
(a)A numbered list item under a list item.

The typeset appearance for this level is often different from the screen appearance. The
typeset appearance often uses parentheses around the level indicator.
(b)Another numbered list item under a list item.
i.Third level numbered list item under a list item.
A.Fourth and final level of numbered list items allowed.
•Bullet item 1.
•Bullet item 2.
—Second level bullet item.

∗Third level bullet item.
·Fourth and final level bullet item.
Description ListEach description list item has a lead-in followed by the item. Double-
BunyipMythical beast of Australian Aboriginal legends.

has no relationship to the previous text, but it shows sample citations such as [4], [5] and
[6]. You can also have multiple citations appear together. Here is an example: [2, 3, 4].
References
[1]N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2, John Wiley and Sons, New
York, 1963.
[2]Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behavior in fluid hydrogen at
[3]Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical conditions”, Int. J.
[4]Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular Theory of Gases and
[5]Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E., Molecular thermodynamics for
[6]Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Properties of Gases and Liquids,
3
Monthly Notices of the Royal Astronomical Society
Document class base file: mn.cls

Packages:
mn None
sw20mnra None
This shell produces double-column output by default. The front matter includes fields for key words and for a
shortened form of the author’s name, used in headers.
Mon. N ot . R. Astron . S oc. 000, 000—000 ( 0000) Print ed 22 Ju ly 2004 (MN LATEX style fi le v1.4) 2 A. Jones (for running header)
3.1 Tags
d
f (1= z) = a1 + R(z) → a 1, as z → ∞ , z ∈ Γ "=2, You can ap pl y the logical markup tag E mpha sized .
The Title of an A rticle dz
You can apply the vi sual markup tags Bold, Ita lics,
that impl ies (2) by substituting 1=z back for z.
Roman , San s Serif, Slanted, Small C aps, a nd T ypew rit er.
You can apply the special, mathema tics only, tags
Dr. Au thor Jones BLAC KBO ARD BOLD , CALLI G R AP H IC, and fraktur.
At this Address 2 SE CTIO N HE ADIN GS Note th at black board bold and calligrap hic are co rrect only
when applied to u ppercase letters A thro ug h Z .
Use the Section tag for ma jo r sections, such as the one just
You can ap ply the size tag s tiny , s c rip tsiz e , footn otesize ,
above. Four additional h eading levels are available, as de-
A ccepted 1998 Decemb er 15. Received 1998 December 14; in original form 1998 Oc tober 11
scribed below. sm all , normal size, large , Large , LARG E , huge and
Huge .
A BSTR ACT This is a B ody M ath parag rap h. E ach time you press
T his ar ticle illu stra tes many feat ures of a mat hema tics article, b ut we do n ot explain 2.1 Subsection H eading the E nter key, Sci enti fic WorkP lace switches to mathem at-
t he s purious app eara nce of the formu la ( ∇ × F ) · k = z + 1 in this ab stra ct. This text ap pea rs un der a su bsec tion heading . ics mo de. This is conven ient for carryi ng out “scratchpad”
K ey word s: S tars, p lanets . com putatio ns.
Following is a group of paragraphs marked as B ody
2.1.1 Subsubsection Heading Quote. This enviro nm ent is approp riate for a short quo ta -
tion or a sequ ence of short quotatio ns.
R¯ This text ap pea rs un der a su bsubsection heading.
1 SAMPLE M ATHE MATI CS AND TEXT 1.2 Mathem atic s in sec tion heads ® ln tdt The bu ck s tops her e. Harry Tru man
As k not what your cou ntry can do for you ; ask wh at you can do
This short sample docum ent illustrates the typ eset appear- Mathem atics can appear in sectio n heads. Note that mathe- 2.1.1.1 Subsubsubse ction Heading This text ap-
for you r cou ntr y. John F Kennedy
ance of in-li ne and displayed mathema tics in docum ents. It matics in section h eads m ay cause diffi culties in typesetting pears under a subsubsub section heading. I am n ot a crook. Ric hard N ix on
also il lu stra tes fi ve levels of section hea dings and three kin ds styles with runn in g hea ders or ta ble o f contents entries. It’s n o exaggeration to s ay t he undecideds could go one way or
of lists. Finally, the documen t includes entries for a manua l Subsubsubsubsectio n Head ing Th is text appea rs under an ot her. George B ush
bibliograp hy and an appendix. a subsu bsubsubsection heading. The Q uo ta tion tag i s used fo r qu otations of mo re than
1.3 Theorems, Lemm ata, and O ther The orem -like one para graph. Foll owing is the b eginning of Alice’s Adven-
Environments tures in Wo nderland by Lewis Carrol l:
1.1 I n-line and Displayed M athematics
P∞ A number of theorem-like environmen ts is available. The 3 L ISTS Al ice was b eginnin g to get very tir ed of sittin g by her sis ter
The expressio n i=1 ai is in-l in e ma th ematics, wh ile the followi ng lemma is a well-known fact on diff erentiatio n of on the bank, and of having nothin g to do: once or twice sh e h ad
numb ered equation B ullet, numbered and description list environments are peep ed int o th e b ook h er sister was readin g, bu t it had no pictu res
asym ptotic expansions of analytic functions.
X
∞ avail able. Lists, which can extend four levels deep, lo ok like or convers at ion s in it, ’and what is the us e of a b ook,’ th ou ght
ai (1) Le mma 1. L et f (z) b e an analytic functi on i n C + . If f (z) this: Ali ce ’without pictu res or conversation? ’
i=1
admits the representation S o she was considerin g in h er own min d (as well as sh e could ,
is displ ayed and automatically numbered as equa tion 1. µ ¶ (i) Numb ered list item 1. for th e hot day m ad e her feel ver y sleepy and stup id), wh ether
a1 1 the pleasure of making a daisy-chain wou ld be worth t he troubl e
L et H be a Hi lb ert space, C be a closed bound ed f (z ) = a0 + +o , (ii) Nu mbered list item 2.
z z of getting up and p icking the daisies , wh en sudd enly a Whit e
convex subset of H , T a nonexpansive self map of C . Rabbit with p ink eyes ran close by h er.
for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ" = ((a)) A n umb ered list item under a li st item.
Supp ose tha t as n → ∞, an; k → 0 for each k, and Th ere was noth ing so very re markable in th at; nor di d Alice
P∞ {z ∈ C + : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then The typ eset a pp earance for this level is often diff er-
°n = 0 (a n;k+ 1 − a n;k )
+
→ 0. Then for each x i n C , think it so ver y much out of the way to h ear t he Rabb it say to
Pk=
∞ k ent from the screen appeara nce. The typ eset app earance
An x = k =0 an;k T x converges weakly to a fixed p oint of
2 0
a 1 = − l im z f (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" . (2) its elf, ’Oh dear! Oh dear! I sh all b e late!’ (when she thought it over
often uses parentheses around the level i nd icator. afterwar ds, it occur red to h er that sh e ought to have won dered
T (1).
Proo f. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ" → Γ" = ((b)) Another numb ered list item u nder a list item. at this, but at t he tim e it all seeme d quite natu ral); bu t when
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern m athematical d is- the Rabb it actually took a watch out of its waist coat-p ocket,
? {z ∈ C − : z ∈ Γ" } and (1) Third level numbered list item under a list item.
plays. The spa cin g above an d below a disp lay dep end s on an d looked at it, and th en hu rried on, A lice s tart ed t o her feet,
whether the li nes a bove or below are short or lo ng , a s shown f (1=z) = a 0 + a 1 z + o (z ) . (3) for it flashed acr os s her m ind that she had never bef or e seen a
(A) Fourth and fin al level of numbered list i tems rabbit wit h eith er a waistcoat-pocket, or a wat ch to take out of it,
in the fo llowin g exa mp les.
Fix z ∈ Γ" , and let C r (z ) = {¸ ∈ C − : |¸ − z| = r} be a allowed . an d b urning with cur ios ity, s he r an ac ross the field af ter it, and
A short line above:
circle with radius r = | z| si n "=2. It follows from (3 ) that fort unately was just in t ime to see it pop down a large rabbit -hol e
x 2 + y 2 = z2 Z Z • Bullet item 1 . und er the h edge.
1 f (¸) d ¸ X1
1
m
(¸ − z 0) d ¸ • Bullet item 2 .
= am + R(z), In another m om ent dow n went Alice after it , n ever once con-
and a short line below. 2 ¼i C H (z ) (¸ − z) 2 2¼ i C H (z) 2
m= 0 (¸ − z) sid erin g how in the world s he was to get out again.
A l on g line ab ove may depend on y our m argin s (4) — Seco nd l evel bullet i tem.
si n2 µ + cos 2 µ = 1 where for the remainder R (z) we have · Thi rd level bullet i tem.
as will a lon g line below. This line is long eno ug h to illu s- 4 A BOUT THE B IBL IO GRAP H Y
|R (z )| ≤ r − 1 m ax o (|z|) = r −1 m ax |¸| · O (|z | + r) * Fo urth and fi nal level bu ll et item.
¸ ∈ C H (z ) ¸ ∈C H (z)
trate the spacing for m athematical displays, regardless of Followi ng the text of this articl e is a short manua l bibli-
the m argins. |z| + r 1 + sin " D escription List Each description list item has a lead-in
= · O (|z| + r) = · O (|z|) . ography. This sample bibliography has no relationship to
r sin " followed by th e item. D ouble-click the lea d- in b ox to enter the p revi ou s text, but it shows sampl e cita tions such as (4),
? LAT X automatically s elects t he spacing dep endin g on the s ur- Therefore R(z) → 0 a s z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2 , and hence by the or customize the tex t of the lead-in. (5) a nd (6). Yo u can also have multi ple citation s appear
E
r oun ding line len gt hs. Cauchy theorem (4) impli es B unyip Mythica l b east of Australian Abo ri ginal legends. together. Here is an exam ple: (2; 3; 4).
c 0000 RAS
° c 0000 RA S, MN RA S 000, 000—000
°
Monthly Notices of the Royal Astronomical Society 83
The Title of an A rticle 3

R EFER ENCE S
N . Dunford and J. S chwartz, Functi onal An alysis, v. 2, John W i-
ley and S on s, New York, 1963.
H ar stad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fl uid oxygen dr op behavior
in flu id hydr ogen at rocket chamber pr essures”, Int. J. H eat
Mass Transfer, 1998a, 41, 3537-3550
H ar stad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis nu mber under sup ercr it-
ical conditions ”, In t. J. Heat Mass Tran sfer, in pri nt
H irshfeld er, J. O., Cu rt is, C. F. and Bird , R . B., Molecu lar Theory
of Gases and L iqui ds, John W iley an d Sons, In c., 1964
Praus nitz, J., Lichtenth aler, R. and de Azeved o, E., M olecu lar
ther modyn am ics for fluid -p hase equilibriu m, Prent ice -H all,
Inc., 1986
Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M . an d Pollin g, B. E., The Prop erties of
Gas es an d Liquid s, 4th Edit ion, McGraw-Hill Book Company,
1987
APPEND I X A: AN APPENDI X
B ecause appendices may contain m aterial tha t is supple-
mentary rather than integ ra l to the m ain tex t , m any styles
use a different n umb ering system for equations tha t a pp ear
in the appendices.
√
−b ± b 2 − 4ac
(A1)
2a
The qua dratic equation shown as equatio n A1 is used to
dem onstrate how equations are numbered in the app en di x.
c 0000 RAS , M NRAS 000, 000—000

°
REVTeX 4
Document class base file: revtex4.cls

Document class options aps, preprint
Packages:
REVTeX None
The front matter includes fields for preprint information, a short title, key words, the PACS number, the volume
and issue numbers, EID, received date, revised date, accepted date, published date, and starting and ending pages.
The shell represents a beta version of REVTEX4. Note that this version contains errors that appear when the sample
document is compiled.
HEP/123-qed
The Title of an Article Contents
Dr. Author Jones Sample Mathematics and Text 102

At this Address A. In-line and Displayed Mathematics 102
R¯
(Date textdate; Received textdate; Revised textdate; Accepted textdate; Published textdate) B. Mathematics in section heads ® ln tdt 103
Abstract C. Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environments 103
This article illustrates many features of a mathematics article, but we do not explain the spurious I. Section Headings 104
appearance of the formula (∇ × F) · k = z + 1 in this abstract. A. Subsection Heading 104
1. Subsubsection Heading 104
II. Lists 105
III. About the Bibliography 105
References 106
A. An Appendix 106
Sample Mathematics and Text
mathematics in documents. It also illustrates five levels of section headings and three kinds
of lists. Finally, the document includes entries for a manual bibliography and an appendix.
P∞
∞
X
ai (1)
i=1

P∞ +
map of C. Suppose that as n → ∞, a n;k → 0 for each k, and ° n = k=0 (an;k+1 − an;k) →
P∞
0. Then for each x in C, Anx = k=0 an;k T kx converges weakly to a fixed point of T [1].
101 102
REVTeX 4 85
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays.[7] The spacing above and Fix z ∈ Γ", and let Cr (z) = {¸ ∈ C− : |¸ − z| = r} be a circle with radius r = |z| sin "=2. It
below a display depends on whether the lines above or below are short or long, as shown in follows from (3) that
the following examples. Z X 1 Z m
1 f (¸) d¸ 1 (¸ − z 0) d¸
A short line above: = am + R(z), (4)
2¼i CH (z ) (¸ − z)2 m=0 2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z)2
x +y =z
2 2 2

A long line above may depend on your margins |R(z)| ≤ r−1 max o (|z|) = r −1 max |¸| · O (|z| + r)
¸ ∈CH (z ) ¸ ∈C H (z )
|z| + r 1 + sin "

sin2 µ + cos2 µ = 1 = · O (|z| + r) = · O (|z|) .
r sin "
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for mathematical Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2, and hence by the Cauchy theorem (4) implies

d
f (1=z) = a 1 + R(z) → a1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2,
dz
R¯
B. Mathematics in section heads ® ln tdt that implies (2) by substituting 1=z back for z.
I. SECTION HEADINGS
C. Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environments heading levels are available, as described below.

A. Subsection Heading
Lemma 1 Let f (z) be an analytic function in C +. If f (z) admits the representation
µ ¶
a1 1
f (z) = a0 + +o , 1. Subsubsection Heading
z z
for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ " = {z ∈ C + : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then This text appears under a subsubsection heading.
a. Subsubsubsection Heading This text appears under a subsubsubsection heading.
a 1 = − lim z 2 f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ ". (2)
Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ" → Γ" = {z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ" } and Subsubsubsubsection Heading This text appears under a subsubsubsubsection
heading.
f (1=z) = a0 + a1z + o (z) . (3)
103 104
[6]. You can also have multiple citations appear together. Here is an example: [2—4].
[1] N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2, John Wiley and Sons, New York, 1963.
[2] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behavior in fluid hydrogen at rocket
[6] Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Properties of Gases and Liquids, 4th
[7] LATEX automatically selects the spacing depending on the surrounding line lengths.
APPENDIX A: AN APPENDIX
Because appendices may contain material that is supplementary rather than integral to
the main text , many styles use a different numbering system for equations that appear in
the appendices. √
−b ± b2 − 4ac
(A1)
2a
The quadratic equation shown as equation A1 is used to demonstrate how equations are
106
Science Magazine

Document class options 12 pt
Packages:
scicite None
times None
This shell document provides a sample layout of a Science Magazine article.

P ∞ +
map of C. Suppose that as n → ∞, a n;k → 0 for each k, and ° n = k=0 (an;k +1 − an;k ) → 0.
P∞
The Title of an Article Then for each x in C , An x = k =0 a n;kT k x converges weakly to a fixed point of T .
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays.1 The spacing above and be-
Dr. Author Jones,1∗ Jane Doe,1 Joe Scientist 2
low a display depends on whether the lines above or below are short or long, as shown in the
1
Department of Chemistry, University of Wherever, following examples.
An Unknown Address, Wherever, ST 00000, USA A short line above:
2
Another Unknown Address, Palookaville, ST 99999, USA
x2 + y2 = z 2
∗To whom correspondence should be addressed; E-mail: ajones@wherever.edu. and a short line below.
explain the spurious appearance of the formula (∇ × F ) · k = z + 1 in this
abstract. as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for mathematical

Mathematics in section heads ®
ln J@J
This short sample document illustrates the typeset appearance of in-line and displayed mathe-
Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note that mathematics in section heads may cause
matics in documents. It also illustrates five levels of section headings and three kinds of lists.
difficulties in typesetting styles with running headers or table of contents entries.
Finally, the document includes entries for a manual bibliography and an appendix.
P∞ A number of theorem-like environments is available. The following lemma is a well-known
fact on differentiation of asymptotic expansions of analytic functions.
∞
X
ai (1)
i=1
µ ¶
is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 1. a1 1
f (z) = a 0 + + o ,
z z
1 A
LTEX automatically selects the spacing depending on the surrounding line lengths.
1 2
Science Magazine 87
for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ" = {z ∈ C+ : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then Subsubsection Heading
a1 = − lim z2f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" . (2) This text appears under a subsubsection heading.
Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ " → Γ " = {z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ"} and Subsubsubsection Heading This text appears under a subsubsubsection heading.
f (1=z) = a0 + a1z + o (z) . (3)

Subsubsubsubsection Heading This text appears under a subsubsubsubsection heading.
Fix z ∈ Γ" , and let Cr (z) = {¸ ∈ C− : |¸ − z| = r} be a circle with radius r = |z| sin "=2. It
Lists
Z 1
X Z m
1 f (¸) d¸ 1 (¸ − z0) d¸ Bullet, numbered and description list environments are available. Lists, which can extend four
2 = am 2 + R(z), (4)
2¼i CH (z ) (¸ − z) m=0
2¼i CH (z ) (¸ − z)
levels deep, look like this:
¸∈CH (z) ¸∈CH (z )
|z| + r 1 + sin "
= · O (|z| + r) = · O (|z|) .
r sin "
Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2, and hence by the Cauchy theorem (4) implies
The typeset appearance for this level is often different from the screen appearance.
d The typeset appearance often uses parentheses around the level indicator.
f (1=z) = a1 + R(z) → a1, as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 ,
dz
Section Headings A. Fourth and final level of numbered list items allowed.
Use the Section tag for major sections, such as the one just above. Four additional heading • Bullet item 1.
• Bullet item 2.
Subsection Heading
– Second level bullet item.
3 4
∗ Third level bullet item. 5. We’ve included in the template file scifile.tex a new environment, {scilastnote},
· Fourth and final level bullet item. that generates a numbered final citation without a corresponding signal in the text. This en-
vironment can be used to generate a final numbered reference containing acknowledgments,

Description List Each description list item has a lead-in followed by the item. Double-click
sources of funding, and the like, per Science style. Along those lines, we’d like to thank
the lead-in box to enter or customize the text of the lead-in.
readers of this document for their attention, and invite them to address any questions to
Bunyip Mythical beast of Australian Aboriginal legends. Stewart Wills, at swills@aaas.org.
References and Notes
1. The package is TTH, available at http://hutchinson.belmont.ma.us/tth/ .
2. As the mark-up of the TEX source for this document makes clear, your ? le should be coded
in LATEX2", not LATEX 2.09 or an earlier release. Also, please use the article document
class.
3. Among whom are the author of this document. The “real” references and notes contained
herein were compiled using BIBTEX from the sample .bib ? le scibib.bib, the style pack-
age scicite.sty, and the bibliography style ?le Science.bst.
4. One of the equation editors we use, Equation Magic (MicroPress Inc., Forest Hills, NY;
http://www.micropress-inc.com/), interprets native TEX source code and generates an equa-
tion as an OLE picture object that can then be cut and pasted directly into Word. This editor,
however, does not handle LATEX environments (such as {array} or {eqnarray}); it can
interpret only TEX codes. Thus, when there’s a choice, we ask that you avoid these LATEX calls
in displayed math — for example, that you use the TEX \matrix command for ordinary
matrices, rather than the LATEX {array} environment.
5 6
SIAM Journal
Document class base file: siamltex.cls

Packages:
sw20siam None
The front matter contains fields for key words and for the AMS subject class designation.
Lemma 1.1. Let f (z) be an analytic function in C + . If f (z) admits the repre-
THE TITLE OF AN ARTICLE sentation
µ ¶
DR. AUTHOR JONES a1 1
AT THIS ADDRESS f (z) = a 0 + +o ,
z z
Abstract. This article illustrates many features of a mathematics article, but we do not explain for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ " = {z ∈ C+ : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then
the spurious appearance of the formula (∇ × F ) · k = z + 1 in this abstract.
a 1 = − lim z 2 f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" . (1.2)
Key words. sample document
AMS subject classification. 1234.56 Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ " → Γ" = {z ∈ C − : z ∈ Γ" } and
1. Sample Mathematics and Text. This short sample document illustrates f (1=z) = a 0 + a 1 z + o (z) . (1.3)
the typeset appearance of in-line and displayed mathematics in documents. It also
illustrates five levels of section headings and three kinds of lists. Finally, the document Fix z ∈ Γ", and let Cr (z) = {¸ ∈ C− : |¸ − z| = r} be a circle with radius r =
includes entries for a manual bibliography and an appendix. |z| sin "=2. It follows from (1.3) that
P Z Z
(¸ − z0 )m d¸
1
X
1.1. In-line and Displayed Mathematics. The expression i∞=1 a i is in-line 1 f (¸) d¸ 1
= am + R(z), (1.4)
mathematics, while the numbered equation 2¼i C H( z) (¸ − z)
2
2¼i C H(z ) (¸ − z)
2
m= 0
∞
X where for the remainder R (z) we have
ai (1.1)
i=1 |R (z)| ≤ r −1 max o (|z|) = r −1 max |¸| · O (|z| + r )
¸∈C H (z) ¸∈ CH (z)
is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 1.1. |z| + r 1 + sin "
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset of H , T a = · O (|z| + r) = · O (|z|) .
r sin "
nonexpansive self map of C . Suppose that as n → ∞, a n;k → 0 for each k , and
P∞ + P∞ k
°n = k= 0 (an;k+ 1 − an;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C , An x = k =0 a n;k T x Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 , and hence by the Cauchy theorem (1.4)
converges weakly to a fixed point of T [1]. implies
and below a display depends on whether the lines above or below are short or long, d
as shown in the following examples. f (1=z) = a 1 + R (z) → a1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 ,
dz
A short line above:
that implies (1.2) by substituting 1=z back for z.
x2 + y 2 = z2 2. Section Headings. Use the Section tag for ma jor sections, such as the one
just above. Four additional heading levels are available, as described below.
2.1.1. Subsubsection Heading. This text appears under a subsubsection head-
ing.
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for math- Subsubsubsection Heading. This text appears under a subsubsubsection heading.
ematical displays, regardless of the margins. Subsubsubsubsection Heading. This text appears under a subsubsubsubsection
R¯ heading.
1.2. Mathematics in section heads ® ln tdt. Mathematics can appear in
3. Lists. Bullet, numbered and description list environments are available. Lists,
section heads. Note that mathematics in section heads may cause difficulties in type-
1.3. Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environments. A 2. Numbered list item 2.
number of theorem-like environments is available. The following lemma is a well- (a) A numbered list item under a list item.
known fact on differentiation of asymptotic expansions of analytic functions. The typeset appearance for this level is often different from the screen
1L
AT
EX automatically selects the spacing depending on the surrounding line lengths. level indicator.
1 2
SIAM Journal 89

• Bullet item 1.
• Bullet item 2.
4. About the Bibliography. Following the text of this article is a short manual
bibliography. This sample bibliography has no relationship to the previous text, but
it shows sample citations such as [4], [5] and [6]. You can also have multiple citations
REFERENCES
Appendix A. An Appendix.
Because appendices may contain material that is supplementary rather than in-
tegral to the main text , many styles use a different numbering system for equations
√
−b ± b 2 − 4ac
(A.1)
2a
3
SIAM Proceedings in Applied Mathematics

Document class options Body text 11 pt, Final copy, Equation numbers on left
Packages:
proc2e None
The shell doesn’t use standard address fields in the front matter. Instead, the address, title, and affiliation appear
in footnotes placed at the end of each Author field.
SIAM Proceedings Series Macros 1

Chapter 1 of lists. Finally, the document includes entries for a manual bibliography and an appendix.
SIAM Proceedings Series Title of an Article ∗ 1.1 In-line and Displayed Mathematics
P∞
Dr. Author Jones†
∞
X
(1) ai
i=1
Abstract
This article illustrates many features of a mathematics article, but we do not explain Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset of H, T a
the spurious appearance of the formula (∇ × F ) · k = z + 1 in this abstract. nonexpansive self map of C. Suppose that as n → ∞, an;k → 0 for each k, and
P P∞ k
°n = ∞ k=0 (an;k+1 − an;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C, An x =
+
k=0 an;k T x converges
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays.1 The spacing above and
A short line above:
x2 + y 2 = z2
R¯

Lemma 1.1. Let f (z) be an analytic function in C+. If f (z) admits the representation
µ ¶
a1 1
f (z) = a0 + +o ,
z z
for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ" = {z ∈ C+ : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then
(2) a1 = − lim z 2f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" .
1 A
∗
Any information regarding grants should be placed here.
†
Composition Manager, Society for Industrial and Applied Mathematics, Anytown, USA.
1
SIAM Proceedings in Applied Mathematics 91
SIAM Proceedings Series Macros 2 SIAM Proceedings Series Macros 3
Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ" → Γ" = {z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ" } and i. Third level numbered list item under a list item.
(3) f (1=z) = a0 + a1 z + o (z) .
• Bullet item 1.
Fix z ∈ Γ" , and let Cr (z) = {¸ ∈ C− : |¸ − z| = r} be a circle with radius r = |z| sin "=2.
It follows from (3) that • Bullet item 2.
Z 1
X Z m
1 f (¸) d¸ 1 (¸ − z0) d¸ — Second level bullet item.
(4) = am + R(z),
2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z)2 m=0 2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z)2 ∗ Third level bullet item.
where for the remainder R(z) we have · Fourth and final level bullet item.
|R(z)| ≤ r −1
max o (|z|) = r −1
max |¸| · O (|z| + r) Description List Each description list item has a lead-in followed by the item. Double-
¸∈CH (z) ¸∈CH (z) click the lead-in box to enter or customize the text of the lead-in.
|z| + r 1 + sin "
= · O (|z| + r) = · O (|z|) . Bunyip Mythical beast of Australian Aboriginal legends.
r sin "
Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2, and hence by the Cauchy theorem (4) implies 4 About the Bibliography
d Following the text of this article is a short manual bibliography. This sample bibliography
f (1=z) = a1 + R(z) → a1, as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 , has no relationship to the previous text, but it shows sample citations such as [4], [5] and
dz
2 Section Headings References

levels are available, as described below. [1] N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2, John Wiley and Sons, New York, 1963.
2.1 Subsection Heading chamber pressures”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, 1998a, 41, 3537-3550
This text appears under a subsection heading. [3] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical conditions”, Int. J. Heat
2.1.1 Subsubsection Heading This text appears under a subsubsection heading. [4] Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular Theory of Gases and Liquids, John
Subsubsubsection Heading This text appears under a subsubsubsection heading. [5] Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E., Molecular thermodynamics for fluid-phase
Subsubsubsubsection Heading This text appears under a subsubsubsubsection Edition, McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1987
heading.
A An Appendix
3 Lists Because appendices may contain material that is supplementary rather than integral to the
Bullet, numbered and description list environments are available. Lists, which can extend main text , many styles use a different numbering system for equations that appear in the
four levels deep, look like this: appendices.
√
1. Numbered list item 1. −b ± b2 − 4ac
(5)
2. Numbered list item 2. 2a
(a) A numbered list item under a list item. numbered in the appendix.
The typeset appearance for this level is often different from the screen appear-
ance. The typeset appearance often uses parentheses around the level indicator.
SIAM-ACM Preprint

Document class options Offset for two-sided printing, Two-column output, Equation numbers on left
Packages:
ltexpprt None
The front matter of the shell uses text tags to format the title (Large) and abstract (small). The authors’ member-
ships appear in footnotes at the end of each Author field.
Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 , and hence by Bunyip Mythical beast of Australian Aboriginal leg-
the Cauchy theorem (1.4) implies ends.
SIAM/ACM Preprint Series Macros, The Title of an Article∗ 4 Tags
d
f (1=z) = a1 + R(z) → a 1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2 , You can apply the logical markup tag Emphasized.
dz
Dr. Author Jones† You can apply the visual markup tags Bold, Ital-
that implies (1.2) by substituting 1=z back for z. ics, Roman, Sans Serif, Slanted, Small Caps, and
Typewriter.
R¯ 2 Section Headings
Abstract 1.2 Mathematics in section heads ® ln tdtMath- You can apply the special, mathematics only,
ematics can appear in section heads. Note that math- Use the Section tag for ma jor sections, such as the one tags BLACKBOARD BOLD, CALLIGRAPHIC, and
This article illustrates many features of a mathematics
ematics in section heads may cause difficulties in type- just above. Four additional heading levels are available, fraktur. Note that blackboard bold and calligraphic
article, but we do not explain the spurious appearance of
setting styles with running headers or table of contents as described below. are correct only when applied to uppercase letters A
the formula (∇ × F ) · k = z + 1 in this abstract.
entries. through Z.
2.1 Subsection HeadingThis text appears under a You can apply the size tags tiny, scriptsize, footnote-
1.3 Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem- subsection heading. size, small , normalsize, large, Large, LARGE ,
pearance of in-line and displayed mathematics in docu-
ments. It also illustrates five levels of section headings
like EnvironmentsA number of theorem-like environ-
ments is available. The following lemma is a well-known 2.1.1 Subsubsection HeadingThis text appears
under a subsubsection heading.
huge and Huge.
fact on differentiation of asymptotic expansions of ana- This is a Body Math paragraph. Each time you
and three kinds of lists. Finally, the document includes Subsubsubsection HeadingThis text appears press the Enter key, Scientific WorkPlace switches to
lytic functions.
entries for a manual bibliography and an appendix. under a subsubsubsection heading. mathematics mode. This is convenient for carrying out
Lemma 1.1. Let f (z) be an analytic function in C + . If Subsubsubsubsection HeadingThis text ap- “scratchpad” computations.
P∞ and Displayed MathematicsThe ex-
1.1 In-line f (z) admits the representati on pears under a subsubsubsubsection heading. Following is a group of paragraphs marked as Body
pression i=1 a i is in-line mathematics, while the num- Quote. This environment is appropriate for a short
µ ¶
bered equation a1 1 3 Lists
f (z) = a 0 + +o , quotation or a sequence of short quotations.
∞
X z z Bullet, numbered and description list environments are
(1.1) ai available. Lists, which can extend four levels deep, look The buck stops here. Harry Truman
i=1 for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ" =
{z ∈ C + : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then like this: Ask not what your country can do for you;
is displayed and automatically numbered as equation ask what you can do for your country. John F
1.1. 1. Numbered list item 1.
(1.2) a 1 = − lim z 2 f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ " . Kennedy
2. Numbered list item 2. I am not a crook. Richard Ni xon
convex subset of H , T a nonexpansive self map of C . Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ " → Γ" =
Suppose that as n → ∞, a n;k → 0 for each k, and {z ∈ C − : z ∈ Γ" } and (a) A numbered list item under a list item. It’s no exaggeration to say the undecideds
P∞ + could go one way or another. George Bush
°n = (a n;k+1 − a n;k ) → 0. Then for each x in
k=0P The typeset appearance for this level is of-
C , An x =
∞ k (1.3) f (1=z) = a0 + a 1 z + o (z) .
k=0 a n;k T x converges weakly to a fixed ten different from the screen appearance. The The Quotation tag is used for quotations of more
point of T [1]. typeset appearance often uses parentheses
Fix z ∈ Γ" , and let C r (z) = {¸ ∈ C − : |¸ − z| = r} be than one paragraph. Following is the beginning of
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical around the level indicator.
a circle with radius r = |z| sin "=2. It follows from (1.3) Alice’s Adventures in Wonderland by Lewis Carroll:
displays. 1 The spacing above and below a display
that (b) Another numbered list item under a list item.
depends on whether the lines above or below are short Alice was beginning to get very tired of
or long, as shown in the following examples. Z i. Third level numbered list item under a list
1 f (¸) d¸ sitting by her sister on the bank, and of having
A short line above: (1.4) = item.
2¼i C H(z) (¸ − z)2 nothing to do: once or twice she had peeped
A. Fourth and final level of numbered list into the book her sister was reading, but it had
x2 + y 2 = z 2 Z
(¸ − z0 )m d¸
X1
1 items allowed. no pictures or conversations in it, ’and what
and a short line below. am + R(z),
2¼i C H(z) (¸ − z)2 is the use of a book,’ thought Alice ’without
m= 0 • Bullet item 1.
A long line above may depend on your margins pictures or conversation?’
sin 2 µ + cos2 µ = 1 where for the remainder R(z) we have • Bullet item 2. So she was considering in her own mind (as
well as she could, for the hot day made her feel
as will a long line below. This line is long enough |R(z)| ≤ r−1 max o (|z|) — Second level bullet item. very sleepy and stupid), whether the pleasure
¸∈C H (z)
to illustrate the spacing for mathematical displays, of making a daisy-chain would be worth the
regardless of the margins. = r−1 max |¸| · O (|z| + r)
¸∈C H (z) · Fourth and final level bullet item. trouble of getting up and picking the daisies,
∗ |z| + r when suddenly a White Rabbit with pink eyes
Supported by GSF grants ABC123, DEF456, and GHI789. = · O (|z| + r )
† Society
for Industrial and Applied Mathematics. r Description List Each description list item has a ran close by her.
1LAT X automatically selects the spacing depending on the
E 1 + sin " lead-in followed by the item. Double-click the lead- There was nothing so very remarkable in
surrounding line lengths. = · O (|z|) . in box to enter or customize the text of the lead-in. that; nor did Alice think it so very much out
sin "
1
SIAM-ACM Preprint 93
of the way to hear the Rabbit say to itself, The quadratic equation shown as equation 1.5 is used
’Oh dear! Oh dear! I shall be late!’ (when to demonstrate how equations are numbered in the
she thought it over afterwards, it occurred to appendix.
her that she ought to have wondered at this,
but at the time it all seemed quite natural);
but when the Rabbit actually took a watch out
of its waistcoat-pocket, and looked at it, and
then hurried on, Alice started to her feet, for
it flashed across her mind that she had never
before seen a rabbit with either a waistcoat-
pocket, or a watch to take out of it, and
burning with curiosity, she ran across the field
after it, and fortunately was just in time to
see it pop down a large rabbit-hole under the
hedge.
In another moment down went Alice after
it, never once considering how in the world she
was to get out again.

Following the text of this article is a short manual bib-
liography. This sample bibliography has no relationship
to the previous text, but it shows sample citations such
as [4], [5] and [6]. You can also have multiple citations
References
[1] N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2,

John Wiley and Sons, New York, 1963.
[2] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen
drop behavior in fluid hydrogen at rocket chamber
pressures”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, 1998a, 41,
3537-3550
[3] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under
supercritical conditions”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer,
in print
[4] Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B.,
Molecular Theory of Gases and Liquids, John Wiley
and Sons, Inc., 1964
[5] Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E.,
Molecular thermodynamics for fluid-phase equilibrium,
[6] Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The
Properties of Gases and Liquids, 4th Edition, McGraw-
A An Appendix
Because appendices may contain material that is supple-
mentary rather than integral to the main text , many
styles use a different numbering system for equations
√
−b ± b 2 − 4ac
(1.5)
2a
Similar to AIP

Packages:
aip None
This shell produces documents formatted for the American Institute of Physics. The aip package provides correct
section numbering (e.g., II.B.2.) and it superscripts reference numbers in citations and bibliographies. The package
presents three or more consecutive reference numbers as a range. Other package formatting involves the date, the
abstract, paragraph indention, equation numbering, and appendixes.
I. Sample Mathematics and Text

The Date This short sample document illustrates the typeset appearance of in-line and
displayed mathematics in documents. It also illustrates five levels of section
manual bibliography and an appendix.
Dr. Author Jones P∞
At this Address
∞
X
ai (1)
i=1
Contents
I Sample Mathematics and Text 2 Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset of H , T a
A In-line and Displayed Mathematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 nonexpansive self map of C. Suppose that as n → ∞, a n;k → 0 for each k, and
R¯ P P∞
B Mathematics in section heads ® ln tdt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 °n = ∞ +
k=0 (a n;k+1 − a n;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C , An x =
k
k=0 a n;k T x
C Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environments . . 2 converges weakly to a fixed point of T .1
I I Section Headings 3 above and below a display depends on whether the lines above or below are
A Subsection Heading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 short or long, as shown in the following examples.
1 Subsubsection Heading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 A short line above:
x2 + y 2 = z 2
I II Lists 4 and a short line below.
IV About the Bibliography 4
A An Appendix 6
Abstract
R¯
This article illustrates many features of a mathematics article, but we do B. Mathematics in section heads ® ln tdt
not explain the spurious appearance of the formula (∇ × F ) · k = z + 1 in this
abstract.
C. Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Envi-

ronments
A number of theorem-like environments is available. The following lemma is
tions.
1 A
LT
1 2
Similar to AIP 95
Lemma 1 Let f (z) be an analytic function in C+ . If f (z) admits the repre- Subsubsubsubsection Heading This text appears under a subsubsub-
sentation µ ¶ subsection heading.
a1 1
f (z) = a 0 + +o ,
z z
III. Lists
for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ" = {z ∈ C + : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then
a 1 = − lim z 2 f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" . (2)
f (1=z) = a 0 + a 1 z + o (z) . (3)
r = |z| sin "=2. It follows from (3) that (a) A numbered list item under a list item.
Z Z The typeset appearance for this level is often different from the screen
X
1 m
1 f (¸) d¸ 1 (¸ − z0 ) d¸ appearance. The typeset appearance often uses parentheses around
2 = am 2 + R(z), (4)
2¼i C H(z) (¸ − z) m=0
2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z) the level indicator.
|R (z)| ≤ r −1 max o (|z|) = r −1 max |¸| · O (|z| + r) A. Fourth and final level of numbered list items allowed.
¸∈ CH (z) ¸∈ CH (z)
|z| + r 1 + sin "

= · O (|z| + r) = · O (|z|) . • Bullet item 1.
r sin "
• Bullet item 2.
Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 , and hence by the Cauchy theorem (4)
implies
d ∗ Third level bullet item.
f (1=z) = a 1 + R(z) → a1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 ,
dz · Fourth and final level bullet item.
II. Section Headings
Use the Section tag for major sections, such as the one just above. Four
IV. About the Bibliography
A. Subsection Heading Following the text of this article is a short manual bibliography. This sam-
ple bibliography has no relationship to the previous text, but it shows sample
citations such as, 4 5 and. 6 You can also have multiple citations appear together.
Here is an example:. 2—4
1. Subsubsection Heading

heading.
3 4
References Appendix A. An Appendix

1
N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2, John Wiley and Sons, Because appendices may contain material that is supplementary rather than
New York, 1963. integral to the main text , many styles use a different numbering system for
2
Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behavior in fluid hy-
√
drogen at rocket chamber pressures”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, 1998a, 41, −b ± b2 − 4ac
3537-3550 (A1)
2a
3
Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical conditions”, The quadratic equation shown as equation A1 is used to demonstrate how equa-
Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, in print tions are numbered in the appendix.
4
Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular Theory of Gases
5
6
Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Properties of Gases and
5 6
Similar to AIP - Modified

Packages:
sw20rui None
aip None
This shell is a modification of the Similar to AIP shell. It produces documents formatted for the American
Institute of Physics. The aip package provides correct section numbering (e.g., II.B.2.) and it superscripts reference
numbers in citations and bibliographies. The package presents three or more consecutive reference numbers as
a range. Other package formatting involves the date, the abstract, paragraph indention, equation numbering, and
appendixes.

The Date This short sample document illustrates the typeset appearance of in-line and displayed
of lists. Finally, the document includes entries for a manual bibliography and an appendix.
The Title of an Article A. In-line and Displayed Mathematics

P∞
Dr. Author Jones The expression i=1 a i is in-line mathematics, while the numbered equation
At this Address ∞
X
ai (1)
i=1
Contents is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 1.

Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset of H , T a non-
I Sample Mathematics and Text 2 expansive self map of C. Suppose that as n → ∞, a n;k → 0 for each k, and ° n =
A In-line and Displayed Mathematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 P∞ P∞ k
k=0 (a n;k+ 1 − a n;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C, An x = k= 0 a n;k T x converges
+
R¯
B Mathematics in section heads ® ln tdt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 weakly to a fixed point of T . 1
C Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environments . . . . . . 2 Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays. 1 The spacing above and
II Section Headings 3 in the following examples.
A Subsection Heading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 A short line above:
1 Subsubsection Heading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 x 2 + y 2 = z2
I II Lists 3
IV About the Bibliography 4
V Research Bibliography 5 as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for mathematical
A An Appendix 6
R¯
B. Mathematics in section heads ® ln tdt
Abstract
This article illustrates many features of a mathematics article, but we do not explain may cause difficulties in typesetting styles with running headers or table of contents entries.
the spurious appearance of the formula (∇ × F ) · k = z + 1 in this abstract.
C. Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environments

µ ¶
a1 1
f (z) = a 0 + +o ,
z z
a1 = − lim z 2 f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ ". (2)

1 A
L TEX automatically selects the spacing depending on the surrounding line lengths.
1 2
Similar to AIP - Modified 97
Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ " → Γ" = {z ∈ C − : z ∈ Γ" } and (b) Another numbered list item under a list item.
f (1=z) = a 0 + a 1 z + o (z) . (3) i. Third level numbered list item under a list item.
Fix z ∈ Γ ", and let C r (z) = {¸ ∈ C− : |¸ − z| = r} be a circle with radius r = |z| sin "=2.
It follows from (3) that • Bullet item 1.
Z Z
(¸ − z0 ) m d¸
1
X
1 f (¸) d¸ 1 • Bullet item 2.
= am + R(z), (4)
2¼i C H(z ) (¸ − z)2 m=0
2¼i C H(z ) (¸ − z)2
where for the remainder R(z) we have ∗ Third level bullet item.
¸∈CH (z) ¸∈CH (z)
|z| + r 1 + sin " Description List Each description list item has a lead-in followed by the item. Double-
= · O (|z| + r) = · O (|z|) . click the lead-in box to enter or customize the text of the lead-in.
r sin "
Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2, and hence by the Cauchy theorem (4) implies Bunyip Mythical beast of Australian Aboriginal legends.
d
f (1=z) = a 1 + R(z) → a1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2 , IV. About the Bibliography
dz
that implies (2) by substituting 1=z back for z. Following the text of this article is a short manual bibliography. This sample bibli-
ography has no relationship to the previous text, but it shows sample citations such as, 45
II. Section Headings and.6 You can also have multiple citations appear together. Here is an example:. 2—4
A. Subsection Heading
1. Subsubsection Heading
Subsubsubsubsection Heading This text appears under a subsubsubsubsection

heading.
III. Lists
extend four levels deep, look like this:


3 4
V. Research Bibliography Appendix A. An Appendix

1
N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2, John Wiley and Sons, New York, Because appendices may contain material that is supplementary rather than integral
1963. to the main text , many styles use a different numbering system for equations that appear
2
in the appendices. √
Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behavior in fluid hydrogen at −b ± b2 − 4ac
rocket chamber pressures”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, 1998a, 41, 3537-3550 (A1)
2a
3
Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical conditions”, Int. J. The quadratic equation shown as equation A1 is used to demonstrate how equations are
Heat Mass Transfer, in print numbered in the appendix.
4
5
Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E ., Molecular thermodynamics for fluid-
6
Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Properties of Gases and Liquids,
5 6
Similar to Bulletin of the American Mathematical Society

Packages:
sw20bams None
The shell produces documents whose appearance is similar to that of the Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society. Blank pages carry no page number and sections, subsections, and subsubsections are treated similarly in
the table of contents.
The Title of an Article 2
1.3. Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environments. A number

of theorem-like environments is available. The following lemma is a well-known fact on
The Title of an Article differentiation of asymptotic expansions of analytic functions.
Dr. Author Jones Lemma 1. Let f (z) be an analytic function in C + . If f (z) admits the representation
At this Address
µ ¶
a1 1
The Date f (z) = a0 + +o ,
z z
Abstract. This article illustrates many features of a mathematics article, but
we do not explain the spurious appearance of the formula (∇ × F) · k = z + 1 in this f or z → ∞ inside a cone Γ" = {z ∈ C + : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then
abstract.
a1 = − lim z 2 f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" . (2)
Abstract.
Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ" → Γ " = {z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ "} and
This short sample document illustrates the typeset appearance of in-line and displayed f (1=z) = a 0 + a 1 z + o (z) . (3)
Fix z ∈ Γ" , and let C r (z) = {¸ ∈ C − : |¸ − z| = r} be a circle with radius r = |z| sin "=2.
appendix. It follows f rom (3) that
P∞ Z Z
(¸ − z0 )m d¸
1
X
f (¸) d¸
i=1 a i
1.1. In-line and Displayed Mathematics. The expression is in-line math- 1 1
= am + R(z), (4)
ematics, while the numbered equation 2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z)2 m=0
2¼i C H(z ) (¸ − z)2
∞
X where for the remainder R(z) we have
ai (1)
i= 1
¸∈C H(z) ¸∈C H(z )
|z| + r 1 + sin "
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset of H , T a non- = · O (|z| + r) = · O (|z|) .
expansive self map of C. Suppose that as n → ∞, a n;k → 0 for each k, and ° n = r sin "
P∞ + P∞ k
k= 0 (an;k+ 1 − a n;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C, An x = k=0 a n;k T x converges Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 , and hence by the Cauchy theorem (4) implies
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays. 1 The spacing above and d
f (1=z) = a 1 + R(z) → a1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 ,
below a display depends on whether the lines above or below are short or long, as shown dz
in the following examples. that implies (2) by substituting 1=z back for z.
A short line above:
x2 + y 2 = z 2 2. Section Headings
and a short line below. Use the Section tag for major sections, such as the one just above. Four additional heading
A long line above may depend on your margins levels are available, as described below.
sin2 µ + cos2 µ = 1 2.1. Subsection Heading. This text appears under a subsection heading.
Subsubsection Heading. This text appears under a subsubsection heading.
displays, regardless of the margins. Subsubsubsection Heading. This text appears under a subsubsubsection heading.
R¯ Subsubsubsubsection Heading. This text appears under a subsubsubsubsection
1.2. Mathematics in section heads ® ln tdt. Mathematics can appear in section heading.
heads. Note that mathematics in section heads may cause difficulties in typesetting styles
with running headers or table of contents entries.
1L
AT
1
Similar to Bulletin of the American Mathematical Society 99
The Title of an Article 3 The Title of an Article 4
3. Lists A. An Appendix
Bullet, numbered and description list environments are available. Lists, which can extend Because appendices may contain material that is supplementary rather than integral to
f our levels deep, look like this: the main text , many styles use a different numbering system for equations that appear
in the appendices. √
1. Numbered list item 1. −b ± b 2 − 4ac
(5)
2. Numbered list item 2. 2a
(a) A numbered list item under a list item. numbered in the appendix.
The typeset appearance for this level is often different from the screen ap-
pearance. The typeset appearance often uses parentheses around the level
indicator.
• Bullet item 1.
• Bullet item 2.

4. About the Bibliogra phy

has no relationship to the previous text, but it shows sample citations such as [4], [5] and
References
York, 1963.
Li quids, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., 1964
[5] Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E., Molecular thermodynamics for
Similar to MAA Monthly before 1992

Packages:
sw20amm1 None
In this shell, blank pages carry no page number and sections, subsections, and subsubsections are treated simi-
larly in the table of contents.
The Title of an Article L emma 1. Let f (z) be an analytic function in C + . If f (z) admits the representation
µ ¶
Dr. Author Jones a1 1
f (z) = a0 + +o ,
At this Address z z
The Date f or z → ∞ inside a cone Γ" = {z ∈ C + : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then
Abstract. This article illustrates many features of a mathematics article, but a 1 = − lim z 2f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" . (2)
we do not explain the spurious appearance of the formula (∇ × F ) · k = z + 1 in this
abstract. Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ" → Γ" = {z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ" } and
1. Sample Mathematics and Text. This short sample document illustrates the f (1=z) = a 0 + a 1z + o (z) . (3)
typeset appearance of in-line and displayed mathematics in documents. It also illustrates
five levels of section headings and three kinds of lists. Finally, the document includes Fix z ∈ Γ ", and let C r (z) = {¸ ∈ C − : |¸ − z| = r} be a circle with radius r = |z| sin "=2.
entries for a manual bibliography and an appendix. It follows f rom (3) that
P∞ Z 1 Z m
1.1. In-line and Displayed Mathematics. The expression ai is in-line math- 1 f (¸) d¸ X 1 (¸ − z0 ) d¸
i=1
ematics, while the numbered equation 2 = am 2 + R(z), (4)
2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z) m=0
2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z)
∞
X
ai (1) where for the remainder R(z) we have
i=1
¸∈ CH (z) ¸∈CH (z)
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset of H , T a non- |z| + r 1 + sin "
= · O (|z| + r) = · O (|z|) .
expansive self map of C. Suppose that as n → ∞, an;k → 0 for each k , and ° n = r sin "
P∞ + P∞ k
k= 0 (an;k+ 1 − a n;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C , An x = k=0 a n;k T x converges Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 , and hence by the Cauchy theorem (4) implies
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays. 1 The spacing above and d
f (1=z) = a 1 + R(z) → a 1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 ,
below a display depends on whether the lines above or below are short or long, as shown dz
in the following examples. that implies (2) by substituting 1=z back for z.
A short line above:
x2 + y 2 = z2 2. Section Headings. Use the Section tag for major sections, such as the one just
above. Four additional heading levels are available, as described below.
sin 2 µ + cos 2 µ = 1 Subsubsection Heading. This text appears under a subsubsection heading.
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for mathematical Subsubsubsection Heading. This text appears under a subsubsubsection heading.
displays, regardless of the margins. Subsubsubsubsection Heading. This text appears under a subsubsubsubsection
heading.
R¯
1.2. Mathematics in section heads ® ln tdt. Mathematics can appear in section
heads. Note that mathematics in section heads may cause difficulties in typesetting styles 3. Lists. Bullet, numbered and description list environments are available. Lists,
with running headers or table of contents entries. which can extend four levels deep, look like this:

1.3. Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environments. A number
of theorem-like environments is available. The following lemma is a well-known fact on 2. Numbered list item 2.
differentiation of asymptotic expansions of analytic functions.
1L
AT
1
Similar to MAA Monthly before 1992 101

• Bullet item 1.
• Bullet item 2.

4. About the Bibliography. Following the text of this article is a short manual
bibliography. This sample bibliography has no relationship to the previous text, but it
shows sample citations such as [4], [5] and [6]. You can also have multiple citations appear
together. Here is an example: [2, 3, 4].
REFERENCES
York, 1963.
Li quids, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., 1964
A. An Appendix. Because appendices may contain material that is supplementary

rather than integral to the main text , many styles use a different numbering system for
√
−b ± b2 − 4ac
(5)
2a
Similar to North-Holland Journals

Packages:
sw20nhj None
The shell creates documents for submission to the North-Holland journals. The package associated with the
shell prints a description and date at the top right of the title area, which can be a separate page. The shell uses
keywords, which appear after the abstract. The author’s name and address appear at the left and below the abstract
and keywords. Margins are generous.
The Date

P∞
X
∞
ai (1)
i= 1
The Title of an Article is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 1.
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset of H , T a nonexpansive self

Abstract P∞
map of C. Suppose that as n → ∞, a n;k → 0 for each k , and ° n = k=0 (a n;k+1 − a n;k )+ → 0.
This article illustrates many features of a mathematics article, but we do not explain the spurious appear-
ance of the formula (∇ × F) · k = z + 1 in this abstract. P∞ k
Then for each x in C, An x = k=0 a n;k T x converges weakly to a fixed point of T [1].
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays.1 The spacing above and below
a display depends on whether the lines above or below are short or long, as shown in the following
examples.
A short line above:
x2 + y 2 = z 2

R¯
Dr. Author Jones Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note that mathematics in section heads may cause
At this Address
difficulties in typesetting styles with running headers or table of contents entries.
1 Sample Mathematics and Text 1.3 Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environments
This short sample document illustrates the typeset appearance of in-line and displayed mathemat- A number of theorem-like environments is available. The following lemma is a well-known fact on
ics in documents. It also illustrates five levels of section headings and three kinds of lists. Finally, differentiation of asymptotic expansions of analytic functions.
the document includes entries for a manual bibliography and an appendix. 1 LATEX automatically selects the spacing depending on the surrounding line lengths.
1
Similar to North-Holland Journals 103
Lemma 1 Let f (z) be an analytic function in C +. If f (z) admits the representation 2.1.1 Subsubsection Heading
µ ¶
a1 1
f (z) = a0 + +o , This text appears under a subsubsection heading.
z z

a1 = − lim z 2 f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" . (2)

f (1=z) = a 0 + a 1 z + o (z) . (3)

3 Lists
Bullet, numbered and description list environments are available. Lists, which can extend f our
Fix z ∈ Γ ", and let Cr (z) = {¸ ∈ C − : |¸ − z| = r} be a circle with radius r = |z| sin "=2. It
levels deep, look like this:
Z Z
(¸ − z0 )m d¸
1
X
1 f (¸) d¸ 1 1. Numbered list item 1.
= am + R(z), (4)
2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z)2 m=0
2¼i C H(z ) (¸ − z)2

¸∈C H(z) ¸∈C H(z )
|z| + r 1 + sin " The typeset appearance for this level is often different from the screen appearance. The
= · O (|z| + r) = · O (|z|) .
r sin "
Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 , and hence by the Cauchy theorem (4) implies
d i. Third level numbered list item under a list item.

f (1=z) = a 1 + R(z) → a1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 ,
dz
• Bullet item 1.
2 Section Headings
• Bullet item 2.
Use the Section tag for ma jor sections, such as the one just above. Four additional heading levels
are available, as described below. — Second level bullet item.
2.1 Subsection Heading ∗ Third level bullet item.

2 3
Description List Each description list item has a lead-in followed by the item. Double-click the
lead-in box to enter or customize the text of the lead-in.
Following the text of this article is a short manual bibliography. This sample bibliography has no
relationship to the previous text, but it shows sample citations such as [4], [5] and [6]. You can
also have multiple citations appear together. Here is an example: [2, 3, 4].
References
1963.
Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical conditions”, Int. J. Heat
A An Appendix
Because appendices may contain material that is supplementary rather than integral to the main
text , many styles use a different numbering system for equations that appear in the appendices.
√
−b ± b 2 − 4ac
(5)
2a
The quadratic equation shown as equation 5 is used to demonstrate how equations are numbered
in the appendix.
4
Similar to Sequential Analysis Journal

Packages:
sw20seqa None
The shell used a front matter field for key words.
R¯
The Title of an Article Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note that mathematics in section
Dr. Author Jones
contents entries.
At this Address
1.3. Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environments
Key words and phrases: sequential analysis
Abstract This article illustrates many features of a mathematics well-known fact on differentiation of asymptotic expansions of analytic functions.
article, but we do not explain the spurious appearance of the formula
(∇ × F ) · k = z + 1 in this abstract. Lemma 1. Let f (z) be an analytic function in C+ . If f (z) admits the represen-
tation µ ¶
Contents a1 1
f (z) = a0 + +o ,
1 Sample Mathematics and Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 z z
2 Section Headings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ" = {z ∈ C + : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then
3 Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
4 About the Bibliography . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 a 1 = − lim z 2 f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" . (1.2)
A An Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
This short sample document illustrates the typeset appearance of in-line and f (1=z) = a0 + a1 z + o (z) . (1.3)
displayed mathematics in documents. It also illustrates five levels of section head-
ings and three kinds of lists. Finally, the document includes entries for a manual
r = |z| sin "=2. It follows from (1.3) that
Z X
1 Z m
1.1. In-line and Displayed Mathematics 1 f (¸) d¸ 1 (¸ − z 0 ) d¸
= am + R(z), (1.4)
P∞
2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z) 2 m=0
2¼i C H(z ) (¸ − z) 2
∞
X
ai (1.1) |R(z)| ≤ r −1 max o (|z|) = r −1 max |¸| · O (|z| + r)
i=1 ¸∈C H(z) ¸∈C H(z )
|z| + r 1 + sin "

is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 1.1. = · O (|z| + r ) = · O (|z|) .
r sin "
nonexpansive self map of C. Suppose that as n → ∞, an;k → 0 for each k, and Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 , and hence by the Cauchy theorem (1.4)
P P k
°n = ∞ k=0 (an;k+1 − a n;k )
+
→ 0. Then for each x in C , An x = ∞k=0 a n;k T x implies
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays.1 The spacing d
f (1=z) = a 1 + R(z) → a 1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2 ,
or long, as shown in the following examples. that implies (1.2) by substituting 1=z back for z.
A short line above:
x 2 + y 2 = z2 2. Section Headings
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for This text appears under a subsection heading.
mathematical displays, regardless of the margins. Subsubsection Heading
1 A
1 2
Similar to Sequential Analysis Journal 105
Subsubsubsection Heading [4] Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular Theory of Gases
Subsubsubsubsection Heading [5] Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E., Molecular thermodynam-
ics for fluid-phase equilibrium, Prentice -Hall, Inc., 1986
3. Li sts Liquids, 4th E dition, McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1987
Bullet, numbered and description list environments are available. Lists, which A. An Appendix
1. Numbered list item 1. integral to the main text , many styles use a different numbering system for
2. Numbered list item 2. √
−b ± b 2 − 4ac
(A.1)
(a) A numbered list item under a list item. 2a
The quadratic equation shown as equation A.1 is used to demonstrate how equa-
tions are numbered in the appendix.
i) Third level numbered list item under a list item.
• Bullet item 1.
• Bullet item 2.


References
New York, 1963.
3537-3550
3 4
Society for Computer Simulation

Packages:
sw20scsj None
The shell produces articles with large headings. The margins are narrow at the sides and generous at the bottom
of the page.
THE TITLE OF AN ARTICLE Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environments

A number of theorem-like environments is available. The following lemma is a well-known fact on differentiation of
Dr. Author Jones
asymptotic expansions of analytic functions.
At this Address
Lemma 1 Let f (z) be an analytic function in C + . If f (z) admits the representation
µ ¶
ABSTRACT a1 1
f (z) = a 0 + +o ,
z z
This article illustrates many features of a mathematics article, but we do not explain the spurious appearance
of the formula (∇ × F ) · k = z + 1 in this abstract. for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ " = {z ∈ C+ : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then
a 1 = − lim z 2 f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" . (2)

SAMPLE MATHEMATICS AND TEXT
This short sample document illustrates the typeset appearance of in-line and displayed mathematics in documents.
It also illustrates five levels of section headings and three kinds of lists. Finally, the document includes entries for a f (1=z) = a 0 + a 1 z + o (z) . (3)
Fix z ∈ Γ" , and let Cr (z) = {¸ ∈ C − : |¸ − z| = r } be a circle with radius r = |z| sin "=2. It follows from (3) that
In-line and Displayed Mathematics Z 1
X Z m
P∞ 1 f (¸) d¸ 1 (¸ − z0 ) d¸
= am + R(z), (4)
The expression i=1 ai is in-line mathematics, while the numbered equation 2¼i C H( z) (¸ − z)2 2¼i C H(z ) (¸ − z)2
m= 0
∞
X where for the remainder R (z) we have
ai (1)
i=1
¸∈C H(z) ¸∈C H(z )
|z| + r 1 + sin "
P∞ convex subset of H , T a nonexpansive self map of C .PSuppose that = · O (|z| + r) = · O (|z|) .
as n → ∞, an;k → 0 for each k, and ° n = k=0 (a n;k+1 − a n;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C, An x = k=0 a n;k T k x
+ ∞ r sin "
converges weakly to a fixed point of T [1]. Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2 , and hence by the Cauchy theorem (4) implies
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays. 1 The spacing above and below a display depends
on whether the lines above or below are short or long, as shown in the following examples. d
f (1=z) = a 1 + R (z) → a1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 ,
x2 + y 2 = z2 that implies (2) by substituting 1=z back for z.
SECTION HEADINGS
Use the Section tag for ma jor sections, such as the one just above. Four additional heading levels are available,
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for mathematical displays, regardless of as described below.
the margins.
Subsection Heading
R¯
ln tdt This text appears under a subsection heading.
Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note that mathematics in section heads may cause difficulties in typesetting
styles with running headers or table of contents entries. Subsubsection Heading This text appears under a subsubsection heading.
1A
LT EX automatically selects the spacing depending on the surrounding line lengths. Subsubsubsection Heading This text appears under a subsubsubsection heading.
Society for Computer Simulation 107
Subsubsubsubsection Heading This text appears under a subsubsubsubsection heading. Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular Theory of Gases and Liquids, John Wiley and Sons,
Inc., 1964
LISTS Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E., Molecular thermodynamics for fluid-phase equilibrium, Prentice
-Hall, Inc., 1986
Bullet, numbered and description list environments are available. Lists, which can extend four levels deep, look
like this: Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Properties of Gases and Liquids, 4th Edition, McGraw-Hill
Book Company, 1987
2. Numbered list item 2. AN APPENDIX

(a) A numbered list item under a list item. Because appendices may contain material that is supplementary rather than integral to the main text , many
The typeset appearance for this level is often different from the screen appearance. The typeset appearance styles use a different numbering system for equations that appear in the appendices.
often uses parentheses around the level indicator. √
−b ± b 2 − 4ac
(b) Another numbered list item under a list item. (5)
2a
The quadratic equation shown as equation 5 is used to demonstrate how equations are numbered in the appendix.
• Bullet item 1.
• Bullet item 2.

Description List Each description list item has a lead-in followed by the item. Double-click the lead-in box to
ABOUT THE BIBLIOGRAPHY

Following the text of this article is a short manual bibliography. This sample bibliography has no relationship to
the previous text, but it shows sample citations such as [4], [5] and [6]. You can also have multiple citations appear
REFERENCES
N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2, John Wiley and Sons, New York, 1963.
Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behavior in fluid hydrogen at rocket chamber pressures”,
Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, 1998a, 41, 3537-3550
Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical conditions”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, in print
SPIE Proceedings

Packages:
sw20chic None
spie None
The spie package used with this shell requires several manual adjustments. Type section titles in upper case,
with other section headings in lower case with initial capital letters. See the package documentation for instructions
about formatting author and date information.
The Title of an Article as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for mathematical displays, regardless
of the margins.

At this Address 1.2 Mathematics in section heads ® ln tdt
Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note that mathematics in section heads may cause difficulties in
The Date typesetting styles with running headers or table of contents entries.

ABSTRACT
A number of theorem-like environments is available. The following lemma is a well-known fact on differentia-
This article illustrates many features of a mathematics article, but we do not explain the spurious appearance tion of asymptotic expansions of analytic functions.
of the formula (∇ × F ) · k = z + 1 in this abstract.
Lemma 1. Let f (z) be an analytic function in C + . If f (z) admits the representation
µ ¶
a1 1
f (z) = a 0 + +o ,
1 Sample Mathematics and Text z z

This short sample document illustrates the typeset appearance of in-line and displayed mathematics in doc-
uments. It also illustrates five levels of section headings and three kinds of lists. Finally, the document includes a 1 = − lim z 2 f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" . (2)
Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ" → Γ " = {z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ " } and

f (1=z) = a 0 + a 1 z + o (z) . (3)
P∞
The expression a i is in-line mathematics, while the numbered equation
i=1 Fix z ∈ Γ" , and let C r (z) = {¸ ∈ C − : |¸ − z| = r} be a circle with radius r = |z| sin "=2. It follows from (3) that
∞
X Z 1
X Z m
ai (1) 1 f (¸) d¸ 1 (¸ − z0 ) d¸
2 = am 2 + R(z), (4)
i=1 2¼i (¸ − z) 2¼i (¸ − z)
C H( z) m= 0 C H(z )

Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex P∞ subset of H , T + a nonexpansive self map of C . |R(z)| ≤ r −1 max o (|z|) = r −1 max |¸| · O (|z| + r)
SupposePthat as n → ∞, a n;k → 0 for each k , and ° n = k=0 (an;k+1 − an;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C , ¸∈C H(z) ¸∈C H(z )
k
An x = ∞ k=0 an;k T x converges weakly to a fixed point of T .
1
|z| + r 1 + sin "
= · O (|z| + r) = · O (|z|) .
r sin "
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays. 1 The spacing above and below a display depends
on whether the lines above or below are short or long, as shown in the following examples. Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 , and hence by the Cauchy theorem (4) implies
A short line above:

d
x2 + y 2 = z2 f (1=z) = a 1 + R (z) → a1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 ,
dz
1 A
1
SPIE Proceedings 109
2 Section Headings Description List Each description list item has a lead-in followed by the item. Double-click the lead-in box to
Use the Section tag for ma jor sections, such as the one just above. Four additional heading levels are available, Bunyip Mythical beast of Australian Aboriginal legends.
as described below.

Following the text of this article is a short manual bibliography. This sample bibliography has no relationship
to the previous text, but it shows sample citations such as, 4 5 and. 6 You can also have multiple citations appear
together. Here is an example:.2 —4
This text appears under a subsubsection heading. 5 REFERENCES

Subsubsubsection Heading This text appears under a subsubsubsection heading. [2] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behavior in fluid hydrogen at rocket chamber pres-
sures”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, 1998a, 41, 3537-3550
Subsubsubsubsection Heading This text appears under a subsubsubsubsection heading. [3] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical conditions”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer,
in print
[4] Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular Theory of Gases and Liquids, John Wiley and
3 Lists Sons, Inc., 1964
[5] Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E., Molecular thermodynamics for fluid-phase equilibrium,
Bullet, numbered and description list environments are available. Lists, which can extend four levels deep,
look like this: [6] Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Properties of Gases and Liquids, 4th E dition, McGraw-

A An Appendix
The typeset appearance for this level is often different from the screen appearance. The typeset Because appendices may contain material that is supplementary rather than integral to the main text , many
appearance of ten uses parentheses around the level indicator. styles use a different numbering system for equations that appear in the appendices.
(b) Another numbered list item under a list item. √
−b ± b 2 − 4ac
i. Third level numbered list item under a list item. (5)
2a
• Bullet item 1.
• Bullet item 2.

SPIE Proceedings - Modified

Packages:
sw20chic None
spie None
The shell modifies the SPIE Proceedings shell to produce double-spaced text. The spie package used with this
shell requires several manual adjustments. Type section titles in upper case, with other section headings in lower
case with initial capital letters. See the package documentation for instructions about formatting author and date
information.
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset of H , T a nonexpansive self map of C .
P∞ +
Suppose that as n → ∞, a n;k → 0 for each k , and ° n = − an;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C ,
The Title of an Article k=0 (an;k+1
P∞
An x = k=0 an;k T k x converges weakly to a fixed point of T . 1
Dr. Author Jones Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays. 1 The spacing above and below a display depends
At this Address on whether the lines above or below are short or long, as shown in the following examples.
A short line above:

The Date
x2 + y 2 = z2
ABSTRACT
This article illustrates many features of a mathematics article, but we do not explain the spurious appearance sin2 µ + cos2 µ = 1

as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for mathematical displays, regardless
of the margins.

R¯
ln tdt
This short sample document illustrates the typeset appearance of in-line and displayed mathematics in doc-
Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note that mathematics in section heads may cause difficulties in
uments. It also illustrates five levels of section headings and three kinds of lists. Finally, the document includes

P∞ A number of theorem-like environments is available. The following lemma is a well-known fact on differentia-
∞ tion of asymptotic expansions of analytic functions.

X
ai (1) 1 A
i=11
SPIE Proceedings - Modified 111
Lemma 1. Let f (z) be an analytic function in C + . If f (z) admits the representation 2.1 Subsection Heading
µ ¶
a1 1
f (z) = a 0 + +o ,
z z This text appears under a subsection heading.

a 1 = − lim z 2 f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" . (2)
Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ" → Γ " = {z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ " } and

f (1=z) = a 0 + a 1 z + o (z) . (3)

Fix z ∈ Γ" , and let C r (z) = {¸ ∈ C − : |¸ − z| = r} be a circle with radius r = |z| sin "=2. It follows from (3) that
Z 1
X Z m
1 f (¸) d¸ 1 (¸ − z0 ) d¸
2 = am 2 + R(z), (4)
2¼i C H( z) (¸ − z) m= 0
2¼i C H(z ) (¸ − z)
3 Lists
|R(z)| ≤ r −1
max o (|z|) = r −1
max |¸| · O (|z| + r) Bullet, numbered and description list environments are available. Lists, which can extend four levels deep,
¸∈C H(z) ¸∈C H(z )
|z| + r 1 + sin "
= · O (|z| + r) = · O (|z|) . look like this:
r sin "

d
f (1=z) = a 1 + R (z) → a1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 ,
dz
The typeset appearance for this level is often different from the screen appearance. The typeset
appearance of ten uses parentheses around the level indicator.
2 Section Headings (b) Another numbered list item under a list item.

Use the Section tag for ma jor sections, such as the one just above. Four additional heading levels are available,
as described below.
• Bullet item 1. [4] Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular Theory of Gases and Liquids, John Wiley and
Sons, Inc., 1964

• Bullet item 2.
[5] Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E., Molecular thermodynamics for fluid-phase equilibrium,
[6] Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Properties of Gases and Liquids, 4th E dition, McGraw-
An Appendix
Because appendices may contain material that is supplementary rather than integral to the main text , many styles
Bunyip Mythical beast of Australian Aboriginal legends. use a different numbering system for equations that appear in the appendices.
√
−b ± b2 − 4ac
(5)
2a
together. Here is an example:.2 —4
5 REFERENCES
[2] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behavior in fluid hydrogen at rocket chamber pres-
[3] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical conditions”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer,
in print
SPIE Proceedings (new)
Document class base file: spie.cls

Packages:
None
This shell document provides a sample layout of an article for the Proceedings of the SPIE.
The Title of an Article 1.3. Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environments
A number of theorem-like environments is available. The following lemma is a well-known fact on differentiation
Anna A. Author1a and Barry B. Author2b of asymptotic expansions of analytic functions.
a Affiliation1, Address, City, Country Lemma 1.1. Let f (z) be an analytic function in C + . If f (z) admits the representati on
b Affiliation2, Short Version of a Long Address, City, µ ¶
Country a1 1
f (z) = a 0 + +o ,
z z
ABSTRACT for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ " = {z ∈ C+ : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then
This article illustrates many features of a mathematics article, but we do not explain the spurious appearance a 1 = − lim z 2 f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" . (2)
Keywords: Manuscript format, template, SPIE Proceedings, LaTeX
1. SAMPLE MATHEMATICS AND TEXT f (1=z) = a 0 + a 1 z + o (z) . (3)
This short sample document illustrates the typeset appearance of in-line and displayed mathematics in docu-
ments. It also illustrates five levels of section headings and three kinds of lists. Finally, the document includes Fix z ∈ Γ" , and let C r (z) = {¸ ∈ C− : |¸ − z| = r} be a circle with radius r = |z| sin "=2. It follows from (3)
entries for a manual bibliography and an appendix. that
Z Z
(¸ − z0 )m d¸
X1
1 f (¸) d¸ 1
= am + R(z), (4)
1.1. In-line and Displayed Mathematics 2¼i C H( z) (¸ − z)2 2¼i C H(z ) (¸ − z)2
m= 0
P∞
The expression i=1 ai is in-line mathematics, while the numbered equation where for the remainder R (z) we have
∞
X |R(z)| ≤ r −1 max o (|z|) = r −1 max |¸| · O (|z| + r)
ai (1) ¸∈C H(z) ¸∈C H(z )
i=1
|z| + r 1 + sin "
= · O (|z| + r) = · O (|z|) .
is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 1. r sin "
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex P subset of H, T + a nonexpansive self map of C. Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2 , and hence by the Cauchy theorem (4) implies
SupposePthat as n → ∞, an;k → 0 for each k , and ° n = ∞ k=0 (an;k+1 − a n;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C,
A n x = k= 0 an;k T k x converges weakly to a fixed point of T . 1
∞
d
f (1=z) = a 1 + R (z) → a1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 ,
Two sets of LAT ∗
EX parameters govern mathematical displays. The spacing above and below a display depends dz
on whether the lines above or below are short or long, as shown in the following examples. that implies (2) by substituting 1=z back for z.
A short line above:
x2 + y 2 = z2 2. SECTION HEADINGS
and a short line below. Use the Section tag for ma jor sections, such as the one just above. Four additional heading levels are available,
as described below.
sin2 µ + cos2 µ = 1 2.1. Subsection Heading

as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for mathematical displays, regardless
of the margins. 2.1.1. Subsubsection Heading
R¯ This text appears under a subsubsection heading.
ln tdt
Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note that mathematics in section heads may cause difficulties in Subsubsubsection Heading This text appears under a subsubsubsection heading.
Further author information: (Send correspondence to A.A.A.)
A.A.A.: E-mail: aaa@fake.edu, Telephone: 1 505 555 1234
B.B.A.: E-mail: bba@fake.edu, Telephone: +33 (0)1 98 76 54 32, Address: A Very Long Address, City, Country
∗ A
SPIE Proceedings (new) 113
3. LISTS
Bullet, numbered and description list environments are available. Lists, which can extend four levels deep, look
like this:

The typeset appearance for this level is often different from the screen appearance. The typeset
appearance often uses parentheses around the level indicator.
• Bullet item 1.
• Bullet item 2.

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
This unnumbered section is used to identify those who have aided the authors in understanding or accomplishing
the work presented and to acknowledge sources of funding.
together. Here is an example:. 2—4
REFERENCES
1. N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2, John Wiley and Sons, New York, 1963.
2. Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behavior in fluid hydrogen at rocket chamber pres-
3. Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical conditions”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer,
in print
4. Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular Theory of Gases and Liquids, John Wiley and
Sons, Inc., 1964
5. Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E., Molecular thermodynamics for fluid-phase equilibrium,
6. Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Properties of Gases and Liquids, 4th Edition, McGraw-
Springer-Verlag Heidelberg Journal
Document class base file: svjour.cls

Document class options Global (for all journals)
Packages:
amsmath None
The front matter of the shell contains fields for the journal name, subtitle of the article, author’s institute (instead
of address), dedication, headnote, offprints, offprints address, and key words.
Name Your Journal manuscript No. 2 Dr. Author Jones

(will be inserted by the editor)
H , T a nonexpansive self map of C. Suppose that as n → ∞, a n;k → 0
P
for eachPk , and °n = ∞ k=0 (a n;k+ 1 − a n;k )
+
→ 0. Then for each x in C ,
A n x = k= 0 a n;k T k x converges weakly to a fixed point of T [1].
∞
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays. 1 The spac-

ing above and below a display depends on whether the lines above or below
Head note that is usually deleted are short or long, as shown in the following examples.
A short line above:
The Title of an Article x2 + y 2 = z 2
Do you have a subtitle?
If so, write it here
Dr. Author Jones1
The University of Stewart Islande-mail: author@nowhere.edu as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing
The date of receipt and acceptance will be inserted by the editor
R¯
To mother 1.2 Mathematics in section heads ®
ln tdt
Abstract This article illustrates many features of a mathematics article, Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note that mathematics in section
but we do not explain the spurious appearance of the formula (∇ × F ) · k = heads may cause difficulties in typesetting styles with running headers or
z + 1 in this abstract. table of contents entries.
Key words sample — document — Scientific Word — Scientific WorkPlace

1 Sample Mathematics and Text A number of theorem-like environments is available. The following lemma
is a well-known fact on differentiation of asymptotic expansions of analytic
This short sample document illustrates the typeset appearance of in-line functions.
and displayed mathematics in documents. It also illustrates five levels of
section headings and three kinds of lists. Finally, the document includes Lemma 1 Let f (z) be an analytic function in C +. If f (z) admits the rep-
entries for a manual bibliography and an appendix. resentation µ ¶
a1 1
f (z) = a0 + +o ,
z z
P∞ for z → ∞ inside a cone ¡ " = {z ∈ C+ : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then
The expression i= 1 a i is in-line mathematics, while the numbered equation
a1 = − lim z2 f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ ¡" . (2)
∞
X
ai (1) Proof Change z for 1=z. Then ¡" → ¡ " = {z ∈ C − : z ∈ ¡" } and
i=1
is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 1. f (1=z) = a 0 + a 1 z + o (z) . (3)

1 A
Send offprint requests t o: Offprints Assistant LTEX automatically selects the spacing depending on the surrounding line
Correspondence to: Address for offprint requests lengths.
Springer-Verlag Heidelberg Journal 115
The Title of an Article 3 4 Dr. Author Jones
Fix z ∈ ¡ " , and let Cr (z) = {¸ ∈ C − : |¸ − z| = r} be a circle with radius (a) A numbered list item under a list item.
r = |z| sin "=2. It follows from (3) that The typeset appearance for this level is often different from the screen
Z 1
X Z m
1 f (¸) d¸ 1 (¸ − z0 ) d¸ the level indicator.
2 = am 2 + R(z), (4) (b) Another numbered list item under a list item.
2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z) m=0
2¼i C H(z) (¸ − z)
where for the remainder R (z) we have
|R(z)| ≤ r−1 max o (|z|) = r −1 max |¸| · O (|z| + r)
¸∈C H(z) ¸∈C H(z) — Bullet item 1.
|z| + r 1 + sin " — Bullet item 2.
= · O (|z| + r ) = · O (|z|) .
r sin " — Second level bullet item.
Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ ¡ "=2 , and hence by the Cauchy theorem • Third level bullet item.
(4) implies · Fourth and final level bullet item.
d
f (1=z) = a1 + R(z) → a1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ ¡ "=2 , Description List Each description list item has a lead-in followed by the
dz item. Double-click the lead-in box to enter or customize the text of the
that implies (2) by substituting 1=z back for z. lead-in.
2 Section Headings
Use the Section tag for ma jor sections, such as the one just above. Four 4 About the Bibliography
2.1 Subsection Heading citations such as [4], [5] and [6]. You can also have multiple citations appear
together. Here is an example: [2—4].
2.1.1 Subsubsection Heading This text appears under a subsubsection head-

References
ing.
Subsubsubsecti on Heading This text appears under a subsubsubsection 1. N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2, John Wiley and Sons,
heading. New York, 1963.
(Subsubsubsubsection head:)Subsubsubsubsection Heading 2. Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behavior in fluid hy-
This text appears under a subsubsubsubsection heading. drogen at rocket chamber pressures”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, 1998a, 41,
3537-3550
3. Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical conditions”,
3 Lists Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, in print
which can extend four levels deep, look like this: 5. Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E., Molecular thermodynamics
1. Numbered list item 1. 6. Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Properties of Gases and
2. Numbered list item 2. Liquids, 4th Edition, McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1987
A An Appendix

√
−b ± b 2 − 4ac
(5)
2a
Squeezed States and Uncertainty Relations

Packages:
sw20ssur None

A number of theorem-like environments is available. The following lemma is a well-known fact on
The Title of an Article differentiation of asymptotic expansions of analytic functions.

Dr. Author Jones
µ ¶
At this Address a1 1
f (z) = a0 + +o ,
z z
Abstract
This article illustrates many features of a mathematics article, but we do not explain the
spurious appearance of the formula (∇ × F ) · k = z + 1 in this abstract. a1 = − lim z 2 f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" . (2)

f (1=z) = a 0 + a 1 z + o (z) . (3)
This short sample document illustrates the typeset appearance of in-line and displayed mathemat-
ics in documents. It also illustrates five levels of section headings and three kinds of lists. Finally, Fix z ∈ Γ ", and let Cr (z) = {¸ ∈ C − : |¸ − z| = r} be a circle with radius r = |z| sin "=2. It
the document includes entries for a manual bibliography and an appendix. follows from (3) that
Z 1
X Z m
1.1 In-line and Displayed Mathematics 1 f (¸) d¸ 1 (¸ − z0 ) d¸
2 = am 2 + R(z), (4)
P∞ 2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z) m=0
2¼i C H(z ) (¸ − z)
∞ where for the remainder R(z) we have
X
ai (1)
i= 1 ¸∈C H(z) ¸∈C H(z )
is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 1. |z| + r 1 + sin "

= · O (|z| + r) = · O (|z|) .
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset P of H , T a nonexpansive self r sin "
∞ +
map of C. Suppose that as n P → ∞, a n;k → 0 for each k , and ° n = k=0 (a n;k+1 − a n;k ) → 0.
Then for each x in C, An x = k=0 a n;k T k x converges weakly to a fixed point of T [1].
∞
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays. 1 The spacing above and below a d
display depends on whether the lines above or below are short or long, as shown in the following f (1=z) = a 1 + R(z) → a1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 ,
dz
examples.
A short line above:
x2 + y 2 = z 2
and a short line below. 2 Section Headings
Use the Section tag for ma jor sections, such as the one just above. Four additional heading levels
sin2 µ + cos2 µ = 1 are available, as described below.
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for mathematical 2.1 Subsection Heading
R¯
ln tdt
1 A
LT
EX automatically selects the spacing depending on the surrounding line lengths. Subsubsubsection Heading This text appears under a subsubsubsection heading.

Squeezed States and Uncertainty Relations 117
3 Lists A An Appendix
Bullet, numbered and description list environments are available. Lists, which can extend f our Because appendices may contain material that is supplementary rather than integral to the main
levels deep, look like this: text , many styles use a different numbering system for equations that appear in the appendices.
√
1. Numbered list item 1. −b ± b 2 − 4ac
(5)
2a
The quadratic equation shown as equation 5 is used to demonstrate how equations are numbered
(a) A numbered list item under a list item. in the appendix.
The typeset appearance for this level is often different from the screen appearance. The
• Bullet item 1.
• Bullet item 2.

Description List Each description list item has a lead-in followed by the item. Double-click the
lead-in box to enter or customize the text of the lead-in.

References
[1] N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functi onal Analysis, v. 2, John Wiley and Sons, New York, 1963.
Standard LATEX Article (Chicago)

Packages:
amsmath Standard
chicago None
The shell uses a BibTEX bibliography.

The Title of a Standard LaTeX Article as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for
using the Chicago Bibliography System R¯
ln tdt
Dr. Author Jones Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note that mathematics in section
At this Address heads may cause difficulties in typesetting styles with running headers or table
July 22, 2004
1.3 Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Envi-
Abstract
ronments
We study the effects of warm water on the local penguin population. A number of theorem-like environments is available. The following lemma is
The major finding is that it is extremely difficult to induce penguins to a well-known fact on differentiation of asymptotic expansions of analytic func-
drink warm water. The success factor is approximately −e−i¼ − 1. tions.
1 Sample Mathematics and Text sentation µ ¶
a1 1
f (z) = a 0 + +o ,
This short sample document illustrates the typeset appearance of in-line and z z
displayed mathematics in documents. It also illustrates five levels of section for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ" = {z ∈ C + : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then
a 1 = − lim z 2 f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" . (2)
bibliography and citations created using the Chicago BibTEX bibliography style.
1.1 In-line and Displayed Mathematics f (1=z) = a 0 + a 1 z + o (z) . (3)
P∞
The expression i= 1 ai is in-line mathematics, while the numbered equation Fix z ∈ Γ" , and let Cr (z) = {¸ ∈ C − : |¸ − z| = r} be a circle with radius
∞ r = |z| sin "=2. It follows from (3) that
X
ai (1) Z X1 Z m
1 f (¸) d¸ 1 (¸ − z0 ) d¸
i=1 = am + R(z), (4)
2¼i C H(z) (¸ − z)2 2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z)2
m=0
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset of H , T a where for the remainder R(z) we have
nonexpansive self map of C. Suppose that as n → ∞, a n;k → 0 for each k, and |R (z)| ≤ r −1 max o (|z|) = r −1 max |¸| · O (|z| + r)
P P∞ k
°n = ∞ k=0 (a n;k+1 − a n;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C , An x =
+
k=0 a n;k T x
¸∈ CH (z) ¸∈ CH (z)
converges weakly to a fixed point of T . |z| + r 1 + sin "

= · O (|z| + r) = · O (|z|) .
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays. The spacing r sin "
short or long, as shown in the following examples.
implies
A short line above:
x2 + y 2 = z 2 d
f (1=z) = a 1 + R(z) → a1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 ,
and a short line below. dz
1 2
Standard LATEX Article (Chicago) 119
2 Section Headings 7. Abbreviated author list: (Knuth)
Use the Section tag for major sections, such as the one just above. Four addi- 8. Abbreviated author list, no parentheses: Knuth
9. Abbreviated author list and year, parentheses around year: Knuth (1981)
2.1 Subsection Heading 10. Year information only, with parentheses: (1981)
This text appears under a subsection heading. 11. Year information only, without parentheses: 1981

References
Knuth, D. E. (1981). Seminumerical Algorithms. Addison-Wesley.
heading.

subsection heading.
2.2 Compiling a Bibliography

1. Save this document using a name of your choosing.
2. Choose Typeset, Compile.

3. Check Generate a Bibliography.
4. Choose OK.
5. Choose Typeset, Preview.
2.3 Citations in the Chicago System

The Chicago package also supports a number of other mechanisms for citations.
These mechanisms are not supported directly through the SW interface. They
are entered as TeX fields. Here are some examples that you can copy and modify.
1. Full author list and year, but without enclosing parentheses: Knuth 1981
2. Full author list: (Knuth)
3. Full author list without parentheses: Knuth
4. Full author list, no parentheses around authors, parentheses around year:

Knuth (1981)
5. Abbreviated author list and year: (Knuth 1981)
6. Abbreviated author list and year, no parentheses: Knuth 1981
3 4
Standard LATEX Article (Harvard)

Packages:
amsmath Standard
harvard None
The shell uses a BibTEX bibliography.

The Title of a Standard LaTeX Article as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for
using the Harvard Bibliography System R¯
ln tdt
Dr. Author Jones Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note that mathematics in section
At this Address heads may cause difficulties in typesetting styles with running headers or table
April 18, 2003
ronments
Abstract
We study the effects of warm water on the local penguin p opulation. A number of theorem-like environments is available. The following lemma is
The major finding is that it is extremely difficult to induce penguins to a well-known fact on differentiation of asymptotic expansions of analytic func-
drink warm water. The success factor is approximately −e −i¼ − 1. tions.
1 Sample Mathematics and Text sentation µ ¶
a1 1
f (z) = a 0 + +o ,
This short sample document illustrates the typeset appearance of in-line and z z
displayed mathematics in documents. It also illustrates five levels of section for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ" = {z ∈ C + : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then
a 1 = − lim z 2 f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" . (2)
bibliography and citations created using the Chicago BibTEX bibliography style.
1.1 In-line and Displayed Mathematics f (1=z) = a 0 + a 1 z + o (z) . (3)
P∞
The expression i= 1 ai is in-line mathematics, while the numbered equation Fix z ∈ Γ" , and let Cr (z) = {¸ ∈ C − : |¸ − z| = r} be a circle with radius
∞ r = |z| sin "=2. It follows from (3) that
X
ai (1) Z 1
X Z m
1 f (¸) d¸ 1 (¸ − z0 ) d¸
i=1
2 = am 2 + R(z), (4)
2¼i C H(z) (¸ − z) m=0
2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z)
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset of H , T a where for the remainder R(z) we have
nonexpansive self map of C. Suppose that as n → ∞, a n;k → 0 for each k, and |R (z)| ≤ r −1 max o (|z|) = r −1 max |¸| · O (|z| + r)
P P∞ k
°n = ∞ k=0 (a n;k+1 − a n;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C , An x =
+
k=0 a n;k T x
¸∈ CH (z) ¸∈ CH (z)
converges weakly to a fixed point of T . |z| + r 1 + sin "

= · O (|z| + r) = · O (|z|) .
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays. The spacing r sin "
implies
A short line above:
x2 + y 2 = z 2 d
f (1=z) = a 1 + R(z) → a1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 ,
1 2
Standard LATEX Article (Harvard) 121
2 Section Headings 2.3.2 \possessivecite
Use the Section tag for major sections, such as the one just above. Four addi- You can use the citation as a possessive noun phrase with the LaTeX macro
tional heading levels are available, as described below. \possessivecite. Multiple citations are not permitted.
Lamport’s (1986) description of this feature is . . .

2.3.3 \citeaffixed
You can use the LaTeX macro \citeaffixed command to allow text to be
affixed inside the beginning of the parenthesis of a parenthetical citation.
2.1.1 Subsubsection Heading BibTeX manuals (e.g. Lamport 1986, Pitson 1978) describe . . .

References
heading. Kopka, H. and Daly, P. W.: 1993, A Guide to LATEX: Document Preparation
for Beginners and Advanced Users, Addison-Wesley.
subsection heading. Lamport, L.: 1986, LATEX: A Document Preparation System, Addison-Wesley.
Pitson, J.: 1978, Style Manual for authors editors and printers of Australian
2.2 Compiling a Bibliography government publications, 3rd edn, Australian Government Publishing Ser-
vice, Canberra.
1. Save this document using a name of your choosing.
2. Choose Typeset, Compile.

3. Check Generate a Bibliography.
4. Choose OK.
5. Choose Typeset, Preview.
2.3 Citations in the Harvard System

The standard citation mechanism that is supported by the SW Insert, Field,
Citation mechanism is the parenthetical citation form, using the LaTeX macro
\cite and is as follows:
As (Pitson 1978) and (Kopka and Daly 1993, Annex B) describe . . .
2.3.1 \citeasnoun
The Harvard package also supports using a citation as a noun using the LaTeX
macro \citeasnoun. These mechanisms are not supported directly through the
SW interface. They are entered as TeX fields. Here are some examples that you
can copy and modify.
As Pitson (1978) and Lamport (1986, Annex B) describe . . .
3 4
Standard LATEX Article (hyperref)

Packages:
hyperref None
This shell provides the same typesetting as the Standard LaTeX Article shell, except the hyperref package is
added. You can create active links in a document when you create a PDF file inside SW using Typeset, Preview
PDF, Typeset, Print PDF, or Typeset, Compile PDF.
Packages, the Class Options tab and then click the Modify button to see the class
options that are available for this typesetting specification.
The Title of a Standard LaTeX Article 1.2 What changes when using the hyperref package?
When the hyperref package is included in a document SW writes out macros
A. U. Thor compatible with the package. If the hyperref package is not present SW, writes
The University of Stewart Island out macros compatible with SW version 3.5.
In particular, the menu items Insert, Typ eset Object, Hyp ertext Target and
July 22, 2004 Insert, Typeset Object, Hypertext Reference are available only when the hyperref
package is included.
Also, if you create a PDF file using pdfTeX, the resulting P DF file will
Abstract include active hyperlinks. This sample document includes a table of content
and the link in this sentence to the MacKichan Software, Inc. web site.
We study the effects of warm water on the local penguin population.
The major finding is that it is extremely difficult to induce penguins to
drink warm water. The success factor is approximately −e−i¼ − 1.
Contents
1 The hyperref package 1
1.1 About This Shell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.2 What changes when using the hyperref package? . . . . . . . . . 2
1 The hyperref package

1.1 About This Shell
This shell document provides a sample layout of a Standard LaTeX Article. The
hyperref package has been added. The documentation for this package can be
found by following the appropriate link in the document OptionsPackagesLa-
TeX.tex that is in the SWSamples directory.
The front matter has a number of sample entries that you should replace
with your own. Replace this text with your own. You may delete all of the text
in this document to start with a blank document.
Changes to the typeset format of this shell and its associated LATEX format-
ting files (article.cls and hyperref.sty) are not supported by MacKichan
Software, Inc. If you wish to make such changes, please consult the LATEX
manuals or a lo cal LATEX expert.
If you modify this document and export it as “Standard LaTeX Article
(hyperref).shl” in the Shells\Articles\SW directory, it will become your new
Standard LaTeX Article (hyperref ) shell.
The typesetting specification selected by this shell document uses the default
class options. There are a number of class options supported by this typesetting
specification. The available options include setting the paper size and the point
size of the font used in the body of the document. Select Typ eset, Options and
1 2
Statistics and Decisions 123
Statistics and Decisions

Packages:
sw20stde None
The front matter contains fields for the subject class and for key phrases, which appear at the bottom of the title
page.
Dr. A. U. Thor 2
This short sample document illustrates the typeset appearance of in-line and displayed math-
ematics in documents. It also illustrates five levels of section headings and three kinds of lists.
Finally, the document includes entries for a manual bibliography and an appendix.

P∞
The Title of a Statistics and Decisions Article The expression i=1 a i is in-line mathematics, while the numbered equation
∞
X
ai (1.1)
i=1

Dr. A. U. Thor
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset of H , T a nonexpansive self
P
map of C. Suppose that as n → ∞, a n;k → 0 for each k, and ° n = ∞ +
k=0 (a n;k+1 − a n;k ) → 0.
P k
Then for each x in C, An x = ∞ k=0 a n;k T x converges weakly to a fixed point of T [1].
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays. 1 The spacing above and below a
Received:
display depends on whether the lines above or below are short or long, as shown in the following
examples.
A short line above:
The Date x2 + y2 = z 2
Abstract. This article illustrates many features of a mathematics article, but we do not explain
the spurious appearance of the formula (∇ × F ) · k = z + 1 in this abstract. Replace this text with
your own abstract.
R¯
M athematics can appear in section heads. Note that mathematics in section heads may cause
1.3. Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Env ironments

1980 AMS Subject Classification: Statistics
Keywords and Phrases: Sequenti al analysis
Lemma 1. Let f (z) be an analytic function in C + . If f (z) admits the representation
µ ¶
a1 1
f (z) = a 0 + +o ,
z z
a 1 = − lim z2 f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" . (1.2)

1 A
1
Dr. A. U. Thor 3 Dr. A. U. Thor 4
Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ" → Γ " = {z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ "} and • Bullet item 2.
f (1=z) = a0 + a1 z + o (z) . (1.3) — Second level bullet item.
Fix z ∈ Γ" , and let C r (z) = {¸ ∈ C− : |¸ − z| = r } be a circle with radius r = |z| sin "=2. It ∗ Third level bullet item.
follows from (1.3) that · Fourth and final level bullet item.
Z 1
X Z m
1 f (¸) d¸ 1 (¸ − z0 ) d¸ Description List Each description list item has a lead-in followed by the item. Double-click
= am + R(z), (1.4)
2¼i C H(z) (¸ − z)2
m =0
2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z)
2 the lead-in box to enter or customize the text of the lead-in.
where for the remainder R(z) we have Bunyip Mythical beast of Australian Aboriginal legends.
|R (z)| ≤ r −1 max o (|z|) = r −1 max |¸| · O (|z| + r) 4. About the Bibliography

¸∈ CH (z) ¸∈CH (z)
|z| + r 1 + sin " Following the text of this article is a short manual bibliography. This sample bibliography
= · O (|z| + r) = · O (|z|) .
r sin " has no relationship to the previous text, but it shows sample citations such as [4], [5] and [6].
Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 , and hence by the Cauchy theorem (1.4) implies You can also have multiple citations appear together. Here is an example: [2, 3, 4].
d Bibliography
f (1=z) = a 1 + R(z) → a 1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 ,
dz
that implies (1.2) by substituting 1=z back for z. [1] N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2, John Wiley and Sons, New York,
1963.
2. Section Headings
Use the Section tag for ma jor sections, such as the one just above. Four additional heading chamber pressures”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, 1998a, 41, 3537-3550
2.1. Subsection Heading Mass Transfer, in print
[4] Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular Theory of Gases and Liquids,
Subsubsection Heading. This text appears under a subsubsection heading.
[5] Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E., M olecular thermodynamics for fluid-phase
Subsubsubsection Heading. This text appears under a subsubsubsection heading.
Subsubsubsubsection Heading. This text appears under a subsubsubsubsection heading.
3. Lists Edition, McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1987
Bullet, numbered and description list environments are available. Lists, which can extend A. An Appendix
1. Numbered list item 1. main text , many styles use a different numbering system for equations that appear in the
appendices. √
−b ± b2 − 4ac
(A.1)
2a
The quadratic equation shown as equation A.1 is used to demonstrate how equations are num-
The typeset appearance for this level is often different from the screen appearance.
bered in the appendix.
• Bullet item 1.
TU Wien 125
TU Wien

Packages:
refman None
The Example tag doesn’t create a theorem-like environment in this shell.

The Title of an Article a well-known fact on differentiation of asymptotic expansions of analytic func-
tions.
sentation µ ¶
Abstract a1 1
f (z) = a 0 + +o ,
This article illustrates many features of a mathematics article, but we z z
do not explain the spurious appearance of the formula (∇ × F) · k = z + 1 for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ" = {z ∈ C + : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then
in this abstract.
a 1 = − lim z 2 f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" . (2)
displayed mathematics in documents. It also illustrates five levels of section f (1=z) = a 0 + a1 z + o (z) . (3)
manual bibliography and an appendix. Fix z ∈ Γ" , and let Cr (z) = {¸ ∈ C − : |¸ − z| = r} be a circle with radius
Z Z
(¸ − z0 )m d¸
1
X
P∞ 1 f (¸) d¸ 1
The expression i= 1 a i is in-line mathematics, while the numbered equation
= am + R(z), (4)
2¼i C H(z) (¸ − z)2 m =0
2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z)2
∞
X
i=1
|R (z)| ≤ r −1 max o (|z|) = r −1 max |¸| · O (|z| + r)
is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 1. ¸∈ CH (z) ¸∈ CH (z)
|z| + r 1 + sin "

Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset of H , T a = · O (|z| + r) = · O (|z|) .
nonexpansive self map of C. Suppose that as n → ∞, a n;k → 0 for each k, and r sin "
P∞ P∞
° n = k=0 (an;k+1 − a n;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C , A n x = k=0 a n;k T k x
+
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays.1 The spacing
above and below a display depends on whether the lines above or below are d
f (1=z) = a 1 + R(z) → a 1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 ,
short or long, as shown in the following examples. dz
A short line above: that implies (2) by substituting 1=z back for z.
x +y =z
2 2 2

2 Section Headings
A long line above may depend on your margins Use the Section tag for major sections, such as the one just above. Four addi-
sin 2 µ + cos 2 µ = 1
mathematical displays, regardless of the margins. This text appears under a subsection heading.
R¯ 2.1.1 Subsubsection Heading

ln tdt
Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note that mathematics in section This text appears under a subsubsection heading.
of contents entries. Subsubsubsection Heading This text appears under a subsubsubsection
1 A
LT
heading.
Subsubsubsubsection Heading This text appears under a subsubsubsub-

section heading.
1 2
3 Lists A An Appendix
Bullet, numbered and description list environments are available. Lists, which Because appendices may contain material that is supplementary rather than
can extend four levels deep, look like this: integral to the main text , many styles use a different numbering system for
√
2. Numbered list item 2. −b ± b2 − 4ac
(5)
2a
The typeset appearance for this level is often different from the screen tions are numbered in the appendix.

• Bullet item 1.
• Bullet item 2.

Description List: Each description list item has a lead-in followed by the item. Double-click
the lead-in box to enter or customize the text of the lead-in.
Bunyip: Mythical beast of Australian Aboriginal legends.

bibliography has no relationship to the previous text, but it shows sample ci-
tations such as [4], [5] and [6]. You can also have multiple citations appear
References
[2] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behavior in fluid
41, 3537-3550
[6] Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Properties of Gases
3 4
TU Wien Article (new) 127
TU Wien Article (new)
Document class base file: refart.cls

Packages:
amsmath None
For further documentation, follow the appropriate link in the document OptionsPackagesLaTeX.tex in the SWSam-
ples directory of your program installation.
R¯
ln tdt

heads may cause difficulties in typesetting styles with running headers or
The Title of an Article table of contents entries.
A number of theorem-like environments is available. The following lemma

Dr. Author Jones is a well-known fact on differentiation of asymptotic expansions of analytic
At this Address functions.
Lemma 1 Let f (z) be an analyti c function in C + . If f (z) admits the
July 23, 2004
representation µ ¶
a1 1
Abstract f (z) = a 0 + +o ,
z z
This article illustrates many features of a mathematics article, but we for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ" = {z ∈ C + : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then
do not explain the spurious appearance of the formula (∇ × F) · k =
z + 1 in this abstract. a 1 = − lim z 2 f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" . (2)
1 Sample Mathematics and Text Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ " → Γ" = {z ∈ C − : z ∈ Γ" } and
This short sample document illustrates the typeset appearance of in-line
f (1=z) = a 0 + a 1 z + o (z) . (3)
section headings and three kinds of lists. Finally, the document includes Fix z ∈ Γ" , and let C r (z) = {¸ ∈ C− : |¸ − z| = r} be a circle with radius
entries for a manual bibliography and an appendix. r = |z| sin "=2. It follows from (3) that
1.1 In-line and Displayed Mathematics Z 1
X Z m
1 f (¸) d¸ 1 (¸ − z0 ) d¸
P∞ = am + R(z), (4)
The expression i=1 a i is in-line mathematics, while the numbered equation 2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z)
2
m=0
2¼i C H (z)
2
(¸ − z)
∞
X
i= 1
|R(z)| ≤ r−1 max o (|z|) = r−1 max |¸| · O (|z| + r )
is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 1. ¸∈C H (z) ¸∈CH (z)
|z| + r 1 + sin "

Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset of H , T = · O (|z| + r) = · O (|z|) .
a nonexpansive self map of C . Suppose that as n → ∞, a n;k → 0 for r sin "
P∞ +
each k ,Pand ° n = k= 0 (a n;k+1 − a n;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C, Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2 , and hence by the Cauchy theorem
k
An x = ∞ k=0 an;k T x converges weakly to a fixed point of T [1]. (4) implies
above and below a display depends on whether the lines above or below are d
f (1=z) = a 1 + R(z) → a 1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 ,
short or long, as shown in the following examples. dz
2 2 2
x +y = z
A long line above may depend on your margins Use the Section tag for major sections, such as the one just above. Four
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing 2.1 Subsection Heading
1 A
1 2
2.1.1 Subsubsection Heading References

This text appears under a subsubsection heading. [1] N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2, John Wiley and
Subsubsubsection Heading This text appears under a subsubsubsec- [2] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behavior in fluid
tion heading. hydrogen at rocket chamber pressures”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer,
1998a, 41, 3537-3550
[3] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical con-
subsection heading.
ditions”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, in print
3 Lists [4] Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular Theory of
Gases and Liquids, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., 1964
[5] Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E., Molecular thermo-
dynamics for fluid-phase equilibrium, Prentice -Hall, Inc., 1986
1. Numbered list item 1. [6] Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Properties of Gases
2. Numbered list item 2. and Liquids, 4th Edition, McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1987

A An Appendix
screen appearance. The typeset appearance often uses parenthe- Because appendices may contain material that is supplementary rather than
ses around the level indicator. integral to the main text , many styles use a different numbering system for
(b) Another numbered list item under a list item. √
−b ± b 2 − 4ac
i. Third level numbered list item under a list item. (5)
2a
• Bullet item 1. equations are numbered in the appendix.
• Bullet item 2.

Description List : Each description list item has a lead-in followed by the item. Double-
Bunyip : Mythical beast of Australian Aboriginal legends.

3 4
World Scientific Proceedings 9.00x6.00
Document class base file: ws-procs9x6.cls

Packages:
None
The shell has no fields in the front matter. Instead, the body of the document contains TEX fields for the title,
author, and abstract of the article.
April 28, 2003 13:0 WSPC/Trim Size: 9in x 6in for Proceedings WorldScientificProceedings9x6 April 28, 2003 13:0 WSPC/Trim Size: 9in x 6in for Proceedings WorldScientificProceedings9x6

sin 2 µ + cos 2 µ = 1
THE TITLE OF AN ARTICLE as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing
DR. AUTHOR JONES R¯

ln tdt
At this Address
This article illustrates many features of a m athematics article, but we do not
explain the spurious appearance of the formula (∇ × F) · k = z + 1 in this abstract. table of contents entries.
1.3. Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like

Environments
section headings and three kinds of lists. Finally, the document includes
functions.
Lemma 1.1. Let f (z) be an analytic function in C + . If f (z) admits the
1.1. In-line and Displayed Mathematics representation
P∞ µ ¶
The expression i=1 a i is in-line mathematics, while the numbered equa- a1 1
f (z) = a 0 + +o ,
tion z z
X∞
ai (1)
i=1 a 1 = − lim z 2 f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" . (2)
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset of H , Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ " → Γ" = {z ∈ C − : z ∈ Γ" } and
T a nonexpansive self map of C. Suppose that as n → ∞, a n;k → 0 for f (1=z) = a0 + a 1z + o (z) . (3)
P∞ +
each k , and ° n = k=0 (an;k+1 − an;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C,
P∞ Fix z ∈ Γ" , and let C r (z) = {¸ ∈ C − : |¸ − z| = r} be a circle with radius
An x = k=0 an;k T k x converges weakly to a fixed point of T 1 .
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays. a The spac- r = |z| sin "=2. It follows from (3) that
Z Z
(¸ − z0 )m d¸
X1
ing above and below a display depends on whether the lines above or below 1 f (¸) d¸ 1
are short or long, as shown in the following examples. = am + R(z), (4)
2¼i C H(z) (¸ − z)2 m=0
2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z)2
A short line above:
x 2 + y 2 = z2
|R(z)| ≤ r −1 max o (|z|) = r −1 max |¸| · O (|z| + r )
and a short line below. ¸∈C H(z ) ¸∈C H( z)
|z| + r 1 + sin "

aA
LT EX autom atically selects the spacing depending on the surrounding line lengths.
= · O (|z| + r) = · O (|z|) .
r sin "
1
April 28, 2003 13:0 WSPC/Trim Size: 9in x 6in for Proceedings WorldScientificProceedings9x6 April 28, 2003 13:0 WSPC/Trim Size: 9in x 6in for Proceedings WorldScientificProceedings9x6
3 4
Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2 , and hence by the Cauchy theorem • Bullet item 1.
(4) implies • Bullet item 2.
d
f (1=z) = a 1 + R(z) → a1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2 , ∗ Third level bullet item.
dz

2. Section Headings
Use the Section tag for major sections, such as the one just above. Four Following the text of this article is a short manual bibliography. This sample
citations such as 4 , 5 and 6 . You can also have multiple citations appear
together. Here is an example: 2;3;4 .
This text appears under a subsection heading. References
1. N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2, John Wiley and Sons,
2.1.1. Subsubsection Heading New York, 1963.
2. Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behavior in fluid hy-
drogen at rocket chamber pressures”, Int. J. H eat Mass Transfer, 1998a, 41,
3537-3550
Subsubsubsection Heading This text appears under a subsubsubsection 3. Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical condi-
heading. tions”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, in print
5. Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E., Molecular thermodynam-
subsection heading. ics for fluid-phase equilibrium, Prentice -Hall, Inc., 1986
6. Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Properties of Gases and
3. Lists Liquids, 4th Edition, McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1987
Bullet and numbered list environments are available. Lists, which can ex-
tend four levels deep, look like this: Appendix A. An Appendix
(2) Numbered list item 2. integral to the main text , many styles use a different numbering system
for equations that appear in the appendices.
(a) A numbered list item under a list item. √
The typeset appearance for this level is often different from −b ± b2 − 4ac
(A.1)
the screen appearance. The typeset appearance often uses 2a
parentheses around the level indicator. The quadratic equation shown as equation A.1 is used to demonstrate how
(b) Another numbered list item under a list item. equations are numbered in the appendix.
World Scientific Proceedings 9.75x6.50 (updated) 131
World Scientific Proceedings 9.75x6.50 (updated)
Document class base file: ws-procs975x65.cls

Packages:
None
July 12, 2004 11:38 Proceedings Trim Size: 9.75in x 6.5in swp0002 July 12, 2004 11:38 Proceedings Trim Size: 9.75in x 6.5in swp0002
R¯
1.2. Mathematic s in section heads ®
ln tdt
THE TITLE OF AN ARTICLE may cause difficulties in typesetting styles with running headers or table of contents
entries.
DR. AUTHOR JONES 1.3. Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Env ironments
At this Address
This article illustrates many features of a mathematics article, but we do not explain the
spurious appearance of the formula (∇ × F ) · k = z + 1 in this abstract. Lemma 1.1. Let f (z) be an analytic function in C + . If f (z) admits the represen-
tation
µ ¶
a1 1
1. Sample Mathematics and Text f (z) = a0 + +o ,
z z
played mathematics in documents. It also illustrates five levels of section headings
and three kinds of lists. Finally, the document includes entries for a manual bibli- a1 = − lim z 2 f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" . (2)
ography and an appendix.
f (1=z) = a0 + a1 z + o (z) . (3)
P
The expression ∞i=1 ai is in-line mathematics, while the numbered equation
Fix z ∈ Γ" , and let C r (z) = {¸ ∈ C − : |¸ − z| = r} be a circle with radius
∞
X r = |z| sin "=2. It follows from (3) that
ai (1)
i=1 Z X1 Z m
1 f (¸) d¸ 1 (¸ − z0 ) d¸
is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 1. = am + R(z), (4)
2¼i C H(z ) (¸ − z)2 m=0
2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z)2
nonexpansive self map of C. Suppose that as n → ∞, an;k → 0 for each k, and where for the remainder R(z) we have
P∞ + P∞ k
°n = k=0 (an;k+1 − an;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C, A n x = k=0 an;k T x |R(z)| ≤ r − 1 max o (|z|) = r −1 max |¸| · O (|z| + r )
converges weakly to a fixed point of T 1 . ¸∈C H(z ) ¸∈C H (z)
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays.a The spacing above |z| + r 1 + sin "
= · O (|z| + r) = · O (|z|) .
and below a display depends on whether the lines above or below are short or long, r sin "
as shown in the following examples. Therefore R (z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2 , and hence by the Cauchy theorem (4)
A short line above: implies
x2 + y 2 = z2
d
and a short line below. f (1=z) = a1 + R(z) → a1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 ,
A long line above may depend on your margins dz
sin 2 µ + cos 2 µ = 1
2. Section Headings
aLAT heading levels are available, as described below.
1
July 12, 2004 11:38 Proceedings Trim Size: 9.75in x 6.5in swp0002 July 12, 2004 11:38 Proceedings Trim Size: 9.75in x 6.5in swp0002
3 4
2.1. Subsection Heading References

This text appears under a subsection heading. 1. N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2, John Wiley and Sons, New
York, 1963.
2. Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behavior in fluid hydrogen at
2.1.1. Subsubsection Heading
3. Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical conditions”, Int. J.
This text appears under a subsubsection heading. Heat Mass Transfer, in print
4. Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular Theory of Gases and Liquids,
Subsubsubsection Heading This text appears under a subsubsubsection head- John Wiley and Sons, Inc., 1964
ing. 5. Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E., Molecular thermodynamics for
6. Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Prop erties of Gases and Liquids,
Subsubsubsubsection Heading This text appears under a subsubsubsubsection 4th Edition, McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1987
heading.
3. Lists Because appendices may contain material that is supplementary rather than integral
Bullet, numbered and description list environments are available. Lists, which can to the m ain text , many styles use a different numbering system for equations that
appear in the appendices.
extend four levels deep, look like this: √
−b ± b2 − 4ac
(1) Numbered list item 1. (A.1)
2a
(2) Numbered list item 2. The quadratic equation shown as equation A.1 is used to demonstrate how equations
(a) A numbered list item under a list item. are numbered in the appendix.
The typeset appearance for this level is often different f rom the screen
• Bullet item 1.
• Bullet item 2.

Following the text of this article is a short manual bibliography. This sample bib-
liography has no relationship to the previous text, but it shows sample citations
such as 4 , 5 and 6 . You can also have multiple citations appear together. Here is
an example: 2 ;3;4 .
Document class base file: ws-p10x7.cls

Packages:
None
For Publisher’s use For Publisher’s use
THE TITLE OF AN ARTICLE |z| sin"=2. It follows from (3) that (a) A numbered list item under a list
Z item.
1 f (¸) d¸
= The typeset appearance for this
DR. AUTHOR JONES 2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z)2
level is often different from the
At this Address X1 Z m
1 (¸ − z0 ) d¸ screen appearance. The typeset
am + R(z),
m=0
2¼i CH(z) (¸ − z)2 appearance often uses parentheses
This article illustrates many features of a mathematics article, but we do not explain the spurious
appearance of the formula (∇× F) · k = z + 1 in this abstract. (4) around the level indicator.
where for the remainder R(z) we have (b) Another numbered list item under
1 Sample Mathematics and Text A long line above may depend on your a list item.
margins |R(z)| ≤ r−1 max o(|z|)
¸∈CH (z) i. Third level numbered list item
This short sample document illustrates the
typeset appearance of in-line and displayed sin2 µ + cos2 µ = 1 = r−1 max |¸| · O (|z| + r) under a list item.
¸∈CH (z)
mathematics in documents. It also illustrates A. Fourth and final level of
as will a long line below. This line is long |z| + r
five levels of section headings and three kinds = · O (|z| + r) numbered list items al-
enough to illustrate the spacing for mathe- r
of lists. Finally, the document includes en- matical displays, regardless of the margins. 1 + sin" lowed.
tries for a manual bibliography and an ap- = · O (|z|) .
sin "
pendix. • Bullet item 1.
1.2 Mathematics in section heads
R¯ Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2, and
®
ln tdt hence by the Cauchy theorem (4) implies • Bullet item 2.
P∞ Mathematics can appear in section heads.
The expression i=1 ai is in-line mathemat- d — Second level bullet item.
Note that mathematics in section heads may f (1=z) = a1 + R(z) → a1 ,
ics, while the numbered equation cause difficulties in typesetting styles with dz
∞ running headers or table of contents entries. as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2,
X · Fourth and final level bul-
ai (1) that implies (2) by substituting 1=z back for let item.
i=1
1.3 Theorems, Lemmata, and Other z.
is displayed and automatically numbered as Theorem-like Environments Description List Each description list item
equation 1. 2 Section Headings has a lead-in followed by the item.
A number of theorem-like environments is
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed Double-click the lead-in box to enter or
available. The following lemma is a well-
bounded convex subset of H, T a nonex- Use the Section tag for major sections, such customize the text of the lead-in.
pansive self map of C. Suppose that as as the one just above. This typesetting spec-
expansions of analytic functions. Bunyip Mythical beast of Australian Abo-
n → ∞, an;k → 0 for each k, and ° n = ification provides only for the addional level
P∞ + Lemma 1 Let f (z) be an analytic function riginal legends.
k=0 (an;k+1P− an;k ) → 0. Then for each x of subsection, shown below.
in C, An x = ∞ k in C+. If f (z) admits the representation
k=0 an;k T x converges weakly
µ ¶
to a fixed point of T 1 . a1 1 2.1 Subsection Heading 4 Tags
f (z) = a0 + + o ,
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern z z This text appears under a subsection head-
mathematical displays.a The spacing above You can apply the logical markup tag Em-
for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ" = ing.
phasized.
and below a display depends on whether the
{z ∈ C+ : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then You can apply the visual markup tags
lines above or below are short or long, as
3 Lists Bold, Italics, Roman, Sans Serif, Slanted,
shown in the following examples. a1 = − limz2 f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ". (2)
A short line above: Small Caps, and Typewriter.
Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ" → Γ" = Bullet, numbered and description list envi-
You can apply the special, mathe-
x2 + y 2 = z 2 {z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ" } and ronments are available. Lists, which can ex-
matics only, tags BLACKBOARD BOLD,
tend four levels deep, look like this:
CALLIGRAPHIC, and fraktur. Note that
and a short line below. f (1=z) = a0 + a1 z + o (z). (3)
1. Numbered list item 1. blackboard bold and calligraphic are correct
=L
AT X automatically selects the spacing depending
E
Fix z ∈ Γ", and let Cr (z) = {¸ ∈ C− : only when applied to uppercase letters A
on the surrounding line lengths. |¸ − z| = r} be a circle with radius r = 2. Numbered list item 2. through Z.
For Publisher’s use
You can apply the size tags tiny, scriptsize, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, 1998a, 41,
footnotesize, small, normalsize, large, Large, 3537-3550
LARGE, huge and Huge. 3. Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis
number under supercritical conditions”,
This is a Body Math paragraph. Each
time you press the Enter key, Scientific Work-
4. Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and
Place switches to mathematics mode. This
Bird, R. B., Molecular Theory of Gases
is convenient for carrying out “scratchpad”
and Liquids, John Wiley and Sons, Inc.,
computations. 1964
Following is a group of paragraphs
5. Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de
marked as Short Quote. This environment
is appropriate for a short quotation or a se-
quence of short quotations.
-Hall, Inc., 1986
The buck stops here. Harry Tru- 6. Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and
man Polling, B. E., The Properties of Gases
and Liquids, 4th Edition, McGraw-Hill
Ask not what your country can do
Book Company, 1987
for you; ask what you can do for
your country. John F. Kennedy
Appendix
It’s no exaggeration to say the unde- A An Appendix
cideds could go one way or another.
Because appendices may contain material
George H. W. Bush
that is supplementary rather than integral to
I did not have sexual relations with the main text , many styles use a different
that woman, Miss Lewinsky. Bill numbering system for equations that appear
Clinton in the appendices.
They misunderestimated me. √
−b ± b 2 − 4ac
George W. Bush (5)
2a
The quadratic equation shown as equation
5 is used to demonstrate how equations are
Following the text of this article is a short numbered in the appendix.
manual bibliography. This sample bibliogra-
phy has no relationship to the previous text,
but it shows sample citations such as 4, 5 and
6
. You can also have multiple citations ap-
pear together. Here is an example: 2;3;4.
References
1. N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional

Analysis, v. 2, John Wiley and Sons,
New York, 1963.
2. Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated
fluid oxygen drop behavior in fluid hy-
drogen at rocket chamber pressures”,
Document class base file: ws-p10x7.cls

Packages:
None
THE TITLE OF AN ARTICLE where for the remainder R(z) we have The typeset appearance often uses paren-
theses around the level indicator.
|R(z)| ≤ r −1 max o (|z|)
¸∈C H (z )
DR. AUTHOR JONES (b) Another numbered list item under a list
= r −1 max |¸| · O (|z| + r) item.
At this Address ¸∈C H (z )
|z| + r i. Third level numbered list item under a

This article illustrates many features of a mathematics article, but we do not explain the spurious appearance of the = · O (|z| + r)
r list item.
formula (∇ × F ) · k = z + 1 in this abstract.
1 + sin "
= · O (|z|) . A. Fourth and final level of numbered
R¯ sin " list items allowed.
1 Sample Mathematics and Text 1.2 Mathematics in section heads ln tdt
® Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 , and hence
This short sam ple document illustrates the typeset Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note that by the Cauchy theorem (4) implies • Bullet item 1.
appearance of in-line and displayed mathematics in mathem atics in section heads may cause difficulties
d • Bullet item 2.
documents. It also illustrates five levels of section in typesetting styles with running headers or table of
f (1=z) = a1 + R(z) → a1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 ,
headings and three kinds of lists. Finally, the docu- contents entries. dz
ment includes entries for a manual bibliography and that implies (2) by substituting 1=z back for z.
an appendix. ∗ Third level bullet item.
1.3 Theorems, Lemmata, and Other
2 Section Headings · Fourth and final level bullet item.
P∞ A number of theorem-like environments is available. Use the Section tag for ma jor sections, such as the Description List Each description list item has a
The expression i= 1 ai is in-line mathematics, while one just above. Four additional heading levels are
The following lemma is a well-known fact on differ- lead-in followed by the item. Double-click the
entiation of asymptotic expansions of analytic func- available, as described below. lead-in box to enter or customize the text of the
∞
X tions. lead-in.
ai (1) 2.1 Subsection Heading
i=1 Lemma 1 Let f (z) be an analytic function in C + . Bunyip Mythical beast of Australian Aboriginal
If f (z) admits the representation This text appears under a subsection heading. legends.
is displayed and automatically numbered as equation
1. µ ¶ (Subsubsection head:)Subsubsection Heading
a1 1 This text appears under a subsubsection head-
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded f (z) = a0 + +o , 4 About the Bibliography
convex subset of H, T a nonexpansive self map of C . z z ing.
(Subsubsubsection head:)Subsubsubsection
Suppose that as n → ∞, an; k → 0 for each k, and Following the text of this article is a short manual
P∞ + for z → ∞ in- Heading
° n = k=0 (an;k+1 − an;k ) → 0. Then for each x bibliography. This sample bibliography has no rela-
P∞ k side a cone Γ" = {z ∈ C + : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} This text appears under a subsubsubsection
in C, A n x = k= 0 an;k T x converges weakly to a tionship to the previous text, but it shows sample
then heading.
fixed point of T 1 . citations such as 4 , 5 and 6 . You can also have mul-
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathemat- (Subsubsubsubsection tiple citations appear together. Here is an example:
a1 = − lim z 2 f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" . (2) head:)Subsubsubsubsection Heading
ical displays.a The spacing above and below a dis- 2 ;3;4 .
play depends on whether the lines above or below are This text appears under a subsubsubsubsection
short or long, as shown in the following examples. Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ" → Γ " = heading.
References
A short line above: {z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ" } and
3 Lists 1. N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analy-
x2 + y2 = z 2 f (1=z) = a0 + a1 z + o (z) . (3) sis, v. 2, John Wiley and Sons, New York, 1963.
Bullet, numbered and description list environments
and a short line below. 2. Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxy-
Fix z ∈ Γ" , and let Cr (z) = {¸ ∈ C− : |¸ − z| = r} are available. Lists, which can extend four levels
A long line above may depend on your margins gen drop behavior in fluid hydrogen at rocket
be a circle with radius r = |z| sin "=2. It follows from deep, look like this:
chamber pressures”, Int. J. Heat Mass Trans-
sin2 µ + cos2 µ = 1 (3) that fer, 1998a, 41, 3537-3550
3. Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis num-
as will a long line below. This line is long enough Z
1 f (¸) d¸ 2. Numbered list item 2. ber under supercritical conditions”, Int. J. Heat
to illustrate the spacing for mathematical displays, 2 =
regardless of the margins.
2¼i (¸ − z)
CH (z) Mass Transfer, in print
1 Z m
(a) A numbered list item under a list item. 4. Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B.,
X 1 (¸ − z 0 ) d¸
=L
AT
EX automatically selects the spacing depending on the am + R (z), (4) The typeset appearance for this level is of- Molecular Theory of Gases and Liquids, John
m=0
2¼i C H (z) (¸ − z)2
surrounding line lengths. ten different from the screen appearance. Wiley and Sons, Inc., 1964
1
5. Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo,

E., Molecular thermodynam ics for fluid-phase
6. Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B.
Appendix
A An Appendix
Because appendices may contain material that is

supplementary rather than integral to the main text
, many styles use a different numbering system for
√
−b ± b 2 − 4ac
(5)
2a
The quadratic equation shown as equation 5 is used
to demonstrate how equations are numbered in the
appendix.
Author Packages for AMS
Shells
The shell documents in the directory Author Packages for AMS Shells are available for
creating documents suitable for sending to the American Mathematical Society. See
http://www.ams.org/tex/author-info.html for a complete list of publications.
138 Chapter 3 Author Packages for AMS Shells
Contemporary Mathematics (Proceedings)
Document class base file: conm-p-l.cls

Packages:
None
The shell produces documents that follow the typesetting specifications of the publication Contemporary Math-
ematics (Proceedings) from the American Mathematical Society.
Contemporary Mathematics
2 AUTHOR ONE, AUTHOR TWO, AND AUTHOR THREE

R¯
1.2. Mathematics in section heads ® ln tdt . Mathematics can appear in
section heads. Note that mathematics in section heads may cause difficulties in
The Full Title of an AMS Proceedings Article typesetting styles with running headers or table of contents entries.
Author One, Author Two, and Author Three 1.3. Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environments. A
number of theorem-like environments is available. The following lemma is a well-
Lemma 1.1 . Let f (z ) be an analytic function in C+ . If f ( z) admits the rep-
resentation µ ¶
Abstract. Replace this text with your own abstract. a1 1
f (z ) = a 0 + +o ,
z z
1. Sample Mathematics and Text (1.2) a 1 = − lim z 2 f 0 (z ) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" .
This short sample document illustrates the typeset appearance of in-line and Proof. Change z for 1=z . Then Γ" → Γ" = { z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ" } and
displayed mathematics in documents. It also illustrates five levels of section head- (1.3) f (1=z ) = a 0 + a 1 z + o (z) .
bibliography and an appendix. Fix z ∈ Γ" , and let C r (z ) = {¸ ∈ C− : |¸ − z | = r} be a circle with radius
P∞ r = |z| sin "=2. It follows from (1.3) that
1.1. In-line and Displayed Mathematics. The expression i =1 a i is in- Z 1
X Z m
1 f (¸ ) d¸ 1 ( ¸ − z0 ) d¸
line mathematics, while the numbered equation (1.4) = am + R(z ),
∞ 2 ¼i C H( z) (¸ − z )2 2¼i C H(z ) (¸ − z )2
X m= 0
(1.1) ai where for the remainder R (z) we have
i=1
|R(z )| ≤ r −1 max o (|z|) = r −1 max |¸ | · O (|z | + r)
is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 1.1. ¸∈C H(z ) ¸∈C H(z )
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset of H , T a |z | + r 1 + sin "
nonexpansive self map of C . Suppose that as n → ∞, an;k → 0 for each k, and = · O (|z | + r) = · O (|z|) .
P∞ P∞ r sin "
→ 0. Then for each x in C , An x = k =0 a n;k T k x
+
°n = k =0 (an;k +1 − a n;k ) Therefore R( z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"= 2 , and hence by the Cauchy theorem (1.4)
implies
above and below a display depends on whether the lines above or below are short d
or long, as shown in the following examples. f (1=z) = a 1 + R (z) → a1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 ,
dz
A short line above: that implies (1.2) by substituting 1 =z back for z. ¤
x2 + y 2 = z2
and a short line below. 2. Section Headings
Use the Section tag for ma jor sections, such as the one just above. Four addi-
Thanks for Author One. 2.1. Subsection Heading. This text appears under a subsection heading.
Thanks for Author Two.
This paper is in final form and no version of it will be submitted for publication elsewhere. 2.1.1. Subsubsection Heading. This text appears under a subsubsection head-
E ing.
Subsubsubsection Heading. This text appears under a subsubsubsection head-
°2001
c enter name of copyright h older ing.
1
Contemporary Mathematics (Proceedings) 139
SHORT TITLE 3 4 AUTHOR ONE, AUTHOR TWO, AND AUTHOR THREE
Subsubsubsubsection Heading. This text appears under a subsubsubsubsection head- that appear in the appendices.
ing. √
−b ± b 2 − 4 ac
(A.1)
2a
3. Lists The quadratic equation shown as equation A.1 is used to demonstrate how equations
Bullet, numbered and description list environments are available. Lists, which are numbered in the appendix.
can extend four levels deep, look like this: (A. One and A. Two) Author OneTwo address line 1, Author OneTwo address line 2
(1) Numbered list item 1. E-mail address, A. One: aone@aoneinst.edu
URL: http://www.authorone.oneuniv.edu
(a) A numbered list item under a list item. Current address, A. Two: Author Two current address line 1, Author Two current address
The typeset appearance for this level is often different from the screen line 2
appearance. The typeset appearance often uses parentheses around E-mail address, A. Two: atwo@atwoinst.edu
URL: http://www.authortwo.twouniv.edu
(b) Another numbered list item under a list item. (A. Three) Author Three address line 1, Author Three address line 2
(i) Third level numbered list item under a list item. URL: http://www.authorthree.threeuniv.edu
(A) Fourth and final level of numbered list items allowed.
• Bullet item 1.
• Bullet item 2.
Description List: Each description list item has a lead-in followed by the
lead-in.

References
chamber pressures”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer , 1998a, 41, 3537-3550
[4] Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular Theory of Gases and Liquids , John
Generic Journal
Document class base file: gen-j-l.cls

Packages:
None
The shell produces documents that follow the generic typesetting specifications from the American Mathematical
Society for journals when a journal-specific typesetting specification is not available.
Unspecified Journ al
Volume 00, Numb er 0, Pages 000—000
S ????-????(XX)0000-0
R¯
1.2. Mathematics in section heads ® ln tdt . Mathematics can appear in sec-
THE FULL TITLE OF AN AMS PROCEEDINGS ARTICLE
AUTHOR ONE, AUTHOR TWO, AND AUTHOR THREE ber of theorem-like environments is available. The following lemma is a well-known
Lemma 1.1. Let f (z ) be an analytic function in C+ . If f ( z) admits the repre-
sentation µ ¶
Abstract. Replace this text with your own abstract.
a1 1
f (z ) = a 0 + +o ,
z z
(1.2) a 1 = − lim z 2 f 0 (z ) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" .
displayed mathematics in documents. It also illustrates five levels of section head- Proof. Change z for 1 =z . Then Γ " → Γ" = {z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ" } and
bibliography and an appendix. (1.3) f (1=z ) = a 0 + a 1 z + o (z) .
P∞ Fix z ∈ Γ" , and let C r (z ) = {¸ ∈ C− : |¸ − z | = r} be a circle with radius
1.1. In-line and Displayed Mathematics. The expression i= 1 a i is in-line
mathematics, while the numbered equation r = |z| sin "=2. It follows from (1.3) that
X∞ Z Z
( ¸ − z0 )m d¸
X1
1 f (¸ ) d¸ 1
(1.1) ai (1.4) = am + R(z ),
i=1
2 ¼i C H( z) (¸ − z )2 2¼i C H(z ) (¸ − z )2
m= 0
is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 1.1. where for the remainder R (z) we have
nonexpansive self map of C . Suppose that as n → ∞, an;k → 0 for each k, and |R(z )| ≤ r −1 max o (|z|) = r −1 max |¸ | · O (|z | + r)
P∞ + P∞ ¸∈C H(z ) ¸∈C H(z )
°n = k =0 (an;k +1 − a n;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C , An x = k =0 a n;k T k x
converges weakly to a fixed point of T [1]. |z | + r 1 + sin "
= · O (|z | + r) = · O (|z|) .
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays.1 The spacing above r sin "
and below a display depends on whether the lines above or below are short or long, Therefore R( z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"= 2 , and hence by the Cauchy theorem (1.4)
as shown in the following examples. implies
A short line above:
x2 + y 2 = z2 d
f (1=z) = a 1 + R (z) → a1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 ,
A long line above may depend on your margins that implies (1.2) by substituting 1 =z back for z. ¤
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for 2. Section Headings
Use the Section tag for major sections, such as the one just above. Four addi-
Received by the editors July 27, 2001. tional heading levels are available, as described below.
Key words and phrases. Keyword one, keyword two, keyword three. 2.1. Subsection Heading. This text appears under a subsection heading.
Thanks for Author One.
This paper is in final form and no version of it will be submitted for publication elsewhere. 2.1.1. Subsubsection Heading. This text appears under a subsubsection heading.
E
Subsubsubsubsection Heading. This text appears under a subsubsubsubsection head-
°2001
1
Generic Journal 141
E-mail address, A. One: aone@aoneinst.edu
(1) Numbered list item 1. URL: http://www.authorone.oneuniv.edu
line 2
The typeset appearance for this level is often different from the screen E-mail address, A. Two: atwo@atwoinst.edu
appearance. The typeset appearance often uses parentheses around URL: http://www.authortwo.twouniv.edu
(A. Three) Author Three address line 1, Author Three address line 2
URL: http://www.authorthree.threeuniv.edu
(i) Third level numbered list item under a list item.
• Bullet item 1.
• Bullet item 2.
lead-in.

References
√
−b ± b 2 − 4 ac
(A.1)
2a
Mathematics of Computation
Document class base file: mcom-l.cls

Packages:
None
The shell produces documents that follow the typesetting specifications of the publication Mathematics of Com-
putation from the American Mathematical Society.
MATHEMATICS OF COMPU TATION

Volume 00, Numb er 0, Pages 000—000
S 0025-5718(XX)0000-0
R¯
1.2. Mathematics in section heads ® ln tdt . Mathematics can appear in sec-
THE FULL TITLE OF AN AMS PROCEEDINGS ARTICLE
AUTHOR ONE, AUTHOR TWO, AND AUTHOR THREE ber of theorem-like environments is available. The following lemma is a well-known
Lemma 1.1. Let f (z ) be an analytic function in C+ . If f ( z) admits the repre-
sentation µ ¶
Abstract. Replace this text with your own abstract.
a1 1
f (z ) = a 0 + +o ,
z z
(1.2) a 1 = − lim z 2 f 0 (z ) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" .
displayed mathematics in documents. It also illustrates five levels of section head- Proof. Change z for 1 =z . Then Γ " → Γ" = {z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ" } and
bibliography and an appendix. (1.3) f (1=z ) = a 0 + a 1 z + o (z) .
P∞ Fix z ∈ Γ" , and let C r (z ) = {¸ ∈ C− : |¸ − z | = r} be a circle with radius
1.1. In-line and Displayed Mathematics. The expression i= 1 a i is in-line
mathematics, while the numbered equation r = |z| sin "=2. It follows from (1.3) that
X∞ Z Z
( ¸ − z0 )m d¸
X1
1 f (¸ ) d¸ 1
(1.1) ai (1.4) = am + R(z ),
i=1
2 ¼i C H( z) (¸ − z )2 2¼i C H(z ) (¸ − z )2
m= 0
is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 1.1. where for the remainder R (z) we have
nonexpansive self map of C . Suppose that as n → ∞, an;k → 0 for each k, and |R(z )| ≤ r −1 max o (|z|) = r −1 max |¸ | · O (|z | + r)
P∞ + P∞ ¸∈C H(z ) ¸∈C H(z )
°n = k =0 (an;k +1 − a n;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C , An x = k =0 a n;k T k x
= · O (|z | + r) = · O (|z|) .
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays.1 The spacing above r sin "
and below a display depends on whether the lines above or below are short or long, Therefore R( z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"= 2 , and hence by the Cauchy theorem (1.4)
A short line above:
x2 + y 2 = z2 d
f (1=z) = a 1 + R (z) → a1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 ,
A long line above may depend on your margins that implies (1.2) by substituting 1 =z back for z. ¤
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for 2. Section Headings
Use the Section tag for major sections, such as the one just above. Four addi-
Received by the editor July 27, 2001. tional heading levels are available, as described below.
Key words and phrases. Keyword one, keyword two, keyword three. 2.1. Subsection Heading. This text appears under a subsection heading.
Thanks for Author One.
This paper is in final form and no version of it will be submitted for publication elsewhere. 2.1.1. Subsubsection Heading. This text appears under a subsubsection heading.
E
°2001
1
Mathematics of Computation 143
E-mail address, A. One: aone@aoneinst.edu
(1) Numbered list item 1. URL: http://www.authorone.oneuniv.edu
line 2
The typeset appearance for this level is often different from the screen E-mail address, A. Two: atwo@atwoinst.edu
appearance. The typeset appearance often uses parentheses around URL: http://www.authortwo.twouniv.edu
(A. Three) Author Three address line 1, Author Three address line 2
URL: http://www.authorthree.threeuniv.edu
• Bullet item 1.
• Bullet item 2.
lead-in.

References
√
−b ± b 2 − 4 ac
(A.1)
2a
Book Shells
Most book shells are based on the typesetting specifications set in one of two base doc-
ument classes—book.cls or report.cls. The program uses several other .cls
files for customized book shells. Book shells generally have extensive front and back
matter. The shells produce documents with up to five heading levels defined for the
body of the document, in addition to chapters and, in some cases, parts. The typesetting
specifications for many book shells add blank pages where necessary so that chapters
and chapter-like elements begin on odd-numbered pages. In this chapter, we include
many pages of each sample book so that you can see the many different kinds of pages
included in a single shell.
See page 2 for information about base document class defaults and see page 4 for
page layout diagrams for the base document classes.
146 Chapter 4 Book Shells
AMS Book or Monograph
Document class base file: amsbook.cls

Packages:
None
The front matter contains a frontmatter environment. Front matter fields include a short title, multiple addresses,
email address, URL address, thanks, dedication, and AMS classification. The preface is an unnumbered chapter in
the body of the document.
This shell automatically adds blank pages after the table of contents and preface and where necessary to ensure
that new chapters begin on odd-numbered pages. Blank pages carry no headers or page numbers and are not shown
here.
1991 Mathematics Subject Classification. Primary 05C38, 15A15; Secondary

The Full Title of an AMS Book or Monograph 05A15, 15A18
Dr. Arthur Ulysses Thor

Millennium Edward Two
(A. U. Thor) Author address line 1, Author address line 2
Current address, A. U. Thor: Author current address line 1, Author current
address line 2
E-mail address, A. U. Thor: author@institute.edu
URL: http://www.author.institute
Current address, M E. Two: Second author current address

E-mail address, M. E. Two: metwo@anotherinstitute.edu
A. U. Thor thanks V. Exalted.

M. E. Two thanks his mother.
Abstract. This document illustrates many features of a mathematics article,

but we do not explain the spurious appearance of the formula (∇×F )· k = z +1
in this abstract.
Contents Preface
Preface v This is the preface and it is created using a TeX field in a paragraph by itself
containing \chapter*{Preface}. When the document is loaded, this appears in
Chapter 1. Introduction vii the edit window like a normal chapter, but it is actually an unnumbered chapter.
Chapter 2. Purpose of this Document 1
Chapter 3. Sample Mathematics and Text 3
1. In-line and Displayed Mathematics 3
R¯
2. Mathematics in section heads ® ln tdt 3
3. Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environments 3
4. Section Headings 4
5. Tags 4
6. Lists 5
7. About the Bibliography 5
Appendix A. The First Appendix 7
Appendix. Afterword 9
Appendix. Bibliography 11
ii i v
CHAPTER 1 CHAPTER 2
Introduction Purpose of this Document
The introduction is entered using the usual chapter tag. Since the introduction This short sample document illustrates the typeset appearance of in-line and
chapter appears before the mainmatter TeX field, it is an unnumbered chapter. The displayed mathematics in documents. It also illustrates five levels of section head-
primary difference between the preface and the introduction in this shell document ings and three kinds of lists. Finally, the document includes entries for a manual
is that the introduction will appear in the table of contents and the page headings bibliography and an appendix.
for the introduction are automatically handled without the need for the markboth
TeX field. You may use either or both methods to create chapters at the beginning
of your document. You may also delete these preliminary chapters.
vii 1
4 3. SAMPLE MATHEMATICS AND TEXT

(3.1) a 1 = − lim z 2 f 0 (z ) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" .
Proof. Change z for 1=z . Then Γ" → Γ" = { z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ" } and
CHAPTER 3
(3.2) f (1=z ) = a 0 + a 1 z + o (z) .
Fix z ∈ Γ" , and let C r (z ) = {¸ ∈ C− : |¸ − z | = r} be a circle with radius
Sample Mathematics and Text r = |z| sin "=2. It follows from (3.2) that
Z Z
( ¸ − z0 )m d¸
1
X
1 f (¸ ) d¸ 1
1. In-line and Displayed Mathematics (3.3) = am + R(z ),
P∞ 2 ¼i C H( z) (¸ − z )2 2¼i C H(z ) (¸ − z )2
m= 0
The expression i =1 a i is in-line mathematics, while the numbered equation
∞
X
(1.1) ai |R(z )| ≤ r −1 max o (|z|) = r −1 max |¸ | · O (|z | + r)
¸∈C H(z ) ¸∈C H(z )
i=1
|z | + r 1 + sin "
is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 1.1. = · O (|z | + r) = · O (|z|) .
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset of H , T a r sin "
nonexpansive self map of C . Suppose that as n → ∞, an;k → 0 for each k, and Therefore R( z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"= 2 , and hence by the Cauchy theorem (3.3)
P∞ P∞
→ 0. Then for each x in C , An x = k =0 a n;k T k x
+
°n = k =0 (an;k +1 − a n;k )
implies
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays.1 The spacing d
f (1=z) = a 1 + R (z) → a1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 ,
or long, as shown in the following examples. that implies (3.1) by substituting 1 =z back for z. ¤
A short line above:
x2 + y 2 = z2 4. Section Headings
and a short line below. Use the Section tag for ma jor sections, such as the one just above. Four addi-
A long line above may depend on your margins tional heading levels are available, as described below.
sin2 µ + cos2 µ = 1 4.1. Subsection Heading. This text appears under a subsection heading.
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for 4.1.1. Subsubsection Heading. This text appears under a subsubsection head-
mathematical displays, regardless of the margins. ing.
R¯ ing.
2. Mathematics in section heads ®
ln tdt
Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note that mathematics in section ing.
contents entries. 5. Tags
3. Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Env ironments You can apply the logical markup tag Emphasized.
You can apply the visual markup tags Bold, Italics, Roman, Sans Serif, Slanted,
A number of theorem-like environments is available. The following lemma is a Small Caps, and Typewriter.
well-known fact on differentiation of asymptotic expansions of analytic functions. You can apply the special, mathematics only, tags BLACKBOARD BOLD,
Lemma 1. Let f (z ) be an analytic function in C+ . If f (z) admits the repre- CALLIGRAP HIC, and fraktur. Note that blackboard bold and calligraphic are
sentation correct only when applied to uppercase letters A through Z.
µ ¶
a1 1 You can apply the size tags tiny, scriptsize, footnotesize, small , normalsize, large,
f (z ) = a 0 + +o ,
z z Large, LARGE, huge and Huge.
1LAT is appropriate for a short quotation or a sequence of short quotations.
3
7. ABOUT THE BIBLIOGRAPHY 5

Ask not what your country can do for you; ask what you
can do for your country. John F Kennedy
It’s no exaggeration to say the undecideds could go one way APPENDIX A
or another. George Bush
6. Lists The First Appendix

can extend four levels deep, look like this: The appendix fragment is used only once. Subsequent appendices can be cre-
(1) Numbered list item 1. ated using the Chapter Section/Body Tag.
• Bullet item 1.
• Bullet item 2.
lead-in.

7
Afterword Bibliography
The back matter often includes one or more of an index, an afterword, ac- [1] N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2, John Wiley and Sons, New York, 1963.
knowledgements, a bibliography, a colophon, or any other similar item. In the back [2] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behavior in fluid hydrogen at rocket
matter, chapters do not produce a chapter number, but they are entered in the [3] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical conditions”, Int. J. Heat
table of contents. If you are not using anything in the back matter, you can delete Mass Transfer, in print
the back matter TeX field and everything that follows it. [4] Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular Theory of Gases and Liquids , John
9 11
ETP (Electronic Technical Publishing)
Document class base file: book.cls

Packages:
etpltex None
amsmath Standard
The shell is double-spaced to allow for editorial markup. The marginal notations indicate the heading level and
other structural elements in the document. The preface is an unnumbered chapter in the body of the document.
Special environments are available for theorems and examples.
This shell automatically adds blank pages where necessary to ensure that new chapters begin on odd-numbered
pages. Blank pages carry headers and footers, as shown on sample page vi. Other blank pages in the sample are not
shown here.
CT Contents
1 Introduction v
The Title of a Book
2 Purpose of this Document 1
Dr. Author Jones 3 Sample Mathematics and Text 2
3.1 In-line and Displayed Mathematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

R¯
The Date 3.2 Mathematics in section heads ®
ln tdt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
3.3 Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environments . . . . . . 3
3.4 Section Headings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
3.4.1 Subsection Heading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
3.5 Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
3.6 Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
3.7 About the Bibliography . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
A The First Appendix 9
ii
CT Preface CN Chapter 1
This is the preface and it is created using a TeX field in a paragraph by itself containing
CT Introduction
\chapter*{Preface}. When the document is loaded, this appears in the edit window
like a normal chapter, but it is actually an unnumbered chapter. The markboth TeX
The introduction is entered using the usual chapter tag. Since the introduction chapter
field at the beginning of this paragraph sets the correct page heading for the Preface
appears before the mainmatter TeX field, it is an unnumbered chapter. The primary
portion of the document. The preface does not appear in the table of contents.
difference between the preface and the introduction in this shell document is that the
introduction will appear in the table of contents and the page headings for the intro-
duction are automatically handled without the need for the markboth TeX field. You
may use either or both methods to create chapters at the beginning of your document.
You may also delete these preliminary chapters.
iv v
CHAPTER 1 – MANUSCRIPT
CN Chapter 2
CT Purpose of this Document
appendix.
vi 1
CHAPTER 3 – MANUSCRIPT
above and below a display depends on whether the lines above or below are short or
long, as shown in the following examples.
A short line above:
x2 + y2 = z 2
CN Chapter 3 and a short line below.
CT Sample Mathematics and Text sin 2 µ + cos2 µ = 1
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for mathe-
matical displays, regardless of the margins.

A 3.1 In-line and Displayed Mathematics
P∞
ai is in-line mathematics, while the numbered equation
R¯
The expression i=1 A 3.2 Mathematics in section heads ® ln J@J
∞
X
ai (3.1)
i=1
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset of H, T
a nonexpansive self map of C. Suppose that as n → ∞, an;k → 0 for each k, and A 3.3 Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like
P∞ + P∞ k
°n = k=0 (an;k +1 − an;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C, A n x = k=0 an;k T x converges
Environments
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays. 1 The spacing A number of theorem-like environments is available. The following lemma is a well-
1 A
LT EX automatically selects the spacing depending on the surrounding line lengths. known fact on differentiation of asymptotic expansions of analytic functions.
2 3
CHAPTER 3 – MANUSCRIPT CHAPTER 3 – MANUSCRIPT
Lemma 1 Let f (z) be an analytic function in C+ . If f (z) admits the representation A 3.4 Section Headings
µ ¶
a1 1
f (z) = a 0 + +o , Use the Section tag for major sections, such as the one just above. Four additional
z z
for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ " = {z ∈ C + : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then heading levels are available, as described below.
a1 = − lim z 2f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ ". (3.2)

B 3.4.1 Subsection Heading
G Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ" → Γ" = {z ∈ C − : z ∈ Γ"} and

f (1=z) = a0 + a1 z + o (z) . (3.3)

C Subsubsection Heading
Fix z ∈ Γ", and let Cr (z) = {¸ ∈ C − : |¸ − z| = r} be a circle with radius r =
|z| sin "=2. It follows from (3.3) that
Z 1
X Z m
1 f (¸) d¸ 1 (¸ − z0) d¸ Subsubsubsection Heading This text appears under a subsubsubsection heading.
2 = am 2 + R(z), (3.4)
2¼i CH (z ) (¸ − z) m=0
2¼i CH (z ) (¸ − z)
where for the remainder R(z) we have Subsubsubsubsection Heading This text appears under a subsubsubsub-
|R(z)| ≤ r−1 max o (|z|) = r−1 max |¸| · O (|z| + r) section heading.
¸∈CH (z ) ¸ ∈CH (z )
|z| + r 1 + sin "

= · O (|z| + r) = · O (|z|) .
r sin "
A 3.5 Tags
implies
You can apply the visual markup tags Bold, Italics, Roman, Sans Serif,
d Slanted, Small Caps, and Typewriter.

f (1=z) = a1 + R(z) → a 1, as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2,
dz
You can apply the special, mathematics only, tags BLACKBOARD BOLD,
4 5
CHAPTER 3 – MANUSCRIPT CHAPTER 3 – MANUSCRIPT
CALLIGRAPHIC, and fraktur. Note that blackboard bold and calligraphic are cor- (a) A numbered list item under a list item.
rect only when applied to uppercase letters A through Z. The typeset appearance for this level is often different from the screen ap-
You can apply the size tags ,

tiny scriptsize, footnotesize , small, normalsize, large, pearance. The typeset appearance often uses parentheses around the level
Large , LARGE, huge and Huge . indicator.

The buck stops here. Harry Truman A. Fourth and final level of numbered list items allowed.
Ask not what your country can do for you; ask what you can do for your
• Bullet item 1.
country. John F Kennedy
• Bullet item 2.
It’s no exaggeration to say the undecideds could go one way or another. — Second level bullet item.
George Bush ∗ Third level bullet item.
A 3.6 Lists
Bullet, numbered and description list environments are available. Lists, which can click the lead-in box to enter or customize the text of the lead-in.

6 7
CN Appendix A CT Bibliography
CT The First Appendix
York, 1963.
The appendix fragment is used only once. Subsequent appendices can be created using
the Chapter Section/Body Tag.
9 12
Linda Gilbert Book

Packages:
sw20gilb None
pages. Blank pages carry no headers or page numbers and are not shown here. The page number for the table
of contents always starts at page five and the preface starts at page nine, both marked using lower case Roman
numerals. Appendices are not numbered. Objects inside appendices that use the appendix number (like equa-
tion numbers) are not numbered correctly. Appendix numbers can be restored by adding a TeX field containing
“renewcommand—“thechapter˝—“Alph—chapter˝˝ immediately following the “appendix TeX field.
Contents
Introduction 3

The Title of a Book 2 Sample Mathematics and Text 3
2.1 In-line and Displayed MathematicsR¯ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2.2 Mathematics in section heads ® ln tdt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
2.3 Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environments . 4
Dr. Author Jones 2.4 Section Headings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.4.1 Subsection Heading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.5 Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
The Date 2.6 Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2.7 About the Bibliography . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
The First Appendix 9
Afterword 11
v
Preface Introduction
This is the preface and it is created using a TeX field in a paragraph by The introduction is entered using the usual chapter tag. Since the introduc-
itself containing \chapter*{Preface}. When the document is loaded, this tion chapter appears before the mainmatter TeX field, it is an unnumbered
appears in the edit window like a normal chapter, but it is actually an unnum- chapter. The primary difference between the preface and the introduction in
bered chapter. The markboth TeX field at the beginning of this paragraph this shell document is that the introduction will appear in the table of con-
sets the correct page heading for the Preface portion of the document. The tents and the page headings for the introduction are automatically handled
preface does not appear in the table of contents. without the need for the markboth TeX field. You may use either or both
methods to create chapters at the beginning of your document. You may
also delete these preliminary chapters.
1 3
Chapter 1 Chapter 2
Purpose of this Document Sample Mathematics and Text
headings and three kinds of lists. Finally, the document includes entries for P∞
a manual bibliography and an appendix.
∞
X
ai (2.1)
i=1

nonexpansive
P∞ self map of C. Suppose that as n → ∞, an;k → 0 for
P∞ each k, and
° n = k=0 (an;k+1 − an;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C, Anx = k=0 an;k T kx
+

1
Two sets of L TEX parameters govern mathematical displays. The spac-
A
are short or long, as shown in the following examples.
A short line above:
x2 + y2 = z 2
1 A
1 3
4 CHAPTER 2 SAMPLE MATHEMATICS AND TEXT 2.4 SECTION HEADINGS 5

R¯ Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 , and hence by the Cauchy theorem
ln J@J
(2.4) implies
d
heads may cause difficulties in typesetting styles with running headers or f (1=z) = a1 + R(z) → a1, as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 ,
dz
table of contents entries.
2.3 Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-

2.4 Section Headings
like Environments
Use the Section tag for major sections, such as the one just above. Four
A number of theorem-like environments is available. The following lemma additional heading levels are available, as described below.
functions.
2.4.1 Subsection Heading
Lemma 1 Let f (z) be an analytic function in C +. If f (z) admits the rep- This text appears under a subsection heading.
resentation µ ¶
a1 1
f (z) = a0 + +o , Subsubsection Heading
z z
a1 = − lim z2f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" . (2.2) Subsubsubsection Heading This text appears under a subsubsubsection
heading.
Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ" → Γ " = {z ∈ C − : z ∈ Γ"} and
Subsubsubsubsection Heading This text appears under a subsub-
f (1=z) = a 0 + a1 z + o (z) . (2.3) subsubsection heading.
Fix z ∈ Γ ", and let Cr (z) = {¸ ∈ C− : |¸ − z| = r} be a circle with radius
r = |z| sin "=2. It follows from (2.3) that 2.5 Tags
Z Z
(¸ − z0 )m d¸
1
X
1 f (¸) d¸ 1 You can apply the logical markup tag Emphasized.
= am + R(z), (2.4)
2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z)
2
2¼i CH (z ) (¸ − z)
2 You can apply the visual markup tags Bold, Italics, Roman, Sans Serif,
m=0
Slanted, Small Caps, and Typewriter.
where for the remainder R(z) we have You can apply the special, mathematics only, tags BLACKBOARD BOLD,
CALLIGRAP HIC, and fraktur. Note that blackboard bold and calligraphic
|R(z)| ≤ r −1 max o (|z|) = r −1 max |¸| · O (|z| + r) are correct only when applied to uppercase letters A through Z.
¸∈CH (z ) ¸∈CH (z)
You can apply the size tags tiny, scriptsize, footnotesize, small, normalsize,
|z| + r 1 + sin "
=
r
· O (|z| + r) =
sin "
· O (|z|) . large, Large, LARGE, huge and Huge.
6 CHAPTER 2 SAMPLE MATHEMATICS AND TEXT 2.7 ABOUT THE BIBLIOGRAPHY 7
Following is a group of paragraphs marked as Body Quote. This environ- Description List Each description list item has a lead-in followed by the
ment is appropriate for a short quotation or a sequence of short quotations. item. Double-click the lead-in box to enter or customize the text of the
lead-in.
Ask not what your country can do for you; ask what you can do
for your country. John F Kennedy
2.7 About the Bibliography
It’s no exaggeration to say the undecideds could go one way or Following the text of this article is a short manual bibliography. This sample
another. George Bush bibliography has no relationship to the previous text, but it shows sample
2.6 Lists

around the level indicator.
• Bullet item 1.
• Bullet item 2.

Appendix Afterword
The First Appendix The back matter often includes one or more of an index, an afterword, ac-
knowledgements, a bibliography, a colophon, or any other similar item. In
the back matter, chapters do not produce a chapter number, but they are
entered in the table of contents. If you are not using anything in the back
The appendix fragment is used only once. Subsequent appendices can be
matter, you can delete the back matter TeX field and everything that follows
created using the Chapter Section/Body Tag.
it.
9 11
Bibliography

[2] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behavior in
fluid hydrogen at rocket chamber pressures”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer,
1998a, 41, 3537-3550
[3] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical con-
ditions”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, in print
[4] Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular Theory of

13
Springer-Verlag Conference
Document class base file: report.cls

Packages:
svcon2e None
amsmath Standard
The preface is an unnumbered chapter in the body of the document. This shell automatically adds blank pages
where necessary to ensure that new chapters begin on odd-numbered pages. Blank pages carry headers and page
numbers, as shown on sample page 2. Other blank pages in the sample are not shown here.
This is page i
Printer: Opaque this ii
ABSTRACT This document illustrates many features of a mathematics

article, but we do not explain the spurious appearance of the formula (∇ ×
F ) · k = z + 1 in this abstract.
The Title of a Book
Dr. Author Jones
The Date
This is page iii This is page v

Printer: Opaque this Printer: Opaque this
Contents Preface
This is the preface and it is created using a TeX field in a paragraph by
1 Purpose of this Document 1 itself containing \chapter*{Preface}. When the document is loaded, this
appears in the edit window like a normal chapter, but it is actually an
2 Sample Mathematics and Text 3 unnumbered chapter. This style starts numbering in the document preface
1 In-line and Displayed Mathematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 using lower case Roman characters. The TEX field at the beginning of the
R¯
2 Mathematics in section heads ® ln tdt . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 first paragraph in the next chapter changes number to arabic style and
3 Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environments 3 resets the page counter to one.
4 Section Headings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
4.1 Subsection Heading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
5 Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
6 Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
7 About the Bibliography . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
B Afterword 9
1 References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
This is page 1
Printer: Opaque this 2 1. Purpose of this Document
Purpose of this Document

This is page 3
Printer: Opaque this 4 2. Sample Mathematics and Text
functions.
Lemma 1 Let f (z ) be an analytic function in C + . If f (z ) admits the

Sample Mathematics and Text representation
µ ¶
a1 1
f (z ) = a 0 + +o ,
1 In-line and Displayed Mathematics z z
P∞ for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ" = {z ∈ C+ : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then
The expression i =1 ai is in-line mathematics, while the numbered equa-
tion ∞ a 1 = − lim z 2 f 0 ( z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" . (2.2)
X
ai (2.1)
i =1 Proof. Change z for 1=z . Then Γ " → Γ" = {z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ" } and
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset of H , f (1 =z) = a0 + a1 z + o (z ) . (2.3)
T a nonexpansive self map of C . Suppose that as n → ∞, a n;k → 0 for
P∞ + Fix z ∈ Γ ", and let Cr (z ) = {¸ ∈ C− : |¸ − z | = r } be a circle with radius
each k ,Pand ° n = k =0 (an;k+ 1 − an;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C ,
An x = ∞ k r = |z | sin "=2. It follows from (2.3) that
k =0 a n;k T x converges weakly to a fixed point of T [1].
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays.1 The spac- Z Z
(¸ − z 0 )m d¸
1
X
ing above and below a display depends on whether the lines above or below 1 f (¸ ) d¸ 1
= am + R(z ), (2.4)
are short or long, as shown in the following examples. 2 ¼i C r (z ) (¸ − z) 2 2¼i C r(z ) (¸ − z) 2
m=0
A short line above:
x2 + y 2 = z 2 where for the remainder R (z ) we have
A long line above may depend on your margins |R (z )| ≤ r −1 max o (|z |) = r −1 max |¸ | · O (|z | + r )
¸∈ Cr (z) ¸ ∈Cr (z)
sin 2 µ + cos 2 µ = 1 |z| + r 1 + sin "
= · O (|z | + r ) = · O (|z |) .
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing r sin "
Therefore R(z ) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2 , and hence by the Cauchy theorem
(2.4) implies
R¯
2 Mathematics in section heads ® ln J@J d
f (1=z ) = a1 + R(z ) → a 1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"= 2 ,
dz
that implies (2.2) by substituting 1 =z back for z .
4 Section Headings
3 Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like
Environments Use the Section tag for ma jor sections, such as the one just above. Four
1 A
LT EX automatically selects the spacing depending on the surrounding line lengths. This text appears under a subsection heading.
2. Sample Mathematics and Text 5 6 2. Sample Mathematics and Text
5 Tags ∗ Third level bullet item.

You can apply the visual markup tags Bold, Italics, Roman, Sans Serif, Description List Each description list item has a lead-in followed by the
Slanted , Small Caps , and Typewriter. item. Double-click the lead-in box to enter or customize the text of
You can apply the special, mathematics only, tags BLACKBOARD BOLD, the lead-in.
CALLIGRAPHIC, and fraktur. Note that blackboard bold and calligraphic
are correct only when applied to uppercase letters A through Z. Bunyip Mythical beast of Australian Aboriginal legends.
You can apply the size tags tiny, scriptsize, footnotesize, small , normalsize,
large, Large, LARGE , huge and Huge . 7 About the Bibliography
Following is a group of paragraphs marked as Body Quote. This environ-
ment is appropriate for a short quotation or a sequence of short quotations.
Ask not what your country can do for you; ask what you can together. Here is an example: [2, 3, 4].
do for your country. John F Kennedy
It’s no exaggeration to say the undecideds could go one way or
another. George Bush
6 Lists

screen appearance. The typeset appearance often uses parenthe-
ses around the level indicator.
• Bullet item 1.
• Bullet item 2.

This is page 7 This is page 9

The First Appendix Afterword

The appendix fragment is used only once. Subsequent appendices can be The back matter often includes one or more of an index, an afterword,
created using the Chapter Section/Body Tag. acknowledgements, a bibliography, a colophon, or any other similar item.
In the back matter, chapters do not produce a chapter number, but they
are entered in the table of contents. If you are not using anything in the
back matter, you can delete the back matter TeX field and everything that
follows it.
1 References
hydrogen at rocket chamber pressures”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer,
1998a, 41, 3537-3550
[3] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical

[6] Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Properties of
Gases and Liquids, 4th Edition, McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1987
Springer-Verlag Heidelberg LLNCS
Document class base file: llncs.cls

Packages:
None
The typesetting specifications are designed to allow combining articles from several authors into a single manuscript.
There are special macros used for title and author name and address for each chapter.
Preface Organization
This textbook is intended for use by students of physics, physical chemistry, ECOOP’95 is organized by the department of Computer Science, Univeristy
and theoretical chemistry. The reader is presumed to have a basic knowledge of Århus and AITO (association Internationa pour les Technologie Object) in
of atomic and quantum physics at the level provided, for example, by the first cooperation with ACM/SIGPLAN.
few chapters in our book The Physics of Atoms and Quanta. The student of
physics will find here material which should be included in the basic education
of every physicist. This book should furthermore allow students to acquire an Executive Commitee
appreciation of the breadth and variety within the field of molecular physics and
Conference Chair: Ole Lehrmann Madsen (Århus University, DK)
its future as a fascinating area of research.
Program Chair: Walter Olthoff (DFKI GmbH, Germany)
For the student of chemistry, the concepts introduced in this book will provide
Organizing Chair: Jørgen Lindskov Knudsen ( Århus University,
a theoretical framework for that entire field of study. With the help of these con-
DK)
cepts, it is at least in principle possible to reduce the enormous body of empirical
Tutorials: Birger Møller-Pedersen
chemical knowledge to a few basic principles: those of quantum mechanics. In
(Norwegian Computing Center, Norway)
addition, modern physical methods whose fundamentals are introduced here are
Workshops: Eric Jul (University of Kopenhagen, Denmark)
becoming increasingly important in chemistry and now represent indispensable
tools for the chemist. As examples, we might mention the structural analysis of
complex organic compounds, spectroscopic investigation of very rapid reaction Program Commitee
processes or, as a practical application, the remote detection of pollutants in the
air. Conference Chair: Ole Lehrmann Madsen (Århus University, DK)
Program Chair: Walter Olthoff (DFKI GmbH, Germany)
Organizing Chair: Jørgen Lindskov Knudsen (Århus University,
DK)
April 1995 Walter Olthoff Tutorials: Birger Møller-Pedersen
Program Chair (Norwegian Computing Center, Norway)
ECOOP’95 Workshops: Eric Jul (University of Kopenhagen, Denmark)
Referees
V. Andreev P.C. Bosetti Del Buono
Bärwolff Braunschweig P. Dingus
E. Barrelet F.W. Büsser H. Duhm
H.P. Beck T. Carli J. Ebert
G. Bernardi A.B. Clegg S. Eichenberger
E. Binder G. Cozzika and others not included
P.C. Bosetti S. Dagoret in this sample...
Sponsoring Institutions
Bernauer-Budiman Inc., Reading, Mass.

The Hofmann-International Company, San Louis Obispo, Cal.
Kramer Industries, Heidelberg, Germany
Table of Contents Hamiltonian Mechanics unter besonderer

Berücksichtigung der höhreren Lehranstalten
Ivar Ekeland 1 , Roger Temam2 Jeffrey Dean, David Grove, Craig Chambers,
Hamiltonian Mechanics Kim B. Bruce, and Elsa Bertino
Hamiltonian Mechanics unter besonderer Berücksichtigung der 1
Princeton University, Princeton NJ 08544, USA,
höhreren Lehranstalten : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 1 I.Ekeland@princeton.edu,
Ivar Ekeland (Princeton University), Roger Temam (Université de WWW home page: http://users/~iekeland/web/welcome.html
2
Paris-Sud), Jeffrey Dean, David Grove, Craig Chambers (Università di Université de Paris-Sud, Laboratoire d’Analyse Numérique, Bâtiment 425,
Geova), Kim B. Bruce (Stanford University), Elisa Bertino (Digita F-91405 Orsay Cedex, France
Research Center)
Hamiltonian Mechanics2 : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 7
Abstract. The abstract should summarize the contents of the paper
Ivar Ekeland, Roger Temam using at least 70 and at most 150 words. It will be set in 9-point font
size and be inset 1.0 cm from the right and left margins. There will be
Author Index : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 13 two blank lines before and after the Abstract. . . .
Subject Index : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 17
1 Fixed-Period Problems: The Sublinear Case
With this chapter, the preliminaries are over, and we begin the search for periodic
solutions to Hamiltonian systems. All this will be done in the convex case; that
is, we shall study the boundary-value problem
ẋ = JH 0( t; x )
x(0) = x( T )
with H (t; ·) a convex function of x , going to +∞ when k xk → ∞.
1.1 Autonomous Systems

In this section, we will consider the case when the Hamiltonian H (x) is au-
tonomous. For the sake of simplicity, we shall also assume that it is C 1 .
We shall first consider the question of nontriviality, within the general frame-
work of (A∞ ; B ∞)-subquadratic Hamiltonians. In the second subsection, we shall
look into the special case when H is (0; b ∞)-subquadratic, and we shall try to
derive additional information.
The General Case: Nontriviality. We assume that H is (A ∞ ; B ∞ )-sub-

quadratic at infinity, for some constant symmetric matrices A ∞ and B∞ , with
B∞ − A∞ positive definite. Set:
° : = smallest eigenvalue of B ∞ − A ∞ (1)

d
¸ : = largest negative eigenvalue of J + A∞ : (2)
dt
2 3
Since u 1 is a smooth function, we will have k hu 1 k∞ ≤ ´ for h small enough,

and inequality (10) will hold, yielding thereby:
h2 1 2 h2 1 2
Ã (hu1 ) ≤ k u1 k 2 + ku 1 k : (11)
2 ¸ 2 ±0
¡ ¢
If we choose ± close enough to ± , the quantity 1¸ + ±10 will be negative, and
0
Fig. 1. This is the caption of the figure displaying a white eagle and a white horse on we end up with
a snow field Ã (hu1 ) < 0 for h 6= 0 small : (12)
On the other hand, we check directly that Ã (0) = 0. This shows that 0 cannot
Theorem 1 tells us that if ¸ + ° < 0, the boundary-value problem: be a minimizer of Ã , not even a local one. So u 6= 0 and u 6= ¤ −1
o (0) = 0. t
u
ẋ = J H (x) 0 Corollary 1. Assume H is C 2 and (a ∞ ; b∞ )-subquadratic at infinity. Let » 1 ;

(3) : : : ; » N be the equilibria, that is, the solutions of H 0( ») = 0. Denote by ! k the
x(0) = x (T )
smallest eigenvalue of H 00 (»k ), and set:
has at least one solution x , which is found by minimizing the dual action func-
tional: ! := Min { ! 1 ; : : : ; ! k } : (13)
Z T· ¸
1 ¡ −1 ¢
Ã (u ) = ¤ u; u + N ∗ (− u) dt (4) If:
o 2 o T
·
T
¸
T
b ∞ < −E − a ∞ < ! (14)
on the range of ¤ , which is a subspace R(¤)2L with finite codimension. Here 2¼ 2¼ 2¼
then minimization of Ã yields a non-constant T -periodic solution x .
1
N (x ) := H (x) − (A∞ x; x) (5)
2 We recall once more that by the integer part E [®] of ® ∈ IR, we mean the
a ∈ ZZ such that a < ® ≤ a + 1. For instance, if we take a∞ = 0, Corollary 2
is a convex function, and
tells us that x exists and is non-constant provided that:
1
N (x ) ≤ ((B∞ − A∞ ) x; x) + c ∀x : (6) T T
2 b∞ < 1 < (15)
2¼ 2¼
Proposition 1. Assume H 0(0) = 0 and H (0) = 0. Set: or µ ¶
2¼ 2¼
T ∈ ; : (16)
± := lim inf 2 N (x ) kxk
−2
: (7) ! b∞
x→0
2¼
Proof. The spectrum of ¤ is T
ZZ + a ∞ . The largest negative eigenvalue ¸ is
If ° < −¸ < ±, the solution u is non-zero: given by 2T¼ k o + a ∞ , where
x (t ) 6= 0 ∀t : (8) 2¼ 2¼
ko + a∞ < 0 ≤ ( k o + 1) + a ∞ : (17)
T T
Proof. Condition (7) means that, for every ± 0 > ± , there is some " > 0 such that
Hence: · ¸
±0 T
k x k ≤ " ⇒ N (x ) ≤
2
kxk : (9) ko = E − a∞ : (18)
2 2¼
The condition ° < −¸ < ± now becomes:
It is an exercise in convex analysis, into which we shall not go, to show that
this implies that there is an ´ > 0 such that 2¼
b ∞ − a∞ < − ko − a∞ < ! − a∞ (19)
T
1
f k xk ≤ ´ ⇒ N ∗ (y ) ≤ k y k2 : (10)
2 ±0 which is precisely condition (14). t
u
4 5
Table 1. This is the example table taken out of The TEXbook, p. 246 Assume also that H is C 2 , and H 00 (t; x) is positive definite everywhere. Then
there is a sequence xk , k ∈ IN, of kT -periodic solutions of the system
Year World population
ẋ = J H 0 (t; x) (27)
8000 B.C. 5,000,000
50 A.D. 200,000,000 such that, for every k ∈ IN, there is some po ∈ IN with:
1650 A.D. 500,000,000
1945 A.D. 2,300,000,000 p ≥ p o ⇒ x pk 6= x k : (28)
1980 A.D. 4,400,000,000
t
u
Example 1 (External forcing). Consider the system:
Lemma 1. Assume that H is C 2 on IR2 n \{0} and that H 00 (x ) is non-degenerate
ẋ = J H (x) + f (t )
0
(29)
for any x 6= 0. Then any local minimizer x
e of Ã has minimal period T .
where the Hamiltonian H is (0; b∞ )-subquadratic, and the forcing term is a
Proof. We know that e e + » for some constant » ∈ IR2n , is a T -periodic
x , or x
distribution on the circle:
solution of the Hamiltonian system:
d ¡ ¢
ẋ = JH 0 (x ) : f= F + fo with F ∈ L 2 IR=T ZZ ; IR2n ; (30)
(20) dt
RT
There is no loss of generality in ¡ taking » = ¢0. So Ã (x) ≥ Ã (e x ) for all x
e in where f o := T −1 o f ( t)dt . For instance,
some neighbourhood of x in W 1;2 IR=T ZZ ; IR 2n . X
But this index is precisely the index i T (e x ) of the T -periodic solution xe over f ( t) = ± k» ; (31)
the interval (0; T ), as defined in Sect. 2.6. So k ∈IN
iT (e
x) = 0 : (21) where ± k is the Dirac mass at t = k and » ∈ IR2n is a constant, fits the pre-
scription. This means that the system ẋ = J H 0 (x ) is being excited by a series
Now if x
e has a lower period, T =k say, we would have, by Corollary 31: of identical shocks at interval T .
i T (e
x ) = ikT =k (e
x) ≥ k iT =k (e
x) + k − 1 ≥ k − 1 ≥ 1 : (22) Definition 1. Let A∞ (t ) and B∞ (t ) be symmetric operators in IR2n , depending
continuously on t ∈ [0; T ], such that A∞ ( t) ≤ B ∞ (t ) for al l t.
This would contradict (21), and thus cannot happen. t
u A Borelian function H : [0; T ] × IR2 n → IR is cal led (A∞ ; B ∞ )-subquadratic
at infinity if there exists a function N (t; x ) such that:
Notes and Comments. The results in this section are a refined version of [1]; the
minimality result of Proposition 14 was the first of its kind. 1
H (t; x) = (A∞ ( t) x; x ) + N (t; x ) (32)
To understand the nontriviality conditions, such ¡as the one in formula
¢ (16), 2
one may think of a one-parameter family xT , T ∈ 2¼! −1 ; 2 ¼b −1 of periodic
∞
∀t ; N (t; x ) is convex with respect to x (33)
solutions, x T (0) = xT (T ), with xT going away to infinity when T → 2 ¼! −1 ,
which is the period of the linearized system at 0. N ( t; x ) ≥ n (k xk) with n ( s)s−1 → +∞ as s → +∞ (34)
1
Theorem 1 (Ghoussoub-Preiss). Assume H ( t; x ) is (0; ")-subquadratic at ∃ c ∈ IR : H (t; x ) ≤
(B∞ (t )x; x) + c ∀x : (35)
infinity for all " > 0, and T -periodic in t 2
If A∞ ( t) = a∞ I and B ∞ (t ) = b ∞I , with a ∞ ≤ b ∞ ∈ IR, we shal l say that
H (t; ·) is convex ∀t (23) H is (a ∞ ; b∞)-subquadratic at infinity. As an example, the function k xk® , with
1 ≤ ® < 2, is (0 ; ")-subquadratic at infinity for every " > 0. Similarly, the
H (·; x) is T −periodic ∀x (24) Hamiltonian
1 2 ®
H (t; x) ≥ n (kx k) with n (s)s −1
→ ∞ as s → ∞ (25) H (t; x) = k kk k + kx k (36)
2
"
∀" > 0 ; ∃c : H (t; x) ≤ kxk 2 + c : (26) is (k; k + ")-subquadratic for every " > 0. Note that, if k < 0, it is not convex.
2
Notes and Comments. The first results on subharmonics were obtained by Ra- Author Index
binowitz in [5], who showed the existence of infinitely many subharmonics both
in the subquadratic and superquadratic case, with suitable growth conditions
on H 0 . Again the duality approach enabled Clarke and Ekeland in [2] to treat
the same problem in the convex-subquadratic case, with growth conditions on Abt I. 7 Cozzika G. 9
H only. Ahmed T. 3 Criegee L. 11
Recently, Michalek and Tarantello (see [3] and [4]) have obtained lower bound Andreev V. 24 Cvach J. 27
on the number of subharmonics of period kT , based on symmetry considerations Andrieu B. 27
and on pinching estimates, as in Sect. 5.2 of this article. Arpagaus M. 34 Dagoret S. 28
Dainton J.B. 19
Babaev A. 25 Dann A.W.E. 22
References Bärwolff A. 33 Dau W.D. 16
Bán J. 17 Deffur E. 11
1. Clarke, F., Ekeland, I.: Nonlinear oscillations and boundary-value problems for Baranov P. 24 Delcourt B. 26
Hamiltonian systems. Arch. Rat. Mech. Anal. 78 (1982) 315—333 Barrelet E. 28 Buono Del A. 28
2. Clarke, F., Ekeland, I.: Solutions périodiques, du période donnée, des équations Bartel W. 11 Devel M. 26
hamiltoniennes. Note CRAS Paris 287 (1978) 1013—1015 Bassler U. 28 De Roeck A. 11
3. Michalek, R., Tarantello, G.: Subharmonic solutions with prescribed minimal period Beck H.P. 35 Dingus P. 27
for nonautonomous Hamiltonian systems. J. Diff. Eq. 72 (1988) 28—55 Behrend H.-J. 11 Dollfus C. 35
4. Tarantello, G.: Subharmonic solutions for Hamiltonian systems via a ZZ F pseudoin- Berger Ch. 1 Dreis H.B. 2
dex theory. Annali di Matematica Pura (to appear) Bergstein H. 1 Drescher A. 8
5. Rabinowitz, P.: On subharmonic solutions of a Hamiltonian system. Comm. Pure Bernardi G. 28 Düllmann D. 13
Appl. Math. 33 (1980) 609—633 Bernet R. 34 Dünger O. 13
Duhm H. 12
Besançon M. 9
Biddulph P. 22
Ebbinghaus R. 8
Binder E. 11 Eberle M. 12
Bischoff A. 33
Ebert J. 32
Blobel V. 13 Ebert T.R. 19
Borras K. 8
Efremenko V. 23
Bosetti P.C. 2 Egli S. 35
Boudry V. 27 Eichenberger S. 35
Brasse F. 11 Eichler R. 34
Braun U. 2
Eisenhandler E. 20
Braunschweig A. 1 Ellis N.N. 3
Brisson V. 26 Ellison R.J. 22
Büngener L. 13 Elsen E. 11
Bürger J. 11 Evrard E. 4
Büsser F.W. 13
Buniatian A. 11,37 Favart L. 4
Buschhorn G. 25 Feeken D. 13
Felst R . 11
Campbell A.J. 1 Feltesse A. 9
Carli T. 25 Fensome I.F. 3
Charles F. 28 Ferrarotto F. 31
Clarke D. 5 Flamm K. 11
Clegg A.B. 18 Flauger W. 11
Colombo M. 8 Flieser M. 25
Courau A. 26 Flügge G. 2
Coutures Ch. 9 Fomenko A. 24
14
Fominykh B. 23 Jabiol M.-A. 9 Subject Index

Formánek J. 30 Jacholkowska A. 26
Foster J.M. 22 Jacobsson C. 21
Franke G. 11 Jansen T. 11
Fretwurst E. 12 Jönsson L. 21
Johannsen A. 13 Absorption 327 Brillouin-Wigner perturbation theory
Johnson D.P. 4 Absorption of radiation 289—292, 299, 203
Gabathuler E. 19
Gamerdinger K. 25 Jung H. 2 300
Actinides 244 Cathode rays 8
Garvey J. 3
Kalmus P.I.P. 20 Aharonov-Bohm effect 142—146 Causality 357—359
Gayler J. 11
Kasarian S. 11 Angular momentum 101—112 Center-of-mass frame 232, 274, 338
Gellrich A. 13
Kaschowitz R. 2 — algebraic treatment 391—396 Central potential 113—135, 303—314
Gennis M. 11
Kathage U. 16 Angular momentum addition 185—193 Centrifugal potential 115—116, 323
Genzel H. 1
Kaufmann H. 33 Angular momentum commutation rela- Characteristic function 33
Godfrey L. 7
Kenyon I.R. 3 tions 101 Clebsch-Gordan coefficients 191—193
Goerlach U. 11 Cold emission 88
Kermiche S. 26 Angular momentum quantization 9—10,
Goerlich L. 6 Combination principle, Ritz’s 124
Kiesling C. 25 104—106
Gogitidze N. 24 Commutation relations 27, 44, 353, 391
Klein M. 33 Angular momentum states 107, 321,
Goodall A.M. 19
Kleinwort C. 13 391—396 Commutator 21—22, 27, 44, 344
Gorelov I. 23 Antiquark 83 Compatibility of measurements 99
Knies G. 11
Goritchev P. 23 ®-rays 101—103 Complete orthonormal set 31, 40, 160,
Grab C. 34 Ko W. 7
Köhler T. 1 Atomic theory 8—10, 219—249, 327 360
Grässler R. 2 Average value Complete orthonormal system, see
Greenshaw T. 19 Kolanoski H. 8
Kole F. 7 (see also Expectation value) 15—16, 25, 34, Complete orthonormal set
Greif H. 25 37, 357 Complete set of observables, see Complete
Kolya S.D. 22
Grindhammer G. 25 set of operators
Korbel V. 11
Baker-Hausdorff formula 23
Korn M. 8
Haack J. 33 Balmer formula 8 Eigenfunction 34, 46, 344—346
Kostka P. 33
Haidt D. 11 Balmer series 125 — radial 321
Kotelnikov S.K. 24
Hamon O. 28 Baryon 220, 224 — — calculation 322—324
Krehbiel H. 11
Handschuh D. 11 Basis 98 EPR argument 377—378
Krücker D. 2
Hanlon E.M. 18 Basis system 164, 376 Exchange term 228, 231, 237, 241, 268,
Krüger U. 11
Hapke M. 11 Bell inequality 379—381, 382 272
Kubenka J.P. 25
Harjes J. 11 Bessel functions 201, 313, 337
Kuhlen M. 25
Haydar R. 26 — spherical 304—306, 309, 313—314, 322 f -sum rule 302
Kurča T. 17
Haynes W.J. 5 Bound state 73—74, 78—79, 116—118, 202, Fermi energy 223
Kurzhöfer J. 8
Hedberg V. 21 267, 273, 306, 348, 351
Kuznik B. 32
Heinzelmann G. 13 Boundary conditions 59, 70 H+
2 molecule 26
Henderson R.C.W. 18 Bra 159 Half-life 65
Lamarche F. 27
Henschel H. 33 Breit-Wigner formula 80, 84, 332 Holzwarth energies 68
Lander R. 7
Herynek I. 29 Landon M.P.J. 20
Hildesheim W. 11 Lange W. 33
Hill P. 11 Lanius P. 25
Hilton C.D. 22 Laporte J.F. 9
Hoeger K.C. 22 Lebedev A. 24
Huet Ph. 4 Leuschner A. 11
Hufnagel H. 14 Levonian S. 11,24
Huot N. 28 Lewin D. 11
Ley Ch. 2
Itterbeck H. 1 Lindner A. 8
Springer-Verlag Heidelberg Physics Monograph

Document class options Displayed equations printed flush left
Packages:
makeidx None
graphicx Standard
subeqnarn None
multicol None
cl2emono None
physmono None
Much of the front matter is in the body of the document. The preface is an unnumbered chapter and the table
of contents is in an encapsulated TEX field. To resolve page references correctly, compile the document three times
from outside the program.
pages. Blank pages carry no headers or page numbers and are not shown here.
Dr. Author Jones
To the authors of Springer Verlag

The Title of a Book
SPIN Springer’s internal project number, if known
Physics — Monograph
(Editorials C. Ascheron, H. J. Kölsch)
The Date
Springer-Verlag
Berlin Heidelberg New York
London Paris Tokyo
Hong Kong Barcelona
Budapest
Preface Contents
This is the preface and it is created using a TeX field in a paragraph by itself
containing \chapter*{Preface}. When the document is loaded, this appears 1. Purpose of this Document : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 1
in the edit window like a normal chapter, but it is actually an unnumbered
chapter. The markboth TeX field at the beginning of this paragraph sets the 2. Sample Mathematics and Text : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 3
correct page heading for the Preface portion of the document. The preface 2.1 In-line and Displayed Mathematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
R¯
does not appear in the table of contents. 2.2 Mathematics in section heads ® ln tdt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2.3 Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environments . 4
2.4 Section Headings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
2.4.1 Subsection Heading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
place(s), Firstname Surname 2.5 Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
month year Firstname Surname 2.6 Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.7 About the Bibliography . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
A. The First Appendix : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 7
1. Purpose of this Document 2. Sample Mathematics and Text
This short sample document illustrates the typeset appearance of in-line and 2.1 In-line and Displayed Mathematics
displayed mathematics in do cuments. It also illustrates five levels of section
P∞
headings and three kinds of lists. Finally, the document includes entries for The expression a i is in-line mathematics, while the numbered equation
i =1
a manual bibliography and an appendix.
∞
X
ai (2.1)
i =1

Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset of H ,
P∞ +
each k , and ° n = k =0 (a n;k +1 − a n;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C , A n x =
P ∞ k
k = 0 an;k T x converges weakly to a fixed point of T [1].
A short line above:
x 2 + y 2 = z2

R¯
ln tdt

1
LATEX automatically selects the spacing depending on the surrounding line
lengths.
4 2. Sample Mathematics and Text 2.6 Lists 5
2.3 Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like 2.4.1 Subsection Heading

Environments
A number of theorem-like environments is available. The following lemma Subsubsection Heading. This text appears under a subsubsection head-
is a well-known fact on differentiation of asymptotic expansions of analytic ing.
functions.
Lemma 2.3.1. Let f (z ) be an analytic function in C +. If f (z ) admits the ing.
representation Subsubsubsubsection Heading. This text appears under a subsubsubsubsec-
µ ¶ tion heading.
a1 1
f (z ) = a 0 + +o ,
z z
for z → ∞ inside a cone ¡" = { z ∈ C + : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then 2.5 Tags
a 1 = − lim z 2 f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ ¡" . (2.2) You can apply the logical markup tag Emphasized.
Proof. Change z for 1=z . Then ¡ " → ¡ " = {z ∈ C− : z ∈ ¡"} and
Slanted , Small Caps, and Typewriter.
f (1 =z) = a 0 + a1 z + o (z ) . (2.3) You can apply the special, mathematics only, tags BLACKBOARD BOLD,
CALLIG RAPHIC, and fraktur. Note that blackboard bold and calligraphic
Fix z ∈ ¡ " , and let C r (z ) = {¸ ∈ C − : |¸ − z | = r } be a circle with radius are correct only when applied to uppercase letters A through Z.
r = |z | sin "=2. It follows from (2.3) that You can apply the size tags tiny, scriptsize, footnotesize, small, normalsize,
1
Z
f ( ¸) d¸
1
X 1
Z m
(¸ − z0 ) d¸
large, Large , LARGE , huge and Huge .
= am + R (z), (2.4) Following is a group of paragraphs marked as Body Quote. This environ-
2¼i C r(z ) (¸ − z )
2
m=0
2 ¼i C r(z)
2
(¸ − z ) ment is appropriate for a short quotation or a sequence of short quotations.
where for the remainder R(z ) we have The buck stops here. Harry Truman
Ask not what your country can do for you; ask what you can do for
|R (z )| ≤ r −1 max o (|z |) = r −1 max |¸ | · O (|z| + r )
¸∈C r(z ) ¸∈C r( z ) your country. John F Kennedy
|z | + r 1 + sin " I am not a crook. Richard Nixon
= · O (|z | + r) = · O (|z |) . It’s no exaggeration to say the undecideds could go one way or an-
r sin "
other. George Bush
Therefore R (z ) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ ¡ "=2 , and hence by the Cauchy theorem
(2.4) implies
2.6 Lists
d
f (1 =z) = a1 + R (z ) → a 1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ ¡ "=2 , Bullet, numbered and description list environments are available. Lists, which
dz
that implies (2.2) by substituting 1=z back for z .
2.4 Section Headings a) A numbered list item under a list item.
Use the Section tag for major sections, such as the one just above. Four appearance. The typeset appearance often uses parentheses around
additional heading levels are available, as described below. the level indicator.
6 2. Sample Mathematics and Text
b) Another numbered list item under a list item. A. The First Appendix
• Bullet item 1.
• Bullet item 2.
Description List Each description list item has a lead-in followed by the item. The appendix fragment is used only once. Subsequent appendices can be
Double-click the lead-in box to enter or customize the text of the lead-in. created using the Chapter Section/Body Tag.
Afterword References
The back matter often includes one or more of an index, an afterword, ac- 1. N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2, John Wiley and Sons,
New York, 1963.
knowledgements, a bibliography, a colophon, or any other similar item. In
2. Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behavior in fluid hy-
the back matter, chapters do not produce a chapter number, but they are drogen at rocket chamber pressures”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, 1998a, 41,
entered in the table of contents. If you are not using anything in the back 3537-3550
matter, you can delete the back matter TeX field and everything that follows 3. Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical conditions”,
it. Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, in print
5. Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E., Molecular thermodynamics
Springer-Verlag Multi-authored

Packages:
svmult2e None
amsmath Standard
The shell is intended for use when each chapter of a book has a different author. The preface is an unnumbered
chapter in the body of the document with pages numbered in lowercase roman numerals.
Note the instructions to the printer in the header. This shell automatically adds blank pages where necessary to
ensure that new chapters begin on odd-numbered pages. Blank pages carry headers and page numbers as shown on
sample page 2. Other blank pages in the sample are not shown here.
This is page i

The Title of a Book
Dr. Author Jones
The Date

Contents Preface
2.1 In-line and Displayed Mathematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 using lower case Roman characters. The TEX field at the beginning of the
R¯
2.2 Mathematics in section heads ® ln tdt . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 first paragraph in the next chapter changes number to arabic style and
2.3 Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environments 4 resets the page counter to one.
2.4 Section Headings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
2.4.1 Subsection Heading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.5 Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.6 Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.7 About the Bibliography . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
B Afterword 9
B.1 References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
This is page 1
1
This is page 3
2.3 Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like

2 Environments
Sample Mathematics and Text is a well-known fact on differentiation of asymptotic expansions of analytic
functions.
2.1 In-line and Displayed Mathematics Lemma 1 Let f (z ) be an analytic function in C + . If f (z ) admits the
P∞ representation
The expression ai is in-line mathematics, while the numbered equa- µ ¶
i =1 a1 1
tion f (z ) = a 0 + +o ,
z z
∞
X
ai (2.1) for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ" = {z ∈ C+ : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then
i =1
a 1 = − lim z 2 f 0 ( z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" . (2.2)
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset of H , Proof. Change z for 1=z . Then Γ " → Γ" = {z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ" } and
P∞ + f (1 =z) = a0 + a1 z + o (z ) . (2.3)
each k ,Pand ° n = k =0 (an;k+ 1 − an;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C ,
An x = ∞ k =0 a n;k T x converges weakly to a fixed point of T [1].
k
Fix z ∈ Γ ", and let Cr (z ) = {¸ ∈ C− : |¸ − z | = r } be a circle with radius
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays.1 The spac-
are short or long, as shown in the following examples. Z 1
X Z m
1 f (¸ ) d¸ 1 (¸ − z 0 ) d¸
A short line above: = am + R(z ), (2.4)
2 ¼i C r (z ) (¸ − z) 2 m=0
2¼i C r(z ) (¸ − z) 2
x2 + y 2 = z 2
where for the remainder R (z ) we have
A long line above may depend on your margins |R (z )| ≤ r −1 max o (|z |) = r −1 max |¸ | · O (|z | + r )
¸∈ Cr (z) ¸ ∈Cr (z)
|z| + r 1 + sin "

sin 2 µ + cos 2 µ = 1 = · O (|z | + r ) = · O (|z |) .
r sin "
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing Therefore R(z ) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2 , and hence by the Cauchy theorem
for mathematical displays, regardless of the margins. (2.4) implies
d
f (1=z ) = a1 + R(z ) → a 1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"= 2 ,
dz
R¯ that implies (2.2) by substituting 1 =z back for z .
ln J@J
heads may cause difficulties in typesetting styles with running headers or 2.4 Section Headings
1 A
LT EX automatically selects the spacing depending on the surrounding line lengths. additional heading levels are available, as described below.
2. Sample Mathematics and Text 5 6 2. Sample Mathematics and Text
2.4.1 Subsection Heading (a) A numbered list item under a list item.
This text appears under a subsection heading. The typeset appearance for this level is often different from the
screen appearance. The typeset appearance often uses parenthe-
Subsubsection Heading ses around the level indicator.
Subsubsubsection Heading A. Fourth and final level of numbered list items allowed.
• Bullet item 1.
Subsubsubsubsection Heading. This text appears under a subsubsubsubsec-
tion heading. • Bullet item 2.
2.5 Tags ∗ Third level bullet item.

You can apply the visual markup tags Bold, Italics, Roman, Sans Serif, Description List Each description list item has a lead-in followed by the
Slanted , Small Caps , and Typewriter. item. Double-click the lead-in box to enter or customize the text of
You can apply the special, mathematics only, tags BLACKBOARD BOLD, the lead-in.
CALLIGRAPHIC, and fraktur. Note that blackboard bold and calligraphic Bunyip Mythical beast of Australian Aboriginal legends.
are correct only when applied to uppercase letters A through Z.
large, Large, LARGE , huge and Huge . 2.7 About the Bibliography
ment is appropriate for a short quotation or a sequence of short quotations. Following the text of this article is a short manual bibliography. This sample
The buck stops here. Harry Truman citations such as [4], [5] and [6]. You can also have multiple citations appear
Ask not what your country can do for you; ask what you can together. Here is an example: [2, 3, 4].
2.6 Lists


Appendix A Appendix B
follows it.
B.1 References
1998a, 41, 3537-3550


Springer-Verlag Single-authored

Packages:
svsing2e None
amsmath Standard
The preface is an unnumbered chapter in the body of the document with pages numbered in lowercase roman
numerals.
Note the instructions to the printer in the header. This shell automatically adds blank pages where necessary to
ensure that new chapters begin on odd-numbered pages. Blank pages carry headers and page numbers as shown on
sample page 2. Other blank pages in the sample are not shown here.
This is page i

The Title of a Book
Dr. Author Jones
The Date

Contents Preface

2.1 In-line and Displayed Mathematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 using lower case Roman characters. The TEX field at the beginning of the
R¯
2.2 Mathematics in section heads ® ln tdt . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 first paragraph in the next chapter changes number to arabic style and
2.3 Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environments 4 resets the page counter to one.
2.4.1 Subsection Heading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.5 Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.6 Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
B Afterword 9
References 11
This is page 1
1

This is page 3
2 as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing


Environments
functions.
Lemma 1 Let f (z ) be an analytic function in C + . If f (z ) admits the
2.1 In-line and Displayed Mathematics a1 1
f (z ) = a 0 + +o ,
z z
P∞
The expression i =1 ai is in-line mathematics, while the numbered equa- for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ" = {z ∈ C+ : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then
tion
∞ a 1 = − lim z 2 f 0 ( z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" . (2.2)
X
ai (2.1) Proof. Change z for 1=z . Then Γ " → Γ" = {z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ" } and
i =1
f (1 =z) = a0 + a1 z + o (z ) . (2.3)
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset of H , Fix z ∈ Γ ", and let Cr (z ) = {¸ ∈ C− : |¸ − z | = r } be a circle with radius
T a nonexpansive self map of C . Suppose that as n → ∞, a n;k → 0 for r = |z | sin "=2. It follows from (2.3) that
P∞ + Z Z
each k ,Pand ° n = k =0 (an;k+ 1 − an;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C , (¸ − z 0 )m d¸
X1
1 f (¸ ) d¸ 1
A n x = k =0 a n;k T k x converges weakly to a fixed point of T [1].
∞ = am + R(z ), (2.4)
2 ¼i C r (z ) (¸ − z) 2 2¼i C r(z ) (¸ − z) 2
m=0
ing above and below a display depends on whether the lines above or below where for the remainder R (z ) we have
are short or long, as shown in the following examples. |R (z )| ≤ r −1 max o (|z |) = r −1 max |¸ | · O (|z | + r )
A short line above: ¸∈ Cr (z) ¸ ∈Cr (z)
x2 + y 2 = z 2 |z| + r 1 + sin "

= · O (|z | + r ) = · O (|z |) .
r sin "
Therefore R(z ) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2 , and hence by the Cauchy theorem
(2.4) implies
sin 2 µ + cos 2 µ = 1 d
f (1=z ) = a1 + R(z ) → a 1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"= 2 ,
dz
1 A
LT EX automatically selects the spacing depending on the surrounding line lengths. that implies (2.2) by substituting 1 =z back for z .
2.4 Section Headings 5 6 2. Sample Mathematics and Text
2.4 Section Headings 1. Numbered list item 1.
Use the Section tag for ma jor sections, such as the one just above. Four 2. Numbered list item 2.
2.4.1 Subsection Heading screen appearance. The typeset appearance often uses parenthe-
This text appears under a subsection heading. ses around the level indicator.
This text appears under a subsubsection heading. A. Fourth and final level of numbered list items allowed.
Subsubsubsection Heading
• Bullet item 1.
• Bullet item 2.
Subsubsubsubsection Heading. This text appears under a subsubsubsubsec-
tion heading. — Second level bullet item.
2.5 Tags · Fourth and final level bullet item.
item. Double-click the lead-in box to enter or customize the text of
the lead-in.
Slanted , Small Caps , and Typewriter.
You can apply the special, mathematics only, tags BLACKBOARD BOLD, Bunyip Mythical beast of Australian Aboriginal legends.
large, Large, LARGE , huge
and Huge.
Following is a group of paragraphs marked as Body Quote. This environ- Following the text of this article is a short manual bibliography. This sample
ment is appropriate for a short quotation or a sequence of short quotations. bibliography has no relationship to the previous text, but it shows sample
The buck stops here. Harry Truman together. Here is an example: [2, 3, 4].
Ask not what your country can do for you; ask what you can
2.6 Lists

follows it.
This is page 11
Printer: Opaque this
References

1998a, 41, 3537-3550


World Scientific Book 9.00x6.00
Document class base file: ws-book9x6.cls

Packages:
amsmath Standard
The front matter for this shell is limited. Three front matter fields appear in the body of the document: the
dedication, the preface, and the table of contents.
This shell inserts “Publisher’s pages” (see sample page i) before the body of the document. The shell also
automatically adds blank pages where necessary to ensure that new chapters begin on odd-numbered pages. Blank
pages carry headers and page numbers as shown on sample page viii. Other blank pages in the sample are not shown
here. Note the crop marks.
A p ril 28, 200 3 16:10 W S PC/ Bo ok Trim S ize f or 9in x 6in Bo ok -WorldSc ie ntificBo ok 9x 6 A p ril 28, 200 3 16:10 W S PC/ Bo ok Trim S ize f or 9in x 6in Bo ok -WorldSc ie ntificBo ok 9x 6
Use this environment for the dedication.

To World Scientific Publishing Company.
Publishers’ page
viii Book Title
Preface
This environment is used for the Preface.

Another preface paragraph.
vii
Chapter 1
Contents Purpose of this Document

Preface vii and displayed mathematics in documents. It also illustrates five levels of
1. Purpose of this Document 1 entries for a manual bibliography and an appendix.
2. Sample Mathematics and Text 3

2.1 In-line and Displayed Mathematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
R¯
2.2 Mathematics in section heads ® ln tdt . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
2.3 Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environments 4
2.4.1 Subsection Heading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.5 Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.6 Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Appendix A The First Appendix 7
Afterword 9
Bibliography 11
ix 1
4 B ook Title
R¯
ln tdt

Chapter 2 heads may cause difficulties in typesetting styles with running headers or
2.3 Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environ-
ments

2.1 In-line and Displayed Mathematics functions.
P∞
The expression i =1 a i is in-line mathematics, while the numbered equa- Lemma 2.1 Let f (z ) be an analytic function in C+ . If f (z ) admits the
tion representation
µ ¶
∞
X a1 1
ai (2.1) f (z ) = a0 + +o ,
z z
i =1
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset of H , a1 = − lim z 2 f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ ". (2.2)
T a nonexpansive self map of C . Suppose that as n → ∞ , a n;k → 0 for
P∞
each k , and ° n = k =0 (an;k +1 − an;k )
+
→ 0 . Then for each x in C , Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ" → Γ " = { z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ " } and
P k
An x = ∞ k =0 an;k T x converges weakly to a fixed point of T
[1].
f (1=z) = a 0 + a 1 z + o (z ) . (2.3)
ing above and below a display depends on whether the lines above or below Fix z ∈ Γ" , and let C r (z ) = { ¸ ∈ C− : |¸ − z| = r } be a circle with radius
are short or long, as shown in the following examples. r = |z | sin "=2 . It follows from (2.3) that
A short line above:
Z 1
X Z m
1 f (¸ ) d¸ 1 ( ¸ − z0 ) d¸
x 2 + y 2 = z2 = am + R (z ), (2.4)
2¼i C r( z ) (¸ − z )
2
m= 0
2¼i C r(z ) (¸ − z )
2
and a short line below. where for the remainder R(z ) we have
|R(z )| ≤ r −1 max o (|z |) = r −1 max |¸ | · O (|z | + r )
¸∈C r( z) ¸∈ Cr( z)
sin 2 µ + cos 2 µ = 1
|z | + r 1 + sin "
= · O (|z | + r) = · O (|z |) .
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing r sin "
Therefore R( z) → 0 as z → ∞ , z ∈ Γ "=2 , and hence by the Cauchy theorem
1L
AT
EX automatically selects the spacing depending on the surrounding line lengths. (2.4) implies
Contents 5 6 B ook Title
2.6 Lists
d Bullet, numbered and description list environments are available. Lists,

f (1=z ) = a 1 + R (z ) → a1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2 ,
dz which can extend four levels deep, look like this:
that implies (2.2) by substituting 1=z back for z . ¤ (1) Numbered list item 1.
2.4 Section Headings The typeset appearance for this level is often different from the
Use the Section tag for major sections, such as the one just above. Four around the level indicator.
additional heading levels are available, as described below. (b) Another numbered list item under a list item.
2.4.1 Subsection Heading A. Fourth and final level of numbered list items allowed.
• Bullet item 1.
• Bullet item 2.
2.5 Tags — Second level bullet item.

You can apply the visual markup tags Bold, Italics, Roman, Sans Serif, · Fourth and final level bullet item.
You can apply the special, mathematics only, tags BLACKBOARD item. Double-click the lead-in box to enter or customize the text of the
BOLD, CALLI GRAP HIC , and fraktur. Note that blackboard bold and lead-in.
calligraphic are correct only when applied to uppercase letters A through
Z.
You can apply the size tags ti n y , s cripts ize , footnotesize, small, normalsize,
large, Large, and LARGE .
Following is a group of paragraphs marked as Body Quote. This environ- Following the text of this article is a short manual bibliography. This sample
ment is appropriate for a short quotation or a sequence of short quotations. bibliography has no relationship to the previous text, but it shows sample
The buck stops here. Harry Truman together. Here is an example: [2; 3; 4].
can do for your country. John F Kennedy
It’s no exaggeration to say the undecideds could go one
way or another. George Bush
Appendix A
follows it.
7 9
A p ril 28, 200 3 16:10 W S PC/ Bo ok Trim S ize f or 9in x 6in Bo ok -WorldSc ie ntificBo ok 9x 6
Bibliography
N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2, John Wiley and Sons,

New York, 1963.
Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behavior in fluid hydrogen
at rocket chamber pressures”, Int . J. Heat Mass Transfer, 1998a, 41, 3537-
3550
Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular Theory of Gases and
Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Properties of Gases and
Liquids, 4th Edition, McGraw- Hill Book Company, 1987
11
World Scientific Book 9.75x6.50
Document class base file: ws-book975x65.cls

Packages:
amsmath Standard
The front matter for this shell is limited. Three front matter fields appear in the body of the document: the
dedication, the preface, and the table of contents.
This shell inserts “Publisher’s pages” (see sample page i) before the body of the document. The shell also
automatically adds blank pages where necessary to ensure that new chapters begin on odd-numbered pages. Blank
pages carry headers and page numbers as shown on sample page viii. Other blank pages in the sample are not shown
here. Note the crop marks.
July 2 3, 2004 14:45 WSP C/Book Trim Size for 9.75in x 6.5in swp000 2 July 2 3, 2004 14:45 WSP C/Book Trim Size for 9.75in x 6.5in swp000 2
Use this environment for the dedication.

To World Scientific Publishing Company.
Publishers’ page
viii Book Title
Preface
This environment is used for the Preface.

Another preface paragraph.
vii
Chapter 1
Contents Purpose of this Document
Preface vii played mathematics in documents. It also illustrates five levels of section headings
and three kinds of lists. Finally, the document includes entries for a manual bibli-
1. Purpose of this Document 1 ography and an appendix.

2.1 In-line and Displayed Mathematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
R¯
2.2 Mathematics in section heads ® ln tdt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2.3 Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environments . . . . 4
2.4 Section Headings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
2.4.1 Subsection Heading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
2.5 Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.6 Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.7 About the Bibliography . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Appendix A The First Appendix 7
Afterword 9
Bibliography 11
ix 1
4 Book Title

Chapter 2 well-known fact on differentiation of asymptotic expansions of analytic functions.
Lemma 2.1 Let f (z ) be an analytic function in C+ . If f (z ) admits the repre-
Sample Mathematics and Text sentation
µ ¶
a1 1
f (z ) = a 0 + +o ,
z z
a 1 = − lim z2 f 0 (z ) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" . (2.2)

Proof. Change z for 1=z . Then Γ " → Γ" = {z ∈ C − : z ∈ Γ" } and
P∞
f (1 =z ) = a 0 + a 1 z + o (z ) . (2.3)
∞
X
ai (2.1) Fix z ∈ Γ" , and let C r (z ) = { ¸ ∈ C− : |¸ − z | = r} be a circle with radius
i =1 r = |z | sin "=2. It follows from (2.3) that
is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 2.1. Z 1 Z m
1 f (¸ ) d¸ X 1 (¸ − z0 ) d¸
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset of H , T a = am + R (z ), (2.4)
nonexpansive self map of C . Suppose that as n → ∞, an;k → 0 for each k , and 2¼i Cr (z) (¸ − z )
2
m =0
2 ¼i Cr (z)
2
(¸ − z )
P∞ P k
°n = k =0 (a n;k +1 − a n;k )
+
→ 0. Then f or each x in C , A n x = ∞
k =0 a n;k T x where for the remainder R (z ) we have
converges weakly to a fixed point of T [?].
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays.1 The spacing above |R(z )| ≤ r−1 max o (|z|) = r−1 max |¸ | · O (|z | + r )
¸∈C r(z ) ¸∈C r (z )
|z| + r 1 + sin "
as shown in the following examples. = · O (|z | + r ) = · O (|z |) .
r sin "
A short line above:
Therefore R (z ) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"= 2, and hence by the Cauchy theorem (2.4)
x2 + y 2 = z 2
implies
A long line above may depend on your margins d
f (1=z ) = a1 + R(z ) → a 1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"= 2 ,
dz
that implies (2.2) by substituting 1 =z back for z . ¤
R¯
ln tdt Use the Section tag for major sections, such as the one just above. Four additional
entries.
1L
AT
EX automatically selects the spacing depending on the surrounding line lengths. This text appears under a subsection heading.
Contents 5 6 Book Title
2.5 Tags Description List Each description list item has a lead-in followed by the item.
You can apply the logical markup tag Emphasized. Bunyip Mythical beast of Australian Aboriginal legends.
You can apply the visual markup tags Bold, Italics, Roman, Sans Serif, Slanted ,
You can apply the special, mathematics only, tags BLACKBOARD BOLD, 2.7 About the Bibliography
CALLIGRAPHIC, and fraktur . Note that blackboard bold and calligraphic are
correct only when applied to uppercase letters A through Z.
ography has no relationship to the previous text. The typesetting specification does
You can apply the size tags tiny, scriptsize, footnotesize, small , normalsize, large,
not display citations and they are not used in this sample document.
Large , and LARGE .

2.6 Lists

The typeset appearance for this level is often different from the screen ap-
pearance. The typeset appearance often uses parentheses around the level
indicator.
• Bullet item 1.
• Bullet item 2.
Appendix A
The appendix fragment is used only once. Subsequent appendices can be created The back matter often includes one or more of an index, an afterword, acknowledge-
using the Chapter Section/Body Tag. ments, a bibliography, a colophon, or any other similar item. In the back matter,
chapters do not produce a chapter number, but they are entered in the table of
contents. If you are not using anything in the back matter, you can delete the back
matter TeX field and everything that follows it.
7 9
July 2 3, 2004 14:45 WSP C/Book Trim Size for 9.75in x 6.5in swp000 2
Bibliography
1963.
Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical conditions”, Int. J.
11
Exam and Syllabus Shells
Exam and syllabus shells are based on the typesetting specifications set in one of two
base document classes—article.cls or report.cls. Exam shells usually have
limited front and back matter, if any.
188 Chapter 5 Exam and Syllabus Shells
Assignment

Packages:
amsmath Standard
The front matter is empty in this shell.
Math 191 Spring 1998

Assignment 5: More Derivative Stuff
The due date for this assignment is Friday February 11.

Reading assignment: Sections 3:4, 3:5, 3:6, 3:S, 4:3.
1. Use the definition of derivative to compute the derivative of the following functions:
(a) f (z) = z 3 + 2z + 1
(b) g(x) = 1=(3x2)
√
(c) °(t) = 3
t
2. Use problem 1 from assignment 3 and the definition of derivative to show that (f +g)0 =
f 0 + g0 .
3. Do the following exercises from the text:
• page 108 numbers 3 to 18 multiples of 3

• pages 115 and 116 numbers 9 to 36 multiples of 3
• page 144 numbers 3; 6; 8; 9:
4. Review the concept of inverse functions from Chapter 1.
(a) Suppose f and g are inverse functions and g0 (x) is known. Use chain rule and the
fact that f and g are inverse functions to find f 0 (x) in terms of g0 and f:
(b) Suppose E(x) and L(x) are inverse functions and L0 (x) = 1x . Use the above result
to find E0 (x).
5. Simultaneous tangent lines. Sketch the graphs of f (x) = −(x2 + 1) and g(x) = (x −1)2 .
Find the equations of the lines that are tangent to both curves simultaneously.
1
Bolton Institute 189
Bolton Institute

Packages:
sw20bolt None
latexsym None
amsmath Standard
The front matter for this shell, shown below, includes a header for the title, module information, exam number,
semester, year, time, reading time, and a running header.
–2–
School of Civil Engineering and Building

B. Eng. (Hons)/B. Eng. Degree in Civil Engineering
BOLTON INSTITUTE OF HIGHER EDUCATION SecondLevel Referred Examinations
B.A./B.Sc. COMBINED STUDIES Engineering Mathematics
MATHEMATICS PATHWAY
1. (a) In analysing the equilibrium of a portion of a steel framework the following equa-
LEVEL 1 MODULE: MATHEMATICS AS THE LANGUAGE OF SCIENCE tions were obtained connecting the forces F1; F2;and F3:
2F1 + 6F2 + 14F3 = 600

TERMINAL EXAM SEMESTER 2 1997/1998
4F1 + 9F2 + 13F3 = 300
−F1 + 3F2 + 24F3 = 1700
Date: Tuesday 2nd June 1998 Time: 6.30-8.15
(6.60-6.45 reading time) Find the inverse of the matrix of coefficients of F1; F2 ;and F3 and hence solve the
equations.
[8 marks]
Instructions to the candidates: µ ¶
A11 A12
(b) A square matrix A has been partitioned to the form A = where
A21 A22
1. The first 15 minutes is reading time. Do not write in your answer book until this time ......
is complete.
2. Maximum marks for each part/question are shown in brackets.
3. Answer 4 questions.
4. Each question carries equal marks.
Materials required:
1. Answer Books
2. Formulae Books
Class Announcement

Packages:
amsmath Standard
ClassAnnouncement
Math Tutoring Services at UNM
CAPS
Tutoring by appointment:
1. Register in person: Zimmerman Library, 3rd Floor
2. Call for appointment: 277-7205
Walk-in Lab: Centennial Library, 2nd floor down
MW 9:30-1:30 and 3-6
TTh 9-12 and 2-6
F 9-1:30
MEP Study Group
Tapy Hall room 218
TTh 2-4
The Study Group leader can tell you how to obtain a mentor for individual help.
MR&R
Tutoring TTh 9-6 by appointment
Student Union Building, Suite 200
277-6896
Class Handout 191
Class Handout

Packages:
amsmath Standard
Construction of an Algebraic Closure

Math 581 Fall, 1998
In this note we give a construction of an algebraic closure of an arbitrary field. This construction is due
to Emil Artin. Zorn’s lemma is not invoked in this proof, unlike the one given in class. We do indirectly
use Zorn’s lemma since we require the existence of maximal ideals inside arbitrary commutative rings with
identity, which does require Zorn’s lemma. However, we avoid the use of cardinal arithmetic.
Theorem 1 Let F be a field. Then there exists an algebraic closure of F .
Proof. Suppose we have constructed extension fields F ⊆ F 1 ⊆ F2 ⊆ · · · such that for all n , (1) Fn +1 is
algebraic over Fn , and (2) every nonconstant f (x ) ∈ Fn [x ] has a root in F n+1 . Let K be the union of the
F n for all n. Since the {Fn } form an ascending chain of fields, K is a field extension of F . Also, since being
algebraic is a transitive property, we see that every F n is algebraic over F , so K is also algebraic over F . We
claim that K is algebraically closed, which will then show K is an algebraic closure of F . To see this, take
a nonconstant g (x ) ∈ K [x]. Since there are only finitely many coefficients of g (x), we see that g (x) ∈ F n [x]
for some n . Then g (x) has a root in Fn +1 ⊆ K . This shows that K is algebraically closed.
We now inductively construct the fields F n . Suppose that F ⊆ F1 ⊆ · · · ⊆ Fn have been constructed.
We then construct Fn +1 . Consider the polynomial ring F n [{x f }] in the variables xf , one variable for each
monic irreducible polynomial f (x) ∈ F n [x]. Let I be the ideal of Fn [{ x f }] generated by {f (x f )} for each
such f . Then I 6= Fn [{ x f }], which is proved in the lemma below. Set R = F n [{x f }]=I , a nonzero ring. Let
M be a maximal ideal of R , and finally set F n+1 = R=M . We have a sequence of ring homomorphisms
Fn −→ F n [{x f }] −→ F n [{x f }]=I = R −→ R=M = F n+ 1 :
Since the map Fn → F n+1 is not the zero map (as 1 7→ 1), this map is 1 − 1, so we may assume Fn ⊆ F n+1 .
The ring F n+ 1 = R=M is a field since M is a maximal ideal of R . Furthermore, since the last two maps
above are onto, if a f is the image in F n+ 1 of xf then Fn +1 = Fn [{ af }]. Now f (x f ) → 0 in R since f ( xf ) ∈ I .
Thus f (x f ) → 0 in Fn +1 . But f (x f ) → f (a f ), so f (a f ) = 0. This shows that each a f is algebraic over Fn .
Hence as Fn +1 is generated over F n by the af , Fn +1 is algebraic over F n . Finally, if g( x) ∈ F n [x ] then let
f (x ) be a monic irreducible factor of g (x ). Then f ( x) has a root in F n +1 , namely a f . Thus g (x ) has a root
in F n +1 . This completes the proof of the properties of F n+1 .
The last step in the proof is to demonstrate that the ideal I defined above is nonzero. We do this in the
following lemma.
Lemma 2 Let F be a field and F [{x i }] the polynomial ring in the variables xi , where i ranges over some
set I. Suppose for each i that f i (x ) is a monic irreducible polynomial over F . Then the ideal I of F [{ xi }]
generated by f i (x i) for each i is a proper ideal.
Proof. Suppose I = F [{xi }]. Then there is an n and polynomials g 1; : : : ; gn such that
1 = f1 (x i 1) g1 (x i1 ; : : : ; xi n ) + · ·· + f n (x i n )gn (xi 1 ; : : : ; x i n ):
For simplicity we shall write xm in place of x im f or each m . We can assume that all the gm involve
only the variables x1 ; : : : ; xn by increasing the number of f m if necessary in an equation of this type.
Suppose n is chosen to be minimal such that we have such an expression involving n of the x i . If
S = F [x1 ; : : : ; xn ] then (f1 (x 1 ); : : : ; fn ( xn )) = S . Let R = F [x 1 ; : : : ; x n−1]. By minimality of n we
have ( f1 (x 1 ); : : : ; f n −1 (x n−1 )) 6= R. Let us view the above equation as taking place in S = R[xn ]. If
c m = fm (xm ) ∈ R we have J = (c1 ; : : : ; cn− 1 ; f n (x n )) = S . Now set I0 = (c1 ; : : : ; cn −1 ) ⊆ R. So
J = ( I; f n (xn )). There are ring homomorphisms
(R=I 0 )[xn ]
R[x n ] −→ ( R=I0 )[x n ] −→
(f n (x n ))
where f n (x n ) is the image of f n (x n ) in (R=I 0 )[x]. Since R=I0 is a nonzero ring and fn (xn ) is not a unit (as
f n is monic of degree at least 1) we see that this last ring is nonzero. Hence the kernel of the composite
homomorphism is a proper ideal of S . But J lies in this kernel, so J 6= S . This contradiction shows our
original I is a proper ideal of F [{xi }], proving the lemma.
1
SW Exam #1 - 8.5 x 11 Page

Packages:
amsmath Standard
sw20exm1 None
Exam Title
The Date
The Professor Name

Instructions. Replace this text by the instructions to the students. The fixed vertical spaces for each
question were entered using Insert Spacing, Vertical, and then choosing the Custom option. To adjust the
amount of space set aside for each question, place the insertion point to the right of the vertical space (the
large green down arrow that’s visible at the end of each question when View Invisibles is turned on).
1. The first question.
2. The second question.
(a) The first part.
(b) The second part.
(c) The third part.
3. The third question.
1
SW Exam #1 - 8.5 x 14 Page 193
SW Exam #1 - 8.5 x 14 Page

Packages:
amsmath Standard
sw20exm2 None
Exam Title
The Date
The Professor Name

(a) The first part.
(c) The third part.
4. The fourth question.
1
SW Exam #2

Packages:
amsmath Standard
sw20exm3 None
The front matter is empty. Title information appears in the body of the document.
Exam Title The Professor

The Date
Instructions. Replace this text by the instructions to the students. The fixed vertical spaces for each question
were entered using Insert Spacing, Vertical, and then choosing the Custom option. To adjust the amount of space
set aside for each question, place the insertion point to the right of the vertical space (the large green down arrow
that’s visible at the end of each question when View Invisibles is turned on).

(a) The first part.
(c) The third part.
1
SW Exam #3 195
SW Exam #3

Packages:
amsmath Standard
sw20exm4 None
Exam Title
The Date

(a) The first part.
(c) The third part.
1
Syllabus

Packages:
amsmath Standard
Math 191 Description of the Course

Calculus and Analytic Geometry I
Spring 1998 The course will be centered around several main topics covering the notion of function, continuity, deriva-
tives with applications, the basics of integration and exponential and logarithmic functions with applications.
Most every week a new assignment will be introduced on Thursday’s class meeting. The assignment will
Instructor: Dr. Patrick Morandi, WH 222, 646-2126 (Math dept: 646-3901), email: pmorandi. include work for the following week usually consisting of a reading assignment and culminating in a written
assignment to be handed in by Friday afternoon. The first assignment will be done individually and the
Time and Location: T, Th 11:45 - 1:00, Science Hall 108.
other assignments will be done in groups of 3 or 4 students. Each group will turn in one write-up.
Tuesday 10:30 - 11:30 The purpose of written homework in this course is to develop skills in understanding and communicating
Office Hours: Wednesday 12:00 - 1:30 mathematics. It is not to give you busy work or drill. Don’t think of your homework paper as a certificate
Thursday 1:30 - 3:00. proving that you have done the assignment. Think of it as an exercise in learning and in reporting what
you have learned. There is a lot of truth in the statement if you can’t explain it, you don’t understand it.
Textbook: Calculus and Analytic Geometry, 4th ed., Sherman K. Stein.
Communicate with the reader. Don’t write to the instructor (who already knows how to do the problems),
Material: Chapters 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6 up to 6.4. but explain your solutions to someone who needs help, perhaps a classmate who has been sick. Start at the
This course is an introduction to differential and integral calculus. The origins of calculus began over beginning and be clear, logical and complete. The ultimate test of what you write is this: can someone learn
2000 years ago in the time of the Greeks, who were interested in (among other things) areas and tangents. from your paper? Easily? Remember, the reader will see only what you wrote, not what you meant to say.
However it was not until Newton developed the essentials of calculus in the mid seventeenth century that So it must all be there, and be accurate. Make your paper reader friendly. We will talk some about this in
the problems of finding areas of general shapes and finding tangents to curves were seen to be related. class.
While Newton (and independently Leibniz) developed calculus in only a few years, it was not until the Class time will be divided between lecture, group work and group directed discussion. Since assignments
mid nineteenth century that calculus was put on the solid foundation that we know today. Applications of will include reading assignments, the lecture will serve to elaborate on and clarify the readings. You will be
calculus include virtually every area of science along with business and economics. expected to complete the reading assignment by the first class meeting of each week, where you often will
Grading: There will be weekly assignments, a midterm exam and a final. They will count toward the grade either have to hand in a paragraph about the reading, write such a paragraph at the start of class or have a
short quiz on the reading. During group directed discussion, you will be expected to report on your group’s
as follows.
Assignments 60% progress/difficulties and ask questions about the material on the assignment.
Midterm 15% The purpose of working in groups is twofold. First, by sharing ideas you will be able to learn from each
Final 25%. other, allowing you to clarify what you get out of the lecture and reading. Second is to get you accustomed
to working with other people, a likely situation in your future jobs. The goal for an assignment is to get each
group member to understand the entire assignment. Frequently a major part of an assignment will be to
Exams: The midterm exam will be on Thursday, February 27. The final exam is on Monday, May 4 from
summarize the various components. In order to do this you will need to understand the entire assignment.
3:30 to 5:30 p.m. This time is common to all 191 sections and is unchangeable.
Therefore you should not divide the problems among your group members, but have each person work on
In addition to these exams there will be a Differentiation Skills Exam (DSE) administered by the testing
each part and discuss what you come up with.
center. After you learn basic techniques of differentiation near the beginning of the semester, you will be
ready to take the DSE. To pass the course you MUST pass this mastery exam by the deadline of April 6. If
you have not passed the exam by this deadline, you will not pass the course, regardless of any of your other
work. The DSE does not affect the grade you receive in the course, which will be determined by your other
work. It is simply a basic calculational skills requirement for passing the course. The exam consists solely
of routine differentiation calculations, and you must do perfect work on a calculation to receive credit for it.
You must answer 9 out of 10 questions perfectly in order to pass the mastery exam. You may retake different
versions of the exam a number of times if you need to in order to master these skills. Further information
about the exam will be provided later.
You must also take the DSE at least once by the withdrawal date of March 6. Failure to do so will result
in you being automatically dropped from the course. You are offered a special bonus for completing the
exam in a timely fashion: up until March 6, only 8 questions need to be answered correctly to pass! After
this date, up to the final deadline of April 6, passing the exam requires 9 questions perfectly correct.
2
Other Document Shells
With one exception, the shells in this category are based on the typesetting specifica-
tions set in one of three base document classes—article.cls, book.cls, or re-
port.cls. The shells produce both short documents (faxes, letters, memos, press
releases, resumes, and slides) and long (books and reports). Obviously, the structure and
elements in these document shells differ widely. Many of the shells were designed for
earlier versions of the program.
198 Chapter 6 Other Document Shells
Assorted - Basic Assignment

Packages:
None
The front matter is blank. Title information appears in the body of the document.
Math 123, Section 4 Fall 2001 You can apply the size tags tiny , scriptsize, footnotesize, small, normalsize, large, Large, LARGE,
Assignment #2: Due October 9 huge and Huge .
This is a Body Math paragraph. Each time you press the Enter key, Scientific WorkPlace switches to
mathematics mode. This is convenient for carrying out “scratchpad” computations.
1 Mathematics in This Shell Following is a group of paragraphs marked as Body Quote. This environment is appropriate for a short
P∞ quotation or a sequence of short quotations.
The expression i =1 ai is in-line mathematics, while the numbered equation
∞
X The buck stops here. Harry Truman
ai (1)
Ask not what your country can do for you; ask what you can do for your country. John F
i=1
Kennedy
is displayed and automatically numbered as equation ??. I am not a crook. Richard Nixon
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex P subset of H , T a+ nonexpansive self map of C . It’s no exaggeration to say the undecideds could go one way or another. George Bush
SupposePthat as n → ∞, a n;k → 0 for each k , and ° n = ∞ k =0 (an;k +1 − an;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C ,
∞
A n x = k= 0 a n;k T k x converges weakly to a fixed point of T .
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays. The spacing above and below a display 4.1 List Environments
depends on whether the lines above or below are short or long, as shown in the following examples.
You can create numbered, bulleted, and description lists using the tag popup at the bottom left of the screen.
A short line above:
x2 + y 2 = z2 1. List item 1
2. List item 2
(a) A list item under a list item.
The typeset style for this level is different than the screen style. The screen shows a lower case
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for mathematical displays, alphabetic character followed by a period while the typeset style uses a lower case alphabetic
regardless of the margins. character surrounded by parentheses.
(b) Just another list item under a list item.
2 Features of This Shell i. Third level list item under a list item.
This is some introductory text.
• Bullet item 1
3 Section Headings • Bullet item 2
Use the Section tag for ma jor sections, and the Subsection tag for subsections. — Second level bullet item.
3.1 Subsection · Fourth (and final) level bullet item.
This is some harmless text under a subsection.
Description List Each description list item has a term followed by the description of that term. Double
click the term box to enter the term, or to change it.
3.1.1 Subsubsection
This is some harmless text under a subsubsection.
Subsubsubsection This is some harmless text under a subsubsubsection.
Subsubsubsubsection This is some harmless text under a subsubsubsubsection.
4 Tags
You can apply the visual markup tags Bold, Italics, Roman, Sans Serif, Slanted, Small Caps, and
Typewriter.
You can apply the special, mathematics only, tags fraktur; BLACKBOARD BOLD, and CALLIGRAPHIC.
Note that blackboard bold and calligraphic are correct only when applied to uppercase letters A through Z.
1 2
Assorted - Math Scratchpad 199
Assorted - Math Scratchpad

Packages:
latexsym None
When you open a new document with the Blank Document shell, the document window is empty. The shell sets
the environment for mathematical computations by opening in Body Math. The shell defaults to Body Math when-
ever the insertion point is in Body Math and you begin a new paragraph. Thus, you can begin entering mathematics
immediately without having to switch from text to mathematics first.
The mathematics scratchpad defaults to Body Math. Each time you

press the Enter key in Body Math, you enter mathematics, so that you can
perform computations without having to switch to mathematics first. In fact,
you must switch to text before you can type a paragraph like this one.
f (x) = |sin x|
n → ∞, P∞an;k → 0 +
° n = k=0 (a n;k+1 − a n;k) → 0
x2 + y2 = z 2
sin2 µ + cos2 µ = 1 ¡ ¢
f (z) = a 0 + az1 + o 1z
Γ " = {z ∈ C + : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "}
1
Book - SW Book #1

Packages:
tcibkpk, sw20obk1 None
The preface is an unnumbered chapter in the body of the document. The shell automatically adds blank pages
where necessary to ensure that new chapters begin on odd-numbered pages. Blank pages carry headers with page
Contents
1 Purp ose of this Document 7
2 Sam ple Mathem atics and Te xt 9

In-line and Displayed M athematics
R¯ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Mathematics in section heads ® ln tdt . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Theorems, Lemmata, and Other T heorem-like Environments 10
Sample SW Book #1 Section Headings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Subsection Heading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
A. U. Thor
About the Bibliography . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
July 19, 2004 A The First App endix 15
Afterword 17
3
Preface
Chapter 1
This is the preface and it is created us ing a TeX field in a paragraph by
itself containing \cha pter* {Pref ace}. When the document is loaded,
this appears in the edit window like a normal chapter, but it is actually
an unnumbered chapter. T he mark both TeX field at the beginning of
this paragraph sets t he correct page heading for the Preface portion of
the document. The preface does not appear in the table of contents.
Purp ose of this Document
This short sample document illustrates the ty peset appearance of in-

line and displayed mathematics in do cuments. It also illus trates five
levels of section headings and three k inds of lists. Finally, the document
includes entries for a manual bibliography and an appendix .
5 7
8 Purpose of this Do cument
Chapter 2

P∞
The expression i=1 ai is in-line mathematics, while the numbered
equation
∞
X
ai (2.1)
i=1

H , T a nonexpansive self map of C . Suppose that as n → ∞, an;k → 0
P∞ +
for eachPk , and ° n = k=0 (a n;k+1 − a n;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C ,
k
A nx = ∞ k=0 a n;k T x converges weakly to a fix ed p oint of T [1].
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical display s.1 T he
spacing above and below a display depends on whether the lines above
or below are short or long, as shown in the following examples.
A short line above:
x2 + y 2 = z 2
1 A
L TEX au tom atically selects the spacing d epen ding on th e s urroun ding line
lengths.
9
10 Sample Mathematics and Text Sample Mathematics and Text 11
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 , and hence by the Cauchy
spacing for mathematical displays, regardless of the margins. theorem (2.4) implies
d
f (1=z ) = a1 + R(z) → a 1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2 ,
R¯ dz
M athematics in section heads ® ln J@J that implies (2.2) by substituting 1=z back for z.

section heads may cause difficulties in typesetting styles with running Section Headings
additional heading levels are available, as describ ed below.
Theorems, Lemmata, and Other
Theorem-like Environments Subsection Heading
A number of t heorem-like environments is available. T he following
Subsubsection H eading
lemma is a well-known fact on differentiation of asym ptotic expansions
of analytic functions. This text appears under a subsubsection heading.
Lem m a 1 Let f (z) be an analytic function in C + . If f (z ) admits the Subsubsubsection Heading This tex t appears under a subsubsub-
representation µ ¶ section heading.
a1 1
f (z ) = a 0 + +o ,
z z Subsubsubsubsection H eading This text appears under a sub-
for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ " = {z ∈ C + : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then subsubsubsection heading.
a 1 = − lim z f (z ) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ " .
2 0
(2.2)
Pr oof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ " → Γ " = {z ∈ C − : z ∈ Γ" } and Tags
f (1=z ) = a0 + a 1z + o (z) . (2.3)
Fix z ∈ Γ " , and let C r (z ) = {¸ ∈ C− : |¸ − z| = r} be a circle with You can apply the visual markup tags Bold, Italics, Roman, Sans
radius r = |z| sin "=2. It follow s from (2.3) that Serif, Slanted, Sma ll C aps, and T ypewriter.
You can apply the special, mathematics only, tags BLA CK BO AR D
Z Z
(¸ − z 0 ) m d¸
1
X
1 f (¸ ) d¸ 1 BOLD, CALLI GR AP H I C, and fraktur. Note that blackboard b old
= am + R(z), (2.4) and calligraphic are correct only when applied to uppercase letters A
2¼i CH (z ) (¸ − z)
2
2¼ i C H (z) (¸ − z )
2
m=0
through Z.
where for the remainder R(z) we have You can apply the size tags tiny , scrip tsize , footnotesize , small, normal-
|R(z)| ≤ r−1 max o (|z|) = r −1 max |¸| · O (|z | + r)

size, large , Large , LARGE huge , and Huge
.
¸∈ CH (z ) ¸∈C H (z) Following is a group of paragraphs marked as Body Quote. This
|z | + r 1 + sin " env ironment is appropriate for a short quotation or a sequence of short
= · O (|z| + r) = · O (|z|) . quotations.
r sin "
The buck stops here. H arry Truman About the Bibliography

can do for your count ry. John F Kennedy Following the text of this article is a short manual bibliography. This
I am not a crook. Richard Nixon sample bibliography has no relationship t o the previous text, but it
show s sample citations such as [4], [5] and [6]. You can also have
It’s no exaggeration to say the undecideds could go one way multiple citations appear together. Here is an example: [2, 3, 4].
or another. George Bush
Lists
which can ex tend four levels deep, lo ok like this:

T he typeset appearance for this level is often different from
the screen appearance. T he typeset appearance often uses
parentheses around the level indicator.
A. Fourth and final level of numbered list items al-
lowed.
• Bullet item 1.
• Bullet item 2.

Description List Each description list item has a lead-in followed by

the item. Double-click the lead-in box to enter or customize the
text of the lead-in.
Bunyip Mythical b east of Australian Aboriginal legends.

Afterword
App endix A
The back matter often includes one or more of an index, an afterword,
ack nowledgements, a bibliography, a colophon, or any other similar
item. In the back matter, chapters do not produce a chapter number,
but they are entered in the table of contents.
The First App endix
The appendix fragment is used only once. Subsequent appendices can

be created using the Chapter Section/Body Tag.
15 17
Bibliography
[1] N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Func tional A nalysis, v . 2, John Wiley

and Sons, New York, 1963.
[2] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behavior
in fluid hy drogen at rocket chamb er pressures”, Int. J. Heat Mass
Transfer, 1998a, 41, 3537-3550
[3] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lew is number under supercritical
conditions”, Int. J. H eat Mass Transfer, in print
[4] Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R . B., Molecular Theory

[5] Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E., M olecular ther-
mo dy namics for fluid-phase eq uilibrium, Prentice -Hall, Inc., 1986
[6] R eid, R . C., P rausnitz, J. M . and Polling, B. E ., The Properties of
G ases and Liquids, 4th E dition, McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1987
19
Book - SW Book #2

Packages:
where necessary to ensure that new chapters begin on odd-numbered pages. Blank pages carry footers with page
Contents
1 Purpose of this Do cum ent 7
2 Sam ple M athematics and Text 9

In-line and Displayed MathematicsR¯ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Mathematics in section heads ® ln tdt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Section Headings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Sample SW Book #2 Subsection Heading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
A. U. Thor About the Bibliography . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
A T he First A ppendix 13
July 19, 2004
A fterword 15
CONTENTS 3
Preface
This is the preface and it is created using

a TeX field in a paragraph by itself containing
Chapter 1
\cha pter* {Pref ace}. When the document is
loaded, this appears in the edit window like a
normal chapter, but it is actually an unnum-
bered chapter. The mark both TeX field at the
beginning of this paragraph sets the correct
page heading for the Preface p ortion of the
do cument. The preface does not appear in the Purpose of this D ocument
table of contents.
This short sample do cument illustrates the

typeset appearance of in-line and displayed math-
emat ics in documents. It also illustrates five
levels of section headings and three k inds of
lists. F inally, the document includes entries
for a manual bibliography and an appendix.
PREFACE 5 Purpose of this Document 7
Chapter 2
In-line and Displayed Mathe- and a short line below.
matics gins
A long line ab ove may depend on your mar-
P∞
The expression i=1 a i is in-line mathematics,
while t he numbered equation sin 2 µ + cos2 µ = 1
X ∞
ai (2.1)
i=1 as will a long line b elow. This line is long
is displayed and automatically numb ered as enough to illustrate the spacing for mathemat-
equation 2.1. ical displays, regardless of the margins.
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed
bounded convex subset of H , T a nonexpansive
self map of C . Suppose that as n → ∞, an;k →
P∞ +
0 for each k , and ° n = k=0 (an;kP
+1 − a n;k ) →
0. Then for each x in C , A n x = k=0 an;k T kx
∞
conver ges weakly to a fixed point of T [1].

Two sets of LATEX parameters govern math-
emat ical displays. 1 The spacing above and be-
RMathematics
¯
in section heads
® ln J@J
low a display depends on w hether the lines
above or below are short or long, as shown in
the following ex amples.
A short line above:
M athematics can appear in section heads. Note
x2 + y2 = z 2 that mathematics in section heads may cause
1 A
LT EX aut omatically s elects th e sp acing dep endin g
difficulties in typ esetting styles with running
on th e su rround ing lin e lengths. headers or table of contents entries.
8 Purpose of this Do cument Sample Mathematics and Text 9
Theorems, Lemmata, and Other bold and calligraphic are correct only when ap- (b) Another numbered list item under
plied to uppercase letters A through Z. a list item.
Theorem-like Environments d
f (1=z) = a1 + R(z) → a1 , You can apply the size tags tiny, scriptsize, i. Third level numbered list item
dz footnotesize, small, normalsize, large, Large,
as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2, under a list item.
A number of theorem-like environments is avail- LARGE, huge and Huge. A. Fourth and final level of num-
able. The following lemma is a well-known fact that implies (2.2) by substituting 1=z back for Following is a group of paragraphs marked bered list items allowed.
on differentiation of asymptotic expansions of z. as Body Quote. This environment is appropri-
analytic functions. ate for a short quotation or a sequence of short • Bullet item 1.
quotations.
Lemma 1 Let f (z) be an analytic function in • Bullet item 2.
C+ . If f (z) admits the representation Section Headings The buck stops here. Harry Tru-
µ ¶ man — Second level bullet item.
a1 1
f (z) = a0 + +o , Ask not what your country can do ∗ Third level bullet item.
z z Use the Section tag for major sections, such as
the one just above. Four additional heading for you; ask what you can do for · Fourth and final level bullet
for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ" = levels are available, as described below. your country. John F. Kennedy item.
{z ∈ C + : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then I am not a crook. Richard Nixon
Description List Each description list item
a1 = − lim z 2f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ ". (2.2) It’s no exaggeration to say the un- has a lead-in followed by the item. Double-
Subsection Heading decideds could go one way or an- click the lead-in box to enter or customize
This text appears under a subsection heading. other. George H. W. Bush
Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ " → Γ" = the text of the lead-in.
{z ∈ C − : z ∈ Γ" } and I did not have sexual relations with
Subsubsection Heading Bunyip Mythical beast of Australian Aborig-
that woman, Miss Lewinsky. Bill
f (1=z) = a0 + a1 z + o (z) . (2.3) inal legends.
This text appears under a subsubsection head- Clinton
ing. They misunderestimated me. George
Fix z ∈ Γ ", and let Cr (z) = {¸ ∈ C− :
|¸ − z| = r} be a circle with radius W. Bush
r = |z| sin "=2. It follows from (2.3) that Subsubsubsection Heading This text ap- About the Bibliography
pears under a subsubsubsection heading.
Z
1 f (¸) d¸ Following the text of this article is a short
2¼i CH (z ) (¸ − z)
2 =
Subsubsubsubsection Heading This
Lists manual bibliography. This sample bibliogra-
1
X Z m text appears under a subsubsubsubsection head- phy has no relationship to the previous text,
1 (¸ − z 0) d¸
am 2 + R(z), (2.4) ing. Bullet, numbered and description list environ- but it shows sample citations such as [4], [5]
m=0
2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z) ments are available. Lists, which can extend and [6]. You can also have multiple citations
four levels deep, look like this: appear together. Here is an example: [2, 3, 4].
|R(z)| ≤ r−1 max o (|z|) Tags 1. Numbered list item 1.

¸ ∈CH (z )
= r−1 max |¸| · O (|z| + r) You can apply the logical markup tag Empha-
¸ ∈CH (z )
|z| + r sized. (a) A numbered list item under a list
= · O (|z| + r) You can apply the visual markup tags Bold, item.
r
1 + sin " Italics, Roman, Sans Serif, Slanted, Small The typeset appearance for this level
= · O (|z|). Caps, and Typewriter. is often different from the screen ap-
sin "
You can apply the special, mathematics pearance. The typeset appearance
Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2, and only, tags BLACKBOARD BOLD, fraktur, and often uses parentheses around the
hence by the Cauchy theorem (2.4) implies C ALLIG RAPHIC. Note that blackboard level indicator.
Afterword
App endix A The back mat ter often includes one or more
of an index, an afterword, acknowledgements,
a bibliography, a colophon, or any other simi-
lar item. In the back matter, chapters do not
pro duce a chapter number, but they are en-
tered in the table of contents.
The First Appendix
The appendix fragment is used only once.

Subsequent appendices can be created using
The First Appendix 13 The First Appendix 15

Bibliography
[1] N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional

Analys is, v. 2, John Wiley and Sons, New
York , 1963.
[2] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid

oxygen drop behav ior in fluid hydrogen at
rocket chamber pressures”, Int. J. H eat
M ass Transfer, 1998a, 41, 3537-3550
[3] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lew is
numb er under supercritical conditions”,
[4] Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C . F. and Bird,
R. B ., Molecular T heory of Gase s and Liq-
[5] P rausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R . and de
Azevedo, E., M olecular thermodynamics
for fluid-phase equilibrium, P rentice -Hall,
Inc., 1986
[6] Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M . and Polling,

B. E ., T he Properties of Gases and Liquids,
4th Edition, McGraw -Hill Book Company,
1987
BIBLIOGRAPHY 17
Book - SW Book #3

Packages:
CONTENTS
2 Sample Mathematics and Text 9

In-line and Displayed MathematicsR¯ . . . . . . . . . . 9
Mathematics in section heads ® ln tdt . . . . . . . . 10
Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Envi-
Sample SW Book #3 ronments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Section Headings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Subsection Heading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
A. U. Thor Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
About the Bibliography . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
July 19, 2004 A The First Appendix 15
Afterword 17
CONTENTS 3
PREFACE 1 PURPOSE OF THIS DOCUMENT
This is the preface and it is created using a TeX field in a This short sample document illustrates the typeset appearance
paragraph by itself containing \chapter*{Preface}. When of in-line and displayed mathematics in documents. It also il-
the document is loaded, this appears in the edit window like a lustrates five levels of section headings and three kinds of lists.
normal chapter, but it is actually an unnumbered chapter. The Finally, the document includes entries for a manual bibliogra-
markboth TeX field at the beginning of this paragraph sets the phy and an appendix.
correct page heading for the Preface portion of the document.
The preface does not appear in the table of contents.
PREFACE 5 PURPOSE OF THIS DOCUMENT 7
2 SAMPLE MATHEMATICS AND

TEXT
P∞
The expression i=1 ai is in-line mathematics, while the num-
bered equation
∞
X
ai (2.1)
i=1

Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex
subset of H, T a nonexpansive self mapPof C . Suppose that as
n → ∞, an;k → 0 for each k, andP°n = ∞ +
k=0 (an;k+1 − a n;k) →
0. Then for each x in C, An x = k=0 an;k T k x converges weakly
∞

plays.1 The spacing above and below a display depends on
whether the lines above or below are short or long, as shown in
A short line above:
x2 + y2 = z 2

as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illus-

trate the spacing for mathematical displays, regardless of the
margins.
1 A
L TEX automatically selects the spacing depending on the surrounding
line lengths.
8 PURPOSE OF THIS DOCUMENT SAMPLE MATHEMATICS AND TEXT 9

R¯
ln J@J
d
f (1=z) = a 1 + R(z) → a1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2,
dz
Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note that math-
ematics in section heads may cause difficulties in typesetting
styles with running headers or table of contents entries.
Section Headings
Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environ-

Use the Section tag for major sections, such as the one just
ments above. Four additional heading levels are available, as de-
scribed below.
A number of theorem-like environments is available. The fol-

lowing lemma is a well-known fact on differentiation of asymp- Subsection
totic expansions of analytic functions. Heading This text appears under a subsection heading.
Lemma 1 Let f (z) be an analytic function in C +. If f (z) Subsubsection Heading

admits the representation
µ ¶ This text appears under a subsubsection heading.
a1 1
f (z) = a0 + +o ,
z z Subsubsubsection Heading This text appears under a sub-
for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ " = {z ∈ C + : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} subsubsection heading.
then
a1 = − lim z 2f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" . (2.2) Subsubsubsubsection Heading This text appears un-
der a subsubsubsubsection heading.
Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ" → Γ" = {z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ"}
and
f (1=z) = a0 + a 1z + o (z) . (2.3)
Fix z ∈ Γ", and let Cr (z) = {¸ ∈ C− : |¸ − z| = r} be a circle
Tags
with radius r = |z| sin "=2. It follows from (2.3) that
Z Z
(¸ − z 0)m d¸
1
X
1 f (¸) d¸ 1 You can apply the logical markup tag Emphasized.
2 = am 2 + R(z),
2¼i CH ( z ) (¸ − z) m=0
2¼i CH ( z) (¸ − z) You can apply the visual markup tags Bold, Italics, Roman,
(2.4) Sans Serif, Slanted, Small Caps, and Typewriter.
where for the remainder R(z) we have You can apply the special, mathematics only, tags
BLACKBOARD BOLD, C ALLIG RAPHIC, and fraktur.
|R(z)| ≤ r −1 max o (|z|) = r −1 max |¸| · O (|z| + r) Note that blackboard bold and calligraphic are correct only
¸ ∈CH (z ) ¸ ∈CH (z)
when applied to uppercase letters A through Z.
|z| + r 1 + sin "
= · O (|z| + r) = · O (|z|) . You can apply the size tags tiny, scriptsize, footnotesize, small,
r sin "
Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 , and hence by the
normalsize, large, Large, LARGE, huge,
Cauchy theorem (2.4) implies and Huge.
10 SAMPLE MATHEMATICS AND TEXT SAMPLE MATHEMATICS AND TEXT 11
Following is a group of paragraphs marked as Body Quote. About the Bibliography

This environment is appropriate for a short quotation or a se-
quence of short quotations.
The buck stops here. Harry Truman Following the text of this article is a short manual bibliography.
Ask not what your country can do for you; ask what This sample bibliography has no relationship to the previous
you can do for your country. John F Kennedy text, but it shows sample citations such as [4], [5] and [6]. You
can also have multiple citations appear together. Here is an
example: [2, 3, 4].
It’s no exaggeration to say the undecideds could go
one way or another. George Bush
Lists
Bullet, numbered and description list environments are avail-

able. Lists, which can extend four levels deep, look like this:

The typeset appearance for this level is often dif-
ferent from the screen appearance. The typeset ap-
pearance often uses parentheses around the level in-
dicator.
A. Fourth and final level of numbered list items
allowed.
• Bullet item 1.
• Bullet item 2.

Description List Each description list item has a lead-in fol-

lowed by the item. Double-click the lead-in box to enter
or customize the text of the lead-in.
12 SAMPLE MATHEMATICS AND TEXT SAMPLE MATHEMATICS AND TEXT 13

A THE FIRST APPENDIX AFTERWORD
The appendix fragment is used only once. Subsequent appen- The back matter often includes one or more of an index, an
dices can be created using the Chapter Section/Body Tag. afterword, acknowledgements, a bibliography, a colophon, or
any other similar item. In the back matter, chapters do not
produce a chapter number, but they are entered in the table of
contents.
THE FIRST APPENDIX 15 THE FIRST APPENDIX 17
BIBLIOGRAPHY
[1] N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2, John

[2] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop be-
havior in fluid hydrogen at rocket chamber pressures”, Int.
J. Heat Mass Transfer, 1998a, 41, 3537-3550
[3] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under su-
percritical conditions”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, in print
[4] Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular

Theory of Gases and Liquids, John Wiley and Sons, Inc.,
1964
[5] Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E., Molec-

ular thermodynamics for fluid-phase equilibrium, Prentice
-Hall, Inc., 1986
[6] Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Prop-

erties of Gases and Liquids, 4th Edition, McGraw-Hill Book
Company, 1987
BIBLIOGRAPHY 19
Book - SW Book #4

Packages:
CONTENTS

2.1 In-line and Displayed MathematicsR¯ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2.2 Mathematics in section heads ® ln tdt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2.3 Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environments . . 10
2.4 Section Headings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
2.4.1 Subsection Heading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2.5 Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2.6 Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2.7 About the Bibliography . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Sample SW Book #4
Afterword 15
A. U. Thor
July 23, 2004
CONTENTS 3
PREFACE 1. PURPOSE OF THIS DOCUMENT
This is the preface and it is created using a TeX field in a paragraph by itself This short sample document illustrates the typeset appearance of in-line and
containing \chapter*{Preface}. When the document is loaded, this appears displayed mathematics in documents. It also illustrates five levels of section
in the edit window like a normal chapter, but it is actually an unnumbered headings and three kinds of lists. Finally, the document includes entries for a
chapter. The markboth TeX field at the beginning of this paragraph sets the manual bibliography and an appendix.
correct page heading for the Preface portion of the document. The preface
does not appear in the table of contents.
PREFACE 5 PURPOSE OF THIS DOCUMENT 7
2. SAMPLE MATHEMATICS AND TEXT

P∞
X
∞
ai (2.1)
i=1

nonexpansive
P∞ self map of C. Suppose that as n → ∞, an;k → 0 for
Peach k, and
° n = k=0 (an;k+1 − an;k) → 0. Then for each x in C, An x = k=0 an;k T k x
+ ∞

A short line above:
x2 + y2 = z2

R¯
ln J@J

1 A
8 PURPOSE OF THIS DOCUMENT SAMPLE MATHEMATICS AND TEXT 9

2.3 Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem- 2.4.1 Subsection Heading
like Environments This text appears under a subsection heading.
A number of theorem-like environments is available. The following lemma Subsubsection Heading

is a well-known fact on differentiation of asymptotic expansions of analytic This text appears under a subsubsection heading.
functions.
Lemma 1 Let f (z) be an analytic function in C+. If f (z) admits the repre- Subsubsubsection Heading This text appears under a subsubsubsection
sentation heading.
µ ¶
a1 1
f (z) = a0 + +o ,
z z Subsubsubsubsection Heading This text appears under a subsubsub-
subsection heading.
a 1 = − lim z 2 f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ ". (2.2)
Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ" → Γ " = {z ∈ C − : z ∈ Γ" } and 2.5 Tags
f (1=z) = a0 + a1z + o (z) . (2.3)
Z X1 Z m You can apply the special, mathematics only, tags BLACKBOARD BOLD,
1 f (¸) d¸ 1 (¸ − z0) d¸
2 = am + R(z), (2.4) C ALLIG RAPHIC, and fraktur. Note that blackboard bold and calligraphic
2¼i CH (z ) (¸ − z) 2¼i CH(z) (¸ − z)2
m=0 are correct only when applied to uppercase letters A through Z.
You can apply the size tags tiny, scriptsize, footnotesize, small, normalsize, large,
Large, LARGE, huge and Huge .
|R(z)| ≤ r −1 max o (|z|) = r−1 max |¸| · O (|z| + r) Following is a group of paragraphs marked as Body Quote. This environ-
¸∈CH ( z) ¸∈CH (z )
|z| + r 1 + sin " ment is appropriate for a short quotation or a sequence of short quotations.
= · O (|z| + r) = · O (|z|) .
r sin " The buck stops here. Harry Truman
Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 , and hence by the Cauchy theorem Ask not what your country can do for you; ask what you can do
(2.4) implies for your country. John F Kennedy
d I am not a crook. Richard Nixon
f (1=z) = a1 + R(z) → a1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2,
dz It’s no exaggeration to say the undecideds could go one way or
that implies (2.2) by substituting 1=z back for z. another. George Bush
2.4 Section Headings 2.6 Lists

Use the Section tag for major sections, such as the one just above. Four Bullet, numbered and description list environments are available. Lists, which
additional heading levels are available, as described below. can extend four levels deep, look like this:
10 SAMPLE MATHEMATICS AND TEXT TAGS 11
1. Numbered list item 1. A. THE FIRST APPENDIX


The typeset appearance for this level is often different from the The appendix fragment is used only once. Subsequent appendices can be cre-
screen appearance. The typeset appearance often uses parentheses ated using the Chapter Section/Body Tag.
• Bullet item 1.
• Bullet item 2.

lead-in.
12 SAMPLE MATHEMATICS AND TEXT THE FIRST APPENDIX 13

AFTERWORD BIBLIOGRAPHY
The back matter often includes one or more of an index, an afterword, ac- [1] N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2, John Wiley and
knowledgements, a bibliography, a colophon, or any other similar item. In the Sons, New York, 1963.
back matter, chapters do not produce a chapter number, but they are entered
in the table of contents. [2] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behavior in fluid
41, 3537-3550
THE FIRST APPENDIX 15 BIBLIOGRAPHY 17

Book - SW Book #5

Packages:
where necessary to ensure that new chapters begin on odd-numbered pages. Blank pages carry page numbers at the
top of the page, as shown on sample page 8. Other blank pages in the sample are not shown here.
CONTENTS

In-line and Displayed MathematicsR¯ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Mathematics in section heads ® ln tdt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environments . . . . . . . 9
Section Headings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Subsection Heading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
About the Bibliography . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Afterword 15
Sample SW Book #5
A. U. Thor
April 30, 2003

5 7
PREFACE Chapter 1 PURPOSE OF THIS

This is the preface and it is created using a TeX field in a paragraph by itself
containing \chapter*{Preface}. When the document is loaded, this appears in
DOCUMENT
the edit window like a normal chapter, but it is actually an unnumbered chapter. This short sample document illustrates the typeset appearance of in-line and dis-
The markboth TeX field at the beginning of this paragraph sets the correct page played mathematics in documents. It also illustrates five levels of section headings
heading for the Preface portion of the document. The preface does not appear in and three kinds of lists. Finally, the document includes entries for a manual bibli-
the table of contents. ography and an appendix.
8 9
Chapter 2 SAMPLE MATHEMATICS

AND TEXT
In-line and Displayed
P
Mathematics
The expression ∞
i=1 ai is in-line mathematics, while the numbered equation
∞
X
ai (2.1)
i=1

nonexpansive self map of C . Suppose that as n → ∞, an;k → 0 for each k , and
P∞ + P∞ k
°n = k=0 (an;k +1 − an;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C , Anx = k=0 an;k T x
1
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays. The spacing
or long, as shown in the following examples.
A short line above:
x2 + y2 = z 2
R¯
ln tdt
entries.

Lemma 1 Let f (z) be an analytic function in C +. If f (z) admits the represen-

tation µ ¶
a1 1
f (z) = a0 + +o ,
z z
a 1 = − lim z 2f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ". (2.2)

1 A
10 11
Proof. Change z for 1=z . Then Γ" → Γ" = {z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ" } and You can apply the size tags t i ny , scriptsize, footnotesize, small, normalsize, large,
f (1=z) = a0 + a1z + o (z) . (2.3)
Large, LARGE, huge and Huge.
Fix z ∈ Γ" , and let Cr (z) = {¸ ∈ C − : |¸ − z| = r} be a circle with radius is appropriate for a short quotation or a sequence of short quotations.
Z 1
X Z m Ask not what your country can do for you; ask what you can do for
1 f (¸) d¸ 1 (¸ − z 0) d¸
2 = am 2 + R(z) , (2.4) your country. John F Kennedy
2¼i CH (z ) (¸ − z) m=0
2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z)
where for the remainder R(z) we have It’s no exaggeration to say the undecideds could go one way or another.
George Bush
|R(z)| ≤ r −1
max o (|z|) = r −1
max |¸| · O (|z| + r)
¸ ∈CH (z) ¸∈CH (z)
|z| + r 1 + sin " Lists

= · O (|z| + r) = · O (|z|) . Bullet, numbered and description list environments are available. Lists, which can
r sin "
Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2, and hence by the Cauchy theorem (2.4)
implies 1. Numbered list item 1.
d 2. Numbered list item 2.

f (1=z) = a 1 + R(z) → a1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2,
dz
Section Headings
level indicator.
heading levels are available, as described below. (b) Another numbered list item under a list item.
Subsection Heading
• Bullet item 1.
• Bullet item 2.
Subsubsubsection Heading This text appears under a subsubsubsection head- ∗ Third level bullet item.
ing.
Subsubsubsubsection Heading This text appears under a subsubsubsub- Description List Each description list item has a lead-in followed by the item.
section heading. Double-click the lead-in box to enter or customize the text of the lead-in.
Tags Bunyip Mythical beast of Australian Aboriginal legends.

You can apply the visual markup tags Bold, Italics , Roman, Sans Serif, Slanted, About the Bibliography
Small Caps , and Typewriter. Following the text of this article is a short manual bibliography. This sample
You can apply the special, mathematics only, tags BLACKBOARD BOLD, bibliography has no relationship to the previous text, but it shows sample citations
CALLIGRAP HIC , and fraktur. Note that blackboard bold and calligraphic are such as [4], [5] and [6]. You can also have multiple citations appear together. Here
correct only when applied to uppercase letters A through Z. is an example: [2, 3, 4].
13 15
Appendix A THE FIRST APPENDIX AFTERWORD

The appendix fragment is used only once. Subsequent appendices can be created The back matter often includes one or more of an index, an afterword, acknowl-
using the Chapter Section/Body Tag. edgements, a bibliography, a colophon, or any other similar item. In the back
matter, chapters do not produce a chapter number, but they are entered in the
table of contents.
17
BIBLIOGRAPHY
New York, 1963.
3537-3550

Book - SW Book #6

Packages:
where necessary to ensure that new chapters begin on odd-numbered pages. Blank pages page numbers at the bottom
of the page, as shown on sample page 8. Other blank pages in the sample are not shown here.
CONTENTS

In-line and Displayed MathematicsR¯ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Mathematics in section heads ® ln tdt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environments . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Section Headings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Subsection Heading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
About the Bibliography . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Sample SW Book #6 Afterword 15
A. U. Thor
July 19, 2004
3
PREFACE Chapter 1 PURPOSE OF THIS

This is the preface and it is created using DOCUMENT
a TeX field in a paragraph by itself containing
\chapter*{Preface}. When the document is This short sample document illustrates the
loaded, this appears in the edit window like a typeset appearance of in-line and displayed
normal chapter, but it is actually an unnum- mathematics in documents. It also illustrates
bered chapter. The markboth TeX field at five levels of section headings and three kinds
the beginning of this paragraph sets the cor- of lists. Finally, the document includes entries
rect page heading for the Preface portion of for a manual bibliography and an appendix.
the document. The preface does not appear
in the table of contents.
5 7
Chapter 2 SAMPLE MATHEMATICS

AND TEXT
In-line and Displayed Mathematics Theorems, Lemmata, and Other
P∞ Theorem-like Environments
The expression i=1 ai is in-line mathematics,
while the numbered equation
A number of theorem-like environments is avail-
X
∞ able. The following lemma is a well-known
ai (2.1) fact on differentiation of asymptotic expan-
i=1 sions of analytic functions.
is displayed and automatically numbered as
equation 2.1. Lemma 1 Let f (z) be an analytic function
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed in C +. If f (z) admits the representation
bounded convex subset of H, T a nonexpan- µ ¶
a 1
sive self map of C . Suppose that as n → ∞, f (z) = a0 + 1 + o ,
z z
an;k P→ 0 for each k, and
°n = ∞
k =0 (a n;k+1 −Pan;k )+ → 0. Then for for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ" = {z ∈ C + : 0 < "
each x in C , An x = k=0 an;k T kx converges
∞
≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern math- a 1 = − lim z 2f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ ". (2.2)
ematical displays.1 The spacing above and
below a display depends on whether the lines Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ" → Γ" =
above or below are short or long, as shown in {z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ"} and
f (1=z) = a0 + a1z + o (z) . (2.3)
A short line above:
Fix z ∈ Γ", and let Cr (z) = {¸ ∈ C− :
x2 + y2 = z 2
|¸ − z| = r} be a circle with radius
and a short line below. r = |z| sin "=2. It follows from (2.3) that
A long line above may depend on your Z
1 f (¸) d¸
margins 2 =
sin2 µ + cos2 µ = 1 2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z)
Z
(¸ − z0)m d¸
1
X
as will a long line below. This line is long 1
am 2 + R(z), (2.4)
enough to illustrate the spacing for mathemat- m=0
2¼i CH (z ) (¸ − z)
ical displays, regardless of the margins.
|R(z)| ≤ r −1 max o (|z|)

Mathematics
R ¯ in section heads ¸∈CH (z)
ln J@J = r −1 max |¸| · O (|z| + r)

® ¸∈CH (z)
|z| + r
Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note = · O (|z| + r)
that mathematics in section heads may cause r
1 + sin "
difficulties in typesetting styles with running = · O (|z|) .
sin "
1 A
L TEX automatically selects the spacing depend- Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2 , and
ing on the surrounding line lengths. hence by the Cauchy theorem (2.4) implies
8 9
Following is a group of paragraphs marked Description List Each description list item
as Body Quote. This environment is appro- has a lead-in followed by the item. Double-
d
f (1=z) = a1 + R(z) → a1, priate for a short quotation or a sequence of click the lead-in box to enter or cus-
dz short quotations. tomize the text of the lead-in.
as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2,
The buck stops here. Harry Tru- Bunyip Mythical beast of Australian Abo-
that implies (2.2) by substituting 1=z back for man riginal legends.
z.
Ask not what your country can do
for you; ask what you can do for
your country. John F. Kennedy About the Bibliography
Section Headings
I am not a crook. Richard Nixon Following the text of this article is a short
Use the Section tag for major sections, such as It’s no exaggeration to say the un- manual bibliography. This sample bibliogra-
the one just above. Four additional heading decideds could go one way or an- phy has no relationship to the previous text,
levels are available, as described below. other. George Bush but it shows sample citations such as [4], [5]
and [6]. You can also have multiple citations
Subsection Heading
Lists
Bullet, numbered and description list environ-
ments are available. Lists, which can extend
Subsubsection Heading four levels deep, look like this:
This text appears under a subsubsection head-
ing.
Subsubsubsection Heading This text ap-
pears under a subsubsubsection heading. (a) A numbered list item under a list
item.
Subsubsubsubsection Heading This The typeset appearance for
text appears under a subsubsubsubsection this level is often different from the
heading. screen appearance. The typeset ap-
pearance often uses parentheses
Tags (b) Another numbered list item under
a list item.
You can apply the logical markup tag Empha- i. Third level numbered list item
sized. under a list item.
You can apply the visual markup tags Bold,
A. Fourth and final level num-
Italics, Roman, Sans Serif, Slanted, Small
bered list item.
Caps, and Typewriter.
You can apply the special, mathematics • Bullet item 1.
only, tags BLACKBOARD BOLD,
CALLIGRAPHIC , and fraktur. Note that • Bullet item 2.
blackboard bold and calligraphic are correct
only for uppercase letters A through Z. — Second level bullet item.
You can apply the size tags tiny, scriptsize, ∗ Third level bullet item.
footnotesize, small, normalsize, large, Large,
· Fourth and final level bul-
LARGE, huge and Huge. let item.
10 11
Appendix A THE FIRST APPENDIX AFTERWORD

The appendix fragment is used only once. The back matter often includes one or more
Subsequent appendices can be created using of an index, an afterword, acknowledgements,
the Chapter Section/Body Tag. a bibliography, a colophon, or any other simi-
lar item. In the back matter, chapters do not
produce a chapter number, but they are en-
tered in the table of contents.
13 15
BIBLIOGRAPHY
York, 1963.

rocket chamber pressures”, Int. J. Heat
Mass Transfer, 1998a, 41, 3537-3550
[3] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis

number under supercritical conditions”,
[4] Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird,

R. B., Molecular Theory of Gases and Liq-
[5] Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de

Azevedo, E., Molecular thermodynamics
for fluid-phase equilibrium, Prentice -Hall,
Inc., 1986
[6] Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling,
B. E., The Properties of Gases and Liq-
uids, 4th Edition, McGraw-Hill Book
Company, 1987
17
Fax - SW Fax #1

Packages:
tcimemo None
sw20fax1 None
The shell contains fields to fill with information about the name, address, telephone, and fax number of the
sender and recipient; the number of pages in the fax message; special instructions; and subject of the message.
Fax Transmission
No. of pages incl. this one: 1
To: John Author
Fax number: 555-2332 Voice: 890-4444

cc: Ron Programmer
From: Technical Support Division

Date: July 1, 2001
If you do not receive all pages, please contact:

1101 San Antonio Road
Suite 134
1-123-456-7890
(Fax) 1-123-789-0456
Special Instructions: Extremely urgent!
Subject: A Fax
Here is the content of the fax memo. This fax includes contact information, the number
of pages, special instructions, and the fax message itself. Complete the fields with the
information you need.
The fields in the fax shell can be left blank but should not be deleted. The Subject field
must remain, and must immediately precede the body of the fax.
encl: None
Fax - SW Fax #2 225
Fax - SW Fax #2

Packages:
tcimemo None
sw20fax2 None

Fax Transmission No. of pages incl. this one: 1
To: John Author FAX #: 987-6543

Company: Mathematics, Inc. Phone #: 123-4567
From: Technical Support Division Date: July 1, 2001
Subject: A Fax Time: 3:43 pm
cc: Ron Programmer
encl: None
Our FAX number is 1-123-789-0456

1101 San Antonio Road Suite 134 1-123-456-7890
Fax - SW Fax #3

Packages:
tcimemo None
sw20fax3 None
Fax Transmission
From: Technical Support Division MacKichan Software, Inc.

Questions? Call 1-123-456-7890 1101 San Antonio Road
Suite 134
To: John Author
Company: Mathematics, Inc.
Date: July 1, 2001
Time: 3:43 pm 1 page(s) incl. this one
A Fax
cc: Ron Programmer
encl: None
Letter - Informal 227
Letter - Informal

Packages:
lettopti None
sw20infl None
This simple shell contains fields in the body of the document to fill with the date, closing, and signature.
To: June 3, 2001 Page: 2
June 3, 2001 equations, statistics, and applied modern algebra. The manual includes exercises and sample
solutions to help you practice the ideas presented and to suggest possibilities to explore
beyond those covered in the manual.
Dear Simon,
Best regards,
Here is the information you requested about our products. Scientific WorkPlace and Sci-
entific Word make writing and doing mathematics easier than you ever imagined possible.
The Gold Standard for mathematical publishing since 1992, these scientific word processors
increase your productivity because they are easy to learn and use. You can compose and Jack
edit your documents directly on the screen, without being forced to think in a programming P.S. If you need additional information, please let me know.
language. A simple click of a button allows you to typeset your document in LaTeX. This
lets you concentrate on writing a correct paper, while our software ensures it is a beautiful
one. Scientific WorkPlace and Scientific Word enable both professional and support staff to
produce stunning results quickly and easily, without having to know TeX or LaTeX.
Getting Started with Scientific WorkPlace, Scientific Word, and Scientific Notebook de-
scribes how to install and activate these three products, and how to get started creating
your own documents. The chapters cover installation; creating, revising, saving, and print-
ing a simple document. Additional chapters cover how to enter text and mathematics,
format using tags, preview and print, using hyperlinks, and customize the program. Ad-
ditionally, the manual describes how to compute and plot with the integrated computer
algebra system in Scientific WorkPlace and Scientific Notebook. Final chapters address how
to typeset your documents and how to take advantage of automatic numbering, indexing,
and cross-referencing in Scientific WorkPlace and Scientific Word, and how to get help when
you need it.
Creating Documents with Scientific WorkPlace and Scientific Word is organized by tasks,
giving step-by-step instructions for completing both simple and more advanced user tasks.
It begins with the basic word processing tasks required for nearly every document: opening,
saving, and closing documents; entering and editing text and mathematics; previewing and
printing when you typeset a document and when you don’t; and formatting documents.
The second half explains more advanced tasks, including using graphics and tables, struc-
turing documents for LaTeX typesetting and for online use, managing documents with the
Document Manager, and customizing your installation. A full index simplifies finding the
Doing Mathematics with Scientific WorkPlace and Scientific Notebook describes how to use
the built-in computer algebra system to do a wide range of mathematics without dealing
directly with the syntax of the computer algebra system. This book is organized around the
undergraduate mathematics curriculum for ease of use by beginners through professionals.
Chapters 1—5 give you basic procedures for using the system, illustrated with material from
the standard precalculus courses. Chapter 6 provides examples and instructions for creating
graphs of curves and surfaces. Chapters 7—12 provide procedures for using the system
for problems in analytic geometry and calculus, linear algebra, vector analysis, differential
Letter - Similar to TeXbook Example

Packages:
sw20klet None
The shell contains fields in the body of the document to fill with information about the name and address of the
sender and recipient, the signature of the sender, the date, copies, and postscript.
To: John Brown June 3, 2001 Page 2
600 Ericksen Avenue NE, Suite 300 printing when you typeset a document and when you don’t; and formatting documents.
MacKichan Software, Inc. Bainbridge Island, WA 98110 The second half explains more advanced tasks, including using graphics and tables, struc-
Michele Well, Analyst Document Manager, and customizing your installation. A full index simplifies finding the
June 3, 2001 the built-in computer algebra system to do a wide range of mathematics without dealing
John Brown undergraduate mathematics curriculum for ease of use by beginners through professionals.
506 Blackhawk Chapters 1—5 give you basic procedures for using the system, illustrated with material from
Las Cruces, NM 88001 the standard precalculus courses. Chapter 6 provides examples and instructions for creating
Dear John, for problems in analytic geometry and calculus, linear algebra, vector analysis, differential
equations, statistics, and applied modern algebra. The manual includes exercises and sample
entific Word make writing and doing mathematics easier than you ever imagined possible. solutions to help you practice the ideas presented and to suggest possibilities to explore
increase your productivity because they are easy to learn and use. You can compose and Sincerely,
edit your documents directly on the screen, without being forced to think in a programming
produce stunning results quickly and easily, without having to know TeX or LaTeX. Michele Well
gp/MW
scribes how to install and activate these three products, and how to get started creating CC: Tom Smith
your own documents. The chapters cover installation; creating, revising, saving, and print- George Wayne
format using tags, preview and print, using hyperlinks, and customize the program. Ad- P.S. If you need additional information, please call.
you need it.
Letter - SW Letter #1

Packages:
lettopti None
sw20let1 None
sender and recipient, the date, the subject, the opening and closing, and copies and enclosures.
To: Elizabeth Smith October 29, 2001 Page: 2
600 Ericksen Avenue NE, Suite 300 Doing Mathematics with Scientific WorkPlace and Scientific Notebook describes how to use
Bainbridge Island, WA 98110 the built-in computer algebra system to do a wide range of mathematics without dealing
October 29, 2001 undergraduate mathematics curriculum for ease of use by beginners through professionals.
Elizabeth Smith the standard precalculus courses. Chapter 6 provides examples and instructions for creating
Best Writing and Graphics, Inc. graphs of curves and surfaces. Chapters 7—12 provide procedures for using the system
1234 Any Street for problems in analytic geometry and calculus, linear algebra, vector analysis, differential
Chicago, IL 60613 equations, statistics, and applied modern algebra. The manual includes exercises and sample
Subject: Scientific WorkPlace solutions to help you practice the ideas presented and to suggest possibilities to explore
Dear Elizabeth,
Here is the information you requested about our products. Scientific WorkPlace and Sci- Best regards,
increase your productivity because they are easy to learn and use. You can compose and Barry MacKichan
edit your documents directly on the screen, without being forced to think in a programming President
lets you concentrate on writing a correct paper, while our software ensures it is a beautiful cc: John, Jack, George
one. Scientific WorkPlace and Scientific Word enable both professional and support staff to encl: Sample documents
you need it.

Packages:
lettopti None
sw20let2 None
To: Marcus Phillips February 28, 2001 Page: 2
MacKichan Software, Inc. Document Manager, and customizing your installation. A full index simplifies finding the
February 28, 2001 Doing Mathematics with Scientific WorkPlace and Scientific Notebook describes how to use
Marcus Phillips
ABC Development Corporation
1234 Any Street
Chicago, IL 60613
Subject: Scientific WorkPlace equations, statistics, and applied modern algebra. The manual includes exercises and sample
Dear Marcus, beyond those covered in the manual.
increase your productivity because they are easy to learn and use. You can compose and
edit your documents directly on the screen, without being forced to think in a programming Barry MacKichan
language. A simple click of a button allows you to typeset your document in LaTeX. This President
lets you concentrate on writing a correct paper, while our software ensures it is a beautiful cc: Jon, Ron, Larry
produce stunning results quickly and easily, without having to know TeX or LaTeX. encl: Specimen
you need it.
600 Ericksen Avenue NE, Suite 300 Bainbridge Island, WA 98110

Packages:
lettopti None
sw20let3 None
To: Sarah Jones August 24, 2001 Page: 2
600 Ericksen Avenue NE, Suite 300 Bainbridge Island, WA 98110 information you need.
August 24, 2001 the built-in computer algebra system to do a wide range of mathematics without dealing
Sarah Jones
ABC BioMedical Corporation
1234 Any Street
Chicago, IL 60613
Subject: Scientific WorkPlace solutions to help you practice the ideas presented and to suggest possibilities to explore
Dear Sarah,
Barry MacKichan
President
lets you concentrate on writing a correct paper, while our software ensures it is a beautiful cc: Steve, Carol, Darel
produce stunning results quickly and easily, without having to know TeX or LaTeX. encl: Sample Files
you need it.

Packages:
lettopti None
sw20let4 None
To: Richard Julian October 9, 2001 Page: 2
October 9, 2001 Doing Mathematics with Scientific WorkPlace and Scientific Notebook describes how to use
Richard Julian undergraduate mathematics curriculum for ease of use by beginners through professionals.
Best Mathematics Books, Inc. Chapters 1—5 give you basic procedures for using the system, illustrated with material from
1234 Any Street the standard precalculus courses. Chapter 6 provides examples and instructions for creating
Las Cruces, NM 88011 graphs of curves and surfaces. Chapters 7—12 provide procedures for using the system
SUBJECT: Scientific WorkPlace equations, statistics, and applied modern algebra. The manual includes exercises and sample
Dear Richard, beyond those covered in the manual.
edit your documents directly on the screen, without being forced to think in a programming Barry MacKichan
language. A simple click of a button allows you to typeset your document in LaTeX. This President
lets you concentrate on writing a correct paper, while our software ensures it is a beautiful cc: Elizabeth, Sarah
produce stunning results quickly and easily, without having to know TeX or LaTeX. encl: Sample Files
you need it.

Packages:
lettopti None
sw20let5 None
To: Matthew Johnson July 9, 2001 Page: 2
July 9, 2001 information you need.

Matthew Johnson directly with the syntax of the computer algebra system. This book is organized around the
Castro Valley Achievement, Inc. undergraduate mathematics curriculum for ease of use by beginners through professionals.
1234 Any Street Chapters 1—5 give you basic procedures for using the system, illustrated with material from
Castro Valley, CA 94552 the standard precalculus courses. Chapter 6 provides examples and instructions for creating
Subject: Scientific WorkPlace graphs of curves and surfaces. Chapters 7—12 provide procedures for using the system
Dear Matthew, equations, statistics, and applied modern algebra. The manual includes exercises and sample
Here is the information you requested about our products. Scientific WorkPlace and Sci- beyond those covered in the manual.
The Gold Standard for mathematical publishing since 1992, these scientific word processors Best regards,
language. A simple click of a button allows you to typeset your document in LaTeX. This Barry MacKichan
lets you concentrate on writing a correct paper, while our software ensures it is a beautiful President
produce stunning results quickly and easily, without having to know TeX or LaTeX. cc: Brin, Dante, James, Simon, Laura
Getting Started with Scientific WorkPlace, Scientific Word, and Scientific Notebook de- encl: Examples
you need it.

Packages:
lettopti None
sw20let6 None
To: Sally Thompson July 24, 2001 Page: 2
600 Ericksen Avenue NE, Suite 300 information you need.
Bainbridge Island, WA 98110
July 24, 2001 the built-in computer algebra system to do a wide range of mathematics without dealing
Sally Thompson Chapters 1—5 give you basic procedures for using the system, illustrated with material from
Nursing Specialties Corporation the standard precalculus courses. Chapter 6 provides examples and instructions for creating
1234 Glenridge Drive graphs of curves and surfaces. Chapters 7—12 provide procedures for using the system
Fort Worth, TX 76130 for problems in analytic geometry and calculus, linear algebra, vector analysis, differential
SUBJECT: Scientific WorkPlace and the Word Pro equation editor solutions to help you practice the ideas presented and to suggest possibilities to explore
Dear Sally,
Best regards,
Barry MacKichan
President
language. A simple click of a button allows you to typeset your document in LaTeX. This cc: Rick, Kate, Cain
encl: Sample Files
you need it.
Memo - SW Memo #1

Packages:
tcimemo None
sw20mem1 None
The shell contains fields in the body of the document to fill with information about the company, department,
title, and name of the sender; the recipient’s name; the date; the subject; and any copies or enclosures for the memo.
You can leave any of the fields blank, but you must not delete them. If you leave the date field blank, LATEX uses the
current date.

Product Information
Technical Support
TO: A. U. Thor
FROM: George Pearson
DATE: July 6, 2001
SUBJECT: Memo shell
Here is the information you requested about Scientific WorkPlace. The product makes
writing and doing mathematics easier than you ever imagined possible. The Gold Standard
for mathematical publishing since 1992, this scientific word processor increases your
productivity because it is easy to learn and use. You can compose and edit your documents
directly on the screen, without being forced to think in a programming language. A simple
click of a button allows you to typeset your document in LaTeX. This lets you concentrate
on writing a correct paper, while our software ensures it is a beautiful one. Scientific
WorkPlace enables both professional and support staff to produce stunning results quickly
and easily, without having to know TeX or LaTeX.
scribes how to install and activate these three products, and how to get started creating your
own documents. The chapters cover installation; creating, revising, saving, and printing a
simple document. Additional chapters cover how to enter text and mathematics, format
using tags, preview and print, using hyperlinks, and customize the program. Additionally,
the manual describes how to compute and plot with the integrated computer algebra
system in Scientific WorkPlace and Scientific Notebook. Final chapters address how to
typeset your documents and how to take advantage of automatic numbering, indexing, and
cross-referencing in Scientific WorkPlace and Scientific Word, and how to get help when you
need it.
cc: Carol, Elbert, Darel
encl: None
Memo - SW Memo #2

Packages:
tcimemo None
sw20mem2 None
current date.

Product Information
Technical Support
MEMO
To: Elbert Walker
From: John MacKendrick
Date: May 23, 2001
Subject: Memo shell
need it.
cc: Ron, Steve
encl: None
Memo - SW Memo #3

Packages:
tcimemo None
sw20mem3 None
current date.

Product Information
Technical Support
Memorandum
To: Hal Thompson

From: Barry MacKichan
Date: June 15, 2001
Subject: Memo shell
need it.
cc: Jack, Susan
encl: None
Memo - SW Memo #4

Packages:
tcimemo None
sw20mem4 None
current date.

Product Information
Technical Support
MEMORANDUM
To: R. L. Williams
Date: August 1, 2001
Subject: Memo shell
need it.
cc: Ron
encl: None
Memo - SW Memo #5

Packages:
tcimemo None
sw20mem5 None
current date.

Product Information
Technical Support
Memo
To: David Finston
Date: August 24, 2001
Subject: Memo shell
need it.
cc: Jon, George, Larry
encl: None
Memo - SW Memo Special for Inventions

Packages:
tcimemo None
sw20imem None
recipient and the sender, and the subject of the memo.
INVENTION DESCRIPTION
Inventor: Harry P. Brueggemann

980 Sherwood Road
San Marino, CA 91108
Assignee: Very High Technology Company, Inc.
18800 Olive Ave.
San Marino, CA 91108
Title: Invention Title
Background:
cross-referencing in Scientific WorkPlace and Scientific Word, and how to get help when
you need it.
Witnessed and understood by: Date:
Inventor: Date:
1
Press Release - SW Press Release #1

Packages:
sw20prs1 None
The shell contains fields in the body of the document for the company, address, telephone, and fax number of
the sender; the subject of the press release; the date of release; and copies and enclosures.
PRESS RELEASE

600 Ericksen Avenue NE, Suite 300
Bainbridge Island, WA 98110
FOR IMMEDIATE RELEASE
Headline
Scientific WorkPlace makes writing and doing mathematics easier than you ever imagined
possible. The Gold Standard for mathematical publishing since 1992, this scientific word
processor increases your productivity because it is easy to learn and use. You can com-
pose and edit your documents directly on the screen, without being forced to think in a
programming language. A simple click of a button allows you to typeset your document in
LaTeX. This lets you concentrate on writing a correct paper, while our software ensures it is
a beautiful one. Scientific WorkPlace enables both professional and support staff to produce
stunning results quickly and easily, without having to know TeX or LaTeX.
you need it.
cc: Business Editor
encl: Brochure
Press Release - SW Press Release #2

Packages:
sw20prs2 None
The shell contains fields in the body of the document for the company, address, telephone, and fax number of
the sender; the subject of the press release; the date of release; and copies and enclosures.
NEWS
MacKichan Software, Inc. RELEASE
FOR IMMEDIATE RELEASE
Contact: Barry MacKichan

Phone: 1-206-780-2799
Fax: 1-206-780-2857
Headline
Scientific WorkPlace makes writing and doing mathematics easier than you ever imagined
possible. The Gold Standard for mathematical publishing since 1992, this scientific word
processor increases your productivity because it is easy to learn and use. You can com-
pose and edit your documents directly on the screen, without being forced to think in a
programming language. A simple click of a button allows you to typeset your document in
LaTeX. This lets you concentrate on writing a correct paper, while our software ensures it is
a beautiful one. Scientific WorkPlace enables both professional and support staff to produce
you need it.
cc: Business Editorv
encl: Brochure
Report - JEEP Report

Packages:
jeep None
The shell produces general-purpose reports, using a 12-pt font. The abstract appears on a separate page from the
title information. The shell includes a tag for report parts in addition to other section headings, which appear at the
left side of the page. Page numbers are centered at the bottom. The shell supports theorem environments.
Abstract
The Title of a JEEP Report This is the text of the abstract. Abstracts give a short synopsis of the report,
noting the major points developed in the course of the report and mentioning the
results, conclusions, and recommendations reported.
Dr. James Author
The Date
Contents 1. Sample Mathematics and Text

1.1 In-line and Displayed Mathematics P∞
R¯ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 The expression i=1 ai is in-line mathematics, while the numbered equation
1.2 Mathematics in Section Heads ® ln tdt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
X
∞
1.3 Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environments . . . 3 ai (1.1)
i=1
2 Features of this Shell 4
2.1 Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 1.1.
2.1.1 Subsection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset of H, T a
2.2 Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 nonexpansive
P∞ self map of C . Suppose that as n → ∞, an;k → 0 forPeach k, and
° n = k=0 (an;k +1 − an;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C , Anx = k=0 an;kT k x
+ ∞
2.3 List Environments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
A The First Appendix 7 Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays. 1 The spacing
A.1 About the Bibliography . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 above and below a display depends on whether the lines above or below are short
A short line above:
x2 + y 2 = z 2
R¯
1.2. Mathematics in Section Heads ®
ln J@J
contents entries.
1 A
1 2
1.3. Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Envi-

ronments
well-known fact on differentiation of asymptotic expansions of analytic functions. 2. Features of this Shell
Lemma 1. Let f (z) be an analytic function in C +. If f (z) admits the represen-
tation µ ¶
a1 1 2.1. Section
f (z) = a 0 + +o ,
z z
Use the Section tag for major sections, and the Subsection tag for subsections.
a1 = − lim z2 f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ ". (1.2) 2.1.1. Subsection

Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ " → Γ " = {z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ "} and
f (1=z) = a0 + a1z + o (z) . (1.3) Subsubsection

Fix z ∈ Γ ", and let Cr (z) = {¸ ∈ C − : |¸ − z| = r} be a circle with radius
Z X
1 Z m
1 f (¸) d¸ 1 (¸ − z0) d¸
= am + R(z), (1.4) Subsubsubsubsection This is some harmless text under a subsubsubsub-
2¼i CH (z ) (¸ − z)2 m=0 2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z) 2
section.
2.2. Tags
¸∈CH (z) ¸∈CH (z )
|z| + r 1 + sin " You can apply the logical markup tag Emphasized.
= · O (|z| + r) = · O (|z|) . You can apply the visual markup tags Bold, Italics, Roman, Sans Serif,
r sin "
Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2, and hence by the Cauchy theorem (1.4) You can apply the special, mathematics only, tags BLACKBOARD BOLD,
implies CALLIGRAPHIC, and fraktur. Note that blackboard bold and calligraphic are
d You can apply the size tags tiny, scriptsize, footnotesize, small, normalsize, large ,
f (1=z) = a1 + R(z) → a1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2,
dz
Large , LARGE , huge and Huge.
4
This is a Body Math paragraph. Each time you press the Enter key, Scientific ∗ Third level bullet item.
WorkPlace switches to mathematics mode. This is convenient for carrying out · Fourth (and final) level bullet item.
“scratchpad” computations.
Following is a group of paragraphs marked as Body Quote. This environment Description List Each description list item has a term followed by the descrip-
is appropriate for a short quotation or a sequence of short quotations. tion of that term. Double click the term box to enter the term, or to change
it.
your country. John F Kennedy
George Bush
2.3. List Environments

You can create numbered, bulleted, and description lists using the tag popup at
the bottom left of the screen.
1. List item 1
2. List item 2
1. A list item under a list item.

The typeset style for this level is different than the screen style. The
rounded by parentheses.
2. Just another list item under a list item.
1. Third level list item under a list item.
1. Fourth and final level of list items allowed.
• Bullet item 1
• Bullet item 2
A. The First Appendix Bibliography
The appendix fragment is used only once. Subsequent appendices can be created [1] N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2, John Wiley and Sons,
using the Chapter Section/Body Tag. New York, 1963.
A.1. About the Bibliography drogen at rocket chamber pressures”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, 1998a, 41,
3537-3550
bibliography has no relationship to the previous text, but it shows sample citations [3] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical condi-
such as [4], [5] and [6]. You can also have multiple citations appear together. Here tions”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, in print
[5] Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E., Molecular thermodynam-

7 8
Report - SW Report #1

Packages:
tcibkpk None
sw20orp1 None
The shell produces reports, using a 12-pt font. The abstract appears on a separate page from the title information,
and both are single-column pages. The remainder of the report is produced in two columns. The shell includes a
tag for report parts in addition to other section headings. Chapter headings are centered across the whole page, but
other headings appear at the left side of the column. Page numbers appear at the bottom right. The shell supports
theorem environments.
Abstract
The Title of a Sample SW Report #1 We study the effects of warm water on the local penguin population. The major finding is
that it is extremely difficult to induce penguins to drink warm water. The success factor is
approximately −e−i¼ − 1. Replace this text with your own abstract.
A.U. Thor
The Date
Chapter 1 Sample Mathematics and Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2,

and hence by the Cauchy theorem (1.4) im-
a short quotation or a sequence of short quo-
tations.
Text plies
The buck stops here. Harry Tru-
d man
1.1 In-line and Displayed Math- 1.3 Theorems, Lemmata, and f (1=z)
dz Ask not what your country can
ematicsP
Other Theorem-like Envi- = a1 + R(z) → a1, as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 , do for you; ask what you can do
∞
The expression i=1 ai is in-line mathemat- ronments for your country. John F Kennedy
ics, while the numbered equation A number of theorem-like environments is that implies (1.2) by substituting 1=z back
for z. I am not a crook. Richard Nixon
∞
X available. The following lemma is a well-
ai (1.1) It’s no exaggeration to say the
i=1
expansions of analytic functions.
1.4 Section Headings undecideds could go one way or
is displayed and automatically numbered as Use the Section tag for major sections, such another. George Bush
equation 1.1. Lemma 1 Let f (z) be an analytic function as the one just above. Four additional head-
in C+ . If f (z) admits the representation ing levels are available, as described below. 1.6 Lists
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed Bullet, numbered and description list envi-
µ ¶
bounded convex subset of H, T a nonexpan- a1 1 1.4.1 Subsection Heading ronments are available. Lists, which can ex-
sive self map of C . Suppose that as n → ∞, f (z) = a0 + +o ,
z z This text appears under a subsection head- tend four levels deep, look like this:
an;k → 0 for each k, and ing.
∞
for z → ∞ inside a cone 1. Numbered list item 1.
X +
°n = (an;k+1 − an;k ) → 0: Γ " = {z ∈ C+ : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} (a) A numbered list item under a list
1.4.1.1 Subsubsection Heading
k=0
P∞ item.
then
Then for each x in C, Anx = k=0 an;k T k x This text appears under a subsubsection head-
The typeset appearance for this
converges weakly to a fixed point of T [1]. a1 = − lim z 2f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ". (1.2) ing.
level is often different from the
LATEX parameters govern mathematical screen appearance. The typeset
displays The spacing above and below a dis- Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ " → Γ" = 1.4.1.1.1 Subsubsubsection Heading appearance often uses parenthe-
play depends on whether the lines above or {z ∈ C − : z ∈ Γ "} and This text appears under a subsubsubsection ses around the level indicator.
below are short or long, as shown in the fol- f (1=z) = a0 + a1 z + o (z) . (1.3) heading.
(b) Another numbered list item un-
lowing examples. der a list item.
A short line above: Fix z ∈ Γ", and let Cr (z) = {¸ ∈ C− : 1.5 Tags
|¸ − z| = r} be a circle with radius r = You can apply the logical markup tag Em- i. Third level numbered list item
x +y =z
2 2 2
|z| sin "=2. It follows from (1.3) that phasized. under a list item.
and a short line below. Z You can apply the visual markup tags A. Fourth and final level.
1 f (¸) d¸ Bold, Italics, Roman, Sans Serif, Slanted,
A long line above may depend on your
margins 2¼i CH (z ) (¸ − z)2 Small Caps, and Typewriter. • Bullet item 1.
sin2 µ + cos2 µ = 1 X1 Z m You can apply the special, mathematics
1 (¸ − z0) d¸ — Second level bullet item.
= am + R(z), only, tags fraktur; BLACKBOARD BOLD,
as will a long line below. This line is long
m=0
2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z) 2 ∗ Third level bullet item.
enough to illustrate the spacing for mathe- and CALLIG RAPHIC. Note that black-
(1.4) board bold and calligraphic are correct only · Fourth and final level.
where for the remainder R(z) we have when applied to uppercase letters A through Description List Each description list item
1.2 Mathematics in Headings Z. has a lead-in followed by the item. Dou-
R¯ |R(z)| ≤ r−1 max o (|z|) You can apply the size tags tiny, scriptsize,
ln J@J ¸∈CH (z ) ble click the lead-in box to enter or
® footnotesize , small, normalsize, large , Large,
Mathematics can appear in section heads. = r−1 max |¸| · O (|z| + r) customize the text of the lead-in.
Note that mathematics in section heads may ¸∈CH (z ) LARGE, huge and Huge . Bunyip Mythical beast of Australian Abo-
cause difficulties in typesetting styles with |z| + r 1 + sin " Following are paragraphs marked as Body
= ·O (|z| + r) = ·O (|z|) . riginal legends.
running headers or table of contents entries. r sin " Quote. This environment is appropriate for
1 2
Appendix A The First Appendix Bibliography

The appendix fragment is used only once. [1] N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional
Subsequent appendices can be created using Analysis, v. 2, John Wiley and Sons,
the Chapter Section/Body Tag. New York, 1963.
A.1 About the Bibliography [2] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated
Following the text of this article is a short fluid oxygen drop behavior in fluid hy-
manual bibliography. This sample bibliogra- drogen at rocket chamber pressures”,
phy has no relationship to the previous text, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, 1998a, 41,
but it shows sample citations such as [4], [5] 3537-3550
and [6]. You can also have multiple cita-
tions appear together. Here is an example: number under supercritical conditions”,
[2, 3, 4]. Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, in print
[4] Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and

Bird, R. B., Molecular Theory of Gases
and Liquids, John Wiley and Sons, Inc.,
1964
[5] Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de

-Hall, Inc., 1986
[6] Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and

Polling, B. E., The Properties of Gases
and Liquids, 4th Edition, McGraw-Hill
Book Company, 1987
3 4

Packages:
tcibkpk None
sw20orp2 None
The shell produces single-column reports in a 12-pt font. The abstract appears on a separate page from the
title information. The shell includes a tag for report parts in addition to other section headings. Chapter headings
use a sans serif font. Margins are narrow. Page numbers appear at the bottom right. The shell supports theorem
environments.
Abstract
The Title of a Sample SW Report #2 We study the effects of warm water on the local penguin population. The major finding is that it
is extremely difficult to induce penguins to drink warm water. The success factor is approximately
−e−i¼ − 1. Replace this text with your own abstract.
A.U. Thor
The Date
Chapter 1 Sample Mathematics and Text Fix z ∈ Γ" , and let Cr (z) = {¸ ∈ C − : |¸ − z| = r} be a circle with radius r = |z| sin "=2. It
follows from (1.3) that
P∞
1.1 In-line and Displayed Mathematics Z 1
X Z m
a i is in-line mathematics, while the numbered equation 1 f (¸) d¸ 1 (¸ − z 0) d¸
The expression i=1 = am + R(z), (1.4)
2¼i CH (z ) (¸ − z)2 m=0 2¼i CH(z) (¸ − z)2
∞
X
ai (1.1) where for the remainder R(z) we have
i=1

is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 1.1. ¸ ∈CH (z) ¸∈CH (z)
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset of H, T a nonexpansive self |z| + r 1 + sin "
P∞
map of C. Suppose that as nP→ ∞, an;k → 0 for each k, and ° n = k=0 (an;k+1 − an;k ) → 0.
+ = · O (|z| + r) = · O (|z|) .
r sin "
Then for each x in C, An x = k=0 a n;kT k x converges weakly to a fixed point of T [1].
∞
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays.1 The spacing above and below a Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2, and hence by the Cauchy theorem (1.4) implies
d
examples. f (1=z) = a 1 + R(z) → a1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2,
x2 + y2 = z 2 that implies (1.2) by substituting 1=z back for z.
R¯
1.2 Mathematics in Section Heads ®
ln J@J

differentiation of asymptotic expansions of analytic functions.

µ ¶
a1 1
f (z) = a0 + +o ,
z z
a 1 = − lim z 2f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ". (1.2)
f (1=z) = a0 + a1z + o (z) . (1.3)

1L
AT
1 2

The appendix fragment is used only once. Subsequent appendices can be created using the Chapter [1] N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2, John Wiley and Sons, New York, 1963.
Section/Body Tag.
A.1 About the Bibliography chamber pressures”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, 1998a, 41, 3537-3550
3 4

Packages:
tcibkpk None
sw20orp3 None
The shell produces single-column reports offset to the right of the page. The abstract appears on a separate page
from the title information. The shell includes a tag for report parts in addition to other section headings. Sections
are separated by rules, and top and bottom margins are narrow. Page numbers appear at the bottom right, under a
rule. The shell supports theorem environments.
Abstract
The Title of a Sample SW Report #3 We study the effects of warm water on the local penguin population.
The major finding is that it is extremely difficult to induce penguins
to drink warm water. The success factor is approximately −e−i¼ − 1.
Replace this text with your own abstract.
A.U. Thor
The Date
Chapter 1 Sample Mathematics and Text Lemma 1 Let f (z) be an analytic function in C+ . If f (z) admits
the representation
µ ¶
1.1 In-line and Displayed Mathematics a1 1
P f (z) = a0 + +o ,
∞ z z
The expression i=1 ai is in-line mathematics, while the numbered
equation
∞
X for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ" = {z ∈ C+ : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then
ai (1.1)
i=1 a1 = − lim z 2f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ". (1.2)
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset
of H, T a nonexpansive self map of C. Suppose that as n → ∞, f (1=z) = a 0 + a1 z + o (z) .
P∞ + (1.3)
an;k → 0 for each k, P
and ° n = k=0 (an;k+1 − an;k ) → 0. Then for
each x in C, An x = k=0 an;kT k x converges weakly to a fixed point
∞
Fix z ∈ Γ", and let Cr (z) = {¸ ∈ C− : |¸ − z| = r} be a circle with
of T [1]. radius r = |z| sin "=2. It follows from (1.3) that
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays. 1
The spacing above and below a display depends on whether the lines Z X 1 Z m
1 f (¸) d¸ 1 (¸ − z0 ) d¸
above or below are short or long, as shown in the following examples. = am + R(z), (1.4)
2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z)2 m=0 2¼i CH (z ) (¸ − z)2
A short line above:
x2 + y2 = z 2 where for the remainder R(z) we have
A long line above may depend on your margins |R(z)| ≤ r−1 max o (|z|) = r −1 max |¸| · O (|z| + r)
¸ ∈CH (z ) ¸∈CH (z )
|z| + r 1 + sin "
sin2 µ + cos2 µ = 1 = · O (|z| + r) = · O (|z|) .
r sin "
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the
Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 , and hence by the Cauchy
spacing for mathematical displays, regardless of the margins.
theorem (1.4) implies
d
f (1=z) = a1 + R(z) → a1, as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2,
dz
1.2 Mathematics
R¯ in Section
Heads ® ln J@J
section heads may cause difficulties in typesetting styles with running

A number of theorem-like environments is available. The following
lemma is a well-known fact on differentiation of asymptotic expan-
sions of analytic functions.
1 A
L TEX automatically selects the spacing depending on the surrounding line
lengths.
1 2

The appendix fragment is used only once. Subsequent appendices [1] N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2, John Wi-
can be created using the Chapter Section/Body Tag. ley and Sons, New York, 1963.
[2] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behavior
in fluid hydrogen at rocket chamber pressures”, Int. J. Heat Mass
A.1 About the Bibliography Transfer, 1998a, 41, 3537-3550
Following the text of this article is a short manual bibliography. This
sample bibliography has no relationship to the previous text, but it [3] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercrit-
shows sample citations such as [4], [5] and [6]. You can also have ical conditions”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, in print
multiple citations appear together. Here is an example: [2, 3, 4]. [4] Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular Theory
[5] Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E., Molecular

thermodynamics for fluid-phase equilibrium, Prentice -Hall, Inc.,
1986
[6] Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Properties
of Gases and Liquids, 4th Edition, McGraw-Hill Book Company,
1987
3 4

Packages:
tcibkpk None
sw20orp4 None
The shell produces single-column reports in a 12-pt font. The abstract appears on a separate page from the title
information. The shell includes a tag for report parts in addition to other section headings. Chapter headings are
italicized. Sections are separated by rules, and top and bottom margins are narrow. Page numbers appear at the
bottom right. The shell supports theorem environments.
Abstract
The Title of a Sample SW Report #4 We study the effects of warm water on the local penguin population. The major
finding is that it is extremely difficult to induce penguins to drink warm water.
The success factor is approximately −e−i¼ − 1. Replace this text with your own
abstract.
A.U. Thor
The Date
Chapter 1 Sample Mathematics and Lemma 1 Let f (z) be an analytic function in C +. If f (z) admits the represen-
tation µ ¶
a1 1
Text f (z) = a0 +
z
+o
z
,

P∞ a 1 = − lim z 2f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ". (1.2)
∞
Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ " → Γ" = {z ∈ C − : z ∈ Γ "} and
X
ai (1.1)
f (1=z) = a0 + a1z + o (z) . (1.3)
i=1
is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 1.1. Fix z ∈ Γ ", and let Cr (z) = {¸ ∈ C − : |¸ − z| = r} be a circle with radius
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset of H, T a r = |z| sin "=2. It follows from (1.3) that
nonexpansive
P∞ self map of C. Suppose that as n → ∞, an;k → 0 forPeach k, and Z Z
(¸ − z 0)m d¸
1
X
°n = k=0 (an;k+1 − an;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C , Anx = k=0 an;kT k x
+ ∞ 1 f (¸) d¸ 1
2 = am 2 + R(z), (1.4)
converges weakly to a fixed point of T [1]. 2¼i CH (z ) (¸ − z) m=0
2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z)
above and below a display depends on whether the lines above or below are short where for the remainder R(z) we have
¸ ∈CH (z) ¸∈CH (z)
x2 + y2 = z 2 |z| + r 1 + sin "
= · O (|z| + r) = · O (|z|) .
and a short line below. r sin "
sin2 µ + cos2 µ = 1 implies
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for d
f (1=z) = a 1 + R(z) → a1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2,
mathematical displays, regardless of the margins. dz
R¯
1.2 Mathematics in Section Heads ® ln J@J
contents entries.

like Environments
1 A
1 2

3537-3550
A.1 About the Bibliography
Following the text of this article is a short manual bibliography. This sample tions”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, in print
3 4

Packages:
tcibkpk None
sw20orp5 None
Similar to Report - SW Report #4, except with the page numbers centered at the footer of each page.
Abstract
The Title of a Sample SW Report #5 We study the effects of warm water on the local penguin population. The major
abstract.
A.U. Thor
The Date
Chapter 1 Sample Mathematics and Lemma 1 Let f (z) be an analytic function in C +. If f (z) admits the represen-
tation µ ¶
a1 1
Text f (z) = a0 +
z
+o
z
,

P∞ a 1 = − lim z 2f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ". (1.2)
∞
X
ai (1.1)
f (1=z) = a0 + a1z + o (z) . (1.3)
i=1
is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 1.1. Fix z ∈ Γ ", and let Cr (z) = {¸ ∈ C − : |¸ − z| = r} be a circle with radius
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset of H, T a r = |z| sin "=2. It follows from (1.3) that
nonexpansive
P∞ self map of C. Suppose that as n → ∞, an;k → 0 forPeach k, and Z Z
(¸ − z 0)m d¸
1
X
°n = k=0 (an;k+1 − an;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C , Anx = k=0 an;kT k x
+ ∞ 1 f (¸) d¸ 1
2 = am 2 + R(z), (1.4)
converges weakly to a fixed point of T [1]. 2¼i CH (z ) (¸ − z) m=0
2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z)
above and below a display depends on whether the lines above or below are short where for the remainder R(z) we have
¸ ∈CH (z) ¸∈CH (z)
x2 + y2 = z 2 |z| + r 1 + sin "
= · O (|z| + r) = · O (|z|) .
and a short line below. r sin "
sin2 µ + cos2 µ = 1 implies
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for d
f (1=z) = a 1 + R(z) → a1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2,
mathematical displays, regardless of the margins. dz
R¯
contents entries.

like Environments
1 A
1 2

3537-3550
A.1 About the Bibliography
Following the text of this article is a short manual bibliography. This sample tions”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, in print
3 4
Report - TU Wien Report

Packages:
sw20vrep None
refman None
The shell produces single-column reports appropriate for Technische Universität Wien. The abstract appears
on a separate page from the title information. The shell includes a tag for report parts in addition to other section
headings. Chapter headings are separated from text by rules above and below. Other section headings are left-
justified. Text is indented. The shell supports theorem environments.
Abstract
The Title of a Sample TU Wien Report We study the effects of warm water on the local penguin population. The
major finding is that it is extremely difficult to induce penguins to drink
warm water. The success factor is approximately −e−i¼ − 1. Replace this
text with your own abstract.
A.U. Thor
The Date
Report - TU Wien Report 257

P∞
∞
X
ai (1.1)
i=1
Part I is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 1.1.

nonexpansive
P self map of C. Suppose that as n → ∞, a n;k → 0 for
P∞each k, and
k
°n = ∞ +
k=0 (an;k +1 − an;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C, A nx = k=0 an;k T x
The First Part converges weakly to a fixed point of T [1].
A short line above:
x2 + y2 = z2
R¯
1L
AT
1 2

is a well-known fact on differentiation of asymptotic expansions of analytic 2. Features of this Shell
functions.
Lemma 1 Let f (z) be an analytic function in C+ . If f (z) admits the rep-

resentation µ ¶ 2.1 Section Headings
a1 1
f (z) = a0 + +o ,
z z Use the Section tag for major sections, and the Subsection tag for subsections.
2.1.1 Subsection
a 1 = − lim z f (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ ".
2 0
(1.2)
Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ " → Γ" = {z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ "} and
Subsubsection
f (1=z) = a0 + a1z + o (z) . (1.3) This is some harmless text under a subsubsection.
Fix z ∈ Γ" , and let C r (z) = {¸ ∈ C − : |¸ − z| = r} be a circle with radius
r = |z| sin "=2. It follows from (1.3) that Subsubsubsection This is some harmless text under a subsubsubsection.
Z X1 Z m
1 f (¸) d¸ 1 (¸ − z0) d¸ Subsubsubsubsection This is some harmless text under a subsubsubsub-
= am + R(z), (1.4) section.
CH (z ) (¸ − z) 2¼i CH(z) (¸ − z)2
2¼i 2
m=0
where for the remainder R(z) we have 2.2 Tags

|R(z)| ≤ r −1 max o (|z|) = r−1 max |¸| · O (|z| + r) You can apply the logical markup tag Emphasized.
¸∈CH ( z) ¸∈CH (z )
|z| + r 1 + sin " You can apply the visual markup tags Bold, Italics, Roman, Sans Serif,
= · O (|z| + r) = · O (|z|) . Slanted, Small Caps, and Typewriter.
r sin "
Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2, and hence by the Cauchy theorem You can apply the special, mathematics only, tags BLACKBOARD BOLD,
(1.4) implies CALLIGRAPHIC, and fraktur. Note that blackboard bold and calligraphic
d You can apply the size tags tiny, scriptsize, footnotesize , small, normalsize, large ,
f (1=z) = a1 + R(z) → a1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2,
dz Large , LARGE , huge and Huge.
3 4
This is a Body Math paragraph. Each time you press the Enter key, Scientific ∗ Third level bullet item.
WorkPlace switches to mathematics mode. This is convenient for carrying
out “scratchpad” computations. · Fourth (and final) level bullet item.
Following is a group of paragraphs marked as Body Quote. This environment Description List: Each description list item has a term followed by the description of
is appropriate for a short quotation or a sequence of short quotations. that term. Double click the term box to enter the term, or to change
it.
2.3 List Environments

1. List item 1
2. List item 2
The typeset style for this level is different than the screen style.
The screen shows a lower case alphabetic character followed by a
period while the typeset style uses a lower case alphabetic char-
acter surrounded by parentheses.
• Bullet item 1
• Bullet item 2
5 6
Appendix A. The First Appendix Bibliography
The appendix fragment is used only once. Subsequent appendices can be [1] N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2, John Wiley and
created using the Chapter Section/Body Tag. Sons, New York, 1963.
[2] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behavior in
A.1 About the Bibliography fluid hydrogen at rocket chamber pressures”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer,
1998a, 41, 3537-3550
bibliography has no relationship to the previous text, but it shows sample [3] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical con-
citations such as [4], [5] and [6]. You can also have multiple citations appear ditions”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, in print
together. Here is an example: [2, 3, 4]. [4] Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular Theory of
7 8
Report - TU Wien Report (new)
Document class base file: refrep.cls

Packages:
amsmath Standard
The shell produces single-column reports appropriate for Technische Universität Wien. The front matter doesn’t
include an abstract. The shell includes a tag for report parts in addition to other section headings. The titles of
parts appear on a page by themselves, with rules above and below. Chapter headings are separated from text by
rules above and below. Other section headings are left-justified. Text is indented. The shell supports theorem
environments.
The Title of a TU Wien Report (new)
Dr. Samuel Author

I. The First Part
The Date
1
for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ" = { z ∈ C + : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − " } then
a 1 = − lim z 2 f 0 (z ) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" . (1.2)

Proof. Change z for 1 =z . Then Γ " → Γ" = {z ∈ C − : z ∈ Γ" } and
f (1 =z ) = a 0 + a 1 z + o (z ) . (1.3)
1.1 In-line and Displayed Mathematics Fix z ∈ Γ" , and let C r (z ) = {¸ ∈ C− : |¸ − z | = r } be a circle with radius
P∞ r = |z | sin "= 2. It follows from (1.3) that
Z 1
X Z m
∞
X 1 f (¸ ) d¸ 1 (¸ − z0 ) d¸
ai (1.1) = am + R( z), (1.4)
2 ¼i C H(z) (¸ − z )
2
m =0
2 ¼i CH (z ) (¸ − z )
2
i= 1
is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 1.1. where for the remainder R(z ) we have
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset of H , T |R (z )| ≤ r−1 max o (|z|) = r−1 max |¸| · O (|z| + r )
¸∈C H (z ) ¸∈CH (z )
a nonexpansive self map of C . Suppose that as n → ∞, a n;k → 0 for
P∞ + |z | + r 1 + sin "
each k ,Pand ° n = k= 0 (a n;k +1 − a n;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C , = · O (|z | + r ) = · O (|z |) .
∞
An x = k =0 an;k T k x converges weakly to a fixed point of T [1]. r sin "
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays.1 The spacing Therefore R ( z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2 , and hence by the Cauchy theorem
above and below a display depends on whether the lines above or below are (1.4) implies
A short line above: d
f (1 =z) = a 1 + R(z ) → a 1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 ,
x2 + y 2 = z 2 dz
R¯
1.2 Mathematics in Section Heads ® ln tdt

functions.
Lemma 1 Let f (z ) be an analytic function in C+ . If f (z ) admits the

a1 1
f (z ) = a 0 + +o ,
z z
1 A
2 3

2 Features of this Shell at the bottom left of the screen.
1. List item 1
2. List item 2
2.1 Section Headings (a) A list item under a list item.
Use the Section tag for major sections, and the Subsection tag for subsec- The typeset style for this level is different than the screen style.
tions. The screen shows a lower case alphabetic character followed by a
period while the typeset style uses a lower case alphabetic char-
2.1.1 Subsection acter surrounded by parentheses.
Subsubsection A. Fourth and final level of list items allowed.
This is some harmless text under a subsubsection. • Bullet item 1
Subsubsubsection This is some harmless text under a subsubsubsection. • Bullet item 2

Subsubsubsubsection This is some harmless text under a subsubsub-
subsection. ∗ Third level bullet item.
2.2 Tags Description List : Each description list item has a term followed by the description of
You can apply the logical markup tag Emphasized. that term. Double click the term box to enter the term, or to change
it.
Slanted, Small Caps , and Typewriter. Bunyip : Mythical beast of Australian Aboriginal legends.
CALLIGRAPHI C, and fraktur . Note that blackboard bold and calligraphic
You can apply the size tags tiny, scriptsize , footnotesize, small , normalsize, large,
Large, LARGE , huge and Huge .

This is a Body Math paragraph. Each time you press the Enter key, Sci-
entific WorkPlace switches to mathematics mode. This is convenient for
carrying out “scratchpad” computations.

4 5
The appendix fragment is used only once. Subsequent appendices can be [1] N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2, John Wiley and
created using the Chapter Section/Body Tag. Sons, New York, 1963.
A.1 About the Bibliography hydrogen at rocket chamber pressures”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer,
1998a, 41, 3537-3550
bibliography has no relationship to the previous text, but it shows sample [3] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical con-
citations such as [4], [5] and [6]. You can also have multiple citations appear ditions”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, in print
6 7
Resume - SW Resume #1

Packages:
sw20res1 None
The front matter contains fields for the name and contact information of the author.
A. U. Thor
1234 Main Street
Hometown, IL 60613
Education
• Bachelor of Science, Mathematics, University of Chicago, 1994
• Master of Science, Mathematics, Washington University 1996
• Doctor of Philosophy, Mathematics, Rice University, 2000
Work Experience
• Systems programmer, MacKichan Software, Inc. 1997—2000
• Firefighter, Cape Girardoux Municipal Fire Department, Cape Girardoux, Missouri,

1996—1997
• TEXnician, TCI Software Research, 1994—1996
• Aide, Student Computer Lab, University of Chicago, 1990—1994
Interests
Crew, Renaissance choir, Amateur theater, Poetry, Rock climbing, Pyromania.
References
Barry MacKichan, President, MacKichan Software, Inc., (123) 456-7890
Carol Walker, Professor of Mathematics, New Mexico State University, (505) 123-4567
Steve Swanson, Team Leader, MacKichan Software, Inc., (505) 789-0123

Resume -SW Resume #2 263
Resume -SW Resume #2

Packages:
sw20res2 None
The front matter contains fields for the name and contact information of the author. Fields in the body of the
document establish the job title, dates, and position for each period of employment.
Jon C. Stenerson
2300 Montana, Las Cruces, NM 88001, (505)-522-1234 jsten@fakeaddress.edu
Objective: To find a new job.
Education: Bachelor of Science, Computer Science, Univerity of Minnesota, 1985.
Master of Arts, Mathematics, New Mexico State University, 1987.
Doctor of Philosophy, Mathematics, University of Kentucky, 1991.
Experience: TEXnician July 1998 to Present

MacKichan Software Inc. I still write lots of style files and TEX programs.
I am working on the next version of the Style Editor. I did the majority
of the work for the Portable LATEX filter that is part of Scientific Word
and Scientific WorkPlace , not to mention the Exam Builder.
TEXnician September 1993 to May 1998

TCI Software Research. I wrote lots of style files and TEX programs.
I designed a style editor for TCI Software Research to incorporate into
Scientific Word .
Professor of Mathematics September 1992 - September 1993

Moorhead State University, Department of Mathematics. I taught calcu-
lus, statistics, and discrete structures.
References: Roger Hunter, TCI Software Research. (505)-522-0352.
Jim Drouhilet, Moorhead State University. (218)-236-4008.
Charles Yeomans, University Club. (123)-456-7890.

Slides - SW Slides

Packages:
None
The formatting for this shell is done in the file tcislid2.tex, which is input from the document preamble.
1 Title of this Presentation 2 MacKichan Software
MacKichan mathematics software products are based

A. U. Thor
on an easy-to-use but powerful mathematical word
processor. All provide reading, browsing, and printing
Wednesday, July 16, 1999
of .tex files.
Supported by NSF Grant #12345-6789
2.1 Enhanced Mathematics
MacKichan software products enhance the production

of beautiful typeset mathematics.
2.1.1 Products Suited to Your Needs
Choose the product features that meet your needs:

Slides - SW Slides 265
1. Typesetting 3 Mathematics in This Shell
2. Computing X∞
1
=2
n=1 n
2
3. Internet access
convex subset of H, T a nonexpansive self map of C.
Suppose that as n → ∞, an;k → 0 for each k, and
P∞ ³ ´+
°n = k=0 an;k+1 − an;k → 0: Then for each x
P∞
in C, Anx = k=0 an;k T k x converges weakly to a
fixed point of T .
4 Tags • Bigger
You can apply these tags: • smaller
• Emphasized
• Strongly Emphasized
• Keyboard Input
• Sample
• Bold
• Italics
• Typed Code
Standard LATEX Shells
The standard LATEX shells provide the most general and portable set of document fea-
tures. You can achieve almost any typesetting effect by beginning with a standard shell
and adding LATEX packages as necessary. We strongly recommend that you begin all new
documents using one of the standard LATEX shells, unless you have a compelling reason
(such as publisher’s instructions) to do otherwise.
With one exception, the standard shells are based on the typesetting specifications
set in one of three LATEX base document classes—article.cls, book.cls, or re-
port.cls. See page 2 for information about base document class defaults and for
268 Chapter 7 Standard LATEX Shells
Standard LATEX Article and Blank Standard LATEX Article Shells

Packages:
amsmath Standard
These two shells produce identical documents. The Standard LATEX Article shell contains information about
the shell that you can replace with the contents of your own document. The Blank Standard LATEX Article shell
contains no information or instructions. Both shells produce documents with centered title information, left-justified
headings, theorem environments, and appendices.

The Title of an Article as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for

ln tdt
At this Address
July 23, 2004 heads may cause difficulties in typesetting styles with running headers or table
Abstract 1.3 Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Envi-

This article illustrates many features of a mathematics article, but we ronments
do not explain the spurious appearance of the formula (∇ × F) · k = z + 1
in this abstract. A number of theorem-like environments is available. The following lemma is
tions.
1 Sample Mathematics and Text Lemma 1 Let f ( z) be an analytic function in C+ . If f ( z) admits the repre-
This short sample document illustrates the typeset appearance of in-line and sentation µ ¶
a1 1
displayed mathematics in documents. It also illustrates five levels of section f (z ) = a 0 + +o ,
z z
manual bibliography and an appendix. for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ" = {z ∈ C+ : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then
a 1 = − lim z 2 f 0 ( z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" . (2)
P∞ Proof. Change z for 1 =z . Then Γ " → Γ" = {z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ" } and
f (1=z) = a 0 + a 1 z + o (z ) . (3)
∞
X Fix z ∈ Γ" , and let Cr (z ) = {¸ ∈ C− : |¸ − z | = r } be a circle with radius
ai (1)
i =1
Z X1 Z m
is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 1. 1 f (¸ ) d¸ 1 (¸ − z0 ) d¸
= am + R( z), (4)
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset of H , T a 2¼i C H(z ) (¸ − z )2 2 ¼i CH (z) (¸ − z )2
m =0
nonexpansive self map of C . Suppose that as n → ∞, a n;k → 0 for each k , and
P∞ P∞ where for the remainder R (z ) we have
° n = k =0 (a n;k +1 − a n;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C , An x = k =0 a n;k T k x
+
converges weakly to a fixed point of T [1]. |R (z )| ≤ r −1 max o (|z |) = r −1 max |¸ | · O (|z | + r)

¸∈ CH (z) ¸∈ CH (z)
above and below a display depends on whether the lines above or below are | z| + r 1 + sin "
= · O (|z | + r) = · O (|z |) .
short or long, as shown in the following examples. r sin "
A short line above: Therefore R(z ) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 , and hence by the Cauchy theorem (4)
x2 + y 2 = z 2 implies
d
1L
AT f (1=z ) = a 1 + R(z ) → a1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"= 2 ,
EX automatically selects the spacing depending on the surrounding line lengths. dz
that implies (2) by substituting 1=z back for z .
1 2
Standard LATEX Article and Blank Standard LATEX Article Shells 269
2 Section Headings 4 About the Bibliography

Use the Section tag for major sections, such as the one just above. Four addi- Following the text of this article is a short manual bibliography. This sample
tional heading levels are available, as described below. bibliography has no relationship to the previous text, but it shows sample ci-
2.1 Subsection Heading together. Here is an example: [2, 3, 4].

References
This text appears under a subsubsection heading. Sons, New York, 1963.
Subsubsubsection Heading This text appears under a subsubsubsection [2] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behavior in fluid
heading. hydrogen at rocket chamber pressures”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, 1998a,
41, 3537-3550
Subsubsubsubsection Heading This text appears under a subsubsub- [3] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical condi-
subsection heading. tions”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, in print
3 Lists and Liquids, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., 1964
Bullet, numbered and description list environments are available. Lists, which [5] Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E., Molecular thermody-
can extend four levels deep, look like this: namics for fluid-phase equilibrium, Prentice -Hall, Inc., 1986
1. Numbered list item 1. [6] Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Properties of Gases
2. Numbered list item 2. and Liquids, 4th Edition, McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1987

The typeset appearance for this level is often different from the screen A An Appendix
(b) Another numbered list item under a list item. equations that appear in the appendices.
i. Third level numbered list item under a list item. √
A. Fourth and final level of numbered list items allowed. − b ± b2 − 4 ac
(5)
2a
• Bullet item 1.
• Bullet item 2. tions are numbered in the appendix.
3 4
Standard LATEX Book

Packages:
amsmath Standard
The shell automatically adds blank pages after the title page, the table of contents, the preface, and where
necessary to ensure that new chapters begin on odd-numbered pages. The shell doesn’t contain an abstract. Blank
pages carry headers and page numbers. Blank pages in the sample document are not shown here.
Contents
Introduction vii

2.1 In-line and Displayed Mathematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
The Title of a Book R¯
2.2 Mathematics in section heads ® ln tdt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
2.4 Section Headings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Dr. Author Jones 2.4.1 Subsection Heading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.5 Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
The Date 2.6 Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.7 About the Bibliography . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Afterword 9
iii
Preface Introduction
This is the preface and it is created using a TeX field in a paragraph by itself The introduction is entered using the usual chapter tag. Since the introduction
containing \chapter*{Preface}. When the document is loaded, this appears chapter appears before the mainmatter TeX field, it is an unnumbered chapter.
in the edit window like a normal chapter, but it is actually an unnumbered The primary difference between the preface and the introduction in this shell
chapter. The markboth TeX field at the beginning of this paragraph sets the document is that the introduction will appear in the table of contents and
correct page heading for the Preface portion of the document. The preface does the page headings for the introduction are automatically handled without the
not appear in the table of contents. need for the markboth TeX field. You may use either or both methods to
create chapters at the beginning of your document. You may also delete these
preliminary chapters.
v vii
Chapter 1 Chapter 2
Purpose of this Document Sample Mathematics and

Text
manual bibliography and an appendix. 2.1 In-line and Displayed Mathematics
P∞
∞
X
ai (2.1)
i =1

nonexpansive self map of C . Suppose that as n → ∞, a n;k → 0 for each k, and
P P∞
°n = ∞ +
k =0 ( an;k +1 − a n;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C , A n x =
k
k= 0 a n;k T x
A short line above:
x2 + y 2 = z2

1 A
1 3
4 CHAPTER 2. SAMPLE M ATHEMATICS AND TEXT 2.4. SECTION HEADINGS 5
R¯ 2.4 Section Headings

Use the Section tag for ma jor sections, such as the one just above. Four addi-
like Environments Subsubsection Heading
A number of theorem-like environments is available. The following lemma is This text appears under a subsubsection heading.
tions. Subsubsubsection Heading This text appears under a subsubsubsection
heading.
Lemma 1 Let f (z ) be an analytic function in C+ . If f (z ) admits the repre-
sentation µ ¶ Subsubsubsubsection Heading This text appears under a subsubsub-
a1 1
f (z ) = a 0 + +o , subsection heading.
z z
for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ" = { z ∈ C+ : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − " } then
2.5 Tags
a 1 = − lim z2 f 0 (z ) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" . (2.2)
Proof. Change z for 1=z . Then Γ " → Γ" = {z ∈ C − : z ∈ Γ" } and You can apply the visual markup tags Bold, Italics, Roman, Sans Serif,
f (1 =z ) = a0 + a1 z + o (z ) . (2.3) You can apply the special, mathematics only, tags BLACKBOARD BOLD,
CALLIG RAPHIC, and fraktur. Note that blackboard bold and calligraphic
Fix z ∈ Γ" , and let Cr (z ) = {¸ ∈ C − : |¸ − z | = r} be a circle with radius are correct only when applied to uppercase letters A through Z.
r = |z | sin "=2. It follows from (2.3) that You can apply the size tags tiny, scriptsize, footnotesize, small, normalsize, large,
1
Z
f ( ¸) d¸ X1
1
Z m
(¸ − z0 ) d¸
Large , LARGE , huge and Huge .
= am + R (z), (2.4) Following is a group of paragraphs marked as Body Quote. This environment
2¼i C H(z ) (¸ − z )2 2¼i C H(z ) (¸ − z )2 is appropriate for a short quotation or a sequence of short quotations.
m =0
where for the remainder R(z ) we have The buck stops here. Harry Truman
|R ( z)| ≤ r−1 max o (|z |) = r −1 max |¸ | · O (|z| + r )
¸∈C H ( z) ¸∈C H ( z) your country. John F Kennedy
|z | + r 1 + sin " I am not a crook. Richard Nixon
= · O (|z | + r ) = · O (|z |) .
r sin " It’s no exaggeration to say the undecideds could go one way or an-
Therefore R (z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"= 2 , and hence by the Cauchy theorem other. George Bush
(2.4) implies
d
2.6 Lists
f (1=z ) = a1 + R(z ) → a 1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"= 2 ,
dz Bullet, numbered and description list environments are available. Lists, which
that implies (2.2) by substituting 1 =z back for z . can extend four levels deep, look like this:
6 CHAPTER 2. SAMPLE M ATHEMATICS AND TEXT

Appendix A
A. Fourth and final level of numbered list items allowed. The First Appendix
• Bullet item 1.
• Bullet item 2.
The appendix fragment is used only once. Subsequent appendices can be created
— Second level bullet item. using the Chapter Section/Body Tag.

bibliography has no relationship to the previous text, but it shows sample ci-
7
Afterword Bibliography
The back matter often includes one or more of an index, an afterword, acknowl- [1] N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2, John Wiley and
edgements, a bibliography, a colophon, or any other similar item. In the back Sons, New York, 1963.
matter, chapters do not produce a chapter number, but they are entered in the
table of contents. If you are not using anything in the back matter, you can [2] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behavior in fluid
delete the back matter TeX field and everything that follows it. hydrogen at rocket chamber pressures”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, 1998a,
41, 3537-3550

9 11
Standard LATEX Conference Proceedings
Document class base file: proc.cls

Packages:
amsmath Standard
The shell adds a command used to produce a blank space in the first column where a copyright notice belongs,
as shown below. To use the command, add a TEX field containing the command \copyrightspace{} to the
beginning of the first paragraph of body text in the document.
Pro of. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ" → Γ" = 3 Tags

{z ∈ C − : z ∈ Γ" } and
f (1=z ) = a 0 + a1 z + o (z ) . (3) You can apply the visual markup tags Bold, Ital-
ics, Roman, Sans Serif, Slanted, Small Caps, and
The Title of a Standard LaTeX Conference Proceedings Fix z ∈ Γ" , and let Cr (z ) = {¸ ∈ C− : |¸ − z | = r } Typewriter.
be a circle with radius r = |z | sin "= 2. It follows from You can apply the special, mathematics
A. U. Thor (3) that only, tags fraktur; BLACKBOARD BOLD, and
CALLIGRAP HIC. Note that blackboard bold
The University of Stewart Island Z
1 f ( ¸) d¸ and calligraphic are correct only when applied to
2¼i (¸ − z )2
C H(z )
uppercase letters A through Z.
1 Z m
You can apply the size tags tiny, scriptsi ze, footnote-
X 1 ( ¸ − z0 ) d¸
= am + R(z ), (4) size, small , normalsize, large, Large , LARGE,
2¼i C H(z ) (¸ − z) 2
Abstract depends on whether the lines above or below are short
m=0
huge and Huge.
where for the remainder R(z ) we have This is a Body Math paragraph. Each time you
We study the effects of warm water on the local pen- A short line above: press the Enter key, Scientific WorkPlace switches to
guin population. The ma jor finding is that it is ex- |R(z )| ≤ r−1 max o (|z |) mathematics mode. This is convenient for carrying
tremely difficult to induce penguins to drink warm x2 + y 2 = z 2 ¸ ∈CH (z )
out “scratchpad” computations.
water. The success factor is approximately −e−i¼ − 1. = r−1 max |¸| · O (|z | + r)
¸ ∈CH (z )
Following is a group of paragraphs marked as Body
Quote. This environment is appropriate for a short
A long line above may depend on your margins |z| + r
1 Sample Mathematics and = · O (|z| + r ) quotation or a sequence of short quotations.
r
sin µ + cos µ = 1
2 2
1 + sin "
Text = · O (|z|) . The buck stops here. Harry Truman
sin "
as will a long line below. This line is long enough Ask not what your country can do for you;
1.1 In-line and Displayed Mathemat- to illustrate the spacing for mathematical displays, ask what you can do for your country. John
Therefore R (z ) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 , and hence
ics regardless of the margins. by the Cauchy theorem (4) implies F Kennedy
P∞
The expression i= 1 a i is in-line mathematics, while I am not a crook. Richard Nixon
the numbered equation 1.2 Mathematics
R¯ in Section Heads d It’s no exaggeration to say the undecideds
ln tdt f (1 =z ) = a 1 + R (z ) → a 1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2 , could go one way or another. George Bush
∞
X ® dz
ai (1)
Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note that that implies (2) by substituting 1 =z back for z .
i =1
mathematics in section heads may cause difficulties (Chapter head:)Features of this Shell 4 List Environments
is displayed and automatically numbered as equation in typesetting styles with running headers or table of
1. contents entries. You can create numbered, bulleted, and description
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded 2 Section Headings lists using the tag popup at the bottom left of the
convex subset of H , T a nonexpansive self map of C . 1.3 Theorems, Lemmata, and Other screen.
Suppose that as n → ∞, an;k → 0 for each k , and Use the Section tag for ma jor sections, and the Sub-
P Theorem-like Environments 1. List item 1
°n = ∞ k =0P( a n;k +1 − a n;k )+ → 0. Then for each x in section tag for subsections.
C , An x = ∞ k
k =0 an;k T x converges weakly to a fixed
2. List item 2
point of T [?]. The following lemma is a well-known fact on differ-
2.1 Subsection
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical entiation of asymptotic expansions of analytic func-
displays.1 The spacing above and below a display tions. This is some harmless text under a subsection.
The typeset style for this level is different
Lemma 1 Let f (z ) be an analytic function in C+ . than the screen style. The screen shows
2.1.1 Subsubsection a lower case alphabetic character followed
If f (z ) admits the representation
by a period while the typeset style uses a
µ ¶ This is some harmless text under a subsubsection.
a1 1 lower case alphabetic character surrounded
f (z) = a0 + +o , by parentheses.
z z
Subsubsubsection This is some harmless text un-
der a subsubsubsection. (b) Just another list item under a list item.
{z ∈ C+ : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then i. Third level list item under a list item.
0
1A
LT
EX automatically selects the spacing depending on the
Subsubsubsubsection This is some harmless A. Fourth and final level of list items
surrounding line lengths. a1 = − lim z 2 f 0 (z ) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ ". (2) text under a subsubsubsubsection. allowed.
Page 1 Page 2
Standard LATEX Conference Proceedings 275
• Bullet item 1
• Bullet item 2

Description List Each description list item has a

term followed by the description of that term.
Double click the term box to enter the term, or
to change it.

ends.
A The First Appendix

The appendix fragment is used only once. Subsequent
appendices can be created using the Section tag.
Page 3
Standard LATEX Report

Packages:
amsmath Standard
The shell contains an abstract.
Contents
I The First Part 2

R¯
1.2 Mathematics in Section Heads ® ln tdt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
The Title of a Standard LaTeX Report
2.1 Section Headings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.1.1 Subsection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Dr. Roland Author 2.2 Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
The Date
1
Standard LATEX Report 277
R¯
Chapter 1 1.3 Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-

like Environments
Sample Mathematics and A number of theorem-like environments is available. The following lemma is
Text tions.
Lemma 1 Let f ( z) be an analytic function in C+ . If f ( z) admits the repre-

sentation µ ¶
a1 1
f (z ) = a 0 + +o ,
z z
P∞
a 1 = − lim z 2 f 0 ( z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" . (1.2)
∞
X
ai (1.1) Proof. Change z for 1 =z . Then Γ " → Γ" = {z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ" } and
i =1
f (1=z) = a 0 + a 1 z + o (z ) . (1.3)
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset of H , T a Fix z ∈ Γ" , and let Cr (z ) = {¸ ∈ C− : |¸ − z | = r } be a circle with radius
nonexpansive self map of C . Suppose that as n → ∞, a n;k → 0 for each k , and r = |z | sin "=2. It follows from (1.3) that
P∞ P∞
° n = k =0 (a n;k +1 − a n;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C , An x = k =0 a n;k T k x
+
Z 1
X Z m
converges weakly to a fixed point of T [?]. 1 f (¸) d¸ 1 (¸ − z 0 ) d¸
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays.1 The spacing = am + R (z ), (1.4)
2¼i C H(z ) ( ¸ − z) 2 2¼i CH (z ) ( ¸ − z) 2
m=0
short or long, as shown in the following examples. where for the remainder R (z ) we have
A short line above:
x2 + y 2 = z 2 |R (z )| ≤ r −1 max o (|z |) = r −1 max |¸ | · O (|z | + r)
¸∈ CH (z) ¸∈ CH (z)
and a short line below. | z| + r 1 + sin "
A long line above may depend on your margins = · O (|z | + r) = · O (|z |) .
r sin "
sin 2 µ + cos2 µ = 1 Therefore R (z ) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"= 2 , and hence by the Cauchy theorem
(1.4) implies
mathematical displays, regardless of the margins. d
f (1=z ) = a 1 + R(z ) → a1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"= 2 ,
1 A
dz
that implies (1.2) by substituting 1 =z back for z .
3 4
Chapter 2 Appendix A
Features of this Shell The First Appendix
2.1 Section Headings using the Chapter Section/Body Tag.
2.1.1 Subsection
Subsubsection
Subsubsubsubsection This is some harmless text under a subsubsub-

subsection.
2.2 Tags
Slanted , Small Caps , and Typewriter.
You can apply the size tags tiny, scriptsize , footnotesize, small, normalsize, large,
Large, LARGE , huge

and Huge.
This is a Body Math paragraph. Each time you press the Enter key, Scientific
WorkPlace switches to mathematics mode. This is convenient for carrying out
5 7
Style Editor Shells
The shells discussed in this chapter were developed with the Style Editor. Thus, you
may find that modifying them by using the Style Editor is easier than by making changes
within the program.
Style Editor shells produce a variety of documents: articles, books, exams, faxes,
letters, memos, slides, resumes, and theses. The shells differ according to their pur-
pose. All the shells are based on the typesetting specifications set in the base document
class sebase.cls. You must use the Style Editor to modify the class options for
sebase.cls.
280 Chapter 8 Style Editor Shells
Article
Document class base file: sebase.cls

Packages:
seart None
The shell features generous margins with page numbers centered at the bottom of the page. The title infor-
mation is simple—no abstract is included—and centered at the top of the first page. The shell includes theorem
environments.

A Simple Article fact on differentiation of asymptotic expansions of analytic functions.
A. U. Thor
Lemma 1 Let f (z ) be an analytic function in C+ . If f (z ) admits the representation
µ ¶
a1 1
f (z ) = a0 + +o ,
z z
1 Sample Mathematics and Text a 1 = − lim z 2 f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" . (2)
mathematics in documents. It also illustrates five levels of section headings and three kinds Proof. Change z for 1 =z. Then Γ " → Γ" = {z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ" } and
of lists. Finally, the document includes entries for a manual bibliography and an appendix. f (1 =z ) = a 0 + a 1 z + o (z ) . (3)
1.1 In-line and Displayed Mathematics Fix z ∈ Γ" , and let C r (z ) = {¸ ∈ C− : |¸ − z| = r } be a circle with radius r = |z | sin "= 2.
P∞
The expression a i is in-line mathematics, while the numbered equation Z Z
(¸ − z0 )m d¸
X1
i= 1 1 f (¸ ) d¸ 1
∞
X = am + R(z ), (4)
2 ¼i CH (z) (¸ − z )2 2¼i C H( z ) (¸ − z )2
ai (1) m =0
i= 1 where for the remainder R (z ) we have
is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 1. |R(z )| ≤ r −1 max o (|z|) = r −1 max |¸ | · O (|z | + r )
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset of H , T a ¸∈C H(z ) ¸∈C H(z )
nonexpansive self map of C . Suppose that as n → ∞, a n;k → 0 for each k, and |z | + r 1 + sin "
P∞ + P∞ k = · O (|z | + r) = · O (|z |) .
°n = k= 0 (a n;k +1 − a n;k ) → 0 . Then for each x in C, An x = k =0 a n;k T x r sin "
converges weakly to a fixed point of T [1]. Therefore R (z ) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"= 2 , and hence by the Cauchy theorem (4) implies
below a display depends on whether the lines above or below are short or long, as shown in d
f (1 =z ) = a1 + R(z ) → a 1 , as z → ∞ , z ∈ Γ "=2 ,
the following examples. dz
x2 + y 2 = z 2
A long line above may depend on your margins 2 Section Headings
sin2 µ + cos2 µ = 1 Use the Section tag for major sections, such as the one just above. Four additional
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for mathematical heading levels are available, as described below.
R¯ 2.1 Subsection Heading
ln tdt
Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note that mathematics in section heads may cause 2.1.1 Subsubsection Heading
1
LATEX automatically selects the spacing depending on the surrounding line lengths. Subsubsubsection Heading This text appears under a subsubsubsection heading.
1 2
Article 281
Subsubsubsubsection Heading This text appears under a subsubsubsubsection Description List Each description list item has a lead-in followed by the item.
heading. Double-click the lead-in box to enter or customize the text of the lead-in.
3 Tags
You can apply the visual markup tags Bold, Italics, Roman, Sans Serif, Slanted, 5 About the Bibliography
SMAL L C APS , and Typewriter.
has no relationship to the previous text, but it shows sample citations such as [4], [5] and [6].
CALLI GRAP HIC , and fraktur. Note that blackboard bold and calligraphic are correct
You can also have multiple citations appear together. Here is an example: [2, 3, 4].
You can apply the size tags tiny , scriptsize, footnotesize, small , normalsize, large, Large, [1] N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2, John Wiley and Sons, New
LARGE, huge and Huge.

York, 1963.
Following is a group of paragraphs marked as Body Quote. This environment is rocket chamber pressures”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, 1998a, 41, 3537-3550
The buck stops here. Harry Truman Heat Mass Transfer, in print
Ask not what your country can do for you; ask what you can do for your country. [4] Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular Theory of Gases and
John F Kennedy Liquids, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., 1964
I am not a crook. Richard Nixon [5] Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E., Molecular thermodynamics for
It’s no exaggeration to say the undecideds could go one way or another. George Bush fluid-phase equilibrium, Prentice -Hall, Inc., 1986
4 Lists
Bullet, numbered and description list environments are available. Lists, which can extend
The typeset appearance for this level is often different from the screen appearance.
(a). Fourth and final level of numbered list items allowed.
• Bullet item 1.
• Bullet item 2.
3 4
main text , many styles use a different numbering system for equations that appear in the
appendices. √
−b ± b 2 − 4 ac
(A-1)
2a
The quadratic equation shown as equation A-1 is used to demonstrate how equations are
5
Article - LATEX-like Article

Packages:
selart None
Documents created with this shell are similar in appearance to articles created with the Standard LATEX Article
and Blank Standard LATEX Article shells.
R¯
1.2 Mathematics in Section Heads ln tdt
A Simple Article ®
cause difficulties in typesetting styles with running headers or table of contents entries.
A. U. Thor
known fact on differentiation of asymptotic expansions of analytic functions.
Abstract Lemma 1 Let f ( z) be an analytic function in C + . If f (z ) admits the representation

µ ¶
We study the effects of warm water on the local penguin population. a1 1
The major finding is that it is extremely difficult to induce penguins to f (z) = a 0 + +o ,
z z
drink warm water. The success factor is approximately −A−i¼ − 1. Re-
place this text with your own abstract. for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ" = { z ∈ C + : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − " } then
a 1 = − lim z 2 f 0 (z ) , z → ∞ , z ∈ Γ " . (2)
Proof. Change z for 1 =z. Then Γ" → Γ" = { z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ" } and
mathematics in documents. It also illustrates five levels of section headings and three f (1=z ) = a 0 + a 1 z + o (z ) . (3)
Fix z ∈ Γ ", and let C r (z ) = {¸ ∈ C− : |¸ − z | = r} be a circle with radius
appendix.
1.1 In-line and Displayed Mathematics Z Z
(¸ − z0 ) m d¸
1
X
P∞ 1 f ( ¸) d¸ 1
The expression ai is in-line mathematics, while the numbered equation = am + R (z) , (4)
i =1 2¼i C H(z ) (¸ − z )
2
m=0
2 ¼i C H(z) (¸ − z )
2
∞
X
ai (1) where for the remainder R (z ) we have
i =1
|R (z )| ≤ r −1 max o (|z |) = r −1 max |¸ | · O (|z | + r)
is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 1. ¸∈ CH (z) ¸∈ CH (z)
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset of H , T a non- | z| + r 1 + sin "
= · O (|z | + r) = · O (|z |) .
expansive self map of C. Suppose that as n → ∞, an;k → 0 for each k, and r sin "
P∞ + P∞
°n = k =0 (a n;k +1 − an;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C , A n x = k =0 a n;k T k x Therefore R( z) → 0 as z → ∞ , z ∈ Γ"=2 , and hence by the Cauchy theorem (4)
and below a display depends on whether the lines above or below are short or long, as d
f (1 =z) = a 1 + R (z ) → a 1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"= 2 ,
shown in the following examples. dz
x2 + y 2 = z 2
sin 2 µ + cos2 µ = 1 heading levels are available, as described below.
matical displays, regardless of the margins. 2.1 Subsection Heading
1
LATEX automatically selects the spacing depending on the surrounding line lengths. This text appears under a subsection heading.
1 2
Article - LATEX-like Article 283
2.1.1 Subsubsection Heading • Bullet item 1.

• Bullet item 2.
Subsubsubsection Heading This text appears under a subsubsubsection heading. ∗ Third level bullet item.
Subsubsubsubsection Heading T his text appears under a subsubsubsubsec- Description List Each description list item has a lead-in followed by the item.
tion heading. Double-click the lead-in box to enter or customize the text of the lead-in.
3 Tags
You can apply the logical markup tag Emphasized. 5 About the Bibliography
S MALL CAPS, and Typewriter. Following the text of this article is a short manual bibliography. This sample bibliogra-
You can apply the special, mathematics only, tags fraktur; BLACKBOARD BOLD , phy has no relationship to the previous text, but it shows sample citations such as [4],
and CALLIGRAPHIC : Note that blackboard bold and calligraphic are correct only [5] and [6]. You can also have multiple citations appear together. Here is an example:
when applied to uppercase letters A through Z. [2, 3, 4].
You can apply the size tags tiny, scriptsize, footnotesize, small, normalsize, large, Large,

York, 1963.
Following is a group of paragraphs marked as Body Quote. This environment is
appropriate for a short quotation or a sequence of short quotations. [2] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behavior in fluid hydrogen
Ask not what your country can do for you; ask what you can do for your country.
John F Kennedy
It’s no exaggeration to say the undecideds could go one way or another. George
Bush
4 Lists [5] Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E., Molecular thermodynamics
extend four levels deep, look like this: [6] Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Properties of Gases and
The typeset appearance for this level is often different from the screen ap- Because appendices may contain material that is supplementary rather than integral to
pearance. The typeset appearance often uses parentheses around the level the main text, many styles use a different numbering system for equations that appear
indicator. in the appendices. √
(b) Another numbered list item under a list item. − b ± b2 − 4 ac
(A-1)
i. Third level numbered list item under a list item. 2a
The quadratic equation shown as equation A-1 is used to demonstrate how equations
3 4
Article - Sans serif

Packages:
seartsans None
Documents created with this shell are similar in appearance to articles created with the Style Editor Article shell,
except sans serif fonts are used throught the document.
entries.

A simple san serif article A number of theorem-like environments is available. The following lemma is a
well-known fact on differentiation of asymptotic expansions of analytic functions.
A. U. Thor

µ ¶
a1 1
f (z ) = a0 + +o ,
1 Sample Mathematics and Text z z
displayed mathematics in documents. It also illustrates five levels of section a 1 = − lim z 2 f 0 (z ) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ ". (2)
Proof. Change z for 1 =z. Then Γ" → Γ " = { z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ" } and
1.1 In-line and Displayed Mathematics f (1 =z ) = a 0 + a 1 z + o (z ) . (3)
P∞
The expression i =1 ai is in-line mathematics, while the numbered equation Fix z ∈ Γ ", and let C r (z ) = {¸ ∈ C− : |¸ − z | = r } be a circle with radius
∞
X r = |z | sin "=2. It follows from (3) that
ai (1) Z X1 Z m
1 f (¸ ) d¸ 1 (¸ − z0 ) d¸
i= 1 = am + R(z ), (4)
2 ¼i CH( z) (¸ − z )2 2¼ i C H(z ) (¸ − z )2
is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 1. m= 0
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset of H , T a where for the remainder R (z ) we have
nonexpansive self map of C . Suppose that as n → ∞ , a n;k → 0 for each k , and |R(z )| ≤ r −1
max o (|z|) = r −1
max |¸ | · O (|z | + r )
P∞ + P
°n = k =0 (a n;k +1 − an;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C, An x = ∞ k
k =0 an;k T x
¸∈C H(z ) ¸∈C H(z )

= · O (|z | + r) = · O (|z |) .
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays. 1 The spacing above r sin "
and below a display depends on whether the lines above or below are short or long, Therefore R (z ) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2 , and hence by the Cauchy theorem (4)
A short line above:
x2 + y 2 = z 2 d
f (1=z) = a 1 + R (z ) → a1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 ,
A long line above may depend on your margins that implies (2) by substituting 1=z back for z.
sin µ + cos µ = 1
2 2
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for 2 Section Headings
R¯ Use the Section tag for major sections, such as the one just above. Four
ln tdt additional heading levels are available, as described below.
Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note that mathematics in section heads 2.1 Subsection Heading
may cause difficulties in typesetting styles with running headers or table of contents
1
LATEX automatically selects the spacing depending on the surrounding line lengths.
1 2
Article - Sans serif 285
2.1.1 Subsubsection Heading (a). Fourth and final level of numbered list items allowed.

• Bullet item 1.
heading. • Bullet item 2.
Subsubsubsubsection Heading This text appears under a subsubsub- ∗ Third level bullet item.
subsection heading. · Fourth and final level bullet item.
3 Tags Description List Each description list item has a lead-in followed by the item.
You can apply the logical markup tag Emphasized. Bunyip Mythical beast of Australian Aboriginal legends.
SMAL L C APS , and Typewriter.
You can apply the special, mathematics only, tags BLACKBOARD BOLD ,
CALLI GRAP HIC , and fraktur. Note that blackboard bold and calligraphic are 5 About the Bibliography
You can apply the size tags tiny , scr iptsize, footnotesize, small, normalsize, large, Following the text of this article is a short manual bibliography. This sample
Large, LARGE, huge and Huge .

Following is a group of paragraphs marked as Body Quote. This environment is is an example: [2, 3, 4].
appropriate for a short quotation or a sequence of short quotations. [1] N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2, John Wiley and Sons,
The buck stops here. Harry Truman New York, 1963.
Ask not what your country can do for you; ask what you can do for your [2] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behavior in fluid
country. John F Kennedy hydrogen at rocket chamber pressures”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, 1998a, 41,
I am not a crook. Richard Nixon 3537-3550
It’s no exaggeration to say the undecideds could go one way or another. [3] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical conditions”,
George Bush Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, in print
4 Lists [5] Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E., Molecular thermodynamics
Bullet, numbered and description list environments are available. Lists, which [6] Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Properties of Gases and
can extend four levels deep, look like this: Liquids, 4th Edition, McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1987
The typeset appearance for this level is often different from the screen
level indicator.
3 4
to the main text , many styles use a different numbering system for equations that
−b ± b 2 − 4 ac
(A-1)
2a
The quadratic equation shown as equation A-1 is used to demonstrate how
5
Book - CalcLabs Book

Packages:
calclabs None
The shell prints crop marks on each page. It inserts blank pages where necessary to ensure that new chapters
begin on odd-numbered pages. Blank pages don’t carry headers or footers and are not shown in the sample pages
that follow.
Contents
Preface 3

1.1 In-line and Displayed Mathematics 5
R¯
1.2 Mathematics in section heads ® ln tdt 5
2. About This Shell 7

2.1 Section Headings 7
2.2 Tags 7
2.3 Lists 7
2.4 About the Bibliography 8
A Simple Book: CalcLabs with References 9
Maple Shell
A. U. Thor
2
Book - CalcLabs Book 287
Preface 1 Sample Mathematics and Text

This is the preface and it is created using a paragraph tagged as IntroChapter. The TeX field
following Contents above generates the table of contents. To ensure the correct page numbers are
used, advance the number of LaTeX passes to three when compiling your document. The preface 1.1 In-line and Displayed Mathematics
appears in the table of contents. P∞
X∞
ai (1)
i =1
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset P of H , T a nonexpansive self
map of C. Suppose that as n → P∞ , a n;k →k 0 for each k , and ° n = k =0 (a n;k +1 − an;k ) → 0.
∞ +
Then for each x in C, A n x = ∞ k =0 a n;k T x converges weakly to a fixed point of T [1].

Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays. 1 The spacing above and below a
examples.
A short line above:
x2 + y 2 = z 2
sin 2 µ + cos 2 µ = 1
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for mathematical displays,
regardless of the margins.
R¯
ln tdt

differentiation of asymptotic expansions of analytic functions.

µ ¶
a1 1
f (z ) = a 0 + +o ,
z z
1
3 5

a 1 = − lim z 2 f 0 (z ) , z → ∞ , z ∈ Γ ". (2)
References
[1] N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2, John Wiley and Sons, New York,
1963.
Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ" → Γ " = { z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ " } and
f (1=z ) = a 0 + a 1 z + o (z ) . (3) [2] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behavior in fluid hydrogen at rocket
Fix z ∈ Γ" , and let C r (z ) = { ¸ ∈ C− : |¸ − z | = r} be a circle with radius r = |z | sin "=2 . It
follows from (3) that [3] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical conditions”, Int. J. Heat
Z X 1 Z m Mass Transfer, in print
1 f (¸) d¸ 1 (¸ − z 0) d¸
= am + R (z ), (4) [4] Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular Theory of Gases and Liquids,
2¼i C H(z ) ( ¸ − z)2 2¼i C H(z ) ( ¸ − z)2
m=0 John Wiley and Sons, Inc., 1964
where for the remainder R (z) we have [5] Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E., Molecular thermodynamics for
|R (z )| ≤ r −1 max o (|z |) = r −1 max |¸ | · O (|z | + r) fluid-phase equilibrium, Prentice -Hall, Inc., 1986
¸ ∈CH (z) ¸ ∈CH (z)
| z| + r 1 + sin " [6] Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Properties of Gases and Liquids, 4th
= · O (|z | + r ) = · O (|z |) . E dition, McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1987
r sin "
Therefore R(z ) → 0 as z → ∞ , z ∈ Γ "=2 , and hence by the Cauchy theorem (4) implies
d
f (1 =z) = a 1 + R(z ) → a 1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"= 2 ,
dz
9
Book - Fred Szabo’s Book

Packages:
amssymb None
makeidx None
fsbook None
The shell inserts blank pages where necessary to ensure that new chapters begin on odd-numbered pages. Blank
pages don’t carry headers or footers and are not shown in the sample pages that follow.
ii
Title of the Book
A. U. Thor
XYZ University
Copyright °
c 1997 by Author
Preface Contents
Preface Head
This is the preface and it is created using a TeX field in a paragraph by itself. When
the document is loaded, this appears in the edit window like a normal chapter, but it is
actually an unnumbered chapter. The TeX field at the beginning of this paragraph sets
Preface iii
the correct page heading for the Preface portion of the document. The preface does not
appear in the table of contents. Preface Head iii
Acknowledgments iii
Acknowledgments
1 Chapter Head 1
Scientific Notebook is the latest product conceived by Roger Hunter, President of TCI
Software Research, and his staff, in a series of electronic tools developed for the teach- About the Shell 1
ing, learning, and applying of mathematics. Scientific Notebook is a natural electronic About the Preamble 1
blackboard and a syntax-free interface to the Maple symbolic computation system. It
is an extension of Scientific WorkPlace, a TEX-based document production system.
2 Chapter Head 3
Scientific Notebook is elegant, easy, and powerful. It is fun to work with and makes
mathematics, both elementary and advanced, accessible to a wider audience than ever Mathematics Examples 3
before. I feel privileged to be able to use Scientific Notebook to make linear algebra More Examples 3
accessible, enjoyable, and rewarding. Thank you, Roger, for your genius, dedication,
and persistence.
A Additional Material 5
XYZ University Author.
Mathematical Induction 5
Sigma Notation 6
B References 9
C Index 11
1 Chapter Head 2 Chapter Head
About the Shell Mathematics Examples
This style is based on the swugbk style. It involves the following modifications: Relevant material
• The crop marks are turned off.
• The index prints in two columns instead of three.
Example 2.1 ¥Example A Suitable Problem
• Definitions constitute an additional theorem-like environment.
• All definitions, theorems, etc. are numbered within chapters.
• A solution label is defined in the preamble.
Each example has a label, followed by a descriptive title. Examples are numbered within
• A Maple output environment is defined in the preamble.
chapters.
• Additional white space is introduced between the rows of matrices for easier read-
ability of fractional entries. Solution. Solutions are introduced by the solution label.
• Fonts and screen tags, in particular screen colors, are used to enhance readability.
All definitions are preceded by the definition label. Definitions are numbered within
chapters.
About the Preamble
A linear equation in the variables x 1 ; : : : ; x n over the field R is an equation of the
form
The preamble of this shell includes the following items: a 1 x 1 + · · · + a n x n = b;
where the coefficients a 1 ; : : : ; a n and the constant b are in R:
“input—tcilatex˝
“def“solution—“noindent—“bfseries Solution. ˝˝—˝
“newenvironment—MapleBox˝—“STARTGRAYBOX˝—“ENDGRAYBOX˝ More Examples
“renewcommand—“arraystretch˝—1.25˝
Example 2.2 ¥ Example A Linear System with a Unique Solution

The first item loads tcilatex. The second one defines the solution label. The third one
defines the environment used to display the result of an evaluation. It renders the result
in yellow on screen and light grey in print. The last item inserts additional space between
Use Scientific Notebook to find a solution for the system
the rows of a matrix. It makes fractional entries more readable. 

 x+y −z −4= 0
2x − y − 3 z + 6 = 0 :


−x + y + 6 z = 0
4 Chapter 2 Chapter Head
Solution. The following command produces a solution for the system.
This is a Maple Box showing the result of a Scientific Notebook computation.

A Additional Material

 x +y − z− 4 = 0

© ª
2x − y − 3 z + 6 = 0 , Solution is : x = − 30 13
; z = − 16
13
; y = 66
13


− x + y + 6z = 0
Exercises
Mathematical Induction
Note This is a note. Notes are unnumbered. Mathematical induction is an accepted procedure for proving that certain statements
concerning the natural numbers are true no matter which natural number is involved.
Lemma 2.1 Here is a lemma. Lemmas are numbered within chapters. For example, we might have a formula '(n ) for computing the sum 1 + 2 + · · · + n;
and we want to prove that the formula works for all n: If n = 15; then the formula
Corollary 2.2 The matrix T has can be represented as a direct sum
' (15) computes the sum 1 + 2 + ·· · + 15; if n = 1001; then ' (1001) compute the sum
C1 ⊕ · · · ⊕ Cr ;
1 + 2 + · · · + 1001 ; and so on. We would prove the fact that we can use the formula
of companion matrices for a unique r; with Ci being the companion matrix of the T -
annihilator of f (t )n E : Corollaries are numbered within chapters. ' (n ) in this way by using mathematical induction.
The reason behind mathematical induction is the fact that, as discussed above, the set N
of natural numbers is characterized by Peano’s axioms as the set each of whose elements
Theorem 2.3 (Rational Form Theorem) Suppose that T : V → V is a linear trans-
formation whose minimum polynomial over the field k of the space V is the product of is either 0 or of the form n + 1 = (1 + 1 + · · · + 1) + 1: If we can prove that '(0)
the distinct irreducible monic factors p 1 (t )n 1 ; : : : ; p 1 (t )nH1 : Then T can be represented holds, and if we can deduce the validity of ' (n + 1) from the validity of '( n ); then the
as the direct sum principle of mathematical induction asserts that the statement ' (m ) holds for all m ∈ N.
(C11 ⊕ · ·· ⊕ C 1n 1 ) ⊕ · · · ⊕ (Cr 1 ⊕ · · · ⊕ Crn H )
of companion matrices. Each matrix Ci 1 ⊕ · · · ⊕ CinE is a direct sum of the form It is clear from the given illustration, that a proof by mathematical induction consists of
described in Lemma 2.1. two parts:
1. The proof that '(0) holds. This part is called the induction basis. Depending on the
specific claim expressed by the formula ' (n ); the statement may actually only make
Proof. See Appendix A. sense for p > 0 : In that case, the induction basis is the proof that ' (p) holds. We
may also have to prove the validity of the first case or two by different means. This
Theorems are numbered within chapters. depends on the nature of the formula '( n) : If the induction basis involves more than
one initial proof, the induction involved is known as complete induction.
2. The proof that if ' (q ) holds for an arbitrary q ∈ N ; then '( q + 1) holds. This part is
called the induction step.
Note The use of the word basis in mathematical induction has nothing to do with the
use of the word basis in linear algebra. It will of course always be clear from the context
which meaning of the word is intended.
6 Appendix A Additional Material Sigma Notation 7

Pn
The following example illustrates the two parts involved in a proof by mathematical i =1 vi : Both expressions have the same meaning. The sigma notation is defined by
induction. It is well-known (and proved by mathematical induction) that mathematical induction.
n ( n + 1)
1+ 2+ ··· +n = = ' (n ) Pn Pn
2 ³ Pk ´ 2.4 If n = 1 ; then
Proposition i =1 vi = v1 ; and if n = k + 1 ; then i=1 vi =
for all n ∈ N: We would prove '(2) by observing that, indeed,
i =1 vi + vn :
2(2 + 1)
1+2 = 3 = :
2 Pn
We would then show how we can deduce the validity of ' (q + 1) from the assumed In this text, the expression i =1 vi is usually written less formally as “v 1 + · · · + vn ”
P
validity of ' (q ): using the ellipsis “· · · ”. Although the use of ellipses is avoidable in the case of ni=1 vi ,
there are many situations in linear algebra where ellipses are an essential part of the
Suppose that
q (q + 1) notation. For example, we frequently need to refer to finite sequences of vectors of
1+ 2 +··· +q = : unspecified length n, such as v1 ; : : : ; vn ;and to finite arrays of elements of unspecified
2
Then dimensions m and n, such as
q (q + 1)  
1 + 2 + · · · + q + (q + 1) = + (q + 1) a 11 ···a1 n
2 
q (q + 1) 2(q + 1)  .. .. .. 
= +  . . . :
2 2 am 1 · · · a mm
(q + 2)(q + 1)
= In these situations, horizontal, vertical, and diagonal ellipses are used to indicate possi-
2
(q + 1)(q + 2) bly missing terms.
= :
2
The principle of mathematical induction therefore allows us to conclude that ' (n ) holds
for all n: (In this case all n ≥ 2, since the expression makes no sense for n = 0 or
n = 1.)
In finite-dimensional linear algebra, statements of the form ' (n ) are usually statements
asserting that a certain fact ' hold for spaces of all dimensions n ∈ N : Since there is
a space of dimension 0 ; we would have to prove that ' (0) holds. We may also have to
prove, in addition, that '(1) holds, if the validity of '(1) does not follow from that of
' (0); given the triviality of the space V = {0} : Other types of proofs in linear algebra
using mathematical induction are proofs about linear combinations of arbitrary length,
or polynomials of arbitrary degrees.
Sigma Notation
Another important application of mathematics induction is the definition of the “sigma

notation.” Arithmetical statements in linear algebra are often about sums made up of a
fixed but “arbitrary” number of terms. There are two basic ways of dealing with this
situation. We can either use an ellipsis (three dots) to represent missing elements as
in v1 + · · · + vn ; or we can use variable subscripts and the capital sigma and write
B References C Index
This appendix contains the references. This appendix contains the index.
Book - Jonathan Lewin’s Book

Packages:
makeidx None
jlbook None
The shell inserts blank pages to ensure that page numbering is correct. The pages are marked for removal by the
publisher and are not shown in the sample pages that follow.
Contents
Preface iv
PART I This Is a Part Header 1

R¯
1.2 Mathematics in Section Heads ® ln tdt 2
That Day at the Dog Races
2.2 Tags 4
2.3 List Environments 5
A Additional Material 6
Frederick Altamont Cornwallis Twistleton
Index 7
iii
Book - Jonathan Lewin’s Book 293
Preface Chapter 1
This is the preface and it is created using a TeX field in a paragraph by itself.
When the document is loaded, this appears in the edit window like a normal
chapter, but it is actually an unnumbered chapter. The TeX field at the beginning
of this paragraph sets the correct page heading for the Preface portion of the 1.1 In-line and Displayed Mathematics
document. The preface does not appear in the table of contents. P∞
∞
X
ai (1.1)
i=1

Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset of H , T
a nonexpansive self map of C . Suppose that as n → ∞, an;k → 0 for each
P∞ +
k
P , and ° n = k=0 (an;k +1 − an;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C , Anx =
∞ k
k =0 an;k T x converges weakly to a fixed point of T .
Two sets of LTEX parameters govern mathematical displays.1 The spacing
A
A short line above:
x2 + y 2 = z 2
R¯
ln J@J
may cause dif? culties in typesetting styles with running headers or table of con-
tents entries.
1
iv 2

Environments
Appendix A
a well-known fact on differentiation of asymptotic expansions of analytic func-
Additional Material
tions. This is some additional material. The header is created using an appendix tag.
When the document is loaded, this appears in the edit window like a normal
Lemma 1 Let f (z) be an analytic function in C+ . If f (z) admits the repre- chapter, but it is actually an unnumbered chapter. The appendix appears in the
sentation table of contents.
µ ¶
a1 1
f (z) = a0 + +o ,
z z
for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ" = {z ∈ C + : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − " } then
a1 = − lim z 2f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ ". (1.2)
Proof. Change z for 1=z . Then Γ" → Γ" = {z ∈ C − : z ∈ Γ " } and

f (1=z) = a0 + a1 z + o (z) . (1.3)
Fix z ∈ Γ" , and let Cr (z) = {¸ ∈ C− : | ¸ − z | = r} be a circle with radius
Z Z
(¸ − z0 )m d¸
X 1
1 f (¸) d¸ 1
2 = am 2 + R(z), (1.4)
2¼i CH ( z ) (¸ − z) m=0
2¼i CH ( z) (¸ − z)
|R(z)| ≤ r −1 max o (|z |) = r−1 max |¸| · O (|z | + r)
¸∈CH (z) ¸∈CH (z )
|z | + r 1 + sin "
= · O (|z | + r) = · O (| z |) .
r sin "
Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2, and hence by the Cauchy theorem
(1.4) implies
d
f (1=z) = a1 + R(z) → a1, as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2,
dz
1. The table of contents field at the top of this document is needed. The table
of contents is called for differently in the style editor book styles.
6
Book - LATEX-like Book

Packages:
selbk None
The shell inserts blank pages where necessary to ensure that new chapters begin on odd-numbered pages. Blank
pages don’t carry headers or footers and are not shown here.
Contents
A Simple Book 2 Sample Mathematics and Text 3

2.1 In-line and Displayed Mathematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
R¯
2.2 Mathematics in section heads ® ln tdt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
A. U. Thor 3 Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environments 5

4.1 Section Headings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
4.1.1 Subsection Heading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
4.2 Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
4.3 Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
4.4 About the Bibliography . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
iii
Chapter 1 Chapter 2
Purpose of this Document Sample Mathematics and Text
kinds of lists. Finally, the document includes entries for a manual bibliography and an 2.1 In-line and Displayed Mathematics
appendix. P∞
The expression i =1 ai is in-line mathematics, while the numbered equation
X
∞
ai (2.1)
i=1

expansive self map of C. Suppose that as n → ∞, a n;k → 0 for each k, and
P∞ P∞
° n = k =0 (a n;k +1 − a n;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C , A n x = k =0 a n;k T k x
+

and below a display depends on whether the lines above or below are short or long, as
shown in the following examples.
A short line above:
x2 + y 2 = z 2
R¯
ln J@J
cause difficulties in typesetting styles with running headers or table of contents entries.
1 A
LT
1 3
6 Chapter 3. Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environments
Chapter 3 d
f (1=z ) = a1 + R(z ) → a 1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"= 2 ,
dz
that implies (3.2) by substituting 1 =z back for z.
Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Lemma 3 Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset of H , T
Theorem-like Environments a nonexpansive self map of C . Suppose that as n → ∞, a n;k → 0 for each k, and
°n = ∞
P
k =0 (an;k+ 1 − a n;k )
+ P
→ 0 . Then for each x in C , An x = ∞ k
k =0 a n;k T x
A number of theorem-like environments is available. T he following lemma is a well-


µ ¶
a1 1
f (z ) = a 0 + +o ,
z z
a 1 = − lim z 2 f 0 ( z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" . (3.2)
Lemma 2 Change z for 1 =z. Then Γ" → Γ " = { z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ" } and
f (1 =z ) = a0 + a1 z + o (z ) . (3.3)
Fix z ∈ Γ" , and let Cr ( z) = {¸ ∈ C− : |¸ − z | = r} be a circle with radius
Z 1
X Z m
1 f (¸ ) d¸ 1 (¸ − z0 ) d¸
= am + R(z ), (3.4)
2 ¼i CH (z) (¸ − z )
2
m =0
2 ¼i CH (z ) (¸ − z )
2
|R(z )| ≤ r −1 max o (|z|) = r−1 max |¸ | · O (|z | + r)

¸∈C H(z ) ¸∈C H(z )
|z| + r 1 + sin "
= · O (|z | + r ) = · O (|z|) .
r sin "
Therefore R (z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 , and hence by the Cauchy theorem (3.4)
implies
5
8 Chapter 4. Features of this Shell
Chapter 4 You can apply the visual markup tags Bold, Italics, Roman, Sans Serif, Slanted,
S MALL CAPS, and Typewriter.
You can apply the special, mathematics only, tags fraktur, BLACKBOARD BOLD,
and CALLIGRAPHIC. Note that blackboard bold and calligraphic are correct only
Features of this Shell You can apply the size tags tiny, scr iptsize, footnotesize, small , normalsize, large, Large ,

Following is a group of paragraphs marked as Body Quote. T his environment is
John F Kennedy
4.1 Section Headings I am not a crook. Richard Nixon
Bush

This text appears under a subsection heading. This is some text to fill out the page.
4.3 Lists
This is some text to fill out the page. This is some text to fill out the page. This is Bullet, numbered and description list environments are available. Lists, which can ex-
some text to fill out the page. This is some text to fill out the page. This is some text tend four levels deep, look like this:
to fill out the page. This is some text to fill out the page.
Subsubsection Heading This text appears under a subsubsection heading. This is 2. Numbered list item 2.
some text to fill out the page. This is some text to fill out the page. This is some text
to fill out the page. This is some text to fill out the page. This is some text to fill out
the page. This is some text to fill out the page. This is some text to fill out the page. The typeset appearance for this level is often different from the screen ap-
(Subsubsubsection head:)Subsubsubsection Heading pearance. The typeset appearance often uses parentheses around the level
This text appears under a subsubsubsection heading. This is some text to fill out indicator.
the page. This is some text to fill out the page. This is some text to fill out the page. (b) Another numbered list item under a list item.
This is some text to fill out the page. This is some text to fill out the page. This is i. Third level numbered list item under a list item.
some text to fill out the page. This is some text to fill out the page. A. Fourth and final level of numbered list items allowed.
This text appears under a subsubsubsubsection heading. T his is some text to fill • Bullet item 1.
out the page. This is some text to fill out the page. This is some text to fill out the
page. This is some text to fill out the page. This is some text to fill out the page. This • Bullet item 2.
is some text to fill out the page. T his is some text to fill out the page. – Second level bullet item.
4.2 Tags
4.4 About the Bibliography 9

Appendix A
4.4 About the Bibliography The First Appendix
Following the text of this article is a short manual bibliography. This sample bibliogra-
phy has no relationship to the previous text, but it shows sample citations such as [4], The appendix fragment is used only once. Subsequent appendices can be created using
[5] and [6]. You can also have multiple citations appear together. Here is an example: the Chapter Section/Body Tag.
[2, 3, 4].
11
Bibliography
New York, 1963.

13
Book - Stewart Calculus

Packages:
float None
SECALCUL None
Because of production process requirements, the shell requires that all numbered elements (such as sections,
equations, and list items) be numbered manually. Automatically generated numbers do not not typeset. The shell
includes an extensive list of special tags, especially as related to textbook sections, exercises, instructions, and
proofs.
2 1.0 Mathematics in This Shell

Environments
1.0 Mathematics in This Shell A number of theorem-like environments is available. The following lemma is a well-
Lemma 1 Let f ( z) be an analytic function in C +. If f (z ) admits the representation

P∞ µ ¶
The expression i =1 a i is in-line mathematics, while the numbered equation a1 1
f (z ) = a 0 + +o ,
∞
z z
X
ai (1) for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ" = {z ∈ C + : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then
i =1
is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 1. a 1 = − lim z2 f 0 (z ) , z → ∞ , z ∈ Γ ". (2)

Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset of H, T a non- Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ" → Γ" = {z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ" } and
expansive self map of C . Suppose that as n → ∞ , a n;k → 0 for each k , and
P∞ P∞
° n = k= 0 (a n;k +1 − an;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C, An x = k =0 a n;k T k x
+
f (1=z ) = a 0 + a 1 z + o ( z) . (3)
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays.1 The spacing above Fix z ∈ Γ " , and let C r (z ) = { ¸ ∈ C − : |¸ − z| = r} be a circle with radius
and below a display depends on whether the lines above or below are short or long, as r = |z | sin "= 2 . It follows from (3) that
shown in the following examples. Z Z
(¸ − z 0 )m d¸
X1
A short line above: 1 f (¸) d¸ 1
= am + R (z ), (4)
2¼i C H(z ) ( ¸ − z) 2 2¼i C H(z ) ( ¸ − z) 2
x 2 + y 2 = z2 m=0

A long line above may depend on your margins |R(z )| ≤ r −1 max o (|z |) = r −1 max |¸ | · O (|z| + r ) (5)
¸∈C H( z ) ¸∈C H( z)
sin 2 µ + cos 2 µ = 1 |z | + r 1 + sin "
= · O (|z | + r ) = · O (|z |) .
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for mathe- r sin "
matical displays, regardless of the margins. Therefore R (z ) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"= 2 , and hence by the Cauchy theorem (4)
implies
d
f (1=z ) = a 1 + R (z ) → a 1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"= 2 , (6.)
dz
1
1
Book - Stewart Calculus 299
2.0 Manual Numbering 2.1 Graphing Calculator Section

Most graphing calculators and computer graphing programs can be used to graph
curves defined by parametric equations. In fact, it is instructive to watch a parametric
curve being drawn by a graphing calculator because the points are plotted in order as
the corresponding parameter values increase.
In the book production process, automatic numbering causes problems because there
is the chance that some editing change in the source file will change the number of a
section, equation, list item, etc. This can lead to inaccuracies or missed corrections
during copy-editing. Exercises 2.1
1–15
(a) Sketch the curve represented

by the parametric equations.
(b) Eliminate the parameter to find
the Cartesian equation of the curve.
1. x = 1 − t, y = 2 + 3t
2. x = 2t − 1, y = 2 − t,
−3 ≤ t ≤ 3
3. x = 3 t 2 , y = 2 + 5t,
0≤t≤2
4. x = 2t − 1, y = t2 − 1
√
5. x = t, y = 1 − t
6. x = t 2, y = t3
7. x = sin µ, y = cos µ,
0≤µ≤¼
8. x = 3 cos µ, y = 2 sin µ,
0 ≤ µ ≤ 2¼
9. x = sin 2 µ, y = cos 2 µ
10. x = sec µ, y = tan µ,
− ¼=2 < µ < ¼= 2
11. x = 2 t − 1 , y = t 2 − 1
√
12. x = t, y = 1 − t
13. x = t 2 , y = t3
14. x = sin µ, y = cos µ,
0≤µ≤¼
15. x = 3 cos µ, y = 2 sin µ,
0 ≤ µ ≤ 2¼
3 4
5 6 3.0 Headings and Tags
3.0 Headings and Tags 3.1 Section About Tags

Use the Section tag for major sections like this one. These text tags are available. You
can apply the logical markup tag Emphasized.
S MALL C APS, and Typewriter.
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset of H , T a non- You can apply the special, mathematics only, tags fraktur; BLACKBOARD BOLD,
expansive self map of C . Suppose that as n → ∞ , a n;k → 0 for each k , and and CALLIGRAPHIC . Note that blackboard bold and calligraphic are correct only
P∞ + P∞
° n = k= 0 (a n;k +1 − an;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C, An x = k =0 a n;k T k x when applied to uppercase letters A through Z.
converges weakly to a fixed point of T . You can apply the size tags tiny , sc riptsize, footnotesize, small, normalsize, large, Large ,
may cause difficulties in typesetting styles with running headers or table of contents LARGE, huge and Huge.
entries. This is a Body Math paragraph. Each time you press the Enter key, Scienti? c Work-
Place switches to mathematics mode. This is convenient for carrying out “scratchpad”
computations. Following is a group of paragraphs marked as Body Quote. This envi-
ronment is appropriate for a short quotation or a sequence of short quotations.
Bush
3.1.1 Subsection
3.1.1.1 Su bsubsection

Book - User’s Guide

Packages:
swugbk None
begin on odd-numbered pages. Blank pages don’t carry headers and are not shown in the sample pages that follow.
Contents
Typesetting Documents
Preface 1

In-line and Displayed Mathematics 3
R¯
ln tdt 3
Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environments 3
2 About This Shell 5

Section Headings 5
Subsection Heading 5
Tags 5
A Guide to Typesetting Lists 6
About the Bibliography 6
Susan Bagby References 9

George Pearson
Book - User’s Guide 301
4 Chapter 1 Sample Mathematics and Text
1 Sample Mathematics and

f (z ) = a 0 +
a1
z
+o
µ ¶
1
z
,
Text for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ" = {z ∈ C+ : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then
a1 = − lim z 2 f 0 (z ) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" . (2)
Proof. Change z for 1 =z. Then Γ" → Γ" = {z ∈ C − : z ∈ Γ" } and

f (1 =z ) = a 0 + a 1 z + o (z ) . (3)
Fix z ∈ Γ ", and let Cr (z ) = { ¸ ∈ C− : |¸ − z | = r } be a circle with radius r =
|z | sin "=2. It follows from () that
In-line and Displayed Mathematics 1
Z
f (¸ ) d¸ X 1
1
Z
(¸ − z0 )m d¸
= am + R (z ), (4)
P∞ 2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z )2 2 ¼i CH (z) (¸ − z )2
The expression i= 1 a i is in-line mathematics, while the numbered equation m =0
∞
X where for the remainder R(z ) we have
ai (1) |R (z )| ≤ r−1 max o (|z |) = r−1 max |¸| · O (|z| + r )
i =1 ¸∈C H (z ) ¸∈CH (z )
is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 1. |z | + r 1 + sin "
= · O (|z | + r ) = · O (|z |) .
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset of H, T a nonex- r sin "
pansive self map of C . Suppose that as n → ∞, an;k → 0 for each k, and ° n = Therefore R( z) → 0 as z → ∞ , z ∈ Γ"=2 , and hence by the Cauchy theorem () implies
P∞ + P∞ k
k =0 (a n;k +1 − a n;k ) → 0 . Then for each x in C , An x = k= 0 a n;k T x converges
d
weakly to a ? xed point of T [1]. f (1=z ) = a 1 + R ( z) → a 1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 ,
dz
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays.1 The spacing above and that implies () by substituting 1=z back for z.
A short line above:
x2 + y 2 = z 2
R¯
Mathematics in section heads ® ln J@J
cause dif?culties in typesetting styles with running headers or table of contents entries.

2 About This Shell References
The back matter often includes one or more of an index, an afterword, acknowledge-
ments, a bibliography, a colophon, or any other similar item. In the back matter, chapters
Section Headings do not produce a chapter number, but they are entered in the table of contents.
Use the Section tag for major sections, such as the one just above. Four additional [1] N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2, John Wiley and Sons, New York,
heading levels are available, as described below. 1963.
[2] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated ? uid oxygen drop behavior in ? uid hydrogen at
Subsection Heading [3] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical conditions”, Int. J.
This text appears under a subsubsection heading. [5] Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E., Molecular thermodynamics for ? uid-
Subsubsubsection Heading [6] Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Properties of Gases and Liquids,
This text appears under a subsubsubsection heading. 4th Edition, McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1987
Tags
You can apply the special, mathematics only, tags fraktur; BLACKBOARD BOLD,
and CALLIGRAP HIC . Note that blackboard bold and calligraphic are correct only
You can apply the size tags tiny , scriptsize, footnotesize, small , normalsize, large, Large,

Following is a group of paragraphs marked as Body Quote. This environment is appro-
priate for a short quotation or a sequence of short quotations.
John F Kennedy
Bush
Book #1

Packages:
sebook1 None
The shell produces documents with simple formatting appropriate for books. New chapters begin on the next
consecutive page. Section headings appear at the left margin. Running headers and page numbers are centered at
the top and bottom of the page, respectively. The shell has theorem environments.
Contents
Contents 2
Preface 3

R¯
2.2 Mathematics in section heads ® ln tdt 5
A Simple Book 3 About This Shell 7

3.2 Tags 7
A. U. Thor 3.3 Lists 8
4 About the Bibliography 9
References 11
2
Book #1 303
Preface Chapter 1
This is the preface and it is created using a TeX field in a paragraph by itself. When the
document is loaded, this appears in the edit window like a normal chapter, but it is actually This short sample document illustrates the typeset appearance of in-line and displayed
an unnumbered chapter. The TeX field at the beginning of this paragraph sets the correct mathematics in documents. It also illustrates five levels of section headings and three kinds
page heading for the Preface portion of the document. The preface does not appear in the of lists. Finally, the document includes entries for a manual bibliography and an appendix.
table of contents.
3 4
Chapter 2 Sample Mathematics and Text
Chapter 2 Lemma 1 Let f (z ) be an analytic function in C+ . If f (z ) admits the representation

µ ¶
Sample Mathematics and Text f (z ) = a0 +
a1
z
+o
1
z
,
for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ" = { z ∈ C + : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then

a 1 = − lim z 2 f 0 ( z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" . (2.2)
P∞
∞
X
ai (2.1)
i=1
Lemma 2 Change z for 1=z. Then Γ" → Γ" = { z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ" } and
is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 2.1. f (1 =z ) = a 0 + a 1 z + o (z ) . (2.3)

Fix z ∈ Γ" , and let Cr ( z) = { ¸ ∈ C− : |¸ − z | = r } be a circle with radius r = |z | sin "= 2.
nonexpansive self map of C. Suppose that as n → ∞, a n;k → 0 for each k, and
P P∞ k It follows from (2.3) that
°n = ∞ k =0 (a n;k + 1 − a n;k )
+
→ 0 . Then for each x in C, An x = k =0 a n;k T x
converges weakly to a fixed point of T [1]. Z Z
(¸ − z0 )m d¸
1
X
1 f (¸ ) d¸ 1
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays.1 The spacing above and = am + R(z ), (2.4)
below a display depends on whether the lines above or below are short or long, as shown in 2 ¼i CH (z) (¸ − z )
2
m =0
2¼i C H( z )
2
(¸ − z )
the following examples. where for the remainder R (z) we have
A short line above:
x2 + y 2 = z2 |R(z )| ≤ r −1 max o (|z|) = r −1 max |¸ | · O (|z | + r)
¸∈C H(z ) ¸∈C H(z )
A long line above may depend on your margins |z | + r 1 + sin "
= · O (|z | + r) = · O (|z|) .
r sin "
sin2 µ + cos2 µ = 1 Therefore R( z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 , and hence by the Cauchy theorem (2.4) implies
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for mathematical d
displays, regardless of the margins. f (1 =z ) = a 1 + R(z ) → a 1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 ,
dz
that implies (2.2) by substituting 1 =z back for z.
R¯
ln J@J

1
5 6
Chapter 3 About This Shell
Chapter 3 3.3 Lists
About This Shell Bullet, numbered and description list environments are available. Lists, which can extend
3.1 Section Headings 2. Numbered list item 2.
Use the Section tag for major sections, such as the one just above. Four additional heading The typeset appearance for this level is often different from the screen appearance.
levels are available, as described below. The typeset appearance often uses parentheses around the level indicator.
3.1.1 Subsection Heading b. Another numbered list item under a list item.
This text appears under a subsection heading. (a). Fourth and final level of numbered list items allowed.
3.1.1.1 Subsubsection Heading This text appears under a subsubsection heading.
(Subsubsubsection head:)Subsubsubsection Heading • Bullet item 1.
This text appears under a subsubsubsection heading. • Bullet item 2.
(Subsubsubsubsection head:)Subsubsubsubsection Heading – Second level bullet item.
This text appears under a subsubsubsubsection heading. ∗ Third level bullet item.
3.2 Tags
You can apply the logical markup tag Emphasized. Double-click the lead-in box to enter or customize the text of the lead-in.
SMALL CA PS , and Typewriter. Bunyip Mythical beast of Australian Aboriginal legends.
You can apply the special, mathematics only, tags fraktur; BLACKBOARD BOLD,
and CALLIGRAPHIC . Note that blackboard bold and calligraphic are correct only when
applied to uppercase letters A through Z.
You can apply the size tags tiny, sc riptsize, footnotesize , small, normalsize, large, Large,

John F Kennedy
It’s no exaggeration to say the undecideds could go one way or another. George Bush
7 8
Appendix A The First Appendix
About the Bibliography The First Appendix
Following the text of this article is a short manual bibliography. This sample bibliography The appendix fragment is used only once. Subsequent appendices can be created using the
has no relationship to the previous text, but it shows sample citations such as [4], [5] and [6]. Chapter Section/Body Tag.
You can also have multiple citations appear together. Here is an example: [2, 3, 4].
9 10
Book #1 305
References
York, 1963.
11
Exam #1

Packages:
seexm1 None
The shell produces simple exam documents.
5. Another question.
MATH 123 FINAL EXAM

Fall 2004
Dr. Very Exalted Name:
Instructions. Replace this text by the instructions to the students.

a. The first part.
b. The second part.
c. The third part.

1 2
Exam Builder Shell 307
Exam Builder Shell

Packages:
exmbldr2 None
Unlike most Style Editor shells, this shell includes front matter. The fields include institution, department,
instructor, office number, class, semester, date of exam, title, and number of pages. When you insert the TitlePage
tag on a blank line as the first thing in the body of the document, the information is printed at the top of the first
page of the exam.
Name: Student ID: Page: 2 of 2
N EW M EXICO S TATE U NIVERSITY
Mathematical Sciences
Instructor: Dr. A. U. Thor Office: 123
Class: Calculus 292 Semester: Fall 2004 Date: October 9, 2004

a. The first part.
b. The second part.
c. The third part.

5. The fifth question.
Calculus 292 Fall 2004 Final Exam for Calculus 292 October 9, 2004
Exam Builder with Title Page

Packages:
exmbldr1 None
Unlike most Style Editor shells, this shell includes front matter. The fields include institution, department,
instructor, office number, class, semester, date of exam, title, and number of pages. When you insert the TitlePage
tag as the first thing in the body of the document, the front matter is printed on a separate title page.

N EW MEXIC O S TATE UNIVERSITY

Mathematical Sciences
Instructor: Dr. A. U. Thor Office: 123
Class: Calculus 292 Semester: Fall 2001 Date: October 9, 2001
a. The first part.
Final Exam for Calculus 292 b. The second part.
c. The third part.
Student Name:
Student ID:
Exam Builder with Title Page 309
Fax #1

Packages:
sefax1 None
The shell includes front matter fields in the body of the document for entering the number of pages; name,
address, and telephone of the sender; copies and attachments; name of recipient; date; and subject.
Fax Transmission
No. of pages incl. this one: 1
To:
Larry Hughes
From: MacKichan Software, Inc.
Fax Number: 1-505/789-0456 Voice: 1-505/522-4600
cc:
Susan Bagby
Date: The date here
Subject: This is a sample
If you do not receive all pages, please contact: 1-123-456-7890
Special Instructions: Please Hand-deliver to Addressee.
Here is the content of the fax memo. This fax includes contact information, the number of pages, special instructions, and
the fax message itself. Complete the fields with the information you need.
The fields in the fax shell can be left blank but should not be deleted. The Subject field must remain, and must immediately
precede the body of the fax.
Attachments:
List attachments
General - Scientific Word Readme 311
General - Scientific Word Readme

Packages:
readme None
begin on odd-numbered pages. Blank pages don’t carry headers or footers and are not shown in the sample pages
that follow.
Contents 1 2 Contents
Contents Pref ace
This is the preface and it is created using the preface tag from the Section/Body
Tag toolbar. The preface does appears in the table of contents.
Preface 2 In-line and Displayed Mathematics

P∞
Sample Mathematics and Text 2 The expression i= 1 a i is in-line mathematics, while the numbered equation
In-line and Displayed Mathematics 2 ∞
X
R¯ ai (1)
Mathematics in Section Heads ® ln tdt 2 i =1
Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environments 2 is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 1.
Section Headings 3 nonexpansive self map of C . Suppose that as n → ∞, an;k → 0 for each k , and
P P∞ k
Subsection 3 °n = ∞ k =0 (an;k + 1 − a n;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C , An x =
+
k =0 an;k T x
Tags 3 converges weakly to a fixed point of T [1].
List Environments 4 Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays.1 The spacing
The First Appendix 5 short or long, as shown in the following examples.
A short line above:
References 7 x 2 + y 2 = z2
R¯
Mathematics in Section Heads ® ln J@J
heads may cause difficulties in typesetting styles with running headers or table

functions.
Contents 3 4 Contents
Lemma 1 Let f (z) be an analytic function in C+. If f ( z) admits the representation You can apply the visual markup tags Bold, Italics, Roman, Sans Serif,
µ ¶
a1 1 Slanted, Small Caps, and Typewriter.
f (z ) = a0 + +o ,
z z You can apply the special, mathematics only, tags fraktur; BLACKBOARD
for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ" = { z ∈ C + : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then BOLD, and CALLIGRAPHI C. Note that blackboard bold and calligraphic are
a 1 = − lim z2 f 0 (z ) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" . (2)
You can apply the size tags tiny, scriptsize, footnotesize, small, normalsize, large,
Proof. Change z for 1 =z. Then Γ" → Γ " = { z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ" } and Large, LARGE , huge and Huge .
f (1=z ) = a 0 + a 1 z + o (z ) . (3)
Fix z ∈ Γ" , and let C r (z ) = {¸ ∈ C − : |¸ − z| = r } be a circle with radius “scratchpad” computations. Following is a group of paragraphs marked as Body
r = |z | sin "= 2. It follows from (3) that Quote. This environment is appropriate for a short quotation or a sequence of
Z X 1 Z m
1 f ( ¸) d¸ 1 (¸ − z 0) d¸ short quotations.
= am + R (z ), (4)
2¼i C H(z ) ( ¸ − z)2 2¼i C H(z ) ( ¸ − z)2
m=0 The buck stops here. Harry Truman
where for the remainder R(z ) we have Ask not what your country can do for you; ask what you can do for your
|R(z )| ≤ r −1 max o (|z |) = r −1 max |¸| · O (|z | + r) country. John F Kennedy
¸ ∈CH (z) ¸ ∈C H(z)
|z | + r 1 + sin " It’s no exaggeration to say the undecideds could go one way or another.
= · O (|z| + r ) = · O (|z |) .
r sin " George Bush
Therefore R (z ) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 , and hence by the Cauchy theorem (4)
implies
d List Environments
f (1=z ) = a 1 + R(z ) → a1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2 ,
dz
that implies (2) by substituting 1 =z back for z . You can create numbered, bulleted, and description lists using the tag popup at
(Chapter head:)Features of this Shell the bottom left of the screen.
1. List item 1
2. List item 2
2 Section Headings
a. A list item under a list item.
Use the Section tag for ma jor sections, and the Subsection tag for subsections. The typeset style for this level is different than the screen style. The
screen shows a lower case alphabetic character followed by a period while
the typeset style uses a lower case alphabetic character surrounded by
Subsection parentheses.
b. Just another list item under a list item.
i Third level list item under a list item.
Subsubsection (1) Fourth and final level of list items allowed.
• Bullet item 1
Subsubsubsection This is some harmless text under a subsubsubsection. • Bullet item 2
(Subsubsubsubsection head:)Subsubsubsubsection
• Second level bullet item.
This is some harmless text under a subsubsubsubsection.
• Fourth (and final) level bullet item.
Tags
Description List Each description list item has a term followed by the
You can apply the logical markup tag Emphasized. description of that term. Double click the term box to enter the term, or to
Contents 5 Contents 7
change it. References

Solutions to Some Problems New York, 1963.
Here are the solutions to the problems in this chapter. hydrogen at rocket chamber pressures”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, 1998a, 41,
1. x = 1 − t , y = 2 + 3t 3537-3550
2. x = 2t − 1, y = 2 − t , −3 ≤ t ≤ 3 [3] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical conditions”,
3. x = 3t 2 , y = 2 + 5 t , 0 ≤ t ≤ 2 Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, in print
4. x = 2t − 1, y = t2 − 1
√
5. x = t, y = 1 − t Liquids, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., 1964
6. x = t2 , y = t 3 [5] Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E., Molecular thermodynamics
7. x = sin µ , y = cos µ , 0 ≤ µ ≤ ¼ for fluid-phase equilibrium, Prentice -Hall, Inc., 1986
8. x = 3 cos µ , y = 2 sin µ , 0 ≤ µ ≤ 2 ¼ [6] Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Properties of Gases and
9. x = sin 2 µ , y = cos2 µ Liquids, 4th Edition, McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1987
10. x = sec µ, y = tan µ , −¼= 2 < µ < ¼=2
The First Appendix
Subsequent appendices can be created using the Section tag.

General - Simple WYSIWYG 313
General - Simple WYSIWYG

Packages:
wysiwyg None
Documents produced by this shell have no front matter. They have a simple format with somewhat narrow
margins and no page numbers. Headings are left-justified. The shell contains theorem environments.

d
f (1=z ) = a1 + R(z ) → a 1 , as z → ∞ , z ∈ Γ "=2 ,
dz
1.1 In-line and Displayed Mathematics that implies (2) by substituting 1=z back for z.
P∞
X∞ 2 Section Headings
ai (1)
i=1 Use the Section tag for major sections, and the Subsection tag for subsections.
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded P convex subset of H , T a nonexpansive self map of C. 2.1 Subsection
SupposeP that as n → ∞, a n;k → 0 for each k , and ° n = ∞ +
k =0 (an;k +1 − an;k ) → 0 . Then for each x in C,
Anx = ∞ This is some harmless text under a subsection.
k= 0 a n;k T x converges weakly to a fixed point of T [1].
k
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays. 1 The spacing above and below a display 2.1.1 Subsubsection
depends on whether the lines above or below are short or long, as shown in the following examples.
A short line above: This is some harmless text under a subsubsection.
x2 + y 2 = z2
and a short line below. 2.2 Tags
You can apply the visual markup tags Bold, Italics, Roman, Sans Serif, Slanted, S MALL C APS , and
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for mathematical displays, regardless of the
Typewriter.
margins.
You can apply the special, mathematics only, tags fraktur; BLACKBOARD BOLD, and
R¯ CALLIGRAP HIC . Note that blackboard bold and calligraphic are correct only when applied to upper-
ln J@J
case letters A through Z.
Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note that mathematics in section heads may cause difficulties in typesetting LARGE
You can apply the size tags tiny , scriptsize , footnotesize, small, normalsize, large, Large , ,
styles with running headers or table of contents entries.
huge and Huge.
1.3 Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environments This is a Body Math paragraph. Each time you press the Enter key, Scientific WorkPlace switches to
mathematics mode. This is convenient for carrying out “scratchpad” computations. Following is a group of
A number of theorem-like environments is available. The following lemma is a well-known fact on differentiation of paragraphs marked as Body Quote. This environment is appropriate for a short quotation or a sequence of short
asymptotic expansions of analytic functions. quotations.
Lemma 1 Let f (z ) be an analytic function in C+ . If f (z ) admits the representation Ask not what your country can do for you; ask what you can do for your country. John F Kennedy
µ ¶ I am not a crook. Richard Nixon
a1 1
f (z ) = a0 + +o , It’s no exaggeration to say the undecideds could go one way or another. George Bush
z z
a 1 = − lim z 2 f 0 ( z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" . (2)
You can create numbered, bulleted, and description lists using the tag popup at the bottom left of the screen.
Change z for 1=z. Then Γ" → Γ " = {z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ "} and
1. List item 1
f (1 =z ) = a 0 + a 1 z + o (z ) . (3)
Fix z ∈ Γ" , and let C r (z ) = { ¸ ∈ C − : |¸ − z | = r } be a circle with radius r = |z | sin "=2 . It follows from (3) that 2. List item 2
Z Z (a) A list item under a list item.
(¸ − z0 )m d¸
X 1
1 f (¸ ) d¸ 1
= a m + R (z ), (4) The typeset style for this level is different than the screen style. The screen shows a lower case
2 ¼i CH (z) (¸ − z )2 2¼i C H( z ) (¸ − z )2
m =0 alphabetic character followed by a period while the typeset style uses a lower case alphabetic character
where for the remainder R( z) we have surrounded by parentheses.
|R(z )| ≤ r −1 max o (|z|) = r −1 max |¸ | · O (|z | + r)
¸∈C H(z ) ¸∈C H(z ) (b) Just another list item under a list item.
|z | + r 1 + sin " (i) Third level list item under a list item.
= · O (|z | + r) = · O (|z|) . (A) Fourth and final level of list items allowed.
r sin "
Therefore R(z ) → 0 as z → ∞ , z ∈ Γ "=2 , and hence by the Cauchy theorem (4) implies • Bullet item 1
1
• Bullet item 2
Descrip. List Each description list item has a term followed by the description of that term. Double click the term box to enter the
term, or to change it.
[2] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behavior in fluid hydrogen at rocket chamber pressures”, Int.
J. Heat Mass Transfer, 1998a, 41, 3537-3550
[3] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical conditions”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, in print
[4] Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular Theory of Gases and Liquids, John Wiley and Sons, Inc.,
1964
[5] Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E ., Molecular thermodynamics for fluid-phase equilibrium, Prentice
-Hall, Inc., 1986
[6] Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Properties of Gases and Liquids, 4th Edition, McGraw-Hill Book
Company, 1987
Letter #1 315
Letter #1

Packages:
selet1 None
The shell includes front matter fields in the body of the document for entering a logo, the address of the sender
and the recipient, the closing and name of the sender, the date, the subject, and copy and enclosure information.
logo goes here

Barry MacKichan
19307 8th Avenue, Suite C
Poulsbo, WA 98370-7370
July 15, 2004
Jim Smith
1234 Any Street
Knoxville, TN 37923
Subject: Information request
Replace this with your text. Here is the information you requested about our products. Scientific WorkPlace and Scientific
Word make writing and doing mathematics easier than you ever imagined possible. T he Gold Standard for mathematical
publishing since 1992, these scientific word processors increase your productivity because they are easy to learn and use. You
can compose and edit your documents directly on the screen, without being forced to think in a programming language. A
simple click of a button allows you to typeset your document in LaTeX. This lets you concentrate on writing a correct paper,
while our software ensures it is a beautiful one. Scientific WorkPlace and Scientific Word enable both professional and support
staff to produce stunning results quickly and easily, without having to know TeX or LaTeX.
Doing Mathematics with Scientific WorkPlace and Scientific Notebook describes how to use the built-in computer algebra
system to do a wide range of mathematics without dealing directly with the syntax of the computer algebra system. This book
is organized around the undergraduate mathematics curriculum for ease of use by beginners through professionals. Chapters
1–5 give you basic procedures for using the system, illustrated with material from the standard precalculus courses. Chapter
6 provides examples and instructions for creating graphs of curves and surfaces. Chapters 7–12 provide procedures for using
the system for problems in analytic geometry and calculus, linear algebra, vector analysis, differential equations, statistics, and
applied modern algebra. The manual includes exercises and sample solutions to help you practice the ideas presented and to
suggest possibilities to explore beyond those covered in the manual.
Sincerely,
Barry
cc: Bill, Bob

encl: More information
Letter #2

Packages:
selet2 None
The shell includes front matter fields in the body of the document for entering the address of the sender and the
recipient, the closing and name of the sender, the date, the subject, and copy and enclosure information.
Barry MacKichan
July 15, 2004
Jim Smith
1234 Any Street
Valley, CA 94552
Sincerely,
Barry
cc: Bill, Bob

Letter #3 317
Letter #3

Packages:
selet3 None
logo goes here

July 15, 2004
Jim Smith
1234 Any Street
Fort Worth, Texas 76130
Sincerely,
Barry
cc: Bill, Bob

Letter #4

Packages:
selet4 None
logo goes here

July 15, 2004
Jim Smith
1234 Any Street
Knoxville, TN 37923
Replace this with your text. Here is the information you requested about our products. Scientific WorkPlace and Scientific Word
make writing and doing mathematics easier than you ever imagined possible. The Gold Standard for mathematical publishing
since 1992, these scientific word processors increase your productivity because they are easy to learn and use. You can compose
and edit your documents directly on the screen, without being forced to think in a programming language. A simple click of a
button allows you to typeset your document in LaTeX. This lets you concentrate on writing a correct paper, while our software
ensures it is a beautiful one. Scientific WorkPlace and Scientific Word enable both professional and support staff to produce
Sincerely,
Barry
cc: Bill, Bob

Memo #1 319
Memo #1

Packages:
semem1 None
The shell includes front matter fields in the body of the document for entering a logo and standard memo fields:
the name of the sender and the recipient, the date, the subject, and copy and enclosure information.
Put your logo here
Memorandum

To: John, George
Date: September 1
Subject: Information
Replace this with your text. Here is the information you requested about our products. Scientific WorkPlace and
Scientific Word make writing and doing mathematics easier than you ever imagined possible. The Gold Standard
for mathematical publishing since 1992, these scientific word processors increase your productivity because they are
easy to learn and use. You can compose and edit your documents directly on the screen, without being forced to
think in a programming language. A simple click of a button allows you to typeset your document in LaTeX. This
lets you concentrate on writing a correct paper, while our software ensures it is a beautiful one. Scientific WorkPlace
and Scientific Word enable both professional and support staff to produce stunning results quickly and easily, without
having to know TeX or LaTeX.
cc: Larry, Ron
Play

Packages:
seplay None
Unlike most Style Editor shells, the Play shell includes front matter fields for the title, author, and date of the
play. Tags in the body of the document designate stage directions, entrances, and lines in verse. Additional tags
indicate act and scene numbers and character dialog box.
And when I send for you, come hither mask’d.

Exeunt Ladies
Much Ado About Nothing The prince and Claudio promised by this hour
To visit me. You know your office, brother:
You must be father to your brother’s daughter
William Shakespeare And give her to young Claudio.
Antonio
Which I will do with confirm’d countenance.
Act 5 Benedick
Friar, I must entreat your pains, I think.
Scene 4 Friar Francis
A room in Leonato’s house. Enter Leonato, To do what, signior?
Antonio,
Benedick, Benedick
Beatrice, To bind me, or undo me; one of them.
Margaret, Signior Leonato, truth it is, good signior,
Ursula, Friar Your niece regards me with an eye of favour.
Francis, and
Hero Leonato
That eye my daughter lent her: ’tis most true.
Friar Francis
Did I not tell you she was innocent? Benedick
And I do with an eye of love require her.
Leonato
So are the prince and Claudio, who accused her Leonato
Upon the error that you heard debated: The sight whereof I think you had from me,
But Margaret was in some fault for this, From Claudio and the prince: but what’s your will?
Although against her will, as it appears
In the true course of all the question. Benedick
Antonio Your answer,sir, is enigmatical:

But, for my will, my will is your good will
Well, I am glad that all things sort so well. May stand with ours, this day to be conjoin’d
In the state of honourable marriage:
In which, good friar, I shall desire your help.
Benedick
Leonato
And so am I, being else by faith enforced
To call young Claudio to a reckoning for it. My heart is with your liking.
Leonato Friar Francis

Well, daughter, and you gentle-women all, And my help.
Withdraw into a chamber by yourselves, Here comes the prince and Claudio. Enter Don
1 2
Play 321
Pedro and
Claudio, and
two or three
others
Don Pedro
Good morrow to this fair assembly
Leonato
Good morrow, prince; good morrow, Claudio:
We here attend you. And you yet determined
To-day to marry with my brother’s daughter?
Claudio
I’ll hold my mind, were she an Ethiope.
Leonato
Call her forth, brother; here’s the friar ready. Exit Antonio
Don Pedro
Good morrow, Benedick. Why, what’s the matter,
That you have such a February face,
So full of frost, of storm and cloudiness?
Claudio
I think he thinks upon the savage bull.
Tush, fear not, man; we’ll tip thy horns with gold
And all Europa shall rejoice at thee,
As once Europe did at lusty Jove,
When he would play the noble beast in love.
Benedick
Bull Jove, sir, had an amiable low;
And some such strange bull leap’d your father’s cow,
And got a calf in that same noble feat
Much like to you, for you have just his bleat.
Claudio
For this I owe you: here comes other reckonings. Re-enter
Antonio, with
the Ladies
masked
Which is the lady I must seize upon?
3
Press Release

Packages:
sepress None
The shell includes front matter fields in the body of the document for entering the name and address of the
sender, the title of the press release, and copy and enclosure information.
PRESS RELEASE

FOR IMMEDIAT E RELEASE
Title of the Press Release

Scientific WorkPlace makes writing and doing mathematics easier than you ever imagined possible. The Gold
Standard for mathematical publishing since 1992, this scientific word processor increases your productivity because
it is easy to learn and use. You can compose and edit your documents directly on the screen, without being forced to
think in a programming language. A simple click of a button allows you to typeset your document in LaTeX. This
lets you concentrate on writing a correct paper, while our software ensures it is a beautiful one. Scientific WorkPlace
enables both professional and support staff to produce stunning results quickly and easily, without having to know
TeX or LaTeX.
Getting Started with Scientific WorkPlace, Scientific Word, and Scientific Notebook describes how to install and
activate these three products, and how to get started creating your own documents. The chapters cover installation;
creating, revising, saving, and printing a simple document. Additional chapters cover how to enter text and
mathematics, format using tags, preview and print, using hyperlinks, and customize the program. Additionally, the
manual describes how to compute and plot with the integrated computer algebra system in Scientific WorkPlace and
Scientific Notebook. Final chapters address how to typeset your documents and how to take advantage of automatic
numbering, indexing, and cross-referencing in Scientific WorkPlace and Scientific Word, and how to get help when
you need it.
cc: Carbon Copy

encl: Enclosures
QCA Workbook 323
QCA Workbook

Packages:
qcawork None
The shell produces documents suitable for the Qualitative Choice Analysis Workshop at the University of Cali-
fornia. The front matter includes fields for the department, institution, and course.
Qualitative Choice Analysis Workshop 2
1 Sample Mathematics
and Text
1.1 In-line and Displayed
Mathematics
QCA Workbook
P
Style The expression ∞ i=1 ai is in-line mathemat-
ics, while the numbered equation
A. U. Thor X
∞
ai (1)
i=1
is displayed and automatically numbered as

equation 1.
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed

bounded convex subset of H , T a non-
expansive self map of C . Suppose that
as n →P ∞, an;k → 0 for +each k, and
°n = ∞ k=0 (an;k+1 − an;k ) → 0: Then
Econometrics Laboratory
Qualitative Choice Analysis Workshop 3 Qualitative Choice Analysis Workshop 4

P∞
for each x in C , An x = k
k=0 an;k T x
Italics, Roman, Sans Serif, Slanted, Small
converges weakly to T . Caps, and Typewriter.
2 Section Headings You can apply the special, mathemat-

ics only, tags BLACKBOARD BOLD,
This is some text. CALLIGRAPHIC , and fraktur. Note
that blackboard bold and calligraphic are cor-
rect only when applied to uppercase letters A
2.1 Subsection Heading through Z.
This is some text. You can apply the size tags tiny, scriptsize, footnotesize,
, normalsize, large, Large, LARGE, huge and
small
2.1.1 Subsubsection Heading Huge.
This is some text.

4 Lists
3 Tags Bullet, numbered and description list en-
vironments are available. Lists, which can
You can apply the logical markup tag
Emphasized. (1) Numbered list item 1
(a) Second level list item.
You can apply the visual markup tags Bold, (i) Third level list item.
Econometrics Laboratory Econometrics Laboratory

(A) Fourth level list item.
• Bullet item 1
· Fourth level bullet item.
References
York, 1963.
rocket chamber pressures”, Int. J. Heat Mass
Transfer, 1998a, 41, 3537-3550
number under supercritical conditions”, Int.
Report #1 325
Report #1

Packages:
serep1 None
The shell produces a report document with the title page separate from the abstract. New chapters begin on
the next consecutive page. Running headers and page numbers are centered on the top and bottom of the page,
respectively.
Abstract
We study the effects of warm water on the local penguin population. The major
finding is that it is extremely difficult to induce penguins to drink warm water. The
success factor is approximately −e−i¼ − 1. Replace this text with your own abstract.
Title of the Report
A. U. Thor
Contents Chapter 1
R¯
1.2 Mathematics in Section Heads ® ln tdt 4 1.1 In-line and Displayed Mathematics
1.3 Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environments 4 P∞
∞
X
ai (1)
2.1 Section Headings 6 i =1
2.1.1 Subsection 6 is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 1.
2.2 Tags 6
P∞ P∞
° n = k =0 (a n;k +1 − a n;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C , A n x = k =0 an;k T k x
+
3 List Environments 7
References 8 Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays.1 The spacing above and
A The F irst Appendix 9 in the following examples.
A short line above:
x 2 + y 2 = z2
R¯
may cause difficulties in typesetting styles with running headers or table of contents
entries.Here is a figure:

Environments
well-known fact on differentiation of asymptotic expansions of analytic functions.
3 4
Section 1.3 Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environments

µ ¶ Chapter 2
a1 1
f (z ) = a 0 +
z
+o
z
,
Features of this Shell
a 1 = − lim z2 f 0 (z ) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" . (2)
Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ" → Γ " = { z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ "} and

f (1=z ) = a 0 + a 1 z + o (z) . (3) Use the Section tag for major sections, and the Subsection tag for subsections.
Fix z ∈ Γ" , and let C r (z ) = { ¸ ∈ C− : |¸ − z | = r } be a circle with radius
r = |z |sin "= 2 . It follows from (3) that 2.1.1 Subsection
Z X 1 Z m
1 f (¸ ) d¸ 1 ( ¸ − z0 ) d¸ This is some harmless text under a subsection.
= am + R (z ), (4)
2¼i C H(z ) (¸ − z) 2 m= 0
2¼i C H(z ) (¸ − z) 2
2.1.1.1 Subsubsection
|R (z )| ≤ r−1 max o (|z |) = r−1 max |¸| · O (|z | + r ) This is some harmless text under a subsubsection.
¸ ∈CH (z) ¸ ∈C H(z)
|z | + r 1 + sin " Subsubsubsection This is some harmless text under a subsubsubsection.

= · O (|z| + r ) = · O (|z |) . (Subsubsubsubsection head:)Subsubsubsubsection
r sin "
This is some harmless text under a subsubsubsubsection.
Therefore R (z ) → 0 as z → ∞ , z ∈ Γ "=2 , and hence by the Cauchy theorem (4) implies
d
dz
f (1=z ) = a 1 + R (z ) → a 1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"= 2 , 2.2 Tags
that implies (2) by substituting 1 =z back for z.
You can apply the special, mathematics only, tags BLACKBOARD BOLD ,
CALLIGRAPHIC , and fraktur. Note that blackboard bold and calligraphic are correct
You can apply the size tags tiny, scriptsize, footnotesize, small, normalsize, large, Large,

“scratchpad” computations. Following is a group of paragraphs marked as Body Quote.
This environment is appropriate for a short quotation or a sequence of short quotations.
John F Kennedy
Bush
5 6
Report #1 327
Chapter 3 References
List Environments The back matter often includes one or more of an index, an afterword, acknowledgements,
a bibliography, a colophon, or any other similar item. In the back matter, chapters do not
produce a chapter number, but they are entered in the table of contents. If you are not
You can create numbered, bulleted, and description lists using the tag popup at the bottom using anything in the back matter, you can delete the back matter TeX field and everything
left of the screen. that follows it.
1. List item 1 [1] N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2, John Wiley and Sons, New York,
2. List item 2 1963.
a. A list item under a list item. [2] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behavior in fluid hydrogen at
The typeset style for this level is different than the screen style. The screen shows rocket chamber pressures”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, 1998a, 41, 3537-3550
a lower case alphabetic character followed by a period while the typeset style uses [3] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical conditions”, Int. J.
a lower case alphabetic character surrounded by parentheses. Heat Mass Transfer, in print
b. Just another list item under a list item. [4] Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular Theory of Gases and Liquids,
i. Third level list item under a list item. John Wiley and Sons, Inc., 1964
(a). Fourth and final level of list items allowed. [5] Prausnitz, J., L ichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E., Molecular thermodynamics for
• Bullet item 1 [6] Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Properties of Gases and Liquids, 4th
• Bullet item 2
Description List Each description list item has a term followed by the description of
that term. Double click the term box to enter the term, or to change it.
7
8
Appendix A
The First Appendix
The appendix fragment is used only once. Subsequent appendices can be created using
9
Resume #1

Packages:
seres1 None
This simple shell includes front matter fields in the body of the document for entering the name, address, tele-
phone, and email address of the resume writer.
A. B. Carson
1234 Any Street, Any Town, NM 88001 (505)-555-1234 nobody@nmsu.edu
Education • Bachelor of Science, Mathematics, University of Chicago, 1994

• Master of Science, Mathematics, Washington University 1996
• Doctor of Philosophy, Mathematics, Rice University, 2000
Work Experience
• Systems programmer, MacKichan Software, Inc. 1997–2000
• Firefighter, Cape Girardoux Municipal Fire Department, Cape Girardoux, Missouri, 1996–1997
• TEXnician, TCI Software Research, 1994–1996
• Aide, Student Computer Lab, University of Chicago, 1990–1994
Interests Crew, Renaissance choir, Amateur theater, Poetry, Rock climbing, Pyromania.
References Barry MacKichan, President, MacKichan Software, Inc., (123) 456-7890

Carol Walker, Professor of Mathematics, New Mexico State University, (505)
123-4567
Steve Swanson, Team Leader, MacKichan Software, Inc., (505) 789-0123
Slides - Jim’s Landscape 329
Slides - Jim’s Landscape

Packages:
SESlideJimsLandscape None
The pages produced by this shell use wide margins and an oversized font in a landscape layout for A4 paper.
New sections cause page breaks. Pages are numbered.
July 12, 2004 1
1 MacKichan Software
MacKichan mathematics software products are based on an easy-to-use but powerful mathematical
word processor. All provide reading, browsing, and printing of .tex files.

MacKichan software products enhance the production of beautiful typeset mathematics.
1. Typesetting
2. Computing
3. Internet access
Title of This Presentation
July 12, 2004 2
2 Mathematics in This Shell

P∞
X
∞
ai (1)
i=1

Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset of H, T a nonexpansive self map of
P
C. Suppose that as n → ∞, an;k → 0 for each k, and ° n = ∞ +
k=0 (an;k+1 − an;k ) → 0. Then for each x
P kx converges weakly to a fixed point of T .
in C, An x = ∞ k=0 a n;k T
Title of This Presentation

Slides A

Packages:
seslidea None
The pages produced by this shell use wide margins and an oversized font in a portrait layout. New sections cause
page breaks. Pages are numbered.
Title of This Presentation MacKichan mathematics software products
are based on an easy-to-use but powerful
A. U. Thor mathematical word processor. All provide
reading, browsing, and printing of .tex files.
July 15, 2004
MacKichan software products enhance the
production of beautiful typeset mathematics.
Choose the product features that meet your
needs:
1. Create mathematical documents
2. Typeset your documents
3. Compute symbolically and numerically
4. Publish on the web
5. Develop a mathematical website
6. Write exams and course materials
1 2
Slides A 331
2 Mathematics in This Shell 3 Tags

∞
You can apply these tags:
X 1
=2 • Emphasized
n=1
n2
• Bold
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a
• Italics
closed bounded convex subset of H , T a
nonexpansive self map of C . Suppose that • Roman
as n →P∞∞, an;k → 0 for+each k , and • Sans Serif
°n = k=0 (an;k+1 − Pan;k ) → k0: Then for • Typewriter
each x in C , An x = ∞ k=0 an;k T x converges You can apply the special, mathematics
weakly to a fixed point of T . only, tags
• BLACKBOARD BOLD
• CALLIGRAPHIC
• fraktur.
Note that blackboard bold and calligraphic
are correct only when applied to uppercase
letters A through Z.
3 4
Slides B

Packages:
seslideb None
The pages produced by this shell use wide margins and a larger font that the Slides A shell. New sections cause
page breaks. Pages are numbered.
Title of Presentation MacKichan mathematics software
products are based on an easy-to-use
A. U. Thor but powerful mathematical word
July 15, 2004 processor.
MacKichan software products en-
hance the production of beautiful
typeset mathematics.
1.1.1 Products Suited to Your
Needs
3. Compute symbolically and numeri-
cally
1 2
Slides B 333
2 Mathematics in This 3 Tags

Shell You can apply these tags:
• Emphasized
X∞
1 • Bold
=2 • Italics
n=1
n2
Let H be a Hilbert space, C • Roman

be a closed bounded convex subset • Sans Serif
of H, T a nonexpansive self map • Typewriter
of C. Suppose that as n → ∞, You can apply the special, math-
an;k → 0 for each k, and ° n =
P ematics only, tags
∞ +
k=0 (an;k+1 − an;k ) P→ 0: Then for • BLACKBOARD BOLD
k
each x in C, Anx = ∞ k=0 an;k T x • CALLIGRAPHIC
converges weakly to a fixed point of • fraktur.
T. Note that blackboard bold and
calligraphic are correct only when
applied to uppercase letters A
through Z.
3 4
Slides C

Packages:
seslidec None
The pages produced by this shell use wide margins and a large font in a portrait layout. New sections cause page
breaks. Pages are numbered.
1 MacKichan Soft-
Title of Presentation ware
A. U. Thor MacKichan mathematics soft-
ware products are based on
July 15, 2004
an easy-to-use but powerful
mathematical word processor.
All provide reading, browsing,
and printing of .tex files.
1.1 Enhanced Mathe-
matics
MacKichan software products
enhance the production of
beautiful typeset mathematics.
2
Slides C 335
1.1.1 Products Suited to 2 Mathematics in

Your Needs This Shell
Choose the product features
∞
that meet your needs: X 1
=2
1. Create mathematical docu- n2
n=1
ments Let H be a Hilbert space,
2. Typeset your documents C be a closed bounded convex
subset of H , T a nonexpansive
3. Compute symbolically and
self map of C . Suppose that as
numerically
n → ∞, an;k → 0 for each k , and
4. Publish on the web P
°n = ∞
¡ ¢+
k=0 an;k+1 − an;k →
5. Develop a mathematical web- 0: Then for each x in C ,
site P k
Anx = ∞ k=0 an;k T x converges
6. Write exams and course mate- weakly to a fixed point of T .
rials
3 4
3 Tags
• Emphasized
• Bold
• Italics
• Roman
• Sans Serif
• Typewriter
You can apply the special,
mathematics only, tags
• BLACKBOARD BOLD
• CALLIGRAPHIC
• fraktur.
5
Slides D

Packages:
hslid1 None
The pages produced by this shell use somewhat narrow margins and a sans serif font in a portrait layout. New
sections cause page breaks.
Title of this Presentation 1 MacKichan Software
A. U. Thor MacKichan mathematics software products are

July 15, 2004 based on an easy-to-use but powerful mathematical
word processor. All provide reading, browsing, and
printing of .tex files.
MacKichan software products enhance the produc-
tion of beautiful typeset mathematics.
3. Compute symbolically and numerically
4. Publish on the web
6. Write exams and course materials
Slides D 337
∞
X 1 • Emphasized
=2
n=1
n2 • Bold
convex subset of H , T a nonexpansive self map of • Italics
C . Suppose
P that as n → ∞, an;k → 0 for each k , and • Roman
°n = ∞ k=0P(an;k+1 − an;k )+ → 0: Then for each x in • Sans Serif
C , An x = k=0 an;k T k x converges weakly to a fixed
∞
point of T . • Typewriter
• BLACKBOARD BOLD
• CALLIGRAPHIC
• fraktur.
Note that blackboard bold and calligraphic are
correct only when applied to uppercase letters A
through Z.
Slides QCA

Packages:
qcaslide None
The shell produces documents suitable for slides used in the Qualitative Choice Analysis Workshop at the Uni-
versity of California. The front matter includes fields for the department, institution, and course.
MacKichan mathematics software products are based on an easy-
to-use but powerful mathematical word processor. All provide
reading, browsing, and printing of .tex files.
MacKichan software products enhance the production of beautiful
Title of this Presentation typeset mathematics.
A. U. Thor
Junly 15, 2004
(1) Create mathematical documents
(2) Typeset your documents
(3) Compute symbolically and numerically
(4) Publish on the web
(5) Develop a mathematical website
(6) Write exams and course materials
Slides QCA 339
Qualitative Choice Analysis Workshop 3 Qualitative Choice Analysis Workshop 4

X∞
1 • Emphasized
=2
n=1
n2 • Bold
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded • Italics
convex subset of H , T a nonexpansive self map of C .
• Roman
Pthat as n → ∞, +an;k → 0 for each k, and
Suppose
• Sans Serif
° n = P∞k=0 (an;k+1 − an;k ) → 0: Then for each x in C ,
k
An x = ∞ k=0 an;k T x converges weakly to a fixed point of T . • Typewriter
• BLACKBOARD BOLD
• CALLIGRAPHIC
• fraktur.
Note that blackboard bold and calligraphic are correct only
Econometrics Laboratory Econometrics Laboratory

Thesis - Harvard Thesis

Packages:
float None
makeidx None
seharv None
The front matter is blank, but the body of the document contains title page fields to be completed with the title,
name of author, department, degree name, field, university, and thesis date. Additional fields include the abstract,
acknowledgments, preface, and contents.
The shell adds blank pages where necessary to ensure that new chapters begin on an odd-numbered page. Blank
pages carry headers with page numbers, but are not shown here.
Title of This Thesis:

Subtitle of This Thesis
A thesis presented
by
James W. Smith
c 2001 by James W. Smith

°
to
All rights reserved.
The Department of Economics
in partial fulfillment of the requirements
for the degree of
Doctor of Philosophy
in the subject of
Economics
Harvard University
Cambridge, Massachusetts
June 2001
ii
Abstract Acknowledgments
Put the abstract here. The abstract must have a (1) statement of the problem, The acknowledgment is the place to thank the faculty, staff, family, and friends
(2) an exposition of methods and procedures, and (3) a summary of the findings. who have assisted you in preparing your thesis or dissertation. You may also ac-
The length may not exceed 350 words. knowledge any support or special research materials given you.
Copyright permissions may also be acknowledged here by stating that: (1)
permission has been granted for reproduction of tables, tests, and other copyright
protected items and (2) gives the source of the permission.
Use a Preface rather than Acknowledgments when the research is discussed,
for example,“the motivation for the study, the background of the project, the scope
of the research, and the purpose of the paper” (Turabian, 1996, p. 7-8).
(Note: The Acknowledgments section is optional.)
iii iv
Contents Preface
This is the preface and it is created using a TeX field in a paragraph by itself. When
the document is loaded, this appears in the edit window like a normal chapter, but it is
Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v
actually an unnumbered chapter. The TeX field at the beginning of this paragraph sets the
Preface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
correct page heading for the Preface portion of the document. The preface does not appear
1 Sample Mathematics and Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 in the table of contents..
1.1 In-line and Displayed Mathematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

R¯
1.2 Mathematics in Section Heads ® ln tdt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.3 Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.A Appendix to Chapter 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
2 Features of this Shell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

2.1 Section Headings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.1.1 Subsection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.2 Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.3 List Environments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2.A Appendix to Chapter 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
A The First Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
v 1
Chapter 1
Sample Mathematics and Text as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for mathematical
1.1 In-line and Displayed Mathematics R¯

P∞
∞
X
ai (1.1) cause difficulties in typesetting styles with running headers or table of contents entries.
i=1
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset of H, T a non- 1.3 Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like
Environments
expansive self map of C. Suppose that as n → ∞, an;k → 0 for each k, and ° n =
P∞ P∞
− an;k )
+
→ 0. Then for each x in C , Anx = k A number of theorem-like environments is available. The following lemma is a well-known
k=0 (an;k+1 k=0 an;k T x converges
weakly to a fixed point of T . fact on differentiation of asymptotic expansions of analytic functions.
µ ¶
in the following examples. a1 1
f (z) = a0 + +o , (1.2)
z z
A short line above:
x2 + y2 = z2
and a short line below. a1 = − lim z 2 f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" . (1.3)
1
Proof Change z for 1=z. Then Γ" → Γ" = {z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ" } and
f (1=z) = a 0 + a1 z + o (z) . (1.4)
1.A Appendix to Chapter 1 4
Chapter 2
Fix z ∈ Γ", and let Cr (z) = {¸ ∈ C− : |¸ − z | = r } be a circle with radius r = |z | sin "=2.
It follows from (1.4) that
Z X 1 Z m
1 f (¸)d¸ 1 (¸ − z0 ) d¸
2 = am + R(z), (1.5)
2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z) m=0
2¼i CH (z ) (¸ − z)
2
|R(z)| ≤ r−1 max o (|z |) = r−1 max |¸| · O (| z | + r)
¸∈CH (z ) ¸ ∈CH (z )
|z | + r 1 + sin " 2.1.1 Subsection
= · O (|z | + r) = · O (|z |) .
r sin "
Subsubsection
Corollary 1 Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 , and hence by the Cauchy
theorem (1.5) implies
d
f (1=z) = a1 + R(z) → a1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2,
dz 2.2 Tags
1.A Appendix to Chapter 1
SMALL C APS, and Typewriter.
This is some additional information for the chapter. You can apply the special, mathematics only, tags fraktur; BLACKBOARD BOLD,
and CALLIG RAP HIC . Note that blackboard bold and calligraphic are correct only
You can apply the size tags tiny, scriptsize, footnotesiz e, small , normalsize, large, Large, LARGE,
huge and Huge.
5
2.3 List Environments 6 2.A Appendix to Chapter 2 7
This is a Body Math paragraph. Each time you press the Enter key, Scienti? c Work-
• Bullet item 1
Place switches to mathematics mode. This is convenient for carrying out “scratchpad”
• Bullet item 2
computations. Following is a group of paragraphs marked as Body Quote. This environ-
The buck stops here. Harry Truman ∗ Third level bullet item.
John F Kennedy · Fourth (and final) level bullet item.
Description List Each description list item has a term followed by the description of
that term. Double click the term box to enter the term, or to change it.
You can create numbered, bulleted, and description lists using the tag popup at the bottom
left of the screen.
1. List item 1 2.A Appendix to Chapter 2
2. List item 2 This is some additional information for the chapter.
The typeset style for this level is different than the screen style. The screen
shows a lower case alphabetic character followed by a period while the typeset
style uses a lower case alphabetic character surrounded by parentheses.
(A) Fourth and final level of list items allowed.
Appendix A References
The First Appendix
Beeton, Barbara, Typesetting articles for the DECUS Proceedings with TEX, Proceedings
of the Digital Equipment Computer Users Society, USA Spring 1985, 349–356.
Knuth, Donald E., The Art of Computer Programming, Addison-Wesley, Vol. 2, second
using the Section tag. edition, 1981.
Knuth, Donald E., The TEXbook, Addison-Wesley and American Mathematical Society,
1984.
Lamport, Leslie, LATEX, A document preparation system, Addison-Wesley, 1985.
Southall, Richard, First principles of typographic design for document production, TUG-
boat Vol. 5 (1984), No. 2, 79–90; Corrigenda, Vol. 6 (1985), No. 1, p. 6.
TUGboat, the Newsletter of the TEX Users Group, TEX Users Group, c/o American
Mathematical Society, P. O. Box 9506, Providence, RI, 02940.
8 9
Thesis - Harvard Thesis Modified by Philippe Laval

Packages:
laval None
The shell uses a modification of the Style Editor Harvard Thesis typesetting specifications. The front matter
is blank, but the body of the document contains title page fields to be completed with the title, name of author,
department, degree name, field, university, and thesis date. Additional fields include the abstract, acknowledgments,
preface, and contents.
Title of Your Thesis:

Subtitle of Your Thesis
A thesis presented
by
James W. Smith
to
c 2001 by James W. Smith
°
The Department of Mathematics All rights reserved.
for the degree of
in the subject of
Mathematics
Emory University
Atlanta, Georgia
June 2001
Abstract Acknowledgments
Put the abstract here. The abstract must have a (1) statement of the problem, The acknowledgment is the place to thank the faculty, staff, family, and friends
(2) an exposition of methods and procedures, and (3) a summary of the findings. The who have assisted you in preparing your thesis or dissertation. You may also acknowl-
length may not exceed 350 words. edge any support or special research materials given you.
Copyright permissions may also be acknowledged here by stating that: (1) per-
mission has been granted for reproduction of tables, tests, and other copyright pro-
tected items and (2) gives the source of the permission.
Use a Preface rather than Acknowledgments when the research is discussed, for
example, “the motivation for the study, the background of the project, the scope of the
research, and the purpose of the paper” (Turabian, 1996, p. 7-8).
Contents Preface
This is the preface and it is created using a TeX field in a paragraph by itself.
When the document is loaded, this appears in the edit window like a normal chap-
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
ter, but it is actually an unnumbered chapter. The TeX field at the beginning of this
1 Sample Mathematics and Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
paragraph sets the correct page heading for the Preface portion of the document. The
1.1 In-line and Displayed Mathematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
preface does not appear in the table of contents.
R¯
1.2 Mathematics in Section Heads ® ln tdt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.3 Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.A Appendix to Chapter 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
2 Features of this Shell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

2.1 Section Headings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.1.1 Subsection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.2 Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.3 List Environments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2.A Appendix to Chapter 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
A Name of First Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

2 3
Chapter 1 A long line above may depend on your margins
Sample Mathematics and Text sin2 µ + cos2 µ = 1
1.1 In-line and Displayed Mathematics ematical displays, regardless of the margins.
P∞
The expression i=1 ai is in-line mathematics, while the numbered equation R¯
ln J@J
X
∞
ai (1.1)
i=1 Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note that mathematics in section heads
is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 1.1. may cause difficulties in typesetting styles with running headers or table of contents
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset of H, T a entries.

P∞ P∞ kx 1.3 Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like
°n = k=0 (a n;k+1 − a n;k)+ → 0. Then for each x in C, An x = k=0 an;k T
Environments
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays.1 The spacing A number of theorem-like environments is available. The following lemma is a well-
above and below a display depends on whether the lines above or below are short known fact on differentiation of asymptotic expansions of analytic functions.

Lemma 1.1 Let f (z) be an analytic function in C+ . If f (z) admits the repre-
A short line above:
sentation
x2 + y2 = z 2 µ ¶
a1 1
f (z) = a 0 + +o , (1.2)
z z
1
LATEX automatically selects the spacing depending on the surrounding line lengths. a1 = − lim z 2f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ ". (1.3)
4 5
Chapter 2
Proof Change z for 1=z. Then Γ" → Γ" = {z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ" } and
f (1=z) = a0 + a1z + o (z) . (1.4)
Fix z ∈ Γ" , and let Cr (z) = {¸ ∈ C− : |¸ − z | = r } be a circle with radius 2.1 Section Headings
Z X1 Z m
1 f (¸) d¸ 1 (¸ − z0) d¸
= am + R(z), (1.5)
2¼i CH (z ) (¸ − z)2 2¼i CH (z ) (¸ − z) 2
m=0
2.1.1 Subsection
|R(z)| ≤ r −1 max o ( |z |) = r−1 max |¸| · O (|z | + r)
¸ ∈CH (z) ¸∈CH ( z)
|z | + r 1 + sin " Subsubsection

= · O ( |z | + r) = · O (|z|) .
r sin "
Corollary 1.1 Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2, and hence by the 2.2 Tags
Cauchy theorem (1.5) implies
d
f (1=z) = a1 + R(z) → a1, as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 , You can apply the visual markup tags Bold, Italics, Roman, Sans Serif, Slanted,
dz
that implies (1.3) by substituting 1=z back for z. S MALL C APS, and Typewriter.
You can apply the special, mathematics only, tags fraktur; BLACKBOARD
1.A Appendix to Chapter 1 BOLD, and CALLIG RAP HIC . Note that blackboard bold and calligraphic are

This is some additional information for the chapter.
6 7
You can apply the size tags tiny , scriptsize , footnotesize , small, normalsize , large, Large , the typeset style uses a lower case alphabetic character surrounded by
LARGE, huge and Huge. parentheses.
This is a Body Math paragraph. Each time you press the Enter key, Scien- (b) Just another list item under a list item.
ti? c WorkPlace switches to mathematics mode. This is convenient for carrying out i. Third level list item under a list item.
“scratchpad” computations. Following is a group of paragraphs marked as Body (A) Fourth and final level of list items allowed.
Quote. This environment is appropriate for a short quotation or a sequence of short
quotations. • Bullet item 1

Ask not what your country can do for you; ask what you can do for your coun- • Bullet item 2
try. John F Kennedy
I am not a crook. Richard Nixon ∗ Second level bullet item.
Bush
I Third level bullet item.

Description List Each description list item has a term followed by the descrip-
You can create numbered, bulleted, and description lists using the tag popup at the
tion of that term. Double click the term box to enter the term, or to change it.
bottom left of the screen.

1. List item 1
2. List item 2

2.A Appendix to Chapter 2
The typeset style for this level is different than the screen style. The This is some additional information for the chapter.
screen shows a lower case alphabetic character followed by a period while
8 9
References Appendix A
Name of First Appendix
[1] Beeton, Barbara, Typesetting articles for the DECUS Proceedings with TEX,
Proceedings of the Digital Equipment Computer Users Society, USA
Spring 1985, 349–356. Precede the first appendix with the indent latex fragment included here. Use
[2] Knuth, Donald E., The Art of Computer Programming, Addison-Wesley, regular sections and subsections (or subsectionNoContents) in appendices.
Vol. 2, second edition, 1981.
[3] Knuth, Donald E., The TEXbook, Addison-Wesley and American Mathe-
matical Society, 1984.
[4] Lamport, Leslie, LATEX, A document preparation system, Addison-Wesley,

1985.
[5] Southall, Richard, First principles of typographic design for document pro-
duction, TUGboat Vol. 5 (1984), No. 2, 79–90; Corrigenda, Vol. 6 (1985),
No. 1, p. 6.
[6] TUGboat, the Newsletter of the TEX Users Group, TEX Users Group, c/o
American Mathematical Society, P. O. Box 9506, Providence, RI, 02940.
Thesis - LSU Thesis

Packages:
authordate1-4 None
lsuthesis None
name of author, department, degree name, field, university, and thesis date.
TITLE OF YOUR THESIS

°c Copyright 2004
Frank Herbert Muldoon
All rights reserved
A Dissertation
submitted to the Graduate Faculty of the

Louisiana State University and
Agricultural and Mechanical College
in partial fulfillment of the
requirements for the degree of
in
The Department of Mechanical Engineering
by
Frank Herbert Muldoon
B.S., Mechanical Engineering, Louisiana State University, 1996
May, 2004
ii
Acknowledgements Table of Contents
The acknowledgment is the place to thank the faculty, staff, family, and friends who have Acknowledgements .....................................................................................................................................................................................iii
assisted you in preparing your thesis or dissertation. You may also acknowledge any support or Abstract ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................v
special research materials given you. Chapter 1 Sample Mathematics and Text............................................................................................................................1
1.1 In-line and Displayed Mathematics ..............................................................................................................................1
R¯
MacKichan Software, Inc. would like to thank Frank Muldoon for providing the Louisiana 1.2 Mathematics in Section Heads ® ln tdt...................................................................................................................1
1.3 Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environments .................................................................2
State University typesetting specification he created using the Style Editor.
Chapter 2 Features of this Shell..................................................................................................................................................3
2.1 Section Headings ........................................................................................................................................................................3
2.1.1 Subsection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2.2 Tags .......................................................................................................................................................................................................3
2.3 List Environments ......................................................................................................................................................................4
Appendix: A The First Appendix ..............................................................................................................................................5
References............................................................................................................................................................................................................6
Vita.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................7
iii iv
Abstract Chapter 1 Sample Mathematics and Text
This shell document was created from a doctoral dissertation that was successfully submitted 1.1 In-line and Displayed Mathematics
P∞
to the Department of Mechanical Engineering at Louisiana State University. Replace this text The expression i=1 ai is in-line mathematics, while the numbered equation
∞
X
with the text for your abstract. ai (1.1)
i=1

P∞
map of C. Suppose that as n → ∞, an;k → 0 for each k, and ° n = k=0 (an;k+1 − a n;k)+ → 0.
P∞ k
Then for each x in C, Anx = k=0 an;k T x converges weakly to a fixed point of T (?).
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays.1 The spacing above and below a
examples.
A short line above:
x2 + y 2 = z 2

R¯
1
v 1
1.3 Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environments Chapter 2 Features of this Shell

Lemma Let f (z) be an analytic function in C+ . If f (z) admits the representation
µ ¶ Use the Section tag for major sections, and the Subsection tag for subsections.
a1 1
f (z) = a0 + +o , (1.2) 2.1.1 Subsection
z z
for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ" = {z ∈ C + : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then This is some harmless text under a subsection.
a1 = − lim z 2f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ ". (1.3)
Proof Change z for 1=z. Then Γ" → Γ " = {z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ"} and
2.2 Tags
f (1=z) = a0 + a1z + o (z) . (1.4)
Fix z ∈ Γ", and let Cr (z) = {¸ ∈ C − : |¸ − z | = r } be a circle with radius r = |z | sin "=2. It
You can apply the visual markup tags Bold, Italics, Roman, Sans Serif, Slanted, S MALL
Z Z C APS, and Typewriter.
(¸ − z0)m d¸
1
X
1 f (¸) d¸ 1
= am + R(z), (1.5)
2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z)2 m=0 2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z)2 You can apply the special, mathematics only, tags fraktur; BLACKBOARD BOLD, and
CALLIGRAPHIC . Note that blackboard bold and calligraphic are correct only when applied
|R(z)| ≤ r −1 max o (|z |) = r−1 max |¸| · O (|z | + r)
¸∈CH (z) ¸∈CH (z ) to uppercase letters A through Z.
|z | + r 1 + sin "
=
r
· O (|z | + r) =
sin "
· O (| z |) . You can apply the size tags tiny, ,
scr iptsize footnotesize , small , normalsize , large, Large, LARGE,
Corollary Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2, and hence by the Cauchy theorem (1.5) huge and Huge.
implies This is a Body Math paragraph. Each time you press the Enter key, Scienti? c WorkPlace
switches to mathematics mode. This is convenient for carrying out “scratchpad” computations.
d
f (1=z) = a 1 + R(z) → a1, as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 , Following is a group of paragraphs marked as Body Quote. This environment is appropriate for a
dz
that implies (1.3) by substituting 1=z back for z. short quotation or a sequence of short quotations.
Kennedy
2 3
2.3 List Environments Appendix A The First Appendix
You can create numbered, bulleted, and description lists using the tag popup at the bottom left
of the screen.
The appendix can contain technical proofs and derivations that can be separated from the main
(1) List item 1
(2) List item 2 text..Generally, avoid using appendices; however sometimes they serve a useful purpose for data
The typeset style for this level is different than the screen style. The screen shows a lower that cannot be presented easily as a table or a figure.
case alphabetic character followed by a period while the typeset style uses a lower case
alphabetic character surrounded by parentheses.
(I) Third level list item under a list item.
(i) Fourth and final level of list items allowed.
• Bullet item 1
• Bullet item 2
Description List Each description list item has a term followed by the description of that
term. Double click the term box to enter the term, or to change it.
4 5
References Vita
Beeton, Barbara, Typesetting articles for the DECUS Proceedings with TEX, Proceedings of the
Replace this text with a short pertinent autobiography.
Digital Equipment Computer Users Society, USA Spring 1985, 349–356.
Knuth, Donald E., The Art of Computer Programming, Addison-Wesley, Vol. 2, second edition,
1981.
Knuth, Donald E., The TEXbook, Addison-Wesley and American Mathematical Society, 1984.
Lamport, Leslie, LATEX, A document preparation system, Addison-Wesley, 1985.
Southall, Richard, First principles of typographic design for document production, TUGboat
Vol. 5 (1984), No. 2, 79–90; Corrigenda, Vol. 6 (1985), No. 1, p. 6.
TUGboat, the Newsletter of the TEX Users Group, TEX Users Group, c/o American Mathemat-
ical Society, P. O. Box 9506, Providence, RI, 02940.
6 7
Thesis #1

Packages:
sethes1 None
name of author, dissertation requirements, degree name, major and minor subjects, university, location, thesis date,
and copyright information. Additional fields include the names of the committee chair and members, a dedication,
acknowledgments, vita, date, and abstract.
The Study of Scientific Word on TeX and LaTeX Users “The Study of Scientific Word on TeX and LaTeX Users,” a dissertation prepared by Ron Ausbrooksin
partial ful?llment of the requirements for the degree, Doctor of Scientific Word, has been approved and
BY accepted by the following:
Ron Ausbrooks
A Dissertation submitted to the Graduate School Steve Swanson

in partial fulfillment of the requirements Dean of Scientific Word
for the Degree
Master of Arts
Andy Canham
Chair of the Examining Committee
Major Subject: Scientific Word
Minor Subject: LaTeX

John MacKendrick
Co-Chair of the Examining Committee
New Mexico State University

Las Cruces, New Mexico September 1, 2001
September 1, 2001 Committee in charge:
Copyright 2001 by Ron Ausbrooks Dr. Jon Stenerson, Chair
Dr. Larry Hughes
2
Thesis #1 353
ABSTRACT
Chapter 1
Opening the Document Shell
The Study of Scientific Word on TeX and LaTeX Users The shell for this document opens showing front matter information in fields in the body of the
BY document. These fields include thesis title, author, requirements, degree name, major and minor
subjects, university, thesis date, and copyright information. Additional fields include the dissertation
name and the names of the committee chair and committee members.
Ron Ausbrooks
Master of Arts

Las Cruces, New Mexico
We study the effects of warm water on the local penguin population. The major finding is that it
is extremely difficult to induce penguins to drink warm water. The success factor is approximately
−e −i¼ − 1. Replace this text with your own abstract.
3 5
Chapter 2 Chapter 3
In-line and Displayed Mathematics Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like
The expression
P∞
i =1 ai is in-line mathematics, while the numbered equation
∞
Environments
X
ai (1) A number of theorem-like environments is available. The following lemma is a well-known fact on
i=1 differentiation of asymptotic expansions of analytic functions.
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset
P of H , T a nonexpansive self map of
C. Suppose that as nP → ∞, an;k → 0 for each k, and °n = ∞ k =0 (an;k +1 − an;k ) → 0. Then for
+
k µ ¶
each x in C , An x = ∞ k =0 a n;k T x converges weakly to a fixed point of T [1]. a1 1
Two sets of LTEX parameters govern mathematical displays. The spacing above and below a
A 1 f (z ) = a0 + +o ,
z z
examples.
a 1 = − lim z 2 f 0 ( z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" . (2)
A short line above:
x2 + y 2 = z2
and a short line below. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ" → Γ " = { z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ " } and
A long line above may depend on your margins f (1 =z ) = a 0 + a 1 z + o (z ) . (3)
sin2 µ + cos2 µ = 1 Fix z ∈ Γ ", and let C r (z ) = { ¸ ∈ C− : |¸ − z| = r } be a circle with radius r = |z | sin "=2. It follows
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for mathematical displays, from (3) that
regardless of the margins. Z X 1 Z m
1 f (¸ ) d¸ 1 (¸ − z0 ) d¸
= am + R(z ), (4)
2 ¼i CH (z) (¸ − z )2 2¼i C H( z ) (¸ − z )2
R¯ where for the remainder R( z) we have
m =0

|R(z )| ≤ r −1
max o (|z|) = r −1
max |¸ | · O (|z | + r)
¸∈C H(z ) ¸∈C H(z )
Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note that mathematics in section heads may cause difficulties
in typesetting styles with running headers or table of contents entries. |z | + r 1 + sin "
= · O (|z | + r) = · O (|z|) .
r sin "
Therefore R(z ) → 0 as z → ∞ , z ∈ Γ "=2 , and hence by the Cauchy theorem (4) implies
d
f (1=z) = a1 + R(z) → a 1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2 ,
dz
1
7 9
Chapter 4 (1) List item 1
Features of this Shell (2) List item 2

The typeset style for this level is different than the screen style. The screen shows a lower case
alphabetic character followed by a period while the typeset style uses a lower case alphabetic
4.1 Section Headings character surrounded by parentheses.
Use the Section tag for major sections, and the Subsection tag for subsections. (I) Third level list item under a list item.
4.1.1 Subsection (i) Fourth and final level of list items allowed.
• Bullet item 1
• Bullet item 2
This is some harmless text under a subsubsection. ∗ Third level bullet item.
(Subsubsubsubsection head:)Subsubsubsubsection Description List Each description list item has a term followed by the description of that term.
This is some harmless text under a subsubsubsubsection. Double click the term box to enter the term, or to change it.
4.2 Tags
You can apply the visual markup tags Bold, Italics, Roman, Sans Serif, Slanted, S MALL CAPS ,
and Typewriter.
You can apply the special, mathematics only, tags fraktur; BLACKBOARD BOLD, and
CAL LIGRAP HIC. Note that blackboard bold and calligraphic are correct only when applied to
uppercase letters A through Z.
You can apply the size tags , scriptsize, footnotesize, small, normalsize, large, Large ,
tiny LARGE,
huge and Huge.
This is a Body Math paragraph. Each time you press the Enter key, Scientific WorkPlace switches
to mathematics mode. This is convenient for carrying out “scratchpad” computations. Following is a
group of paragraphs marked as Body Quote. This environment is appropriate for a short quotation or a
sequence of short quotations.
Kennedy
I am not a crook. R ichard Nixon

You can create numbered, bulleted, and description lists using the tag popup at the bottom left of the
screen.
11 12
References AppendixA
The First Appendix
[1] N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional A nalysis, v. 2, John Wiley and Sons, New York, 1963.
[2] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated ? uid oxygen drop behavior in ? uid hydrogen at rocket chamber The appendix fragment is used only once. Subsequent appendices can be created using the Section tag.
pressures”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, 1998a, 41, 3537-3550
[3] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical conditions”, Int. J. Heat Mass
Transfer, in print
[4] Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular Theory of Gases and Liquids, John Wiley and
Sons, Inc., 1964
[5] Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E., Molecular thermodynamics for ?uid-phase
[6] Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Properties of Gases and Liquids, 4th Edition,
McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1987
13 14
Thesis Shells
Thesis formatting requirements differ from university to university. The thesis shells
included with the program reflect the requirements in effect at the time the shell was
designed. Please review the requirements at your university to ensure that the shell you
choose is appropriate for your thesis.
The thesis shells are based on the typesetting specifications set in one of two base
document classes—book.cls or report.cls. The program uses several other .cls
files for customized shells.
See page 2 for information about base document class defaults and for page layout
diagrams for the base document classes.
356 Chapter 9 Thesis Shells
Air Force Institute of Technology
Document class base file: afthesis.cls

Packages:
None
The extensive front matter includes fields for title, author, address, rank, military designator, previous degrees,
current degree, school, committee members, number by chapter, flyleaf, disclaimer page, title page, approval page,
and abstract. The front matter also includes two fields which should be removed if not used: list of symbols and list
of abbreviations. The shell document describes the use of these two fields.
The shell provides the option to number pages, figures, tables, and equations by chapter. It doesn’t number
sections. The shell also provides the option to underline in place of italics, and it adds a vita page at the end of the
thesis.
AFIT/123/456/78-9
The views expressed in this thesis are those of the author and do not reflect the official
A TALE OF GNUS, GNATS AND ARMADILLOS policy or position of the Department of Defense or the United States Government.
THESIS
A. U. Thor
First Lieutenant, USAF
AFIT/123/456/78-9
Approved for public release; distribution unlimited

AFIT/123/456/78-9 AFIT/123/456/78-9
A TALE OF GNUS, GNATS AND ARMADILLOS

A. U. Thor, B.S.
THESIS
Presented to the Faculty of the School of Science
of the Air Force Institute of Technology

Air University
In Partial Fulfillment of the
Requirements for the Degree of Approved:
Master of Science
Dr. Advisor Date

Thesis Advisor
A. U. Thor, B.S. Dr. Member Date

Committee Member
Maj. Member Date

Committee Member
September 2004
Approved for public release; distribution unlimited
Table of Contents List of Symbols

Page Symbol Page
He Helium . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
List of Figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v
Au . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
List of Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vi
List of Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii
List of Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viii
Abstract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x
I. Sample Mathematics and Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.1 In-line and Displayed Mathematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

R¯
1.2 Mathematics in Section Heads ® ln tdt . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.3 Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environments 1-2
II. Features Unique to This Shell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.1 Typesetting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.1.1 Number by Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.1.2 No Section Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

2.1.3 Underline Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.1.4 List of Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.1.5 List of Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.1.6 A Subsection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Appendix A. First appendix title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
A.1 In an appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

A.2 Sample Citations and Bibliography . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
iii vii
AFIT/123/456/78-9
List of Abbreviations
Abbreviation Page
Abstract
Win2k Windows 2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
We study the effects of warm water on the local penguin population. The major
finding is that it is extremely difficult to induce penguins to drink warm water. The
success factor is approximately −e−i¼ − 1. Replace this text with your own abstract.
viii ix
Preface
This is the preface. Your name appears automatically at the end of this section when the
document is typeset. You can use Acknowledgments here instead.

A. U. Thor
P∞
∞
X
ai (1.1)
i=1

expansive self map of C. Suppose that as n → ∞, an;k → 0 for each k, and °n =
P∞ + P∞ k
k=0 (an;k+1 − an;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C, Anx = k=0 an;k T x converges weakly
to a fixed point of T .
A short line above:

x2 + y 2 = z2
1 A
x 1-1
R¯
II. Features Unique to This Shell
2.1 Typesetting Features
may cause difficulties in typesetting styles with running headers or table of contents entries.
2.1.1 Number by Chapter. If \numberbychapter is added to the document
preamble, then pages, figures, tables and equations will all be numbered by chapter.
A number of theorem-like environments is available. The following lemma is a well- 2.1.2 No Section Numbers. If \nosectionnumbers is added to the document
known fact on differentiation of asymptotic expansions of analytic functions. preamble, then section numbers are not used in the text and in the table of contents.
Lemma 1 Let f (z) be an analytic function in C+ . If f (z) admits the representation 2.1.3 Underline Option. If \underlineoption is added to the document pream-
µ ¶ ble, then underlining is used instead of italics for emphasized text, including chapter,
a 1
f (z) = a0 + 1 + o , section, etc. headings
z z
for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ" = {z ∈ C+ : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then 2.1.4 List of Symbols. Remove the List of Symbols tag from the front matter if
you are not using this document feature. To place symbols in the list use the command
a1 = − lim z2f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" . (1.2) \symbol[#1]{#2} inside of an encapsulated TeX field where #2 is the symbol and #1 is
the definition to be put in the list of symbols. The symbol is also automatically put in
Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ" → Γ" = {z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ" } and your text. Leave out [#1] if you don’t want a definition. For example, He is the symbol
for Helium and Au inserts another symbol in the body of the document, without adding
f (1=z) = a0 + a1 z + o (z) . (1.3) a definition to the List of Symbols. NOTE: The \symbol macro must be encapsulated
since the typesetting style used by this document defines this macro as a replacement for
Fix z ∈ Γ" , and let Cr (z) = {¸ ∈ C− : |¸ − z| = r} be a circle with radius r = |z| sin"=2.
the \symbol macro already defined by LATEX.
Z Z 2.1.5 List of Abbreviations. Remove the List of Abbreviations tag from the front
(¸ − z0 )m d¸
1
X
1 f (¸) d¸ 1
= am + R(z), (1.4) matter if you are not using this document feature. To place abbreviations in the list use
2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z)2 m=0 2¼i CH(z) (¸ − z)2
the command \abbreviation[#1]{#2} inside a TeX field where #2 is the abbreviation
where for the remainder R(z) we have and #1 is the definition to be put in the list of abbreviations. The abbreviation is also
automatically put in your text. Leave out [#1] if you don’t want a definition. For example,
¸∈CH (z) ¸∈CH (z) Win2k is sometimes used as an abbreviation for Windows 2000.
|z| + r 1 + sin "
= · O (|z| + r) = · O (|z|) .
r sin "
Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2, and hence by the Cauchy theorem (1.4) implies
1-2 2-1
Vita
Appendix A. First appendix title
Insert your brief biographical sketch here. Your permanent address is generated
A.1 In an appendix
automatically.
This is appendix section A.1. The appendix fragment is used only once. Subsequent
appendices can be created using the Chapter Section/Body Tag.
A.2 Sample Citations and Bibliography
BibTeX has been selected for the bibliography choice in this shell document. The
BibTeX bibliography style was designed to accompany the typesetting style used by this
document. One of the sample BibTeX databases included with SW has been selected and
some citations added in the next sentence. This sentence refers to the TeXBook (?), the
LaTeX reference book (?), and to a well known grammar book (?). The bibliography
section for these citations comes next.
Permanent address: My Home, Anytown, USA
A-1 VITA-1
Georgia Institute of Technology
Document class base file: gatech-thesis.cls

Packages:
None
The front matter contains fields for the title, author, department, degree, graduation year, principal advisor,
committee chair, first through fourth readers, and the submit date. The body of the document includes a preliminary
section inside a set of encapsulated TEX fields that contains a dedication, preface, acknowledgements, and summary.
The back matter portion of the document contains a postliminary section inside a set of encapsulated TEX fields
that can contain references and a vita. See the shell document for an example.
Thesis Title Thesis Title
A Thesis
Presented to
The Academic Faculty
by
A. U. Thor
In Partial Fulfillment Approved by:

of the Requirements for the Degree
Professor Abundant Knowledge, Commit- Professor General Reference
tee Chair (Another Department)
Professor Alpha Betic, Advisor Professor Earl Grey
Professor Ivory Tower Professor Darjeeling Sweet
School of Electrical and Computer Engineering

Georgia Institute of Technology
January 2001 Date Approved
PREFACE
This is the preface.
This work is dedicated to my mother and father and to the many others, though unnamed,
who helped me in the completion of this task.
iii iv
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS TABLE OF CONTENTS
DEDICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
PREFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
I want to gratefully acknlowedge all those who helped me in this task. ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v
LIST OF TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii
LIST OF FIGURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viii
SUMMARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix
I INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
II SAMPLE MATHEMATICS AND TEXT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

2.1 In-line and Displayed Mathematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
R
2.2 Mathematics in Section Heads ®¯ ln tdt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
2.3 Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environments . . . . . . . . 3
III SOME ANCILLARY STUFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
REFERENCES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
VITA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
v vi
SUMMARY CHAPTER I
INTRODUCTION
finding is that it is extremely difficult to induce penguins to drink warm water. The success Every dissertation should have an introduction. You might not realize it, but the introduc-
factor is approximately −e−i¼ − 1. Replace this text with your own abstract. tion should introduce the concepts, backgrouand, and goals of the dissertation.
ix 1
CHAPTER II 2.3 Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environ-

ments

2.1 In-line and Displayed Mathematics Lemma 1 Let f (z) be an analytic function in C+ . If f (z) admits the representation
µ ¶
P∞ a1 1
The expression i=1 ai is in-line mathematics, while the numbered equation f (z) = a0 + +o ,
z z
∞
X
ai (1) for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ " = {z ∈ C+ : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then
i=1
a1 = − lim z2f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" . (2)
expansive self map of C. Suppose that as n → ∞, an;k → 0 for each k, and °n = Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ" → Γ" = {z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ "} and
P∞ + P∞ k
k=0 (an;k+1 − an;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C, Anx = k=0 an;k T x converges weakly
f (1=z) = a0 + a1z + o (z) . (3)
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays.1 The spacing above and Fix z ∈ Γ" , and let Cr (z) = {¸ ∈ C− : |¸ − z| = r} be a circle with radius r = |z| sin "=2.
below a display depends on whether the lines above or below are short or long, as shown in It follows from (3) that
Z Z
the following examples. (¸ − z0 )m d¸
1
X
1 f (¸) d¸ 1
= am + R(z), (4)
A short line above: 2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z)2 m=0 2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z)2
x2 + y2 = z2 where for the remainder R(z) we have

¸∈CH (z) ¸∈CH (z)
|z| + r 1 + sin "
= · O (|z| + r) = · O (|z|) .
r sin "
Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2, and hence by the Cauchy theorem (4) implies
displays, regardless of the margins. d
f (1=z) = a1 + R(z) → a1, as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2,
R¯ dz
ln J@J
1A
2 3
CHAPTER III VITA
SOME ANCILLARY STUFF

Arthor U. Thor was born in an insignificant town whose only claim to fame is that it
Ancillary material should be put in appendices, which appear just before the bibliography. produced such a fine specimen of a researcher.
Create your BibTeX bibliography by adding a BibTeX field using your BibTeX database
and the gatech-thesis BibTeX bibliography style. Compile the document and create the
bibliography using the usual methods. Then, delete the BibTeX field from your document
and compile again. The \references TeX field that follows will include the bibliography in
the typeset document and also include a listing for the references in the table of contents.
5 7
Massachusetts Institute of Technology

Packages:
sw20mitt None
mitthesis None
The front matter contains fields for the title, author, department, degree, university, copyright, degree month,
degree year, degree date, name and title of the chairperson and supervisor, and abstract.
Thesis Title Thesis Title

by
by
A. U. Thor
A. U. Thor
Submitted to the Department of Electrical Engineering and Computer Science
B.S., University of California (1980)
on 13 May 2001, in partial fulfillment of the
S.M., Massachusetts Institute of Technology (1984)
requirements for the degrees of
Submitted to the Department of Electrical Engineering and Computer Science and
in partial fulfillment of the requirements for the degrees of Master of Science
Abstract
and We study the effects of warm water on the local penguin population. The major finding is
Master of Science approximately −e−i¼ − 1. Replace this text with your own abstract.
at the
Research Head: David Collis
Title: Director, Sound and Furry Laboratory
UNIVERSITY OF NEW MEXICO
Thesis Supervisor: George D. Pearson
June 2001
Title: Director, Technical Support
°
c Remove to use default copyright from the style
The author hereby grants to University of New Mexico permission to reproduce and
to distribute copies of this thesis document in whole or in part.
Signature of Author . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . .. . . . . . .. . . . . . . .. . . . . . .. . . . . . . .. . . . . . .. . . . .
Department of Electrical Engineering and Computer Science
13 May 2001
Certified by . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
David Collis
Director, Sound and Furry Laboratory
Research Head
Certified by . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
George D. Pearson
Director, Technical Support
Thesis Supervisor
Accepted by. . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . .
Arthur C. Clarke
Chairperson, Department Committee on Graduate Students 2
Massachusetts Institute of Technology 365
Chapter 1 displays, regardless of the margins.
R¯

P∞
A number of theorem-like environments is available. The following lemma is a well-known fact
∞
X on differentiation of asymptotic expansions of analytic functions.
ai (1.1)
i=1
is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 1.1. µ ¶
a1 1
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset of H, T a nonexpansive self f (z) = a0 + +o ,
P z z
map of C. Suppose that as n → ∞, an;k → 0 for each k, and °n = ∞ +
k=0 (an;k+1 − an;k ) → 0.
P k for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ " = {z ∈ C+ : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then
Then for each x in C, An x = ∞ k=0 an;k T x converges weakly to a fixed point of T [?].
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays.1 The spacing above and below
a1 = − lim z2f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" . (1.2)
a display depends on whether the lines above or below are short or long, as shown in the following
examples.
A short line above:
x2 + y2 = z2 f (1=z) = a0 + a1z + o (z) . (1.3)

Fix z ∈ Γ" , and let Cr (z) = {¸ ∈ C− : |¸ − z| = r} be a circle with radius r = |z| sin "=2. It
1A
LT EX automatically selects the spacing depending on the surrounding line lengths. follows from (1.3) that
Z Z
(¸ − z0 )m d¸
1
X
1 f (¸) d¸ 1
= am + R(z), (1.4)
2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z)2 m=0 2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z)2
3 4
Chapter 2 Bibliography
Features of this Shell [1] American Petroleum Institute, Technical Data Book - Petroleum Refining, 5th edition, 1992
Use the Section tag for major sections, and the Subsection tag for subsections. Mass Transfer, in print
2.1.1 Subsection [4] Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular Theory of Gases and Liquids,
[5] Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E., Molecular thermodynamics for fluid-
Subsubsection phase equilibrium, Prentice -Hall, Inc., 1986
2.2 Tags

You can apply the visual markup tags Bold, Italics, Roman, Sans Serif, Slanted, Small
Caps, and Typewriter.
6 9
Northwestern University
Document class base file: nuthesis.cls

Packages:
None
The front matter contains the frontmatter tag and fields for the title, author, degree, field of study, campus,
graduation month and year, and a tag to generate a copyright page. The body of the document contains TEX fields to
indicate the start of the abstract, acknowledgements, and preface. Encapsulated TEX fields are used to start the table
of contents, list of figures, and list of tables.
NORTHWESTERN UNIVERSITY
Title of the Dissertation
A DISSERTATION
SUBMITTED TO THE GRADUATE SCHOOL
IN PARTIAL FULFILLMENT OF THE REQUIREMENTS
for the degree
°
c Copyright by Name of Author 2002
DOCTOR OF PHILOSOPHY
All Rights Reserved
Field of Mathematics
By
Name of Author
EVANSTON, ILLINOIS
December 2002
ii
ABSTRACT Acknowledgements
Text for acknowledgements.

Title of the Dissertation
Name of Author
abstract.
iii iv
Preface Contents
This is the preface. ABSTRACT iii
Acknowledgements iv
Preface v
List of Tables viii
List of Figures ix
Introduction 1
Chapter 1. Sample Mathematics and Text 2
1.1. In-line and Displayed Mathematics 2

R¯
1.2. Mathematics in Section Heads ®
ln tdt 3
1.3. Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environments 3
References 6
Appendix . Title of Appendix 7
1. First section of Appendix 7
v vi
CHAPTER 1
Introduction Sample Mathematics and Text
This is the introduction. Use a normal chapter heading if you prefer to write 1.1. In-line and Displayed Mathematics
the introduction as chapter 1. P∞

∞
X
(1.1) ai
i=1

P∞ + P∞ k
°n = k=0 (an;k+1 − an;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C, An x = k=0 a n;kT x
A short line above:
x2 + y 2 = z 2
E
1 2
3 4
and a short line below. for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ" = {z ∈ C+ : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then

(1.2) a1 = − lim z 2 f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ ".
Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ" → Γ " = {z ∈ C − : z ∈ Γ"} and
(1.3) f (1=z) = a0 + a1z + o (z) .
Fix z ∈ Γ", and let Cr (z) = {¸ ∈ C − : |¸ − z| = r} be a circle with radius

R¯
1.2. Mathematics in Section Heads ® ln tdt

Z X 1 Z m
1 f (¸) d¸ 1 (¸ − z0) d¸
heads may cause difficulties in typesetting styles with running headers or table of (1.4) = am + R(z),
2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z)2 m=0 2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z) 2
contents entries.
1.3. Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environments |R(z)| ≤ r −1 max o (|z|) = r−1 max |¸| · O (|z| + r)
¸∈CH (z) ¸∈CH (z)
A number of theorem-like environments is available. The following lemma is a |z| + r 1 + sin "
= · O (|z| + r) = · O (|z|) .
r sin "
Lemma 1. Let f (z) be an analytic function in C +. If f (z) admits the repre- implies
sentation
µ ¶
a1 1
f (z) = a0 + +o ,
z z
APPENDIX
References Title of Appendix
1. First section of Appendix

[1] American Petroleum Institute, Technical Data Book - Petroleum Refining, 5th
edition, 1992
This is the Appendix.
3537-3550

6 7
Vita
This is the Vita (optional).
8
Similar to New Mexico State University

Packages:
sw20nmsu None
The front matter is empty and not used, but the body of the document contains fields to be completed with the
title, author, dissertation degree name, major and minor subjects, university, thesis date, copyright, approval date,
the signatures of the advisor and committee members, dedication, acknowledgments, vita, and abstract.
MY THESIS “ My Thesis ,” a dissertation prepared by A. U. Thor in partial fulfillment of
BY the requirements for the degree, Doctor of Philosophy , has been approved and
A. U. THOR accepted by the following:
A Dissertation submitted to the Graduate School

J. C. Stenerson
for the Degree
Dean of the Graduate School
Ron Ausbrooks
Chairman of the Examining Committee
Major Subject: Physics George Pearson

Vice-Chairman of the Examining Committee
Minor Subject: Electrical Engineering
Date

Las Cruces, New Mexico Committee in charge:
May 2001 Dr. Ron Ausbrooks, Chair
Copyright 2001 by A. U. Thor Dr. Avinash Sathaye
Dr. Charles Yeomans
ii
DEDICATION ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
This work is dedicated to my mother and father and to the many others, The acknowledgment is the place to thank the faculty, staff, family, and friends
though unnamed, who helped me in the completion of this task. who have assisted you in preparing your thesis or dissertation. You may also
(Note: The Dedication section is optional.) acknowledge any financial support or special research materials given you.
Copyright permissions may also be acknowledged here by stating that: (1)
permission has been granted for reproduction of tables, tests, and other copyright
protected items and (2) gives the source of the permission.
Use a Preface rather than Acknowledgments when the research is discussed,
for example, ”the motivation for the study, the background of the project, the
scope of the research, and the purpose of the paper” (Turabian, 1996, p. 7-8).
(Note: The Acknowledgments section is optional.)
iii iv
VITA ABSTRACT
Born May 16, 1962 etc....This is a vita—a simple biographical sketch—not a MY THESIS
curriculum vitae. Use a simple chronological order.

BY
N. B. Abu-Ghazaleh and P. A. Wilsey, ”Models for Control Unit Synchronization
for Shared Control Architectures,” Journal of Parallel and Distributed
A. U. THOR
Computing.
N. B. Abu-Ghazaleh , P. A. Wilsey , X. Fan, and D. A. Hensgen, ”Synthe-

sizing Variable Instruction Issue Interpreters for Implementing Functional
Parallelism on SIMD Computers,” IEEE Transactions on Parallel and
Distributed Systems. April 1997 abstract. Doctor of Philosophy
N. B. Abu-Ghazaleh , and P. A. Wilsey , ”Variable Instruction Scheduling for
MIMD Interpretation on Pipelined SIMD Machines and for Compositional
Instruction Sets,” Concurrency: Practice and Experience. Jan. 1997.
abstract. Las Cruces, New Mexico, 1998
X. Fan, N. B. Abu-Ghazaleh , and P. A. Wilsey , ”On the Complexity of Dr. Ron Ausbrooks, Chair
Scheduling MIMD Operations for SIMD Interpretation,” Journal of Parallel
and Distributed Computing, Vol 29, No 1, 91-95, August 1995. abstract.
Put the abstract here. The abstract must have a (1) statement of the problem,
R. A. Bagley , P. A. Wilsey, and N. B. Abu-Ghazaleh, ”Composing Functional
Unit Blocks for Efficient Interpretation of MIMD Code Sequences on SIMD (2) an exposition of methods and procedures, and (3) a summary of the findings.
Processors,” Parallel Processing: CONPAR 94 - VAPP VI (LNCS 854), B.
Buchberger and J. Volkert (eds), 616-627, September 1994. abstract. The length may not exceed 350 words.
The above list of publications is done using a Custom List which provides a single
space environment for the publication list.
v vi
CONTENTS
CHAPTER 1
LIST OF TABLES viii SAMPLE MATHEMATICS AND TEXT
1 SAMPLE MATHEMATICS AND TEXT 1

R¯
1.2 Mathematics in Section Heads ® ln tdt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 P∞
1.3 Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environments . . . 2
∞
X
ai (1.1)
2 FEATURES OF THIS SHELL 4 i=1
2.1 Section Headings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 1.1.
2.1.1 Subsection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
2.1.1.1 Subsubsection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 nonexpansive self map of C. Suppose that as n → ∞, an;k → 0 for each k, and
Subsubsubsection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 P∞ + P∞ k
°n = k=0 (an;k+1 − an;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C, An x = k=0 an;k T x
Subsubsubsubsection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 converges weakly to a fixed point of T [?].
2.2 Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
APPENDICES
A. THE APPENDIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
A short line above:
B. ANOTHER APPENDIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
x2 + y2 = z 2

1LAT
vii 1
A long line above may depend on your margins Fix z ∈ Γ ", and let Cr (z) = {¸ ∈ C− : |¸ − z| = r} be a circle with radius

sin µ + cos µ = 1
2 2
Z Z
(¸ − z0 )m d¸
X 1
1 f (¸) d¸ 1
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for 2 = am 2 + R(z), (1.4)
2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z) m=0
2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z)
R¯ |R(z)| ≤ r −1 max o (|z|) = r −1 max |¸| · O (|z| + r)

1.2 Mathematics in Section Heads ® ln J@J ¸∈CH (z) ¸∈CH (z)
|z| + r 1 + sin "
Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note that mathematics in section = · O (|z| + r) = · O (|z|) .
r sin "
contents entries.
implies
1.3 Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environments d

f (1=z) = a1 + R(z) → a1, as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 ,
dz
Lemma 1 Let f (z) be an analytic function in C+ . If f (z) admits the represen-
tation
µ ¶
a1 1
f (z) = a0 + +o ,
z z
a1 = − lim z 2f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ". (1.2)
f (1=z) = a0 + a 1z + o (z) . (1.3)
2 3
CHAPTER 2 Ask not what your country can do for you; ask what you can do for
FEATURES OF THIS SHELL I am not a crook. Richard Nixon
George Bush
2.1.1 Subsection
1. List item 1
2. List item 2
Subsubsubsection This is some harmless text under a subsubsubsection. (a) A list item under a list item.
The typeset style for this level is different than the screen style. The
Subsubsubsubsection This is some harmless text under a subsubsubsubsec-
tion.
rounded by parentheses.
2.2 Tags
You can apply the visual markup tags Bold, Italics, Roman, Sans Serif, i. Third level list item under a list item.
Slanted, Small Caps, and Typewriter. A. Fourth and final level of list items allowed.
4 6
APPENDICES BIBLIOGRAPHY
[BB] Beeton, Barbara, Typesetting articles for the DECUS Proceedings with
TEX, Proceedings of the Digital Equipment Computer Users Society, USA
A. THE APPENDIX
Spring 1985, 349—356.
This is the appendix. Use the section division for the title of each appendix.
[ACP] Knuth, Donald E., The Art of Computer Programming, Addison-Wesley,
Vol. 2, second edition, 1981.
B. ANOTHER APPENDIX
[TB] Knuth, Donald E., The TEXbook, Addison-Wesley and American Mathe-
This is another appendix. matical Society, 1984.
[LT] Lamport, Leslie, LATEX, A document preparation system, Addison-Wesley,

1985.
[TD] Southall, Richard, First principles of typographic design for document pro-
duction, TUGboat Vol. 5 (1984), No. 2, 79—90; Corrigenda, Vol. 6 (1985),
No. 1, p. 6.
[TUB] TUGboat, the Newsletter of the TEX Users Group, TEX Users Group, c/o
American Mathematical Society, P. O. Box 9506, Providence, RI, 02940.
8 9
Similar to North Dakota State University

Packages:
sw20ndsu None
The front matter is empty and not used, but the body of the document contains fields for the title, abstract title,
author, university, department, city, degree, disquisition, name of degree, major department, date of dissertation, and
advisor. TEX fields are used to generate the title page and approval page. The body also has space for an abstract,
dedication, and acknowledgments. Fields in the body of the document generate the table of contents, list of tables,
and list of figures.
My Thesis APPROVAL PAGE HERE
A Dissertation
Submitted to the Graduate Faculty (OBTAIN AT THE GRADUATE SCHOOL)
of the
North Dakota State University
of Agriculture and Applied Science
MY THESIS
by
A. U. Thor
A THESIS
by
A. U. Thor
By Thesis Committee
, Chairperson
In Partial Fulfillment of the Requirements
for the Degree of
DOCTOR OF PHILOSOPHY
Major Department:
Mathematics
November, 1998.
Fargo, North Dakota

ABSTRACT DEDICATION
Thor, Alan Uthur, B.S., M.S., Mathematics, College of Arts and Sciences, North Dakota
State University. November, 1998. My Thesis Major Professor: Dr. Merciless Ming. This work is dedicated to my mother and father and to the many others, though
unnamed, who helped me in the completion of this task. (The Dedication is optional.)
Place abstract here.
ACKNOWLEDGMENTS TABLE OF CONTENTS
The acknowledgment is the place to thank the faculty, staff, family, and friends ABSTRACT. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . ii
who have assisted you in preparing your thesis or dissertation. You may also acknowl- DEDICATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . iii
ACKNOWLEDGMENTS . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . .. . . . . . . .. . . . . . .. . . . . . . .. . . iv
edge any financial support or special research materials given you.
LIST OF TABLES . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . .. . . . . . . .. . . . . . .. vi
Copyright permissions may also be acknowledged here by stating that: (1) per-
LIST OF FIGURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . .. . . . . . .. . . . . . . .. . . . . . .. . . . . . . .. . . . vii
mission has been granted for reproduction of tables, tests, and other copyright protected
CHAPTER 1. SAMPLE MATHEMATICS AND TEXT . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . 1
items and (2) gives the source of the permission.
1.1 In-line and Displayed Mathematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Use a Preface rather than Acknowledgments when the research is discussed, for R¯
1.2 Mathematics in Section Heads ® ln tdt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
example, ”the motivation for the study, the background of the project, the scope of the 1.3 Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environments . . . . . . 2
research, and the purpose of the paper” (Turabian, 1996, p. 7-8). CHAPTER 2. FEATURES OF THIS SHELL . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . .. 4
(Note: The Acknowledgments section is optional.) 2.1 Section Headings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
2.2 Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
2.3 List Environments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
APPENDIX A. THE FIRST APPENDIX . . . . . .. . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . 7
REFERENCES CITED . .. . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
iv
LIST OF TABLES CHAPTER 1.
Table Page SAMPLE MATHEMATICS AND TEXT
2..1 Available tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

P∞
∞
X
ai (1..1)
i=1
is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 1..1.

P∞ + P∞ k
°n = k=0 (an;k+1 − an;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C, Anx = k=0 an;k T x converges
weakly to a fixed point of T. ?
A short line above:
x2 + y 2 = z 2

1L
AT
1
R¯
ln tdt CHAPTER 2.
FEATURES OF THIS SHELL

heads may cause difficulties in typesetting styles with running headers or table of con- 2.1 Section Headings
tents entries.

Subsection This is some harmless text under a subsection.

Subsubsection This is some harmless text under a subsubsection.
Lemma 1 Let f (z) be an analytic function in C +. If f (z) admits the representation Subsubsubsection This is some harmless text under a subsubsubsection.
µ ¶
a1 1
f (z) = a0 + +o ,
z z Subsubsubsubsection
a1 = − lim z 2 f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" . (1..2) This is some harmless text under a subsubsubsubsection.
Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ " → Γ " = {z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ "} and 2.2 Tags
f (1=z) = a0 + a1z + o (z) . (1..3)

Fix z ∈ Γ", and let Cr (z) = {¸ ∈ C− : |¸ − z| = r} be a circle with radius r = You can apply the visual markup tags Bold, Italics, Roman, Sans Serif, Slanted,
|z| sin "=2. It follows from (1..3) that Small Caps, and Typewriter.
Z X 1 Z m
1 f (¸) d¸ 1 (¸ − z0) d¸ You can apply the special, mathematics only, tags fraktur; BLACKBOARD
= am + R(z), (1..4)
2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z)2 m=0 2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z) 2
BOLD, and CALLIGRAP HIC. Note that blackboard bold and calligraphic are cor-
rect only when applied to uppercase letters A through Z.
|R(z)| ≤ r −1 max o (|z|) = r−1 max |¸| · O (|z| + r) You can apply the size tags , scriptsize , footnotesize , small, normalsize, large ,
¸∈CH (z) ¸∈CH (z) t in y
|z| + r 1 + sin "

=
r
· O (|z| + r) =
sin "
· O (|z|) . Large, LARGE, huge and Huge.
2 4
1. List item 1
Text Tags Mathematics Tags Size Tags
Bold Fraktur tiny 2. List item 2
Italics Blackboard Bold scriptsize

Roman Calligraphic footnotesize
The typeset style for this level is different than the screen style. The screen
Sans Serif small
shows a lower case alphabetic character followed by a period while the type-
Slanted large
set style uses a lower case alphabetic character surrounded by parentheses.
Small Caps large
Typewriter huge
Huge i. Third level list item under a list item.
Table 2..1: Available tags A. Fourth and final level of list items allowed.
This is a Body Math paragraph. Each time you press the Enter key, Scien-
• Bullet item 1
tific WorkPlace switches to mathematics mode. This is convenient for carrying out
• Bullet item 2

Ask not what your country can do for you; ask what you can do for your · Fourth (and final) level bullet item.
Description List Each description list item has a term followed by the description
George Bush of that term. Double click the term box to enter the term, or to change it.
2.3 List Environments Bunyip Mythical beast of Australian Aboriginal legends.
You can create numbered, bulleted, and description lists using the tag popup at
the bottom left of the screen.

5 6
APPENDIX A. REFERENCES CITED
THE FIRST APPENDIX
1. American Petroleum Institute, Technical Data Book - Petroleum Refining, 5th edi-
using the Chapter Section/Body Tag.
tion, 1992
Following is a short bibliography. It has no relationship to the previous text,
2. Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behavior in fluid hydrogen
but can be used to show sample citations such as4 and.6 This typesetting style places
each citation in a superscript position. If you want multiple citations to appear next to
2;3;4
each other, either separate the citations using a superscripted comma like or type 3. Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical conditions”, Int.
all of the citation keys inside a single citation, separating each with a comma like.2, 3, 4 J. Heat Mass Transfer, in print
4. Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular Theory of Gases and
5. Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E., Molecular thermodynamics for
7 8
Similar to University of Miami

Packages:
sw20miam None
The shell automatically adds blank pages where necessary to ensure that new chapters begin on odd-numbered
pages. Blank pages carry page numbers as shown on page 4 here. The signature sheet is produced by the package.
UNIVERSITY OF MIAMI
UNIVERSITY OF MIAMI A Thesis submitted in partial fulfillment of

the requirements for the degree of
Master of
THE TITLE FOR MY UNIVERSITY OF
MIAMI THESIS
THE TITLE FOR MY UNIVERSITY OF MIAMI THESIS
By
A.U. Thor
A.U. Thor
A THESIS
Submitted to the Faculty
of the University of Miami
in partial fulfillment of the requirements for Approved:
the degree of Master of
Ima Sample Jo Anne K. Hecker

Professor of Biolgy Interim Dean of
Chairperson of the Thesis The Graduate School
Coral Gables, Florida Committee
The Date
Joseph Smith Frederick Jones

Professor of Psychology Associate Professor of
Biology
A.U. Thor
THE TITLE FOR MY UNIVERSITY OF MIAMI THESIS

The Date
Chapter 1
We study the effects of warm water on the local penguin population. The
major finding is that it is extremely difficult to induce penguins to drink
warm water. The success factor is approximately −e−i¼ − 1. Replace this

text with your own abstract.

P∞
X
∞
ai (1.1)
i=1

P∞ + P∞ k
°n = k=0 (a n;k+1 − a n;k) → 0. Then for each x in C , Anx = k=0 an;k T x con-
verges weakly to a fixed point of T [?].

1 L
AT
2 3
A short line above: Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ " → Γ " = {z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ "} and
x2 + y 2 = z 2
f (1=z) = a0 + a1z + o (z) . (1.3)

|z| sin "=2. It follows from (1.3) that
Z Z
(¸ − z0)m d¸
1
X
sin2 µ + cos2 µ = 1 1 f (¸) d¸ 1
2 = am 2 + R(z), (1.4)
2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z) m=0
2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z)
ematical displays, regardless of the margins.
R¯ ¸∈CH (z) ¸∈CH (z)

ln J@J =
|z| + r
· O (|z| + r) =
1 + sin "
· O (|z|) .
r sin "
Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note that mathematics in section heads Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2 , and hence by the Cauchy theorem (1.4)
may cause difficulties in typesetting styles with running headers or table of contents implies
entries.
d
f (1=z) = a1 + R(z) → a1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2,
1.3 Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like dz
Environments that implies (1.2) by substituting 1=z back for z.

µ ¶
a1 1
f (z) = a0 + +o ,
z z
a1 = − lim z 2 f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" . (1.2)

Chapter 2
2.1.1 Subsection
Subsubsection
tion.
2.2 Tags
6 7
You can apply the special, mathematics only, tags fraktur; BLACKBOARD BOLD, (a) A list item under a list item.
and C ALLIG RAPHIC. Note that blackboard bold and calligraphic are correct only The typeset style for this level is different than the screen style. The
when applied to uppercase letters A through Z. screen shows a lower case alphabetic character followed by a period while
You can apply the size tags tiny , scriptsize, footnotesize , small , normalsize, large , the typeset style uses a lower case alphabetic character surrounded by
Large , LARGE, huge and Huge . parentheses.
This is a Body Math paragraph. Each time you press the Enter key, Scien-
tific WorkPlace switches to mathematics mode. This is convenient for carrying out
appropriate for a short quotation or a sequence of short quotations. • Bullet item 1
The buck stops here. Harry Truman • Bullet item 2
George Bush Description List Each description list item has a term followed by the description
of that term. Double click the term box to enter the term, or to change it.
You can create numbered, bulleted, and description lists using the tag popup at the
bottom left of the screen.
1. List item 1
2. List item 2
Appendix A
The First Appendix
using the Chapter Section/Body Tag.
9
Similar to University of Utah

Packages:
sw20utah None
The front matter is empty and not used. The body of the document contains fields for the title, author, degree,
university, department, and the degree month and year. TEX fields are used to generate the title page and copyright
page. The body also has space for an abstract, and acknowledgments. Fields in the body of the documents generate
the table of contents, list of tables, and list of figures.
MY THESIS
by
A. U. Thor
c A. U. Thor 1998
Copyright °
A Thesis submitted to the faculty of
The University of Utah
All Rights Reserved
in partial fulfillment of the requirements for the degree of
Master of Mediocrity
Department of Mathematics
The University of Utah
October 1998
ABSTRACT CONTENTS
We study the effects of warm water on the local penguin population. The
ABSTRACT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
major finding is that it is extremely difficult to induce penguins to drink warm
LIST OF TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vi
water. The success factor is approximately −e−i¼ − 1. Replace this text with your
LIST OF FIGURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii
own abstract. ACKNOWLEDGMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viii
I The First Part ix

Chapter
1 Sample Mathematics and Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

R¯ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.2 Mathematics in Section Heads ® ln tdt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.3 Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environments . . . . . . 2
2 Features of this Shell. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

2.2 Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Appendices
A. The First Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
LIST OF TABLES ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
2.1 Available tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 The acknowledgment is the place to thank the faculty, staff, family, and friends
who have assisted you in preparing your thesis or dissertation. You may also ac-
knowledge any financial support or special research materials given you. Copyright
permissions may also be acknowledged here by stating that: (1) permission has
been granted for reproduction of tables, tests, and other copyright protected items
and (2) gives the source of the permission. Use a Preface rather than Acknowledg-
ments when the research is discussed, for example, ”the motivation for the study,
the background of the project, the scope of the research, and the purpose of the
paper” (Turabian, 1996, p. 7-8).
vi

CHAPTER 1
R¯
Sample Mathematics and Text 1.2 Mathematics in Section Heads ®
ln tdt
1.1 In-line and Displayed Mathematics Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note that mathematics in section
P∞
contents entries.
∞
X
ai (1.1)
i=1

P∞ P∞ Lemma 1 Let f (z) be an analytic function in C +. If f (z) admits the represen-
+ k
°n = k=0 (an;k+1 − an;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C, An x = k=0 a n;kT x
tation
converges weakly to a fixed point of T [?]. µ ¶
a1 1
f (z) = a0 + +o ,
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays. 1 The spacing z z

or long, as shown in the following examples. a1 = − lim z 2 f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ ". (1.2)
A short line above:

Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ" → Γ " = {z ∈ C − : z ∈ Γ" } and
x2 + y 2 = z 2
f (1=z) = a0 + a1z + o (z) . (1.3)
Fix z ∈ Γ", and let Cr (z) = {¸ ∈ C − : |¸ − z| = r} be a circle with radius
sin2 µ + cos2 µ = 1 Z 1
X Z m
1 f (¸) d¸ 1 (¸ − z0) d¸
2 = am 2 + R(z), (1.4)
(¸ − z) (¸ − z)
1 A
LT EX automatically selects the spacing depending on the surrounding line lengths. 2¼i CH (z) m=0
2¼i CH (z)
|R(z)| ≤ r −1 max o (|z|) = r−1 max |¸| · O (|z| + r) CHAPTER 2

¸∈CH (z) ¸∈CH (z)
|z| + r 1 + sin " Features of this Shell
= · O (|z| + r) = · O (|z|) .
r sin "
implies Use the Section tag for major sections, and the Subsection tag for subsections.
2.1.1 SubsectionThis is some harmless text under a subsection.

d
f (1=z) = a1 + R(z) → a1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2,
dz
Subsubsection This is some harmless text under a subsubsection.
tion.
2.2 Tags
You can apply the special, mathematics only, tags fraktur; BLACKBOARD
BOLD, and CALLIG RAPHIC. Note that blackboard bold and calligraphic are
You can apply the size tags ,

tiny scriptsize, footnotesize, small, normalsize, large,
Large, LARGE, huge and Huge.

5 7
A. The First Appendix

Bold Fraktur tiny The appendix fragment is used only once. Subsequent appendices can be
Italics Blackboard Bold scriptsize created using the Section tag.
Roman Calligraphic footnotesize
Sans Serif small
Slanted large
Small Caps large
Typewriter huge
Huge
Table 2.1: Available tags

George Bush

University of Arizona
Document class base file: ua-thesis.cls

Document class options Draft
Packages:
None
The front matter for this shell includes the title, author’s name, date, and abstract. The acknowledgments are
entered in the body of the thesis. New chapters begin on the next consecutive page. The shell supports theorem
environments.
Table of Contents
List of Figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Manual for Theses and Dissertations formatted
List of Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
with ua-thesis.cls with the draft Option Abstract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Acknowledgments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
by Chapter 1. Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
The Graduate College
Chapter 2. University Microfilms Incorporated (UMI) . . . . . . 8
Chapter 3. Sample Mathematics and Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

R¯ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
3.2. Mathematics in Section Heads ® ln tdt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
3.3. Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environments . . . . . 9
Chapter 4. General Format Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

4.1. Margins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
4.2. Corrections on Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
4.3. Page numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
4.4. Photocopy Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
A Dissertation Submitted to the Faculty of the 4.5. Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
4.6. Type Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Graduate Interdisciplinary Program 4.6.1. Type Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
in Applied Mathematics 4.6.2. Typewritten Papers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
In Partial Fulfillment of the Requirements
For the Degree of Chapter 5. Order of Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
5.1. Copyrighting the Thesis or Dissertation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Appendix A. Inclusion of Published Papers or Manuscripts for
In the Graduate College Publication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
The University of Arizona A.1. Body of Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
A.2. Appendices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Appendix B. Permissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
1996
Appendix C. Human/Animal Subjects Approval . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
4 5
List of Tables Abstract
This example dissertation contains the original text of the “Manual for Theses and
Table 4.1. Available tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Dissertations”, written by the Graduate College at the University of Arizona. It has
been obtained via the internet at
http://grad.admin.arizona.edu/degreecert/ThesisManual/manual.htm
on May 10, 1996. The page was last updated November 9, 1995. No guarantee is
made that this information is current, and students should check with the Graduate
College before submitting a dissertation or thesis.
6 7
Acknowledgments
Chapter 1
The contents of this example dissertation has been entirely written by the Graduate Introduction
College at the University of Arizona.
Use this manual as a guide for setting up the physical format of your thesis, dis-
sertation or document. Your thesis will represent you, your department, and The
University of Arizona in the international scholarly community. Your work is im-
portant and worthy of professional presentation. This manual lists Graduate College
requirements for the mechanical aspects of meeting these high standards.
In this manual the word thesis, includes documents and dissertations. If format
requirements for the document or dissertation vary from those for the thesis, specific
requirements for each type of paper will be listed.
Two final copies of the thesis must be submitted; both must meet all specifications
of this manual. The two final copies should be submitted unbound in a box to the
Graduate College Degree Certification Office.
8 9
Chapter 2 Chapter 3
University Microfilms Incorporated (UMI) Sample Mathematics and Text
Your thesis will be published by University Microfilms Incorporated, Ann Arbor, 3.1 In-line and Displayed Mathematics
Michigan. Upon certification by your major professor, your examining committee, P∞
and the Graduate College, a copy of the thesis and a Special Abstract are forwarded The expression i=1 ai is in-line mathematics, while the numbered equation
to UMI. The manuscript is cataloged and microfilmed, the microfilm negative is in- ∞
X
spected and put in vault storage. Paper copies of your work will be produced on ai (3.1)
demand by UMI. Catalog information is sent to the Library of Congress for produc- i=1
tion and distribution of catalog cards for libraries. The original copy of the thesis is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 3.1.
is returned to The University of Arizona Library. The Special Abstract is printed Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset of H, T a
in Microfilm Abstracts and distributed to leading libraries in the United States and nonexpansive self map of C. Suppose that as n → ∞, an;k → 0 for each k, and
P∞ P∞
° n = k=0 (a n;k+1 − a n;k) → 0. Then for each x in C , Anx = k=0 an;kT kx con-
+
abroad and to a selected list ofjournals and abstracting services.
Publication by UMI does not preclude publication by other means later. You verges weakly to a fixed point of T [?].
are urged to submit your work for publication in a scholarly or professional journal. Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays. 1 The spacing above
Suitable acknowledgment must indicate that the publication is a thesis, dissertation, and below a display depends on whether the lines above or below are short or long,
or document, or portion thereof, which was submitted in partial fulfillment of the as shown in the following examples.
requirements for a degree at the University of Arizona. A short line above:
You must complete a UMI publication agreement, available through the Degree x2 + y 2 = z 2
Certification Office.
ematical displays, regardless of the margins.
R¯
entries.

ments
1L
AT
10 11
Lemma 1. Let f (z) be an analytic function in C+ . If f (z) admits the representation

µ ¶ Chapter 4
a1 1
f (z) = a0 + +o ,
z z General Format Requirements
a1 = − lim z 2 f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ ". (3.2) 4.1 Margins

Text, illustrations (figures) or tables must not appear outside the specified margins.
Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ " → Γ" = {z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ"} and Specific margin requirements are listed in ORDER OF SECTIONS under each cate-
gory. Page numbers are the only item which may appear outside the margin require-
f (1=z) = a0 + a1z + o (z) . (3.3)
ments.
|z| sin "=2. It follows from (3.3) that 4.2 Corrections on Pages
Z 1
X Z m Do not use correction fluid or correction tape. These materials flake off in handling
1 f (¸) d¸ 1 (¸ − z0) d¸
2 = am 2 + R(z), (3.4) and storage, exposing the original errors.
2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z) m=0
2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z)

4.3 Page numbers
The title page is page 1 of the thesis. All pages which follow are numbered in a single
|R(z)| ≤ r −1 max o (|z|) = r−1 max |¸| · O (|z| + r) sequence with arabic numerals. Page numbers must be placed at least 1 ” below the
¸∈CH (z) ¸∈CH (z)
|z| + r 1 + sin " top of the sheet, and 1” from the right edge. The numbers must be at least 1/4”
= · O (|z| + r) = · O (|z|) . above the first line of text. You may omit the printed page number on the title page;
r sin "
all other pages must have printed page numbers. Do not use page headers. Do not
Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2 , and hence by the Cauchy theorem (3.4) use the phrase, Page xx; just the numeral.
implies
4.4 Photocopy Quality
d
f (1=z) = a1 + R(z) → a1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2,
dz Photocopies must meet all requirements for margins, readability, and type of paper.
that implies (3.2) by substituting 1=z back for z. This includes all photocopied documents, tables, illustrations and appendix pages.
4.5 Printers
Laser printing or other letter quality printing is required. Impact, or daisy wheel
printing is generally acceptable. 24-pin dot matrix near letter quality and draft
quality printing are not acceptable.
4.6 Type Fonts

Standard serif typefaces such as Courier and Times Roman reproduce and microfilm
well. Do not use modern Sans Serif types, which read well in the original but do not
reduce well for microfilming. Ornamental styles such as Script and Old English may
12 15

Bold Fraktur tiny Appendix A
Italics Blackboard Bold scriptsize
Roman Calligraphic footnotesize Inclusion of Published Papers or Manuscripts
Sans Serif small
Slanted large
for Publication
Small Caps large
Typewriter huge
Under a policy adopted by The University of Arizona Graduate Council in January,
Huge
1992, your department may allow published and publishable papers to be included as
Table 4.1. Available tags part of your thesis. The reprints or manuscripts are treated as appendices, and the
body of your thesis must include a summary of your contribution and a summary of
the research. The Graduate College will accept theses in this format from any unit
not be used. Limit the use of italic styles to standard uses in bibliographic citations
with an implementation policy on file with the Graduate College Degree Certification
and foreign words. Boldface should be restricted to very small segments of the text
Office.
and to infrequent occurrences. These text tags are available:
4.6.1 Type Size A.1 Body of Paper

Use 12-point or 14-point for proportional fonts; 10 cpi or 12 cpi for non-proportional The ORDER OF SECTIONS applies. In addition, the Body of the Paper must
fonts. A proportional font allows proportional spacing - a feature that gives a printed include two chapters as follows:
page a more pleasing appearance by allowing for different widths of characters. The
letter w, for example, is wider than the letter i. Normally, when these letters are 1. An introduction describing the unique contribution of your work to the field of
printed, both are given the same amount of space; the result can be gaps that are study. Use the following subsections as appropriate:
visually distracting. With proportional printing, the letter w is given more space than
the letter i, creating a more aesthetic and professional-looking line of text. (a) Explanation of the problem and its context
(b) A review of the literature
4.6.2 Typewritten Papers
(c) Explanation of thesis format This subsection explains the relationship of
Papers prepared on good quality electric typewriters are acceptable. All margin, the papers included and your contribution to each of the papers; where
paper quality, and typographic requirements apply. Type size should be Pica (10 cpi) doctoral research efforts are part of a larger collaborative project, you must
or Elite (12 cpi) be able to identify one aspect of the project as your own and demonstrate
an original contribution. Your role in the research and production of the
published paper(s) should be clearly specified.
2. A chapter titled PRESENT STUDY which summarizes the methods, results,

and conclusions of the research. The chapter should begin with a statement
such as:
The methods, results, and conclusions of this study are presented in the papers
appended to this thesis. The following is a summary of the most important
findings in these papers.
16 17
A.2 Appendices
Appendix B
All mechanical requirements for Appendices listed in the ORDER OF SECTIONS
apply. Your appendices will consist of:
Permissions
1. A reprint of each paper as a separate appendix in the following order:
(a) a copy of the title page of the journal in which the article appeared Use of copyrighted material in your thesis, including illustrations, usually requires
written permission from the copyright holder. Start this time-consuming process as
(b) the statement of permission for use of copyrighted material (see Appendix early as possible. Play it safe and assume that you must obtain permission if the
B: Permissions) material is copyrighted. Consult your advisor or departmental graduate secretary
(c) the reprint(s), copied single-sided onto the required type of paper about this process.
Exceptions, sometimes pertaining to small fractions of a musical score or other
2. Supplementary materials such as data tables, graphs, and maps which might document, are governed by the concept of ”fair use.” Factors weighed in determining
ordinarily appear as appendices to a thesis. ”fair use” include: the purpose of the use, whether commercial or non-profit and
educational; the nature of the copyrighted work; the amount and substance of the
These two types of appendices form a single sequence, assigned letters and titled material used in relation to the entire work; and the effect of the use upon the potential
as described in this manual. All Appendix pages are part of the single pagination market for or value of the copyrighted work. The ”fair use” concept is explained in
sequence of the thesis. The page numbers will be typed in as needed. detail in the Chicago Manual of Style. According to the Association of American
University Presses, permission is required for quotations which are complete units,
for example, an entire poem, letter, book chapter, or an entire map, chart, drawing
or other illustration.
Permission to use copyrighted material should be in writing and retained by the
author. The release letters should indicate that permission extends to microfilming
and publication by University Microfilms Incorporated and that the copyright owners
are aware that UMI may sell, on demand, single copies of the thesis, dissertation or
document, including the copyrighted materials, for scholarly purposes. UMI requires
copies of permission letters to be attached to the publication agreement, and assumes
no liability for copyright violations. If permission letters are not supplied, copyrighted
materials may not be filmed.
It is polite and good practice to obtain permission to use noncopyrighted material,
which may or may not be acknowledged in the text.
For additional information, telephone the Copyright Public Information Office in
Washington, DC, (202) 479-0700, weekdays between 8:30 a.m. and 5:00 p.m. EST or
write to the Copyright Office, Library of Congress, Washington D.C. 20559.
University of California
Document class base file: ucthesis.cls

Packages:
sw20uctd None
The front matter contains fields for the title, author, degree year and semester, degree name, committee chair-
person and members, previous degrees, academic field, campus, and abstract. The body of the document contains
the beginning and end of the frontmatter environment inside encapsulated TEX fields. Between the frontmatter TEX
fields are the dedication and acknowledgements, and encapsulated TEX fields to typeset the table of contents, list of
figures, and list of tables.
The Elements of Theses
by
The dissertation of A. U. Thor is approved:
A. U. Thor
B.A.(University of Northern South Dakota at Hoople) 1978

M.S. (Ed’s School of Quantum Mechanics and Muffler Repair Shop) 1989
Chair Date
A dissertation submitted in partial satisfaction of the
requirements for the degree of
in Date
Aboriginal Basketry
in the
Date
GRADUATE DIVISION
of the
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA, BERKELEY
University of California, Berkeley
Committee in charge:
Professor Abundant Knowledge, Chair
Professor Ivory Tower Spring 2004
Professor General Reference
Spring 2004
The Elements of Theses Abstract
The Elements of Theses
Copyright 2004 by
by
A. U. Thor
A. U. Thor
Doctor of Philosophy in Aboriginal Basketry
University of California, Berkeley
Professor Abundant Knowledge, Chair
We study the effects of warm water on the local penguin population. The major finding is
approximately −e−i¼ − 1. Replace this text with your own abstract.
Professor Abundant Knowledge

Dissertation Committee Chair
i ii
Contents
List of Figures iii
List of Tables iv
To my mother,who never gave up on me.
I First Part 1
1 Introduction 2

R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2.2 Mathematics in Section Heads ®¯ ln tdt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
2.3 Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environments . . . . . . . . 4

3.1 Section Headings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
3.1.1 Subsection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
3.2 Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
3.3 List Environments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
4 Conclusion 9
A Some Ancillary Material 10

iv v
Acknowledgments
I want to gratefully acknlowedge all those who helped me in this task.
List of Tables
1.1 A normalsize table. There has been a complaint that table captions are not
single-spaced. This is odd because the code indicates that they should be. . 2
1.2 A small table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
2 3
Chapter 1 Chapter 2
Introduction Sample Mathematics and Text
Every dissertation should have an introduction. You might not realize it, but the
introduction should introduce the concepts, background, and goals of the dissertation.
P∞
Title Author The expression i=1 ai is in-line mathematics, while the numbered equation
War And Peace Leo Tolstoy
∞
X
The Great Gatsby F. Scott Fitzgerald
ai (2.1)
Table 1.1: A normalsize table. There has been a complaint that table captions are not i=1
single-spaced. This is odd because the code indicates that they should be.

Table 1.2: A small table.
Title Author nonexpansive self map of C. Suppose that as n → ∞, an;k → 0 for each k, and ° n =
War And Peace Leo Tolstoy
The Great Gatsby F. Scott Fitzgerald P∞ P∞
− an;k )+ → 0. Then for each x in C, Anx = kx
k=0 (an;k+1 k=0 an;k T converges weakly
to a fixed point of T [?].
and below a display depends on whether the lines above or below are short or long, as shown

1A
4 6
A short line above:
x2 + y2 = z2

Chapter 3
displays, regardless of the margins. Features of this Shell

R¯
ln J@J
may cause difficulties in typesetting styles with running headers or table of contents entries.
3.1.1 Subsection
ments
Subsubsection
well-known fact on differentiation of asymptotic expansions of analytic functions. This is some harmless text under a subsubsection.
Lemma 1 Let f (z) be an analytic function in C+ . If f (z) admits the representation Subsubsubsection This is some harmless text under a subsubsubsection.
µ ¶
a1 1
f (z) = a0 + +o ,
z z Subsubsubsubsection This is some harmless text under a subsubsubsubsec-
for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ " = {z ∈ C+ : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then tion.
a1 = − lim z2f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" . (2.2)
9 10
Conclusion Some Ancillary Material
Every dissertation needs a conclusion, but clearly, we don’t see one here. Our Ancillary material should be put in appendices, which appear after the bibliogra-
conclusion is that this research was useless. phy.

University of Georgia

Packages:
uga None
The front matter contains fields for the title, author, previous degrees, degree name, degree type, degree month
and year, advisor’s name, full title for the thesis, index words, dean, committee members, and abstract. The body of
the document contains two pseudochapters for the acknowledgments and the preface. The body also contains a TEX
field for the table of contents and for the reference list, although you can use normal bibliography methods with this
style.
Michael A. Covington
Example of a Thesis Formatted with LaTeX Using the University of Georgia Style
Macro Package, Version 1.9a
(Under the direction of Abraham Baldwin) Example of a Thesis
Formatted with LaTeX

This is the abstract, a brief summary of the contents of the thesis. It is limited to
Using the University of Georgia
150 words in length for a master’s thesis or 350 words for a doctoral dissertation.
Style Macro Package, Version 1.9a
The abstract page(s) are not numbered and are not necessarily included in the
bound copies. Likewise, the signature page is not counted in page numbering because by
not all copies contain it.
B.A., The University of Georgia, 1977

Index words: word processing, computer typesetting, computer graphics,
M.Phil., Cambridge University, 1978
style sheets, typography, dissertations, theses (academic)
A Dissertation Submitted to the Graduate Faculty

of The University of Georgia in Partial Fulfillment
of the
Requirements for the Degree
Athens, Georgia
1991
Example of a Thesis
Formatted with LaTeX

Using the University of Georgia
Style Macro Package, Version 1.9a
by
c 1991
°
Michael A. Covington Approved:

All Rights Reserved
Major Professor
Date
Approved:
Graduate Dean
Date
Acknowledgements Preface
The acknowledgment is the place to thank the faculty, staff, family, and friends who This is the preface and it is created using a TeX field in a paragraph by itself. When
have assisted you in preparing your thesis or dissertation. You may also acknowledge the document is loaded, this appears in the edit window like a normal chapter, but it
any financial support or special research materials given you. Copyright permissions is actually an unnumbered chapter. The TeX field at the beginning of this paragraph
may also be acknowledged here by stating that: (1) permission has been granted sets the correct page heading for the Preface portion of the document. The preface
for reproduction of tables, tests, and other copyright protected items and (2) gives does not appear in the table of contents..
the source of the permission. Use a Preface rather than Acknowledgments when the
research is discussed, for example, ”the motivation for the study, the background
of the project, the scope of the research, and the purpose of the paper” (Turabian,
1996, p. 7-8).
ii iii
Table of Contents Chapter 1
Introduction
Page
Acknowledgements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii This document is an example of how to format a thesis or dissertation using LaTeX
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii and get results acceptable at The University of Georgia.
LaTeX (with its parent TeX) has two major advantages for academic use. First,
Chapter
to a remarkable degree it makes design decisions automatically. The author supplies
1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
only the words of a text, and LaTeX places them on the page in an aesthetic manner,
2 Sample Mathematics and Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
avoiding rivers and awkward breaks. In this respect LaTeX is like a very intelligent
2.1 In-line and Displayed Mathematics . . . . . . . . . . 3
typist or typesetter.
R¯
2.2 Mathematics in Section Heads ® ln tdt . . . . . . . . . 4
Second, LaTeX can typeset complex mathematical formulas such as
2.3 Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Envi- ∞
X p +q+r
xy+z =
ronments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 s + t+u + v
i=1
P∞ y+z p+q+r
3 Features of the Shell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 both displayed (as shown above) and in the text, as in i=1 x = s+t+u+v
. This
3.1 Section Headings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 makes TeX and LaTeX indispensable for mathematicians, physicists, and the like.
3.2 Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 LaTeX also has built—in formats for other kinds of displayed material such as
3.3 List Environments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 verse,
Bibliography . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Freude, schöne Götterfunken
Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Tochter aus Elysium,
Wir betreten, feuertrunken,

Himmlische, dein Heiligtum!
and direct quotations:
iv 1
The society that scorns excellence in plumbing, because plumbing is a
humble activity, and tolerates shoddiness in philosophy, because philos-

ophy is an exalted activity, will have neither good plumbing nor good
Chapter 2
philosophy. Neither its pipes nor its theories will hold water.
– John Gardner, Excellence Sample Mathematics and Text
If you wish, quotes and other displayed material can be single—spaced; here is an
example of how that is achieved:
P∞
Yes, I wrote “The Purple Cow.”
∞
X
I’m sorry now I wrote it.
ai (2.1)
But I can tell you anyhow
i=1
I’ll kill you if you quote it!
– Anonymous? is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 2.1.
Well, maybe it’s not as anonymous as it looks. There you have it.1 Whenever
you quote parts of a computer program in English text, they should be set off by P∞ + P∞ k
°n = k=0 (an;k+1 − a n;k) → 0. Then for each x in C , Anx = k=0 an;k T x
using typewriter type.
converges weakly to a fixed point of T [?].

A short line above:
x2 + y2 = z 2

1 mathematical displays, regardless of the margins.

This is a footnote. Notice that footnotes are single—spaced even though the text is
1 A
double—spaced. LT EX automatically selects the spacing depending on the surrounding line lengths.
3
4
R¯
may cause difficulties in typesetting styles with running headers or table of contents Chapter 3
entries.
Features of the Shell
A number of theorem-like environments is available. The following lemma is a well- 3.1 Section Headings


µ ¶ 3.1.1 Subsection
a1 1
f (z) = a0 + +o ,
z z This is some harmless text under a subsection.

Subsubsection
a1 = − lim z 2f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" . (2.2)
Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ" → Γ" = {z ∈ C − : z ∈ Γ "} and

f (1=z) = a0 + a 1z + o (z) . (2.3)
Fix z ∈ Γ", and let C r (z) = {¸ ∈ C− : |¸ − z| = r} be a circle with radius
r = |z| sin "=2. It follows from (2.3) that 3.2 Tags

Z Z
(¸ − z0 )m d¸
1
X
1 f (¸) d¸ 1
2 = am 2 + R(z), (2.4) You can apply the logical markup tag Emphasized.
2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z) m=0
2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z)
|R(z)| ≤ r−1 max o (|z|) = r −1 max |¸| · O (|z| + r) You can apply the special, mathematics only, tags BLACKBOARD BOLD,
¸∈CH (z) ¸∈CH (z)
|z| + r 1 + sin " CALLIGRAPHIC, and fraktur. Note that blackboard bold and calligraphic are
= · O (|z| + r) = · O (|z|) .
r sin " correct only when applied to uppercase letters A through Z.
Appendix
Bibliography
Some More Things
LaTeX has powerful bibliography—generating tools built in, and you’re welcome to
use them. If you don’t, you should use the “reflist” environment (a U.Ga. specialty) This is where an appendix could go. To include a single appendix simply place the
instead, and type your reference list, like this: command “\appendix” and then use the “\chapter*” command to begin and name
your appendix.
Abrahams, P. W.; Berry, K.; and Hargreaves, K. A. (1990) TeX for the Impatient.
If you have more than one appendix, use the command “\appendices” and the
Reading, Mass.: Addison—Wesley.
regular “\chapter” command to begin and name each appendix.
Knuth, D. E. (1984) The TeXbook. Reading, Mass.: Addison—Wesley.
Lamport, L. (1986) LaTeX: A Document Preparation System. Reading, Mass.:

Addison—Wesley.
9 10
University of New Mexico
Document class base file: unmeethesis.cls

Document class options botnum, fleqn
Packages:
None
The front matter contains a frontmatter tag and fields for the title, author, degree subject, degree, degree type,
previous degrees, date, and a tag to generate a copyright page. The body of the document contains fields for
the dedication and acknowledgments. The abstract is in the document body between encapsulated TEX fields and
encapsulated TEX fields are also used to generate the table of contents, list of figures, list of tables, and a glossary.
Thesis Title
by
A. U. Thor
°2004,
c A. U. Thor
A.A.S., University of Southern Swampland, 1988

M.S., Art Therapy, University of New Mexico, 1991
THESIS
Submitted in Partial Fulfillment of the

Requirements for the Degree of
Master of Science
Mathematics
The University of New Mexico
Albuquerque, New Mexico
December, 2004
iii
Dedication Acknowledgments
I would like to thank my advisor, Professor Martin Sheen, for his support and some
great action movies. I would also like to thank my dog, Spot, who only ate my
This work is dedicated to my mother and father and to the many others, though homework two or three times. I have several other people I would like to thank, as
unnamed, who helped me in the completion of this task. well. 1
“A bird in hand is worth two in the bush” — Anonymous
1To my brother and sister, who are really cool.
iv v
Thesis Title
Thesis Title
by
A. U. Thor
by
A.A.S., University of Southern Swampland, 1988
M.S., Art Therapy, University of New Mexico, 1991
A. U. Thor
M.S., Mathematics, University of New Mexico, 2004
ABSTRACT OF THESIS
Submitted in Partial Fulfillment of the Abstract

Requirements for the Degree of
Master of Science finding is that it is extremely difficult to induce penguins to drink warm water. The
Mathematics success factor is approximately −e−i¼ − 1. Replace this text with your own abstract.
The University of New Mexico
Albuquerque, New Mexico
December, 2004
vii
Contents Glossary
alm Taylor series coefficients, where l; m = {0::2}

List of Figures ix
Ap Complex-valued scalar denoting the amplitude and phase.
List of Tables x AT Transpose of some relativity matrix.
Glossary xi
Introduction xii
1.1 In-line and Displayed Mathematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

R¯
1.2 Mathematics in Section Heads ® ln tdt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.3 Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environments . . . . . 2
A Proving E = M C 2 4
B Derivation of A = ¼r 2 5
viii xi
Introduction Chapter 1
Every dissertation should have an introduction. You might not realize it, but the Sample Mathematics and Text
introduction should introduce the concepts, backgrouand, and goals of the disserta-
tion.
P∞
X
∞
ai (1.1)
i=1

nonexpansive self map of C . Suppose that as n → ∞, an;k → 0 for each k, and
P∞ + P∞ k
°n = k=0 (a n;k+1 − a n;k) → 0. Then for each x in C, An x = k=0 an;k T x
1LAT
xii 1
Chapter 1. Sample Mathematics and Text Chapter 1. Sample Mathematics and Text
A short line above: Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ " → Γ" = {z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ "} and
x2 + y2 = z 2 f (1=z) = a0 + a 1z + o (z) . (1.3)

Fix z ∈ Γ" , and let Cr (z) = {¸ ∈ C− : |¸ − z| = r} be a circle with radius
A long line above may depend on your margins r = |z| sin "=2. It follows from (1.3) that
sin2 µ + cos2 µ = 1 Z X 1 Z m
1 f (¸) d¸ 1 (¸ − z0) d¸
2 = am 2 + R(z), (1.4)
2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z) m=0
2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z)
mathematical displays, regardless of the margins. where for the remainder R(z) we have
R¯ |R(z)| ≤ r−1 max o (|z|) = r−1 max |¸| · O (|z| + r)

¸∈CH (z) ¸∈CH (z)
1.2 Mathematics in Section Heads ® ln J@J |z| + r 1 + sin "
= · O (|z| + r) = · O (|z|) .
r sin "
implies
entries.
d
1.3 Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like f (1=z) = a1 + R(z) → a 1, as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2,
dz
Environments that implies (1.2) by substituting 1=z back for z.


µ ¶
a1 1
f (z) = a0 + +o ,
z z
a1 = − lim z2f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ". (1.2)
2 3
Proving E = MC 2 Derivation of A = ¼r 2
I refer the reader to many of grandpa’s famous books on this subject. A circle is really a square without corners. QED.
4 5
University of New South Wales
Document class base file: unswthesis.cls

Packages:
None
The front matter contains a field to mark the frontmatter and fields for the title, author, degree, date, supervisor,
and assessor.
The University of New South Wales

School of Electrical Engineering and Contents
Computer Science and Engineering
1 Introduction 1
2 Applications 2
2.1 Biomedical Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
The Élan 3 Alternatives

3.0.1 Level 1 ISA Bus Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.0.2 Other Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
3
4
Am386SC300 4 Sample Mathematics and Text

R¯ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6
6
4.2 Mathematics in Section Heads ® ln tdt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Portable Computer 4.3 Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environments . . . . .
5 Features of this Shell

7
8
5.1.1 Subsection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
5.2 Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
John Zaitseff (2120715)
6 Conclusions 11
Bachelor of Engineering (Computer Engineering)
A Élan Computer Schematics 13
October 1995
Supervisor: A/Prof. Branko Celler

Assessor: Dr. Tim Hesketh
i
List of Tables Chapter 1
3.1 Selection of the Élan operating mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Introduction
3.2 ISA bus support, common subset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
3.3 Power Management Unit operating modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
One of the fastest growing areas of computing today is the area of portable, often
hand-held, devices. These highly-integrated computers are used in increasingly many
areas, especially as Personal Digital Assistants, including hand-held data loggers, bar
code scanners and meter readers.
This thesis describes the design of one such portable system, based on the Élan
microprocessor. This system features the use of the current state-of-the-art technology,
including high-density surface-mounted components, low battery power consumption,
and directly integrated support for the new PCMCIA standard.
Acknowledgements
The acknowledgment is the place to thank the faculty, staff, family, and friends who
have assisted you in preparing your thesis or dissertation. You may also acknowledge
any financial support or special research materials given you. Copyright permissions
may also be acknowledged here by stating that: (1) permission has been granted
for reproduction of tables, tests, and other copyright protected items and (2) gives
the source of the permission. Use a Preface rather than Acknowledgments when the
research is discussed, for example, ”the motivation for the study, the background of
the project, the scope of the research, and the purpose of the paper” (Turabian, 1996,
p. 7-8).
iii 1
Chapter 2 Chapter 3
Applications Alternatives
2.1 Biomedical Applications In Chapter 2, we saw a number of applications in which a portable computer may be
used.
The rôle of the Élan Portable Computer, the system this thesis describes, in such ...
biomedical systems would be to actually take the place of the hand-held device taking The Élan CPU chooses the configuration mode at reset time, on the rising edge
data readings, or as part of the instrumentation modules placed around the house. of RESIN, by sampling the state of three pins: DTR, RTS and SOUT. These pins are
The requirements of the Élan Portable Computer in such systems are described in the usually used for serial port output, except for their special function at reset. To select
next chapter. one of the modes, we place 10 kΩ pull-up or pull-down resistors on these pins, as per
This paragraph is so important that we’ll repeat it for emphasis. The rôle of the Table 3.1. In this table, a “1” indicates pull-up, “0” indicates pull-down, and “X”
Élan Portable Computer, the system this thesis describes, in such biomedical systems indicates that no resistor is required.
would be to actually take the place of the hand-held device taking data readings, or
as part of the instrumentation modules placed around the house. The requirements of 3.0.1 Level 1 ISA Bus Support
the Élan Portable Computer in such systems are described in the next chapter.
Table 3.2 shows the meaning of the pins used in this mode.
Before we continue, a few points to note about the notation:
• A pin name like PIN indicates either an active-high pin (i.e., where the pin is
asserted when it is at a High level, generally either 3.3 V or 5 V), or a rising-edge
Pin state at reset

Mode Selected
DTR RTS SOUT
0 0 X Internal CGA
1 0 0 Local bus, 1 × clock
1 0 1 Local bus, 2 × clock
X 1 X Maximum ISA
0 = pull-down resistor (to GND)
1 = pull-up resistor (to VCC5)
X = no resistor
Table 3.1: Selection of the Élan operating mode
2 3
3. Alternatives 4 3. Alternatives 5
Pin Name Typea Function

AEN O DMA address enable (DMA cycle)
TC O DMA terminal count
SYSCLK O System clock b
PIRQ1 I Programmable interrupt request 1
DRQ2 I DMA channel 2 request
X1OUT / BAUDOUT O Video clock or serial port clock
MCS16 I Memory device is 16-bitc
IOCS16 I I/O device is 16-bitc
SBHE O Byte high enablec
IRQ14 I Interrupt request 14c
Table 3.2: ISA bus support, common subset
Mode Description
pin (i.e., where the pin is asserted on the rising edge, from Low to High, of a Full speed All clocks are at fastest speed and all peripherals
pulse). are powered up.
Low speed CPU clock is reduced to a lower speed; all other
• A name like PIN is the opposite: it indicates an active-low pin, or one that is clocks are at full speed.
asserted on the falling-edge High to Low of a signal. Doze CPU, system and DMA clocks, as well as the high-
speed phase-locked loop, are stopped.
• A name like PIN[3:0] is shorthand for pins individually named PIN0, PIN1, PIN2 Sleep Additional clocks and peripherals are stopped (de-
and PIN3. pending on the programmed settings), as is the se-
rial port controller (UART).
• All pins are with reference to the microprocessor, i.e., “Output” means output Suspend A special BIOS routine is invoked to save the system
from the processor to external peripherals. state, then virtually all of the system is powered
down. The phase-locked loops are turned off.
The following is a description of the pins listed in Table 3.2. Much of this informa- Off A powered-down mode in which PGP2 and PGP3
tion is from pages 39 to 49 of the Data Book [2], although some critical information are set to a predefined state. Memory refresh is still
active. No activity can cause the processor to leave
is not listed in any part of the supplied documentation...
this state, except for a power-on reset.
These modes are summarised in Table 3.3; see also pages 9—15 of the Data Book [2].
Table 3.3: Power Management Unit operating modes
3.0.2 Other Remarks

One of the additional features of the internal video controller is that it may be pro-
grammed to appear in the I/O location for a CGA controller (3D4h—3DAh) or in the
I/O location for a Hercules Graphics Adapter (3B4h—3BFh).
R¯
entries.
Chapter 4
ronments
4.1 In-line and Displayed Mathematics Lemma 1 Let f (z) be an analytic function in C+. If f (z) admits the representation
µ ¶
P∞ a1 1
The expression i=1 ai is in-line mathematics, while the numbered equation f (z) = a0 + +o ,
z z
∞
X
ai (4.1) for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ" = {z ∈ C+ : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then
i=1
a1 = −lim z2 f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" . (4.2)
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset of H, T a Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ" → Γ" = {z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ" } and
P P∞ k f (1=z) = a0 + a1z + o (z) . (4.3)
°n = ∞ k=0 (an;k+1 − an;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C, An x =
+
k=0 an;k T x con-
verges weakly to a fixed point of T [?].
Fix z ∈ Γ" , and let Cr (z) = {¸ ∈ C− : |¸ − z| = r} be a circle with radius r =
|z| sin"=2. It follows from (4.3) that
Z Z
(¸ − z0)m d¸
1
X
shown in the following examples. 1 f (¸) d¸ 1
= am + R(z), (4.4)
A short line above: 2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z)2 m=0 2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z)2
x2 + y2 = z 2
A long line above may depend on your margins |R(z)| ≤ r−1 max o (|z|) = r−1 max |¸| · O (|z| + r)
¸∈CH (z) ¸∈CH (z)
|z| + r 1 + sin "
sin2 µ + cos2 µ = 1 = · O (|z| + r) = · O (|z|) .
r sin "
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for mathe- Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2 , and hence by the Cauchy theorem (4.4)
matical displays, regardless of the margins. implies
1 A
LT EX automatically selects the spacing depending on the surrounding line lengths. d
f (1=z) = a1 + R(z) → a1, as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2,
dz
6
Chapter 6 Bibliography
Conclusions [1] “Development of a Range of PCMCIA Type III Instrumentation Modules for Clin-
ical Measurement, based on the PoqetPad Plus Pen-based Computer ”, Branko
Celler, Biomedical Systems Laboratory, University of NSW, Australia, 23rd June
1993.
In conclusion, this project has been very challenging, but very interesting as well. [2] “ Élan Am386SC300 Microprocessor Data Sheet ”, Mobile Computing Products Di-
Although we were not able to proceed with the implementation, we are more than vision of Advanced Micro Devices, Inc.
reasonably satisfied that the design is sound and thorough. If the project is continued
[3] “ Élan Am386SC300 Microprocessor Programmers’ Reference Manual”, Mobile
in the next year, the Élan Portable Computer will eventually emerge as a symbol of Computing Products Division of Advanced Micro Devices, Inc.
today’s modern computing.
[4] “PC Interrupt List” Ralf Brown, Release 47, August 1995. Available as
ftp://ftp.cs.cmu.edu/afs/cs.cmu.edu/user/ralf/pub/inter47*.zip
[5] “PCMCIA Standards”, “PC Card Standard 2.1”, “Socket Services Specification
2.1 ”, “Card Services Specification 2.1 ”, “PC Card ATA Specification 1.02 ”,
“AIMS Specification 1.01 ”, “Recommended Extensions 1.0 ”, Personal Computer
Memory Card International Association, July 1993.
11 12
Appendix A
Élan Computer Schematics
The following pages show the final Élan Portable Computer schematics. The actual
schematics are in the following order:
1. System Block Diagram

2. Élan Microprocessor
3. Miscellaneous
4. System Memory
5. Display Interface
6. PCMCIA Buffers
7. PCMCIA Connectors
8. Parallel Port
9. Serial Port
10. Keyboard Connector
11. Expansion Connector
12. DC/DC Power

13. Power Switching
13
University of Pittsburgh
Document class base file: pittetd.cls

Packages:
None None
The front matter contains fields for the title, short title, author, degree, date, school, committee member names,
and abstract.
SAMPLE FILE FOR A THESIS WITH THE UNIVERSITY OF PITTSBURGH
MATHEMATICS DEPARTMENT
‘PITTETD’ CLASS
by This dissertation was presented
I. M. Student by
Previous degree, institution, year

I. M. Student
It was defended on
July 20th 1967
Submitted to the Graduate Faculty of and approved by
Chair’s name, Departmental Affiliation

the Department of Mathematics in partial fulfillment
Second member’s name, Dept. Aff.
of the requirements for the degree of
Third member’s name, Dept. Aff.
Dissertation Advisors: Chair’s name, Departmental Affiliation,
Second advisor, Dept. Aff.
University of Pittsburgh
2004
ii
University of Pittsburgh 407
SAMPLE FILE FOR A THESIS WITH THE ‘PITTETD’ CLASS TABLE OF CONTENTS
I. M. Student, PhD
University of Pittsburgh, 2004

1.0 SAMPLE MATHEMATICS AND TEXT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
This document is a sample file for the creation of ETD’s at Pitt through LATEX. 1.1 In-line and Displayed Mathematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
R¯
1.2 Mathematics in Section Heads ® ln tdt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.3 Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environments . . . . . . . . . 3
BIBLIOGRAPHY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
APPENDIX. TITLE OF APPENDIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
iii 1
R¯
1.2 MATHEMATICS IN SECTION HEADS ®
LN TDT
1.0 SAMPLE MATHEMATICS AND TEXT

1.3 THEOREMS, LEMMATA, AND OTHER THEOREM-LIKE
ENVIRONMENTS
1.1 IN-LINE AND DISPLAYED MATHEMATICS
P∞
The expression i=1 ai is in-line mathematics, while the numbered equation fact on differentiation of asymptotic expansions of analytic functions.
X
∞ Lemma 1. Let f (z) be an analytic function in C+ . If f (z) admits the representation
ai (1.1)
µ ¶
i=1 a1 1
f (z) = a0 + +o ,
z z
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset of H, T a non- for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ " = {z ∈ C + : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then
expansive self map of C . Suppose that as n → ∞, an;k → 0 for each k, and ° n =
P∞ P∞ k
a1 = − lim z 2 f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ". (1.2)
k=0 (an;k+1 − an;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C, A n x = k=0 an;k T x converges weakly to
+
a fixed point of T . Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ" → Γ" = {z ∈ C − : z ∈ Γ" } and
below a display depends on whether the lines above or below are short or long, as shown in f (1=z) = a0 + a1z + o (z) . (1.3)

Fix z ∈ Γ", and let Cr (z) = {¸ ∈ C− : |¸ − z| = r} be a circle with radius r = |z| sin "=2. It
A short line above:
x2 + y 2 = z 2
Z Z
(¸ − z0)m d¸
1
X
1 f (¸) d¸ 1
and a short line below. 2 = am 2 + R(z), (1.4)
2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z) m=0
2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z)
¸∈CH (z) ¸∈CH (z)
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for mathematical |z| + r 1 + sin "
= · O (|z| + r) = · O (|z|) .
displays, regardless of the margins. r sin "
1 A
LT EX automatically selects the spacing depending on the surrounding line lengths. Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2, and hence by the Cauchy theorem (1.4) implies
2 3
d
f (1=z) = a1 + R(z) → a1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2,
dz
Following is a short bibliography. It has no relationship to the previous text, but can be
BIBLIOGRAPHY
used to show sample citations such as [4] and [6]. This typesetting style places each citation
inside square brackets. If you want multiple citations to appear in a single set of square
brackets you must type all of the citation keys inside a single citation, separating each with [1] American Petroleum Institute, Technical Data Book - Petroleum Refining, 5th edition,
a comma. Here is an example: [2, 3, 4]. 1992
[5] Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E., Molecular thermodynamics for fluid-
Head Head Head

entry entry entry
entry entry entry
entry entry entry
Table 1: Sample table.
4 5
APPENDIX
TITLE OF APPENDIX
This is the Appendix.
6
University of Washington
Document class base file: uwthesis.cls

Packages:
None
The front matter contains a field to mark the preliminary pages and fields for the title, author, year, degree,
committee member names, copyright information, and abstract.
Thesis Title University of Washington

Graduate School
This is to certify that I have examined this copy of a doctoral dissertation by

A. U. Thor
A. U. Thor
and have found that it is complete and satisfactory in all respects,

and that any and all revisions required by the final
examining committee have been made.
A dissertation submitted in partial fulfillment of
the requirements for the degree of
Chair of Supervisory Committee:
Name of Chairperson
University of Washington Reading Committee:
2000 Name of Committee member
Name of Committee member
etc
Program Authorized to Offer Degree: Computing & Communications

Date:
University of Washington
Abstract
Thesis Title
by A. U. Thor
Extensive copying of this demonstration thesis, including its input files and macro package, Chair of Supervisory Committee:
is allowable for scholarly purposes, consistent with “fair use” as prescribed in the U.S. Professor Name of Chairperson
Copyright Law. Requests for copying or reproduction of this thesis may be avoided by a Chair’s department
simple connection to the author’s web site at

http://staff.washington.edu/fox/tex/uwthesis.html This sample dissertation is an aid to students who are attempting to format their theses
where all the necessary files and documentation may be found. with LATEX, a sophisticated text formatter widely available at the University of Washington
and other institutions of higher learning.
It describes the use of a specialized macro package developed specifically for thesis produc-
Signature tion at the University. The macros customize LATEX for the correct thesis style, allowing
the student to concentrate on the substance of his or her text.
Date It demonstrates the solutions to a variety of formatting challenges found in thesis produc-
tion.
It serves as a template for a real dissertation.
TABLE OF CONTENTS GLOSSARY
ARGUMENT: replacement text which customizes a LATEX macro for each particular usage.
List of Figures ii
BACK-UP: a copy of a file to be used when catastrophe strikes the original. People who
List of Tables iii
make no back-ups deserve no sympathy.
Glossary iv
CONTROL SEQUENCE: the normal form of a command to LATEX.
Chapter 1: Sample Mathematics and Text 1
DELIMITER: something, often a character, that indicates the beginning and ending of
1.1 In-line and Displayed Mathematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
R an argument. More generally, a delimiter is a field separator.
1.2 Mathematics in Section Heads ®¯ lntdt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.3 Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environments . . . . . . . . . 2 DOCUMENT CLASS: a file of macros that tailors LATEX for a particular document. The
macros described by this thesis constitute a document class.
Appendix A: Proving E = MC2 3
Appendix B: Derivation of A = ¼r2 4 DOCUMENT OPTION: a macro or file of macros that further modifies LATEX for a partic-
ular document. The option [chapternotes] constitutes a document option.
Bibliography 6
FIGURE: illustrated material, including graphs, diagrams, drawings and photographs.
FONT: a character set (the alphabet plus digits and special symbols) of a particular size
and style. A couple of fonts used in this thesis are twelve point roman and twelve
point roman slanted.
FOOTNOTE: a note placed at the bottom of a page, end of a chapter, or end of a thesis
that comments on or cites a reference for a designated part of the text.
FORMATTER: (as opposed to a word-processor) arranges printed material according to

instructions embedded in the text. A word-processor, on the other hand, is normally
controlled by keyboard strokes that move text about on a display.
i iv
ACKNOWLEDGMENTS DEDICATION
The author wishes to express sincere appreciation to University Computing Services, To Mother
where he has had the opportunity to work with the TEX formatting system, and to the
author of TEX, Donald Knuth, il miglior fabbro.
The fake author wishes to express sincere appreciation to University Computing Services,
where he has had the opportunity to work with the TEX formatting system, and to the
author of TEX, Donald Knuth, il miglior fabbro.
vi vii
1 2
R¯
Chapter 1

1.1 In-line and Displayed Mathematics A number of theorem-like environments is available. The following lemma is a well-known
P∞ fact on differentiation of asymptotic expansions of analytic functions.
∞
X Lemma 1 Let f (z) be an analytic function in C+. If f (z) admits the representation
ai (1.1) µ ¶
i=1 a1 1
f (z) = a0 + + o ,
z z
expansive self map of C. Suppose that as n → ∞, an;k → 0 for each k, and °n = a1 = − limz2 f0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ". (1.2)
P∞ P∞ k
k=0 (an;k+1 − an;k) → 0. Then for each x in C, Anx = k=0 an;k T x converges weakly
+
Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ" → Γ" = {z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ"} and
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays.1 The spacing above and f (1=z) = a0 + a1z +o (z) . (1.3)
below a display depends on whether the lines above or below are short or long, as shown in
Fix z ∈ Γ", and let Cr (z) = {¸ ∈ C− : |¸ −z| = r} be a circle with radius r = |z| sin"=2.
A short line above: Z Z
(¸ − z0)m d¸
1
1 f (¸) d¸ X 1
x2 + y2 = z2 = am + R(z), (1.4)
2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z)2 m=0 2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z)2
and a short line below. where for the remainder R(z) we have
|R(z)| ≤ r−1 max o(|z|) = r−1 max |¸| · O(|z| + r)
¸∈CH (z) ¸∈CH (z)
sin2 µ + cos2 µ = 1 |z| + r 1 + sin"
= · O(|z| +r) = · O (|z|) .
r sin "
Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2, and hence by the Cauchy theorem (1.4) implies
d
1 A
LTEX automatically selects the spacing depending on the surrounding line lengths. f (1=z) = a1 + R(z) → a1, as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2,
dz
3 5
Appendix A VITA
PROVING E = MC2
Arthor U. Thor was born in an insignificant town whose only claim to fame is that it
produced such a fine specimen of a researcher.
I refer the reader to many of grandpa’s famous books on this subject.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
[1] American Petroleum Institute, Technical Data Book - Petroleum Refining, 5th edition,
1992
BibTEX
Using BibTEX with SWP or SW
If the shell for your SWP or SW document supports bibliographies, you can create au-
tomatic bibliographies with BibTEX, a public domain program created by Oren Patash-
nik. BibTEX uses the citations you insert into your document to extract bibliographic
information from established reference databases. When you compile your document,
BibTEX generates the bibliography, storing it in a file with the same name as your docu-
ment but with a .bbl extension. When you typeset, LATEX includes the .bbl file in your
document, formatting it and the citations according to the bibliography style you have
selected.
You must typeset your document to generate a BibTEX bibliography and the citations
that refer to it. If you don’t typeset, the bibliography and citation cross-references aren’t
generated. The bibliography doesn’t appear on the preview screen or in print, and the
citations appear in shaded boxes as they do in the document window.
Creating a BibTEX bibliography involves several steps:
• Creating or obtaining a BibTEX database.
• Specifying a BibTEX bibliography.
• Inserting an instruction to include the bibliography file, select the database, and spec-
ify the style.
• Creating citations in your document that refer to the entries in the selected database.
• Generating the bibliography.
Detailed instructions for creating a BibTEX bibliography appear in the online Help and
in Creating Documents with Scientific WorkPlace and Scientific Word. Additional infor-
mation about BibTEX is available if you typeset preview the btxdoc.dvi and btx-
hak.dvi files in the TCITeX\doc\BibTeX subdirectory of your program installa-
tion.
Understanding BibTEX Databases

BibTEX databases contain information about publications of widely varied types, in-
cluding articles, books and sets of books, booklets, collections and the articles they
contain, manuals, theses, dissertations, proceedings and the papers they contain, techni-
cal reports, unpublished work, and other miscellaneous publications. Each publication
included in a BibTEX database has an optional key and some basic information required
by BibTEX, as for this article:
@ARTICLE{article-minimal,
author = {L[eslie] A. Aamport},
title = {The Gnats and Gnus Document Preparation Sys-
416 Chapter 10 Using BibTEX with SWP or SW
tem},
journal = {\mbox{G-Animal’s} Journal},
year = 1986,
}
Entries may also contain some optional information, as shown here:
@ARTICLE{article-full,
author = {L[eslie] A. Aamport},
title = {The Gnats and Gnus Document Preparation Sys-
tem},
journal = {\mbox{G-Animal’s} Journal},
year = 1986,
volume = 41,
number = 7,
pages = "73+",
month = jul,
note = "This is a full ARTICLE entry",
}
The database information is stored in a logical format with no visual formatting infor-
mation. The bibliography style you choose determines which information to use when
you cite the publication and determines how to order, format, and punctuate it in the
citation itself and in the reference list of your document.
Although BibTEX databases are available from various sources, you can create your
own. One tool for creating, manipulating, and managing a bibliographic database is
the freely distributed program BibDB. Your program CD includes the Windows version
of BibDB in the WinBibDB subdirectory, and it is installed if you select the complete
installation type when SWP or SW was installed. The details of using BibDB to create
and edit BibTEX databases are outside the scope of this document, but more information
is available in the WinBibDB subdirectory and in many LATEX books.
Understanding BibTEX Bibliography Styles

LATEX formats BibTEX bibliographies and citations according to the bibliography style
that you select. BibTEX styles are widely available; over 100 are included with SWP
and SW, and others are available from the Comprehensive TEX Archive Network (CTAN)
at http://www.ctan.org. BibTEX styles carry the extension .bst and are installed in the
TCITeX\BibTeX\bst subdirectory and additional subdirectories below this level of
your program installation. Although you can change the directory used for BibTEX
databases and styles, we recommend that you leave the directory locations unchanged.
Most of the bibliography styles provided with SWP and SW are appropriate for
creating bibliographies, reference lists, and citations in books, articles, and other doc-
uments. Some styles have special uses, such as for creating bibliographies in HTML
documents or creating personal address books. Although many of the styles produce
similar results, no two are identical. Many have been designed to meet the editorial
requirements of specific journals or publishers. Some require specific packages or docu-
ment classes. Just as you choose a document shell with care, so too should you choose a
bibliography style. Make certain the style you choose produces citations and references
Selecting a BibTEX Bibliography Style 417
appropriate for your work. If you are unsure of your requirements, we urge you to use
one of these standard BibTEX styles:
BibTEX Style Format
abbrv.bst Entries are labeled with numbers and sorted alphabetically,
with first names, months, and journal names abbreviated.
alpha.bst Entries are sorted alphabetically and labeled using an
abbreviation of the author’s name and the publication date.
plain.bst Entries are labeled with numbers and sorted alphabetically.
unsrt.bst Entries are labeled with numbers and appear in the order
of first citation.
Selecting a BibTEX Bibliography Style

As noted above, creating a BibTEX bibliography for your SWP or SW document in-
volves several steps, including selecting the bibliography style (.bst) file you want to
use to format the database information. You initially select the style when you include
the .bbl file in your document, but you can change the selection at any time.
I To select a bibliography style

1. Make sure you have chosen a BibTEX bibliography for your document: from the
Typeset menu, choose Bibliography Choice, choose BibTeX, and then choose OK.
2. If the instruction to include the bibliography, which appears as , has

already been added to the document, place the insertion point to its right and choose
Properties.
or
If the instruction has not yet been added, insert it:
a. Move the insertion point to the end of the line that is to precede the bibliography
and press E NTER .
b. On the Typeset Object toolbar, click the Bibliography button or, from the
Insert menu, choose Typeset Object, and then choose Bibliography.
c. From the BibTeX Bibliography dialog box, select the database files containing the
references you want to cite. More than one BibTEX database file can be selected.
3. In the Style area of the BibTeX Bibliography dialog box, select the BibTEX style
for formatting the references and citations.
4. Choose OK.
To help you select a suitable bibliography style, this chapter provides information
about many of the bibliography styles included with the program. The chapter indicates
how each style formats citations and the corresponding reference list labels and how
418 Chapter 10 Using BibTEX with SWP or SW
it organizes the reference list. For each style, the chapter notes the names of sample
databases provided and required programs, LATEX packages, or LATEX documentclasses,
if any. It also includes brief information about the origin and intended use of the style
and a sample typeset page showing a paragraph with citations and the corresponding
reference list formatted according to the style.
Unless otherwise noted, the sample pages were created with the Standard LATEX Ar-
ticle document shell. Therefore, the reference list carries the title References. With
the Standard LATEX Book or Report shells, the reference list carries the title Bibliogra-
phy. Also unless otherwise noted, the pages were created using the sample database
xampl.bib.
BibTEX Bibliography Styles
420 Chapter 11 BibTEX Bibliography Styles
aaai-named.bst
Format of reference list label [Author, date]
[Author and Author date]
[Author et al., date]
Organization of reference list Alphabetical by author
Format of citation [Author, date]
[Author and Author, date]
Required files aaai-named.sty
Directory TCITeX/BibTeX/bst/beebe
The style supports short citations (year only) and requires certain redefinitions in the typesetting specifications
to work properly.
I To modify the typesetting specifications for aaai-named.bst

1. Using an ASCII editor, open a new file and enter the following lines of code:
\let\@internalcite\cite
\def\cite{\def\citename##1{##1}\@internalcite}
\def\shortcite{\def\citename##1{}\@internalcite}
\def\@biblabel#1{\def\citename##1{##1}[#1]\hfill}
2. Save the file in the TCITeX/TeX/LaTeX/TCImisc directory of your program installation using the name
aaai-named.sty.
3. Open your document in SWP or SW and follow the standard procedure to add the package aaai-named.sty
to your document.
4. Create the citations and generate the BibTEX bibliography.

aaai-named.bst 421
Sample Citations and Bibliography

Example using aaai-named
BibTeX has been selected for the bibliography choice in this shell document.
One of the sample BibTeX databases included with SW has been selected and
some citations added in the next sentence. This sentence refers to the arti-
cle [Lincoll, 1977] in a collection, the article [Oaho et al., 1983] in a proceed-
ings, the article [Aamport, 1986], the book [Knuth, 1973c1981], the booklet
[Knvth, 1988], and to the thesis [Phony-Baloney, 1988]. Combined citations like
[Lincoll, 1977, Aamport, 1986] may have special appearance. The bibliography
References
[Aamport, 1986] L[eslie] A. Aamport. The gnats and gnus document prepa-
ration system. G-Animal’s Journal, 41(7):73+, July 1986. This is a full
ARTICLE entry.
[Knuth, 1973c1981] Donald E. Knuth. Seminumerical Algorithms, volume 2
of The Art of Computer Programming. Addison-Wesley, Reading, Mas-
sachusetts, second edition, 10 January 1981. This is a full BOOK entry.
[Knvth, 1988] Jill C. Knvth. The programming of computer art. Vernier Art
Center, Stanford, California, February 1988. This is a full BOOKLET entry.
[Lincoll, 1977] Daniel D. Lincoll. Semigroups of recurrences. In David J. Lip-
coll, D. H. Lawrie, and A. H. Sameh, editors, High Speed Computer and
Algorithm Organization, number 23 in Fast Computers, part 3, pages 179—
183. Academic Press, New York, third edition, September 1977. This is a full
INCOLLECTION entry.
[Oaho et al., 1983] Alfred V. Oaho, Jeffrey D. Ullman, and Mihalis Yannakakis.
On notions of information transfer in VLSI circuits. In Wizard V. Oz and
Mihalis Yannakakis, editors, Proc. Fifteenth Annual ACM Symposium on the
Theory of Computing, number 17 in All ACM Conferences, pages 133—139,
Boston, March 1983. The OX Association for Computing Machinery, Aca-
demic Press. This is a full INPROCEDINGS entry.
[Phony-Baloney, 1988] F. Phidias Phony-Baloney. Fighting Fire with Fire: Fes-
tooning French Phrases. PhD dissertation, Fanstord University, Department
of French, June-August 1988. This is a full PHDTHESIS entry.
1
aabbrv.bst
Format of reference list label [number]
Format of citation [number]
Required files LaTeX/contrib/other/BibTeX/apreambl.tex
Directory TCITeX/BibTeX/bst/abstyles
Sample BibTEX Database:
acompat.bib Contains compatibility definitions for use with standard styles;
does not contain any actual bibliography records.
The style is one of the BibTEX ‘adaptable’ family of styles derived by Hans-Hermann Bode. The program
automatically inputs the file apreambl.tex to the document before the bibliography command appears.
The style abbreviates first names, month names, and journal names in the entries. Otherwise, it is the same as
aplain.bst, which sorts entries alphabetically and labels them with numbers.
Sample Citations and B ibliography

Example using aabbrv
Bib TeX has been selected for the b ib liograp hy choice in this shell d ocu ment.
O ne of the sample BibTeX d at ab ases includ ed with S W has been selected and
some citation s add ed in t he next sentence. This sent ence refers to the article
[4] in a collect ion, th e article [5] in a proceed in gs, th e art icle [1], th e book [2],
t he b ooklet [3], and to t he thes is [6]. Comb in ed citations like [4, 1] may h ave
special appearance. Th e bibliography section for th ese citation s comes n ext.
References
[1] L. A. A ampo rt. The gnats and gnus d ocument preparation system.
G-Anim al’s Journal 41(7), 73+ (July 1986). This is a full ART ICL E entry.
[2] D. E. K nuth. “S em inu merical Algorith ms”, vol. 2 of “Th e Art of C om-
pu ter Programming”. Ad dison-Wesley, Readin g, Massachusetts, secon d ed.
(10 Jan . 1981) . T his is a full BOOK entry.
[3] J. C. Knv th . T he p rogramming of com puter ar t. Vern ier Art Center,

St an ford, C alifornia (Feb . 1988) . T his is a full BOOKLET entry.
[4] D. D. Linco ll. Semigroups of recurrences. In D. J. Lipcoll, D . H.

Lawrie , and A. H. Same h, editors, “High S peed Comp uter an d Algorith m
Organizat ion”, no. 23 in Fast C omput er s, part 3, pp. 179—183. Academic
Press, New York, t hird ed. ( Sept. 1977). T his is a full INCO LLEC TIO N
entry.
[5] A. V. Oa ho, J. D. Ullman, and M. Yanna kak is. On notions of in-
formation transfer in VLSI circuits. In W . V. Oz and M . Yan nakakis,
editors, “Proc. Fifteenth An nual ACM S ymp osium on the T heory of C om-
pu ting”, n o. 17 in All AC M Conferences, pp. 133—139, Boston (Mar. 1983).
The OX Associat ion for C omp uting Machin ery, Academic Press. T his is a
full INPRO CED ING S ent ry.
[6] F. P. Phon y-Balone y. “Fighting Fire with Fire: Festooning Fren ch

Phr ases”. PhD d is sertation , Fanstord University, Department of Fren ch
(Jun e-Aug. 1988). This is a fu ll PHDTHESIS entr y.
1
aalpha.bst 423
aalpha.bst
Format of reference list label [Source label]

Format of citation [Source label]
Required files TCITeX/TeX/LaTeX/contrib/other/BibTeX/apreambl.tex
The style uses source labels such as Knu66, formed from the author’s name and the year of publication. Other-
wise, it is the same as aplain.bst, which sorts entries alphabetically.

Example using aalpha
[Lin77] in a collection , th e article [O UY83] in a p roceedings, th e article [Aam86],
t he b ook [Knu 81], t he booklet [Knv88], and to t he t hesis [PB88]. C ombined
citation s like [Lin77, Aam86] may h ave sp ecial ap pearance. T he b ibliogr aphy
sect ion for these citat ions comes next .
References
[Aam86] L[e slie] A . A amp ort. The gnats and gnu s document p reparation
syst em . G-An im al’s Journ al 41(7), 73+ (July 1986). This is a full
ARTIC LE entry.
[Knu 81] Don ald E. Knuth. “Seminumerical Algorith ms”, volume 2 of “Th e
Art of Comput er Programming”. Addison-Wesley, Readin g, Mas-
sachu setts, second edition (10 January 1981). T his is a full B OOK
entry.
[Knv88] Jill C . Knvth. The programming of comp uter art. Vernier Art Cen-
ter, Stan ford, C alifornia ( February 1988). T his is a fu ll B OOK LET
entry.
[Lin77] Daniel D. L incoll. Semigrou ps of recurrences. In David J. Lip -

coll, D. H. Lawrie , and A . H. Sameh, ed itors, “High Speed
C omp uter and Algorithm Organization”, nu mber 23 in Fast C omp ut-
ers, part 3, pages 179—183. Academic Press, New York, third edition
(Sep tember 1977) . This is a full INCO LLECT IO N entry.
[OUY83] A lfred V. Oaho, Jeffre y D. Ullman , and Mihalis Yan -
nak akis. On n ot ions of information transfer in VLSI circuits. In
W izard V. Oz and Miha lis Yannak akis , editors, “Proc. Fifteenth
Annu al AC M Symp osium on the Th eory of Compu ting”, numb er 17
in All AC M Conferen ces, pages 133—139, Boston (M arch 1983). Th e
OX Association for Comput in g M achinery, Academic Press. This is a
full INPRO CEDING S ent ry.
[PB88] F. Ph idias Pho ny-Balo ney. “Fightin g Fire with Fire: Festooning
French Phrases”. PhD dissertation, Fans tord University, Departm ent
of French ( Ju ne-Au gust 1988). T his is a full PHDTHESIS entry.
1
abbrv.bst
Directory TCITeX/BibTeX/bst/base
One of the BibTEX standard bibliography styles, abbrv.bst creates compact entries by abbreviating first
names, month names, and journal names. Otherwise, it is the same as plain.bst, which sorts entries alphabeti-
cally and labels them with numbers.

Example using abbrv
References
[1] L. A. Aamp ort. The gn ats and gnus do cument preparation system.
G-Anim al’s Journal, 41(7):73+, Ju ly 1986. Th is is a full ART ICLE entry.
[2] D. E. Knuth. S em inumerical Algori thms, volume 2 of The Art of Com-

puter Programm in g. Ad dison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, second ed i-
tion, 10 Jan. 1981. Th is is a full BO OK entry.
[3] J. C. Knvth. T he p rogramming of compu ter art. Vernier Art Center, Stan-
ford, C alifornia, Feb. 1988. This is a full BO OKLET entry.
[4] D. D . Lincoll. Semigroup s of recurrences. In D. J. Lip coll, D. H. Law rie, and

A. H. Sameh, editors, High Speed Com puter and Algorithm O rgan ization ,
numb er 23 in Fast Comp uters, p art 3, p ages 179—183. Academic Press, New
York, third edition, Sept. 1977. T his is a full INCOLLEC TIO N entry.
[5] A. V. Oaho, J. D. Ullman, an d M. Yann akakis. On notions of information

transfer in VLSI circuits. In W. V. Oz and M. Yannakakis, editors, Proc .
Fifteenth An nual AC M Symposium on the Theory of Com puting, number 17
in All AC M C onferences, pages 133—139, Boston, M ar. 1983. Th e OX Asso-
ciation for C omput in g Machinery, Academic Press. Th is is a full INPRO-
CEDINGS entry.
[6] F. P. Phony-Baloney. Fig hting Fire with Fire: Festooning Frenc h Phrase s.
PhD dissert ation, Fanstord University, Dep artment of Fr ench , Jun e-Aug.
1988. T his is a full PHDTHESIS entry.
1
achemso.bst 425
achemso.bst
Organization of reference list In order of first citation
Directory TCITeX/BibTeX/bst/achemso
The style is provided with the achemso package, which produces bibliographies appropriate for use with the
American Chemical Society article shell. The style is similar to the LATEX standard bibliography style unsrt.bst,
with bibliography entries appearing in the order of their first citation.

Example using achemso
References
[1] Lincoll, D. D. S emigroup s of Recurren ces. In High Speed Computer and Algo-
rithm Organ ization, T hird ed .; Lipcoll, D. J.; Lawrie, D. H.; Sameh, A. H.,
Eds .; Fast C omp uters 23; Acad emic Press: New York, 1977 This is a full
INCO LLECT IO N entry.
[2] Oaho, A. V.; Ullman , J. D.; Yannakakis, M. On Notions of Information
Tran sfer in VL SI C ircu it s. In Proc. Fifteen th Ann ual ACM Symposium on
the Theory of Computing ; O z, W . V.; Yann akakis, M., Eds.; All AC M Con-
ferences 17; Acad emic Press: Boston, 1983 Th is is a fu ll INPROCEDINGS
entry.
[3] Aamport, L. A. G-An imal’s Journ al 1986, 41, 73+ Th is is a full ARTICL E
entry.
[4] Knu th, D. E. S eminumerical Algorithms; volu me 2 of The Art of Com pu ter
Program ming Add ison-Wesley: Reading, Massachusetts, Second ed.; 1981
This is a full BO OK entry.
[5] Knvt h, J. C. “Th e Programming of Compu ter Art”, Vernier Art Center,
St an ford, C alifornia, 1988 T his is a fu ll BOOK LET entry.
[6] Phony-Baloney, F. P. Fighting Fire with Fire: Festoon ing Fren ch Phrases,
PhD Dissertation thesis, Fanstord University, 1988 T his is a fu ll P HD THE-
SIS entry.
1
achemsol.bst
Directory TCITeX/BibTeX/bst/achemso
The style is provided with the achemso package, which produces bibliographies appropriate for use with the
American Chemical Society article shell. The style is the same as achemso.bst, except that it includes the
annotate field. Bibliography entries appear in the order of their first citation.

Example using achemsol
References
[1] Lincoll, D. D. S emigroup s of Recurren ces. In High Speed Computer and Algo-
rithm Organ ization, T hird ed .; Lipcoll, D. J.; Lawrie, D. H.; Sameh, A. H.,
Eds .; Fast C omp uters 23; Acad emic Press: New York, 1977 This is a full
INCO LLECT IO N entry.
[2] Oaho, A. V.; Ullman , J. D.; Yannakakis, M. On Notions of Information
Tran sfer in VL SI C ircu it s. In Proc. Fifteen th Ann ual ACM Symposium on
the Theory of Computing ; O z, W . V.; Yann akakis, M., Eds.; All AC M Con-
ferences 17; Acad emic Press: Boston, 1983 Th is is a fu ll INPROCEDINGS
entry.
[3] Aamport, L. A. G-An imal’s Journ al 1986, 41, 73+ Th is is a full ARTICL E
entry.
[4] Knu th, D. E. S eminumerical Algorithms; volu me 2 of The Art of Com pu ter
Program ming Add ison-Wesley: Reading, Massachusetts, Second ed.; 1981
[5] Knvt h, J. C. “Th e Programming of Compu ter Art”, Vernier Art Center,
St an ford, C alifornia, 1988 T his is a fu ll BOOK LET entry.
[6] Phony-Baloney, F. P. Fighting Fire with Fire: Festoon ing Fren ch Phrases,
PhD Dissertation thesis, Fanstord University, 1988 T his is a fu ll P HD THE-
SIS entry.
1
acm.bst 427
acm.bst
pubform.bib
In entries for the ACM Transactions bibliography style (24-Jan.-88 version), the author’s name appears in small
capitals, with the last name followed by initials. Some dates appear in parentheses. Otherwise, the style is similar to
abbrv.bst, which sorts entries alphabetically and labels them with numbers and which abbreviates first names,
month names, and journal names. This BibTEX style is included in the bst\base directory of the TrueTEX
distribution, but does not appear on CTAN in the directory biblio/BibTeX/distribs/styles.

Example using acm
References
[1] Aampo rt, L. A. The gnats and gnu s d ocument prep aration system.
G-Anim al’s Journal 41, 7 (July 1986), 73+ . Th is is a full ARTICLE en-
try.
[2] Knu th , D. E. Semin umerical Algorithms, second ed., vol. 2 of The Art of
Com puter Programm ing. Ad dison-Wesley, Readin g, M assachuset ts, 10 Jan.
1981. T his is a full B OOK entry.
[3] Knv th , J. C . T he programmin g of compu ter art. Vernier Art Center,

St an ford, C alifornia, Feb. 1988. T his is a fu ll BOO KLET entr y.
[4] Lincoll, D. D. Semigroups of recurrences. In Hig h Speed Com puter and
Algorithm Organization, D. J. Lip coll, D. H. Lawrie, and A. H. Sameh, Eds.,
th ird ed., n o. 23 in Fast Compu ters. Academ ic Press, New York, Sep t. 1977,
part 3, pp. 179—183. Th is is a fu ll INC OL LECT ION en try.
[5] Oaho, A. V., Ullman, J. D., and Yannak ak is, M . O n n ot ions of
information t ransfer in VLS I circu its. In Proc. Fifteenth An nual ACM S ym-
posium on the Theory of Compu tin g ( Boston, Mar. 1983), W . V. O z and
M. Yannakakis, Eds., no. 17 in All AC M C on ferences, The OX Associa-
tion for Compu ting Mach inery, Academic Press, pp . 133—139. T his is a full
INPRO CEDING S entry.
[6] Phon y-Balon ey, F. P. Fightin g Fire with Fire: Festooning Fren ch
Phrases. Ph D dissert ation, Fanstord Un iversity, Department of French,
Jun e-Aug. 1988. T his is a full PHDT HESIS entry.
1
address.bst
Format of reference list label Name
Organization of reference list Alphabetical by person
Format of citation Name
Required files directory package
Directory TCITeX/BibTeX/bst/directory
Sample BibTEX Databases:
business.bib
family.bib
test.bib
The style is part of directory, a macro package for LATEX and BibTEX that facilitates the construction,
maintenance, and use of a database that is similar to an address book. You can use the package to construct your own
address book; in this way, the package operates like ordinary BibTEX styles except that the reference list it produces
contains information about companies, people, and places instead of published articles and books. You can also use
the package to include information about companies, people, and places in your document; see letter.bst on
page 507.
All styles associated with directory require the LATEX directory package, which is available on the pro-
gram CD in the directory CTAN/biblio/bibtex/contrib/directory. Follow the standard procedure for
adding the package to your program installation. Modifications are required to use entries derived from both di-
rectory operations and standard bibliography operations in the same document. For more information, see the
file directory.tex in CTAN/biblio/bibtex/contrib/directory on the program CD.
The directory styles also require the use of the \dir{key} command instead of the \cite{key} com-
mand. In your document, use TEX fields containing \dir{key} commands instead of standard citations, as described
below. The styles support a \nodir{key} command, which creates an address book with no citations in the text.
The address.bst style produces a reference list containing full database information corresponding to the
cited keys. It prints the corresponding name at the citation point unless the \nodir{key} command is used.
I To enter a \dir command in a TEX field

1. Place the insertion point where you want the citation to appear.
2. From the Insert menu, choose Typeset Object and then choose TeX Field.
3. In the entry area, type \dir{key} where key is the key for the database entry you want to cite.
4. Choose OK.
The first sample shown below illustrates an address list created with \dir{key} commands in the text. The
second sample illustrates an address list created using a \nodir{*} command without any preceding text. The
sample documents were created with the sample databases business.bib and family.bib.
address.bst 429

Example using address
some citations added in the next sentence. The citations in this sentence have
been created with TEX commands that replace standard citations. The list
below contains the address for Knudsoft (RS.2 Computer Room) and also
for Microknud Corp.. It also contains listings for Daffy Duck Knudson,
Bugs Bunny and Pluto and for Donald Ernest Knudson. The phone book
for these citations comes next.
Knudsoft (RS.2 Computer Room)

phn: +01-(0)2-434.23.23
Daffy Duck Knudson, Bugs Bunny and Pluto (aka gnat, gnu and pluto)
? 10/2, 5/11 and 1/1
p Haight Street 512, 80214 Novosibirsk, Gnuland
phn: +01-(0)2-765.43.21
gsm: +01-(0)5-555.55.55
acc: 010-1234567-05
r Manor Lane 2, 80214 Novosibirsk, Gnuland
phn: +01-(0)2-876.54.32
w University of Novosibirsk, Department of Octopus Parthenogenesis
Planck Institut (V1-V2, Park. U-67), Hessenberg Road, 80214 Novosi-
birsk, Gnuland
Donald Ernest Knudson

? 29/1
p phn: +01-(0)2-234.56.78
duck@novosi.uni.gnu
. 1952 Permafrost Press Award winner
Microknud Corp.
Haight Street 513
80214 Novosibirsk, Gnuland
phn: +01-(0)2-465.83.99
fax: 005.79.00
http://microknu.com/ass/bill.html
1

Example using address
Christophe Geuzaine
? 6/2/1973
p Christophe.Geuzaine@advalvas.be
w Ir., Research Assistant
University of Liège, Dept. of Electrical Engineering
Institut Montefiore (B28, P32, I21),
Sart Tilman Campus, B-4000 Liège, Belgium
phn: +32-(0)4-366.37.10
fax: +32-(0)4-366.29.10
Christophe.Geuzaine@ulg.ac.be
http://www.geuz.org/
The Knudsoft Company

knud@knudsoft.com
http://knudsoft.com/hole/gates.htm
Knudsoft (RS.2 Computer Room)

phn: +01-(0)2-434.23.23
Bip P. Knudson (aka road runner)

? 27/2
p bip_bip@free.prov.gnu
Daffy Duck Knudson, Bugs Bunny and Pluto (aka gnat, gnu and pluto)
? 10/2, 5/11 and 1/1
p Haight Street 512, 80214 Novosibirsk, Gnuland
phn: +01-(0)2-765.43.21
gsm: +01-(0)5-555.55.55
acc: 010-1234567-05
r Manor Lane 2, 80214 Novosibirsk, Gnuland
phn: +01-(0)2-876.54.32
w University of Novosibirsk, Department of Octopus Parthenogenesis
Planck Institut (V1-V2, Park. U-67), Hessenberg Road, 80214 Novosi-
birsk, Gnuland
Donald Ernest Knudson

? 29/1
p phn: +01-(0)2-234.56.78
duck@novosi.uni.gnu
. 1952 Permafrost Press Award winner
1
address-html.bst 431
address-html.bst
Format of citation Name or none
business.bib
family.bib
test.bib
page 507.
The directory styles also require the use of the \dir{key} command instead of the \cite{key} command.
In your document, use TEX fields containing \dir{key} commands instead of standard citations, as described on
page 428. The styles support a \nodir{key} command, which creates an address book with no citations in the
text.
Similar to address.bst, address-html.bst produces an HTML file for a reference list containing full
database information corresponding to the cited keys or to the \nodir{key} command. The style supports URL
fields within the bibliographic information, so that entries in the list become links to the resources themselves. The
resulting HTML file can stand alone or be incorporated into the HTML file for the document containing the citations.
The style doesn’t produce an automatic heading for the list.
To use the style in SWP and SW, follow the standard procedure to insert citations in your document and specify
and generate a BibTEX address list. Then, use the resulting HTML file as it stands or incorporate it into your
document, according to the instructions that follow.
I To incorporate the HTML bibliography into a document

1. Using an ASCII editor, open the .bbl file created for your document.
2. Delete the <HTML>, <TITLE>, and </HTML> commands.
3. Copy the contents of the file to the clipboard.
4. Open your document in SWP or SW.
5. Delete the instruction.
6. In its place, insert an HTML object:

a. From the Insert menu, choose HTML Field.
b. Paste the contents of the clipboard into the field.

c. Choose OK.
7. Export the file to HTML:

a. From the File menu, choose Export Document.
b. Select the document.
c. In the Save as type box, choose the HTML format you want.
d. Choose OK.
The sample .htm file shown here was created in SWP according to these instructions. The .tex file includes a
\nodir{*} command that was deleted after the .htm file was created but before the document was exported to
HTML. The sample document was created with the sample databases business.bib and family.bib.
adfathesis.bst 433
adfathesis.bst
Format of reference list label None
Format of citation (Author date)
(Author date, Author date)
(Author et al. date)
Required files harvard package
Directory TCITeX/BibTeX/bst/adfathesis
This style is designed for theses at the Australian Defence Force Academy. It is a modified version of the style
jphysicsB.bst, which is provided as part of the harvard family of BibTEX bibliography styles. To avoid LATEX
errors when using the harvard styles, delete the BibTEX style files in the bst\beebe directory.

Example using adfathesis
some citations added in the next sentence. This sentence refers to the article
(Lincoll 1977) in a collection, the article (Oaho et al. 1983) in a proceedings,
the article (Aamport 1986), the book (Knuth 1981), the booklet (Knvth 1988),
and to the thesis (Phony-Baloney 1988). Combined citations like (Lincoll 1977,
Aamport 1986) may have special appearance. The bibliography section for these
citations comes next.
References
Aamport L A (1986). The Gnats and Gnus Document Preparation System,
G-Animal’s Journal 41(7), 73+. This is a full ARTICLE entry.
Knuth D E (1981). Seminumerical Algorithms, Vol. 2 of The Art of Computer
Programming, second edn, Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts. This
is a full BOOK entry.
Knvth J C (1988). ‘The Programming of Computer Art’, Vernier Art Center,
Stanford, California. This is a full BOOKLET entry.
Lincoll D D (1977). Semigroups of Recurrences, in D J Lipcoll, D H Lawrie &
A H Sameh, eds, High Speed Computer and Algorithm Organization, third
edn, number 23 in ‘Fast Computers’, Academic Press, New York, part 3,
pp. 179—183. This is a full INCOLLECTION entry.
Oaho A V, Ullman J D & Yannakakis M (1983). On Notions of Information

Transfer in VLSI Circuits, in W V Oz & M Yannakakis, eds, Proc. Fif-
teenth Annual ACM Symposium on the Theory of Computing, number 17
in ‘All ACM Conferences’, The OX Association for Computing Machinery,
Academic Press, Boston, pp. 133—139. This is a full INPROCEDINGS
entry.
Phony-Baloney F P (1988), Fighting Fire with Fire: Festooning French Phrases,
PhD dissertation, Fanstord University, Department of French. This is a full
PHDTHESIS entry.
1
agsm.bst

(Author & Author date)
(Author, Author & Author date)
Directory TCITeX/BibTeX/bst/harvard
harvard.bib Contains five entries.
The agsm style is provided as part of the harvard family of BibTEX bibliography styles, which can also be
used with manual bibliographies. The style satisfies the requirements of the Australian Government Style Manual.
Complete citations are in standard parenthetical form. Incomplete citations can be used as nouns, as in Medd (1999)
claims . . . or The key result (Medd) . . ., or as possessives, as in Medd’s (1999) proof . . . . To avoid LATEX errors
when using the harvard styles, delete the BibTEX style files in the bst\beebe directory.

Example using agsm
( Lincoll 1977) in a collection, the article (Oaho, Ullman & Yan nakakis 1983) in
a p roceedings, the article (Aamport 1986), th e book (Knut h 1981), the b ooklet
( Knvth 1988), an d to the t hesis (Phony-Baloney 1988) . C ombined citation s like
( Lincoll 1977, Aamp ort 1986) may have sp ecial app earance. Th e b ibliogr aphy
References
Aamp ort, L. A. (1986), ‘Th e gnats and gnu s docum ent preparation system’,
G -Animal’s Journ al 41(7) , 73+. T his is a full ARTICLE entry.
K nuth , D. E. (1981), Seminum erical Algorithms, Vol. 2 of T he Art of Com pu ter
Prog ram min g, secon d edn, Ad dison-Wesley, Read in g, Massachusetts. Th is
is a full BO OK entry.
K nvth, J. C. (1988) , ‘The program ming of comp uter art’, Vernier Art Center,
S tanford, C alifornia. T his is a full BOOK LET entry.
L in coll, D. D. (1977), Semigrou ps of r ecu rrences, in D. J. Lip coll, D. H. Law rie

& A. H. S ameh , ed s, ‘High Speed Compu ter and Algorith m Organizat ion’,
t hird ed n, numb er 23 in ‘Fast C omp uter s’, Academic Press, New York,
p art 3, pp . 179—183. This is a full INCO LLEC TIO N entry.
O ah o, A. V., Ullman , J. D. & Yan nakakis, M. (1983), On notions of information

t ran sfer in VLSI cir cuits, in W . V. Oz & M. Yannakakis, eds, ‘Proc. Fif-
t eent h Annu al ACM Symp osium on the Theory of Comput in g’, number 17
in ‘All ACM Conferences’, The OX Associat ion for Comp uting Mach inery,
Academic Press, Boston, pp . 133—139. Th is is a full INPROCEDINGS
entry.
Phony-Balon ey, F. P. (1988), Fighting Fire w ith Fire: Festooning Fren ch

Ph rases, PhD dissertation, Fanstord Un iversity, D ep artment of French.
This is a fu ll PHD THES IS entry.
1
alpha.bst 435
alpha.bst

The style uses source labels such as Knu66, formed from the author’s name and the year of publication. Other-
wise, it is the same as plain.bst, which sorts entries alphabetically.

Example using alpha
References
[Aam86] L[eslie] A. Aam port. The gnats an d gnu s d ocument preparation sys-
tem. G -Animal’s Journ al, 41(7):73+, Ju ly 1986. Th is is a full ARTI-
C LE entry.
[Knu 81] Donald E. K nuth . Se min um erical Algorithm s, volu me 2 of T he Art
of Computer Programmin g. Add ison -Wesley, Reading, M assachuset ts,
second edition , 10 January 1981. Th is is a full BO OK entry.
[Knv88] Jill C . K nvth. T he program min g of computer art. Vernier Art Center,
Stanford , Californ ia, Febru ar y 1988. This is a full B OOK LET entry.
[Lin77] Daniel D. Lincoll. Semigroups of recu rrences. In David J. L ip coll,

D. H. Lawrie, and A. H. S ameh, editors, Hig h Speed Com puter and
Algorithm Organ ization , nu mber 23 in Fast C omp uters, part 3, pages
179—183. Acad emic Press, New York, th ird edition , September 1977.
T his is a full INCO LLEC TIO N entry.
[OUY83] Alfred V. Oaho, Jeffrey D. Ullman, an d Mihalis Yan nakakis. On n o-

tion s of in formation transfer in VLSI circuits. In W izard V. Oz and
Mihalis Yan nakakis, editors, Proc. Fifteen th Annu al ACM S ymposium
on the Theory of Computin g, numb er 17 in All AC M Conferences,
pages 133—139, Boston , March 1983. The OX As sociation f or C om-
pu ting Machinery, Academic Press. This is a full INPROCEDINGS
entry.
[PB88] F. Ph id ias Phony-Balon ey. Fig hting Fire with Fire: Festoonin g
French Phrases. P hD dissertat ion, Fanstord University, Departm ent
of French, Jun e-August 1988. T his is a fu ll PHD THES IS entry.
1
alphahtml.bst

Format of citation [authoryear]
Directory TCITeX/BibTeX/bst/bibhtml
bibrefs.bib
This style creates a reference list appropriate for use on websites. It produces the reference list as an HTML
file contained within the commands <dl> and </dl>. The style supports URL fields within the bibliographic
information, so that entries in the bibliography become links to the resources themselves. The resulting HTML file
can be incorporated into the HTML file for the document containing the citations. The symbols ~and – remain in
the output file, but can be changed with a post-processor to and &enspace; or ’ ’ and ’-’ as required.
The style doesn’t produce an automatic heading for the list of references.
The style is based on plainhtml.bst and alpha.bst, which creates source labels such as Knu66, formed
from the author’s name and the year of publication. The style sorts entries alphabetically. The styles alphahtml-
date.bst and alphahtmldater.bst are related.
To use the style in SWP and SW, follow the standard procedure to insert citations in your document and
to specify and generate a BibTEX bibliography. Then, incorporate the resulting HTML file into your document
according to the instructions that follow.


c. Choose OK.

d. Choose OK.
The sample .htm file shown on the next page was created according to these instructions and using a modification
of the database file bibrefs.bib.
alphahtml.bst 437
alphahtmldate.bst

Organization of reference list Chronological order
bibrefs.bib
The style doesn’t produce an automatic heading for the list of references.
The style is based on alphahtml.bst, which creates source labels such as Knu66, formed from the author’s
name and the year of publication. The style sorts entries chronologically. It is related to alphahtmldater.bst.
and generate a BibTEX bibliography. Then, incorporate the resulting HTML file into your document as described
for alphahtml.bst on page 436. The sample .htm file below was created according to those instructions and
using a modification of the database file bibrefs.bib.
alphahtmldater.bst 439
alphahtmldater.bst

Organization of reference list Reverse chronological order
bibrefs.bib
The style doesn’t produce an automatic heading for the list of references. The style is based on alphahtml.bst,
but lists references in reverse chronological order.
as described for alphahtml.bst on page 436. The sample .htm file below was created according to those
instructions and using a modification of the database file bibrefs.bib.
amsalpha.bst

Directory TCITeX/BibTeX/bst/amslatex
mrabbrev.bib Contains 4318 strings
AMS-LATEX is a required component of the standard LATEX distribution. The style constructs source labels such
as Knu66, from the author’s name and the year of publication.

Example using amsalpha
t he b ook [Knu 81], t he b ooklet [Knv88], an d to th e th es is [PB88].C ombined
References
[Aam86] L[eslie] A. Aamp ort , The gnats and gnu s docu me nt preparation sys-
tem, G-Animal’s Journal 41 (1986), n o. 7, 73+ , This is a full ARTI-
C LE entry.
[Knu 81] Donald E. K nuth , S em inu merical algorithm s, s econd ed ., The Art
of Compu ter Progr amming, vol. 2, Addison-Wesley, Reading, Mas-
sachu setts, 10 January 1981, T his is a full BOOK entry.
[Knv88] Jill C. K nvth, The programm in g of com puter art, Vernier Art Center,
Stanford , Californ ia, Febru ar y 1988, Th is is a fu ll BOO KLET entry.
[Lin77] Daniel D . L incoll, S em igroups of recurrences, High Sp eed C omput er

and Algorithm Organization (David J. Lipcoll, D. H. Lawrie, and
A. H. S am eh , ed s.), Fast Compu ters, no. 23, Acad emic Press , New
York, third ed ., S eptember 1977, This is a fu ll INCOLLE CTION entry,
pp . 179—183.
[OUY83] Alfred V. O ah o, Jeffrey D. Ullman, and Mih alis Yan nakakis, On no-
tion s of inform ation tran sfer in VL SI circuits, Proc. Fifteen th Annual
ACM Symp osium on the Th eory of C om putin g (Boston) (W izard V.
Oz and Mihalis Yann akakis, eds.), All AC M C on ferences, no. 17, Th e
OX Associat ion for Comp uting Mach in ery, Acad emic Press, March
1983, Th is is a full INPROC EDINGS entry, p p. 133—139.
[PB88] F. Phidias Phony-Balon ey, Fighting fire with fire : Festoonin g Fren ch
phrases, PhD dissertation, Fan stord University, D ep artment of
French, Jun e-August 1988, This is a full PHDT HESIS ent ry.
1
amsplain.bst 441
amsplain.bst

Directory TCITeX/BibTeX/bst/amslatex
mrabbrev.bib Contains 4318 strings.
AMS-LATEX is a required component of the standard LATEX distribution. The style sorts entries alphabetically
and labels them with numbers.

Example using amsplain
References
[1] L[eslie] A. Aamport, The gnats and gnus document preparation system,
G-Animal’s Jou rnal 41 (1986), no. 7, 73+, This is a full ARTIC LE entry.
[2] Donald E. Knut h, S eminumerical algorithms, secon d ed., The Art of

Comp uter Programming, vol. 2, Add ison -Wesley, Reading, M assachuset ts,
10 Janu ary 1981, Th is is a fu ll BOO K entry.
[3] Jill C. Knvth, The program ming of compu ter art, Vernier Art Cent er, Stan-
ford, C alifornia, February 1988, T his is a full BOOK LET entry.
[4] Daniel D. Lincoll, S emigroups of recurrences, High S peed Compu ter and
Algorithm Organization (David J. Lipcoll, D. H. Lawrie, an d A. H. Sameh,
eds.), Fast Comp uters, no. 23, Acad emic P ress, New York, t hird ed ., S eptem-
b er 1977, T his is a full INCO LLEC TIO N entry, p p. 179—183.
[5] Alfred V. Oaho, Jeffrey D. Ullman, and Mihalis Yannakakis, On notions of

in formation transfer in VLSI circuits, Proc. Fifteenth Annual ACM Sym-
p osiu m on the Theor y of Computing (Bost on ) (Wizard V. Oz and Mihalis
Yannakakis, eds.) , All ACM Conferen ces, n o. 17, T he OX Associat ion for
Comp uting Machinery, Academic Press, M arch 1983, This is a full INPRO-
CEDINGS entry, pp. 133—139.
[6] F. Ph id ias Phony-Baloney, Fig hting fi re with fi re: Festooning Fren ch

phrases, Ph D dissertat ion, Fanstord University, Dep art ment of Fren ch , June-
August 1988, This is a full PHDT HESIS entry.
1
annotate.bst
This style is based on the standard BibTEX style alpha.bst, which sorts entries alphabetically and forms
entry labels, such as Knu66, from the author’s name and the year of publication. The style adds the annote keyword.

Example using annotate
References
C LE entry.


entry.
1
annotation.bst 443
annotation.bst
This style is based on the standard BibTEX style plain.bst, which sorts entries alphabetically and labels
them with numbers. The style adds the annote keyword, which appears in the reference list.

Example using annotation
References
[1] L[eslie] A. Aamp ort. Th e gnats and gnus d ocument preparat ion system.
Ke y: article-full
[2] Donald E. Knuth . Seminum erical Alg orithms, volu me 2 of The Art of Com-
tion, 10 January 1981. This is a full BO OK entry.
Ke y: b ook-fu ll
[3] Jill C . Knvth . The programming of comp uter art . Vernier Art Center,
St an ford, C alifornia, Febru ary 1988. T his is a full BOOK LET entry.
Ke y: b ooklet-full
[4] Daniel D. Lin coll. Semigrou ps of recu rrences. In David J. Lip coll, D. H.
Lawrie, an d A. H. Sameh, editors, High S peed Compute r an d Algorithm Or-
ganization, nu mb er 23 in Fast Compu ters, part 3, pages 179—183. Academic
Press, New York, third edition , Sept emb er 1977. This is a fu ll INC OLL EC-
TIO N entry.
Ke y: incollection-fu ll
[5] Alfred V. O ah o, Jeffrey D. Ullman, an d Mihalis Yannakakis. On notions
of information transfer in VLSI circu its. In W izard V. O z and Mihalis
Yannakakis, ed itors, Proc. Fifteenth An nual ACM Symposium on the The-
ory of Computin g, numb er 17 in All ACM Conferen ces, pages 133—139,
Boston, M arch 1983. Th e OX Association for Comp uting Mach in ery, Aca-
demic Press. Th is is a full INPROC EDINGS entry.
Ke y: inproceedings-fu ll
[6] F. Phid ias Ph ony-Baloney. Fighting Fire with Fire: Festoon ing French
Jun e-August 1988. T his is a full PHDT HESIS entry.
Ke y: p hdt hesis-full
1
anotit.bst
The style excludes the titles of articles. Otherwise, it is the same as aabbrv.bst, which abbreviates first
names, month names, and journal names in the entries. The style sorts entries alphabetically and labels them with
numbers.

Example using anotit
References
[1] L. A. Aamport. G -Animal’s Jou rn al 41(7), 73+ (July 1986). T his is a
full ARTICLE entry.

[4] D. D. Linco ll. In D. J. Lipco ll, D. H. Law rie, and A. H . Same h,

editors, “High S peed Comp uter an d Algorit hm O rgan ization ”, no. 23 in Fast
Comp uters, part 3, pp . 179—183. Academic Pres s, New York, third ed . (Sep t.
1977). This is a fu ll INC OLL ECT ION entry.
[5] A. V. Oaho, J. D. U llma n, and M. Ya nnaka kis. In W . V. Oz and

M. Yanna kakis, editors, “Proc. Fifteenth Annual AC M S ymposium on
th e Th eory of C omp uting”, no. 17 in All ACM Conferences, pp. 133—139,
Boston (Mar. 1983). Th e OX Ass ociation for Comput in g Machiner y, Aca-

1
apa.bst 445
apa.bst

Format of citation (Author, date)
(Author and Author, date)
(Author et al., date)
Required files astron.package
The style has been adapted from alpha.bst. It supports a short citation form and must be used with the
astron package.

Example using apa
(Lincoll, 1977) in a collection, the article (Oaho et al., 1983) in a proceedings,
the article (Aamport, 1986), the book (Knuth, 1981), the booklet (Knvth, 1988),
and to the thesis (Phony-Baloney, 1988). Combined citations like (Lincoll, 1977;
Aamport, 1986) may have special appearance. The bibliography section for
these citations comes next.
References
Aamport, L. A. (1986). The gnats and gnus document preparation system.
G-Animal’s Journal, 41(7):73+. This is a full ARTICLE entry.
Knuth, D. E. (1981). Seminumerical Algorithms, volume 2 of The Art of Com-
puter Programming. Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, second edi-
tion. This is a full BOOK entry.
Knvth, J. C. (1988). The programming of computer art. Vernier Art Center,
Lincoll, D. D. (1977). Semigroups of recurrences. In Lipcoll, D. J., Lawrie,
D. H., and Sameh, A. H., editors, High Speed Computer and Algorithm Or-
ganization, number 23 in Fast Computers, part 3, pages 179—183. Academic
Press, New York, third edition. This is a full INCOLLECTION entry.
Oaho, A. V., Ullman, J. D., and Yannakakis, M. (1983). On notions of infor-
mation transfer in VLSI circuits. In Oz, W. V. and Yannakakis, M., editors,
Proc. Fifteenth Annual ACM Symposium on the Theory of Computing, num-
ber 17 in All ACM Conferences, pages 133—139, Boston. The OX Association
for Computing Machinery, Academic Press. This is a full INPROCEDINGS
entry.
Phony-Baloney, F. P. (1988). Fighting Fire with Fire: Festooning French
Phrases. PhD dissertation, Fanstord University, Department of French. This
is a full PHDTHESIS entry.
1
apacite.bst

(Author & Author, date)
(Author, Author, & Author, date)
Required files apacite package
Directory TCITeX/BibTeX/bst/apacite
testAPA.bib Contains 54 entries.
This BibTEX bibliography style for the American Psychological Association must be used with the apacite
package.

Example using apacite
(Lincoll, 1977) in a collection, the article (Oaho, Ullman, & Yannakakis, 1983)
in a proceedings, the article (Aamport, 1986), the book (Knuth, 1981), the
booklet (Knvth, 1988), and to the thesis (Phony-Baloney, 1988). Combined
citations like (Lincoll, 1977; Aamport, 1986) may have special appearance. The
bibliography section for these citations comes next.
References
G-Animal’s Journal, 41 (7), 73+. (This is a full ARTICLE entry)
Knuth, D. E. (1981). Seminumerical algorithms (Vol. 2, Second ed.). Reading,
Massachusetts: Addison-Wesley. (This is a full BOOK entry)
Knvth, J. C. (1988, February). The programming of computer art. Vernier Art
Center. Stanford, California. (This is a full BOOKLET entry)
Lincoll, D. D. (1977). Semigroups of recurrences [Part]. In D. J. Lipcoll,
D. H. Lawrie, & A. H. Sameh (Eds.), High speed computer and algorithm
organization (Third ed., pp. 179—183). New York: Academic Press. (This
is a full INCOLLECTION entry)
Oaho, A. V., Ullman, J. D., & Yannakakis, M. (1983). On notions of information

transfer in VLSI circuits. In W. V. Oz & M. Yannakakis (Eds.), Proc.
fifteenth annual acm symposium on the theory of computing (pp. 133—
139). Boston: Academic Press. (This is a full INPROCEDINGS entry)
Phony-Baloney, F. P. (1988). Fighting fire with fire: Festooning French phrases.
PhD dissertation, Fanstord University, Department of French. (This is a
full PHDTHESIS entry)
1
apalike.bst 447
apalike.bst

Required files apalike package
This standard BibTEX style requires the apalike package. The style formats bibliography entries alphabetically
by author, last name first. Citations in the text can include single and multiple author-date references.

Example using apalike
[Lincoll, 1977] in a collection, the article [Oaho et al., 1983] in a proceedings,
the article [Aamport, 1986], the book [Knuth, 1981], the booklet [Knvth, 1988],
and to the thesis [Phony-Baloney, 1988]. Combined citations like [Lincoll, 1977,
Aamport, 1986] may have special appearance. The bibliography section for
References
[Aamport, 1986] Aamport, L. A. (1986). The gnats and gnus document prepa-
ration system. G-Animal’s Journal, 41(7):73+. This is a full ARTICLE entry.
[Knuth, 1981] Knuth, D. E. (1981). Seminumerical Algorithms, volume 2 of The
Art of Computer Programming. Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts,
second edition. This is a full BOOK entry.
[Knvth, 1988] Knvth, J. C. (1988). The programming of computer art. Vernier
Art Center, Stanford, California. This is a full BOOKLET entry.
[Lincoll, 1977] Lincoll, D. D. (1977). Semigroups of recurrences. In Lipcoll,
D. J., Lawrie, D. H., and Sameh, A. H., editors, High Speed Computer and
183. Academic Press, New York, third edition. This is a full INCOLLECTION
entry.
[Oaho et al., 1983] Oaho, A. V., Ullman, J. D., and Yannakakis, M. (1983).
On notions of information transfer in VLSI circuits. In Oz, W. V. and Yan-
nakakis, M., editors, Proc. Fifteenth Annual ACM Symposium on the Theory
of Computing, number 17 in All ACM Conferences, pages 133—139, Boston.
The OX Association for Computing Machinery, Academic Press. This is a
full INPROCEDINGS entry.
[Phony-Baloney, 1988] Phony-Baloney, F. P. (1988). Fighting Fire with Fire:
Festooning French Phrases. PhD dissertation, Fanstord University, Depart-
ment of French. This is a full PHDTHESIS entry.
1
apalike2.bst

The style is a variant of apalike.bst. It requires the apalike package. The style formats bibliography entries
alphabetically by author. At the beginning of the entry, authors’ names are presented last name first. Within the
entry, authors’ names are presented last name last. Citations in the text can include single and multiple author-date
references.

Example using apalike2
References
G-Animal’s Journal, 41(7), 73+. This is a full ARTICLE entry.
Knuth, D. E. (1981). Seminumerical Algorithms, volume 2 of The Art of Com-
puter Programming. Reading, Massachusetts: Addison-Wesley, second edi-
tion. This is a full BOOK entry.
Lincoll, D. D. (1977). Semigroups of recurrences. In D. J. Lipcoll, D. H. Lawrie,
& A. H. Sameh (Eds.), High Speed Computer and Algorithm Organization,
number 23 in Fast Computers part 3, (pp. 179—183). New York: Academic
Press, third edition. This is a full INCOLLECTION entry.
Oaho, A. V., Ullman, J. D., & Yannakakis, M. (1983). On notions of information
transfer in VLSI circuits. In W. V. Oz & M. Yannakakis (Eds.), Proc.
Fifteenth Annual ACM Symposium on the Theory of Computing, number 17
in All ACM Conferences (pp. 133—139). Boston: The OX Association for
Computing Machinery Academic Press. This is a full INPROCEDINGS
entry.
Phrases. PhD dissertation, Fanstord University, Department of French.
This is a full PHDTHESIS entry.
1
aplain.bst 449
aplain.bst

automatically inputs the file apreambl.tex to the document before the bibliography command appears. The
style is similar to the standard BibTEX style plain.bst, which sorts entries alphabetically and labels them with
numbers. Authors’ names appear in small capitals in the reference list.

Example using aplain
References
[1] L[e slie] A. Aamport. The gnats and gnus document preparation system.
[2] Don ald E. Knuth. “S eminu merical Algorit hms”, volume 2 of “The Art of
Comp uter Programming”. Add ison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusett s, second
edition (10 January 1981). Th is is a fu ll BOO K ent ry.
[3] Jill C. Knvth. Th e programmin g of comp uter art. Vernier Art Center,
St an ford, C alifornia (Feb ruary 1988). Th is is a full BO OKLET entry.
[4] Daniel D. Lincoll. Semigrou ps of recurrences. In Dav id J. Lipco ll,

D. H. Lawrie, and A. H . Sameh, editors, “High Sp eed C omput er and
Algorithm O rgan ization”, number 23 in Fast C ompu ters, part 3, pages 179—
183. Academic Press, New York, th ird edition (S eptember 1977). This is a
full INC OLL ECT ION entry.
[5] Alfred V. Oaho, Je ffrey D. Ullma n, an d Mihalis Yanna kak is. On
notions of information transfer in VLS I circuits. In Wizard V. Oz and M i-
halis Yannak akis , ed itor s, “P roc. Fifteenth Annual ACM Sym posium on
th e Theory of Computing”, numb er 17 in All ACM Conferen ces, pages 133—
139, Boston (March 1983). T he OX Associat ion for Compu ting Mach inery,
Academic Press. This is a full INPRO CEDING S ent ry.
[6] F. Phidias Pho ny-Ba loney. “Fighting Fire with Fire: Festooning Fren ch
(Jun e-August 1988). Th is is a fu ll PHDTHESIS entr y.
1
apsr.bst

(Author & Author date)
The bibliography style apsr.bst is provided as part of the harvard family of BibTEX bibliography styles,
which can also be used with manual bibliographies. The style is for the American Political Science Review. Com-
plete citations are in standard parenthetical form. Incomplete citations can be used as nouns, as in Medd (1999)
claims . . . or The key result (Medd) . . ., or as possessives, as in Medd’s (1999) proof . . . . To avoid LATEX errors
when using the harvard styles, delete the BibTEX style files in the bst\beebe directory.

Example using apsr
( Lincoll 1977) in a collection, the article (Oaho, Ullman & Yan nakakis 1983) in
References
Aamp ort, L [eslie] A. 1986. “T he Gnat s an d Gnu s Document Preparation Sys-
t em .” G -Animal’s Jou rn al 41(7) :73+. This is a fu ll ARTICLE entry.
K nuth , Don ald E. 1981. Semin um erical Algorithms. Vol. 2 of The Art of Com-
puter Programm ing secon d ed . Read in g, Massachusetts: Addison-Wesley.
This is a fu ll B OOK entry.
K nvth, Jill C. 1988. “Th e Programmin g of Comput er Art.” Stanford, California:

Vern ier Art Center. T his is a full BO OKLET entry.
L in coll, Daniel D . 1977. Semigrou ps of Recurrences. In High Speed Com pu ter

an d Algorithm Organ ization, ed. David J. L ip coll, D. H. L awrie & A. H.
S ameh . T hird ed . numb er 23 in “Fast Comp uters ” New York: Academic
Pr ess part 3, pp . 179—183. This is a full INCO LLEC TIO N entry.
O ah o, Alfred V., Jeffrey D. Ullman & M ih alis Yannakakis. 1983. On Notions

of In formation Transfer in VLSI Circuits. In Proc. Fifteenth Ann ual ACM
S ymposium on the Theory of Computi ng, ed. W izard V. Oz & Mihalis
Yann akakis. Numb er 17 in “All ACM Conferences” T he OX Association
for Computing Mach inery Boston: Academic Press pp. 133—139. This is a
fu ll INPROCEDINGS entry.
Phony-Balon ey, F. Phidias. 1988. Fight in g Fire with Fire: Festoon ing Fren ch
Ph rases Ph D d issertation Fan stord Univers ity Department of Fren ch: .
1
asaetr.bst 451
asaetr.bst
Required documentclass asaetr
Directory TCITeX/BibTeX/bst/asaetr
asaetr.bib Contains two entries.
This style supports the bibliography requirements of the Transactions of the ASAE (American Society for Agricul-
tural Engineers). The ASAE Transactions shell document was created with the asaetr document class, a requirement
for asaetr.bst.
Sample Citations and Bibliogra-

phy
Example using asaetr
BibTeX has been selected for the bibliography choice in this
shell document. One of the sample BibTeX databases in-
cluded with SW has b een selected and some citations added
in the next sentence. This sentence refers to the article [4]
in a collection, the article [5] in a proceedings, the article [1],
the book [2], the booklet [3], and to the thesis [6]. Com-
bined citations like [4, 1] may have special appearance. The
References
Aam port, L. A. 1986. The gnats and gnus document prepa-
ration system. G-Animal’s Journal 41(7):73+.
Knuth, D. E. 1981. Seminumerical Algorithms volume 2
of The Art of Computer Programming. Reading, Mas-
sachusetts : Addison-Wesley second edition.
Knvth, J. C. The programming of computer art. Vernier Art
Center Stanford, California 1988.
Lincoll, D. D. 1977. Semigroups of recurrences. In High
Speed Computer and Algorithm Organization, ed. Lip-
coll, D. J., D. H. Lawrie, and A. H. Sameh, numb er 23
in Fast Computers part 3, 179—183. Academic Press New
York third edition.
Oaho, A. V., J. D. Ullman, and M. Yannakakis 1983.
On notions of information transfer in VLSI circuits. In
Proc. Fifteenth Annual ACM Symposium on the Theory
of Computing, ed. Oz, W. V. and M. Yannakakis, num-
ber 17 in All ACM Conferences 133—139 Boston. The
OX Association for Computing Machinery : Academic
Press.
Phony-Baloney, F. P. Fighting Fire with Fire: Festooning
French Phrases. PhD dissertation Fanstord University
Department of French 1988.
astron.bst
Required files astron package
The style is the BibTEX bibliography style for astronomical journals. It requires the astron package.

Example using astron
( Lincoll, 1977) in a collection , the article (O ah o et al., 1983) in a p roceedings,
t he article (Aamp ort, 1986), the book (Knuth, 1981), th e booklet (K nvth, 1988),
and to th e th esis (Ph ony-Baloney, 1988). Comb ined citation s like (Lincoll, 1977;
Aamp ort, 1986) may have sp ecial app earance. T he bibliography section for
t hese citation s comes next.
References
Aamp ort, L. A.: 1986, G-An imal’s Journal 41(7), 73+ , Th is is a full ARTICL E
entry
K nuth , D. E.: 1981, S em inumerical Algorithms , Vol. 2 of The Art of Com-
puter Program ming, Ad dison-Wesley, Readin g, Massachus etts, second ed i-
tion , T his is a fu ll BOOK entry
K nvth, J. C.: 1988, The Prog ramm in g of C omputer Art, Vernier Art Center,
St an ford , Californ ia, Th is is a full BOO KLET ent ry
L in coll, D. D.: 1977, in D. J. Lip coll, D. H. Lawrie, and A. H. Sameh (eds.), High
Speed Com puter an d Algorithm Organization, No. 23 in Fast C omput ers,
part 3, pp 179—183, Academic Press, New York, th ird ed ition, T his is a full
INCO LLEC TIO N entry
O ah o, A. V., Ullman, J. D., and Yannakakis, M.: 1983, in W. V. Oz and M.
Yan nakakis (eds.), Proc. Fifteenth An nual ACM Symposium on the T heory
of Com putin g, No. 17 in All AC M Conferences, pp 133—139, T he OX As-
sociat ion for Compu tin g Machinery, Academic P ress, Boston, T his is a full
INPROCEDINGS entr y
Phony-Balon ey, F. P.: 1988, PhD dissert ation, Fan stord Un iversity, Departm ent
of French, Th is is a fu ll PHDTHES IS entry
1
aunsnot.bst 453
aunsnot.bst
In this style, entries appear in the order of their first citation. Otherwise, the style is the same as the style
anotit.bst, which excludes the titles of articles and abbreviates first names, month names, and journal names in
the entries. Authors’ names appear in small capitals in the reference list.

Example using aunsnot
References
[1] D. D. Linco ll. In D. J. Lipco ll, D. H. Law rie, and A. H . Same h,
editors, “High S peed Comp uter an d Algorit hm O rgan ization ”, no. 23 in Fast
Comp uters, part 3, pp . 179—183. Academic Pres s, New York, third ed . (Sep t.
1977). This is a fu ll INC OLL ECT ION entry.
[2] A. V. Oaho, J. D. U llma n, and M. Ya nnaka kis. In W . V. Oz and
M. Yanna kakis, editors, “Proc. Fifteenth Annual AC M S ymposium on
th e Th eory of C omp uting”, no. 17 in All ACM Conferences, pp. 133—139,
Boston (Mar. 1983). Th e OX Ass ociation for Comput in g Machiner y, Aca-
[3] L. A. Aamport. G -Animal’s Jou rn al 41(7), 73+ (July 1986). T his is a

full ARTICLE entry.


1
aunsrt.bst
In this style, entries appear in the order of their first citation. Otherwise, the style is the same as the style
aplain.bst, which sorts entries alphabetically and labels them with numbers. Authors’ names appear in small
capitals in the reference list.

Example using aunsrt
References
[1] Daniel D. Lincoll. Semigrou ps of recurrences. In Dav id J. Lipco ll,
D. H. Lawrie, and A. H . Sameh, editors, “High Sp eed C omput er and
Algorithm O rgan ization”, number 23 in Fast C ompu ters, part 3, pages 179—
183. Academic Press, New York, th ird edition (S eptember 1977). This is a
full INC OLL ECT ION entry.
[2] Alfred V. Oaho, Je ffrey D. Ullma n, an d Mihalis Yanna kak is. On

notions of information transfer in VLS I circuits. In Wizard V. Oz and M i-
halis Yannak akis , ed itor s, “P roc. Fifteenth Annual ACM Sym posium on
th e Theory of Computing”, numb er 17 in All ACM Conferen ces, pages 133—
139, Boston (March 1983). T he OX Associat ion for Compu ting Mach inery,
Academic Press. This is a full INPRO CEDING S ent ry.
[3] L[e slie] A. Aamport. The gnats and gnus document preparation system.
[4] Don ald E. Knuth. “S eminu merical Algorit hms”, volume 2 of “The Art of
Comp uter Programming”. Add ison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusett s, second
edition (10 January 1981). Th is is a fu ll BOO K ent ry.
[5] Jill C. Knvth. Th e programmin g of comp uter art. Vernier Art Center,
St an ford, C alifornia (Feb ruary 1988). Th is is a full BO OKLET entry.
[6] F. Phidias Pho ny-Ba loney. “Fighting Fire with Fire: Festooning Fren ch
(Jun e-August 1988). Th is is a fu ll PHDTHESIS entr y.
1
authordate1.bst 455
authordate1.bst
Required files authordate1-4 package
This style produces author-date reference lists based loosely on the recommendations of British Standard 1629
(1976 edition), Butcher’s Copy-editing (Cambridge University Press, 1981), and the Chicago Manual of Style (1982
edition). Uppercase letters in article, journal, and book titles are left as given in the .bib file. The style must be used
in conjunction with certain re-definitions of thebibliography and \cite, which are provided in the required
LATEX package authordate1-4.

Example using authordate1
( Lincoll, 1977) in a collection, th e article (Oaho et al. , 1983) in a p roceedings,
References
Aamp ort, L[eslie] A. 1986. T he G nats and G nus Document Preparation S ystem.
G-An imal’s Journal, 41(7), 73+ . This is a full ARTICLE ent ry.
K nuth , Donald E. 1981. Semin um erical Algorithm s. Second edn. The Art of
Comp uter Pr ogrammin g, vol. 2. Reading, Massachu setts: Addison-Wesley.
K nvth, Jill C. 1988 (Feb .) . T he Program ming of Computer Art. Vernier Art
Cent er, Stanford , Californ ia. Th is is a fu ll BOO KLET entry.
L in coll, Dan iel D. 1977. Semigroups of Recu rren ces. Part 3, pag es 179—183
of: Lipcoll, David J., Law rie, D . H., & Sameh, A. H. (eds), Hig h S peed
Compute r and Algorithm Organiz ation, th ird ed n. Fast Comp uters , no.
23. New York: Acad emic Press. This is a full INCO LLECT IO N entry.
O ah o, Alfred V., Ullman , Jeffrey D., & Yann akakis, Mih alis. 1983. O n Notion s of
Information Transfer in VLS I Circuits. Pag es 133—139 of: Oz, W izard V., &
Yan nakakis, Mihalis ( eds), Proc. Fifteenth An nual ACM Sympos ium on the
Theory of Com puting. All ACM C onferen ces, n o. 17. B ost on : Academic
Press, for The OX Association for C omp uting Mach in ery. This is a full
INPROCEDINGS entry.
Phony-Balon ey, F. Phidias. 1988 (Jun e-Aug.). Fightin g Fire with Fire: Festoon -
ing Frenc h Phrases. Ph D Dissertat ion, Fanst ord Un iversity, Departm ent
of French. Th is is a fu ll PHDTHESIS entr y.
1
authordate2.bst
As does authordate1.bst, this style produces author-date reference lists based loosely on the recommenda-
tions of British Standard 1629 (1976 edition), Butcher’s Copy-editing (Cambridge University Press, 1981), and the
Chicago Manual of Style (1982 edition). The style differs from authordate1.bst in that it uses downstyle titles;
that is, titles that are lowercase except for the first letter, any letter following a colon, and letters protected by open-
ing and closing braces. The style must be used in conjunction with certain re-definitions of thebibliography
and \cite, which are provided in the required LATEX package authordate1-4.

References
Aamp ort, L [eslie] A. 1986. T he gnats an d gnus docu ment p reparation system.
G-An imal’s journal, 41(7), 73+ . T his is a full ARTIC LE entry.
K nuth , Donald E. 1981. Sem in umerical algorithms. Secon d edn. The Art of
K nvth, Jill C . 1988 (Feb.). The programm ing of computer art . Vernier Art
L in coll, Daniel D . 1977. S em igroups of recurrences. Part 3, pag es 179—183 of:

Lip coll, David J., Lawrie, D. H., & Sameh, A. H. (ed s), High speed com pu ter
and algorithm organization, third ed n. Fast Comp uters, no. 23. New York:
Academic Press. T his is a full INCO LLECT IO N entry.
O ah o, Alfr ed V., Ullman , Jeffr ey D., & Yannakakis, Mihalis. 1983. O n notions
of in formation transfer in VLSI circu its. Pages 133—139 of: Oz, W izard V.,
& Yann akakis, Mihalis ( eds), Proc. fifteenth an nual acm symposium on the
theory of computin g. All AC M C onferences, no. 17. Boston: Academic
Press, for The OX Association for C omp uting Mach in ery. This is a full
INPROCEDINGS entry.
Phony-Balon ey, F. Phidias. 1988 ( Ju ne-Aug.). Fighting fire with fire: Festoon -
ing Frenc h phrases. PhD dissertation, Fan stord University, Departm ent of
French. This is a fu ll P HD THES IS entry.
1
authordate3.bst 457
authordate3.bst
As does authordate1.bst, this style produces author-date reference lists based loosely on the recommen-
dations of British Standard 1629 (1976 edition), Butcher’s Copy-editing (Cambridge University Press, 1981), and
the Chicago Manual of Style (1982 edition). Uppercase letters in article, journal, and book titles are left as given in
the .bib file. The style differs from authordate1.bst in that author’s names are given in small capitals in the
list of references. The style must be used in conjunction with certain re-definitions of thebibliography and
\cite, which are provided in the required LATEX package authordate1-4.

References
Aamport, L[eslie ] A. 1986. The G nats and Gnu s Docum ent Preparation
System. G -Animal’s Jou rn al, 41(7), 73+. This is a fu ll ART ICLE entry.
K nuth, Dona ld E. 1981. Sem in umerical Algorithms . Secon d edn . Th e Art of
K nvth, Ji ll C. 1988 (Feb.) . The Program ming of Computer Art . Vernier Art
Lin coll, Dan iel D. 1977. Semigr ou ps of Recurrences. Part 3, pages 179—183
of: Lipco ll, David J., Lawrie, D. H ., & Sa meh, A . H. ( eds), High
Speed Computer an d Alg orithm Organ ization, th ird edn. Fast C omput ers,
no. 23. New York: Academic Press. T his is a fu ll INC OLLE CT ION entry.
Oaho , A lfre d V ., Ullman, Je ffrey D., & Yannak akis, M ihalis. 1983.
On Not ions of In formation Transfer in VLSI Circuits. Pages 133—139 of:
Oz, W izard V., & Yann akak is, Mihalis ( ed s), Proc. Fifteenth An nual
ACM S ym posium on the Theory of Com puting. All ACM Conferences,
no. 17. Boston: Academic Press, for T he OX Associat ion for Compu ting
Mach in ery. This is a fu ll INPROCED ING S entry.
Pho ny-Balo ney, F. Phid ias. 1988 (Jun e-Aug.). Fighting Fire with Fi re :
Festooning Fren ch Phrases. PhD Dissertation, Fanstord University, De-
partment of French. This is a fu ll PHDTHES IS entry.
1
authordate4.bst
As does authordate3.bst, this style produces author-date reference lists based loosely on the recommen-
dations of British Standard 1629 (1976 edition), Butcher’s Copy-editing (Cambridge University Press, 1981), and
the Chicago Manual of Style (1982 edition). Author’s names are given in small capitals in the list of references.
The style differs from authordate3.bst in that it uses downstyle titles—titles that are lowercase except for the
first letter, any letter following a colon, and letters protected by opening and closing braces. The style must be used
in conjunction with certain re-definitions of thebibliography and \cite, which are provided in the required
LATEX package authordate1-4.

References
Aamport, L[esli e] A. 1986. T he gn ats an d gnu s docu ment preparation sys-
tem. G-Animal’s journal, 41(7) , 73+. This is a full ARTIC LE entry.
K nuth, Don ald E. 1981. Se mi numerical algorithm s. S econd edn . The Art of
K nvth, Jill C . 1988 ( Feb.). T he programm in g of com puter art. Vern ier Art
Lin coll, Daniel D. 1977. Semigrou ps of recurrences. Part 3, pages 179—183

of: Lipco ll, David J., Lawrie, D. H ., & Sa meh, A . H. ( eds), High
speed com puter and algorithm organization, th ird ed n. Fast Computers, no.
23. New York: Acad emic Press. This is a full INCO LLECT IO N entry.
Oaho , A lfre d V ., Ullman, Je ffrey D., & Yannak akis, M ihalis. 1983.
On n otions of information transfer in VLSI circu it s. Pages 133—139 of: Oz,
W izard V., & Yannak akis, Miha lis ( ed s), Proc. fi fteenth annu al acm
sym posium on the theory of computin g. All AC M Conferences, no. 17.
Boston: Academic P ress, for The OX Association for Computing M achin-
ery. This is a fu ll INPROC EDINGS entry.
Pho ny-Balo ney, F. Ph idias. 1988 ( June-Au g.). Fighting fire with fire: Fes-
toon ing Fren ch phrases. PhD d issertation , Fanst ord University, Departm ent
of French. Th is is a fu ll PHDTHESIS entr y.
1
bbs.bst 459
bbs.bst
The file produces bibliographies approximately in the format of Behavioral and Brain Sciences. It was adapted
from apalike.bst, incorporating features of astron.bst. The style requires the astron package.

Example using bbs
References
Aamp ort, L. A. (1986). Th e gn at s and gnus docu ment prep aration system.
G-Animal’s Journal, 41(7):73+. Th is is a full ARTICL E entry.
K nuth , D. E. ( 1981). S em inu me rical Algorithm s, (second ed.), volum e 2 of The
Art of Compute r Prog ramm in g. Ad dison-Wesley. T his is a full BOO K entry.
K nvth, J. C. (1988). The programm ing of compu ter art. Vernier Art Center,
St an ford , Californ ia. Th is is a full BOO KLET ent ry.
L in coll, D . D. (1977). Semigrou ps of recurrences. In: High Speed Com puter and
Algorithm Organ ization , D. J. Lipcoll, D. H. Lawrie, & A. H. Sameh , ed.,
(third ed.), nu mb er 23 in Fast Comp uters , part 3, pages 179—183. Academic
Press . T his is a full INCOLLECT IO N entry.
O ah o, A. V., Ullman, J. D., & Yannakakis, M. (1983). On notion s of information
transfer in VLS I circu it s. In: Proc. Fifteen th Ann ual ACM Sympos ium on
the Theory of Computin g, W . V. O z & M. Yan nakakis, ed., nu mber 17 in
All AC M Conferences, pages 133—139. T he OX Asso ciation for Compu ting
Machin ery, Acad emic Press. T his is a full INPRO CEDINGS entry.
Phony-Balon ey, F. P. (1988) . Fighting Fire with Fire: Festoon ing Fren ch
Phrases. P hD dissertation, Fanst ord Un iversity. Th is is a full P HD THE-
SIS entry.
1
bibtoref.bst
Format of citation None
This bibliography style translates BibTEX bibliography entries into the UNIX refer format. The style converts
\cite{key} entries or the \nocite{*} command to UNIX and places the resulting bibliography in the corre-
sponding .bbl file. The illustration below shows the .bbl file generated for a sample file.
%T Semigroups of Recurrences
%B High Speed Computer and Algorithm Organization
%A Daniel˜D. Lincoll
%E David J. Lipcoll and D. H. Lawrie and A. H. Sameh
%L incollection-full
%D 1977
%P 179—183
%O This is a full INCOLLECTION entry
%N 23
%S Fast Computers
%C New York
%T On Notions of Information Transfer in {VLSI} Circuits

%B Proc. Fifteenth Annual ACM Symposium on the Theory of Computing
%A Alfred˜V. Oaho
%A Jeffrey˜D. Ullman
%A Mihalis Yannakakis
%E Wizard V. Oz and Mihalis Yannakakis
%L inproceedings-full
%D 1983
%P 133—139
%O This is a full INPROCEDINGS entry
%N 17
%S All ACM Conferences
%C Boston
%T The Gnats and Gnus Document Preparation System

%A L[eslie]Ã. Aamport
%J \mbox{G-Animal’s} Journal
%L article-full
%V 41
%D 1986
%P 73+
%O This is a full ARTICLE entry
%N 7
%T Seminumerical Algorithms
%A Donald˜E. Knuth
%L book-full
%V 2
%D 10˜{\noopsort{1973c}}1981
%O This is a full BOOK entry
%S The Art of Computer Programming
%C Reading, Massachusetts
1
birthday.bst 461
birthday.bst

Organization of reference list In order by month and day
Format of citation [—]
business.bib
family.bib
test.bib
page 507.
In your document, use TEX fields containing \dir{key} commands instead of standard citations, as described
below. The styles support a \nodir{key} command, which creates a list with no citations in the text. With the
\nodir{key} command, the birthday.bst style produces a reference list containing full birthdate information
for all entries in the referenced database, as shown in the illustration that follows.
I To enter a \nodir command in a TEX field

3. In the entry area, type \nodir{key} where key is the key for the database entry you want to cite.
4. Choose OK.

Example using birthday
? 29/1 Donald Ernest Knudson
? 6/2/1973 Christophe Geuzaine
? 10/2, 5/11 and 1/1 Daffy Duck Knudson, Bugs Bunny and Pluto
? 27/2 Bip P. Knudson
1
cbe.bst 463
cbe.bst
The file produces bibliographies approximately in the Council of Biology Editors format, which is used by
Evolution, American Naturalist, and many other journals. It was adapted from apalike.bst, incorporating
features of astron.bst. In the reference list, authors’ names are printed in small capitals. The style requires the
astron package.

Example using cb e
References
Aamport, L. A . 1986. T he gnats and gnus d ocu ment preparat ion system.
G-Animal’s Journal 41:73+ . T his is a full ARTICLE ent ry.
K nuth, D. E. 1981. S eminu merical Algorithms , volume 2 of The Art of Com-
puter Program ming. Ad dison-Wesley, Readin g, Massachus etts, second ed i-
tion . T his is a fu ll BOOK entry.
K nvth, J. C . 1988. The programming of compu ter art. Vernier Art Center,
Lin coll, D. D. 1977. S emigroup s of recurrences, pp. 179—183. I n D. J. L ip coll,
D. H. Lawrie, and A. H. S ameh ( eds.), High Speed C omp uter and Algorith m
Organizat ion, numb er 23 in Fast Compu ters, part 3. Academic Press, New
York, third edition. This is a fu ll INC OLL ECT ION ent ry.
Oaho , A . V ., Ullman, J. D., a nd Yan nakak is, M. 1983. On n ot ions of in-
formation transfer in VLS I circuit s. In W. V. O z an d M . Yann akakis ( ed s.),
Proc. Fift eent h Annu al ACM Symp osium on t he T heory of Compu ting, num-
b er 17 in All AC M Conferences, p p. 133—139, Boston. The OX Association
for C omp uting Machinery, Academic Press. Th is is a full INPROCEDINGS
entry.
Pho ny-Balo ney, F. P. 1988. Fighting Fire w it h Fire: Festooning Fren ch
Phrases. PhD d issertation , Fan stord University, Department of French. Th is
is a fu ll PHDTHESIS entr y.
1
cea.bst
Required files cea package
The style is the BibTEX style for Computers and Electronics in Agriculture. The reference list is double-spaced.
For every entry, the style requires a ‘year’ field, and either an author (in some cases, an editor) field or a key field.
The command \cite results in (Jones, 1986) in the text. The reference list has no labels but includes a date
immediately after the author’s name. Author (and editor) names appear last name first. The style is adapted from
the bibliography style apalike.bst (24-Jan.-88 version). It requires the cea package.
Example using cea
References
Aamport, L. A. 1986. The gnats and gnus document preparation system.
G-Animal’s Journal, 41(7):73+. This is a full ARTICLE entry.
Knuth, D. E. 1981. Seminumerical Algorithms, volume 2 of The Art of Computer
Programming. Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, second edition.
This is a full BOOK entry.
Knvth, J. C. 1988. The programming of computer art. Vernier Art Center,
Lincoll, D. D. 1977. Semigroups of recurrences. In: Lipcoll, D. J., Lawrie, D. H.,
and Sameh, A. H. (Editors), High Speed Computer and Algorithm Orga-

cea.bst 465
nization, number 23 in Fast Computers, part 3, pages 179—183. Academic
Press, New York, third edition. This is a full INCOLLECTION entry.
Oaho, A. V., Ullman, J. D., and Yannakakis, M. 1983. On notions of information
transfer in VLSI circuits. In: Oz, W. V. and Yannakakis, M. (Editors),
Proc. Fifteenth Annual ACM Symposium on the Theory of Computing,
Boston. The OX Association for Computing Machinery, Academic Press,
(17):133—139. This is a full INPROCEDINGS entry.
Phony-Baloney, F. P. 1988. Fighting Fire with Fire: Festooning French Phrases.
PhD dissertation, Fanstord University, Department of French. This is a full
PHDTHESIS entry.
cell.bst
The style is a modification of the bibliography style jmb.bst, which was designed to approximate the bib-
liography style of the Journal of Molecular Biology and Journal of Theoretical Biology. Bibliography entries for
articles, books, and items in proceedings are formatted carefully. You can toggle between styles appropriate for the
two journals by toggling the titles on and off. The Journal of Theoretical Biology requires titles; the Journal of
Molecular Biology doesn’t.
I To toggle the titles off
1. Choose or, from the Insert menu, choose Typeset Object and then choose TeX Field.
2. In the entry area, type \nocite{TitlesOn} and choose OK.
3. Make sure the bibliography database contains a bibliography article with the same citation key.
cell.bst 467

Example using cell
[Lincoll, 1977] in a collection , the article [Oaho et al., 1983] in a p roceedings,
t he article [Aamp ort, 1986], the b ook [K nuth , 1981], the booklet [Knvth , 1988],
and t o th e th esis [Ph ony-Baloney, 1988]. Combined citation s like [Lincoll, 1977,
Aamp ort, 1986] may have special appearance. The b ibliograp hy section for
References
[Aamport, 1986] Aamp ort, L. A. (1986). G-Animal’s Jou rnal 41 (7), 73+. Th is
is a full ARTICLE ent ry.
[Knu th, 1981] K nuth , D. E. (1981) . Seminum erical Algorithms, volume 2 of Th e
Art of Compu ter Programming. Reading, Massachusett s: Addison-Wesley,
second edition. Th is is a full BOO K ent ry.
[Knvt h, 1988] Knvth , J. C. (1988). Vernier Art Center Stan ford , California.
This is a fu ll B OOK LET entry.
[Lincoll, 1977] L in coll, D. D. (1977). In : High S peed Compu ter and Algorith m
O rganization , (Lip coll, D. J., Law rie, D. H., and Sameh, A. H., eds) num-
b er 23 in Fast C omp uters p art 3, pp . 179—183. Academic Press New York
t hird edition. This is a full INCO LLEC TIO N entry.
[Oaho et al., 1983] Oaho, A. V., Ullman, J. D., and Yann akakis, M. (1983). In:
Pr oc. Fifteenth An nual AC M Sym posium on the Theory of Compu ting, (Oz,
W . V. an d Yannakakis, M., ed s) nu mb er 17 in All AC M C on ferences p p.
133—139, Th e OX Association for C omp uting Mach in ery Boston: Academic
Pr ess. Th is is a fu ll INPROC EDINGS entry.
[Phony-Baloney, 1988] Phony-Baloney, F. P. ( 1988). Fighting Fire w it h Fire:

Festooning Fr en ch Ph rases. Ph D dissertation Fanst ord University Depart-
ment of French. Th is is a fu ll PHDTHESIS entr y.
1
chicago.bst

Format of citation (Author date) and multiple other formats
Required files chicago package
This BibTEX bibliography style follows the ‘B’ reference style of the 13th Edition of The Chicago Manual of
Style. The style, which must be used with the chicago package, supports a variety of citation formats.

Example using chicago
some citation s added in the next sentence. This sent ence refers to th e art i-
cle ( Lincoll 1977) in a collection, th e article (O ah o, Ullman, an d Yan nakakis
1983) in a p roceedings, the article (Aamp ort 1986), t he book (Knuth 1981),
t he b ooklet (K nvth 1988), an d to th e th esis (P hony-Balon ey 1988). C ombined
citation s like (Lin coll 1977; Aamp ort 1986) may have special app earan ce. Th e
b ib liograp hy section for these cit ations comes next.
References
Aamp ort, L. A. (1986, July). The gnats and gnus d ocument p reparation sys-
tem. G-An imal’s Journ al 41 (7), 73+. This is a full ARTICLE ent ry.
K nuth , D. E. (1981, 10 January). Sem inu me rical Algorithm s ( Secon d ed.),
Volu me 2 of T he Art of Com pu ter Programmin g. Reading, M assachuset ts:
Ad dison-Wesley. Th is is a full BOO K ent ry.
K nvth, J. C. (1988, Febru ary). T he p rogramming of compu ter art. Vern ier
Art C enter, St an ford , Californ ia. T his is a full BOOK LET entry.
Lin coll, D. D. (1977, Sep temb er). Semigrou ps of recurrences. In D. J. L ip coll,
D. H. Law rie, and A. H. Sameh (E ds.), High Speed C omputer and Algo-
rithm Organ ization (Third ed.)., Number 23 in Fast C omput ers, Part 3,
p p. 179—183. New York: Academic Press. T his is a full INCO LLEC TIO N
entry.
O ah o, A. V., J. D. Ullm an , an d M . Yann akakis (1983, M arch) . On notions
of information transfer in VLSI circuits. In W . V. Oz and M. Yan nakakis
(E ds.), Proc. Fiftee nth Ann ual ACM S ymposiu m on the T heory of Com-
puting, Numb er 17 in All AC M Conferen ces, Bost on , pp. 133—139. Th e
OX Association for Compu ting M achinery: Acad emic Press. T his is a full
INPROCED ING S entry.
Ph ony-Balon ey, F. P. (1988, June-August ). Fighting Fire with Fire: Festoon -
in g French Phrases. PhD d issertation , Fan stord Un iversity, Departm ent
of French. This is a fu ll PHDTHES IS entry.
1
dtk.bst 469
dtk.bst
Directory TCITeX/BibTeX/bst/dtk
Sample BibTEX Databases
beispiel.bib
dtk.bib
This bibliography style is intended for texts in German, particularly for use in Die TeXnische Komoedie, the
communications of Dante e.V.

Example using dtk
[4] in a collection, the article [5] in a proceedings, the article [1], the book [2],
the booklet [3], and to the thesis [6]. Combined citations like [4, 1] may have
special appearance. The bibliography section for these citations comes next.
References
[1] L[eslie] A. Aamport: The Gnats and Gnus Document Preparation System ;
G-Animal’s Journal ; 41(7), S. 73+; Juli 1986; This is a full ARTICLE entry.
[2] Donald E. Knuth: Seminumerical Algorithms ; Bd. 2 von The Art of Com-
puter Programming ; Addison-Wesley; Reading, Massachusetts; 2. Aufl.;
10 Jan. 1981; This is a full BOOK entry.
[3] Jill C. Knvth: The Programming of Computer Art ; Vernier Art Center;
Stanford, California; Febr. 1988; This is a full BOOKLET entry.
[4] Daniel D. Lincoll: Semigroups of Recurrences ; in High Speed Computer and
Algorithm Organization (Hg. David J. Lipcoll, D. H. Lawrie und A. H.
Sameh); Nr. 23 in Fast Computers; part 3, S. 179—183; Academic Press;
New York; 3. Aufl.; Sept. 1977; This is a full INCOLLECTION entry.
[5] Alfred V. Oaho, Jeffrey D. Ullman und Mihalis Yannakakis: On Notions
of Information Transfer in VLSI Circuits ; in Proc. Fifteenth Annual ACM
Symposium on the Theory of Computing (Hg. Wizard V. Oz und Mihalis
Yannakakis); Nr. 17 in All ACM Conferences; S. 133—139; Boston; März
1983; The OX Association for Computing Machinery; Academic Press; This
is a full INPROCEDINGS entry.
[6] F. Phidias Phony-Baloney: Fighting Fire with Fire: Festooning French
Phrases ; PhD dissertation; Fanstord University; Department of French;
Juni-Aug. 1988; This is a full PHDTHESIS entry.
1
econometrica.bst
(Author and Author date)
(Author, Author, and Author date)
This BibTEX bibliography style was created for Econometrica. Authors’ names in the reference list are produced
in small capitals. The style must be used with the harvard package.

Example using econometrica
( Lincoll 1977) in a collection, the article (Oaho, Ullman, and Yan nakakis 1983)
in a proceedin gs, the article (Aamp ort 1986), t he b ook (Knu th 1973c1981),
citation s like (Lin coll 1977, Aamp ort 1986) may have special app earan ce. Th e
References
Aamport, L . A. (1986): “The G nats and G nus D ocument Preparat ion Sys-
t em ,” G -Animal’s Jou rn al, 41(7), 73+, This is a full ARTICLE ent ry.
K nuth, D. E. (1981): Semin umerical Algorithms, vol. 2 of The Art of Com-
puter Programm ing. Addison-Wesley, Reading, M assachus et ts, second edn.,
K nvth, J. C . ( 1988): “T he Programming of Compu ter Art,” Vern ier Art

Center, S tan ford, C alifornia, Th is is a fu ll BOO KLET entry.
Lin coll, D. D. (1977): “Semigrou ps of Recurrences,” in High S peed Com pu ter

an d Algorithm Org an izati on , ed. by D. J. Lip coll, D. H. L awrie, and A. H.
S ameh , no. 23 in Fast Comput ers, part 3, pp. 179—183. Academic Press, New
York, th ird ed n., This is a full INCO LLECTIO N entry.
Oaho , A. V., J. D. Ullman, and M. Yan nakak is (1983): “O n Notions

of In formation Transfer in VLSI Circuits,” in Proc. Fifteenth Annual ACM
S ymposi um on the Theory of Computin g, ed. by W . V. O z, a nd M. Yannakakis,
n o. 17 in All ACM Conferen ces, pp . 133—139, B oston. Th e OX Association
for Comp uting Mach in ery, Academic Press, This is a fu ll INPROCEDINGS
entry.
Pho ny-Balo ney, F. P. (1988): “Fighting Fire with Fire: Festooning Fren ch
Ph rases,” Ph D d issertation , Fanstord University, Department of French, Th is
is a full PHDT HESIS entry.
1
email.bst 471
email.bst
Format of reference list label None or abbreviated name
business.bib
family.bib
test.bib
page 507.
The directory styles also require the use of the \dir{key} command instead of the \cite{key} com-
mand. In your document, use TEX fields containing \dir{key} commands instead of standard citations, as de-
scribed below. The styles support a \nodir{key} command, which creates a list with no citations in the text.

4. Choose OK.
The email.bst style produces a reference list containing the email addresses corresponding to the cited keys.
It prints a name at the citation point unless the \nodir{key} command is used. The first sample shown below
illustrates an email address list created with \dir{key} commands in the text. The second sample illustrates an
email address list created using a \nodir{*} command without any preceding text. The samples were created
using the databases business.bib and family.bib.

Example using email
been created with TEX commands that replace standard citations. The list be-
low contains an address for Donald Ernest Knudson and also for Christophe
Geuzaine. It also contains listings for Bip P. Knudson and for The Knud-
soft Company . The email list for these citations comes next.
Christophe Geuzaine p Christophe.Geuzaine@advalvas.be w Christophe.

Geuzaine@ulg.ac.be
The Knudsoft Company knud@knudsoft.com
Bip P. Knudson p bip_bip@free.prov.gnu
Donald Ernest Knudson p duck@novosi.uni.gnu

Example using email
Christophe Geuzaine p Christophe.Geuzaine@advalvas.be w Christophe.
Geuzaine@ulg.ac.be
The Knudsoft Company knud@knudsoft.com
Bip P. Knudson p bip_bip@free.prov.gnu
Donald Ernest Knudson p duck@novosi.uni.gnu

email-html.bst 473
email-html.bst
Format of reference list label None or abbreviated name
business.bib
family.bib
test.bib
page 507.
Similar to email.bst, email-html.bst produces an HTML file for a reference list containing full database
information corresponding to the cited keys or to the \nodir{key} command. The style supports URL fields
within the bibliographic information, so that entries in the list become links to the resources themselves. The re-
sulting HTML file can stand alone or be incorporated into the HTML file for the document containing the citations.
The style doesn’t produce an automatic heading for the list.
In your document, use TEX fields containing \dir{key} commands instead of standard citations, as described for
email.bst on page 471. The styles support a \nodir{key} command, which creates an address book with no
citations in the text.
and generate a BibTEX address list. Then, use the resulting HTML file as it stands or incorporate it into your
document, according to the instructions that follow.

2. Delete the <HTML>, <TITLE>, and </HTML> commands.


c. Choose OK.

d. Choose OK.
The sample .htm file shown here was created in SWP according to these instructions. the .tex file contains a
\nodir{*} command that was deleted after the .htm file was created but before the document was exported to
HTML. The sample was created using the databases business.bib and family.bib.
finplain.bst 475
finplain.bst

Directory TCITeX/BibTeX/bst/finbib
This style is a translation into Finnish of the BibTEX standard bibliography style plain.bst, which sorts
entries alphabetically and labels them with numbers.

Example using finplain
References
[1] L[eslie] A. Aamport. The gnats and gnus document preparation system.
G-Animal’s Journal, 41(7):73+, heinäkuu 1986. This is a full ARTICLE
entry.
[2] Donald E. Knuth. Seminumerical Algorithms, sarjan The Art of Computer
Programming osa 2. Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, toinen laitos,
10 tammikuu 1981. This is a full BOOK entry.
[3] Jill C. Knvth. The programming of computer art. Vernier Art Center,
Stanford, California, helmikuu 1988. This is a full BOOKLET entry.
[4] Daniel D. Lincoll. Semigroups of recurrences. Kirjassa David J. Lipcoll,
D. H. Lawrie, ja A. H. Sameh, toim., High Speed Computer and Algorithm
Organization, sarjassa Fast Computers, Fast Computers 23, part 3, ss. 179—
183. Academic Press, New York, kolmas laitos, syyskuu 1977. This is a full
INCOLLECTION entry.
[5] Alfred V. Oaho, Jeffrey D. Ullman, ja Mihalis Yannakakis. On notions of
information transfer in VLSI circuits. Kirjassa Wizard V. Oz ja Mihalis
Yannakakis, toim., Proc. Fifteenth Annual ACM Symposium on the Theory
of Computing, sarjassa All ACM Conferences, All ACM Conferences 17,
ss. 133—139, Boston, maaliskuu 1983. The OX Association for Computing
Machinery, Academic Press. This is a full INPROCEDINGS entry.
[6] F. Phidias Phony-Baloney. Fighting Fire with Fire: Festooning French
Phrases. PhD dissertation, Fanstord University, Department of French,
kesäkuu-elokuu 1988. This is a full PHDTHESIS entry.
1
gerabbrv.bst

Required files bibgerm package; german.or ngerman package
Directory TCITeX/BibTeX/bst/germbib
gerbibtx.bib
gerxmple.bib
For use with either German or English, the styles in the germbib directory require the bibgerm package and
either the german or ngerman package. The packages are available from CTAN at http://www.ctan.org. The
style prints the authors’ names in small capitals in the reference list. The sample was created using the database
gerbibtx.bib and gerxampl.bib.

Example using gerabbrv
References
[1] Aamport, L. A.: Das System für die Vorbereitung von Dokumentationen
über Gnats und Gnus. Die Haustier-Zeitschrift, 41(7):73 ff., . 1986. Dies ist
ein vollständiger ARTICLE-Eintrag.
[2] Knuth, D. E.: Seminumerische Algorithmen, . 2 . Die Kunst der Comput-
erprogrammierung. Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, Zweite ., 10. .
1981. Dies ist ein vollständiger BOOK-Eintrag.
[3] Knvth, J. C.: Die Programmierung von Computerkunst . Kunstverein
Düsseldorf, Düsseldorf, Nordrheinwestfalen, . 1988. Dies ist ein vollständiger
BOOKLET-Eintrag.
[4] Lincoll, D. D.: Semigruppen von Wiederholungen. . Lipcoll, D. J.,
D. H. Lawrie . A. H. Sameh (.): High Speed Computer und Algorith-
mus Organisation, . 23 . Schnelle Computer, Teil 3, . 179—183. Univer-
sitätsdruckerei, Hintertupfingen am Bodensee, Dritte ., . 1977. Dies ist ein
vollständiger INCOLLECTION-Eintrag.
[5] Oaho, A. V., J. D. Ullman . M. Yannakakis: Vorstellungen über die
Informationsübertragung in VLSI-Schaltkreisen. . Oz, W. V. . M. Yan-
nakakis (.): Konferenz zum fünften Jahrestag der OX-Vereinigung für
Computing-Maschinerie: Symposium über die Theorie des Computing, . 17
. Alle Konferenzen der OX-Vereinigung für Computing-Maschinerie, . 133—
139, München, . 1983. OX-Vereinigung für Computing-Maschinerie, Univer-
sitätsdruckerei. Dies ist ein vollständiger INPROCEDINGS-Eintrag.
[6] Phony-Baloney, F. P.: Feuer mit Feuer bekämpfen: Gewandte
Französische Redewendungen. Dissertation, Universität Würzburg,
Abteilung für Französisch, .—. 1988. Dies ist ein vollständiger PHDTHESIS-
Eintrag.
1
geralpha.bst 477
geralpha.bst

gerbibtx.bib
gerxmple.bib
style prints the authors’ names in small capitals in the reference list. The geralpha.bst style uses source labels
such as Knu66, formed from the author’s name and the year of publication. The sample was created using the
database gerbibtx.bib and gerxampl.bib.

Example using geralpha
BibTeX has been selected for the bibliography choice in this shell document. One
of the sample BibTeX databases included with SW has been selected and some
citations added in the next sentence. This sentence refers to the article [Lin77] in
a collection, the article [OUY83] in a proceedings, the article [Aam86], the book
[Knu81], the booklet [Knv88], and to the thesis [PB88]. Combined citations like
[Lin77, Aam86] may have special appearance. The bibliography section for these
Literatur
[Aam86] Aamport, Leslie Andrew: Das System für die Vorbereitung von
Dokumentationen über Gnats und Gnus. Die Haustier-Zeitschrift,
41(7):73 ff., Juli 1986. Dies ist ein vollständiger ARTICLE-Eintrag.
[Knu81] Knuth, Donald Edward: Seminumerische Algorithmen, Band 2
der Reihe Die Kunst der Computerprogrammierung. Addison-Wesley,
Reading, Massachusetts, Zweite Auflage, 10. Januar 1981. Dies ist ein
vollständiger BOOK-Eintrag.
[Knv88] Knvth, Jill Clown: Die Programmierung von Computerkunst.
Kunstverein Düsseldorf, Düsseldorf, Nordrheinwestfalen, Februar
1988. Dies ist ein vollständiger BOOKLET-Eintrag.
[Lin77] Lincoll, Daniel David: Semigruppen von Wiederholungen.
In: Lipcoll, David Johannes, Dirk Herwig Lawrie und
Abraham Hans Sameh (Herausgeber): High Speed Computer
und Algorithmus Organisation, Nummer 23 in Schnelle Computer,
Teil 3, Seiten 179—183. Universitätsdruckerei, Hintertupfingen am
Bodensee, Dritte Auflage, September 1977. Dies ist ein vollständiger
INCOLLECTION-Eintrag.
[OUY83] Oaho, Alfred Veit, Jeffrey Dieter Ullman und Mihalis
Yannakakis: Vorstellungen über die Informationsübertragung in
VLSI-Schaltkreisen. In: Oz, Wizard Veit und Mihalis
Yannakakis (Herausgeber): Konferenz zum fünften Jahrestag
der OX-Vereinigung für Computing-Maschinerie: Symposium über
die Theorie des Computing, Nummer 17 in Alle Konferenzen
der OX-Vereinigung für Computing-Maschinerie, Seiten 133—139,
München, März 1983. OX-Vereinigung für Computing-Maschinerie,
Universitätsdruckerei. Dies ist ein vollständiger INPROCEDINGS-
Eintrag.
[PB88] Phony-Baloney, Friedrich Phidias: Feuer mit Feuer bekämpfen:
Gewandte Französische Redewendungen. Dissertation, Universität
1
gerapali.bst

Format of citation (AUTHOR date)
(AUTHOR date, (AUTHOR date)
(AUTHOR et al. date)
Required files apalike package;bibgerm package; german.or ngerman package
gerbibtx.bib
gerxmple.bib
gerapali.bst style formats bibliography entries alphabetically by author, last name first. The style prints the
authors’ names in small capitals in the reference list. The sample was created using the database gerbibtx.bib
and gerxampl.bib.

Example using gerapali
BibTeX has been selected for the bibliography choice in this shell document. One
of the sample BibTeX databases included with SW has been selected and some
citations added in the next sentence. This sentence refers to the article (Lincoll
1977) in a collection, the article (Oaho et al. 1983) in a proceedings, the article
(Aamport 1986), the book (Knuth 1981), the booklet (Knvth 1988), and to
the thesis (Phony-Baloney 1988). Combined citations like (Lincoll 1977;
Aamport 1986) may have special appearance. The bibliography section for
References
Aamport, Leslie Andrew (1986). Das System für die Vorbereitung
von Dokumentationen über Gnats und Gnus. Die Haustier-Zeitschrift,
41(7):73 ff. Dies ist ein vollständiger ARTICLE-Eintrag.
Knuth, Donald Edward (1981). Seminumerische Algorithmen, Bd. 2 d.
Reihe Die Kunst der Computerprogrammierung. Addison-Wesley, Reading,
Massachusetts, Zweite Aufl. Dies ist ein vollständiger BOOK-Eintrag.
Knvth, Jill Clown (1988). Die Programmierung von Computerkunst.
Kunstverein Düsseldorf, Düsseldorf, Nordrheinwestfalen. Dies ist ein
vollständiger BOOKLET-Eintrag.
Lincoll, Daniel David (1977). Semigruppen von Wiederholungen. In:
Lipcoll, David Johannes, D. H. Lawrie und A. H. Sameh, Hrsg.:
High Speed Computer und Algorithmus Organisation, Nr. 23 in Schnelle
Computer, Teil 3, S. 179—183. Universitätsdruckerei, Hintertupfingen am
Bodensee, Dritte Aufl. Dies ist ein vollständiger INCOLLECTION-Eintrag.
Oaho, Alfred Veit, J. D. Ullman und M. Yannakakis (1983).
Vorstellungen über die Informationsübertragung in VLSI-Schaltkreisen. In:
Oz, Wizard Veit und M. Yannakakis, Hrsg.: Konferenz zum fünften
Jahrestag der OX-Vereinigung für Computing-Maschinerie: Symposium
über die Theorie des Computing, Nr. 17 in Alle Konferenzen der OX-
Vereinigung für Computing-Maschinerie, S. 133—139, München. OX-
Vereinigung für Computing-Maschinerie, Universitätsdruckerei. Dies ist ein
vollständiger INPROCEDINGS-Eintrag.
Phony-Baloney, Friedrich Phidias (1988). Feuer mit Feuer bekämpfen:
Würzburg, Abteilung für Französisch. Dies ist ein vollständiger
PHDTHESIS-Eintrag.
1
gerplain.bst 479
gerplain.bst
Format of reference list label [Number]

Format of citation [Number]
gerbibtx.bib
gerxmple.bib
gerplain.bst style formats bibliography entries alphabetically by author, last name first. Like plain.bst,
the style gerplain.bst prints the authors’ names in small capitals in the reference list. The sample was created
using the database gerbibtx.bib and gerxampl.bib.

Example using gerplain
some citations added in the next sentence. This sentence refers to the article [4]
in a collection, the article [5] in a proceedings, the article [1], the book [2], the
booklet [3], and to the thesis [6]. Combined citations like [4, 1] may have special
appearance. The bibliography section for these citations comes next.
Literatur
[1] Aamport, Leslie Andrew: Das System für die Vorbereitung von
[2] Knuth, Donald Edward: Seminumerische Algorithmen, Band 2 der
Massachusetts, Zweite Auflage, 10. Januar 1981. Dies ist ein vollständiger
BOOK-Eintrag.
[3] Knvth, Jill Clown: Die Programmierung von Computerkunst.
Kunstverein Düsseldorf, Düsseldorf, Nordrheinwestfalen, Februar 1988.
Dies ist ein vollständiger BOOKLET-Eintrag.
[4] Lincoll, Daniel David: Semigruppen von Wiederholungen. In: Lipcoll,
David Johannes, Dirk Herwig Lawrie und Abraham Hans
Sameh (Herausgeber): High Speed Computer und Algorithmus
Organisation, Nummer 23 in Schnelle Computer, Teil 3, Seiten 179—
183. Universitätsdruckerei, Hintertupfingen am Bodensee, Dritte Auflage,
September 1977. Dies ist ein vollständiger INCOLLECTION-Eintrag.
[5] Oaho, Alfred Veit, Jeffrey Dieter Ullman und Mihalis
Yannakakis: Vorstellungen über die Informationsübertragung in VLSI-
Schaltkreisen. In: Oz, Wizard Veit und Mihalis Yannakakis
(Herausgeber): Konferenz zum fünften Jahrestag der OX-Vereinigung für
Computing-Maschinerie: Symposium über die Theorie des Computing,
Nummer 17 in Alle Konferenzen der OX-Vereinigung für Computing-
Maschinerie, Seiten 133—139, München, März 1983. OX-Vereinigung für
Computing-Maschinerie, Universitätsdruckerei. Dies ist ein vollständiger
INPROCEDINGS-Eintrag.
[6] Phony-Baloney, Friedrich Phidias: Feuer mit Feuer bekämpfen:
Würzburg, Abteilung für Französisch, Juni—August 1988. Dies ist ein
vollständiger PHDTHESIS-Eintrag.
1
gerunsrt.bst
Format of reference list label [Number]

Format of citation [Number]
gerbibtx.bib
gerxmple.bib
either the german or ngerman package. The packages are available from CTAN at http://www.ctan.org. Like
unsrt.bst, the style gerunsrt.bst lists bibliography entries in the order of their first citation. The sample
was created using the database gerbibtx.bib and gerxampl.bib.

Example using gerunsrt
some citations added in the next sentence. This sentence refers to the article [1]
in a collection, the article [2] in a proceedings, the article [3], the book [4], the
booklet [5], and to the thesis [6]. Combined citations like [1, 3] may have special
Literatur
[1] Lincoll, Daniel David: Semigruppen von Wiederholungen. In: Lipcoll,
David Johannes, Dirk Herwig Lawrie und Abraham Hans
Sameh (Herausgeber): High Speed Computer und Algorithmus
Organisation, Nummer 23 in Schnelle Computer, Teil 3, Seiten 179—
183. Universitätsdruckerei, Hintertupfingen am Bodensee, Dritte Auflage,
September 1977. Dies ist ein vollständiger INCOLLECTION-Eintrag.
[2] Oaho, Alfred Veit, Jeffrey Dieter Ullman und Mihalis
Yannakakis: Vorstellungen über die Informationsübertragung in VLSI-
Schaltkreisen. In: Oz, Wizard Veit und Mihalis Yannakakis
(Herausgeber): Konferenz zum fünften Jahrestag der OX-Vereinigung für
Computing-Maschinerie: Symposium über die Theorie des Computing,
Nummer 17 in Alle Konferenzen der OX-Vereinigung für Computing-
Maschinerie, Seiten 133—139, München, März 1983. OX-Vereinigung für
Computing-Maschinerie, Universitätsdruckerei. Dies ist ein vollständiger
INPROCEDINGS-Eintrag.
[3] Aamport, Leslie Andrew: Das System für die Vorbereitung von
[4] Knuth, Donald Edward: Seminumerische Algorithmen, Band 2 der
Massachusetts, Zweite Auflage, 10. Januar 1981. Dies ist ein vollständiger
BOOK-Eintrag.
[5] Knvth, Jill Clown: Die Programmierung von Computerkunst.
Kunstverein Düsseldorf, Düsseldorf, Nordrheinwestfalen, Februar 1988.
Dies ist ein vollständiger BOOKLET-Eintrag.
[6] Phony-Baloney, Friedrich Phidias: Feuer mit Feuer bekämpfen:
Würzburg, Abteilung für Französisch, Juni—August 1988. Dies ist ein
vollständiger PHDTHESIS-Eintrag.
1
humanbio.bst 481
humanbio.bst
The style produces bibliographies with a format similar to that used in Human Biology. The style was adapted
from apalike.bst, incorporating features of astron.bst style. It must be used with the astron package.

Example using humanbio
References
Aamp ort, L. A. 1986. Th e gn ats an d gnus d ocument preparat ion system.
G-Animal’s Journal, 41(7):73+. Th is is a full ARTICL E entry.
K nuth , D. E . 1981. S eminumerical Algorithms, volume 2 of The Art of Com-
puter Program ming. Ad dison-Wesley, Readin g, Massachus etts, second ed i-
tion . T his is a fu ll BOOK entry.
K nvth, J. C. 1988. Th e programming of comput er art . Vernier Art Center,
L in coll, D . D. 1977. Semigroups of recurrences. In Lip coll, D. J., Law rie, D. H.,
and S ameh , A. H., editors, High Speed C ompu ter and Algorithm Organiza-
tion , number 23 in Fast C omputers, p art 3, p ages 179—183. Acad emic Press,
New Yor k, third edition . T his is a full INCOLLECTION entry.
O ah o, A. V., Ullm an, J. D ., and Yan nakakis, M. 1983. On notion s of information
transfer in VL SI circuits. In Oz, W. V. and Yan nakakis, M., ed itors, Proc .
Fifteenth Annual ACM S ymposiu m on the Theory of Com pu ting , nu mb er 17
in All ACM Conferences, pages 133—139, Bost on . Th e OX Associat ion for
C omp uting Mach inery, Academic Press . Th is is a full INPROCEDINGS
entry.
Phony-Balon ey, F. P. 1988. Fightin g Fire with Fire: Festooning Fren ch Phrase s.
PhD dissertat ion, Fanstord University, Department of Fren ch . T his is a full
PHDTHESIS entry.
1
humannat.bst
Format of reference list label Author
The style produces bibliographies with a format similar to that used in Human Nature and American Anthropol-
ogist. The style was adapted from apalike.bst, incorporating features of astron.bst style. It must be used
with the astron package.

Example using humannat
References
Aamp ort, L. A.
1986. The gnats and gnu s do cu ment p reparation syst em . G-Anim al’s Jour-
nal, 41(7):73+. Th is is a full ARTICLE entry.
K nuth , D. E.
1981. S em inumerical Algorithms, volume 2 of The Art of Com pute r Pro-
gram ming, second edition. Read ing, M assachuset ts: Add ison -Wesley. Th is
is a fu ll BOO K ent ry.
K nvth, J. C .
1988. T he programming of computer art. Vernier Art Center, St anford,
C aliforn ia. Th is is a full BO OKLE T ent ry.
L in coll, D. D.
1977. S emigroup s of r ecu rrences. In High Speed C omputer an d Algorithm
Organization, D. J. Lipcoll, D. H. L awrie, an d A. H. Sameh, eds., number 23
in Fast Compu ters, p art 3, Pp. 179—183. New York: Academic Press. Th is
is a fu ll INCOL LEC TION entry.
O ah o, A. V., J. D. Ullman, and M. Yannakakis
1983. On not ions of information transfer in VLSI circuits. In Proc. Fif-
teenth An nual AC M Sym posium on the T heory of Com putin g, W. V. O z and
M. Yannakakis, eds., nu mb er 17 in All AC M Conferences, Pp . 133—139,
Boston. The OX Association for Computing Machinery, Academic Press.
T his is a full INPROC EDINGS entry.
Phony-Balon ey, F. P.
1988. Fighting Fire with Fire: Festoon ing Fren ch Phrases. Ph D dissertation,
Fan stord University, Department of Fren ch . This is a fu ll PHDTHESIS entry.
1
ieee.bst 483
ieee.bst
Directory TCITeX/BibTeX/bst/ieeetran
The style is a modification of unsrt.bst, which lists bibliography entries in the order of their first citation
and labels entries with numbers.

Example using ieee
References
[1] Daniel D. Lincoll, “Semigroups of recurrences,” in High Speed Computer and
Algorithm Organization, David J. Lipcoll, D. H. Lawrie, and A. H. Sameh,
Eds., number 23 in Fast Computers, part 3, pp. 179—183. Academic Press,
New York, third edition, Sept. 1977, This is a full INCOLLECTION entry.
[2] Alfred V. Oaho, Jeffrey D. Ullman, and Mihalis Yannakakis, “On notions
of information transfer in VLSI circuits,” in Proc. Fifteenth Annual ACM
Symposium on the Theory of Computing, Wizard V. Oz and Mihalis Yan-
nakakis, Eds., Boston, Mar. 1983, The OX Association for Computing Ma-
chinery, number 17 in All ACM Conferences, pp. 133—139, Academic Press,
This is a full INPROCEDINGS entry.
[3] L[eslie] A. Aamport, “The gnats and gnus document preparation system,”
G-Animal’s Journal, vol. 41, no. 7, pp. 73+, July 1986, This is a full AR-
TICLE entry.
[4] Donald E. Knuth, Seminumerical Algorithms, vol. 2 of The Art of Com-
puter Programming, Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, second edi-
tion, 10 Jan. 1981, This is a full BOOK entry.
[5] Jill C. Knvth, “The programming of computer art,” Vernier Art Center,
Stanford, California, Feb. 1988, This is a full BOOKLET entry.
[6] F. Phidias Phony-Baloney, Fighting Fire with Fire: Festooning French
Phrases, PhD dissertation, Fanstord University, Department of French,
June-Aug. 1988, This is a full PHDTHESIS entry.
1
ieeepes.bst

Directory TCITeX/BibTeX/bst/ieeepes
ieeepes
check.bib
This style supports reference lists for articles according to IEEE instructions. It has been modified from BibTEX
bibliography style unsrt.bst, which lists bibliography entries in the order of their first citation and labels entries
with numbers. The style spells out the names of months in the reference list.

Example using ieeepes
References
[1] Daniel D. Lincoll, “Semigroups of recurrences”, in High Speed Computer and
Algorithm Organization, David J. Lipcoll, D. H. Lawrie, and A. H. Sameh,
Eds., number 23 in Fast Computers, part 3, pp. 179—183. Academic Press,
New York, third edition, September 1977, This is a full INCOLLECTION
entry.
[2] Alfred V. Oaho, Jeffrey D. Ullman, and Mihalis Yannakakis, “On notions of
information transfer in VLSI circuits”, in Proc. Fifteenth Annual ACM Sym-
posium on the Theory of Computing, Wizard V. Oz and Mihalis Yannakakis,
Eds., Boston, March 1983, The OX Association for Computing Machinery,
number 17 in All ACM Conferences, pp. 133—139, Academic Press, This is
a full INPROCEDINGS entry.
[3] L[eslie] A. Aamport, “The gnats and gnus document preparation system”,
G-Animal’s Journal, vol. 41, no. 7, pp. 73+, July 1986, This is a full AR-
TICLE entry.
[4] Donald E. Knuth, Seminumerical Algorithms, vol. 2 of The Art of Com-
puter Programming, Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, second edi-
tion, 10 January 1981, This is a full BOOK entry.
[5] Jill C. Knvth, “The programming of computer art”, Vernier Art Center,
Stanford, California, February 1988, This is a full BOOKLET entry.
[6] F. Phidias Phony-Baloney, Fighting Fire with Fire: Festooning French
Phrases, PhD dissertation, Fanstord University, Department of French,
June-August 1988, This is a full PHDTHESIS entry.
1
ieeetr.bst 485
ieeetr.bst
The IEEE Transactions bibliography style (29-Jan-88 version) produces bibliographies with numeric labels,
IEEE abbreviations, quotation marks around article titles, and commas that separate all fields except after book
titles and before notes. The reference list is presented in order of first citation. Otherwise, the style is much like the
plain family of styles, from which it is adapted.

Example using ieeetr
some citat ions add ed in the n ext sentence. T his sentence refers to th e art icle [1]
in a collection, th e article [2] in a proceedings, the art icle [3], the b ook [4], th e
b ooklet [5], an d to th e thesis [6].C ombined cit ations like [1, 3] may have sp ecial
app earance. The bibliography sect ion for th ese citat ions comes n ext.
References
[1] D. D. L in coll, “S emigroup s of recu rrences,” in High Speed Computer and
Algorithm Organ ization (D. J. L ipcoll, D. H. Lawrie, an d A. H. Sameh,
eds.), no. 23 in Fast C omput ers, part 3, pp . 179—183, New York: Academic
Press, third ed., Sept. 1977. T his is a full INCOLLE CT ION entry.
[2] A. V. O ah o, J. D . Ullman, and M. Yann akakis, “On notions of information
transfer in VLSI circuits,” in Proc. Fifteenth Annu al ACM Sympos ium on
the Theory of Com puting (W. V. Oz and M. Yannakakis, ed s.), n o. 17 in All
ACM Con ferences, (Boston), pp . 133—139, The OX Association for C omp ut-
ing Mach in ery, Academic Press, Mar. 1983. T his is a full INPROCEDINGS
entry.
[3] L. A. Aamport, “Th e gnats an d gnus d ocument p reparation system,”
G-Anim al’s Journal, vol. 41, pp . 73+, July 1986. T his is a full ARTICL E
entry.
[4] D. E. Knuth, Semin umerical Algorithms, vol. 2 of The Art of Com pu ter
Program ming. Reading, Massachu setts: Addison-Wesley, second ed., 10 Jan.
[5] J. C. Knvth, “The programming of computer art.” Vern ier Art Center, Stan-
[6] F. P. Ph ony-Baloney, Fighting Fire with Fire: Festoonin g French Phrase s.

1
imac.bst
Directory TCITeX/BibTeX/bst/imac
imac.bib
This style supports the citation of chapters within reference list entries. Authors’ names are printed in bold in
the reference list.

Example using imac
References
[1] Lincoll, D. D., Semigroups of Recurrences, High Speed Computer and Al-
gorithm Organization, edited by Lipcoll, D. J., Lawrie, D. H. and Sameh,
A. H., No. 23 in Fast Computers, part 3, pp. 179—183, Academic Press, New
York, 3rd edn., Sep. 1977, this is a full INCOLLECTION entry.
[2] Oaho, A. V., Ullman, J. D. and Yannakakis, M., On Notions of In-
formation Transfer in VLSI Circuits, Proc. Fifteenth Annual ACM Sympo-
sium on the Theory of Computing, edited by Oz, W. V. and Yannakakis,
M., No. 17 in All ACM Conferences, pp. 133—139, The OX Association for
Computing Machinery, Academic Press, Boston, Mar. 1983, this is a full
INPROCEDINGS entry.
[3] Aamport, L. A., The Gnats and Gnus Document Preparation System,
G-Animal’s Journal, Vol. 41, No. 7, pp. 73+, Jul. 1986, this is a full ARTI-
CLE entry.
[4] Knuth, D. E., Seminumerical Algorithms, Vol. 2 of The Art of Computer
Programming, Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 2nd edn., 10 Jan.
1981, this is a full BOOK entry.
[5] Knvth, J. C., The Programming of Computer Art, Vernier Art Center,
Stanford, California, Feb. 1988, this is a full BOOKLET entry.
[6] Phony-Baloney, F. P., Fighting Fire with Fire: Festooning French
Phrases, PhD dissertation, Fanstord University, Department of French, Jun.-
Aug. 1988, this is a full PHDTHESIS entry.
1
inlinebib.bst 487
inlinebib.bst
Format of footnote label Subscripted number
Format of citation Subscripted number in text; full reference in numbered footnote
Required files inlinebib package
Directory TCITeX/BibTeX/bst/inlinebib
The style produces footnoted references in books and reports; that is, it creates superscripted numbers in the text
that refer to footnotes containing the reference information. The style produces complete information the first time
the reference is cited and abbreviated information thereafter. The style requires the inlinebib package. Instructions
for creating footnoted references with inlinebib.bst appear on the next page.
The sample that follows was created with the Standard LATEX Book shell. The reference list carries the title
Bibliography and begins on a separate page.
Sample Citations and

Bibliography
Example using inlinebib

some citations added in the next sentence. This sentence refers to the article1 in
a collection, the article2 in a proceedings, the article3 , the same article cited a
second time4 , the book5, the booklet6 , and to the thesis7 . Combined citations8;9
may have a special appearance. The bibliography section for these citations
comes next.
1 Daniel D. Lincoll, Semigroups of Recurrences, in: David J. Lipcoll, D. H. Lawrie and
A. H. Sameh, (eds.), High Speed Computer and Algorithm Organization, number 23 in Fast
Computers, part 3, pp. 179—183. Academic Press, New York, third edition, September 1977
2 Alfred V. Oaho, Jeffrey D. Ullman and Mihalis Yannakakis, On Notions of Information
Transfer in VLSI Circuits, in: Wizard V. Oz and Mihalis Yannakakis, (eds.), Proc. Fifteenth
Annual ACM Symposium on the Theory of Computing, number 17 in All ACM Conferences,
pp. 133—139, Boston, March 1983. The OX Association for Computing Machinery, Academic
Press
3 L[eslie] A. Aamport, “The gnats and gnus document preparation system”, G-Animal’s
Journal, 41(7):73+, July 1986

4 ibid.
5 Donald E. Knuth, Seminumerical Algorithms, volume 2 by The Art of Computer Pro-
gramming, Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, second edition, 10 January 1981

6 Jill C. Knvth, “The programming of computer art”, Vernier Art Center, Stanford, Cali-
fornia, February 1988

7 F. Phidias Phony-Baloney, Fighting Fire with Fire: Festooning French Phrases, PhD
dissertation, Fanstord University, Department of French, June-August 1988

8 Oaho et al., On Notions of Information Transfer in VLSI Circuits cit.
9 Donald E. Knuth, Fundamental Algorithms, volume 1 by The Art of Computer Pro-
gramming, section 1.2, pp. 10—119, Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, second edition,
10 January 1973
v
I To create footnoted references

1. Place the insertion point where you want the citation.
2. Choose or, from the Insert menu, choose Note.
3. In the Type of Note area, select footnote.
4. With the insertion point n the entry area, choose or, from the Insert menu, choose Typeset Object and
then choose Citation.
5. Select the bibliography reference and choose OK.
6. Choose OK to return to your document.
Bibliography
L[eslie] A. Aamport, “The gnats and gnus document preparation system”, G-Animal’s
Journal, 41(7):73+, July 1986. This is a full ARTICLE entry.
Donald E. Knuth, Fundamental Algorithms, volume 1 by The Art of Computer Pro-
gramming, section 1.2, pp. 10—119, Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, second
edition, 10 January 1973. This is a full INBOOK entry.
Donald E. Knuth, Seminumerical Algorithms, volume 2 by The Art of Computer
Programming, Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, second edition, 10 January
1981. This is a full BOOK entry.
Jill C. Knvth, “The programming of computer art”, Vernier Art Center, Stanford,
California, February 1988. This is a full BOOKLET entry.
Daniel D. Lincoll, Semigroups of Recurrences, in: David J. Lipcoll, D. H. Lawrie and
A. H. Sameh, (eds.), High Speed Computer and Algorithm Organization, number 23
in Fast Computers, part 3, pp. 179—183. Academic Press, New York, third edition,
September 1977. This is a full INCOLLECTION entry.
Alfred V. Oaho, Jeffrey D. Ullman and Mihalis Yannakakis, On Notions of Informa-
tion Transfer in VLSI Circuits, in: Wizard V. Oz and Mihalis Yannakakis, (eds.),
Proc. Fifteenth Annual ACM Symposium on the Theory of Computing, number 17
in All ACM Conferences, pp. 133—139, Boston, March 1983. The OX Association for
Computing Machinery, Academic Press. This is a full INPROCEDINGS entry.
F. Phidias Phony-Baloney, Fighting Fire with Fire: Festooning French Phrases, PhD
dissertation, Fanstord University, Department of French, June-August 1988. This is a
full PHDTHESIS entry.
vii
is-abbrv.bst 489
is-abbrv.bst
The style is a modification of the standard BibTEX style abbrv.bst, which creates compact entries by abbre-
viating first names, month names, and journal names. The style sorts entries alphabetically and labels them with
numbers. It also contains optional added support for CODEN, ISBN, ISSN, LCCN, and PRICE fields; extended
PAGES fields; the PERIODICAL entry; and extended citation label suffixing.

Example using is-abbrv
References
[1] L. A. Aamp ort. The gn ats and gnus do cument preparation system.
[2] D. E. Knuth. S em inumerical Algori thms, volume 2 of The Art of Com-

tion, 10 Jan. 1981. Th is is a full BO OK entry.
[3] J. C. Knvth. T he p rogramming of compu ter art. Vernier Art Center, Stan-
[4] D. D . Lincoll. Semigroup s of recurrences. In D. J. Lip coll, D. H. Law rie, and

A. H. Sameh, editors, High Speed Com puter and Algorithm O rgan ization ,
numb er 23 in Fast Comp uters, p art 3, p ages 179—183. Academic Press, New
York, third edition, Sept. 1977. T his is a full INCOLLEC TIO N entry.
[5] A. V. Oaho, J. D. Ullman, an d M. Yann akakis. On notions of information

transfer in VLSI circuits. In W. V. Oz and M. Yannakakis, editors, Proc .
Fifteenth An nual AC M Symposium on the Theory of Com puting, number 17
in All AC M C onferences, pages 133—139, Boston, M ar. 1983. Th e OX Asso-
ciation for C omput in g Machinery, Academic Press. Th is is a full INPRO-
CEDINGS entry.
[6] F. P. Phony-Baloney. Fig hting Fire with Fire: Festooning Frenc h Phrase s.
1
is-alpha.bst

The style is a modification of the standard BibTEX style alpha.bst, which creates source labels such as
Knu66, formed from the author’s name and the year of publication. The style contains optional added support for
CODEN, ISBN, ISSN, LCCN, and PRICE fields; extended PAGES fields; the PERIODICAL entry; and extended
citation label suffixing.

Example using is-alpha
References
C LE entry.


entry.
1
is-plain.bst 491
is-plain.bst

The style is a modification of the standard BibTEX style plain.bst, which sorts entries alphabetically and
labels them with numbers. The style contains optional added support for CODEN, ISBN, ISSN, LCCN, and PRICE
fields; extended PAGES fields; the PERIODICAL entry; and extended citation label suffixing.

Example using is-plain
References
TIO N entry.
1
is-unsrt.bst
The style is a modification of the standard BibTEX style unsrt.bst, which labels entries with numbers and
lists them in order of their first citation. The style contains optional added support for CODEN, ISBN, ISSN, LCCN,
and PRICE fields; extended PAGES fields; the PERIODICAL entry; and extended citation label suffixing.

Example using is-unsrt
References
TIO N entry.

1
jas99.bst 493
jas99.bst

[Author & Author, date]
[Author, Author & Author, date]
Required files newapa package
This is a BibTEX bibliography style for the Journal of Atmospheric Science and the Journal of Applied Meteo-
rology Monthly Weather Review. The style is based on newapa.bst and requires the newapa package.

Example using jas99
[Lincoll, 1977] in a collection, th e article [Oaho, Ullman & Yan nakakis, 1983] in
a proceed in gs, t he article [Aamp ort, 1986], th e book [Knut h, 1981], th e b ooklet
[Knvt h, 1988], an d to the thesis [Phony-B aloney, 1988]. C omb in ed citations like
[Lincoll, 1977, Aamp ort , 1986] may h ave sp ecial app earan ce. T he b ibliogr aphy
References
[Aamport, 1986] Aamp ort, L . A., 1986: Th e gnats and gnus d ocu ment prep a-
ration syst em. G -Ani mal’s Journal, 41(7) , 73+. This is a full ARTICL E
entry.
[Knu th, 1981] K nuth , D. E., 1981: Seminum erical Algorithms, volume 2 of The
Art of Compu ter Program ming. Add is on -Wesley, Reading, M assachuset ts,
[Knvt h, 1988] Knvth , J. C ., 1988: Th e programming of compu ter art . Vern ier
Art C enter, St an ford, California. This is a full BO OKLET en try.
[Lincoll, 1977] L in coll, D. D., 1977: Semigroups of recurrences. In Hig h S peed

Com puter and Algorithm Organ ization , Lip coll, D. J., L awrie, D . H., and
S ameh , A. H., editors, nu mb er 23 in Fast Computers. Acad emic Press, New
York, th ird ed it ion, 179—183. T his is a fu ll INCOLLECTION ent ry.
[Oaho, Ullman & Yan nakakis, 1983] Oaho, A. V., J. D. Ullman , and M. Yan-
n akakis, 1983: On notion s of in format ion transfer in VLSI circu it s. In Proc .
Fifteen th An nual AC M Sym posium on the Theory of Com puting, O z, W . V.
and Yan nakakis, M., editors, number 17 in All ACM Conferen ces, The OX As-
sociation for Compu ting Mach in ery, Academic Press, Boston, 133—139. Th is
is a full INPRO CEDING S entry.
[Phony-Baloney, 1988] Phony-Baloney, F. P., 1988: Fighting Fire with Fi re :

Festoonin g Frenc h Phrases. P hD dissertation, Fan stord University, Depart-
1
jbact.bst

This is a BibTEX bibliography style for the Journal of Bacteriology. Authors’ names appear in bold in the
reference list.

Example using jbact
References
[1] A am p or t, L . A. 1986. G -Animal’s Journal 41 (7):73+. Th is is a full
ART ICLE entry.
[2] Knu th, D. E. 1981. Se min umerical Algorithm s, Ad dison-Wesley, Reading,

M assachuset ts. Th is is a full BOO K entry.
[3] Knvth, J. C. 1988. Vernier Art C enter Stanford, C alifornia. T his is a full
BOOK LET entry.
[4] Lin col l, D. D . 1977. In : Lipcoll, D . J., D. H. L awrie, a nd A . H.

Sam eh. , (ed.), High Sp eed C omp uter and Algorithm Organization, num-
b er 23 in Fast C omput ers part 3, p . 179—183. Academic Press T his is a full
INCOLL ECTION entry.
[5] Oa ho, A. V. , Jeffrey D. Ullm an , and M ih alis Ya nn akakis. 1983. p.

133—139. In : O z, W . V ., and Mihalis Yan nakakis. , (ed.), Proc. Fifteenth
An nual AC M Symp osium on th e Th eory of C omput in g, . number 17 in All
AC M Conferences Th e OX Associat ion for Comput in g Machin ery Academic
Pr ess, B ost on . This is a full INPRO CED ING S ent ry.
[6] Ph ony-Baloney, F. P. 1988. Fighting Fire with Fire: Fe stoon ing Fren ch
Phrases. PhD dissertation Fan stord University Dep ar tment of French. Th is
is a full PHDT HESIS entry.
1
jcc.bst 495
jcc.bst

Directory TCITeX/BibTeX/bst/chem-journal
This is a BibTEX bibliography style for the Journal of Computational Chemistry. The style omits the title of
entries classified as ‘article’, ‘book’, ‘inbook’, and ‘incollection’ and omits information coded as ‘note’ in all entries
except those classified as ‘unpublished’.

Example using jcc
References
[1] D. D . Lincoll In High Speed Com puter and Alg orithm Organiz ation, D. J.
Lip coll, D. H. Lawrie, and A. H. Sameh, Eds., nu mb er 23 in Fast C omput ers;
Academic Press, New York, t hird ed., 1977; part 3, p ages 179—183.
[2] A. V. Oaho, J. D . Ullman, and M. Yann akakis In W . V. O z and M. Yan-
nakakis, Eds., Proc. Fi ftee nth Ann ual ACM Symposium on the Theory of
Com puting, nu mb er 17 in All ACM C on ferences, p ages 133—139, B oston,
1983. Th e OX Association for Computing Mach in ery, Acad emic Press.
[3] L. A. Aamport, G-Animal’s Journal, July (1986).

[4] D. E. Knut h, S em inu merical Alg orithm s, Vol. 2 of T he Art of Com pu ter
Program ming, Ad dison-Wesley, Readin g, Massachusett s, second ed., 1981.
[5] J. C. K nvth T he p rogramming of comput er art; Vern ier Art Center, Feb ru-
ary , ( 1988).
[6] F. P. Phony-Baloney Fighting Fire with Fire: Festooni ng French Phrases
PhD dissertat ion, Fanstord University, Ju ne-August , (1988).
1
jkthesis.bst

Directory TCITeX/BibTeX/bst/jkthesis
The style is intended for texts in German and supports the abbreviation of numerous journal names.

Example using jkthesis
References
[1] L. A. Aamport, G-Animal’s Journal 41 (1986), 73+. This is a full ARTICLE
entry.
[2] D. E. Knuth: Seminumerical Algorithms, Band 2 von The Art of Computer
Programming. Second. Auflage. Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts,
10 Januar 1981. This is a full BOOK entry.
[3] J. C. Knvth. The Programming of Computer Art. Vernier Art Center,
Stanford, California (Februar 1988). This is a full BOOKLET entry.
[4] D. D. Lincoll. In High Speed Computer and Algorithm Organization, her-
ausgegeben von D. J. Lipcoll, D. H. Lawrie und A. H. Sameh, Nummer 23
in Fast Computers, third. Auflage. Academic Press, New York (September
1977), Seiten 179—183. This is a full INCOLLECTION entry.
[5] A. V. Oaho, J. D. Ullman und M. Yannakakis: On Notions of Informa-
tion Transfer in VLSI Circuits. On Notions of Information Transfer in
VLSI Circuits, In Proc. Fifteenth Annual ACM Symposium on the Theory
of Computing, herausgegeben von W. V. Oz und M. YannakakisNummer 17
in All ACM Conferences. The OX Association for Computing Machinery,
Academic Press, Boston (März 1983) Seiten 133—139. This is a full INPRO-
CEDINGS entry.
[6] F. P. Phony-Baloney. Fighting Fire with Fire: Festooning French Phrases.
Department of French, Fanstord University, PhD dissertation, Juni-August
1988. This is a full PHDTHESIS entry.
1
jmb.bst 497
jmb.bst

This bibliography style approximates the bibliography styles of the Journal of Molecular Biology and Journal
of Theoretical Biology. Bibliography entries for articles, books, and items in proceedings are formatted carefully.
Toggle between styles appropriate for the two journals by toggling the titles on and off. The Journal of Theoretical
Biology.requires titles; the Journal of Molecular Biology doesn’t.
I To toggle the titles off
1. Choose or, from the Insert menu, choose Typeset Object and then choose TeX Field.
2. In the entry area, type \nocite{TitlesOn} and choose OK.
3. Make sure the bibliography database contains a bibliography article with the same citation key.

Example using jmb
[Lincoll, 1977] in a collection , the article [Oaho et al., 1983] in a p roceedings,
t he article [Aamp ort, 1986], the b ook [K nuth , 1981], the booklet [Knvth , 1988],
and t o th e th esis [Ph ony-Baloney, 1988]. Combined citation s like [Lincoll, 1977,
Aamp ort, 1986] may have special appearance. The b ibliograp hy section for
References
[Aamport, 1986] Aamp ort, L. A. (1986). G-An imal’s Journal, 41 (7) , 73+.
This is a fu ll ARTIC LE entry.
[Knu th, 1981] K nuth , D. E. (1981). S em inu me rical Alg orithm s, volume 2 of The
Art of Com pute r Programming. Reading, Massachusetts: Addison-Wesley,
[Knvt h, 1988] Knvth , J. C. (1988). Vernier Art Center Stan ford , California.
This is a fu ll B OOK LET entry.
[Lincoll, 1977] L in coll, D. D. (1977) . In: High S peed Compu ter and Algorithm
O rg an ization , (Lipcoll, D. J., Lawrie, D. H., & Sameh, A. H., eds) number 23
in Fast Computers p art 3, pp. 179—183. Academic Press New York third
ed it ion. Th is is a full INCOL LEC TION entry.
[Oaho e t al., 1983] Oaho, A. V., Ullman, J. D ., & Yannakakis, M. (1983) . In:
Proc . Fifteen th Ann ual AC M Symposium on the Theory of Com puting, (Oz,
W . V. & Yann akakis, M ., ed s) numb er 17 in All AC M Conferences pp . 133—
139, Th e OX Associat ion for C ompu tin g Machin ery Boston: Academic Press.
This is a fu ll INPROCEDING S entry.
[Phony-Baloney, 1988] Phony-Baloney, F. P. (1988). Fighting Fire with Fi re :

Festoonin g French Phrases. Ph D d issertation Fanst ord Un iversity Depart-
1
jmr.bst 499
jmr.bst

The jmr.bst style is provided as part of the harvard family of BibTEX bibliography styles, which can also be
used with manual bibliographies. The style is for the Journal of Management Research. Complete citations are in
standard parenthetical form. Incomplete citations can be used as nouns, as in Medd (1999) claims . . . or The key
result (Medd) . . ., or as possessives, as in Medd’s (1999) proof . . . . To avoid LATEX errors when using the harvard
styles, delete the BibTEX style files in the bst\beebe directory.

Example using jmr
( Lincoll 1977) in a collection, t he article (O ah o, Ullman & Yan nakakis 1983)
in a proceedin gs, the article (Aamp ort 1986), t he b ook (Knu th 1973c1981),
citation s like (Lin coll 1977, Aamp ort 1986) may have special app earan ce. Th e
References
Aamp ort, L[eslie] A. (1986), ‘T he gnats an d gnus document p reparation system’,
K nuth , Donald E. (1981), Seminum erical Alg orithms, Vol. 2 of The Art of Com-
puter Programmin g, secon d edn , Ad dison-Wesley, Reading, M assachuset ts.
K nvth, Jill C . (1988), ‘Th e programm in g of computer art’, Vernier Art Center,
L in coll, Daniel D. ( 1977), Semigroups of recurrences, in D. J.L ip coll,

D . H.Lawrie & A. H.Sameh, eds, ‘High S peed Computer and Algorith m
O rgan ization ’, th ird edn , nu mb er 23 in ‘Fast C omp uters’, Acad emic Press,
New York, part 3, pp. 179—183. This is a fu ll INC OLLECTION entry.
O ah o, Alfred V., Jeffrey D. Ullman & Mih alis Yannakakis (1983), On notions
of information t ransfer in VLS I circuits, in W. V.Oz & M.Yan nakakis, ed s,
‘Proc. Fift eenth Annu al ACM S ymposium on t he T heory of C omput ing’,
nu mb er 17 in ‘All ACM Conferen ces’, T he OX Associat ion for Compu ting
M achinery, Academic Press, Boston, pp . 133—139. Th is is a full INPRO-
CEDINGS entry.
Phony-Balon ey, F. Phidias ( 1988), Fighting Fire with Fire: Festooning Fren ch
Ph rases, PhD dissertation, Fanstord Un iversity, D ep artment of French.
1
jpc.bst

This is a BibTEX bibliography style for the Journal of Physical Chemistry. The style omits the title of entries
classified as ‘article’, ‘book’, ‘inbook’, and ‘incollection’ and omits information coded as ‘note’ in all entries except
those classified as ‘unpublished’.

Example using jpc
References
[1] Lincoll, D. D . In High Speed Com puter an d Alg orithm Organ ization ; L ip coll,
D. J., L awrie, D. H., Sameh , A. H., Eds., nu mber 23 in Fast C omput ers;
Academic Press: New York, third ed., 1977; p art 3, pages 179—183.
[2] Oaho, A. V.; Ullman, J. D.; Yannakakis, M. In Oz, W. V., Yann akakis, M.,
Eds ., Proc. Fifteenth Ann ual ACM Symposium on the Theory of Computin g,
numb er 17 in All AC M C on ferences, p ages 133—139, Bost on , 1983. T he OX
Association for C omput in g Machin ery, Acad em ic Press.
[3] Aamport, L. A. July 1986, 41(7) , 73+.

[4] Knu th, D. E. S em inu merical Alg orithm s, Vol. 2 of T he Art of Com pu ter
Program ming; Addison-Wesley: Reading, Massachu setts, secon d ed ., 1981.
[5] Knvt h, J. C . The programmin g of comp uter art; Vernier Art Center, Feb ru-
ary , 1988.
[6] Phony-Baloney, F. P. Fighting Fire with Fire: Festooning Fren ch Phrases
PhD dissertat ion, Fanstord University, Ju ne-August , 1988.
1
jphysicsB.bst 501
jphysicsB.bst

The jphysicsB.bst style is provided as part of the harvard family of BibTEX bibliography styles, which
can also be used with manual bibliographies. The style is for the Journal of Physics B. Complete citations are in
standard parenthetical form. Incomplete citations can be used as nouns, as in Medd (1999) claims . . . or The key
result (Medd) . . ., or as possessives, as in Medd’s (1999) proof . . . . To avoid LATEX errors when using the harvard
styles, delete the BibTEX style files in the bst\beebe directory.

Example using jphysicsB
( Lincoll 1977) in a collection, t he article (Oaho et al. 1983) in a p roceedings,
t he article ( Aamp ort 1986), th e bo ok ( Knuth 1981), the booklet (Knvt h 1988),
and to the th esis (Phony-Baloney 1988). Comb ined citation s like (Lincoll 1977,
Aamp ort 1986) may have sp ecial app earan ce. The bibliography section for th ese
citation s comes n ext.
References
Aamp ort L A 1986 G-An imal’s Journ al 41(7) , 73+. T his is a full ARTICL E
entry.
K nuth D E 1981 Semin umerical Algorithms Vol. 2 of The Art of Com pu ter
Prog ram min g secon d edn Addison-Wesley Reading, M assachuset ts. Th is is
a full BOO K ent ry.
K nvth J C 1988 ‘Th e p rogramming of comp uter art’ Vern ier Art C enter Stan-
ford , Californ ia. Th is is a full BOO KLET entry.
L in coll D D 1977 in D. J Lipcoll, D. H Lawrie & A. H Sameh , eds , ‘High

S peed Comput er and Algorith m O rgan ization ’ third ed n number 23 in
‘Fast Compu ters’ Acad emic Press New York part 3, p p. 179—183. T his is
a full INCOLLECTION entry.
O ah o A V, Ullman J D & Yannakakis M 1983 in W. V Oz & M Yann akakis, ed s,

‘Proc. Fifteenth Annual ACM Symp osium on the Th eory of Computing’
nu mb er 17 in ‘All AC M Conferen ces’ T he OX Association for Compu ting
M achinery Acad emic Press Boston pp . 133—139. This is a full INPROC ED-
ING S entry.
Phony-Balon ey F P 1988 Fighting Fire with Fire: Festooning Fr ench Phrases

Ph D dissertation Fanst ord University D epartment of French. T his is a full
PHD THES IS entry.
1
jtb.bst

Format of citation (Author, date) or (date)
This style produces bibliographies based loosely on the format used in the Journal of Theoretical Biology. The
style supports short citations in the form of (date). It requires the astron package.

Example using jtb
References
Aamp ort, L. A. (1986) , G-An imal’s Journal 41(7), 73+, T his is a full ARTI-
C LE entry
K nuth , D. E. ( 1981) , Se min umerical Algorithm s, Vol. 2 of T he Art of Com pu ter
Program ming, Read in g, Massachusett s: Add ison-Wesley, second edition,
T his is a full BO OK entry
K nvth, J. C . (1988) , The Program ming of Com puter Art, Vernier Art Center,
St an ford , Californ ia, Th is is a full BOO KLET ent ry
L in coll, D. D. (1977) , In High S peed C omputer and Algorithm O rgan ization .
(D. J. Lipcoll, D . H. Lawrie, and A. H. S ameh eds.), No. 23 in Fas t C om-
pu ters, part 3, pp. 179—183, New York: Acad emic Press, t hird ed it ion, Th is
is a fu ll INCOL LEC TION entry
O ah o, A. V., Ullm an, J. D., and Yann akakis, M. (1983) , In Proc. Fifteenth
An nual ACM S ymposiu m on the Theory of C omputing. (W . V. Oz and M.
Yan nakakis ed s.), No. 17 in All ACM C onferences, pp. 133—139, The OX
Association for Compu ting Machin ery, Boston: Academic Press, Th is is a
full INPRO CED ING S ent ry
Phony-Balon ey, F. P. (1988) , PhD d issertation, Fanstord University, Depart-
ment of Fren ch , This is a full PHDT HESIS entry
1
jthcarsu.bst 503
jthcarsu.bst

This style is a modification of the BibTEX standard bibliography style unsrt.bst, which lists bibliography
entries in the order of their first citation and labels entries with numbers. It is named for the Journal of Thoracic and
Cardiovascular Surgery.

Example using jthcarsu
References
[1] Daniel D. Lincoll. Semigroups of recurrences. In David J. Lipcoll, D. H.
Lawrie, A. H. Sameh, editors, High Speed Computer and Algorithm Organi-
zation number 23 in Fast Computers part 3, pages 179—183. Academic Press
New York third edition September 1977. This is a full INCOLLECTION
entry.
[2] Alfred V. Oaho, Jeffrey D. Ullman, Mihalis Yannakakis. On notions of in-
formation transfer in VLSI circuits. In Wizard V. Oz Mihalis Yannakakis,
editors, Proc. Fifteenth Annual ACM Symposium on the Theory of Comput-
ing number 17 in All ACM Conferences pages 133—139 Boston March 1983.
The OX Association for Computing Machinery Academic Press. This is a
G-Animal’s Journal July 1986 41(7):73+. This is a full ARTICLE entry.
[4] Donald E. Knuth. Seminumerical Algorithms volume 2 of The Art of Com-
puter Programming. Addison-Wesley Reading, Massachusetts second edition
10 January 1981. This is a full BOOK entry.
[5] Jill C. Knvth. The programming of computer art. Vernier Art Center
Stanford, California February 1988. This is a full BOOKLET entry.
Phrases. PhD dissertation Fanstord University Department of French June-
August 1988. This is a full PHDTHESIS entry.
1
jurabib.bst

Format of citation Author Abbreviated title Date
Required files jurabib package
Directory TCITeX/BibTeX/bst/jurabib
jbtest.bib
jbtesthu.bib
The jurabib package supports automated BibTEX citations for legal studies and the humanities. It provides
simplified formatting of both the citation and the bibliography entry and supports short titles in citations and ref-
erence lists. The style produces the authors’ names in bold in the reference list. The bibliography style jura-
bib.bst requires files from the jurabib package, available from http://www.ctan.org. The sample document
was created with the sample databases jbtest.bib and jbtesthu.bib.

Example using jurabib
Lincoll in a collection, the article Oaho/Ullman/Yannakakis in a proceedings,
the article Aamport, the book Knuth, the booklet Knvth, and to the thesis
Phony-Baloney. Combined citations like Lincoll; Aamport may have special
References
Aamport, L[eslie] A.: The Gnats and Gnus Document Preparation System.
G-Animal’s Journal 41 July 1986, Nr. 7, 73+, This is a full ARTICLE
entry
Knuth, Donald E.: The Art of Computer Programming. Volume 2: Seminu-
merical Algorithms. 2nd edition. Reading, Massachusetts: Addison-
Wesley, 10 January 1981, This is a full BOOK entry
Knvth, Jill C.: The Programming of Computer Art. Stanford, California:
Vernier Art Center, February 1988, This is a full BOOKLET entry
Lincoll, Daniel D.: Semigroups of Recurrences. in: Lipcoll, David J./
Lawrie, D. H./Sameh, A. H., editors: High Speed Computer and Al-
gorithm Organization. 3rd edition. New York: Academic Press, September
1977, Fast Computers 23. — Part 3, 179—183, This is a full INCOLLEC-
TION entry
Oaho, Alfred V./Ullman, Jeffrey D./Yannakakis, Mihalis: On No-
tions of Information Transfer in VLSI Circuits. in: Oz, Wizard V./
Yannakakis, Mihalis, editors: Proc. Fifteenth Annual ACM Sympo-
sium on the Theory of Computing. Boston: Academic Press, March 1983,
All ACM Conferences 17, This is a full INPROCEDINGS entry, 133—139
Phony-Baloney, F. Phidias: Fighting Fire with Fire: Festooning French
Phrases. PhD Dissertation Fanstord University, 1988, This is a full
PHDTHESIS entry
1
jureco.bst 505
jureco.bst

Format of citation Author (date)
Required files jurabib package
Directory TCITeX/BibTeX/bst/jurabib
jbtest.bib
jbtesthu.bib
The jurabib package supports automated BibTEX citations for legal studies and the humanities. It provides
simplified formatting of both the citation and the bibliography entry and supports short titles in citations and refer-
ence lists. The style produces the authors’ names in bold in the reference list. The bibliography style jureco.bst
requires files from the jurabib package, available from http://www.ctan.org.

Example using jureco
some citations added in the next sentence. This sentence refers to the article-
Helm (1982) Role of Logic in a collection, the article Helm (1972) Religious
Studies 1972, the book Bergmeier (1980), the booklet Knvth (1988), and to the
thesis Alexy (1984). Combined citations like Lundin; Helm (1972) Religious
Studies 1972 may have special appearance. The bibliography section for these
References
Alexy, Robert (1984): Theorie der Grundrechte. Habil. Göttingen
Bergmeier, Roland (1980): Beiträge zur Wissenschaft vom Alten und Neuen
Testament. Volume 112: Glaube als Gabe nach Johannes: Religions- und
Theologiegeschichtliche Studien zum prädestinatianischen Dualismus im
vierten Evangelium. Stuttgart etc.: W. Kohlhammer
Helm, Paul (1972): Revealed Propositions and Timeless Truths. Religious
Studies 8, 127—136
Helm, Paul (1982): The Role of Logic in Biblical Interpretation. in: Rad-
macher, E./Preus, R., editors: Hermeneutics, Inerrancy, & the Bible.
Grand Rapids, 841—858
Knvth, Jill C. (1988): The Programming of Computer Art. Stanford, Cali-
fornia: Vernier Art Center, This is a full BOOKLET entry
Lundin, Roger: Interpreting Orphans: Hermeneutics in the Cartesian Tradi-
tion. in: The Promise of Hermeneutics., 1—64
1
kluwer.bst
(Author, Author and Author date)
The kluwer.bst style is provided as part of the harvard family of BibTEX bibliography styles, which can also
be used with manual bibliographies. The style requires the harvard package. The style attempts to conform to the
requirements of Kluwer Academic Publishers. Complete citations are in standard parenthetical form. Incomplete
citations can be used as nouns, as in Medd (1999) claims . . . or The key result (Medd) . . ., or as possessives, as in
Medd’s (1999) proof . . . . To avoid LATEX errors when using the harvard styles, delete the BibTEX style files in the
bst\beebe directory.

Example using kluwer
( Lincoll 1977) in a collection , the art icle (O ah o, Ullman and Yan nakakis 1983) in
References
Aamp ort, L. A.: 1986, The gnats and gnus document p reparation system,
K nuth , D. E.: 1981, Sem in umerical Algorithms , Vol. 2 of The Art of Com pu ter
Prog ram min g, secon d edn, Ad dison-Wesley, Read in g, Massachusetts. Th is
is a full BO OK entry.
K nvth, J. C.: 1988, Th e progr amming of comp uter art, Vernier Art Center,
L in coll, D. D .: 1977, S em igroups of recurren ces, in D. J. Lip coll, D. H. Law rie

and A. H. Sameh (eds), High Speed C omputer an d Alg orithm Organiza-
tion, third edn, number 23 in Fast Computers, Academic P ress, New York,
p art 3, pp . 179—183. This is a full INCO LLEC TIO N entry.
O ah o, A. V., Ullman, J. D. an d Yannakakis, M.: 1983, O n notions of information

t ran sfer in VL SI circuits, in W. V. Oz and M. Yann akakis ( ed s), Proc .
Fifteen th Ann ual ACM Symposium on the Theory of Computing, nu mb er 17
in All ACM Confe re nce s, Th e OX Ass ociation for C omput ing Mach inery,
Academic Press, Boston, pp . 133—139. Th is is a full INPROCEDINGS
entry.
Phony-Balon ey, F. P.: 1988, Fightin g Fire with Fire: Fe stoon ing Fren ch
Phrases, PhD dissertat ion, Fan stord University, D ep artment of French.
1
letter.bst 507
letter.bst
Format of reference list label No list generated
Organization of reference list No list generated
Format of citation [name] or [name with address]
business.bib
family.bib
test.bib
maintenance, and use of a database that is similar to an address book. You can use the package to construct your
own address book; in this way, the package operates like ordinary BibTEX styles except that the reference list it
produces contains information about companies, people, and places instead of published articles and books. You
can also use the package to include information about companies, people, and places in your document.
below.
The letter.bst style, which operates differently from other styles in the package, doesn’t produce a directory
list. Instead, it prints the name or name and address corresponding to the cited key at the point of the citation.

4. Choose OK.
The sample was created using the databases business.bib and family.bib.

Example using letter
some citations added in the next sentence. The citation in this sentence for Mi-
croknud Corp. has been created with TEX commands that replace standard
citations. The citation below prints information in the text of the document for
cited names:
Christophe Geuzaine
Ir., Research Assistant
University of Liège, Dept. of Electrical Engineering
Institut Montefiore (B28, P32, I21),
Sart Tilman Campus, B-4000 Liège, Belgium
The style doesn’t print a directory list.
.
mbplain.bst 509
mbplain.bst

Directory TCITeX/BibTeX/bst/multibib
The BibTEX bibliography style mbplain.bst allows references to multiple bibliographies within a single
document. It is a modification of the style plain.bst, which sorts entries alphabetically and labels them with
numbers.

Example using mbplain
References
G-Animal’s Journal, 41(7):73+, July 1986. This is a full ARTICLE entry.
[2] Donald E. Knuth. Seminumerical Algorithms, volume 2 of The Art of Com-
puter Programming. Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, second edi-
tion, 10 January 1981. This is a full BOOK entry.
Stanford, California, February 1988. This is a full BOOKLET entry.
[4] Daniel D. Lincoll. Semigroups of recurrences. In David J. Lipcoll, D. H.
Lawrie, and A. H. Sameh, editors, High Speed Computer and Algorithm Or-
ganization, number 23 in Fast Computers, part 3, pages 179—183. Academic
Press, New York, third edition, September 1977. This is a full INCOLLEC-
TION entry.
[5] Alfred V. Oaho, Jeffrey D. Ullman, and Mihalis Yannakakis. On notions
of information transfer in VLSI circuits. In Wizard V. Oz and Mihalis
Yannakakis, editors, Proc. Fifteenth Annual ACM Symposium on the The-
ory of Computing, number 17 in All ACM Conferences, pages 133—139,
Boston, March 1983. The OX Association for Computing Machinery, Aca-
demic Press. This is a full INPROCEDINGS entry.
June-August 1988. This is a full PHDTHESIS entry.
1
mslapa.bst
Format of reference list label [None]

(Author, date; Author, date)
(Author, Author & Author, date)
Required files mslapa package
Directory TCITeX/BibTeX/bst/mslapa
The bibliography style file mslapa.bst automates the formatting of bibliographies and citations according
to the American Psychological Association (APA) style. It supports many author-date citation formats, including
(date), (e.g.author, date), and (author, datea,b). The style was based on plain.bst, which sorts entries alphabeti-
cally, and on named.bst and apalike.bst. It requires the mslapa package, which is available from CTAN at
http://www.ctan.org.
Note that the style doesn’t automatically alphabetize citations in the text. Because the style produces citations in
the order you enter them, you must enter references in alphabetical order to have them appear alphabetically within
a citation. Note too that APA style specifies that full author order be used the first time a multi-author reference is
cited and et al. be used thereafter. To adhere to the specification, use the \cite, \citeyear, and \shortcite
commands appropriately.

Example using mslapa
(Lincoll, 1977) in a collection, the article (Oaho, Ullman & Yannakakis, 1983)
in a proceedings, the article (Aamport, 1986), the book (Knuth, 1981), the
booklet (Knvth, 1988), and to the thesis (Phony-Baloney, 1988). Combined
citations like (Lincoll, 1977; Aamport, 1986) may have special appearance. The
References
G-Animal’s Journal, 41(7), 73+. This is a full ARTICLE entry.
Knuth, D. E. (1981). Seminumerical Algorithms (Second Ed.), Volume 2 of The
Art of Computer Programming. Reading, Massachusetts: Addison-Wesley.

Lincoll, D. D. (1977). Semigroups of recurrences. In D. J. Lipcoll, D. H. Lawrie
& A. H. Sameh (Eds.), High Speed Computer and Algorithm Organization
(Third Ed.), number 23 in Fast Computers part 3, (pp. 179—183). New
York: Academic Press. This is a full INCOLLECTION entry.
Oaho, A. V., Ullman, J. D. & Yannakakis, M. (1983). On notions of information
transfer in VLSI circuits. In Oz, W. V. & Yannakakis, M. (Eds.), Proc.
Fifteenth Annual ACM Symposium on the Theory of Computing, number 17
in All ACM Conferences (pp. 133—139). Boston: Academic Press. This is
a full INPROCEDINGS entry.
Phrases. PhD dissertation, Fanstord University, Department of French.
This is a full PHDTHESIS entry.
1
named.bst 511
named.bst
Format of citation [Author, date] or [date]
[Author and Author, date] or [date]
[Author et al., date] or [date]
Required files named package
The style supports year-only citations. The style orders the reference list alphabetically by author or by whatever
passes for author in the absence of an author. The style must be used with the named package.

Example using named
cle [L in coll, 1977] in a collection, the article [Oaho et al., 1983] in a proceed-
ings, th e article [Aam port, 1986], the book [K nuth, 1973c1981], t he b ooklet
References
[Aamport, 1986] L [eslie] A. Aamp ort . Th e gnats and gnu s docu ment prep a-
ration system. G -Anim al’ s Journal, 41( 7):73+ , July 1986. T his is a full
ART ICLE entry.
[Knu th, 1973c1981] Donald E. Kn uth. Seminum erical Algorithm s, volu me 2

of T he Art of Computer Programm ing . Add ison-Wesley, Read in g, Mas-
sachusett s, second edition , 10 January 1981. Th is is a full BO OK entry.
[Knvt h, 1988] Jill C. K nvth. T he programming of comp uter art. Vernier Art
Center, S tan for d, C alifornia, Febru ary 1988. Th is is a full BOOK LET entry.
[Lincoll, 1977] D an iel D. L in coll. Semigr ou ps of recurr ences. In David J. Lip-

coll, D. H. L aw rie, and A. H. S ameh , ed it ors, High Speed Computer and
Algorithm Organization, n umber 23 in Fast C omp uters, part 3, pages 179—
183. Acad emic Press, New York, third ed ition, Sep tember 1977. This is a full
INCOLL ECTION entry.
[Oaho e t al., 1983] Alfred V. Oaho, Jeffrey D. Ullman, and Mihalis Yannakakis.
O n n otions of information transfer in VLSI circu its. In Wizard V. Oz and
M ih alis Yan nakakis, ed it ors, Proc . Fifteenth Annual ACM S ymposiu m on the
Theory of Com puting, nu mb er 17 in All ACM Con ferences, p ages 133—139,
Bos ton , March 1983. The OX As sociation for C ompu ting Mach inery, Aca-
d emic Press. T his is a full INPRO CEDINGS entry.
[Phony-Baloney, 1988] F. Phidias Phony-Baloney. Fi ghting Fire with Fire: Fes-

tooning Fren ch Phrases. Ph D d issertation , Fanstord Un iversity, Departm ent
of Fren ch, June-Augu st 1988. Th is is a full PHDT HESIS entry.
1
nar.bst
The style supports bibliographies for the journal Nucleic Acid Research. It was adapted from the standard
BibTEX style unsrt.bst, which organizes the reference list in order of first citation.

Example using nar
References
[1] Lincoll, D. D. Sept emb er 1977 Semigroups of recurr ences In David J. L ip coll,
D. H. Lawrie, and A. H. Sameh, (ed.), High Speed C omp uter and Algorith m
Organizat ion, number 23 in Fast C omp uters part 3, pp. 179—183 Academic
Press New York th ird ed ition Th is is a full INCOLLECTION entry.
[2] Oaho, A. V., Ullman , J. D., and Yannakakis, M. March 1983 In W izard V.
Oz an d Mihalis Yan nakakis, (ed .), Proc. Fifteenth Annual AC M S ymposiu m
on the Th eory of Comput in g, nu mber 17 in All AC M C on ferences Bos ton Th e
OX Association for C omp uting Machinery: Academic Press. Th is is a full
INPRO CEDING S entry pp. 133—139.
[3] Aamport, L. A. July 1986 G-An imal’s Jou rn al 41(7), 73+ This is a full
ARTICLE entry.
[4] Knu th, D. E . 10 January 1981 Seminumerical Algorith msvolume 2, of Th e

Art of C omp uter Programm in g Addison-Wesley, Read in g, Massachusetts
second edition T his is a full BOOK entry.
[5] Knvt h, J. C. The p rogramming of comput er art Vern ier Art Center St anford,
California Feb ruary 1988 This is a fu ll B OOK LET entry.
[6] Phony-Baloney, F. P. Fighting Fire with Fire: Fest oon ing Fr en ch Phrases
PhD d is sertation Fanstord Un iversity Department of French Jun e-August
1988 T his is a full PHDT HESIS entry.
1
nature.bst 513
nature.bst
This BibTEX bibliography style is similar to that used in Nature.

Example using nature
References
[1] Lincoll, D. D. In High Speed Com pute r and Algorithm Organization, L ip coll,
D. J., Law rie, D. H., and Sameh, A. H., editors, nu mb er 23 in Fas t Com-
pu ters, p art 3, 179—183. Academic Press, New Yorkth ir d edition Septemb er
(1977). T his is a fu ll INC OLL ECT ION ent ry.
[2] Oaho, A. V., Ullman, J. D., an d Yann akakis, M. In Proc. Fifteen th An nual
ACM Symposium on the T heory of Computin g, Oz, W . V. an d Yannakakis,
M., editors, nu mber 17 in All AC M Conferen ces, 133—139 (The OX Associa-
tion for Comp uting Mach ineryAcademic P ress, Boston, 1983). T his is a full
[3] Aamport, L. A. G-An imal’s Journal 41(7), 73+ July ( 1986). T his is a full
ARTICLE entry.
[4] Knu th, D. E. S em inu me rical Algorithms, volume 2 of The Art of Com-
tion, 10 January (1981). T his is a full BOOK entry.
[5] Knvt h, J. C. Vernier Art Center, S tan ford, California, Feb ruary (1988).
This is a full BO OKL ET entry.
[6] Phony-Baloney, F. P. Fig hting Fire with Fire : Festooning Frenc h Phrase s.
PhD dissertat ion, Fan stord Univers ity, Dep art ment of French, Jun e-August
(1988). T his is a fu ll PHDTHES IS entry.
1
nederlands.bst
(Author and Author date)
The nederlands.bst style is provided as part of the harvard family of BibTEX bibliography styles, which
can also be used with manual bibliographies. The style, which requires the harvard package, conforms to Dutch
conventions. Complete citations are in standard parenthetical form. Incomplete citations can be used as nouns, as in
Medd (1999) claims . . . or The key result (Medd) . . ., or as possessives, as in Medd’s (1999) proof . . . . To avoid
LATEX errors when using the harvard styles, delete the BibTEX style files in the bst\beebe directory.

Example using nederlands
( Lincoll 1977) in a collection, th e article (Oaho et al. 1983) in a p roceedings,
t he article ( Aamp ort 1986), th e bo ok ( Knuth 1981), the booklet (Knvt h 1988),
and to the th esis (Phony-Baloney 1988). Comb ined citation s like (Lincoll 1977,
Aamp ort 1986) may have sp ecial app earan ce. The bibliography section for th ese
References
L [eslie] A. Aamp ort, juli 1986. The Gn at s an d Gnus D ocu ment Preparation
S ystem. G-An im al’s Jou rn al, 41-7 (1986), 73+. This is a full ARTICL E
entry.
D on ald E. K nuth, 10 januari 1981. Seminum erical Algorithm s, T he Art of

Com puter Programm in g, deel 2. Read ing, Massachusett s, Addison-Wesley,
second e dru k. T his is a full BOOK entry.
Jill C. Knvth, febru ari 1988. The Programming of Compu ter Art. Vernier Art
Center, S tan ford, C alifornia. This is a full BO OKL ET entry.
D an iel D. L in coll, sep tember 1977. Semigrou ps of Recu rrences. In High S peed
Com puter and Algorithm Organiz ation, David J. Lip coll, D. H. Law rie, en
A. H. Sameh, red actie, Fast Compu ters 23, part 3, p. 179—183. Academic
Pr ess, New York, third e d ruk. T his is a full INCO LLEC TIO N entry.
Alfred V. Oaho, Jeffrey D . Ullman, en Mihalis Yannakakis, maart 1983. On

Notion s of Information Transfer in VL SI Circu its. In Proc. Fiftee nth An nual
ACM Sym posium on the Theory of Com puting, Wizard V. Oz en Mihalis
Yann akakis, red actie, All AC M Con ferences 17, p. 133—139, Boston. Th e OX
Association for Compu tin g M achinery, Academic Press. Th is is a full IN-
PROCEDINGS entry.
F. Ph id ias Phony-Balon ey, ju ni-augustu s 1988. Fighting Fire with Fire: Fes-
tooning Fren ch Phrases. Ph D d issertation , Fanstord Un iversity, Departm ent
of Fren ch. T his is a full PHDTHESIS entry.
1
newapa.bst 515
newapa.bst

[Author, date, Author, date]
Required files newapa package
This BibTEX bibliography style was adapted from plain.bst, named.bst, and apalike.bst. It approx-
imates APA style. It requires the newapa package.

Example using newapa
[Lincoll, 1977] in a collection, th e article [Oaho, Ullman & Yan nakakis, 1983] in
a proceed in gs, t he article [Aamp ort, 1986], th e book [Knut h, 1981], th e b ooklet
References
[Aamport, 1986] Aamp ort, L. A. (1986). T he gnats an d gnus document prep a-
ration syst em. G -Ani mal’s Journal, 41 (7) , 73+. This is a full ARTICL E
entry.
[Knu th, 1981] K nuth , D. E. (1981). S eminumerical Algorithms (Secon d ed.).,

volu me 2 of The Art of C omputer Program ming. Read ing, M assachuset ts:
Ad dison-Wesley. This is a full B OOK entry.
[Knvt h, 1988] Knvth , J. C. (1988) . T he p rogramming of comp uter art . Vern ier
Art C enter, St an ford, California. This is a full BO OKLET en try.
[Lincoll, 1977] L in coll, D. D. (1977) . Semigroups of recurren ces. In D. J. L ip coll,

D . H. L aw rie, & A. H. Sameh (Eds.), High Speed Computer an d Algorithm
O rg an ization (T hird ed.)., nu mber 23 in Fast Compu ters p art 3, (p p. 179—
183). New York: Acad emic Press. Th is is a full INCO LLECTIO N entry.
[Oaho, Ullman & Yan nakakis, 1983] Oaho, A. V., Ullman , J. D., & Yannakakis,
M . (1983). On notions of in formation tran sfer in VLS I circuits. In Oz, W. V.
& Yann akakis, M. (Ed s.), Proc . Fifteen th An nual ACM S ym posium on the
Theory of Com putin g, nu mb er 17 in All ACM Conferen ces, (pp. 133—139).,
Bos ton . Th e OX Association for Compu ting Mach in ery, Acad emic Press. Th is
is a full INPRO CEDING S entry.
[Phony-Baloney, 1988] Phony-Baloney, F. P. (1988). Fighting Fire with Fi re :

Festoonin g Frenc h Phrases. P hD dissertation, Fan stord University, Depart-
1
oxford-en.bst
Format of citation (Full reference at first citation; abbreviated thereafter)
Required files oxford package
Directory TCITeX/BibTeX/bst/oxford
The style is one of several styles based on the harvard family of BibTEX bibliography styles. The first time a
reference is cited, the style produces a full reference in the text at the point of the citation. Subsequent citations for
that reference are abbreviated. The in-text citation ibid is used when the current citation is the same as the last. The
style oxford-en.bst is for entries in English. It requires the oxford package. The sample below was created
using a modification of the xampl.bib database.

Example using oxford-en
cle (Daniel D. Lincoll, ’Semigroups of Recurrences’, in David J. Lipcoll, D. H.
Lawrie & A. H. Sameh eds., High Speed Computer and Algorithm Organization,
no. 23 in Fast Computers, 3rd edn., part 3, pp. 179—183, This is a full IN-
COLLECTION entry (New York: Academic Press, 1977)) in a collection, the
article(Alfred V. Oaho, Jeffrey D. Ullman & Mihalis Yannakakis, ’On Notions of
Information Transfer in VLSI Circuits’, in Wizard V. Oz & Mihalis Yannakakis
eds., Proc. Fifteenth Annual ACM Symposium on the Theory of Computing,
no. 17 in All ACM Conferences, pp. 133—139, This is a full INPROCEDINGS
entry, The OX Association for Computing Machinery (Boston: Academic Press,
1983)) in a proceedings, the article (L[eslie] A. Aamport, ’The Gnats and Gnus
Document Preparation System’, G-Animal’s Journal , vol. 41, no. 7, 73+ (1986),
This is a full ARTICLE entry), the book (Donald E. Knuth, Fundamental Al-
gorithms, vol. 1 of The Art of Computer Programming, section 1.2, pp. 10—119,
2nd edn., This is a full INBOOK entry (Reading, Massachusetts: Addison-
Wesley, 1973)), the booklet (Jill C. Knvth, ’The Programming of Computer
Art’, Vernier Art Center, This is a full BOOKLET entry (Stanford, Califor-
nia, 1988)), and to the thesis (F. Phidias Phony-Baloney, Fighting Fire with
Fire: Festooning French Phrases, PhD dissertation, Fanstord University, This
is a full PHDTHESIS entry (Department of French, 1988)). Combined citations
like (Lincoll, Aamport) may have special appearance. The bibliography section
References
Aamport, L[eslie] A., ’The Gnats and Gnus Document Preparation System’,
G-Animal’s Journal, vol. 41, no. 7, 73+ (1986), This is a full ARTICLE
entry.
Knuth, Donald E., Fundamental Algorithms, vol. 1 of The Art of Computer
Programming, section 1.2, pp. 10—119, 2nd edn., This is a full INBOOK
entry (Reading, Massachusetts: Addison-Wesley, 1973).
Knvth, Jill C., ’The Programming of Computer Art’, Vernier Art Center, This
is a full BOOKLET entry (Stanford, California, 1988).
Lincoll, Daniel D., ’Semigroups of Recurrences’, in Lipcoll, David J., Lawrie,
D. H. & Sameh, A. H. eds., High Speed Computer and Algorithm Organiza-
tion, no. 23 in Fast Computers, 3rd edn., part 3, pp. 179—183, This is a full
INCOLLECTION entry (New York: Academic Press, 1977).
1
oxford-en.bst 517
Oaho, Alfred V., Ullman, Jeffrey D. & Yannakakis, Mihalis, ’On Notions of In-
formation Transfer in VLSI Circuits’, in Oz, Wizard V. & Yannakakis, Mi-
halis eds., Proc. Fifteenth Annual ACM Symposium on the Theory of Com-
puting, no. 17 in All ACM Conferences, pp. 133—139, This is a full INPRO-
CEDINGS entry, The OX Association for Computing Machinery (Boston:
Academic Press, 1983).
Phony-Baloney, F. Phidias, Fighting Fire with Fire: Festooning French Phrases,
PhD dissertation, Fanstord University, This is a full PHDTHESIS entry
(Department of French, 1988).
2
oxford-in.bst
reference is cited, the style produces a full reference in the text at the point of the citation. Subsequent citations for
that reference are abbreviated. The in-text citation ibid is used when the current citation is the same as the last. The
style oxford-in.bst is for entries in English. It requires the oxford package. The sample below was created
using a modification of the xampl.bib database.

Example using oxford-in
cle (Daniel D. Lincoll, ’Semigroups of Recurrences’, in David J. Lipcoll, D. H.
Lawrie & A. H. Sameh eds., High Speed Computer and Algorithm Organization,
no. 23 in Fast Computers, 3rd edn., part 3, pp. 179—183, This is a full IN-
COLLECTION entry (New York: Academic Press, 1977)) in a collection, the
article(Alfred V. Oaho, Jeffrey D. Ullman & Mihalis Yannakakis, ’On Notions of
Information Transfer in VLSI Circuits’, in Wizard V. Oz & Mihalis Yannakakis
eds., Proc. Fifteenth Annual ACM Symposium on the Theory of Computing,
no. 17 in All ACM Conferences, pp. 133—139, This is a full INPROCEDINGS
entry, The OX Association for Computing Machinery (Boston: Academic Press,
1983)) in a proceedings, the article (L[eslie] A. Aamport, ’The Gnats and Gnus
Document Preparation System’, G-Animal’s Journal , vol. 41, no. 7, 73+ (1986),
This is a full ARTICLE entry), the book (Donald E. Knuth, Fundamental Al-
gorithms, vol. 1 of The Art of Computer Programming, section 1.2, pp. 10—119,
2nd edn., This is a full INBOOK entry (Reading, Massachusetts: Addison-
Wesley, 1973)), the booklet (Jill C. Knvth, ’The Programming of Computer
Art’, Vernier Art Center, This is a full BOOKLET entry (Stanford, Califor-
nia, 1988)), and to the thesis (F. Phidias Phony-Baloney, Fighting Fire with
Fire: Festooning French Phrases, PhD dissertation, Fanstord University, This
is a full PHDTHESIS entry (Department of French, 1988)). Combined citations
like (Lincoll, Aamport) may have special appearance. The bibliography section
References
Aamport, L[eslie] A., ’The Gnats and Gnus Document Preparation System’,
G-Animal’s Journal, vol. 41, no. 7, 73+ (1986), This is a full ARTICLE
entry.
Knuth, Donald E., Fundamental Algorithms, vol. 1 of The Art of Computer
Programming, section 1.2, pp. 10—119, 2nd edn., This is a full INBOOK
entry (Reading, Massachusetts: Addison-Wesley, 1973).
Knvth, Jill C., ’The Programming of Computer Art’, Vernier Art Center, This
Lincoll, Daniel D., ’Semigroups of Recurrences’, in Lipcoll, David J., Lawrie,
D. H. & Sameh, A. H. eds., High Speed Computer and Algorithm Organiza-
tion, no. 23 in Fast Computers, 3rd edn., part 3, pp. 179—183, This is a full
1
oxford-in.bst 519
Oaho, Alfred V., Ullman, Jeffrey D. & Yannakakis, Mihalis, ’On Notions of In-
formation Transfer in VLSI Circuits’, in Oz, Wizard V. & Yannakakis, Mi-
halis eds., Proc. Fifteenth Annual ACM Symposium on the Theory of Com-
puting, no. 17 in All ACM Conferences, pp. 133—139, This is a full INPRO-
2
oxford-se.bst
reference is cited, the style produces a full reference in the text at the point of the citation. Subsequent citations
for that reference are abbreviated. The in-text citation ibid is used when the current citation is the same as the last.
The style oxford-se.bst is for entries in Swedish, with English words such as editor translated to Swedish by
the bibliography style. It requires the oxford package. The sample below was created using a modification of the
xampl.bib database.

Example using oxford-se
cle (Daniel D. Lincoll, ”Semigroups of Recurrences”, i David J. Lipcoll, D. H.
Lawrie & A. H. Sameh red., High Speed Computer and Algorithm Organization,
nr. 23 i Fast Computers, tredje uppl., part 3, ss. 179—183, This is a full INCOL-
LECTION entry (New York: Academic Press, 1977)) in a collection, the article
(Alfred V. Oaho, Jeffrey D. Ullman & Mihalis Yannakakis, ”On Notions of Infor-
mation Transfer in VLSI Circuits”, i Wizard V. Oz & Mihalis Yannakakis red.,
Proc. Fifteenth Annual ACM Symposium on the Theory of Computing, nr. 17 i
All ACM Conferences, ss. 133—139, This is a full INPROCEDINGS entry, The
OX Association for Computing Machinery (Boston: Academic Press, 1983)) in a
proceedings, the article (L[eslie] A. Aamport, ”The Gnats and Gnus Document
Preparation System”, G-Animal’s Journal , vol. 41, nr. 7, 73+ (1986), This is a
full ARTICLE entry), the book (Donald E. Knuth, Seminumerical Algorithms,
vol. 2 av The Art of Computer Programming, andra uppl., This is a full BOOK
entry (Reading, Massachusetts: Addison-Wesley, 1981)), the booklet (Jill C.
Knvth, ”The Programming of Computer Art”, Vernier Art Center, This is a full
BOOKLET entry (Stanford, California, 1988)), and to the thesis (F. Phidias
Phony-Baloney, Fighting Fire with Fire: Festooning French Phrases, PhD dis-
sertation, Fanstord University, This is a full PHDTHESIS entry (Department
of French, 1988)). Combined citations like (Lincoll, Aamport) may have special
References
Aamport, L[eslie] A., ”The Gnats and Gnus Document Preparation System”,
G-Animal’s Journal , vol. 41, nr. 7, 73+ (1986), This is a full ARTICLE
entry.
Knuth, Donald E., Seminumerical Algorithms, vol. 2 av The Art of Computer
Programming, andra uppl., This is a full BOOK entry (Reading, Mas-
sachusetts: Addison-Wesley, 1981).
Knvth, Jill C., ”The Programming of Computer Art”, Vernier Art Center, This
Lincoll, Daniel D., ”Semigroups of Recurrences”, i Lipcoll, David J., Lawrie,
D. H. & Sameh, A. H. red., High Speed Computer and Algorithm Organiza-
tion, nr. 23 i Fast Computers, tredje uppl., part 3, ss. 179—183, This is a full
1
oxford-se.bst 521
Oaho, Alfred V., Ullman, Jeffrey D. & Yannakakis, Mihalis, ”On Notions of
Information Transfer in VLSI Circuits”, i Oz, Wizard V. & Yannakakis, Mi-
halis red., Proc. Fifteenth Annual ACM Symposium on the Theory of Com-
puting, nr. 17 i All ACM Conferences, ss. 133—139, This is a full INPRO-
2
pccp.bst

This is a BibTEX bibliography style for Physical Chemistry Chemical Physics. The style omits the title of entries
classified as ‘article’, ‘book’, ‘inbook’, and ‘incollection’ and omits information coded as ‘note’ in all entries except
those classified as ‘unpublished’.

Example using p ccp
References
[1] D. D. Lincoll in High Speed Compute r and Algorithm Organization, ed. D. J.
Lip coll, D. H. Lawrie, and A. H. Sameh, number 23 in Fast C omput ers;
Academic Press, New York, t hird ed., 1977; part 3, p p. 179—183.
[2] A. V. Oaho, J. D. Ullman, an d M. Yann akakis In ed. W. V. O z and M. Yan-
nakakis, Proc. Fifteenth Ann ual AC M S ymposiu m on the Theory of Com-
puting, number 17 in All AC M Conferen ces, p p. 133—139, Boston, 1983. Th e
OX Association for Compu ting Mach in ery, Academic Press.
[3] L. A. Aamport, July , 1986, 41( 7), 73+.

ary , 1988.
PhD dissertat ion, Fanstord University, Ju ne-August , 1988.
1
phaip.bst 523
phaip.bst

This BibTEX bibliography style supports the requirements of the American Institute of Physics journals.

Example using phaip
References
[1] D. D. Lincoll, Semigrou ps of recu rrences, in High S peed Compute r and
Algorithm Organ ization, edited by D. J. Lipcoll, D. H. Law rie, and A. H.
Sameh, number 23 in Fast Compu ters, part 3, pages 179—183, Academic
Press, New York, t hird ed ition, 1977, Th is is a fu ll INCO LLEC T IO N entry.
[2] A. V. Oaho, J. D. Ullman, an d M. Yann akakis, On notion s of information
transfer in VLS I circuits, in Proc . Fifteen th Ann ual ACM Symposium on the
Theory of Com putin g, ed it ed by W. V. O z and M. Yannakakis, number 17
in All ACM C onferen ces, p ages 133—139, Bost on , 1983, The OX Association
for Comp uting Mach inery, Academic Press, T his is a full INPROCEDINGS
entry.
[3] L. A. Aamp ort, G-Animal’s Journ al 41, 73+ (1986), T his is a full ARTICL E
entry.
[4] D. E. Knuth, S em inu me rical Algorithms, volume 2 of The Art of Com-

puter Prog ramm in g, Ad dison-Wesley, Readin g, Massachusetts, second ed i-
tion, 1981, This is a full B OOK entry.
[5] J. C. Knvth, T he p rogramming of comput er art, Vernier Art Center, Stan-
ford, C alifornia, 1988, T his is a full BO OKL ET entry.
[6] F. P. Phony-Baloney, Fig hting Fire with Fire : Festooning Frenc h Phrase s,
PhD dissert ation, Fan stord University, Department of French, 1988, Th is is
a full PHDTHESIS entry.
1
phapalik.bst

The style supports bibliographies in the style of the American Psychological Association for various physics
journals. It requires the apalike package.

Example using phapalik
[Lincoll, 1977] in a collection, the article [Oaho et al., 1983] in a proceedings,
the article [Aamport, 1986], the book [Knuth, 1981], the booklet [Knvth, 1988],
and to the thesis [Phony-Baloney, 1988]. Combined citations like [Lincoll, 1977,
Aamport, 1986] may have special appearance. The bibliography section for
References
[Aamport, 1986] Aamport, L. A. (1986). The gnats and gnus document prepa-
ration system. G-Animal’s Journal, 41(7):73+. This is a full ARTICLE entry.
[Knuth, 1981] Knuth, D. E. (1981). Seminumerical Algorithms, volume 2 of The
Art of Computer Programming. Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts,
second edition. This is a full BOOK entry.
[Knvth, 1988] Knvth, J. C. (1988). The programming of computer art. Vernier
Art Center, Stanford, California. This is a full BOOKLET entry.
[Lincoll, 1977] Lincoll, D. D. (1977). Semigroups of recurrences. In Lipcoll,
D. J., Lawrie, D. H., and Sameh, A. H., editors, High Speed Computer and
183. Academic Press, New York, third edition. This is a full INCOLLECTION
entry.
[Oaho et al., 1983] Oaho, A. V., Ullman, J. D., and Yannakakis, M. (1983).
On notions of information transfer in VLSI circuits. In Oz, W. V. and Yan-
nakakis, M., editors, Proc. Fifteenth Annual ACM Symposium on the Theory
of Computing, number 17 in All ACM Conferences, pages 133—139, Boston.
[Phony-Baloney, 1988] Phony-Baloney, F. P. (1988). Fighting Fire with Fire:
Festooning French Phrases. PhD dissertation, Fanstord University, Depart-
ment of French. This is a full PHDTHESIS entry.
1
phcpc.bst 525
phcpc.bst

The style supports bibliographies for the Computer Physics Communications. It is similar to the style used in
American Institute of Physics journals.

Example using phcp c
References
[1] Lincoll, D. D., Semigroups of r ecu rrences, in High Speed Computer and
Algorithm Organization, edited by L ip coll, D. J., Lawrie, D. H., and Sameh,
A. H., number 23 in Fast Comp uters, part 3, p ages 179—183, Acad em ic Press,
New York, third edition, 1977, This is a full INCO LLECT IO N entry.
[2] Oaho, A. V., Ullman, J. D ., and Yannakakis, M., On n ot ions of information
Theory of Com pu ting, edited by O z, W. V. and Yannakakis, M ., nu mb er 17
in All ACM C onferen ces, p ages 133—139, Bost on , 1983, The OX Association
entry.
[3] Aamport, L. A., G-Animal’s Journal 41 (1986) 73+, T his is a full ARTICL E
entry.
[4] Knu th, D. E., Se min umerical Algorithms, volu me 2 of The Art of Com-
[5] Knvt h, J. C., The program min g of comput er art, Vernier Art Center,
St an ford, C alifornia, 1988, T his is a fu ll BOO KLET entry.
[6] Phony-Baloney, F. P., Fighting Fire with Fire: Festoonin g Fren ch Phrase s,
1
phiaea.bst

The style supports bibliographies for physics conferences. In the reference list, authors’ names are printed in
capital letters.

Example using phiaea
References
[1] LINC OLL , D. D., Semigrou ps of recu rrences, in High S peed Com pu ter and
Algorithm Organization, edited by L IPCOLL, D. J. et al., number 23 in
Fast Compu ters, p art 3, pages 179—183, Academic Press, New York, third
edition , 1977, T his is a full INCO LLEC TIO N entry.
[2] OAHO, A. V. et al., On n otions of in formation t ransfer in VLS I circu its,
in Proc. Fifteen th An nual ACM Sym posium on the Theory of Computin g,
edited by OZ, W . V. et al., nu mber 17 in All ACM C onferences, pages 133—
139, Bost on , 1983, The OX Association for Computing Machinery, Academic
Press, This is a full INPRO CED ING S ent ry.
[3] AAMPORT, L. A., G-Animal’s Jou rnal 41 (1986) 73+, Th is is a full

ARTICLE entry.
[4] KNUT H, D . E., S eminumerical Algorithms, volume 2 of T he Art of Com-

[5] KNVT H, J. C., The programmin g of compu ter art, Vernier Art Center,
[6] PHONY-BALO NEY, F. P., Fighting Fire with Fire: Festoonin g Fren ch
Phrases, PhD d issertation , Fanstord University, Dep artment of Fren ch, 1988,
This is a full PHDT HESIS entry.
1
phjcp.bst 527
phjcp.bst

The style is for the Journal of Computational Physics.

Example using phjcp
References
[1] D. D. Lin co ll, Semigroups of Recu rren ces , in High Speed Computer and
Algorithm Organ ization, ed it ed by D. J. Lip coll, D. H . Lawrie , and
A. H. Sameh , numb er 23 in Fas t C omp uters, part 3, pp. 179—183, Academic
[2] A. V. Oaho, J. D. Ullman, and M. Yannak akis, O n Notions of In forma-
tion Tran sfer in VLSI Circuits, in Proc. Fifteenth An nual ACM S ymposium
on the Theory of C omputing, ed ited by W. V . O z an d M. Yan nakakis,
numb er 17 in All ACM Conferen ces, p p. 133—139, B oston , 1983, The OX
Association for C omp uting Machinery, Academic Press, T his is a fu ll IN-
PRO CED ING S ent ry.
[3] L. A . A ampo rt, G-Animal’s Journ al 41, 73+ (1986), T his is a fu ll ARTI-
CLE entry.
[4] D. E. K nuth, Sem in umerical Algorithm s, volume 2 of The Art of Com-

[5] J. C. Knvth, The Programming of Compu ter Art, Ver nier Art Center,
[6] F. P. Ph ony-B alone y, Fig hting Fire with Fire: Festooning Fren ch
1
phnf.bst

The style is for Nuclear Fusion. In the reference list, the style prints authors’ names in capital letters. The style
restricts the number of authors that can be listed for multiauthor publications.

Example using phnf
References
[1] LINC OLL , D. D., S emigroup s of recurren ces, in LIPCO LL, D. J., LAWRIE,
D. H., and S AM EH, A. H., editors, High Speed Computer and Algorithm
Organization , nu mb er 23 in Fast Compu ters, part 3, pp. 179—183, Academic
[2] OAHO, A. V., ULL MAN, J. D., an d YANNAKAK IS , M., O n n otions of in-
formation transfer in VL SI circuits, in OZ, W . V. and YANNAK AKIS, M.,
editors, Proc. Fifteen th Annu al ACM S ymposium on the Theory of Com put-
in g, numb er 17 in All ACM Con ferences, p p. 133—139, Bost on, 1983, Th e
OX Association for C omp uting Machinery, Academic Press, Th is is a full
ARTICLE entry.

1
phnflet.bst 529
phnflet.bst

The style is for Nuclear Fusion Letters. In the reference list, the style prints authors’ names in capital letters.

Example using phnflet
References
[1] LINC OLL , D. D., S emigroup s of recurren ces, in LIPCO LL, D. J., LAWRIE,
D. H., and S AM EH, A. H., editors, High Speed Computer and Algorithm
Organization , nu mb er 23 in Fast Compu ters, part 3, pp. 179—183, Academic
[2] OAHO, A. V., ULL MAN, J. D., an d YANNAKAK IS , M., O n n otions of in-
formation transfer in VL SI circuits, in OZ, W . V. and YANNAK AKIS, M.,
editors, Proc. Fifteen th Annu al ACM S ymposium on the Theory of Com put-
in g, numb er 17 in All ACM Con ferences, p p. 133—139, Bost on, 1983, Th e
ARTICLE entry.

1
phone.bst

Organization of reference list Alphabetical
Format of citation [Name]
business.bib
family.bib
test.bib
page 507.
below. The styles support a \nodir{key} command, which creates a phone book with no citations in the text.
The phone.bst style produces a reference list containing the name, phone, and fax fields that correspond to
the cited keys. It prints an abbreviated name at the citation point unless the \nodir{key} command is used.

4. Choose OK.
The first sample shown below illustrates a phone list created with \dir{key} commands in the text. The second
sample illustrates a phone list created using a \nodir{*} command without any preceding text. The samples were
created using the sample databases business.bib and family.bib.
phone.bst 531

Example using phone
been created with TEX commands that replace standard citations. The phone
book below contains numbers for Knudsoft (RS.2 Computer Room) and
also for Microknud Corp.. It also contains listings for Knudson D. D.,
Bunny B. and Pluto and for Knudson D. E.. The phone book for these
Knudsoft (RS.2 Computer Room) phn: +01-(0)2-434.23.23
Knudson D. D., Bunny B. and Pluto p phn: +01-(0)2-765.43.21 gsm:

+01-(0)5-555.55.55 r phn: +01-(0)2-876.54.32
Knudson D. E. p phn: +01-(0)2-234.56.78
Microknud Corp. phn: +01-(0)2-465.83.99 fax: 005.79.00

Example using phone
.
Geuzaine C. w phn: +32-(0)4-366.37.10 fax: +32-(0)4-366.29.10
Knudsoft (RS.2 Computer Room) phn: +01-(0)2-434.23.23
Knudson D. D., Bunny B. and Pluto p phn: +01-(0)2-765.43.21 gsm:

+01-(0)5-555.55.55 r phn: +01-(0)2-876.54.32
Knudson D. E. p phn: +01-(0)2-234.56.78
Microknud Corp. phn: +01-(0)2-465.83.99 fax: 005.79.00

phpf.bst

The style is for Physics of Fluids. It is similar to the style used in American Institute of Physics journals, but
lists any number of authors for multiauthor publications.

Example using phpf
References
[1] D. D . Lincoll, in Hig h S peed Computer and Algorithm O rgan ization, ed ited
by D . J. Lip coll, D. H. Lawrie, an d A. H. S ameh , Acad emic Press, New York,
th ird ed it ion, 1977, numb er 23 in Fast C omput ers, p art 3, pp. 179—183, Th is
is a f ull INCOLLECTION entry.
[2] A. V. Oaho, J. D. Ullman, an d M. Yann akakis, On notion s of information
Theory of Com putin g, ed it ed by W. V. O z and M. Yannakakis, number 17
in All ACM Conferences, pp. 133—139, Boston, 1983, Th e OX Association
entry.
[3] L. A. Aamp ort, G-Animal’s Journ al 41, 73+ (1986), T his is a full ARTICL E
entry.

[5] J. C. Knvth, T he p rogramming of comput er art, Vernier Art Center, Stan-
ford, C alifornia, 1988, T his is a full BO OKL ET entry.
1
phppcf.bst 533
phppcf.bst
Format of reference list label [AUTHOR, date]

[AUTHOR and AUTHOR, date]
[AUTHOR et al., date]
Format of citation [AUTHOR, date]
[AUTHOR and AUTHOR, date]
[AUTHOR et al., date]
The style is a physics version of apalike.bst (see page 447), which formats bibliography entries alphabet-
ically by author, last name first. Citations in the text can include single and multiple author-date references. In
citations and in the reference list, the style prints authors’ names in small capitals.

Example using phpp cf
cle [Lincoll, 1977] in a collection , th e article [Oaho et al., 1983] in a pro-
ceedings, t he article [Aa mport, 1986], the book [Kn uth, 1981], the b ooklet
[Knv th , 1988], and to th e thesis [Phony-Balo ney, 1988]. Combined cit a-
t ions like [Lincoll, 1977, Aamport, 1986] may have special ap pearance. Th e
References
[A ampo rt, 1986] Aamport, L. A . (1986) . G-Animal’s Journal 41, 73+. Th is
is a full ARTICLE ent ry.
[Knu th , 1981] Knuth, D. E. (1981). Seminum erical Algorithm s, volume 2
of T he Art of Computer Programm ing . Add ison-Wesley, Read in g, Mas-
sachusett s, second edition . T his is a fu ll B OOK entry.
[Knv th , 1988] Knvth, J. C . (1988). Th e Programming of C omputer Art.

Vern ier Art Center, Stanford, California. T his is a fu ll BOOK LET entry.
[Linco ll, 1977] Linco ll, D. D. (1977) . S em igroups of Recurren ces. In Lip -
coll, D. J., L aw rie, D. H., and Same h, A . H ., editors, High Speed Com-
puter and Algorithm Organization, numb er 23 in Fast C omp uters, part 3,
p ages 179—183. Academic Press, New York, th ird edition. T his is a full IN-
COL LEC TION entry.
[Oaho et al., 1983] Oa ho, A . V., U llma n, J. D., and Yan nakakis, M.
( 1983). On Notions of Information Tran sfer in VLSI Circuits. In Oz, W . V.
and Yanna kak is, M. , editors, Proc . Fifteen th Annual ACM S ymposium on
the T heory of C omputing, number 17 in All AC M C onferen ces, pages 133—
139, Boston. The OX Association for Compu ting Machinery, Academic Press.
This is a fu ll INPROCEDING S entry.
[Phon y-Balon ey, 1988] Phony-Baloney, F. P. (1988). Fighting Fire with

Fire: Festoonin g Fren ch Phrases. PhD dissert ation, Fanstor d University,
D ep ar tment of Fren ch. This is a full PHDTHESIS entry.
1
phreport.bst

The style supports bibliographies for internal reports.

Example using phreport
References
[1] D. D. L in coll, Semigroups of Recurren ces, in High Speed Computer and
Algorithm Organ ization, edited by D. J. Lipcoll, D. H. Law rie, and A. H.
Sameh, number 23 in Fast Compu ters, part 3, pages 179—183, Academic
Press, New York, th ird ed it ion, Sept. 1977, T his is a full INCO LLEC TIO N
entry.
[2] A. V. O ah o, J. D. Ullman, and M. Yann akakis, On Notions of Information

Tran sfer in VLS I C ircuits, in Proc. Fifteenth An nual ACM Symposium on
the T heory of C omputing, edited by W. V. Oz and M. Yannakakis, num-
b er 17 in All ACM C onferences, p ages 133—139, Boston , Mar. 1983, Th e
[3] L. A. Aamp ort , T he G nats and Gnu s Docu ment Prep aration S ystem,
G-Animal’s Jour nal 41(7), 73+ (July 1986), Th is is a full ART ICLE entry.

tion, 10 Jan. 1981, Th is is a full BO OK entry.
[5] J. C. K nvth, Th e Programming of C omp uter Art, Vern ier Art Center,
St an ford, C alifornia, Feb. 1988, T his is a fu ll BOO KLET entr y.
1988, T his is a full PHDTHESIS entry.
1
phrmp.bst 535
phrmp.bst
Format of reference list label [Author date]

[Author et al. date]
Format of citation [Author date]
[Author date, Author date]
[Author et al. date]
The style is for Reviews of Modern Physics. Reference list entries are indented far enough to accommodate the
widest entry label.

Example using phrmp
[Lincoll 1977] in a collection, th e article [Oaho et al. 1983] in a p roceedings,
t he article [Aamport 1986], t he b ook [K nuth 1981], the b ooklet [K nvth 1988],
and to the thesis [P hony-Balon ey 1988]. Comb in ed citation s like [Lincoll 1977,
Aamp ort 1986] may have sp ecial app earan ce. The bibliography section for th ese
References
[Aamport 1986] L. A. Aam port, G-Animal’s Journal, 41:73+, Ju ly 1986,
Th is is a full ART ICLE entry.
[Knu th 1981] D. E. Knu th, Semin umerical Algorithms, volum e 2 of
The Art of Computer Programming, Addison-Wesley,
Reading, Massachusetts , second ed it ion, 10 Jan . 1981,
Th is is a full BOO K entry.
[Knvt h 1988] J. C. Knvth , T he programmin g of computer art, Vern ier
Art Center, S tanford, Californ ia, Feb . 1988, Th is is a
full BO OKL ET ent ry.
[Lincoll 1977] D. D. Lin coll, S em igroups of recurrences, in High S peed

Computer and Algorithm Organization, ed ited by D. J.
Lipcoll, D. H. Lawrie, and A. H. Sameh, numb er 23 in
Fast Compu ters, part 3, pp. 179—183, Academic Press,
New York, third ed ition, S ept. 1977, T his is a fu ll IN-
COL LECTION entry.
[Oaho et al. 1983] A. V. O ah o, J. D. Ullman , an d M. Yannakakis, On
notions of in formation transfer in VLSI circu it s, in
Proc. Fifteen th An nual ACM Symposium on the The-
ory of Com puting, edited by W. V. Oz an d M. Yan-
nakak is, numb er 17 in All ACM Conferen ces, p p. 133—
139, Boston, Mar. 1983, Th e OX Association for C om-
putin g Machinery, Academic Press, This is a full IN-
PROC EDINGS entry.
[Phony-Baloney 1988] F. P. Phony-Baloney, Fig hting Fire with Fire: Festoon -

ing Fren ch Phrases, PhD dissert ation, Fan stord Un iver-
sity, Department of Fren ch , Jun e-Aug. 1988, T his is a
full PHDTHESIS ent ry.
1
plabbrv.bst

Directory TCITeX/BibTeX/bst/plbib
plbib.bib
The style is for text in Polish. Like abbrv.bst, this style creates compact entries by abbreviating first names,
month names, and journal names. It sorts entries alphabetically and labels them with numbers.

Example using plabbrv
References
[1] L. A. Aamport. The gnats and gnus document preparation system.
G-Animal’s Journal, 41(7):73+, Lip. 1986. This is a full ARTICLE entry.
[2] D. E. Knuth. Seminumerical Algorithms, wolumen 2 serii The Art of Com-
puter Programming. Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, wydanie sec-
ond, 10 Sty. 1981. This is a full BOOK entry.
[3] J. C. Knvth. The programming of computer art. Vernier Art Center, Stan-
ford, California, Luty 1988. This is a full BOOKLET entry.
[4] D. D. Lincoll. Semigroups of recurrences. D. J. Lipcoll, D. H. Lawrie,
A. H. Sameh, redaktorzy, High Speed Computer and Algorithm Organization,
number 23 serii Fast Computers, part 3, strony 179—183. Academic Press,
New York, wydanie third, Wrze. 1977. This is a full INCOLLECTION entry.
[5] A. V. Oaho, J. D. Ullman, M. Yannakakis. On notions of information transfer
in VLSI circuits. W. V. Oz, M. Yannakakis, redaktorzy, Proc. Fifteenth
Annual ACM Symposium on the Theory of Computing, number 17 serii All
ACM Conferences, strony 133—139, Boston, Mar. 1983. The OX Association
entry.
PhD dissertation, Fanstord University, Department of French, Czerw.-Sier.
1
plain.bst 537
plain.bst

One of the BibTEX standard bibliography styles, plain.bst creates bibliographies formatted more or less as
suggested by van Leunen in A Handbook for Scholars. The style sorts entries alphabetically and labels them with
numbers. The style is the basis for many other bibliography styles.

Example using plain
References
TIO N entry.
1
plainhtml.bst
Format of reference list label [authoryear]

bibrefs.bib
The style doesn’t produce an automatic heading for the list of references. The style is based on plain.bst, which
sorts references alphabetically. The styles plainhtmldate.bst and plainhtmldater.bst are related.
according to the instructions that follow.


c. Choose OK.

d. Choose OK.
The sample .htm file shown on the next page was created according to these instructions and using a modification
of the sample bibliography bibrefs.bib.
plainhtml.bst 539
plainhtmldate.bst

Organization of reference list Chronological order
bibrefs.bib
The style doesn’t produce an automatic heading for the list of references. The style is based on plainhtml.bst,
but lists references in chronological order. It is related to plainhtmldater.bst.
as described for plainhtml.bst on page 538. The sample .htm file below was created according to those
instructions and using a modification of the sample bibliography bibrefs.bib.
plainhtmldater.bst 541
plainhtmldater.bst

Organization of reference list Reverse chronological order
bibrefs.bib
The style doesn’t produce an automatic heading for the list of references. The style is based on plainhtml.bst,
but lists references in reverse chronological order. It is related to plainhtmldate.bst.
as described for plainhtml.bst on page 538. The sample .htm file below was created according to those
instructions and using a modification of the sample bibliography bibrefs.bib.
plalpha.bst

The style is for text in Polish. Like alpha.bst, this style uses source labels such as Knu66, formed from the
author’s name and the year of publication.

Example using plalpha
[Lin77] in a collection, the article [OUY83] in a proceedings, the article [Aam86],
the book [Knu81], the booklet [Knv88], and to the thesis [PB88]. Combined
citations like [Lin77, Aam86] may have special appearance. The bibliography
References
[Aam86] L[eslie] A. Aamport. The gnats and gnus document preparation sys-
tem. G-Animal’s Journal, 41(7):73+, Lipiec 1986. This is a full AR-
TICLE entry.
[Knu81] Donald E. Knuth. Seminumerical Algorithms, wolumen 2 serii The Art
of Computer Programming. Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts,
wydanie second, 10 Stycze/n 1981. This is a full BOOK entry.
[Knv88] Jill C. Knvth. The programming of computer art. Vernier Art Center,
Stanford, California, Luty 1988. This is a full BOOKLET entry.
[Lin77] Daniel D. Lincoll. Semigroups of recurrences. David J. Lipcoll, D. H.
Lawrie, A. H. Sameh, redaktorzy, High Speed Computer and Algorithm
Organization, number 23 serii Fast Computers, part 3, strony 179—183.
Academic Press, New York, wydanie third, Wrzesie/n 1977. This is a
full INCOLLECTION entry.
[OUY83] Alfred V. Oaho, Jeffrey D. Ullman, Mihalis Yannakakis. On notions
of information transfer in VLSI circuits. Wizard V. Oz, Mihalis Yan-
nakakis, redaktorzy, Proc. Fifteenth Annual ACM Symposium on the
Theory of Computing, number 17 serii All ACM Conferences, strony
133—139, Boston, Marzec 1983. The OX Association for Computing
[PB88] F. Phidias Phony-Baloney. Fighting Fire with Fire: Festooning
French Phrases. PhD dissertation, Fanstord University, Department
of French, Czerwiec-Sierpie/n 1988. This is a full PHDTHESIS entry.
1
plplain.bst 543
plplain.bst

plbib.bib
The style is for text in Polish. Like plain.bst, this style sorts entries alphabetically and labels them with
numbers.

Example using plplain
References
G-Animal’s Journal, 41(7):73+, Lipiec 1986. This is a full ARTICLE entry.
[2] Donald E. Knuth. Seminumerical Algorithms, wolumen 2 serii The Art of
Computer Programming. Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, wydanie
second, 10 Stycze/n 1981. This is a full BOOK entry.
[4] Daniel D. Lincoll. Semigroups of recurrences. David J. Lipcoll, D. H. Lawrie,
New York, wydanie third, Wrzesie/n 1977. This is a full INCOLLECTION
entry.
[5] Alfred V. Oaho, Jeffrey D. Ullman, Mihalis Yannakakis. On notions of infor-
mation transfer in VLSI circuits. Wizard V. Oz, Mihalis Yannakakis, redak-
torzy, Proc. Fifteenth Annual ACM Symposium on the Theory of Computing,
number 17 serii All ACM Conferences, strony 133—139, Boston, Marzec 1983.
Czerwiec-Sierpie/n 1988. This is a full PHDTHESIS entry.
1
plunsrt.bst

plbib.bib
The bibliography style is for text in Polish. Like unsrt.bst, this style lists bibliography entries in the order
of their first citation and labels them with numbers.

Example using plunsrt
References
[1] Daniel D. Lincoll. Semigroups of recurrences. David J. Lipcoll, D. H. Lawrie,
New York, wydanie third, Wrzesie/n 1977. This is a full INCOLLECTION
entry.
[2] Alfred V. Oaho, Jeffrey D. Ullman, Mihalis Yannakakis. On notions of infor-
mation transfer in VLSI circuits. Wizard V. Oz, Mihalis Yannakakis, redak-
torzy, Proc. Fifteenth Annual ACM Symposium on the Theory of Computing,
number 17 serii All ACM Conferences, strony 133—139, Boston, Marzec 1983.
G-Animal’s Journal, 41(7):73+, Lipiec 1986. This is a full ARTICLE entry.
[4] Donald E. Knuth. Seminumerical Algorithms, wolumen 2 serii The Art of
Computer Programming. Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, wydanie
second, 10 Stycze/n 1981. This is a full BOOK entry.
Czerwiec-Sierpie/n 1988. This is a full PHDTHESIS entry.
1
revcompchem.bst 545
revcompchem.bst

This bibliography style is for Reviews in Computational Chemistry. The style omits the title of entries classified
as ‘article’, ‘book’, ‘inbook’, and ‘incollection’ and omits information coded as ‘note’ in all entries except those
classified as ‘unpublished’.

Example using revcompchem
References
[1] D. D . Lincoll in Hig h S peed Computer and Algorithm Organiz ation, D. J.
Lip coll, D. H. Lawrie, and A. H. Sameh, Eds., nu mb er 23 in Fast C omput ers;
Academic Press, New York, t hird ed., 1977; part 3, p ages 179—183.
[2] A. V. Oaho, J. D. Ullman, and M. Yannakakis in W. V. Oz and M. Yan-
nakakis, Eds., Proc. Fi ftee nth Ann ual ACM Symposium on the Theory of
Com puting, nu mb er 17 in All ACM C on ferences, p ages 133—139, B oston,
1983. Th e OX Association for Computing Mach in ery, Acad emic Press.
[3] L. A. Aamport, G-Animal’s Jou rn al, July ( 1986). The gn at s and gnus doc-
ument prep aration system.
ary , ( 1988).

PhD dissertat ion, Fanstord University, Ju ne-August , (1988).
1
siam.bst
One of the BibTEX standard bibliography styles, siam.bst (24-Jan-88 version) uses the abbreviations of the
Mathematical Reviews. The style prints authors’ names in the reference list in small capitals. It prints titles in italics,
with article titles in lowercase and book titles in mixed upper- and lower-case letters. Commas separate all fields
except before notes.

Example using siam
References
[1] L. A . Aampo rt, The gnats and gn us docum en t preparation system,
G-Animal’s Jou rnal, 41 (1986), pp. 73+ . T his is a fu ll ART IC LE entry.
[2] D. E. Knuth, Seminu me rical Algorithms, vol. 2 of Th e Art of C omput er

Programm in g, Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, second ed., 10 Jan.
[3] J. C . Kn vth, T he programmin g of computer art. Vernier Art Center, Stan-

[4] D. D. Lin co ll, Semigroups of rec urren ces, in High Sp eed Compu ter and
Algorithm Organization, D. J. Lipcoll, D. H. Lawrie, and A. H. Sameh, eds.,
no. 23 in Fast Comp uters, Academic Press, New York, third ed., Sep t. 1977,
[5] A. V. Oaho, J. D. Ullman, and M. Yann akak is, On n ot ions of in -

form ation tran sfer in VL SI c ircuits, in Proc. Fifteenth Annual ACM Sym-
p osiu m on th e Th eory of Compu tin g, W. V. Oz and M. Yan nakakis , eds.,
no. 17 in All AC M Con ferences, Boston, Mar. 1983, Th e OX Association for
Comp uting Mach in ery, Academic Press, p p. 133—139. This is a full INPRO-
CEDINGS entry.
[6] F. P. Pho ny-Ba lo ney , Fi ghting Fire with Fire: Festooning Fren ch
Phrases, PhD dissert ation, Fan stord University, D epartment of French,
Jun e-Aug. 1988. T his is a full PHDT HESIS entry.
1
siamproc.bst 547
siamproc.bst

Directory TCITeX/BibTeX/bst/siam
The style is a BibTEX bibliography styles for SIAM journals. It uses the abbreviations of the Mathematical
Reviews. The style prints titles in italics, with article titles in lowercase and book titles in mixed upper- and lower-
case letters.

Example using siampro c
References
[1] L. A. Aamp ort, T he gnats and g nus docum ent preparation system,
G-Animal’s Jou rnal, 41 (1986), pp. 73+ . T his is a fu ll ART IC LE entry.
[2] D. E. Knut h, S eminumerical Algorithms, vol. 2 of The Art of C omput er

Programm in g, Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, second ed., 10 Jan.
[3] J. C. K nvth, The programming of com pute r art. Vernier Art C enter, Stan-
[4] D. D . Lincoll, S em igroups of recurren ces, in High Sp eed Compu ter an d Al-
gorith m Organ ization, D. J. Lipcoll, D. H. Lawrie, and A. H. Sameh, eds.,
no. 23 in Fast Comp uters, Academic Press, New York, third ed., Sep t. 1977,
[5] A. V. Oaho, J. D. Ullman, an d M. Yann akakis, On notions of in form ation

tran sfer i n VLSI circui ts, in Proc. Fifteenth Annual ACM Symposium on
th e Th eory of Compu tin g, W . V. Oz and M. Yan nakakis , eds., no. 17 in All
ACM C on ferences, B oston , Mar. 1983, T he OX Association for Compu ting
Mach inery, Acad emic Press, pp . 133—139. Th is is a full INPROCEDINGS
entry.
[6] F. P. Ph ony-Baloney, Fighting Fire with Fire: Festoonin g French Phrase s,

1
smfalpha.bst

Directory TCITeX/BibTeX/bst/smflatex
The style was designed for the Société Mathématique de France. It uses source labels such as Knu66, formed
from the author’s name and the year of publication. The style sorts entries alphabetically and prints authors’ names
in small capitals in the reference list.

Example using smfalpha
References
[Aam86] L. A. Aamport — “The gnats and gnus document preparation sys-
tem”, G-Animal’s Journal 41 (1986), no. 7, p. 73+, This is a full
ARTICLE entry.
[Knu81] D. E. Knuth — Seminumerical algorithms, second éd., The Art
of Computer Programming, vol. 2, Addison-Wesley, Reading, Mas-
sachusetts, 10 1981, This is a full BOOK entry.
[Knv88] J. C. Knvth — The programming of computer art, Vernier Art Center,
Stanford, California, 1988, This is a full BOOKLET entry.
[Lin77] D. D. Lincoll — “Semigroups of recurrences”, High Speed Computer
and Algorithm Organization (D. J. Lipcoll, D. H. Lawrie et A. H.
Sameh, éds.), Fast Computers, no. 23, Academic Press, New York,
third éd., 1977, This is a full INCOLLECTION entry, p. 179—183.
[OUY83] A. V. Oaho, J. D. Ullman et M. Yannakakis — “On notions of
information transfer in VLSI circuits”, Proc. Fifteenth Annual ACM
Symposium on the Theory of Computing (Boston) (W. V. Oz et
M. Yannakakis, éds.), All ACM Conferences, no. 17, The OX As-
sociation for Computing Machinery, Academic Press, 1983, This is a
full INPROCEDINGS entry, p. 133—139.
[PB88] F. P. Phony-Baloney — “Fighting fire with fire: Festooning
French phrases”, PhD dissertation, Fanstord University, Department
of French, - 1988, This is a full PHDTHESIS entry.
1
smfplain.bst 549
smfplain.bst

Directory TCITeX/BibTeX/bst/smflatex
The style was designed for the Société Mathématique de France. The style prints authors’ names in small capitals
in the reference list.

Example using smfplain
References
[1] L. A. Aamport — “The gnats and gnus document preparation system”,
G-Animal’s Journal 41 (1986), no. 7, p. 73+, This is a full ARTICLE entry.
[2] D. E. Knuth — Seminumerical algorithms, second éd., The Art of Computer
Programming, vol. 2, Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 10 1981,
[3] J. C. Knvth — The programming of computer art, Vernier Art Center,
Stanford, California, 1988, This is a full BOOKLET entry.
[4] D. D. Lincoll — “Semigroups of recurrences”, High Speed Computer and
Algorithm Organization (D. J. Lipcoll, D. H. Lawrie et A. H. Sameh, éds.),
Fast Computers, no. 23, Academic Press, New York, third éd., 1977, This is
a full INCOLLECTION entry, p. 179—183.
[5] A. V. Oaho, J. D. Ullman et M. Yannakakis — “On notions of informa-
tion transfer in VLSI circuits”, Proc. Fifteenth Annual ACM Symposium on
the Theory of Computing (Boston) (W. V. Oz et M. Yannakakis, éds.), All
ACM Conferences, no. 17, The OX Association for Computing Machinery,
Academic Press, 1983, This is a full INPROCEDINGS entry, p. 133—139.
[6] F. P. Phony-Baloney — “Fighting fire with fire: Festooning French
phrases”, PhD dissertation, Fanstord University, Department of French, -
1988, This is a full PHDTHESIS entry.
1
sweabbrv.bst
Directory TCITeX/BibTeX/bst/swebib
The style is the Swedish version of BibTEX standard bibliography style abbrv.bst, which creates compact
entries by abbreviating first names, month names, and journal names.

Example using sweabbrv
References
[1] L. A. Aamport. The gnats and gnus document preparation system.
G-Animal’s Journal, 41(7):73+, juli 1986. This is a full ARTICLE entry.
[2] D. E. Knuth. Seminumerical Algorithms, band 2 av The Art of Com-
puter Programming. Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, second ut-
gva, 10 jan. 1981. This is a full BOOK entry.
[3] J. C. Knvth. The programming of computer art. Vernier Art Center, Stan-
ford, California, febr. 1988. This is a full BOOKLET entry.
[4] D. D. Lincoll. Semigroups of recurrences. I D. J. Lipcoll, D. H. Lawrie och
A. H. Sameh, redaktrer, High Speed Computer and Algorithm Organization,
nummer 23 i Fast Computers, part 3, ss 179—183. Academic Press, New
York, third utgva, sept. 1977. This is a full INCOLLECTION entry.
[5] A. V. Oaho, J. D. Ullman och M. Yannakakis. On notions of information
transfer in VLSI circuits. I W. V. Oz och M. Yannakakis, redaktrer, Proc.
Fifteenth Annual ACM Symposium on the Theory of Computing, nummer 17
i All ACM Conferences, ss 133—139, Boston, mars 1983. The OX Association
entry.
PhD dissertation, Fanstord University, Department of French, juni-aug.
1
swealpha.bst 551
swealpha.bst

The style is the Swedish version of BibTEX standard bibliography style alpha.bst, which uses source labels
such as Knu66, formed from the author’s name and the year of publication, and sorts entries alphabetically.

Example using swealpha
References
[Aam86] L[eslie] A. Aamport. The gnats and gnus document preparation sys-
tem. G-Animal’s Journal, 41(7):73+, juli 1986. This is a full ARTI-
CLE entry.
[Knu81] Donald E. Knuth. Seminumerical Algorithms, band 2 av The Art of
Computer Programming. Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts,
second utgva, 10 januari 1981. This is a full BOOK entry.
[Knv88] Jill C. Knvth. The programming of computer art. Vernier Art Center,
Stanford, California, februari 1988. This is a full BOOKLET entry.
[Lin77] Daniel D. Lincoll. Semigroups of recurrences. I David J. Lipcoll,
D. H. Lawrie och A. H. Sameh, redaktrer, High Speed Computer and
Algorithm Organization, nummer 23 i Fast Computers, part 3, ss 179—
183. Academic Press, New York, third utgva, september 1977. This
is a full INCOLLECTION entry.
[OUY83] Alfred V. Oaho, Jeffrey D. Ullman och Mihalis Yannakakis. On no-
tions of information transfer in VLSI circuits. I Wizard V. Oz och
Mihalis Yannakakis, redaktrer, Proc. Fifteenth Annual ACM Sympo-
sium on the Theory of Computing, nummer 17 i All ACM Conferences,
ss 133—139, Boston, mars 1983. The OX Association for Computing
[PB88] F. Phidias Phony-Baloney. Fighting Fire with Fire: Festooning
French Phrases. PhD dissertation, Fanstord University, Department
of French, juni-augusti 1988. This is a full PHDTHESIS entry.
1
sweplain.bst

The style is the Swedish version of BibTEX standard bibliography style plain.bst, which sorts entries alpha-
betically and labels them with numbers.

Example using sweplain
References
G-Animal’s Journal, 41(7):73+, juli 1986. This is a full ARTICLE entry.
[2] Donald E. Knuth. Seminumerical Algorithms, band 2 av The Art of Com-
puter Programming. Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, second utgva,
10 januari 1981. This is a full BOOK entry.
Stanford, California, februari 1988. This is a full BOOKLET entry.
[4] Daniel D. Lincoll. Semigroups of recurrences. I David J. Lipcoll, D. H.
Lawrie och A. H. Sameh, redaktrer, High Speed Computer and Algorithm
Organization, nummer 23 i Fast Computers, part 3, ss 179—183. Academic
Press, New York, third utgva, september 1977. This is a full INCOLLEC-
TION entry.
[5] Alfred V. Oaho, Jeffrey D. Ullman och Mihalis Yannakakis. On notions of
information transfer in VLSI circuits. I Wizard V. Oz och Mihalis Yan-
nakakis, redaktrer, Proc. Fifteenth Annual ACM Symposium on the Theory
of Computing, nummer 17 i All ACM Conferences, ss 133—139, Boston, mars
1983. The OX Association for Computing Machinery, Academic Press. This
is a full INPROCEDINGS entry.
Phrases. PhD dissertation, Fanstord University, Department of French, juni-
augusti 1988. This is a full PHDTHESIS entry.
1
thesnumb.bst 553
thesnumb.bst
Directory TCITeX/BibTeX/bst/afthesis
The style is included on CTAN as part of the afthesis package. It supports the standard Air Force Institute
of Technology bibliography style as shown in the AFIT Style Guide for Theses and Dissertations.

Example using thesnumb
References
[1] Aamport, L[eslie] A. “The Gnat s and Gnu s Document Pr ep aration System,”
G-Anim al’s Journal , 41 (7):73+ ( Ju ly 1986). This is a full ART ICL E entry.
[2] Knu th, Donald E. Semin umerical Algorithms (Second Edition ), 2 . Th e

Art of Compu ter Programming. Readin g, Massachu setts: Addison-Wesley,
10 Janu ary 1981. T his is a full BO OK entry.
[3] Knvt h, Jill C. “The Programmin g of C omp uter Art,”. Vernier Art Center,
[4] Lincoll, Dan iel D . “Semigroups of Recurrences.” High Speed Com puter and
Algorithm Organ ization , (T hird Edition ) Nu mb er 23 in Fast C omput ers,
edited by David J. Lip coll, et al., p art 3, 179—183, New York: Academic
Press, Sept emb er 1977. Th is is a full INCOLLECTION entry.
[5] Oaho, Alfred V., et al. “On Not ions of Inf ormation Tran sfer in VLSI Cir-
cuits.” Proc. Fifteenth An nu al ACM Symposium on the Theory of Com-
puting , nu mb er 17 in All ACM Conferen ces, edited by W izard V. Oz and
Mihalis Yann akakis. 133—139. B ost on : Academic Pr ess, March 1983. Th is
is a f ull INPROC EDINGS entry.
[6] Phony-Baloney, F. Phidias. Fig hting Fire with Fire: Festoonin g Fren ch
Phrases . Ph D Dissertat ion, Fan stord University, Department of French,
1
unsrt.bst
One of the BibTEX standard bibliography styles, unsrt.bst lists bibliography entries in the order of their first
citation. Otherwise, the style is the same as plain.bst, which labels entries with numbers.

Example using unsrt
References
TIO N entry.

1
Index
Article (SE), 280 Texts, 80
aaai-named.bst, 420 ASAE Transactions, 32 Monthly Notices of the
aabbrv.bst, 422 ASME Meeting, 34 Royal Astronomical So-
aalpha.bst, 423 Astronomy & Astro- ciety, 82
abbrv.bst, 424 physics, 36 REVTEX 4, 84
achemso.bst, 425 Balkema, 37 Sans serif Article (SE), 284
achemsol.bst, 426 DECUS Proceedings, 39 Science Magazine, 86
acm.bst, 427 Elbert Walker’s Article, 41 SIAM Journal, 88
additional information Elsevier CRC One-column, SIAM Proceedings in Ap-
technical support, xxiii 43 plied Mathematics, 90
address-html.bst, 431 Elsevier CRC Two-column, SIAM-ACM Preprint, 92
address.bst, 428 45 Similar to AIP, 94
adfathesis.bst, 433 Elsevier IFAC Proceedings, Similar to AIP - Modified,
agsm.bst, 434 47 96
alpha.bst, 435 Elsevier Preprint, 49 Similar to Bulletin of the
alphahtml.bst, 436 Geophysics Journal, 51 American Mathematical
alphahtmldate.bst, 438 Harold O. Fried’s Article, Society, 98
alphahtmldater.bst, 439 53 Similar to MAA Monthly
amsalpha.bst, 440 IEEE Transactions for Con- before 1992, 100
amsplain.bst, 441 ferences, 55 Similar to North-Holland
annotate.bst, 442 IEEE Transactions for Jour- Journals, 102
annotation.bst, 443 nals, 56 Similar to Sequential Anal-
anotit.bst, 444 IEICE Transactions, 57 ysis Journal, 104
apa.bst, 445 International Journal of Simple MIT Press Article,
apacite.bst, 446 Forecasting - Draft, 58 12
apalike.bst, 447 Japanese Journal of Ap- Society for Computer Sim-
apalike2.bst, 448 plied Physics, 60 ulation, 106
aplain.bst, 449 JEEP - A General Purpose SPIE Proceedings, 108
apsr.bst, 450 Vehicle, 62 SPIE Proceedings (new),
Article shells JEEP - Double-spaced Ex- 112
AASTeX Journal, 14 cept for Quotes, 64 SPIE Proceedings - Modi-
about, 11 Journal of International fied, 110
Academic Press Journals, Economics North Hol- Springer-Verlag Heidelberg
16 land, 66 Journal, 114
Academic Press Journals - Journal of Low Tempera- Squeezed States and Uncer-
Modified, 18 ture Physics, 68 tainty Relations, 116
American Chemical Soci- Journal of Progress in Sur- Standard LATEX Article, 268
ety, 20 face Science, 70 Standard LATEX Article
American Statistical Asso- Kluwer Journal, 72 (Blank), 268
ciation Proceedings, 22 LATEX-like Article (SE), 282 Standard LATEX Article
AMS Journal Article, 24 Linear Algebra and its Ap- (Chicago), 118
AMS Proceedings Article, plications, 74 Standard LATEX Article
26 Mathematical Reviews (Harvard), 120
An Astronomy- Template, 76 Standard LATEX Article
Astrophysics Journal, 28 Mathematics Magazine Ar- (hyperref), 122
Annals of Statistics-Draft, ticle, 78 Statistics and Decisions,
30 Modified Article for Short 123
556 Index
TU Wien, 125 Springer-Verlag Confer- Email for technical support,

TU Wien Article (new), 127 ence, 158 xxiii
World Scientific Proceed- Springer-Verlag Heidelberg email-html.bst, 473
ings 10x7, 133 LLNCS, 162 email.bst, 471
World Scientific Proceed- Springer-Verlag Heidelberg Exam shells
ings 11x8.5, 135 Physics Monograph, 166 about, 187
World Scientific Proceed- Springer-Verlag Multiau- Assignment, 188
ings 9.75x6.50, 131 thored, 170 Bolton Institute, 189
World Scientific Proceed- Springer-Verlag Single au- Class Announcement, 190
ings 9x6, 129 thored, 174 Class Handout, 191
Article.cls Standard LATEX Book, 270 Exam 1 (SE), 306
option defaults, 3 Stewart Calculus Book Exam Builder (SE), 307
page layout, 4 (SE), 298 Exam Builder w title page
asaetr.bst, 451 SW Book 1, 200 (SE), 308
Assignment shells SW Book 2, 204 SW Exam 1 - 8.5 x 11 Page,
Assignment, 188 SW Book 3, 208 192
Assorted-Basic Assign- SW Book 4, 212 SW Exam 1 - 8.5 x 14 Page,
ment, 198 SW Book 5, 216 193
astron.bst, 452 SW Book 6, 220 SW Exam 2, 194
aunsnot.bst, 453 User’s Guide (SE), 300 SW Exam 3, 195
aunsrt.bst, 454 World Scientific Book
Author Packages for AMS 9.00x6.00, 178 Fax shells
shells World Scientific Book Fax 1 (SE), 310
Contemporary Mathemat- 9.75x6.50, 182 SW Fax 1, 224
ics (Proceedings), 138 Book.cls SW Fax 2, 225
Generic Journal, 140 option defaults, 3 SW Fax 3, 226
Mathematics of Computa- page layout, 5 finplain.bst, 475
tion, 142
authordate1.bst, 455 gerabbrv.bst, 476
cbe.bst, 463
authordate2.bst, 456 geralpha.bst, 477
cea.bst, 464
authordate3.bst, 457 gerapali.bst, 478
cell.bst, 466
authordate4.bst, 458 gerplain.bst, 479
chicagoa.bst, 468
gerunsrt.bst, 480
.clo files, 1
bbs.bst, 459
.cls files, 1
bibtoref.bst, 460 Help
birthday.bst, 461 Conference proceedings shells
additional information, xxiv
Book shells Standard LATEX Conference
discussion forum, xxiv
about, 145 Proceedings, 274
online help, xxii
AMS Book or Monograph, .cst files, 1
resources, xxii
146 customer support, xxiii technical support, xxiii
Book - CalcLabs Book humanbio.bst, 481
(SE), 286 Document class defaults, 2 humannat.bst, 482
Book 1 (SE), 302 Document class options, 2
ETP (Electronic Technical Document shells ieee.bst, 483
Publishing), 150 about, 1 ieeepes.bst, 484
Fred Szabo’s Book (SE), choosing, 7 ieeetr.bst, 485
288 Standard LATEX shells, 8 imac.bst, 486
Jonathan Lewin’s Book dtk.bst, 469 inlinebib.bst, 487
(SE), 292 DVI file, xx is-abbrv.bst, 489
LATEX-like book (SE), 294 is-alpha.bst, 490
Linda Gilbert Book, 154 econometrica.bst, 470 is-plain.bst, 491
Index 557
is-unsrt.bst, 492 nar.bst, 512 oxford-en.bst, 516

nature.bst, 513 oxford-in.bst, 518
jas99.bst, 493 nederlands.bst, 514 oxford-se.bst, 520
jbact.bst, 494 New documents, 2
jcc.bst, 495 newapa.bst, 515 Packages
jkthesis.bst, 496 about, 7
jmb.bst, 497 Online help, see Help adding and removing, 7
jmr.bst, 499 Other shells Page layout
jpc.bst, 500 about, 197 article.cls, 4
jphysicsB.bst, 501 Assorted-Basic Assign- book.cls, 5
jtb.bst, 502 ment, 198 report.cls, 2, 6
jthcarsu.bst, 503 Assorted-Math Scratchpad, pccp.bst, 522
jurabib.bst, 504 199 PDFLATEX, xx
jureco.bst, 505 Informal Letter, 227 phaip.bst, 523
JEEP Report, 243 phapalik.bst, 524
kluwer.bst, 506 Similar to TEXbook Exam- phcpc.bst, 525
ple, 228 phiaea.bst, 526
LATEX, xx SW Book 1, 200 phjcp.bst, 527
LATEX document classes SW Book 2, 204 phnf.bst, 528
about, 2 SW Book 3, 208 phnflet.bst, 529
sebase, 2 SW Book 4, 212 phone.bst, 530
Letter shells SW Book 5, 216 phpf.bst, 532
Informal Letter, 227 SW Book 6, 220 phppcf.bst, 533
Letter 1 (SE), 315 SW Fax 1, 224 phreport.bst, 534
Letter 2 (SE), 316 SW Fax 2, 225 phrmp.bst, 535
Letter 3 (SE), 317 SW Fax 3, 226 plabbrv.bst, 536
Letter 4 (SE), 318 SW Letter 1, 229 plain.bst, 537
Similar to TEXbook Exam- SW Letter 2, 230 plainhtml.bst, 538
ple, 228 SW Letter 3, 231 plainhtmldate.bst, 540
SW Letter 1, 229 SW Letter 4, 232 plainhtmldater.bst, 541
SW Letter 2, 230 SW Letter 5, 233 plalpha.bst, 542
SW Letter 3, 231 SW Letter 6, 234 Play shell (SE), 320
SW Letter 4, 232 SW Memo 1, 235 plplain.bst, 543
SW Letter 5, 233 SW Memo 2, 236 plunsrt.bst, 544
SW Letter 6, 234 SW Memo 3, 237 Press release shells
letter.bst, 507 SW Memo 4, 238 Press Release (SE), 322
SW Memo 5, 239 SW Press Release 1, 241
MacKichan, contacting, xxiii SW Memo Special for In- SW Press Release 2, 242
mbplain.bst, 509 ventions, 240 program resources, xxiii
Memo shells SW Press Release 1, 241
Memo 1 (SE), 319 SW Press Release 2, 242 Report shells
SW Memo 1, 235 SW Report 1, 246 JEEP Report, 243
SW Memo 2, 236 SW Report 2, 248 Report 1 (SE), 325
SW Memo 3, 237 SW Report 3, 250 Standard LATEX Report, 276
SW Memo 4, 238 SW Report 4, 252 SW Report 1, 246
SW Memo 5, 239 SW Report 5, 254 SW Report 2, 248
SW Memo Special for In- SW Resume 1, 262 SW Report 3, 250
ventions, 240 SW Resume 2, 263 SW Report 4, 252
mslapa.bst, 510 SW Slides, 264 SW Report 5, 254
TU Wien Report, 256 TU Wien Report, 256
named.bst, 511 TU Wien Report (new), 259 TU Wien Report (new), 259
558 Index
Report.cls Harvard Thesis (SE), 340 about, 355

option defaults, 3 Harvard Thesis Modified by Air Force Institute of Tech-
page layout, 2, 6 Philippe Laval (SE), 344 nology, 356
Resume shells Jonathan Lewin’s Book Georgia Institute of Tech-
Resume 1 (SE), 328 (SE), 292 nology, 360
SW Resume 1, 262 LATEX-like Article (SE), 282 Harvard Thesis (SE), 340
SW Resume 2, 263 LATEX-like book (SE), 294 Harvard Thesis Modified by
revcompchem.bst, 545 Letter 1 (SE), 315 Philippe Laval (SE), 344
Letter 2 (SE), 316 LSU Thesis (SE), 348
Sebase.cls, 2
Letter 3 (SE), 317 Massachusetts Institute of
siam.bst, 546
Letter 4 (SE), 318 Technology, 364
siamproc.bst, 547
LSUThesis (SE), 348 Northwestern University,
Slides shells
Memo 1 (SE), 319 366
Slides - Jim’s Landscape
Play (SE), 320 Similar to New Mexico
(SE), 329
Press Release (SE), 322 State University, 370
Slides A (SE), 330
QCA Workbook (SE), 323 Similar to North Dakota
Slides B (SE), 332
Report 1 (SE), 325 State University, 374
Slides C (SE), 334
Resume 1 (SE), 328 Similar to University of Mi-
Slides D (SE), 336
Sans serif Article (SE), 284 ami, 378
Slides QCA (SE), 338
SW Slides, 264 Simple WYSIWYG (SE), Similar to University of
smfalpha.bst, 548 313 Utah, 382
smfplain.bst, 549 Slides - Jim’s Landscape Thesis 1 (SE), 352
Standard LATEX shells (SE), 329 University of Arizona, 386
about, 8, 267 Slides A (SE), 330 University of California,
Standard LATEX Article, 268 Slides B (SE), 332 390
Standard LATEX Article Slides C (SE), 334 University of Georgia, 394
(Blank), 268 Slides D (SE), 336 University of New Mexico,
Standard LATEX Book, 270 Slides QCA (SE), 338 398
Standard LATEX Conference Stewart Calculus Book University of New South
Proceedings, 274 (SE), 298 Wales, 402
Standard LATEX Report, 276 SW Readme (SE), 311 University of Pittsburgh,
.sty files, 1 Thesis 1 (SE), 352 406
Style Editor shells, 279 User’s Guide (SE), 300 University of Washington,
Article, 280 sweabbrv.bst, 550 409
Book - CalcLabs Book swealpha.bst, 551
thesnumb.bst, 553
(SE), 286 sweplain.bst, 552
toll-free number, xxiii
Book 1 (SE), 302 Syllabus shells
Troubleshooting, xxii
Exam 1 (SE), 306 about, 187
TrueTEX, xx
Exam Builder (SE), 307 Syllabus, 196
Exam Builder w title page
(SE), 308 technical support, xxiii Uniform Resource Locator
Fax 1 (SE), 310 telephone MacKichan, xxiii (URL), xxiii
Fred Szabo’s Book (SE), TEX, xx unsrt.bst, 554
288 Thesis shells URL, xxiii

ShellGallery 55

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

ShellGallery 55

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

A Gallery of Document Shells

This document was produced with Scientific WorkPlace.

What’s New xix

About This Manual xix

Getting Help xxii

1 Using Document Shells 1

Understanding Document Shells 1

Choosing a Document Shell 7

Part I Gallery of Shell Documents 9

Academic Press Journals 16

Academic Press Journals - Modified 18

American Chemical Society 20

American Statistical Association Proceedings 22

AMS Journal Article 24

AMS Proceedings Article 26

Astronomy & Astrophysics 36

Elbert Walker’s Article 41

Elsevier CRC One-column 43

Elsevier CRC Two-column 45

Elsevier IFAC Proceedings 47

Harold O. Fried’s Article 53

IEEE Transactions for Conferences 55

IEEE Transactions for Journals 56

International Journal of Forecasting - Draft 58

Japanese Journal of Applied Physics 60

JEEP - A General Purpose Vehicle 62

JEEP - Double-spaced Except for Quotes 64

Journal of International Economics North-Holland 66

Journal of Low Temperature Physics 68

Journal of Progress in Surface Science 70

Linear Algebra and its Applications 74

Mathematical Reviews Template 76

Mathematics Magazine Article 78

Modified Article for Short Texts 80

Monthly Notices of the Royal Astronomical Society 82

SIAM Proceedings in Applied Mathematics 90

Similar to AIP - Modified 96

Similar to Bulletin of the American Mathematical Society 98

Similar to MAA Monthly before 1992 100

Similar to North-Holland Journals 102

Similar to Sequential Analysis Journal 104

Society for Computer Simulation 106

SPIE Proceedings 108

SPIE Proceedings - Modified 110

SPIE Proceedings (new) 112

Springer-Verlag Heidelberg Journal 114

Squeezed States and Uncertainty Relations 116

Standard LATEX Article (Chicago) 118

Standard LATEX Article (Harvard) 120

Standard LATEX Article (hyperref) 122

Statistics and Decisions 123

TU Wien Article (new) 127

World Scientific Proceedings 9.00x6.00 129

World Scientific Proceedings 9.75x6.50 (updated) 131

World Scientific Proceedings 10.00x7.00 133

World Scientific Proceedings 11.00x8.50 135

3 Author Packages for AMS Shells 137

Contemporary Mathematics (Proceedings) 138

Generic Journal 140

Mathematics of Computation 142

4 Book Shells 145

AMS Book or Monograph 146

ETP (Electronic Technical Publishing) 150